Electrical Sector Solutions
Volume 7:
Logic Control,
Operator Interface
and Connectivity
Solutions
Volume 1—Residential and Light Commercial
Volume 2—Commercial Distribution
Volume 3—Power Distribution and Control Assemblies
Volume 4—Circuit Protection
Volume 5—Motor Control and Protection
Volume 6—Solid-State Motor Control
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface
and Connectivity Solutions
Tab 1—Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V7-T1-1
Tab 2—Stacklights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V7-T2-1
Tab 3—Control Relays and Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V7-T3-1
Tab 4—PLC, I/O and Communications Products . . . . . . . .
V7-T4-1
Tab 5—Operator Interface Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V7-T5-1
Tab 6—Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V7-T6-1
Tab 7—Industrial Control Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V7-T7-1
Tab 8—Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks
and Fuse Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V7-T8-1
Tab 9—Connectivity Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V7-T9-1
Appendix 1—Eaton Terms & Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V7-A1-1
Appendix 2—Catalog Parent Number Index . . . . . . . . . . . .
V7-A2-1
Appendix 3—Alphabetical Product Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V7-A3-1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Copyright
Dimensions, Weights and Ratings
Dimensions, weights and ratings given in this catalog are approximate and should not
be used for construction purposes. Drawings containing exact dimensions are available
upon request. All listed product specifications and ratings are subject to change without
notice. Photographs are representative of production units.
Terms and Conditions
All prices and discounts are subject to change without notice. When price changes
occur, they are published in Eaton’s Price and Availability Digest (PAD). All orders
accepted by Eaton’s Electrical Sector are subject to the general terms and conditions
as set forth in Appendix 1—Eaton Terms & Conditions.
Technical and Descriptive Publications
This catalog contains brief technical data for proper selection of products. Further
information is available in the form of technical information publications and illustrated
brochures. If additional product information is required, contact your local Eaton
Products Distributor, call 1-800-525-2000 or visit our website at www.eaton.com.
Compliance with Nuclear Regulation 10 CFR 21
Eaton products are sold as commercial grade products not intended for application in
facilities or activities licensed by the United States Nuclear Regulatory Commission
for atomic purposes, under 10 CFR 21. Further certification will be required for use of
these products in a safety-related application in any nuclear facility licensed by the
U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission.
WARNING
The installation and use of Eaton products should be in accordance with the provisions
of the U.S. National Electrical Code® and/or other local codes or industry standards that
are pertinent to the particular end use. Installation or use not in accordance with these
codes and standards could be hazardous to personnel and/or equipment.
These catalog pages do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, nor to provide for
every possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance.
Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered
sufficiently for the purchaser’s purposes, the matter should be referred to the local Eaton Products
Distributor or Sales Office. The contents of this catalog shall not become part of or modify any prior
or existing agreement, commitment or relationship. The sales contract contains the entire
obligation of Eaton’s Electrical Sector. The warranty contained in the contract between the parties
is the sole warranty of Eaton. Any statements contained herein do not create new warranties or
modify the existing warranty.
Copyright ©2019 Eaton, All Rights Reserved.
Introduction
Eaton is a global leader in power distribution, power quality,
control and automation, and monitoring products.
At Eaton, we believe a reliable, efficient and safe power system is the foundation of every
successful enterprise. Through innovative technologies, cutting-edge products and our highly
skilled services team, we empower businesses around the world to achieve a powerful advantage.
In addition, Eaton is committed to creating and maintaining powerful customer relationships built
on a foundation of excellence. From the products we manufacture to our dedicated customer
service and support, we know what’s important to you.
Solutions
Eaton takes the complexity out of power systems management with a holistic and strategic
approach, leveraging our industry-leading technology, solutions and services. We focus on
the following three areas in all we do:
●
Reliability—maintain the
appropriate level of power
continuity without
disruption or unexpected
downtime
●
Efficiency—minimize
energy usage, operating
costs, equipment footprint
and environmental impact
●
Safety—identify and
mitigate electrical hazards
to protect what you value
most
Using the Eaton Catalog Library
As we grow, it becomes increasingly difficult to include all products in one or two comprehensive
catalogs. Knowing that each user has their specific needs, we have created a library of catalogs for our
products that when complete, will contain 15 volumes. Since the volumes will continuously be a work
in progress and updated, each volume will stand alone. Refer to our volume directory, MZ08100001E,
for a quick glance of where to look for the products you need. The 15 volumes include:
●
●
●
●
●
●
Volume 1—Residential
and Light Commercial
(CA08100002E)
Volume 2—Commercial
Distribution (CA08100003E)
Volume 3—Power
Distribution and Control
Assemblies (CA08100004E)
Volume 4—Circuit
Protection (CA08100005E)
Volume 5—Motor Control
and Protection
(CA08100006E)
Volume 6—Solid-State
Motor Control
(CA08100007E)
●
●
●
●
●
Volume 7—Logic Control,
Operator Interface and
Connectivity Solutions
(CA08100008E)
Volume 8—Sensing
Solutions (CA08100010E)
Volume 9—Original
Equipment Manufacturer
(CA08100011E)
Volume 10—Enclosed
Control (CA08100012E)
Volume 11—Vehicle and
Commercial Controls
(CA08100013E)
●
●
●
●
Volume 12—Aftermarket,
Renewal Parts and Life
Extension Solutions
(CA08100014E)
Volume 13—Counters,
Timers and Tachometers
(CA08100015E)—Available
in electronic format only
Volume 14—Fuses
(CA08100016E)—Available
in electronic format only
Volume 15—Solar Inverters
and Electrical Balance of
System (CA08100018E)
These volumes are not all-inclusive of every product, but they are meant to be an overview
of our product lines. For our full range of product solutions and additional product information,
consult Eaton.com/electrical and other catalogs and product guides in our literature library.
These references include:
●
The Consulting Application
Guide (CA08104001E)
●
The Eaton Power Quality
Product Guide (COR01FYA)
If you don’t have the volume that contains the product or information that you are looking for,
not to worry. You can access every volume of the catalog library at Eaton.com/electrical in the
Literature Library.
By installing our Automatic Tab Updater (ATU), you can be sure you always have the most recent
version of each volume and tab.
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018
www.eaton.com
i
Introduction
Icons
Green Leaf
Eaton Green Solutions are products, systems or solutions that represent Eaton
benchmarks for environmental performance. The green leaf symbol is our
promise that the solution has been reviewed and documented as offering
exceptional, industry-leading environmental benefits to customers, consumers
and our communities. Though all of Eaton’s products and solutions are
designed to meet or exceed applicable government standards related to
protecting the environment, our products with the Green Leaf designation
further provide “exceptional environmental benefit.”
Learn Online
When you see the Learn Online icon, go to Eaton.com/electrical and search for
the product or training page. There you will find 100-level training courses,
podcasts, webcasts or games and puzzles to learn more.
Drawings Online
When you see the Drawings Online icon, go to Eaton.com/electrical and find the
products page. There you will find a tab that includes helpful product drawings
and illustrations.
Contact Us
If you need additional help, you can find contact information
under the Customer Care heading of Eaton.com/electrical.
ii
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions
CA08100008E—January 2018
www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
1.1
10250T Pushbuttons
Toggle Switches—E10
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2
1.5
1.7
1.8
1.10
V7-T1-133
V7-T1-135
V7-T1-168
V7-T1-172
V7-T1-186
V7-T1-188
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-195
1
V7-T1-197
1
V7-T1-213
V7-T1-217
V7-T1-284
V7-T1-290
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-326
V7-T1-328
1
1
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.12
V7-T1-47
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.11
V7-T1-42
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9
V7-T1-26
Global Compact 30 mm Pilot Devices—C30 Flat with Pigtail
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RMQ Compact C22 Series
V7-T1-25
Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices—M30 Flat Operators
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6
V7-T1-10
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RMQ-Titan M22 Series
1
1
V7-T1-8
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4
V7-T1-4
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3
V7-T1-2
V7-T1-351
V7-T1-353
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-1
1.1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Toggle Switches—E10
Contents
Toggle Switches—E10
Description
1
Page
Toggle Switches—E10
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection
Toggle Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hesitation Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-3
V7-T1-3
V7-T1-4
V7-T1-5
V7-T1-5
V7-T1-5
V7-T1-6
V7-T1-6
V7-T1-7
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Product Description
Features
The E10 switches from
Eaton’s Electrical Sector are
intended for general purpose
light industrial use. Designed
for retrofit and OEM
applications.
General Purpose Toggles
1
●
●
●
1
●
1
●
1
●
●
1
1
1
1
Various circuit functions
include maintained and
momentary
Poles include from singlepole single-throw to fourpole double-throw
Spade, screw, and solder
terminations available
Numerous ratings
Short 11/32 in and tall
15/32 in bat lever available
Standard 15/32–32 thd.
Hardware furnished
assembled
Heavy-Duty Hesitation
Switches
●
●
One-hole panel mount
Three position switch
offers unique positive
center stop feature to
assure lever cannot be
thrown from one side
through the center OFF
position without stopping
●
Design feature is a major
acceptance for motor
reversing and speed
control applications
●
Prevents motor damage
resulting from high
current generation by
counter EMF of the
armature at the time of
reversing
●
Known as anti-plugging,
hesitation, positive stop
or positive off switch
Non-Illuminated AC Rated
Pushbuttons
●
●
●
●
●
One-hole panel mount
Medium-duty
Spade and screw
terminations available
Various bushing lengths
and button extensions
Numerous ampere ratings
with horsepower ratings
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-2
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Toggle Switches—E10
1.1
Standards and Certifications
●
●
1
UL Recognized
CSA—File No. LR40068
1
1
1
Catalog Number Selection
1
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1
Toggle Switches—E10 Series
Not to be used for ordering purposes
1
E10 T 1 06 A S =
E10T106AS
Series
Lever Length
T = 0.563 in (14.3 mm) lever
E = 0.688 in (17.5 mm) lever
Poles
1 = Single-pole
2 = Two-pole
3 = Three-pole
4 = Four-pole
Ratings—125V
06 = 6 Amperes
15 = 15 Amperes
20 = 20 Amperes
A
B
D
E
F
G
H
Function
= ON—None—OFF
= OFF—None—(ON)
= ON—OFF—ON
= ON—None—ON
= ON—OFF—(ON)
= (ON)—OFF—(ON)
= ON—None—(ON)
Termination
S = Screw
L = Solder lug
P = Spade
1
1
Complete Cat. No.
0.563 in (14.3 mm)
Single-pole
6 Amperes
ON—None—OFF
Screw terminal
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-3
1.1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Toggle Switches—E10
Product Selection
Toggle Switches
1
E10 Series—AC Rated—Minimum Order Quantity 10 Pieces
1
Nominal AC Ratings
Amperes
1
1
125V
Single-Pole
1
1
1
1
1
1
50V
UP
Position
CENTER
Position
DOWN
Position—
Keyway
Screw Terminal
Catalog Number
0.250 in (6.4 mm)
Spade Terminal
Catalog Number
Solder Lug
Catalog Number
1 P.S.T.
ON
None
OFF
hp
250V
Single-Pole
6
3
—
E10T106AS
E10T106AP
E10T106AL
15
10
3/4
E10T115AS
E10T115AP
E10T115AL
20
10
3/4
E10E120AS
E10E120AP
E10E120AL
—
6
3
—
E10T106DS
E10T106DP
15
10
3/4
E10T115DS
E10T115DP
E10T115DL
20
10
3/4
E10E120DS
—
—
Two-Pole
1 P.D.T.
—
1 P.D.T.
ON
ON
OFF
None
ON
6
3
—
E10T106ES
—
15
10
3/4
E10T115ES
E10T115EP
E10T115EL
20
10
3/4
E10E120ES
—
—
—
10
1/2
1
1
Function—Circuit with Lever In
Poles
and
Throw 1
ON
1 P.S.T.
OFF
None
(ON)
E10T115BS
E10T115BP
—
1 P.D.T.
ON
OFF
(ON)
E10T115FS
E10T115FP
—
1 P.D.T.
ON
None
(ON)
E10T115HS
E10T115HP
—
1 P.D.T.
(ON)
OFF
(ON)
E10T115GS
E10T115GP
—
2 P.S.T.
ON
None
OFF
Two-Pole
6
3
—
E10T206AS
E10T206AP
—
15
10
3/4
E10T215AS
E10T215AP
E10T215AL
1
20
10
3/4
E10E220AS
E10E220AP
E10E220AL
6
3
—
E10T206DS
E10T206DP
—
1
15
10
3/4
E10T215DS
E10T215DP
E10T215DL
20
10
3/4
6
3
—
15
10
3/4
E10T215ES
E10T215EP
E10T215EL
20
10
3/4
E10E220ES
—
—
15
10
1/2
1
1
1
1
1
1
Three-Pole
2. P.D.T.
2 P.D.T.
ON
ON
OFF
None
ON
ON
E10E220DS
E10E220DP
—
E10T206ES
—
—
2 P.S.T.
OFF
None
(ON)
E10T215BS
—
—
2 P.D.T.
ON
None
(ON)
E10T215HS
E10T215HP
—
2 P.D.T.
(ON)
OFF
(ON)
E10T215GS
E10T215GP
—
—
Three-Pole
15
10
3/4
1
3 P.S.T.
ON
None
OFF
E10E315AS
E10E315AP
3 P.D.T.
ON
OFF
ON
E10E315DS
E10E315DP
E10E315DL
3 P.D.T.
ON
None
ON
E10E315ES
E10E315EP
E10E315EL
E10E415AL
1
1
1
Four-Pole
Four-Pole
15
1
1
10
3/4
4 P.S.T.
ON
None
OFF
E10E415AS
—
4 P.D.T.
ON
OFF
ON
E10E415DS
—
E10E415DL
4 P.D.T.
ON
None
ON
E10E415ES
—
E10E415EL
1
1
Note
1 See Circuit Diagrams on Page V7-T1-6.
1
V7-T1-4
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Toggle Switches—E10
Hesitation Switches
Heavy-Duty Hesitation
Switch
1
E10 Series—Special Purpose—Minimum Order Quantity 10 Pieces
Nominal Ratings
1
Function—Circuit with Lever In…
Amperes
hp
28
Vdc
125
Vac
250
Vac
250
Vac
15
15
10
3/4
Operation
UP
Position
CENTER
Position
DOWN
Position—
Keyway
Poles
and
Throw 1
Screw Terminal
Catalog Number
Maintained
ON
OFF
ON
2 P.D.T.
E10E215SS
3 P.D.T.
E10E315SS
4 P.D.T.
E10E415SS
1
1
1
1
1
Pushbuttons
One-Hole Mounted
Medium-Duty, Mom.
Contact
1
E10 Series—Minimum Order Quantity 10 Pieces
Nominal Ratings
Amperes
hp
125 Vac
250 Vac
NO
NC
NO
NC
125–
250V
6
—
3
—
—
15
15
—
10
10
10
—
5
1/3
1/4 2
Poles
and
Throw 1
1 P.S.T.
1 P.S.T.
1 P.D.T.
Contacts
Bushing
Length
in (mm)
Dim. “A”
Button
Extension
in (mm)
Dim. “B”
Typical
Maximum
Operating
Force
Screw Terminal
Catalog Number
Spade Terminal
0.250 in (6.4 mm)
Catalog Number
NO
0.69 (17.5)
0.53 (13.5)
0.9 lbs
E10P106RS
E10P106RP
0.34 (8.6)
0.25 (6.4)
E10P106JS
—
NO
NO, NC
0.69 (17.5)
0.53 (13.5)
0.34 (8.6)
0.25 (6.4)
0.69 (17.5)
0.53 (13.5)
0.9 lbs
1.0 lbs
E10P115RS
E10P115RP
E10P115JS
—
E10P115LS
—
1
1
1
1
1
1
Accessories
1
Toggle Switches Accessories—Minimum Order Quantity 100 Pieces
E10TA104
Description
Material/Notes
Catalog Number
Hexagon locknut
Zinc-chromate treated steel
E10TA101
Knurled face nut
Zinc-chromate treated steel
E10TA102
Internal tooth lockwasher
Cadmium plated steel
E10TA103
Terminal screws
#6-32 x 3/16 in binding head
E10TA201
Spade terminal adapter—0.250 in (6.4 mm)
Assembles to screw terminals
E10TA202
ON-OFF indicating plate—vertical orientation
Burnished nickel finish steel
E10TA301
OFF-ON indicating plate—horizontal orientation
Burnished nickel finish steel
E10TA302
Flip-up guard for toggle switches
1
1
1
1
1
E10TA104
1
1
1
E10TA105
Fixed shroud for toggle switches
E10TA105
1
1
1
Notes
Interlock mechanism prevents operation of lever through the center position until pressure is momentarily relieved.
Designed for control and protection of reversing motors.
1
2
1
1
See Circuit Diagrams on Page V7-T1-6.
Rated 1/4 hp at 125V, 1/2 hp at 250V.
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-5
1.1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Toggle Switches—E10
1
Technical Data and Specifications
1
Toggle Switches
Description
Specification
1
AC ratings
6–20A, 125 Vac
3–10A, 250 Vac
Max. 3/4 hp at 250 Vac
DC ratings
6–20A, 28 Vdc
1
1
1
Electrical life
6,000 cycles make/break at switch ampere rating
Operation
Slow make/slow break mechanism with butt action for AC and low voltage DC applications
Maintained and momentary contacts
Poles/throws
1 through 4, single and double throw
1
Mounting
One hole with threaded 0.468 in-32 bushing and 0.068 x 0.035 in (1.7 x 0.9 mm) deep keyway
that serves as anti-rotational feature
1
Lever lengths
0.563 in (14.3 mm) or 0.688 in (17.5 mm), bright nickel plated
Terminals
Screw, 0.250 in (6.4 mm) spade and solder lug
1
1
1
Hesitation Switches
Description
Specification
Operation
Slow make/slow break mechanism with butt action for AC and low voltage DC applications; maintained contacts; ideal
for reversing motor applications; interlock mechanism prevents operation of lever through center position until manual
pressure is momentarily relieved
AC ratings
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
Max. 3/4 hp at 250 Vac
1
1
1
DC ratings
15A, 28 Vdc
Poles/throws
2, 3 and 4, double throw only
1
Mounting
Single-pole with threaded 0.468 in-32 bushing and 0.068 x 0.049 in (1.7 x 1.2 mm) deep keyway
Lever length
0.687 in (17.4 mm), stainless steel
Terminals
Screw
1
1
1
Pushbutton Actuators
Description
Specification
AC ratings
1
6–15A, 125 Vac (NO)
3–10A, 250 Vac (NO)
Max. 1/3 hp at 125/250 Vac
Operation
1
Slow make/slow break mechanism
Normally open contacts
Poles/throws
Single, single and double throw
Mounting
One hole with 0.468 in-32 threaded bushing and 0.068 x 0.035 in (1.7 x 0.9 mm) deep keyway
Two bushing heights: 11/16 in (17.5 mm) and 11/32 in (8.7 mm)
Button extensions
17/32 in (13.5 mm) and 1/4 in (6.4 mm), bright nickel plated
Terminals
Screw
1
1
1
1
1
Circuit Diagrams
1
SPST
1
SPDT
DPST
3PST
3PDT
4PST
4PDT
DPDT
1
1
1
V7-T1-6
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Toggle Switches—E10
Dimensions
1
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1
Toggle Switch Dimensions
Lever
Length
B
Screw Terminals
Operation
Bushing
Length
A
C
D
E
C1
D
E
C
D
E
1
Momentary
and maintained
0.47
(11.9)
0.56
(14.2)
1.00
(25.4)
1.17
(29.7)
0.63
(16.0)
1.13
(28.7)
1.13
(28.7)
0.63
(16.0)
1.00
(25.4)
1.13
(28.7)
0.63
(16.0)
2
Maintained
0.47
(11.9)
0.56
(14.2)
1.06
(26.9)
1.31
(33.3)
0.75
(19.1)
1.19
(30.2)
1.31
(33.3)
0.75
(19.1)
1.06
(26.9)
1.31
(33.3)
0.75
(19.1)
Momentary
0.47
(11.9)
0.56
(14.2)
1.25
(31.8)
1.31
(33.3)
0.75
(19.1)
1.31
(33.3)
1.31
(33.3)
0.75
(19.1)
1.25
(31.8)
1.31
(33.3)
0.75
(19.1)
1
3
Maintained
0.47
(11.9)
0.69
(17.5)
1.27
(32.3)
1.34
(34.0)
1.44
(36.6)
1.37
(34.8)
1.34
(34.0)
1.44
(36.6)
1.23
(31.2)
1.34
(34.0)
1.44
(36.6)
1
4
Maintained
0.47
(11.9)
0.69
(17.5)
1.20
(30.5)
1.30
(33.0)
1.40
(35.6)
1.30
(33.0)
1.34
(34.0)
1.40
(35.6)
1.23
(31.2)
1.34
(34.0)
1.44
(36.6)
1
No. of
Poles
Spade Terminals
1
Solder Lug
1
1
1
Toggle Switch
Hesitation Switch
0.47
(11.9)
0.07 (1.8) x
0.05 (1.3)
Keyway
0.63
(16)
C
1.34
(34)
B
1
A
1
1
1.13
(28.7)
E
1.47
(37.3)
1
0.47-32
Thread
1.25
(31.8)
A
D
1
0.04 (1) x 0.07 (1.8)
Keyway
0.69
(17.5)
0.47-32
Thread
B
Pushbutton Actuator
1
1.13
(28.7)
1
Accessories
1
E10TA101
Hexagon Locknut
E10TA102
Knurled Face Nut
E10TA301
ON-OFF Indicating Plate—
Vertical Orientation
0.63
(16)
0.63
(16)
0.07
(1.8)
1.0
(25.4)
0.06
(1.5)
1
1
ON
0.08
(2)
E10TA302
ON-OFF Indicating Plate—
Horizontal Orientation
OFF
0.63
(16)
O
F
F
O
N
1
1
0.03
(.8)
1
Note
1 Spade terminal adapters are used on 6 ampere and momentary screw terminal switches, adding 0.42 in (10.7 mm) to dimension C.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-7
1.2
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled
Contents
Pushbutton Control Stations
Description
1
Page
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection
M22 Assembled Control Stations . . . . . . . .
Commercial Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . .
General Purpose Control Stations . . . . . . . .
Special Purpose Control Stations . . . . . . . .
10250H Series Heavy-Duty
Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10250T Series Heavy-Duty 30.5 mm
Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Class I Division 2 10250T Series Heavy-Duty
30.5 mm Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . .
Class I Division 2 E34 Series Corrosion
Resistant 30.5 mm Control Stations . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Custom Assembled Stations
Specification Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Renewal Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-9
V7-T1-10
V7-T1-11
V7-T1-12
V7-T1-13
V7-T1-14
V7-T1-15
V7-T1-16
V7-T1-17
V7-T1-17
V7-T1-18
V7-T1-20
V7-T1-22
V7-T1-22
1
1
Product Description
1
M22 Assembled Control
Stations
1
1
1
1
●
●
●
●
●
1
1
1
Commercial Control Stations
●
●
●
1
1
1
1
1
M22 series operators
Available in horizontal and
vertical configurations
Impact resistant
polycarbonate enclosures
Optional yellow covers
Base mounting contact
blocks and light units for
quick wiring and vibration
resistance
10250T series operators
Full front label
Specific function labels on
front of enclosure
General Purpose Control
Stations
●
●
●
●
Construction grade
General purpose wall
mount
Popular with contractors
UL (NEMA) Type 1
Special Purpose Control
Stations
●
●
●
Standard grade
Polyester enclosure
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4,
4X, 13
10250H Series Heavy-Duty
Control Stations
●
●
●
●
●
10250H Series operators
Dark brown polyester
enclosure
Protective rubber gaskets
provide NEMA 3S rating on
pushbuttons
Top and bottom 3/4 in NPT
conduit entrances
Includes alternate legend
plates and spare mounting
screws
10250T Series Heavy-Duty
30.5 mm Control Stations
●
●
●
●
●
10250T Series operators
ASA 61 gray die-cast zinc
enclosures
Surface or flush mounting
Single 3/4 in NPT conduit
entrance on one and two
element stations
Single 1 in NPT conduit
entrance on three element
stations
Class I Division 2 10250T
Series Heavy-Duty 30.5 mm
Control Stations
●
●
●
●
Class I Division 2 E34 Series
Corrosion Resistant 30.5 mm
Control Stations
●
●
●
●
E34 Series operators
Factory sealed contact
blocks
Die-cast, polyester or
stainless steel enclosures
Approved for NEC Class I
Division 2 Groups B, C and
D or Class I Zone 2 Group
IIB plus Hydrogen type
hazardous locations
10250T Series operators
Factory sealed contact
blocks
Die-cast, polyester or
stainless steel enclosures
Approved for NEC Class I
Division 2, Groups B, C and
D or Class I Zone 2 Group
IIB plus Hydrogen type
hazardous locations
1
1
1
V7-T1-8
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled
1.2
Features
M22 Assembled Control
Stations
●
●
●
●
●
IP66, UL (NEMA) Type 4X,
13
Impact resistant
polycarbonate enclosures
Optional yellow cover
25% smaller depth than
most competitor
enclosures
Base mounting contact
blocks and light units for
faster wiring and vibration
resistance
Commercial Control Stations
●
●
●
ASA 61 gray die-cast zinc
enclosures
Pre-assembled and labeled
for functions such as “Fuel
Shut-Off”
Great for commercial
applications
General Purpose Control
Stations
●
●
●
●
Construction grade
General purpose wall
mount
Popular with contractors
UL (NEMA) Type 1
Special Purpose Control
Stations
●
●
●
Standard grade
Polyester enclosure
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4,
4X, 13
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Industrial grade
Extra heavy-duty
Polyester enclosure
Booted buttons
Outdoor installation
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 3S,
4, 4X, 12, 13
1
30.5 mm operators
Industrial grade
Zinc die cast enclosure
Popular with industrial end
users
UL (NEMA) Type 4, 4X, 12,
13
1
1
1
1
Class I Division 2 Control
Stations
●
●
10250H Series Heavy-Duty
Control Stations
1
10250T Series Heavy-Duty
30.5 mm Control Stations
●
●
●
●
1
Available with 10250T or
E34 30.5 mm operators
Zinc die cast, polyester or
stainless steel enclosures
Factory-sealed contact
blocks
Popular with industrial end
users
UL (NEMA) Type 4, 4X, 12,
13
NEC Class I Division 2
Groups B, C and D
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-9
1.2
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled
Product Selection
M22 Assembled Control Stations
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
One Element Control Stations
1
Orientation
Description
Color
1
Inscription
Enclosure
Cover Color
Catalog Number
Horizontal
40 mm mushroom head push-pull emergency stop operator
Red
NC
—
Yellow
M22-C1-M1H
1
Horizontal
40 mm illuminated mushroom head push-pull emergency stop
operator, 85–264 Vac
Red
NO-NC
—
Yellow
M22-C1-M2H
1
Horizontal
40 mm mushroom head twist-to-release emergency stop operator
Red
NC
—
Yellow
M22-C1-M3H
Horizontal
40 mm mushroom head key-release emergency stop operator
Red
NC
—
Yellow
M22-C1-M4H
1
Horizontal
Flush pushbutton
Green
NO
Gray
M22-C1-M5H
Horizontal
Flush pushbutton
Green
NO
Gray
M22-C1-M6H
Horizontal
Extended pushbutton
Red
NC
Gray
M22-C1-M7H
1
Horizontal
Extended pushbutton
Red
NC
STOP
Gray
M22-C1-M8H
Horizontal
Key-operated selector switch, two-position maintained
—
NO
OFF-ON
Gray
M22-C1-M9H
1
Horizontal
Knob type selector switch, three-position maintained
—
2NO
HAND 0 AUTO
Gray
M22-C1-M10H
Horizontal
Double pushbutton
Green
NO
START
Gray
M22-C1-M11H
Red
NC
STOP
1
1
1
Two Element Control Stations
1
Orientation
Element 1
Description
Color
1
Horizontal
Extended pushbutton
Red
NC
Vertical
Flush pushbutton
Green
NO
1
Vertical
Flush pushbutton
Black
NO
1
Three Element Control Stations
1
Orientation
1
Element 1
Description
Color
1
START
Element 2
Description
Color
1
Flush pushbutton
Green
NO
START
Extended pushbutton
Red
NC
FORWARD
Flush pushbutton
Black
NO
Inscription
Element 2
Inscription Description
Enclosure
Cover Color
Catalog Number
Gray
M22-C2-M1H
STOP
Gray
M22-C2-M2V
REVERSE
Gray
M22-C2-M3V
Inscription
Element 3
Inscription Description
Color
1
85–264
Vac
—
Flush
pushbutton
Green
NO
Green
NO
START
Extended
pushbutton
Red
NC
Extended
pushbutton
Red
NC
Flush
pushbutton
Green
NO
Color
1
Indicating
light
White
Flush
pushbutton
Horizontal
Extended
pushbutton
Red
NC
Vertical
Indicating
light
White
85–264
Vac
Horizontal
Green
NO
1
Flush
pushbutton
Vertical
Black
NO
OPEN
Extended
pushbutton
Red
NC
STOP
Flush
pushbutton
Black
NO
1
Flush
pushbutton
Vertical
Black
NO
FORWARD
Flush
pushbutton
Red
NC
STOP
Flush
pushbutton
Black
1
Flush
pushbutton
Vertical
Flush
pushbutton
Black
NO
UP
Flush
pushbutton
Red
NC
STOP
Flush
pushbutton
Black
1
1
1
1
1
—
Enclosure
Inscription Cover Color Catalog Number
Gray
M22-C3-M1H
Gray
M22-C3-M2V
Gray
M22-C3-M3H
CLOSE
Gray
M22-C3-M4V
NO
REVERSE
Gray
M22-C3-M5V
NO
DOWN
Gray
M22-C3-M6V
STOP
Notes
For assembled control stations not found in this selection, please contact the Eaton Technical Resource Center
at 1-877-ETN CARE (386-2273) or TRC@eaton.com.
1
Contact block configuration.
V7-T1-10
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled
1.2
Commercial Control Stations
1
Available Catalog Numbers
Key Specifications
●
●
●
●
●
●
30.5 mm (10250T series)
operators
ASA 61 gray die-cast zinc
enclosures
Industrial grade
UL® Type 4, 4X, 12, 13
Single 3/4 in NPT conduit
entrance
Dimensions—in (mm)
●
Enclosure:
3.88 W x 4.00 H x 3.00 D
(98.6 x 101.6 x 76.3)
●
Operator:
1.63 D (to enclosure) x
1.50 diameter
(41.4 x 38.1)
What is included?
Eaton’s pre-assembled,
enclosed emergency stop
pushbutton stations include
an operator, an enclosure,
contact blocks and a variety
of unique labels. Each label
has white lettering on a red
background indicating the
function and red lettering on a
white background indicating
the operator type.
1
Catalog
Number 1
Operator
Enclosure
Color
Label
10250T5B62-S101
Push-Pull
Gray
EMERGENCY STOP
10250T5B62-S102
Push-Pull
Gray
EMERGENCY SHUT-OFF
10250T5B62-S103
Push-Pull
Gray
EMERGENCY GENERATOR STOP
10250T5B62-S104
Push-Pull
Gray
EMERGENCY HVAC SHUT-DOWN
10250T5B62-S105
Push-Pull
Gray
EMERGENCY ELECTRICAL DISCONNECT
10250T5B62-S106
Push-Pull
Gray
EMERGENCY BOILER SHUT-DOWN
10250T5B62-S107
Push-Pull
Gray
EMERGENCY CHILLER STOP
10250T5B62-S108
Push-Pull
Gray
EMERGENCY FUEL SHUT-OFF
10250T5B62-S109
Push-Pull
Gray
EMERGENCY REFRIGERATION STOP
10250T5B62-S110
Push-Pull
Gray
EMERGENCY POWER OFF
10250T5B62-S111
Push-Pull
Gray
EMERGENCY GAS SHUT-OFF
10250T5B62-S112
Push-Pull
Gray
EMERGENCY VENTILATION SHUT-DOWN
10250T5B62-S113
Push-Pull
Gray
GENERATOR
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Additional Contact Blocks
(Sold Separately)
Catalog Number
Circuit
Configuration
10250T51
1NC
10250T53
1NO
10250T1
NO-NC
10250T3
2NC
10250T2
2NO
1
1
1
1
1
1
Note
1 Includes 1NO-1NC contact block.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-11
1.2
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled
General Purpose Control Stations
Type N Control Stations—UL (NEMA) Type 1
1
Contact
Symbol
Legends
Catalog Number
Flush/green
START
10250H5100
Flush/red
STOP
10250H5101
Extended/red
STOP
10250H5104
Palm operated/black
None
10250H89 2
Three-position selector
switch/black knob
RUN/OFF/AUTO
10250H289 2
Flush/red
START/STOP
10250H5200
1
Flush/green
extended/red
START/STOP
10250H5207
1
Flush/black (all)
1
1
Single Button
Station for Padlock
Attachment 1
1
1
Button Type/Color
One Element Enclosure Type
1
1
1
Selector Switch
1
1
1
Two Button Station
Two Element Enclosure Type
1
RAISE/LOWER
10250H5201
FOR/REV
10250H5202
OPEN/CLOSE
10250H5203
1
UP/DOWN
10250H5204
HIGH/LOW
10250H5205
1
FAST/SLOW
10250H5208
1
Three Button Station
1
Three Element Enclosure Type
Flush/black (all)
1
1
1
Three Button Station
with Indicating Light
1
1
110/220V neon indicating light
FOR/REV/STOP
10250H5300
UP/DOWN/STOP
10250H5301
RAISE/LOWER/STOP
10250H5302
OPEN/CLOSE/STOP
10250H5303
FAST/SLOW/STOP
10250H5304
START/STOP
Clear—flush/green; flush/red
10250H5310
Red—flush/green; flush/red
10250ED853
Amber—flush/green; flush/red
10250ED853-2
1
1
Notes
1 Padlock attachment (10250H5110) must be purchased separately.
2 Round button.
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-12
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled
1.2
Type N Control Stations—Open Type Construction (No Cover)
Contact
Symbol
Selector Switch
Button Type/Color
Legends
Catalog Number
RUN/OFF/AUTO
10250H2538
1
1
One Element Enclosure Type
Three-position selector
switch/black knob
1
1
1
Two Button Station
Two Element Enclosure Type
Flush/green
START/STOP
1
10250H2747
1
1
Mechanically
Interlocked
Pushbuttons
Flush/black (all)
mech. interlocked
None 1
1
10250H2544
1
1
1
1
1
Special Purpose Control Stations
1
Special Purpose Control Stations—UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 13
Contact
Symbol
10250H_
Feature
Legends
Catalog Number
1
START
10250H2738
1
STOP
10250H658
1
STOP
10250H665
One Element Pushbutton Type
Flush
With lock hasp
1
1
10250H_
Two Element Pushbutton Type
Flush
START/STOP
10250H364
1
With lock hasp
START/STOP
10250H671
1
1
Buttons interlocked
FAST/SLOW
10250ED664
FOR/REV
10250H2740
UP/DOWN
10250H2741
OPEN/CLOSE
10250H2742
1
1
Note
1 No legend on buttons. Specify any standard legend.
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-13
1.2
1
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled
10250H Series Heavy-Duty Control Stations
Type H Control Stations—UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13
1
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Element Type
10250H_
Feature
Circuit
Assembled
Legend
Plate
Without padlock hasp
1NO-1NC
JOG
Catalog Number
START
10250H1881
One Element
Pushbuttons
STOP
1
RUN
1
Knob selector
switch
1
1
Unassembled
Alternate
Legend Plate
10250H_
With padlock hasp
1NC
STOP
—
10250H4239
Two-position
1NO-1NC
OFF/ON
—
10250H4526
Three-position
1NO-1NC
MAN/OFF/AUTO
—
10250H4527
Standard
1NO-2NC
START/STOP
—
10250H1884
2NO-2NC
RAISE/LOWER
FORWARD
10250H1885
Two Element
Pushbuttons
1
REVERSE
1
OPEN
CLOSE
1
1
10250H_
1
Standard and
standard with
padlock hasp
1NO-2NC
START/STOP
—
Standard
2NO-3NC
FOR/REV/STOP
START
OPEN
10250H1890
JOG
CLOSE
10250H4241
RAISE
FAST
LOWER
SLOW
Three Element
Pushbuttons
Two standard and
standard with
padlock hasp
1
1
Indicating
light and
pushbuttons
1
10250H4240
120V
Light-red lens
and two plain
1NO-2NC
MOTOR
RUNNING
START/STOP
—
10250H1913
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-14
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.2
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled
10250T Series Heavy-Duty 30.5 mm Control Stations
1
Complete Assembled Stations—UL (NEMA) Type 4, 4X, 12, 13
Element Type
Break Glass Station
1
Features
Contact
Block(s)
Legend
Gray enclosure
NC (logic level)
EMERG. OFF
Surface Mounting
Catalog Number
Flush Mounting 2
Catalog Number
Break Glass Station
Break glass station
3
Red enclosure
10250TGS
—
10250TGR
—
1
1
1
1
1
One Element
One Element
Pushbutton
Standard
Mushroom head
Selector switch
Push-pull
three-position
Two Element
START
10250T3516
10250T3573
NC
STOP
10250T3518
10250T3575
NO-NC
None
10250T3540
10250T3597
NO-NC
START
10250T3517
10250T3574
NC
STOP
10250T3519
10250T3576
With lock hasp 4
NC
STOP
10250T3520
10250T3577
Two-position
black knob
NO-NC
OFF/ON
10250T3523
10250T3580
Three-position
black knob
2NO
MAN/OFF/AUTO
10250T3524
10250T3581
Momentary
red button
2NC
START/STOP
10250T3545
10250T3602
Standard
1NO-2NC
START/STOP
10250T3525
10250T3582
2NO-2NC
RAISE/LOWER
10250T3672
10250T3673
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Two Element
Pushbuttons
Three Element
NO-NC
2NO-2NC
None
10250T3541
10250T3598
With lock hasp 4
1NO-2NC
START/STOP
10250T3542
10250T3599
Standard and mushroom head
1NO-2NC
START/STOP
10250T3526
10250T3583
Standard with
maintained contact 5
NO-NC
START/STOP
10250T3528
10250T3585
Standard
2NO-3NC
FOR, REV, STOP
10250T3532
10250T3589
2NO-3NC
UP, DOWN, STOP
10250T3615
—
2NO-3NC
OPEN, CLOSE, STOP
10250T3614
—
2NO-3NC
None, None, STOP
10250T3543
10250T3600
1
1
1
1
Plus NC
Three Element
Pushbuttons
Indicating light
(transformer type)
and pushbuttons
1
Two standard and with lock hasp
2NO-3NC
None, None, STOP
10250T3544
10250T3601
Red lens — 120V
1NO-2NC
MOTOR RUN,
START/STOP
10250T3536
10250T3593
Red lens — 240V
1
10250T3537
10250T3594
Red lens — 480V
10250T3538
10250T3595
Red lens — 600V
10250T3539
10250T3596
1
1
1
1
Break Glass
Operator 6
Break Glass Kit
Description
Catalog Number
Operator with hammer and five glass discs
10250TBG
Glass discs only (5)
10250TGL
1
1
1
1
Notes
1 Stop buttons are red—all others are black.
2 NEMA 4–13, if properly mounted on a flat surface. Consists of front plate, legend, operator and contact blocks.
3 Break glass stations will not function with Normally Open contact blocks.
4 Lock is 10250TA2.
5 Uses deep cover instead of shallow cover. Switch component is 10250TA67—mechanically interlocked operators.
6 Shown assembled to contact block (contact block supplied separately).
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
V7-T1-15
1.2
1
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled
Class I Division 2 10250T Series Heavy-Duty 30.5 mm Control Stations
Complete Assembled Stations—
UL (NEMA) Type 4, 4X, 12, 13; NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
1
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Contact
Symbol
10250T7007
1
1NO
1NC
10250T7023P
1
Die Cast
Enclosure
Catalog Number
Polyester Molded
Enclosure
Catalog Number
Stainless Steel
Enclosure
Catalog Number
Flush/green
START
10250T7003
10250T7003P
10250T7003S
Extended/red
STOP
10250T7005
10250T7005P
10250T7005S
Alum. jumbo
mushroom/red
EMER. STOP
(engraved button)
10250T7007
10250T7007P
10250T7007S
Flush/black
No legend
10250T7009
10250T7009P
10250T7009S
10250T7023
10250T7023P
10250T7023S
10250T7025
10250T7025P
10250T7025S
10250T7033
10250T7033P
10250T7033S
Two Pushbuttons
1NO
1NC
Each Button
1
Legend
Marking
Single Pushbutton
1
1
Button
Type/Color
1
Flush/green
START
Extended/red
STOP
Flush/black
No legend
Flush/black
No legend
1
1
10250T7033S
Single Pilot Light—Two Pushbuttons
1NO
1
1NC
Each Button
1
120 Vac red
No legend
Flush/green
START
Extended/red
STOP
120 Vac red
No legend
10250T7035
10250T7035P
10250T7035S
Maintained
knob/black
HAND/OFF/AUTO
10250T7011
10250T7011P
10250T7011S
Maintained
knob/black
No legend
10250T7013
10250T7013P
10250T7013S
EMER. STOP
(engraved button)
10250T7019
10250T7019P
10250T7019S
Flush/black
1
Flush/black
1
Three-Position Selector Switch
1
2NO
2NC
1
1
1
Single Pushbutton Maintained
Push-pull
with jumbo
mushroom/red
1
1
Pull Push
O
X 1NO
X
O 1NC
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-16
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled
1.2
Class I Division 2 E34 Series Corrosion Resistant 30.5 mm Control Stations
1
Complete Assembled Stations—
UL (NEMA) Type 4, 4X, 12, 13; NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
E34EX_
Contact
Symbol
1
Button
Type/Color
Legend
Marking
Die Cast
Enclosure
Catalog Number
Polyester Molded
Enclosure
Catalog Number
Stainless Steel
Enclosure
Catalog Number
Flush/green
START
E34EX7003
E34EX7003P
E34EX7003S
Extended/red
STOP
E34EX7005
E34EX7005P
E34EX7005S
Alum. jumbo
mushroom/red
EMER. STOP
(engraved button)
E34EX7007
E34EX7007P
E34EX7007S
1
Flush/black
No legend
E34EX7009
E34EX7009P
E34EX7009S
1
Flush/green
START
E34EX7023
E34EX7023P
E34EX7023S
Extended/red
STOP
Flush/black
No legend
E34EX7025
E34EX7025P
E34EX7025S
Flush/black
No legend
1
Single Pushbutton
1NO
1NC
1
Two Pushbuttons
1NO
1NC
Each Button
1
1
1
1
1
1
Three-Position Selector Switch
2NO
2NC
Maintained
knob/black
HAND/OFF/AUTO
E34EX7011
E34EX7011P
E34EX7011S
Maintained
knob/black
No legend
E34EX7013
E34EX7013P
E34EX7013S
1
1
1
Single Pushbutton Maintained
Push-pull with jumbo
mushroom/red
EMER. STOP
(engraved button)
E34EX7019
E34EX7019P
1
E34EX7019S
1
Pull Push
O
X 1NO
X
O 1NC
1
1
1
Accessories
Padlock Attachment
1
Type N Control Stations
Description
Catalog Number
Padlock attachment—For field assembly on square button type
(except extended button types)
10250H5110
1
1
1
Note
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Page V7-T1-16.
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-17
1.2
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled
Custom Assembled Stations Specification Form
Step 7
Fax Sheet 2 of this form to
Eaton’s TRC, Technical
Resource Center, at 828-6510549 to the attention of—
Custom Stations Order or
email to TRC@eaton.com.
Ordering Instructions
1
1
1
1
1
Step 1
Copy this ordering guide from
catalog.
Step 2
Specify 10250T or E34
pushbutton lines in the
corresponding box on the
following page.
Position 1
Position 1
Position 2
Within a few days you will
receive a confirmation fax
with the custom station part
number and price.
Position 1
Position 2
Position 3
1
10250T
Pages
V7-T1-213 to V7-T1-283
1
E34
Pages
V7-T1-284 to V7-T1-325
1
10250T and Pages
E34
V7-T1-351 to V7-T1-391
Class I Div. 2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Step 3
Check back of panel
dimensions—specify single
or double depth enclosure in
the corresponding box on the
following page.
Step 4
Specify enclosure catalog
number and price in the
corresponding box on the
following page. Enclosures
can be found on Pages
V7-T1-110, V7-T1-263
and V7-T1-313. For pricing,
reference the most recent
PAD or VISTA-line.
Step 5
Specify catalog numbers for
desired operator, legend
plate, light unit, accessory
and contact block(s) for each
location in the enclosure in
the corresponding box on the
following page. (See position
locations on this page.)
Step 8
Place your order over the
VISTA System.
Position 1
Position 2
For Selector and Roto-Push
Operators
Position 3
Position 4
Position Locations
Step 6
For non-standard legends,
specify legend desired, letter
size and location on the
layout sketches on the
following page. For
limitations see Page
V7-T1-262. For pricing,
use the blank legend catalog
number and “STAMP” Suffix
(Ex.: 10250TS36STAMP) and
reference the most recent
PAD or VISTA-line.
10250T or E34
For single contact blocks or
1NO-1NC contact blocks, the
mounting position of contacts
must be specified. For
example: If a 1NO-1NC
contact block is required,
specify if NO is to be
mounted in Top A position or
Bottom B position.
Example: 10250TS36
Special
Legend
for Position #_______
LETTER
SIZE
3/32 in
1/8 in
✔
3/16 in
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-18
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.2
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled
To —
Eaton’s TRC, Custom Station Order
(828) 651-0549 FAX, or email to TRC@eaton.com
1
FACTORY USE ONLY
Part Number
1
Product Code
From — Customer Name ___________________________________________
Customer Contact __________________________________________
Suffix
Phone Number_____________________________________________
Date
1
1
Engineer
Fax Number _______________________________________________
1
Email Address _____________________________________________
✔
Step 3)
Step 2)
10250T
❏ STD ❏ Class I Division 2
Single Depth Enclosure
E34
❏ STD ❏ Class I Division 2
Double Depth Enclosure
1
Step 4)
Enclosure Catalog Number
Price
1
1
Step 5)
Position
Operator
Price
U.S. $
Light Unit
Price
U.S. $
Contact
Block
Price
U.S. $
A/L
B/R
Contact
Block
Price
U.S. $
A/L
B/R
Total
Price
1
1
1
2
1
3
4
Position
1
1
Price
U.S. $
Legend Plate
Lens or Caps
Price
U.S. $
Accessory
Price
U.S. $
Total
Price
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
Total:
1
10% Adder
for Assembled Stations
Step 6) Non-standard Legends
Special Legend for Position #_______
1
1
Special Legend for Position #_______
Special Legend for Position #_______
1
1
1
1
1
1
LETTER SIZE
3/32 inch (2.4 mm)
1/8 inch (3.2 mm)
3/16 inch (4.8 mm)
✔
LETTER SIZE
✔
LETTER SIZE
3/32 inch (2.4 mm)
3/32 inch (2.4 mm)
1/8 inch (3.2 mm)
1/8 inch (3.2 mm)
3/16 inch (4.8 mm)
3/16 inch (4.8 mm)
✔
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-19
1.2
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled
Renewal Parts
Type N Renewal Parts
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Assembled Stations—Type N
1
1
1
Item
No.
1
1
1
1
Part Number
Cover
Item
No.
Description
No.
Req.
Part Number
Type N—Square Buttons, continued
1
9
Pushbutton element
1
Two element
49-3524
1NO-1NC
86-2588
One element—top button
49-3524-2
2NO
86-2588-2
One element—bottom button
49-3524-3
1NO
86-2588-3
1NC
2
Cover screw
2
11-2168
3
Pushbutton support bracket
1
79-6649
10
Cover
1
49-3464
4
Pushbutton support bracket screw
1
11-2090
11
Pushbutton support bracket
1
79-6650
5
Pushbutton spring
2
69-2571
12
Pushbutton—top position
1
6
Disc (when used—two element assembly)
2
16-1960
7
Pushbutton—top position
1
1
1
1
1
No.
Req.
Type N—Square Buttons
1
1
Description
8
53-1170-7
UP/black
53-1170-4
53-1169-3
RAISE/black
53-1170-5
RAISE/black
53-1169-66
OPEN/black
53-1170-9
FORWARD/black
53-1169-7
FAST/black
OPEN/black
53-1169-9
UP/blank
53-1169-11
REVERSE/black
53-1169-15
Blank/green
53-1169
DOWN/black
53-1169-18
LOWER/black
53-1169-16
CLOSE/black
53-1169-17
Pushbutton—bottom position
13
1
53-1202-2
Extended STOP/red
53-1202-5
REVERSE/black
53-1169-8
CLOSE/black
53-1169-10
1
DOWN/black
53-1169-12
LOWER/black
53-1169-6
1
Blank/red
53-1202
1
FORWARD/black
START/green
STOP/red
1
86-2588-4
Pushbutton middle position
53-1170-6
1
SLOW/black
14
Pushbutton—bottom position
15
Pushbutton element
16
Cover
53-1169-13
1
STOP/red
53-1201-2
1
2NO-3NC
86-2593
1
1
1
V7-T1-20
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
49-3524-4
1.2
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled
Assembled Stations—Type N, continued
Item
No.
No.
Req.
Description
Part Number
Type N—Square Buttons, continued
17
Item
No.
Description
1
No.
Req.
Part Number
1
10250H2538
Type N—Round Buttons
Lens
1
Similar Pushbutton assembly and element for:
to 27
10250H289
Clear
28-494
Red
28-887-2
10250H364
1
86-353
Amber
28-887-3
10250H685
1
86-353-8
18
Shield
1
73-1337
10250H665
1
86-353-8
19
Shield screws
4
11-2012
10250H671
1
86-353
20
Lamp (neon NE48)
1
28-494
10250H2738
1
86-353-3
21
Lamp receptacle
1
28-902
10250H2740
1
86-356
22
Lamp receptacle screw
1
911-330F1
10250H2741
1
86-356
23
Pilot light terminal base
1
86-2586
10250H2742
1
86-356
24
Lens
1
28-887
Red
28-887-2
Amber
28-887-3
Pushbutton support bracket
1
26
Pushbutton element
1
1NO-1NC
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Clear
25
1
1
79-6650-2
1
86-2594
1
1
Type H Renewal Parts
7
1
7
7
8
1
6
9
10
12
10
1
5
5
4
1
4
1
5
4
1
3
3
1
11
1
1
Pushbutton
2
1
2
Indicating Light
2
1
Selector Switch
1
1
Assembled Stations—Type H
Item
No.
Description
No.
Req.
Part Number
Type H—Assembled Stations
Item
No.
Description
1
No.
Req.
Part Number
Type H—Assembled Stations
1
Screw
2
11-4654
7
Screw
4
11-953
2
Screw
2
11-5719
8
Diaphragm
1
32-253-2
3
Base
1
17-16560
9
Mounting plate
1
17-19522
4
Contact blocks
See Page V7-T1-265
10
Gasket
1
32-254
5
10250T operator
See Pages V7-T1-219
to V7-T1-255
11
Base
1
17-16561
12
Mounting plate
1
17-19523
6
Mounting plate
1
17-19524
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-21
1.2
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled
Technical Data and Specifications
Ratings
1
1
Maximum Ampere Ratings for Type N Control Stations
Volts AC
Volts DC
1
Description
110
220
440
550
120
240
600
Make and emergency interrupt capacity
30
15
7.5
6
1.0
0.5
0.1
1
Normal load break
3
1.5
0.75
0.6
1.0
0.5
0.1
Continuous current
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
1
1
1
Maximum Ampere Ratings for Type H Control Stations
Volts AC 50/60 Hz
Volts DC
Description
120
240
480
600
125
250
1
Make and emergency interrupt capacity
60
30
15
12
1.1
0.55
Normal load break
6
3
1.5
1.2
1.1
0.55
1
Continuous amperes
10
10
10
10
10
10
1
1
1
Voltamperes —
Make and emergency interrupt capacity
7200
7200
7200
7200
138
138
Normal load break
720
720
720
720
138
138
Dimensions
1
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1
Type N Control Stations
4.00
(101.6)
1
1
4.00
(101.6)
3.25
(82.6)
6.00
(152.4)
3.25
(82.6)
5.00
(127.0)
1
1
1
1
1
1.50
(38.1)
2.25
(57.2)
2.25 a
(57.2)
2.25 a
(57.2)
1.50
(38.1)
2.25
(57.2)
Single Button Station
Two Button Station
1.50
(38.1)
2.25
(57.2)
2.25 a
(57.2)
Three Button Station
Special Purpose Control Stations
1
1
5.50
(139.7)
6.25
(158.8)
1
1
1
1
1
2.25
(57.2)
3.13
(79.5)
3.38
(85.9)
0.75 (19.1)
Pipe Tap
Ship Wt.
2.5 Lb (1.1 kg)
Note
1 2.38 (60.5) for neon indicating light.
1
V7-T1-22
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled
1.2
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1
Type H Control Stations
1
NEMA Type 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 13
1
No. of
Elements
Dimensions
Wide
High
Deep
1 and 2
4.50 (114.3)
8.25 (209.6)
4.50 (114.3)
3
4.50 (114.3)
10.75 (273.1)
4.25 (108.0)
1
1
1
10250T and E34
1
Approximate Enclosure Dimensions
Surface Mounting
Number
of
Elements
Dimensions in In (mm)
4 Mtg. Holes — 10-32 Screw Size for
1 – 4 Element Die Cast/
Stainless Steel Enclosure
7/32 Screw Size for
Polyester
1
Wide
A
High
B
Deep
C
Mounting
D
E
1
3.88
(98.6)
4.00
(101.6)
3.00
(76.3)
2.69
(68.3)
3.25
(82.6)
3/4
2
3.88
(98.6)
5.88
(149.4)
3.00
(76.3)
2.69
(68.3)
5.13
(130.3)
3/4
3
3.88
(98.6)
7.75
(196.9)
3.00
(76.3)
2.69
(68.3)
7.00
(177.8)
1
4
33.88
(98.6)
9.63
(244.6)
3.00
(76.3)
2.69
(68.3)
8.88
(225.6)
1
1
3.81
(96.8)
6.63
(168.4)
3.38
(85.9)
2.94
(74.7)
4.88
(124.0)
1
1
2
3.81
(96.8)
6.63
(168.4)
3.38
(85.9)
2.94
(74.7)
4.88
(124.0)
1
1
3
3.81
(96.8)
8.88
(225.6)
3.38
(85.9)
2.94
(74.7)
7.13
(181.1)
1
4
3.81
(96.8)
6.63
(168.4)
3.38
(85.9)
2.94
(74.7)
4.88
(124.0)
1
Conduit
Entrance
1
1
Cast
E
B
1
1
D
A
1
C
Surface
1
Polyester
1
1
Stainless Steel
1
3.00
(76.2)
3.50
(88.9)
3.00
(76.2)
1.50
(38.1)
4.25
(108.0)
1
1
2
3.50
(88.9)
6.75
(171.5)
3.00
(76.2)
1.50
(38.1)
7.50
(190.5)
1
1
3
3.50
(88.9)
9.00
(228.6)
3.00
(76.2)
1.50
(38.1)
9.00
(228.6)
1
1
4
3.50
(88.9)
11.25
(285.8)
3.00
(76.2)
1.50
(38.1)
12.00
(304.8)
1
1
1
Note
1 No conduit entrance holes provided. Drill as required.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-23
1.3
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16
Contents
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16
Description
1
Page
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and
Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selector Switches—Non-Illuminated,
Illuminated and Keyed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-25
V7-T1-26
V7-T1-28
V7-T1-29
V7-T1-30
V7-T1-34
V7-T1-37
V7-T1-39
1
1
1
1
Product Overview
1
Product Description
Features
The RMQ-16 pushbutton
line offers a wide array of
functional and attractively
designed illuminated and
non-illuminated pushbuttons,
selector switches, emergency
stops and indicating lights.
The illuminated line is offered
with either incandescent or
LED. RMQ-16 devices are
designed with two front-ofpanel operator sizes. The
18 x 18 mm or 25 x 25 mm
square operators can help
the user achieve over three
times the information density
compared with 22 mm ranges.
●
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
●
●
●
1
1
1
Wide product breadth:
RMQ-16 offers illuminated
and non-illuminated
pushbuttons, keyed,
non-keyed, and illuminated
selector switches,
emergency stops, and a
large variety of accessories
Custom laser etching:
Hundreds of standard
markings available in
addition to infinite possible
custom images with laser
etching
High durability:
Pushbuttons and selector
switches rated for 3 million
mechanical operations
High information density:
Square operators (18 mm
or 25 mm) allow for sideby-side mounting and
achieve over three times
the information density of
typical 22 mm installations
Standards and Certifications
●
●
●
●
●
●
Laser etched operators
Heavy-duty construction
with IP65 on front of panel
operators
LED or incandescent
illumination available
Front-of-panel operators
available in either
18 x 18 mm or 25 x 25 mm
sizes
Safety rated emergency
stops (IEC 60947-5,
positively driven contacts)
Mounting diameter
16.2 mm to EN 50007
●
●
●
●
UL Listed
CSA Certified
IEC/EN 60947-5 VDE-0660
IP65
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-24
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16
1.3
Product Selection Guide
1
Pushbuttons
1
1
1
1
Description
Non-Illuminated
Illuminated
Product Selection
Page V7-T1-26
Page V7-T1-27
1
1
Indicating Lights
1
1
1
Description
Flush
Extended
Product Selection
Page V7-T1-28
Page V7-T1-28
1
1
1
Emergency Stops
1
1
Description
Non-Illuminated
Illuminated
Product Selection
Page V7-T1-29
Page V7-T1-29
1
1
1
Selector Switches
1
1
1
Description
Non-Illuminated
Illuminated
Keyed
Product Selection
Page V7-T1-30
Page V7-T1-31
Page V7-T1-32
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-25
1.3
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16
Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated
Catalog Number Selection
1
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1
Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated
Q 18 – DR – BL / WB
1
1
1
Face Plate
18 = 18 x 18 mm
25 = 25 x 25 mm
D=
DR =
LT =
LTR =
1
Operator Type
Non-illuminated momentary
Non-illuminated maintained
Illuminated momentary
Illuminated maintained
GN =
RT =
SW =
WS =
Button Plate
Green
BL = Blue
Red
GE = Yellow
Black
X = Without
White
Bulb
WB = With incandescent bulb 24V
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Product Selection
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons
●
Momentary or maintained
●
Customizable laser etched pushbutton operators
●
18 mm or 25 mm square operator
●
3 million mechanical operations
●
IEC/EN 60947-5
●
IP65
Q18-D-GN
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons
Type
1
Momentary
Button
Color
Catalog Number
18 x 18 mm
25 x 25 mm
Green
Q18D-GN
Q25D-GN
1
Red
Q18D-RT
Q25D-RT
Black
Q18D-SW
Q25D-SW
1
White
Q18D-WS
Q25D-WS
Blue
Q18D-BL
Q25D-BL
Yellow
Q18D-GE
Q25D-GE
Without
Q18D-X 1
Q25D-X 1
1
1
Maintained
1
1
1
1
Green
Q18DR-GN
Q25DR-GN
Red
Q18DR-RT
Q25DR-RT
Black
Q18DR-SW
Q25DR-SW
White
Q18DR-WS
Q25DR-WS
Blue
Q18DR-BL
Q25DR-BL
Yellow
Q18DR-GE
Q25DR-GE
Without
Q18DR-X 1
Q25DR-X 1
Note
1 To order separate button plates, see Page V7-T1-36.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-26
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16
1.3
Illuminated Pushbuttons
●
Momentary or maintained
●
LED or incandescent
●
18 mm or 25 mm square operator
●
3 million mechanical operations
●
IEC/EN 60947-5
●
IP65
Q18-LT-GE
1
1
1
1
Illuminated Pushbuttons Without Bulb
1
1
Catalog Number 2
Type
Button
Color
18 x 18 mm
25 x 25 mm
Momentary
Green
Q18LT-GN
Q25LT-GN
Red
Q18LT-RT
Q25LT-RT
Black
Q18LT-SW
Q25LT-SW
White
Q18LT-WS
Q25LT-WS
Blue
Q18LT-BL
Q25LT-BL
Yellow
Q18LT-GE
Q25LT-GE
Maintained
Green
Q18LTR-GN
Q25LTR-GN
Red
Q18LTR-RT
Q25LTR-RT
Black
Q18LTR-SW
Q25LTR-SW
White
Q18LTR-WS
Q25LTR-WS
Blue
Q18LTR-BL
Q25LTR-BL
Yellow
Q18LTR-GE
Q25LTR-GE
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Notes
1 To order with incandescent 24V bulb, insert a /WB at the end of the catalog number. Example, Q18LT-GN/WB.
2 For a complete selection of incandescent 24V bulbs and LEDs, see Page V7-T1-34.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-27
1.3
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16
Indicating Lights
Catalog Number Selection
1
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1
Indicating Lights—Flush and Extended
Q 18 – LF – WS / WB
1
1
Face Plate
18 = 18 x 18 mm
25 = 25 x 25 mm
1
Bezel
LF = Flush indicator light
LH = Extended indicator light
Button Plate
GN = Green
BL = Blue
RT = Red
GE = Yellow
WS = White
1
1
1
1
1
Product Selection
Indicating Lights
●
LED or incandescent
●
Flush and extended lenses
●
18 mm or 25 mm square operator
●
3 million mechanical operations
●
IEC/EN 60947-5
●
IP65
1
Indicating Lights Without Bulb 1
1
Type
Button
Color
18 x 18 mm
25 x 25 mm
Flush
Green
Q18LF-GN
Q25LF-GN
Red
Q18LF-RT
Q25LF-RT
1
White
Q18LF-WS
Q25LF-WS
Blue
Q18LF-BL
Q25LF-BL
1
Yellow
Q18LF-GE
Q25LF-GE
Green
Q18LH-GN
Q25LH-GN
Red
Q18LH-RT
Q25LH-RT
1
White
Q18LH-WS
Q25LH-WS
Blue
Q18LH-BL
Q25LH-BL
1
Yellow
Q18LH-GE
Q25LH-GE
1
1
Bulb
WB = With incandescent bulb 24V
Q18-LF-GE
Q18-LH-BL
Extended.
Catalog Number 2
Notes
1 To order with incandescent 24V bulb, insert a /WB at the end of the catalog number. Example, Q18-LF-GN/WB.
2 For a complete selection of incandescent 24V bulbs and LEDs, see Page V7-T1-34.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-28
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16
1.3
Emergency Stops
1
Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1
Emergency Stops—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated
1
Q 25 – LPV – S
Face Plate
25 = 25 x 25 mm
Operator Type
PV = Emergency stop
LPV = Emergency stop (illuminated)
1
1
Color
Blank = Red
S = Black
1
1
Product Selection
1
Emergency Stops
●
Push/pull operation
●
Illuminated or non-illuminated
●
Emergency stop (red) or Machine stop (black) available
●
Suitable for use in safety applications
●
IEC/EN 60947-5
●
IP65
1
Q25PV
Emergency Stops—Non-Illuminated
1
1
1
Q25LPV
1
Emergency Stops—Illuminated 1
Button
Color
Catalog Number
25 x 25 mm
Button
Color
Catalog Number
Red
Q25PV
Red
Q25LPV
Black
Q25PV-S
Black
Q25LPV-S
1
25 x 25 mm
1
1
Note
1 Includes built-in multiple LED 24 Vdc.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-29
1.3
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16
Selector Switches—Non-Illuminated, Illuminated and Keyed
Catalog Number Selection
1
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1
Selector Switches—Non-Illuminated
Q 18 – WK1R
1
1
Face Plate
18 = 18 x 18 mm
25 = 25 x 25 mm
1
WK1 =
WK3 =
WK1R =
WK3R =
WK3R1 =
WK3R2 =
1
Selector Positions
Two positions momentary
Three positions momentary
Two positions maintained
Three positions maintained
Three positions maintained/momentary
Three positions momentary/maintained
1
1
Product Selection
1
Non-Illuminated Selector Switches
●
Momentary or maintained
●
18 mm or 25 mm square operator
●
VS Anti-rotation feature
●
3 million mechanical operations
●
IP65
1
Q18WK1
1
1
1
1
1
Selector Switches—Non-Illuminated
Function
Position
Momentary
2
Switch
Position
Catalog Number
18 x 18 mm
25 x 25 mm
Q18WK1
Q25WK1
Q18WK1R
Q25WK1R
Q18WK3
Q25WK3
Maintained
Q18WK3R
Q25WK3R
Maintained/momentary
Q18WK3R1
Q25WK3R1
Momentary/maintained
Q18WK3R2
Q25WK3R2
Maintained
1
Momentary
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-30
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16
1.3
Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1
Selector Switches—Illuminated
1
Q 18 – LWK1 – WS / WB
Face Plate
18 = 18 x 18 mm
25 = 25 x 25 mm
LWK1 =
LWK3 =
LWK1R =
LWK3R =
LWK3R1 =
LWK3R2 =
Switch Positions
Two positions momentary
Three positions momentary
Two positions maintained
Three positions maintained
Three positions maintained/momentary
Three positions momentary/maintained
Button Plate
GN = Green
WS = White
RT = Red
1
Bulb
WB = With incandescent bulb 24V
1
1
1
1
Product Selection
1
Illuminated Selector Switches
●
LED or incandescent
●
Momentary or maintained
●
18 mm or 25 mm square operator
●
VS Anti-rotation feature
●
3 million mechanical operations
●
IP65
Q18LWK1-GN
1
1
1
1
1
Selector Switches—Illuminated without Bulb 1
Function
Position
Momentary
2
Maintained
Momentary
Maintained
Maintained/
momentary
Momentary/
maintained
3
Button
Color
Switch
Position
Catalog Number
2
18 x 18 mm
25 x 25 mm
Green
Q18LWK1-GN
Q25LWK1-GN
Red
Q18LWK1-RT
Q25LWK1-RT
White
Q18LWK1-WS
Q25LWK1-WS
Green
Q18LWK1R-GN
Q25LWK1R-GN
Red
Q18LWK1R-RT
Q25LWK1R-RT
White
Q18LWK1R-WS
Q25LWK1R-WS
Green
Q18LWK3-GN
Q25LWK3-GN
Red
Q18LWK3-RT
Q25LWK3-RT
White
Q18LWK3-WS
Q25LWK3-WS
Green
Q18LWK3R-GN
Q25LWK3R-GN
Red
Q18LWK3R-RT
Q25LWK3R-RT
White
Q18LWK3R-WS
Q25LWK3R-WS
Green
Q18LWK3R1-GN
Q25LWK3R1-GN
Red
Q18LWK3R1-RT
Q25LWK3R1-RT
White
Q18LWK3R1-WS
Q25LWK3R1-WS
Green
Q18LWK3R2-GN
Q25LWK3R2-GN
Red
Q18LWK3R2-RT
Q25LWK3R2-RT
White
Q18LWK3R2-WS
Q25LWK3R2-WS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Notes
1 To order with incandescent 24V bulb, insert a /WB at the end of the catalog number. Example, Q18LWK1-GN/WB.
2 For a complete selection of incandescent 24V bulbs and LEDs, see Page V7-T1-34.
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-31
1.3
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16
Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
Keyed Selector Switches—Two- and Three-Position
Q 18 – S1 – A1 – WS
1
1
Face Plate
18 = 18 x 18 mm
25 = 25 x 25 mm
1
S1 =
S1R =
S3 =
S3R =
1
Switch Positions
Two positions momentary
Two positions maintained
Three positions momentary
Three positions maintained
Key Code
A1–A7 = Switch and key removal
positions (detailed below)
GN = Green
RT = Red
SW = Black
Color
WS = White
BL = Blue
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Product Selection
Keyed Selector Switches
●
5 color options
●
Momentary or maintained
●
18 mm or 25 mm square operator
●
VS Anti-rotation feature
●
3 million mechanical operations
●
IP65
Q18S1
Keyed Selector Switches—Two-Position
Key Removal
Position 1
Catalog Number
18 x 18 mm
25 x 25 mm
Black
O
Q18S1
Q25S1
Maintained
Black
O
Q18S1R
Q25S1R
Maintained
Black
O
Q18S1R-A1
Q25S1R-A1
Key Removal
Position 1
Catalog Number
18 x 18 mm
25 x 25 mm
O
Q18S3
Q25S3
O, II
Q18S3R
Q25S3R
Function
Button
Color
1
Momentary
1
1
1
Switch
Position
1
1
Keyed Selector Switches—Three-Position
1
Function
Button
Color
Momentary
Black
1
1
Maintained
1
Maintained
Switch
Position
O
Q18S3R-A1
Q25S3R-A1
I, O
Q18S3R-A2
Q25S3R-A2
O, II
Q18S3R-A3
Q25S3R-A3
1
Maintained/
momentary
I, O
Q18S3R-A4
Q25S3R-A4
O
Q18S3R-A5
Q25S3R-A5
1
Momentary/
maintained
O, II
Q18S3R-A6
Q25S3R-A6
O
Q18S3R-A7
Q25S3R-A7
1
1
Note
1 I = Key is removed at the left.
O = Key is removed at the center.
II = Key is removed at the right.
1
1
1
V7-T1-32
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16
Q18S1-BL
1.3
Keyed Selector Switches, Multicolor—Two-Position
Catalog Number
18 x 18 mm
25 x 25 mm
0
Q18S1-GN
Q25S1-GN
Red
Q18S1-RT
Q25S1-RT
White
Q18S1-WS
Q25S1-WS
Function
Momentary
Green
Switch
Position
Blue
Maintained
1
Key Removal
Position 1
Button
Color
Q18S1-BL
Q25S1-BL
Q18S1R-GN
Q25S1R-GN
Red
Q18S1R-RT
Q25S1R-RT
White
Q18S1R-WS
Q25S1R-WS
Blue
Q18S1R-BL
Q25S1R-BL
Green
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
Q18S3-RT
Keyed Selector Switches, Multicolor—Three-Position
Catalog Number
18 x 18 mm
25 x 25 mm
0
Q18S3-GN
Q25S3-GN
Red
Q18S3-RT
Q25S3-RT
White
Q18S3-WS
Q25S3-WS
Button
Color
Momentary
Green
Switch
Position
Blue
Maintained
1
Key Removal
Position 1
Function
Q18S3-BL
Q25S3-BL
Q18S3R-GN
Q25S3R-GN
Red
Q18S3R-RT
Q25S3R-RT
White
Q18S3R-WS
Q25S3R-WS
Blue
Q18S3R-BL
Q25S3R-BL
Green
0, II
1
1
1
1
1
1
Note
1 I = Key is removed at the left.
O = Key is removed at the center.
II = Key is removed at the right.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-33
1.3
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16
Accessories
E10
1
Contact Elements
ISH2,8
Insulated Ferrule
Feature
Catalog
Number
Description
Catalog
Number
Normally open (N/O)
E10
Insulated ferrule
ISH2,8
Normally closed (N/C)
E01
1
1
R16-MS
E01
1
1
VS
1
1
SRA10
1
1
Screw Adapter
Feature
Catalog
Number
Normally open (N/O)
SRA10
Normally closed (N/C)
SRA01
Lamp sockets
SRAL
E8-SW
1
WBGL6
1
1
WBLED-GN6
Voltage
Current
Color
Catalog
Number
6V
1W
White
WBGL6
Mounting ring tool
16-MS
Anti-Rotation Tab
Description
Catalog
Number
Guard ring
VS
Housing
Color
Catalog
Number
Surface mount enclosure
White
I8
Flush mount panel
White
E8
Black
E8-SW
Q18BS
Blanking Plug
12V
WBGL12
Size
Catalog
Number
24–28V
WBGL24
18 x 18 mm
Q18BS
25 x 25 mm
Q25BS
LEDs (AC/DC)
Voltage
1
Catalog
Number
Incandescent 24V Bulbs
1
1
Description
Description
1
1
Combination Box Spanner
Current
Color
Catalog
Number
Q25AGR
Cover Plate
Multiple Chip LED
1
6V
45 mA
12V
24 mA
1
6V
12V
24 mA
1
6V
45 mA
12V
24 mA
1
45 mA
Green
WBLED-GN6
WBLED-GN12
Red
WBLED-RT6
7–12.5 mA
Catalog
Number
25 x 38 mm
Black
Q25AS
Gray
Q25AGR
WBLED-GE6
WBLED-GE12
Green
LEDWB-G
Red
LEDWB-R
1
White
LEDWB-W
Blue
LEDWB-B
1
Yellow
LEDWB-Y
1
Color
WBLED-RT12
Yellow
Single Chip LED 1
18–30V
Size
Note
1 Positive pole to X1. Integral suppressor circuit up to 1000V.
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-34
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16
02SQ25
Insert Plate
SQT11
Size
10 x 22 mm
Q25TS-X
BLANK
1.3
Emergency Stop Labels
1
Catalog
Number
Type
Feature
Catalog
Number
02SQ25
Square
4 Languages
SQT11
Blank
SQT-GE
1
4 Languages
SRT11
1
Blank
SRT-GE
Legend Plate
SRT11
Size
Color
Catalog
Number
25 x 38 mm
Black
Q25TS-X
Gray
Q25TGR-X
Circle
1
1
1
1
Extra Keys
Q25TS_
ES16
Legend Plate—Complete
1
Codes for Extra Keys
Color
Catalog Number
Size
Etching
Catalog
Number
Green
ES16-GN
25 x 38
START
Q25TS-111
Red
ES16-RT
STOP
Q25TS-110
Black
ES16
FAULT
Q25TS-250
White
ES16-WS
Blue
ES16-BL
HAND
0
AUTO Q25TS-197
MAN
0
AUTO Q25TS-397
0
1
1
1
1
Q25TS-10
I
I
1
Q25TS-11
0
I
Q25TS-90
0
II
Q25TS-93
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-35
1.3
1
Button Plates
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16
Button Plates
Type
Color
18 x 18 mm
Black
1
Etching
Catalog
Number
Type
Color
—
01TQ18
25 x 25 mm
Black
CUSTOM
01TQ18-ETCH
Etching
Catalog
Number
—
01TQ25
CUSTOM
21TQ18
1
19TQ18
White
1
Green
1
02TQ18
“STOP”
CUSTOM
02TQ18-ETCH
“ON”
221TQ25
—
02TQ25
CUSTOM
02TQ25-ETCH
—
03TQ18
CUSTOM
03TQ18-ETCH
11TQ18
1
Red
1
19TQ25
—
20TQ18
1
White
Yellow
1
Blue
1
—
03TQ25
03TQ25-ETCH
—
04TQ18
CUSTOM
CUSTOM
04TQ18-ETCH
“START”
111TQ25
11TQ25
—
05TQ18
—
04TQ25
CUSTOM
05TQ18-ETCH
Red
CUSTOM
04TQ25-ETCH
—
06TQ18
“STOP”
110TQ25
CUSTOM
06TQ18-ETCH
10TQ25
Yellow
1
Blue
1
1
112TQ25
20TQ25
Green
10TQ18
1
01TQ25-ETCH
21TQ25
“OFF”
217TQ25
—
05TQ25
CUSTOM
05TQ25-ETCH
—
06TQ25
CUSTOM
06TQ25-ETCH
Instructions for Ordering Laser Inscriptions
1
1. Identify part number to be inscribed.
1
2. Pick symbol from library and identify suffix code associated with the symbol.
3. Order part number already listed in the catalog with -ETCH suffix.
1
4. When placing an order by fax or Vistaline on the web, reference order item number and indicate appropriate
symbol code or desired text.
1
Example
To order a 25 mm green flush button plate with the inscription AUTO HAND:
1
1
Order Catalog Number 03TQ25-ETCH.
AUTO HAND inscription is found on Page V7-T1-127 in the M22 Symbols Library, suffix code is X91.
In the order notes, reference item number and suffix X91.
1
Note: For a complete list of available symbols, see Pages V7-T1-124 to V7-T1-130, M22 Symbols Library.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-36
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.3
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16
Technical Data and Specifications
1
RMQ-16
Specification
Description
Unit
Illuminated Pushbutton
Operators (Maintained)
Contact Elements
Illuminated Selector
Switches
1
Indicating Lights
1
General Technical Data
Standards
UL, CSA, IEC/EN 60 947, VDE 0660, CE
Lifespan, mechanical (operations)
x 105
100
30 (3)
3
—
Maximum operating frequency
Ops/h
3600
3600 (1800)
1800
—
Operating force
N
3
4
—
Operating torque
Nm
Degree of protection to IEC/EN 60 529
—
IP20 with ISH2,8
0.2
IP65
Climatic proofing
IP65
1
1
—
—
1
IP65
Damp heat, constant, to IEC 60 068-2-3/Damp heat, cyclical, to IEC 60 068-2-30
Ambient temperature
Open
°C
Enclosed
°C
Mounting position
–25 to 60
–25 to 60
–25 to 60
1
–25 to 60
1
–25 to 40
–25 to 40
–25 to 40
–25 to 40
As required
As required
As required
As required
40
40
1
0.5/1.0
0.5/1.0
1
Mechanical shock resistance to IEC 60 068-2-27
(half-sinusoidal shock, duration 11 ms)
g
40
40
Terminal capacity (min./max.)
mm2
0.5/1.0
0.5/1.0
Blade terminal
2.8 mm x 0.8 mm to DIN 46 244
Ferrule
1
2.8 mm x 0.8 mm to DIN 46 247 and IEC 60 760
Dimensions
See Page V7-T1-39
See Page V7-T1-39
See Page V7-T1-39
See Page V7-T1-39
4000
800
800
800
250
250
250
250
III/3
III/3
III/3
III/3
1
Contacts
Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp
V
Rated insulation voltage U i
V
Overvoltage category/pollution degree
Rated operational voltage U e (max.)
V
250
24
24
24
Rated operational current I e (max.)
A
4
—
—
—
Control circuit reliability at
24 Vdc/5 mA (Fault probability Hr)
<10–7, <1 fault in 107 operations
5 Vdc/1 mA (Fault probability Hr)
<5 x 10–6, < fault in 5 x 106 operations
Use of insulated ferrule ISH 2.8
From U e
>24 Vac/dc recommended
From U e
>24 Vac/dc recommended
>24 Vac/dc recommended
1
1
1
1
>24 Vac/dc recommended
>50 Vac or 120 Vdc is mandatory, even on unused blade terminals
Maximum short-circuit protective device
Fuseless
Fuse
1
1
Type
FAZ-B6
—
—
—
A gG/gL
10
—
—
—
1
Switching Capacity
Rated operational current I e
AC-15
24V
1
A
4
—
—
—
48V
A
4
—
—
—
110V
A
4
—
—
—
230V
A
4
—
—
—
DC-13
24V
A
3
—
—
—
42V
A
1.0
—
—
—
60V
A
0.8
—
—
—
110V
A
0.5
—
—
—
220V
A
0.2
—
—
—
UL/CSA Data
1
1
1
1
1
1
UL listed File No. E 29 184, Guide No. NKCR/CSA certified File No. 46 552 Class No. 321103
Blade terminal
0.110 x 0.032 in
0.110 x 0.032 in
300
24
Fast-on connector
0.110 x 0.032 in
0.110 x 0.032 in
1
0.110 x 0.032 in AMP #60 197-1, 62 050-1 or equivalent
Rated voltage maximum AC
Vac
24
24
Contact rating code AC
E10/E01
C300/Q300
—
—
—
Thermal continuous test current
A
2.5
—
—
—
Rated voltage maximum DC
Vdc
300
—
—
—
Contact rating code DC
E10/E01
C300/R300
—
—
—
Thermal continuous test current
A
2.5
—
—
—
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
V7-T1-37
1.3
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16
RMQ-16, continued
Specification
Description
Unit
Pushbutton Operators
(Maintained)
Selector Switches
Key-Released
Operators
Emergency Stop
Operators
Emergency Stop
Operators
(Illuminated) 1
1
General Technical Data
1
Lifespan, mechanical (operations)
x 105
30 (3)
3
3
0.5
0.5
Maximum operating frequency
Ops/h
3600 (1800)
1800
1800
600
600
—
—
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Standards
UL, CSA, IEC/EN 60 947, VDE 0660, CE
Operating force
N
4
Operating torque
Nm
—
Degree of protection to IEC/EN 60 529
0.2
IP65
IP65
Climatic proofing
0.4
IP65
25
25
—
—
IP65
IP65
Damp heat, constant, to IEC 60 068-2-3
Damp heat, cyclical, to IEC 60 068-2-30
Ambient temperature
Open
Enclosed
°C
–25 to 60
–25 to 60
–25 to 60
–25 to 60
°C
–25 to 40
–25 to 40
–25 to 40
–25 to 40
–25 to 40
As required
As required
As required
As required
As required
40
40
40
40
40
Mounting position
Mechanical shock resistance to
IEC 60 068-2-27 (half-sinusoidal shock,
duration 11 ms)
g
Terminal capacity (min./max.)
mm2
–25 to 60
—
—
—
—
0.5/1.0
Blade terminal
—
—
—
—
2.8 x 0.8 mm
Ferrule
—
—
—
—
2.8 x 0.8 mm
1
Dimensions
See Page V7-T1-39
See Page V7-T1-39
See Page V7-T1-39
See Page V7-T1-39
See Page V7-T1-39
1
Lifespan, Electrical AC-15 to IEC/EN 60 947-5-1 at 230V
1
1
l e = Rated operational current
Operations
5.0
x 10 6
4.0
1
E01
2.0
1
1
1
E10
3.0
0.9
1.0
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
1
0.4
0.3
1
0.2
1
1
0.1
0.1
1
1
1
0.2
0.3 0.4 0.5
0.7 0.9
2.0
0.6 0.8 1.0
3.0 4.0
l e [A]
Note
1 See illuminated selector switches on Page V7-T1-31 for contact values.
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-38
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16
1.3
Dimensions
1
Approximate Dimensions in mm [in]
1
Actuating and Indicator Elements
Square Style
Q…BS
M16 x 1
1
18.0
[0.71]
1
1
1
39.0 [1.54]
Ø25.0 [0.98]
Ø18.0 [0.71]
4.0 [0.16]
Q…D-_, Q…DR-_
1
24.0 [0.94]
Q…S_
1
Q…WK_
1
1
1
39.0 [1.54]
39.0 [1.54]
11.0 [0.43]
39.0 [1.54]
17.0
[0.67]
1
26.0 [1.02]
1
13.0 [0.51]
1
Q…LT-_, Q…LTR-_, Q…LF-_
Q…LH-_
Q…LWK_
1
1
1
49.0 [1.93]
49.0 [1.93]
11.0
[0.43]
16.0
[0.63]
1
49.0 [1.93]
1
26.0
[1.02]
1
Q25PV_, Q25LPV_
1
1
Ø 28.0
[1.10]
Ø 25.0
[0.98]
1
37.0 [1.46]
1
39.0 [1.54]
1
49.0 [1.93]
28.0 [1.10]
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-39
1.3
1
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16
Approximate Dimensions in mm [in]
Front Fixing
Q18, Q25, E89, SRA, VS, M16
18.0
[0.71]
E01, E10
ISH 2.8
[0.11]
1
1
1
49.0 [1.93]
6.0
[0.24]
58.0 [2.28]
1
1
1
Drilling Dimensions
Grid Dimension to
IEC/EN 60947
Minimum Grid Spacing
Dimension
Mounting Distance
Drilling
Q25
Q18
Mounting
18.0
[0.71]
1
25.0
[0.98]
1
1
16.2 [0.64]
+ 0.2
0
1
1
18.0 [0.71]
25.0
[0.98]
RMQ Screw Adapter
Anti-Rotation Feature
RMQ-16 Label Mount
SRA_
VS
Q25TS-_
1
14.9 [0.59]
1
12.0
[0.47]
22.0
[0.87]
1
17.8
[0.70]
38.0
[1.50]
1
1
17.8
[0.70]
18.5 [0.73]
13.0
[0.51]
1
5.6 [0.22]
1
1
1
25.0 [0.98]
Blanking Plates
Q25AS
1
4.0
[0.16]
1
1
38.0
[1.50]
1
13.0
[0.51]
1
12.0
[0.47]
1
25.0 [0.98]
1
V7-T1-40
Note
1 Exposed conductive part (metal).
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Contents
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Description
Page
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coding Adapter Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Symbols Library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1
V7-T1-42
V7-T1-105
V7-T1-112
V7-T1-113
V7-T1-117
V7-T1-123
1
1
1
1
Drawings
Online
1
1
1
1
Product Description
Eaton’s M22 industrial heavyduty pushbutton line offers a
wide array of functional,
attractive and ergonomically
designed illuminated and nonilluminated pushbuttons,
selector switches, push-pulls,
alternate action and twist-torelease operators. The
complete illuminated line is
only offered in LED light units
to ensure high-quality
brightness and up to 100,000
hours of LED illumination.
M22 operators are available
with either a silver or black
nylon colored or chrome
metal bezel. The spacesaving modular construction
of the M22 line makes onthe-job assembly fast and
simplifies the stocking of
both components and
complete devices.
Highly Modular and
Versatile Line
●
●
Field convertible functions
(pushbuttons and selector
switches), maintained to
momentary
Customizable laser
engraving capabilities
LED Indicators
●
●
●
All operators and components
are IEC/EN 60947 VDE 0660.
All operators carry an IP66
rating with some rated for
washdown environment with
IP67 and IP69K.
All pushbuttons, emergencystops, indicating lights,
potentiometers and selector
switches carry NEMA 4X, 13.
1
Marine classification
societies: Bureau Veritas
(BV), Germanischer Lloyd
(GL), and Lloyd’s Register of
Shipping (LR) approved.
1
100,000 hours of life
in high-vibration
environments
Lenses specifically
designed for LED
illumination
Multi-color LED in the
flat contact family allows
versatility in design and
reduces installation costs
and footprint
NEW
●
●
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Most pushbutton operators
and contact blocks exceed
5 million mechanical
operations
All components have IP66
rating, and some carry
IP67 and IP69K for
washdown environment;
see Page V7-T1-113 for
further technical data
1
1
1
1
1
Innovative Technologies
●
1
1
Rugged Design
●
Eaton has expanded M22
pilot devices with a metal
bezel option. The new M22M
pushbutton is an elegant
chrome metal bezel that is
attractive, durable and rugged
for heavy-duty environments.
M22M devices are configurable
and complement components
within the M22 line.
1
Standards and Certifications
ASi communicating
devices
Palm switches
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-41
1.4
1
●
1
●
1
●
1
●
1
1
1
1
1
22.5mm 22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Features
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
●
Benefits
Field convertible
pushbuttons and
mushroom operators from
maintained to momentary
status
Field convertible selector
switches from momentary
to maintained operation
and vice versa
LED offering only for all
illuminated operators
Laser engraved
pushbuttons, lenses and
enclosures
Heavy-duty construction
with a minimum of IP66
and UL NEMA® type 4X /
13 on front of panel
operators. Many operators
even carry IP67 and IP69K,
for the toughest
applications
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Silver, black or chrome
metal bezel now available
Snap-lock contact blocks
and light units for front or
base mounting
Notched hole mounting
with anti-rotation tab and
central nut mounting on
each operator
Over 5 million mechanical
operations and 1.6 million
electrical (reference
specification sheet)
Direct opening action
normally closed contacts
Unique and innovative
offerings, such as four-way
pushbuttons and USB/
RJ45 bulkhead interfaces
Screw or spring-cage
terminals
1
●
●
●
●
Modular construction
makes assembly fast and
simplifies stocking of
components and complete
devices
Field convertibility of
operator status for
pushbuttons and selector
switches helps distributors
and customers reduce
inventory and increase
functionality
LED offering only for
improved brightness
quality and up to 100,000
hours of operation
Plastic construction is
corrosion resistant.
Operators are designed
for rugged environments,
ideal for washdown
applications (reference
each operator’s IP ratings
and IEC/EN 60529 for ingress
protection definition)
●
●
●
●
●
●
Anti-rotation tab saves
installation time and
prevents operator rotation
High mechanical and
electrical life allows for use
in tough and challenging
applications
Laser inscription
capabilities allow for highquality, wear-resistant
markings
All normally closed (NC)
contacts are direct opening
action, i.e., NC contacts
are physically forced open
by direct linkage with the
pushbutton operator
in the unlikely event of
contact weld
Some M22 operators are
capable of communication
via ASi protocol
M22 offers USB and RJ45
connections
1
1
Product Selection Guide
1
Pushbuttons
1
1
1
1
1
1
Description
Non-illuminated, flush
Operator
Momentary
Product Selection
Pages V7-T1-47 to Pages V7-T1-50,
V7-T1-49
V7-T1-51
Maintained
Non-illuminated, extended
Illuminated, flush
Illuminated, extended
Momentary
Maintained
Momentary
Pages V7-T1-52,
V7-T1-53
Pages V7-T1-54,
V7-T1-55
Pages V7-T1-57 to Pages V7-T1-60,
V7-T1-59
V7-T1-61
Maintained
Momentary
Maintained
Pages V7-T1-62,
V7-T1-63
Pages V7-T1-64,
V7-T1-65
Indicating Lights
1
1
1
1
1
Description
Flat
Conical
Product Selection
Pages V7-T1-66,
V7-T1-67
Pages V7-T1-66,
V7-T1-67
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-42
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Emergency Stops
1
1
1
Description
Non-illuminated
Illuminated
Key release
Mechanical indication
Product Selection
Page V7-T1-69
Page V7-T1-69
Page V7-T1-70
Page V7-T1-70
1
1
1
Selector Switches
1
1
1
Non-illuminated
knob type
Non-illuminated
rotary type
Illuminated
Key-operated
Description
1
Product Selection
Pages V7-T1-74,
V7-T1-75
Pages V7-T1-76,
V7-T1-77
Pages V7-T1-79
to V7-T1-81
Pages V7-T1-82
to V7-T1-85
1
1
Mushroom Head Pushbuttons
1
1
1
Description
Non-illuminated
Non-illuminated
Operator
Momentary
Maintained
Product Selection
Pages V7-T1-88,
V7-T1-89
Pages V7-T1-90,
V7-T1-91
1
1
1
1
Double Pushbuttons
1
1
1
Description
Extended pushbuttons
and center light
Flush top and center
light, extended bottom
Flush pushbuttons and
center light
Operator
Momentary
Momentary
—
Product Selection
Page V7-T1-93
Page V7-T1-94
Page V7-T1-94
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-43
1.4
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Four-Way Pushbuttons
Bulkhead Interfaces
1
1
1
1
1
Description
Non-interlocked
Interlocked
Description
Bulkhead interfaces
Operator
Momentary
Maintained
Product Selection
Page V7-T1-101
Product Selection
Page V7-T1-97
Page V7-T1-97
1
1
ASi Adapter Modules
Joysticks
1
1
1
1
1
Description
Joysticks
Description
ASi adapter modules
Product Selection
Page V7-T1-98
Product Selection
Page V7-T1-102
Palm Switches
Potentiometers
1
1
1
1
Description
Potentiometers
Description
Palm switches
1
Product Selection
Page V7-T1-100
Product Selection
Page V7-T1-103
1
Acoustic Devices
Assembled Control Stations
1
1
1
Description
Acoustic devices
Description
Assembled control stations
1
Product Selection
Page V7-T1-100
Product Selection
Page V7-T1-10
1
Through-the-Door Operators
1
1
1
1
Description
Through-the-door operators
Product Selection
Page V7-T1-101
1
1
V7-T1-44
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
M22-_
1.4
Point-of-Purchase Units
1
Color
Type
Contact
Configuration 1
Catalog Number
Black
Flush momentary
NO/NC
M22-D-S-K11-P
Red
Extended momentary
NO/NC
M22-DH-R-K11-P
Green
Flush momentary
NO/NC
M22-D-G-K11-P
Red
Ext. illuminated (12–30V) momentary
NO/NC
M22-DLH-R-K11-R-P
Red
Ext. illuminated (85–264V) momentary
NO/NC
M22-DLH-R-K11-230R-P
White
Flush illuminated (12–30V) maintained
NO/NC
M22-DRL-W-K11-W-P
White
Flush illuminated (85–264V) maintained
NO/NC
M22-DRL-W-K11-230W-P
Red
Indicating light (12–30V)
—
M22-L-R-R-P
Green
Indicating light (12–30V)
—
M22-L-G-G-P
Red
Indicting light (85–264V)
—
M22-L-R-230R-P
Green
Indicating light (85–264 Vac)
—
M22-L-G-230G-P
Red
Twist-to-release E-stop
1NO/2NC
M22-PVT-K12-P
Red
Illuminated (12–30V) push-pull E-stop
1NO/2NC
M22-PVL-K12-R-P
Red
Illuminated (85–264V) push-pull E-stop
1NO/2NC
M22-PVL-K12-230R-P
—
Two-position maintained V selector switch
NO/NC
M22-WKV-K11-P
—
Three-position momentary selector switch
NO/NC
M22-WK3-K22-P
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Note
1 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-45
1.4
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Contents
Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated
Description
1
Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated
Non-Illuminated, Flush, Momentary . . . . . . . .
Non-Illuminated, Flush, Maintained . . . . . . . . .
Non-Illuminated, Extended, Momentary . . . . .
Non-Illuminated, Extended, Maintained . . . . . .
Illuminated, Flush, Momentary . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated, Flush, Maintained . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated, Extended, Momentary . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated, Extended, Maintained . . . . . . . . .
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated
1
Product Description
Features
Eaton’s M22 pushbutton
line is a complete, modular
and versatile offering. From
field-convertible maintained
operators to customizable
laser engraved buttons, the
M22 pushbutton line provides
endless opportunity for
flexibility and reduced
inventory. Each operator
type provides options for
ordering as complete or
component parts allowing
for a perfect fit for each
application. All of this
flexibility comes in a very
rugged design.
●
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
●
●
●
Field convertible from
maintained to momentary
(available on maintained
pushbuttons only)
Customizable laser
engraving on all buttons
LED offering only for
improved brightness
quality and up to 100,000
hours of operation
More than five million
mechanical operations on
momentary and 1 million
on maintained pushbuttons
●
●
Modular construction
makes assembly fast and
simplifies stocking of
components and complete
devices
Capable of communicating
via ASi protocol with ASi
adapter modules
Protection Type
●
IP67, IP69K
●
NEMA 4X, 13
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-46
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Page
V7-T1-47
V7-T1-50
V7-T1-52
V7-T1-54
V7-T1-57
V7-T1-60
V7-T1-62
V7-T1-64
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Catalog Number Selection
1
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons
M22 – D – S – X0 – K10
Bezel
M22 = Silver
M22S = Black
M22M = Metal
D=
DH =
DG =
DR =
DGH =
DRH =
1
Operator Type
Flush momentary
Extended momentary
Flush with guard 1
Flush maintained
Extended momentary with guard 1
Extended maintained
Button Plate Color
G = Green
S = Black
Y = Yellow
R = Red
B = Blue
W = White
GB0 =
GB1 =
GB2 =
GB3 =
GB4 =
GB5 =
GB6 =
GB14 =
GB15 =
GB16 =
1
Inscription
STOP
START
CLOSE
UP
DOWN
OFF
ON
RESET
FORWARD
REVERSE
X0 =
X1 =
X4 =
X5 =
X6 =
X7 =
X8 =
K10 =
K01 =
K20 =
K02 =
K11 =
1
Contact Blocks
1NO
K30 = 3NO
1NC
K03 = 3NC
2NO
K21 = 2NO-1NC
2NC
K12 = 1NO-2NC
1NO-1NC
1
1
1
1
1
Silver bezel only.
1
Product Selection
1
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary
M22-D-G-K10
1
Complete Devices
Button
Color
Contact Block
Configuration 1
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Metal Bezel
Catalog Number
1
Black
NO
M22-D-S-K10
M22S-D-S-K10
M22M-D-S-K10
NC
M22-D-S-K01
M22S-D-S-K01
M22M-D-S-K01
1
2NO
M22-D-S-K20
M22S-D-S-K20
M22M-D-S-K20
2NC
M22-D-S-K02
M22S-D-S-K02
M22M-D-S-K02
1NO-1NC
M22-D-S-K11
M22S-D-S-K11
M22M-D-S-K11
NO
M22-D-R-K10
M22S-D-R-K10
M22M-D-R-K10
NC
M22-D-R-K01
M22S-D-R-K01
M22M-D-R-K01
2NO
M22-D-R-K20
M22S-D-R-K20
M22M-D-R-K20
2NC
M22-D-R-K02
M22S-D-R-K02
M22M-D-R-K02
1NO-1NC
M22-D-R-K11
M22S-D-R-K11
M22M-D-R-K11
NO
M22-D-G-K10
M22S-D-G-K10
M22M-D-G-K10
NC
M22-D-G-K01
M22S-D-G-K01
M22M-D-G-K01
2NO
M22-D-G-K20
M22S-D-G-K20
M22M-D-G-K20
2NC
M22-D-G-K02
M22S-D-G-K02
M22M-D-G-K02
1NO-1NC
M22-D-G-K11
M22S-D-G-K11
M22M-D-G-K11
M22S-D-G-K10
Red
M22M-D-G-K10
Green
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Note
1
All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-47
1.4
1
1
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary
M22-D-G
1
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
M22S-D-G
Operators Only 1
Button
Color
Inscription
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Metal Bezel
Catalog Number
Black
—
M22-D-S
M22S-D-S
M22M-D-S
Red
—
M22-D-R
M22S-D-R
M22M-D-R
STOP
M22-D-R-GB0
M22S-D-R-GB0
—
M22M-D-R-X0
Green
1
1
1
1
M22M-D-G
M22-D-R-X0
M22S-D-R-X0
—
M22-D-G
M22S-D-G
M22M-D-G
START
M22-D-G-GB1
M22S-D-G-GB1
M22M-D-G-GB1
M22-D-G-X1
M22S-D-G-X1
M22M-D-G-X1
White
—
M22-D-W
M22S-D-W
M22M-D-W
Blue
—
M22-D-B
M22S-D-B
M22M-D-B
Yellow
—
M22-D-Y
M22S-D-Y
M22M-D-Y
—
—
M22-D-X-SRG 2
M22S-D-X-SRG 2
M22M-D-X-SRG 2
—
M22-D-X-SWRGYB 3
M22S-D-X-SWRGYB 3
M22M-D-X-SWRGYB 3
1
1
1
1
M22-DG-G
Silver Guarded
Button
Color
Inscription
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black
—
M22-DG-S
1
Red
—
M22-DG-R
Green
—
M22-DG-G
1
White
—
M22-DG-W
Blue
—
M22-DG-B
Yellow
—
M22-DG-Y
—
—
M22-DG-X-SRG 2
—
M22-DG-X-SWRGYB 3
1
1
1
1
Notes
1 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
2 Buttonless operator comes with three color buttons (black, red, green).
3 Buttonless operator comes with all six color buttons (black, white, red, green, yellow, blue).
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-48
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.4
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary
1
1
1
ma
x
thic . 5mm
kne
ss
1
1
1
Note: Included
with operator.
1
Components
M22-XD-G
Button Plates 1
Buttonless Operator
Color
Inscription
Catalog Number
Black
—
Custom
STOP
START
CLOSE
UP
DOWN
OFF
ON
TEST
FORWARD
REVERSE
RAISE
LOWER
M22-XD-S 2
M22-XD-S-ETCH 3
M22-XD-S-GB0
M22-XD-S-GB1
M22-XD-S-GB2
M22-XD-S-GB3
M22-XD-S-GB4
M22-XD-S-GB5
M22-XD-S-GB6
M22-XD-S-GB9
M22-XD-S-GB15
M22-XD-S-GB16
M22-XD-S-GB17
M22-XD-S-GB18
Red
Green
Blue
—
Custom
STOP
OFF
—
Custom
START
ON
—
Custom
RESET
White
Yellow
—
Custom
START
—
Custom
Black, red, green —
Black, white,
—
red, green,
yellow, blue
M22-XD-S-X0
M22-XD-S-X1
M22-XD-S-X2
M22-XD-S-X4
M22-XD-S-X5
M22-XD-S-X7
M22-XD-R 2
M22-XD-R-ETCH 3
M22-XD-R-GB0
M22-XD-R-GB5
M22-XD-R-X0
M22-XD-G 2
M22-XD-G-ETCH 3
M22-XD-G-GB1
M22-XD-G-GB6
M22-XD-G-X1
M22-XD-B 2
M22-XD-B-ETCH 3
M22-XD-B-GB14
M22-XD-B-X6
M22-XD-W 2
M22-XD-W-ETCH 3
M22-XD-W-GB1
M22-XD-W-X1
M22-XD-Y 2
M22-XD-Y-ETCH 3
M22-XD-SRG
M22-XD-SWRGYB
1
1
1
Silver Bezel
Catalog
Number 4
Black Bezel
Catalog
Number 4
Metal Bezel
Catalog
Number 4
1
M22-D-X
M22S-D-X
M22M-D-X
1
Silver Guarded
1
1
1
Silver Bezel
Catalog
Number 4
1
M22-DG-X
1
M22-K10
M22-FK01
1
Contact Blocks 1
Terminal
Type
Contact
Configuration 5
Catalog Number
Screw
NO
NO, early-make
NC
NC, late-break
NO
NC
NC, late-break
2NO
2NC
NO-NC
NC
NO
M22-K10
M22-K10P
M22-K01
M22-K01D
M22-CK10
M22-CK01
M22-CK01D
M22-CK20
M22-CK02
M22-CK11
M22-FK01 6
M22-FK10 6
Spring-cage
Notes
1 For complete listing of available button plates and contact blocks, see Accessories,
Pages V7-T1-105 to V7-T1-110.
2 Minimum order quantity of (10).
3 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols
Library (see Pages V7-T1-123 to V7-T1-130) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XD-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
4
Includes contact block mounting adapter.
5
All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
6
Additional contacts may not be stacked behind M22-F type contact blocks,
M22-F can be stacked behind standard M22 contacts only.
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-49
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.4
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Maintained 1
M22-DR-S
Operators Only 2
1
Button Color
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Metal Bezel
Catalog Number
Black
M22-DR-S
M22S-DR-S
M22M-DR-S
1
Red
M22-DR-R
M22S-DR-R
M22M-DR-R
Green
M22-DR-G
M22S-DR-G
M22M-DR-G
White
M22-DR-W
M22S-DR-W
M22M-DR-W
Blue
M22-DR-B
M22S-DR-B
M22M-DR-B
Yellow
M22-DR-Y
M22S-DR-Y
M22M-DR-Y
3
M22-DR-X-SRG
M22S-DR-X-SRG
M22M-DR-X-SRG
4
M22-DR-X-SWRGYB
M22S-DR-X-SWRGYB
M22M-DR-X-SWRGYB
1
M22S-DR-S
1
1
1
1
M22M-DR-S
1
1
1
Notes
1 Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by switching the locking ring,
which is accessible through the side of the operator body.
2 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
3 Buttonless operator comes with three color buttons (black, red, green).
4 Buttonless operator comes with all six color buttons (black, white, red, green, yellow, blue).
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Note: This pilot device features a selectable function switch that enables the device
to be set to either maintained or momentary operation.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-50
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.4
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Maintained 1
1
1
1
ma
x
thic . 5mm
kne
ss
1
1
1
Note: Included
with operator.
1
Components
M22-XD-S
Button Plates 2
Inscription
Catalog Number
Black
—
Custom
M22-XD-S 3
M22-XD-S-ETCH 4
STOP
START
CLOSE
UP
DOWN
OFF
ON
TEST
FORWARD
REVERSE
RAISE
LOWER
M22-XD-S-GB0
M22-XD-S-GB1
M22-XD-S-GB2
M22-XD-S-GB3
M22-XD-S-GB4
M22-XD-S-GB5
M22-XD-S-GB6
M22-XD-S-GB9
M22-XD-S-GB15
M22-XD-S-GB16
M22-XD-S-GB17
M22-XD-S-GB18
—
Custom
M22-XD-S-X0
M22-XD-S-X1
M22-XD-S-X2
M22-XD-S-X4
M22-XD-S-X5
M22-XD-S-X7
M22-XD-R 3
M22-XD-R-ETCH 4
Red
STOP
OFF
Green
Blue
—
Custom
START
ON
—
Custom
RESET
White
—
Custom
START
Yellow
—
Custom
—
—
Black, red, green
Black, white, red,
green, yellow, blue
1
Buttonless Operator
Color
M22-XD-R-GB0
M22-XD-R-GB5
M22-XD-R-X0
M22-XD-G 3
M22-XD-G-ETCH 4
M22-XD-G-GB1
M22-XD-G-GB6
M22-XD-G-X1
M22-XD-B 3
M22-XD-B-ETCH 4
M22-XD-B-GB14
M22-XD-B-X6
M22-XD-W 3
M22-XD-W-ETCH 4
M22-XD-W-GB1
M22-XD-W-X1
M22-XD-Y 3
M22-XD-Y-ETCH 4
M22-XD-SRG
M22-XD-SWRGYB
1
1
Silver Bezel
Catalog
Number 5
Black Bezel
Catalog
Number 5
Metal Bezel
Catalog
Number 5
M22-DR-X
M22S-DR-X
M22M-DR-X
1
1
1
M22-K10
M22-FK01
Contact Blocks
2
1
Terminal
Type
Contact
Configuration 6
Catalog Number
Screw
NO
M22-K10
NO, early-make
M22-K10P
NC
M22-K01
NC, late-break
M22-K01D
NO
M22-CK10
NC
M22-CK01
NC, late-break
M22-CK01D
2NO
M22-CK20
2NC
M22-CK02
NO-NC
M22-CK11
Spring-cage
1
1
1
1
1
1
7
NC
M22-FK01
NO
M22-FK10 7
Notes
1 Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by switching
the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body.
2 For complete listing of available button plates and contact blocks, see Accessories,
Pages V7-T1-105 to V7-T1-110.
3 Minimum order quantity of (10).
4 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols
Library (see Pages V7-T1-123 to V7-T1-130) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XD-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
5 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
6 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
7 Additional contacts may not be stacked behind M22-F type contact blocks,
M22-F can be stacked behind standard M22 contacts only.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-51
1.4
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Momentary
M22-DH-R-K10
Complete Devices
1
Button
Color
Contact Block
Configuration 1
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Metal Bezel
Catalog Number
1
Red
NO
M22-DH-R-K10
M22S-DH-R-K10
M22M-DH-R-K10
NC
M22-DH-R-K01
M22S-DH-R-K01
M22M-DH-R-K01
2NO
M22-DH-R-K20
M22S-DH-R-K20
M22M-DH-R-K20
2NC
M22-DH-R-K02
M22S-DH-R-K02
M22M-DH-R-K02
1NO-1NC
M22-DH-R-K11
M22S-DH-R-K11
M22M-DH-R-K11
1
M22S-DH-R-K10
1
1
1
M22M-DH-R-K10
1
1
1
M22-DGH-R-K10
Silver Guarded
Button
Color
Contact Block
Configuration 1
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Red
NO
M22-DGH-R-K10
1
NC
M22-DGH-R-K01
2NO
M22-DGH-R-K20
1
2NC
M22-DGH-R-K02
1NO-1NC
M22-DGH-R-K11
1
1
M22-DH-R
Operators Only 2
1
Button
Color
Inscription
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Metal Bezel
Catalog Number
1
Black
—
M22-DH-S
M22S-DH-S
M22M-DH-S
Red
—
M22-DH-R
M22S-DH-R
M22M-DH-R
STOP
M22-DH-R-GB0
M22S-DH-R-GB0
M22M-DH-R-GB0
M22-DH-R-X0
M22S-DH-R-X0
M22M-DH-R-X0
1
M22S-DH-R
1
1
1
M22M-DH-R
1
Green
—
M22-DH-G
M22S-DH-G
M22M-DH-G
White
—
M22-DH-W
M22S-DH-W
M22M-DH-W
Blue
—
M22-DH-B
M22S-DH-B
M22M-DH-B
Yellow
—
M22-DH-Y
M22S-DH-Y
M22M-DH-Y
3
—
M22-DH-X-SRG
M22S-DH-X-SRG
M22M-DH-X-SRG
4
—
M22-DH-X-SWRGYB
M22S-DH-X-SWRGYB M22M-DH-X-SWRGYB
1
1
M22-DGH-R-K10
1
1
Silver Guarded
Button
Color
Inscription
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black
—
M22-DGH-S
Red
—
M22-DGH-R
STOP
M22-DGH-R-GB0
M22-DGH-R-X0
1
Green
—
M22-DGH-G
1
White
—
M22-DGH-W
Blue
—
M22-DGH-B
1
Yellow
—
M22-DGH-Y
Notes
1 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
2 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
3 Buttonless operator comes with three color buttons (black, red, green).
4 Buttonless operator comes with all six color buttons (black, white, red, green, yellow, blue).
1
1
V7-T1-52
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.4
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Momentary
1
1
1
ma
x
thic . 5mm
kne
ss
1
1
1
Note: Included
with operator.
1
Components
M22-XDH-R
Button Plates 1
Buttonless Operator
Color
Inscription
Catalog Number
Black
—
Custom
STOP
START
CLOSE
UP
DOWN
OFF
ON
TEST
FORWARD
REVERSE
RAISE
LOWER
M22-XDH-S 2
M22-XDH-S-ETCH 3
M22-XDH-S-GB0
M22-XDH-S-GB1
M22-XDH-S-GB2
M22-XDH-S-GB3
M22-XDH-S-GB4
M22-XDH-S-GB5
M22-XDH-S-GB6
M22-XDH-S-GB9
M22-XDH-S-GB15
M22-XDH-S-GB16
M22-XDH-S-GB17
M22-XDH-S-GB18
Red
Green
—
Custom
STOP
OFF
—
Custom
START
ON
Blue
—
Custom
RESET
White
Yellow
—
Custom
START
—
Custom
Black, red, green —
Black, white, red, —
green, yellow, blue
M22-XDH-S-X0
M22-XDH-S-X1
M22-XDH-S-X2
M22-XDH-S-X4
M22-XDH-S-X5
M22-XDH-S-X7
M22-XDH-R 2
M22-XDH-R-ETCH 3
M22-XDH-R-GB0
M22-XDH-R-GB5
M22-XDH-R-X0
M22-XDH-G 2
M22-XDH-G-ETCH 3
M22-XDH-G-GB1
M22-XDH-G-GB6
M22-XDH-G-X1
M22-XDH-B 2
M22-XDH-B-ETCH 3
M22-XDH-B-GB14
M22-XDH-B-X6
M22-XDH-W 2
M22-XDH-W-ETCH 3
M22-XDH-W-GB1
M22-XDH-W-X1
M22-XDH-Y 2
M22-XDH-Y-ETCH 3
M22-XDH-SRG
M22-XDH-SWRGYB
1
1
1
Silver Bezel
Catalog
Number 4
Black Bezel
Catalog
Number 4
Metal Bezel
Catalog
Number 4
1
M22-D-X
M22S-D-X
M22M-D-X
1
Silver Guarded
1
1
1
Silver Bezel
Catalog
Number 4
1
M22-DG-X
1
M22-K10
M22-FK01
1
Contact Blocks 1
Terminal
Type
Contact
Configuration 5
Catalog Number
Screw
NO
NO, early-make
NC
NC, late-break
NO
NC
NC, late-break
2NO
2NC
NO-NC
NC
NO
M22-K10
M22-K10P
M22-K01
M22-K01D
M22-CK10
M22-CK01
M22-CK01D
M22-CK20
M22-CK02
M22-CK11
M22-FK01 6
M22-FK10 6
Spring-cage
Notes
1
For complete listing of available button plates and contact blocks, see Accessories,
Pages V7-T1-105 to V7-T1-110.
2 Minimum order quantity of (10).
3 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols
Library (see Pages V7-T1-123 to V7-T1-130) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XDH-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
4 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
5 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
6 Additional contacts may not be stacked behind M22-F type contact blocks,
M22-F can be stacked behind standard M22 contacts only.
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-53
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.4
1
1
M22-DRH-W
1
M22S-DRH-W
1
1
1
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Maintained 1
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Operators Only 2
Button Color
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Metal Bezel
Catalog Number
Black
M22-DRH-S
M22S-DRH-S
M22M-DRH-S
Red
M22-DRH-R
M22S-DRH-R
M22M-DRH-R
Green
M22-DRH-G
M22S-DRH-G
M22M-DRH-G
White
M22-DRH-W
M22S-DRH-W
M22M-DRH-W
Blue
M22-DRH-B
M22S-DRH-B
M22M-DRH-B
Yellow
M22-DRH-Y
M22S-DRH-Y
M22M-DRH-Y
3
M22-DRH-X-SRG
M22S-DRH-X-SRG
M22M-DRH-X-SRG
4
M22-DRH-X-SWRGYB
M22S-DRH-X-SWRGYB
M22M-DRH-X-SWRGYB
M22M-DRH-W
1
1
1
Notes
1 Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by switching the locking ring,
which is accessible through the side of the operator body.
2 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
3 Buttonless operator comes with three color buttons (black, red, green).
4 Buttonless operator comes with all six color buttons (black, white, red, green, yellow, blue).
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Note: This pilot device features a selectable function switch that enables the device
to be set to either maintained or momentary operation.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-54
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.4
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Maintained 1
1
1
1
ma
x
thic . 5mm
kne
ss
1
1
1
Note: Included
with operator.
1
Components
M22-XDH-W
Button Plates 2
Inscription
Catalog Number
Black
—
Custom
M22-XDH-S 3
M22-XDH-S-ETCH 4
STOP
START
CLOSE
UP
DOWN
OFF
ON
TEST
FORWARD
REVERSE
RAISE
LOWER
M22-XDH-S-GB0
M22-XDH-S-GB1
M22-XDH-S-GB2
M22-XDH-S-GB3
M22-XDH-S-GB4
M22-XDH-S-GB5
M22-XDH-S-GB6
M22-XDH-S-GB9
M22-XDH-S-GB15
M22-XDH-S-GB16
M22-XDH-S-GB17
M22-XDH-S-GB18
—
Custom
M22-XDH-S-X0
M22-XDH-S-X1
M22-XDH-S-X2
M22-XDH-S-X4
M22-XDH-S-X5
M22-XDH-S-X7
M22-XDH-R 3
M22-XDH-R-ETCH 4
Red
STOP
OFF
Green
Blue
—
Custom
START
ON
—
Custom
RESET
White
—
Custom
START
Yellow
—
Custom
—
—
Black, red, green
Black, white,
red, green, yellow,
blue
1
Buttonless Operator
Color
M22-XDH-R-GB0
M22-XDH-R-GB5
M22-XDH-R-X0
M22-XDH-G 3
M22-XDH-G-ETCH 4
M22-XDH-G-GB1
M22-XDH-G-GB6
M22-XDH-G-X1
M22-XDH-B 3
M22-XDH-B-ETCH 4
M22-XDH-B-GB14
M22-XDH-B-X6
M22-XDH-W 3
M22-XDH-W-ETCH 4
M22-XDH-W-GB1
M22-XDH-W-X1
M22-XDH-Y 3
M22-XDH-Y-ETCH 4
M22-XDH-SRG
M22-XDH-SWRGYB
1
1
Silver Bezel
Catalog
Number 5
Black Bezel
Catalog
Number 5
Metal Bezel
Catalog
Number 5
M22-DR-X
M22S-DR-X
M22M-DR-X
1
1
1
M22-K10
M22-FK01
Contact Blocks
2
1
Terminal
Type
Contact
Configuration 6
Catalog Number
Screw
NO
NO, early-make
NC
NC, late-break
NO
NC
NC, late-break
2NO
2NC
NO-NC
NC
M22-K10
M22-K10P
M22-K01
M22-K01D
M22-CK10
M22-CK01
M22-CK01D
M22-CK20
M22-CK02
M22-CK11
M22-FK01 7
NO
M22-FK10 7
Spring-cage
Notes
1 Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by
switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body.
2 For complete listing of available button plates and contact blocks, see Accessories,
Pages V7-T1-105 to V7-T1-110.
3 Minimum order quantity of (10).
4 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols
Library (see Pages V7-T1-123 to V7-T1-130) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XDH-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
5 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
6 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
7 Additional contacts may not be stacked behind M22-F type contact blocks,
M22-F can be stacked behind standard M22 contacts only.
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-55
1.4
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
Illuminated Pushbuttons
M22 – DRL – R – GB0 – K10 – 230R
1
1
Bezel
M22 = Silver
M22S = Black
M22M = Metal
1
1
1
DL =
DLH =
DGL =
DRL =
DGLH =
DRLH =
1
1
1
1
Operator Type
Illuminated flush momentary
Illuminated extended momentary
Illuminated flush momentary with guard 1
Illuminated flush maintained
Illuminated extended momentary with guard 1
Illuminated extended maintained
W=
R=
G=
Y=
B=
A=
Lens Color
White
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
Amber
K10 =
K01 =
K20 =
K02 =
K11 =
Contact Blocks
1NO
K30 = 3NO
1NC
K03 = 3NC
2NO
K21 = 2NO-1NC
2NC
K12 = 1NO-2NC
1NO-1NC
Light Units
12–30 Vac/Vdc
W = White
R = Red
G = Green
B = Blue
85–264 Vac
230W = White
230R = Red
230G = Green
230B = Blue
Silver bezel only.
Inscription
GB0 = STOP
GB1 = START
GB2 = CLOSE
GB3 = UP
GB4 = DOWN
GB5 = OFF
GB6 = ON
GB14 = RESET
GB15 = FORWARD
GB16 = REVERSE
X0 =
X1 =
X4 =
X5 =
X6 =
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-56
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.4
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Product Selection
1
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary
M22-DL-G-K01-G
1
Complete Devices
Button
Color
Contact Block
Configuration 1
Light Unit Voltage
Red
NC
12–30 Vac/Vdc
NC
85–264 Vac
2NC
12–30 Vac/Vdc
2NC
85–264 Vac
1NO/1NC
1NO/1NC
NO
M22S-DL-G-K01-G
Green
M22M-DL-G-K01-G
White
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Metal Bezel
Catalog Number
1
M22-DL-R-K01-R
M22S-DL-R-K01-R
M22M-DL-R-K01-R
M22-DL-R-K01-230R
M22S-DL-R-K01-230R
M22M-DL-R-K01-230R
1
M22-DL-R-K02-R
M22S-DL-R-K02-R
M22M-DL-R-K02-R
M22-DL-R-K02-230R
M22S-DL-R-K02-230R
M22M-DL-R-K02-230R
12–30 Vac/Vdc
M22-DL-R-K11-R
M22S-DL-R-K11-R
M22M-DL-R-K11-R
85–264 Vac
M22-DL-R-K11-230R
M22S-DL-R-K11-230R
M22M-DL-R-K11-230R
12–30 Vac/Vdc
M22-DL-G-K10-G
M22S-DL-G-K10-G
M22M-DL-G-K10-G
1
NO
85–264 Vac
M22-DL-G-K10-230G
M22S-DL-G-K10-230G
M22M-DL-G-K10-230G
2NO
12–30 Vac/Vdc
M22-DL-G-K20-G
M22S-DL-G-K20-G
M22M-DL-G-K20-G
2NO
85–264 Vac
M22-DL-G-K20-230G
M22S-DL-G-K20-230G
M22M-DL-G-K20-230G
1NO/1NC
12–30 Vac/Vdc
M22-DL-G-K11-G
M22S-DL-G-K11-G
M22M-DL-G-K11-G
1NO/1NC
85–264 Vac
M22-DL-G-K11-230G
M22S-DL-G-K11-230G
M22M-DL-G-K11-230G
NO
12–30 Vac/Vdc
M22-DL-W-K10-W
M22S-DL-W-K10-W
—
NO
85–264 Vac
M22-DL-W-K10-230W
M22S-DL-W-K10-230W
M22M-DL-W-K10-230W
2NO
12–30 Vac/Vdc
M22-DL-W-K20-W
M22S-DL-W-K20-W
—
2NO
85–264 Vac
M22-DL-W-K20-230W
M22S-DL-W-K20-230W
M22M-DL-W-K20-230W
1NO/1NC
12–30 Vac/Vdc
M22-DL-W-K11-W
M22S-DL-W-K11-W
—
1NO/1NC
85–264 Vac
M22-DL-W-K11-230W
M22S-DL-W-K11-230W
M22M-DL-W-K11-230W
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Note
1 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-57
1.4
1
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary
M22-DL-G
1
1
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
M22S-DL-G
1
Operators Only 1
Button Color
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Metal Bezel
Catalog Number
Red
M22-DL-R
M22S-DL-R
M22M-DL-R
Green
M22-DL-G
M22S-DL-G
M22M-DL-G
White
M22-DL-W
M22S-DL-W
M22M-DL-W
Blue
M22-DL-B
M22S-DL-B
M22M-DL-B
Yellow
M22-DL-Y
M22S-DL-Y
M22M-DL-Y
Amber
M22-DL-A
M22S-DL-A
M22M-DL-A
1
1
M22M-DL-G
1
1
1
M22-DGL-G
1
1
1
1
Silver Guarded
Button Color
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Red
M22-DGL-R
Green
M22-DGL-G
White
M22-DGL-W
Blue
M22-DGL-B
Yellow
M22-DGL-Y
Note
1 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-58
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary
1
1
1
1
ma
x
thic . 5mm
kne
ss
1
1
Note: Included
with operator.
1
Components
M22-XDL-G
Button Lenses 1
Color
Inscription
Catalog Number
Red
—
Custom
STOP
OFF
M22-XDL-R 2
M22-XDL-R-ETCH 3
M22-XDL-R-GB0
M22-XDL-R-GB5
M22-XDL-R-X0
M22-XDL-G 2
M22-XDL-G-ETCH 3
M22-XDL-G-GB1
M22-XDL-G-GB6
M22-XDL-G-X1
M22-XDL-B 2
Green
Blue
—
Custom
START
ON
—
Custom
RESET
White
Yellow
Amber
M22-DL-X
M22-LED-W
—
Custom
—
Custom
—
Custom
M22-XDL-B-ETCH 3
M22-XDL-B-GB14
M22-XDL-B-X6
M22-XDL-W 2
M22-XDL-W-ETCH 3
M22-XDL-Y 2
M22-XDL-Y-ETCH 3
M22-XDL-A
M22-XDL-A-ETCH
Black Bezel
Catalog
Number 4
Metal Bezel
Catalog
Number 4
M22-DL-X
M22S-DL-X
M22M-DL-X
M22S-DL-X
LED
Color
Light Unit
Voltage
Screw
White
Red
Green
Blue
White
Red
Green
Blue
White
Red
Green
Blue
Red/Green/
Yellow
Red, Green,
Blue, Yellow,
White, Violet,
Turquoise
12–30
Vac/Vdc
M22-FLED-_
Spring-cage
Buttonless Operator
Silver Bezel
Catalog
Number 4
Terminal
Type
Screw
M22-K10
85–264
Vac
12–30
Vac/Vdc
24 Vdc
Catalog Number
M22-LED-W
M22-LED-R
M22-LED-G
M22-LED-B
M22-LED230-W
M22-LED230-R
M22-LED230-G
M22-LED230-B
M22-FLED-W
M22-FLED-R
M22-FLED-G
M22-FLED-B
M22-FLED-RG 5
M22-FLED-RGB
5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Terminal
Type
Contact
Configuration 6
Catalog Number
Screw
NO
NO, early-make
NC
NC, late-break
NO
NC
NC, late-break
2NO
2NC
NO-NC
NC
NO
M22-K10
M22-K10P
M22-K01
M22-K01D
M22-CK10
M22-CK01
M22-CK01D
M22-CK20
M22-CK02
M22-CK11
M22-FK01 7
M22-FK10 7
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
M22M-DL-X
M22-DGL-X
1
1
Contact Blocks 1
Spring-cage
M22-FK01
1
Light Units 1
Silver Guarded
Silver Bezel
Catalog
Number 4
M22-DGL-X
Notes
1 For complete listing of available button lenses, light units and contact blocks, see
Accessories, Pages V7-T1-105 to V7-T1-110.
2 Minimum order quantity of (10).
3 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols
Library (see Pages V7-T1-123 to V7-T1-130) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XDL-R-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
4
Includes contact block mounting adapter.
5
Please see color input key on Page V7-T1-108.
6
All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
7
Additional contacts may not be stacked behind M22-F type contact blocks,
M22-F can be stacked behind standard M22 contacts only.
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-59
1
1
1
1
1
1.4
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Maintained 1
M22-DRL-W-K10-W
Complete Devices
Button
Color
1
White
1
1
M22S-DRL-W-K10-W
1
1
1
M22M-DRL-W-K10-W
Contact Block
Configuration 2
Light Unit Voltage
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Metal Bezel
Catalog Number
M22M-DRL-W-K10-W
NO
12–30 Vac/Vdc
M22-DRL-W-K10-W
M22S-DRL-W-K10-W
NO
85–264 Vac
M22-DRL-W-K10-230W
M22S-DRL-W-K10-230W
M22M-DRL-W-K10-230W
NC
12–30 Vac/Vdc
M22-DRL-W-K01-W
M22S-DRL-W-K01-W
M22M-DRL-W-K01-W
NC
85–264 Vac
M22-DRL-W-K01-230W
M22S-DRL-W-K01-230W
M22M-DRL-W-K01-230W
2NO
12–30 Vac/Vdc
M22-DRL-W-K20-W
M22S-DRL-W-K20-W
M22M-DRL-W-K20-W
2NO
85–264 Vac
M22-DRL-W-K20-230W
M22S-DRL-W-K20-230W
M22M-DRL-W-K20-230W
2NC
12–30 Vac/Vdc
M22-DRL-W-K02-W
M22S-DRL-W-K02-W
M22M-DRL-W-K02-W
2NC
85–264 Vac
M22-DRL-W-K02-230W
M22S-DRL-W-K02-230W
M22M-DRL-W-K02-230W
1NO/1NC
12–30 Vac/Vdc
M22-DRL-W-K11-W
M22S-DRL-W-K11-W
M22M-DRL-W-K11-W
1NO/1NC
85–264 Vac
M22-DRL-W-K11-230W
M22S-DRL-W-K11-230W
M22M-DRL-W-K11-230W
1
1
1
1
M22-DRL-W
Operators Only 3
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Metal Bezel
Catalog Number
1
Button Color
Red
M22-DRL-R
M22S-DRL-R
M22M-DRL-R
1
Green
M22-DRL-G
M22S-DRL-G
M22M-DRL-G
1
M22S-DRL-W
1
White
M22-DRL-W
M22S-DRL-W
M22M-DRL-W
Blue
M22-DRL-B
M22S-DRL-B
M22M-DRL-B
Yellow
M22-DRL-Y
M22S-DRL-Y
M22M-DRL-Y
Amber
M22-DRL-A
M22S-DRL-A
M22M-DRL-A
1
1
1
M22M-DRL-W
1
1
1
Notes
1 Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by switching the locking ring,
which is accessible through the side of the operator body.
2 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
3 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Note: This pilot device features a selectable function switch that enables the device
to be set to either maintained or momentary operation.
1
V7-T1-60
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Maintained 1
1
1
1
ma
x
thic . 5mm
kne
ss
1
1
1
Note: Included
with operator.
1
Components
M22-XDL-W
Button Lenses 2
Inscription
Catalog Number
Red
—
Custom
STOP
OFF
M22-XDL-R 3
M22-XDL-R-ETCH 4
M22-XDL-R-GB0
M22-XDL-R-GB5
M22-XDL-R-X0
M22-XDL-G 3
M22-XDL-G-ETCH 4
M22-XDL-G-GB1
M22-XDL-G-GB6
M22-XDL-G-X1
M22-XDL-B 3
Green
Blue
—
Custom
START
ON
—
—
Custom
—
M22-XDL-B-ETCH 4
M22-XDL-B-GB14
M22-XDL-B-X6
M22-XDL-W 3
M22-XDL-W-ETCH 4
M22-XDL-Y 3
Custom
—
Custom
M22-XDL-Y-ETCH 4
M22-XDL-A
M22-XDL-A-ETCH
Custom
RESET
White
Yellow
Amber
M22-DRL-X
M22-LED-W
Color
Black Bezel
Catalog
Number 5
Metal Bezel
Catalog
Number 5
M22-DRL-X
M22S-DRL-X
M22M-DRL-X
Terminal
Type
LED
Color
Light Unit
Voltage
Screw
White
Red
Green
Blue
White
Red
Green
Blue
White
Red
Green
Blue
Red/Green/
Yellow
Red, Green,
Blue, Yellow,
White, Violet,
Turquoise
12–30
Vac/Vdc
Screw
M22-FLED-_
Spring-cage
M22-K10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
24 Vdc
M22-FLED-RGB 6
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Contact
Configuration 7
Catalog Number
Screw
NO
NO, early-make
NC
NC, late-break
NO
NC
NC, late-break
2NO
2NC
NO-NC
NC
NO
M22-K10
M22-K10P
M22-K01
M22-K01D
M22-CK10
M22-CK01
M22-CK01D
M22-CK20
M22-CK02
M22-CK11
M22-FK01 8
M22-FK10 8
1
Notes
Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by
switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body.
For complete listing of available button lenses, light units and contact blocks, see
Accessories, Pages V7-T1-105 to V7-T1-110.
Minimum order quantity of (10).
When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols
Library (see Pages V7-T1-123 to V7-T1-130) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XDL-R-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
Includes contact block mounting adapter.
Please see color input key on Page V7-T1-108.
All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
Additional contacts may not be stacked behind M22-F type contact blocks,
M22-F can be stacked behind standard M22 contacts only.
1
M22-FK01
M22M-DRL-X
12–30
Vac/Vdc
M22-LED-W
M22-LED-R
M22-LED-G
M22-LED-B
M22-LED230-W
M22-LED230-R
M22-LED230-G
M22-LED230-B
M22-FLED-W
M22-FLED-R
M22-FLED-G
M22-FLED-B
M22-FLED-RG 6
Contact Blocks 2
Spring-cage
M22S-DRL-X
85–264
Vac
1
Catalog Number
Terminal
Type
Buttonless Operator
Silver Bezel
Catalog
Number 5
Light Units 2
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-61
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.4
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Momentary
M22-DLH-R-K11-R
Complete Devices
Button
Color
1
Red
1
M22S-DLH-R-K11-R
1
Green
White
1
Contact Block
Configuration 1
Light Unit
Voltage
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Metal Bezel
Catalog Number
1NO/1NC
12–30 Vac/Vdc
M22-DLH-R-K11-R
M22S-DLH-R-K11-R
M22M-DLH-R-K11-R
1NO/1NC
85–264 Vac
M22-DLH-R-K11-230R
M22S-DLH-R-K11-230R
M22M-DLH-R-K11-230R
2NO
12–30 Vac/Vdc
M22-DLH-G-K20-G
M22S-DLH-G-K20-G
M22M-DLH-G-K20-G
2NO
85–264 Vac
M22-DLH-G-K20-230G
M22S-DLH-G-K20-230G
M22M-DLH-G-K20-230G
2NO
12–30 Vac/Vdc
M22-DLH-W-K20-W
M22S-DLH-W-K20-W
M22M-DLH-W-K20-W
2NO
85–264 Vac
M22-DLH-W-K20-230W
M22S-DLH-W-K20-230W
M22M-DLH-W-K20-230W
1
1
Complete Press-to-Test Units
1
Button Color
Light Unit Voltage
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Red
12–30 Vac/Vdc
M22-T-R-R
M22S-T-R-R
1
1
Blue
M22-T-B-B
M22S-T-B-B
Yellow
M22-T-Y-W
M22S-T-Y-W
Green
M22-T-G-G
M22S-T-G-G
1
White
M22-T-W-W
M22S-T-W-W
1
Blue
1
White
Red
1
1
M22-DLH-R
1
1
M22S-DLH-R
1
1
1
85–264 Vac
M22-T-R-230R
M22S-T-R-230R
M22-T-R-230B
M22S-T-B-230B
Yellow
M22-T-Y-230W
M22S-T-Y-230W
Green
M22-T-G-230G
M22S-T-G-230G
M22-T-W-230W
M22S-T-W-230W
Operators Only 2
Button Color
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Metal Bezel
Catalog Number
Red
M22-DLH-R
M22S-DLH-R
M22M-DLH-R
Green
M22-DLH-G
M22S-DLH-G
M22M-DLH-G
White
M22-DLH-W
M22S-DLH-W
M22M-DLH-W
Blue
M22-DLH-B
M22S-DLH-B
M22M-DLH-B
Yellow
M22-DLH-Y
M22S-DLH-Y
M22M-DLH-Y
Amber
M22-DLH-A
M22S-DLH-A
M22M-DLH-A
M22M-DLH-R
1
1
1
1
M22-DGLH-R
1
1
1
Silver Guarded
Button Color
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Red
M22-DGLH-R
Green
M22-DGLH-G
White
M22-DGLH-W
Blue
M22-DGLH-B
Yellow
M22-DGLH-Y
Notes
1 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
2 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
1
1
V7-T1-62
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Momentary
1
1
1
1
ma
x
thic . 5mm
kne
ss
1
1
Note: Included
with operator.
1
Components
M22-XDH-R
Button Lenses 1
Color
Inscription
Catalog Number
Red
—
Custom
STOP
OFF
M22-XDLH-R 2
M22-XDLH-R-ETCH 3
M22-XDLH-R-GB0
M22-XDLH-R-GB5
M22-XDLH-R-X0
M22-XDLH-G 2
M22-XDLH-G-ETCH 3
M22-XDLH-G-GB1
M22-XDLH-G-GB6
M22-XDLH-G-X1
M22-XDLH-B 2
Green
Blue
—
Custom
START
ON
—
Custom
RESET
White
Yellow
Amber
M22-DL-X
M22-LED-W
—
Custom
—
Custom
—
Custom
M22-XDLH-B-ETCH 3
M22-XDLH-B-GB14
M22-XDLH-B-X6
M22-XDLH-W 2
M22-XDLH-W-ETCH 3
M22-XDLH-Y 2
M22-XDLH-Y-ETCH 3
M22-XDLH-A
M22-XDLH-A-ETCH
Black Bezel
Catalog
Number 4
Metal Bezel
Catalog
Number 4
M22-DL-X
M22S-DL-X
M22M-DL-X
Light Unit
Voltage
Screw
White
Red
Green
Blue
White
Red
Green
Blue
White
Red
Green
Blue
Red/Green/
Yellow
Red, Green,
Blue, Yellow,
White, Violet,
Turquoise
12–30
Vac/Vdc
Spring-cage
85–264
Vac
12–30
Vac/Vdc
24 Vdc
Catalog Number
M22-LED-W
M22-LED-R
M22-LED-G
M22-LED-B
M22-LED230-W
M22-LED230-R
M22-LED230-G
M22-LED230-B
M22-FLED-W
M22-FLED-R
M22-FLED-G
M22-FLED-B
M22-FLED-RG 5
M22-FLED-RGB 5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Terminal
Type
Contact
Configuration 6
Catalog Number
Screw
NO
NO, early-make
NC
NC, late-break
NO
NC
NC, late-break
2NO
2NC
NO-NC
NC
NO
M22-K10
M22-K10P
M22-K01
M22-K01D
M22-CK10
M22-CK01
M22-CK01D
M22-CK20
M22-CK02
M22-CK11
M22-FK01 7
M22-FK10 7
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
M22M-DL-X
M22-DGL-X
1
1
Contact Blocks 1
Spring-cage
M22-FK01
M22S-DL-X
LED
Color
M22-FLED-_
Buttonless Operator
Silver Bezel
Catalog
Number 4
Terminal
Type
Screw
M22-K10
1
Light Units 1
Silver Guarded
Silver Bezel
Catalog
Number 4
M22-DGL-X
Notes
1 For complete listing of available button lenses, light units and contact blocks, see
Accessories, Pages V7-T1-105 to V7-T1-110.
2
Minimum order quantity of (10).
3 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols
Library (see Pages V7-T1-123 to V7-T1-130) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XDH-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
4 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
5 Please see color input key on Page V7-T1-108.
6 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
7 Additional contacts may not be stacked behind M22-F type contact blocks,
M22-F can be stacked behind standard M22 contacts only.
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-63
1
1
1
1
1
1.4
1
1
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Maintained 1
M22-DRLH-W
1
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
M22S-DRLH-W
1
Operators Only 2
Button Color
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Metal Bezel
Catalog Number
Red
M22-DRLH-R
M22S-DRLH-R
M22M-DRLH-R
Green
M22-DRLH-G
M22S-DRLH-G
M22M-DRLH-G
White
M22-DRLH-W
M22S-DRLH-W
M22M-DRLH-W
Blue
M22-DRLH-B
M22S-DRLH-B
M22M-DRLH-B
Yellow
M22-DRLH-Y
M22S-DRLH-Y
M22M-DRLH-Y
Amber
M22-DRLH-A
M22S-DRLH-A
M22M-DRLH-A
1
1
M22M-DRLH-W
1
1
1
Notes
1 Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by switching the locking ring,
which is accessible through the side of the operator body.
2 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Note: This pilot device features a selectable function switch that enables the device
to be set to either maintained or momentary operation.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-64
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Maintained 1
1
1
1
ma
x
thic . 5mm
kne
ss
1
1
1
Note: Included
with operator.
1
Components
M22-XDLH-W
Button Lenses 2
Color
Red
Green
Blue
Inscription
—
Custom
STOP
OFF
—
Custom
START
ON
—
Custom
RESET
White
Yellow
Amber
M22-DRL-X
M22S-DRL-X
M22M-DRL-X
—
Custom
—
Custom
—
Custom
M22-LED-W
Catalog Number
3
M22-XDLH-R
M22-XDLH-R-ETCH 4
M22-XDLH-R-GB0
M22-XDLH-R-GB5
M22-XDLH-R-X0
M22-XDLH-G 3
M22-XDLH-G-ETCH 4
M22-XDLH-G-GB1
M22-XDLH-G-GB6
M22-XDLH-G-X1
M22-XDLH-B 3
Light Units 2
Terminal
Type
LED
Color
Light Unit
Voltage
Screw
White
Red
Green
Blue
White
Red
Green
Blue
White
Red
Green
Blue
Red/Green/
Yellow
Red, Green,
Blue, Yellow,
White, Violet,
Turquoise
12–30
Vac/Vdc
Screw
M22-FLED-_
Spring-cage
M22-XDLH-B-ETCH 4
M22-XDLH-B-GB14
M22-XDLH-B-X6
M22-XDLH-W 3
M22-XDLH-W-ETCH 4
M22-XDLH-Y 3
M22-XDLH-Y-ETCH
M22-XDLH-A
M22-XDLH-A-ETCH
4
M22-K10
Buttonless Operator
Silver Bezel
Catalog
Number 5
Black Bezel
Catalog
Number 5
Metal Bezel
Catalog
Number 5
M22-DRL-X
M22S-DRL-X
M22M-DRL-X
12–30
Vac/Vdc
24 Vdc
M22-LED-W
M22-LED-R
M22-LED-G
M22-LED-B
M22-LED230-W
M22-LED230-R
M22-LED230-G
M22-LED230-B
M22-FLED-W
M22-FLED-R
M22-FLED-G
M22-FLED-B
M22-FLED-RG 6
M22-FLED-RGB 6
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Terminal
Type
Contact
Configuration 7
Catalog Number
Screw
NO
NO, early-make
NC
NC, late-break
NO
NC
NC, late-break
2NO
2NC
NO-NC
NC
NO
M22-K10
M22-K10P
M22-K01
M22-K01D
M22-CK10
M22-CK01
M22-CK01D
M22-CK20
M22-CK02
M22-CK11
M22-FK01 8
M22-FK10 8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Notes
1 Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by
switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body.
2
For complete listing of available button lenses, light units and contact blocks, see
Accessories, Pages V7-T1-105 to V7-T1-110.
3 Minimum order quantity of (10).
4 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols
Library (see Pages V7-T1-123 to V7-T1-130) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XDLH-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
5 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
6 Please see color input key on Page V7-T1-108.
7 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
8 Additional contacts may not be stacked behind M22-F type contact blocks,
M22-F can be stacked behind standard M22 contacts only.
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1
1
Contact Blocks 2
Spring-cage
M22-FK01
85–264
Vac
Catalog Number
V7-T1-65
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.4
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Indicating Lights
Product Description
1
1
1
1
Features
Eaton’s M22 indicating lights
use the combination of a
durable, bright LED unit and
modern lenses designed
specifically for this type of
LED to create a bright and
visible indicating light.
As with the pushbuttons, the
indicating light lenses can be
laser engraved. Indicating
lights can be ordered as
complete devices, including
lens and LED unit, or as
modular components.
●
●
●
1
Customizable laser
engraving on all lenses
LED offering only for
improved brightness
quality and up to 100,000
hours of operation
Lenses designed
specifically for LED
illumination
1
1
1
Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
Indicating Lights
M22 - L – B – GB8 – B
1
Operator Type
M22-L = Flush indicating light
1
W=
R=
G=
Y=
B=
1
Lens Color
White
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
Plate Inscription
ETCH =
GB5 =
GB6 =
GB8 =
GB15 =
GB16 =
1
1
1
Note: Light unit should match color of lens.
Use white light unit with yellow lens.
1
Product Selection
1
Indicating Lights, Flush
1
M22-L-R-R
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Custom 1
OFF
ON
FAULT
FORWARD
REVERSE
12–30 Vac/Vdc
W = White
R = Red
G = Green
B = Blue
Light Units
85–264 Vac
230W = White
230R = Red
230G = Green
230B = Blue
When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library
(see Pages V7-T1-123 to V7-T1-130) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-L-B-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
Complete Devices
Lens Color
Light Color
Light Unit Voltage
Catalog Number
White
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
Amber
White
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
Amber
White
Red
Green
White
Blue
White
White
Red
Green
White
Blue
White
12–30 Vac/Vdc
M22-L-W-W
M22-L-R-R
M22-L-G-G
M22-L-Y-W
M22-L-B-B
M22-L-A-W
M22-L-W-230W
M22-L-R-230R
M22-L-G-230G
M22-L-Y-230W
M22-L-B-230B
M22-L-A-230W
85–264 Vac
Operators Only 1
1
1
Modular construction
makes assembly fast and
simplifies stocking of
components and complete
devices
●
Capable of communicating
via ASi protocol with ASi
adapter modules
Protection Type
●
IP67, IP69K
●
NEMA 4X, 13
●
Lens Color
M22-L-R
1
1
1
Flat
White
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
Amber
Catalog Number
Lens Color
Catalog Number
M22-L-W
M22-L-R
M22-L-G
M22-L-Y
M22-L-B
M22-L-A
Conical
White
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
Amber
M22-LH-W
M22-LH-R
M22-LH-G
M22-LH-Y
M22-LH-B
M22-LH-A
M22-LH-R
Note
1 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
1
V7-T1-66
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Indicating Lights, Flush
1
1
ma
x
thic . 5mm
kne
ss
1
1
1
Note: Included
with operator.
1
Components
M22-XL-R
Lenses 1
Color
M22-LED-W
Inscription
Catalog Number
Flat
Red
Green
Blue
White
Yellow
Amber
Conical
Red
Green
Blue
White
Yellow
Amber
M22-L-X
—
Custom
OFF
—
Custom
ON
REVERSE
—
Custom
M22-XL-R 2
M22-XL-R-ETCH 3
M22-XL-R-GB5
M22-XL-G 2
M22-XL-G-ETCH 3
M22-XL-G-GB6
M22-XL-G-GB16
M22-XL-B 2
M22-XL-B-ETCH 3
FAULT
—
Custom
M22-XL-B-GB8
M22-XL-W 2
M22-XL-W-ETCH 3
OFF
ON
FAULT
FORWARD
—
Custom
—
Custom
M22-XL-W-GB5
M22-XL-W-GB6
M22-XL-W-GB8
M22-XL-W-GB15
M22-XL-Y 2
M22-XL-Y-ETCH 3
M22-XL-A 2
M22-XL-A-ETCH 3
—
—
—
—
—
—
M22-XLH-R
M22-XLH-G
M22-XLH-B
M22-XLH-W
M22-XLH-Y
M22-XLH-A
Light Units 14
Terminal
Type
LED
Color
Light Unit
Voltage
Screw
White
Red
Green
Blue
White
Red
Green
Blue
White
Red
Green
Blue
Red/Green/
Yellow
Red, Green,
Blue, Yellow,
White, Violet,
Turquoise
12–30
Vac/Vdc
Screw
M22-FLED-_
Spring-cage
85–264
Vac
12–30
Vac/Vdc
24 Vdc
1
Catalog Number
M22-LED-W
M22-LED-R
M22-LED-G
M22-LED-B
M22-LED230-W
M22-LED230-R
M22-LED230-G
M22-LED230-B
M22-FLED-W
M22-FLED-R
M22-FLED-G
M22-FLED-B
M22-FLED-RG 5
M22-FLED-RGB
5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Notes
1 For complete listing of available lenses and light units, see Accessories,
Pages V7-T1-105 to V7-T1-110.
2 Minimum order quantity of (10).
3 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols
Library (see Pages V7-T1-123 to V7-T1-130) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XL-R-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
4 Select the same color LED element as lens color; for yellow and amber lenses,
choose a white LED.
5
Please see color input key on Page V7-T1-108.
1
1
1
1
1
1
Lensless Indicating Light
Catalog Number
1
M22-L-X
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-67
1.4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Emergency Stops
Product Description
Features
Eaton’s M22 emergency
stops are a durable and
reliable solution to a variety
of e-stop applications. With
standard push-pull, as well
as twist-to-release and keyrelease, illuminated options
and red or black operators,
the M22 e-stop is a robust
solution. As with all
operators, they can be
ordered as a ready to install
complete device or as
modular components for
the perfect fit.
●
●
●
●
Push-pull and twist to
release options available as
well as illuminated and
keyed release
LED offering only for
improved brightness
quality and up to 100,000
hours of operation
More than 100,000
mechanical operations
Capable of communicating
via ASi protocol with ASi
adapter modules
●
Suitable for use in safety
applications up to
Category-4 or Sil-3
Protection Type
●
IP67, IP69K
(IP66 key-release)
●
NEMA 4X, 13
1
1
Catalog Number Selection
1
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1
Emergency Stops
M22 – PVT – MS2 – K10 – 230R
1
Operator Color
M22 = Silver
M22S = Black
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PV =
PV45P =
PV60P =
PV45P-MPI =
PV60P-MPI =
PVT =
PVT45P =
PVT60P =
PVT45P-MPI =
PVT60P-MPI =
PVS =
PVS45P =
PVS60P =
PVL =
PVLT =
PVLT45P =
PVLT60P =
Operator Type
Non-illuminated push-pull emergency stop
Non-illuminated 45 mm emergency stop
Non-illuminated 60 mm emergency stop
Non-illuminated mechanical indication, 45 mm
Non-illuminated mechanical indication, 60 mm
Non-illuminated twist-to-release emergency stop
Non-illuminated twist-to-release 45 mm emergency stop
Non-illuminated twist-to-release 60 mm emergency stop
Non-illuminated twist-to-release with mechanical
indication, 45 mm
Non-illuminated twist-to-release with mechanical
indication, 60 mm
Non-illuminated keyed release (red operator only)
Non-illuminated keyed release 45 mm (red only)
Non-illuminated keyed release 60 mm (red only)
Illuminated push-pull emergency stop
Illuminated twist-to-release emergency stop
Illuminated twist-to-release 45 mm emergency stop
Illuminated twist-to-release 60 mm emergency stop
Key Release Code
Blank = MS1
MS2 = MS2
MS3 = MS3
MS4 = MS4
MS5 = MS5
MS6 = MS6
MS7 = MS7
MS8 = MS8
RS = Ronis
(45 and 60 mm only)
Contact Blocks
K10 = NO
K10P = NO, early-make
K01 = NC
K01D = NC, late-break
CK10 = NO
CK01 = NC
CK01D = NC, late-break
Ck20 = 2NO
CK02 = 2NC
CK11 = NO-NC
Light Units
12–30 Vac/Vdc
W = White
R = Red
G = Green
B = Blue
85–264 Vac
230W = White
230R = Red
230G = Green
230B = Blue
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-68
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Product Selection
1
Non-Illuminated and Illuminated Emergency Stops
1
Complete Devices
Type
M22-PV-K01
LED
Color
Contact Block
Configuration 1
Light Unit
Voltage
Catalog Number
—
NC
—
M22-PV-K01
1
1
Non-Illuminated
Push-pull
Twist-to-release
Key release
M22-PVL-K01-R
Button
Color
Red
Red
Red
—
—
2NC
M22-PV-K02
1NO-2NC
M22-PV-K12
NC
—
M22-PVT-K02
1NO-2NC
M22-PVT-K12
—
1
M22-PVT-K01
2NC
NC
1
1
1
M22-PVS-K01
2NC
M22-PVS-K02
1NO-2NC
M22-PVS-K12
1
Illuminated
Push-pull
Red
Red
NC
M22-PVL-K02-R
1NO-2NC
M22-PVL-K12-R
Red
Red
85–264 Vac
M22-PVL-K02-230R
1NO-2NC
M22-PVL-K12-230R
12–30 Vac/Vdc
2NC
1
1
M22-PVLT-K01-R
1
M22-PVLT-K02-R
1NO-2NC
NC
1
M22-PVL-K01-230R
2NC
NC
1
M22-PVL-K01-R
2NC
NC
Twist-to-release
12–30 Vac/Vdc
1
M22-PVLT-K12-R
85–264 Vac
M22-PVLT-K01-230R
2NC
M22-PVLT-K02-230R
1NO-2NC
M22-PVLT-K12-230R
1
1
Note
1 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-69
1.4
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Non-Illuminated and Illuminated Emergency Stops
1
1
1
ma
x
thic . 5mm
kne
ss
1
1
1
Note: Included
with operator.
1
1
Components
1
M22-PVL
1
Push-Pull Emergency Stops
Illumination/Indication
None
1
1
LED illumination
1
1
Mechanical indication
1
1
Key Release Emergency Stops 2
Catalog
Number
Actuator
Size
Key
Code
35 mm
M22-PVT45P-MPI
35 mm
M22-PV
MS1
M22-PVS 3
M22-PV45P
MS2
M22-PVS-MS2
60 mm
M22-PV60P
MS3
M22-PVS-MS3
35 mm
M22-PVL
MS4
M22-PVS-MS4
45 mm
M22-PVL45P
MS5
M22-PVS-MS5
60 mm
M22-PVL60P
MS6
M22-PVS-MS6
45 mm
M22-PV45P-MPI
MS7
M22-PVS-MS7
60 mm
M22-PV60P-MPI
MS8
M22-PVS-MS8
MS1
M22-PVS45P
MS2
M22-PVS45P-MS2
MS3
M22-PVS45P-MS3
MS4
M22-PVS45P-MS4
MS5
M22-PVS45P-MS5
MS6
M22-PVS45P-MS6
MS7
M22-PVS45P-MS7
MS8
M22-PVS45P-MS8
Ronis
M22-PVS45P-RS
MS1
M22-PVS60P
MS2
M22-PVS60P-MS2
MS3
M22-PVS60P-MS3
MS4
M22-PVS60P-MS4
MS5
M22-PVS60P-MS5
MS6
M22-PVS60P-MS6
Twist-to-Release Emergency Stops
Illumination/Indication
1
None
1
LED illumination
1
1
Mechanical indication
1
1
M22S-PVLT
1
1
Catalog
Number
35 mm
M22-PVT
45 mm
M22-PVT45P
60 mm
M22-PVT60P
35 mm
M22-PVLT
45 mm
M22-PVLT45P
60 mm
M22-PVLT60P
45 mm
M22-PVT45P-MPI
60 mm
M22-PVT60P-MPI
60 mm
Catalog
Number
MS7
M22-PVS60P-MS7
MS8
M22-PVS60P-MS8
Ronis
M22-PVS60P-RS
Illumination
Type
Actuator
Size
Non-illuminated
Push-pull
35 mm
M22S-PV
Twist-torelease
35 mm
M22S-PVT
Push-pull
35 mm
M22S-PVL
Twist-torelease
35 mm
M22S-PVLT
LED illumination
1
Actuator
Size
Machine Stop Operators (Black) 1
1
Catalog
Number
45 mm
45 mm
1
1
M22-PVS60P-MS1
Actuator
Size
Notes
1 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
2 Key included. For identical locks and keys, use the same key code. One key is included with
actuator; additional keys are available as accessories.
3 Includes Key Code MS1.
Maximum number of contacts: four M22-(C)K01,…10, or two M22-(C)K02,…20, …11.
Refer to IL or technical data sheet for more information.
1
V7-T1-70
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Contact Blocks 1
M22-K10
Extra Keys 6
Terminal
Type
Mounting Contact
Location 2 Configuration 3 Catalog Number
For Key Code
Catalog Number
Screw
Front
Base
M22-K01SMC10
M22-ES-MS1
1.4
SelfFront
monitoring
(1NC and
Base
1NO in
series)
MS1
M22-ES-MS1
NO
M22-K10
MS2
M22-ES-MS2
NO, early-make
M22-K10P
MS3
M22-ES-MS3
NC
M22-K01
MS4
M22-ES-MS4
NC, late-break
M22-K01D
MS5
M22-ES-MS5
NC 4
M22-K01PV6
MS6
M22-ES-MS6
SMCB, NC
M22-K01SMC10
MS7
M22-ES-MS7
SMCB, 2NC
M22-K02SMC10
MS8
M22-ES-MS8
SMCB, NC
M22-KC01SMC10
SMCB, 2NC
M22-KC02SMC10
1NC
M22-K01SMC10
2NC
M22-K02SMC10
1NC
M22-KC01SMC10
2NC
M22-KC02SMC10
1
1
1
1
1
1
Accessories
M22-XGPV
Description
Voltage
Catalog Number
Yellow guard ring
—
M22-XGPV
1
1
1
M22G-XGPV
FK01SMC10
Selfmonitoring
spring-cage
NC
M22-FK01SMC10
3NC
M22-AFK03SMC10
Gray guard ring
—
M22G-XGPV
1
1
M22-MGTA
Rectangular guard
—
M22-MGTA
1
1
1
M22-FK01
M22-LED-W
Springcage
1
NO
M22-CK10
NC
M22-CK01
NC, late-break
M22-CK01D
2NO
M22-CK20
2NC
M22-CK02
NO-NC
M22-CK11
NC
M22-FK01 5
NO
5
M22-FK10
M22-PL-PV
Sealing shroud
—
M22-PL-PV
1
1
M22-XPV60-Y-120
Illuminated ring
24 Vac/Vdc
120 Vac
M22-XPV60-Y-24
M22-XPV60-Y-120
230 Vac
M22-XPV60-Y-230
Light Units 1
LED
Color
Light Unit
Voltage
Catalog Number
Screw
White
12–30 Vac/Vdc
M22-LED-W
Red
12–30 Vac/Vdc
M22-LED-R
White
85–264 Vac
M22-LED230-W
Red
85–264 Vac
M22-LED230-R
White
207–264 Vac
M22-LED230H-W
Red
207–264 Vac
M22-LED230H-R
White
12–30 Vac/Vdc
M22-FLED-W
Red
12–30 Vac/Vdc
M22-FLED-R
Screw
Springcage
1
1
1
Terminal
Type
Screw
M22-FLED-_
Front
1
Notes
1 For complete listing of available contact blocks, see Accessories,
Pages V7-T1-105 to V7-T1-110.
2 Self-monitoring contact blocks (SMCB type) cannot be used with illuminated
emergency stops.
3
All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
4
Allows up to six contact blocks to be utilized, For use only with only M22-PV_.
5
Additional contacts may not be stacked behind M22-F type contact blocks,
M22-F can be stacked behind standard M22 contacts only.
6 For use with key release operators only. One key included with operator.
1
1
1
1
Maximum number of contacts: four M22-(C)K01,…10, or two M22-(C)K02,…20, …11.
Refer to IL or technical data sheet for more information.
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-71
1.4
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Contents
Selector Switches
Description
1
Selector Switches
Non-Illuminated Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key Operated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Selector Switches
1
Product Description
Features
Eaton’s M22 selector switch
line offers an almost endless
variety of options in
maintained/momentary, keyremoval and illuminated
devices. The coding adapters
used for maintained/
momentary and key removal
positions make the M22
stand out from competitive
devices. By simply adding or
removing a coding adapter
from inside the operator,
the end-user can change
the function of the button.
Operator options include
standard knob, rotary head,
illuminated and keyed
versions. As with all
operators, they can be
ordered as a ready to install
complete device or as
modular components to
meet application specific
requirements.
●
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
●
●
Adding or removing coding
adapters allows for field
convertibility of
maintained/momentary
and key removal positions
LED offering only for
improved brightness
quality and up to 100,000
hours of operation
More than 100,000
mechanical operations
●
●
Coding adapter options
make assembly fast and
simplify stocking of
different configurations of
selector switches
Capable of communicating
via ASi protocol with ASi
adapter modules
Protection Type
●
IP66
●
NEMA 4X, 13
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-72
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Page
V7-T1-73
V7-T1-78
V7-T1-82
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Catalog Number Selection
1
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1
Non-Illuminated Selector Switches
1
M22 – WRK – – X91 – K10
1
Bezel
M22 = Silver
M22S = Black
M22M = Metal
Inscription 2
X91 = AUTO-HAND
X92 = II-I
2
W=
WK =
WKV =
WR =
WRK =
1
Handle Type 1
Momentary rotary
Momentary knob
Maintained V-position knob
Maintained rotary
Maintained knob
Number of Positions
Blank = Two-position
3 = Three-position
4 = Four-position
Contact Blocks
K10 = NO
K10P = NO, early-make
Rotary type only.
K11 =
K22 =
K20 =
K02 =
1
1
Options
NO-NC
2NO-2NC
2NO
2NC
1
1
1
All momentary selector switches can
be converted in the field to maintained
operation with the removal of a colorcoded adapter.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-73
1.4
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Product Selection
Non-Illuminated Selector Switches
1
M22-WKV-K10
1
1
Complete Devices, Knob Type 1
Type
Switching Position
Two-position
Maintained
40°
1
1
Contact Block
Configuration 2
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Metal Bezel
Catalog Number
NO
M22-WRK-K10
M22S-WRK-K10
M22M-WRK-K10
1NO-1NC
M22-WRK-K11
M22S-WRK-K11
M22M-WRK-K11
2NO-2NC
M22-WRK-K22
M22S-WRK-K22
M22M-WRK-K22
M22M-WKV-K10
Maintained V
60°
1
1
Three-position
1
Maintained
60°
1
NO
M22-WKV-K10
M22S-WKV-K10
M22M-WKV-K10
1NO-1NC
M22-WKV-K11
M22S-WKV-K11
M22M-WKV-K11
2NO-2NC
M22-WKV-K22
M22S-WKV-K22
M22M-WKV-K22
2NO
M22-WRK3-K20
M22S-WRK3-K20
M22M-WRK3-K20
2NO-2NC
M22-WRK3-K22
M22S-WRK3-K22
M22M-WRK3-K22
60°
Notes
1 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
2 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-74
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.4
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Non-Illuminated Selector Switches
1
Components
M22-WK
1
Operators Only, Knob Type 1
Type
Switching Position
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Metal Bezel
Catalog Number
1
Two-position
Momentary 2
M22-WK
M22S-WK
M22M-WK
1
M22-WRK
M22S-WRK
M22M-WRK
M22-WKV
M22S-WKV
M22M-WKV
40°
1
Maintained
1
40°
M22M-WK
1
Maintained V
1
60°
Three-position
Momentary
40°
2
Four-position
Maintained
M22-WRK3
M22S-WRK3
M22M-WRK3
M22-WRK3-2
M22S-WRK3-2
M22M-WRK3-2
M22-WRK3-1
M22S-WRK3-1
M22M-WRK3-1
1
1
60°
1
40° 60°
40° 60°
1
60°
1
Maintained, return from right
40°
M22M-WK3
1
Maintained, return from left
40°
M22S-WK3
40°
Maintained
60°
M22-WK3
1
60°
M22-WRK4
M22S-WRK4
1
M22M-WRK4
1
1
1
Notes
1
Includes contact block mounting adapter.
2
Momentary selector switches can be converted in the field to maintained operation with the removal of a color
coded adapter. See Page V7-T1-112.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-75
1.4
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Non-Illuminated Selector Switches
Components
1
1
M22S-WR3-X94
1
Operators Only, Rotary Type 1
Type
Switching Position
Inscription
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Metal Bezel
Catalog Number
Two-position
Momentary 2
I-O
M22-W
M22S-W
M22M-W
I-O
M22-WR
M22S-WR
M22M-WR
Custom
M22-WR-ETCH 3
M22S-WR-ETCH 3
M22M-WR-ETCH 3
AUTO-HAND
M22-WR-X91
M22S-WR-X91
M22M-WR-X91
II-I
M22-WR-X92
M22S-WR-X92
M22M-WR-X92
I-O-II
M22-W3
M22S-W3
M22M-W3
I-O-II
M22-WR3
M22S-WR3
M22M-WR3
Custom
M22-WR3-ETCH 3
M22S-WR3-ETCH 3
M22M-WR3-ETCH 3
AUTO-O-MAN
M22-WR3-X94
M22S-WR3-X94
M22M-WR3-X94
0-1-0-2-0-3-0-4
M22-WR4
M22S-WR4
M22M-WR4
40°
1
1
Maintained
40°
1
1
Three-position
1
Momentary 2
40°
1
40°
Maintained
1
60°
1
Four-position
Maintained
60°
1
1
1
Notes
1
Includes contact block mounting adapter.
2
Momentary selector switches can be converted in the field to maintained operation with the removal of a color
coded adapter. See Page V7-T1-112.
3
When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Pages V7-T1-123 to V7-T1-130)
into the Order Notes. For example, M22-WR3-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X88, Line item #_.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-76
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Non-Illuminated Selector Switches
1
1
1
1
ma
x
thic . 5mm
kne
ss
1
1
1
Note: Included
with operator.
1
Components
1
M22-K10
M22-FK01
Contact Blocks 1
Accessories
Terminal
Type
Contact
Configuration 2
Catalog Number
Screw
NO
NO, early-make
NC
NC, late-break
NO
NC
NC, late-break
2NO
2NC
NO-NC
NC
NO
M22-K10
M22-K10P
M22-K01
M22-K01D
M22-CK10
M22-CK01
M22-CK01D
M22-CK20
M22-CK02
M22-CK11
M22-FK01 3
M22-FK10 3
Spring-cage
M22-XW
Description
Catalog Number
Plunger bridge 4
M22-XW
1
1
1
M22-XWS
Key cover
M22-XWS
1
1
M22-XC-R
Key withdraw adapter 5
M22-XC-R
1
1
M22-XC-Y
Coding adapter
M22-XC-Y
1
1
1
M22-XGWK
Guard ring
M22-XGWK
1
1
Notes
1 For complete listing of available contact blocks, see Accessories,
Pages V7-T1-105 to V7-T1-110.
2
All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
3
Additional contacts may not be stacked behind M22-F type contact blocks,
M22-F can be stacked behind standard M22 contacts only.
4 Plunger needed to actuate center-mounted contact blocks. Used for non-illuminated
three-position selector switches only.
5 Enables a keyed selector switch to be set to user-selected key withdraw position.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-77
1.4
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
Illuminated Selector Switches
1
M22 – WLK – R – K10 – R
1
Bezel
M22 = Silver
M22S = Black
M22M = Metal
1
1
1
Handle Type
WLK = Illuminated knob type
momentary, two-position
WLKV = Illuminated Knob type
momentary, V-position
WLK3 = Illuminated knob type
momentary, three-position
1
1
Handle Color
W = White
R = Red
G = Green
Y = Yellow
B = Blue
K10 =
K01 =
K20 =
K02 =
K11 =
Contact Blocks
1NO
K30 = 3NO
1NC
K03 = 3NC
2NO
K21 = 2NO-1NC
2NC
K12 = 1NO-2NC
1NO-1NC
Light Units
12–30 Vac/Vdc
W = White
R = Red
G = Green
B = Blue
85–264 Vac
230W = White
230R = Red
230G = Green
230B = Blue
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-78
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.4
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Product Selection
1
Illuminated Selector Switches
1
Components
M22-WLK-W
1
Operators Only, Knob Type 1
Type
Switching Position
Button Color
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Metal Bezel
Catalog Number
1
Two-position
Momentary 2
White
M22-WLK-W
M22S-WLK-W
M22M-WLK-W
Red
1
M22-WLK-R
M22S-WLK-R
M22M-WLK-R
Green
M22-WLK-G
M22S-WLK-G
M22M-WLK-G
Yellow
M22-WLK-Y
M22S-WLK-Y
M22M-WLK-Y
Blue
M22-WLK-B
M22S-WLK-B
M22M-WLK-B
White
M22-WRLK-W
M22S-WRLK-W
M22M-WRLK-W
Red
M22-WRLK-R
M22S-WRLK-R
M22M-WRLK-R
Green
M22-WRLK-G
M22S-WRLK-G
M22M-WRLK-G
Yellow
M22-WRLK-Y
M22S-WRLK-Y
M22M-WRLK-Y
40°
Maintained
40°
Maintained V
60°
1
1
Blue
M22-WRLK-B
M22S-WRLK-B
M22M-WRLK-B
White
M22-WLKV-W
M22S-WLKV-W
M22M-WLKV-W
Red
M22-WLKV-R
M22S-WLKV-R
M22M-WLKV-R
Green
M22-WLKV-G
M22S-WLKV-G
M22M-WLKV-G
Yellow
M22-WLKV-Y
M22S-WLKV-Y
M22M-WLKV-Y
Blue
M22-WLKV-B
M22S-WLKV-B
M22M-WLKV-B
Notes
1 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
2 Momentary selector switches can be converted in the field to maintained operation with the removal of a color coded
adapter. See Page V7-T1-112.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-79
1.4
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Illuminated Selector Switches
Components
1
1
M22-WLK3-W
1
1
Operators Only, Knob Type 1
Type
Switching Position
Button Color
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Metal Bezel
Catalog Number
Three-position
Momentary 2
White
M22-WLK3-W
M22S-WLK3-W
M22M-WLK3-W
Red
M22-WLK3-R
M22S-WLK3-R
M22M-WLK3-R
Green
M22-WLK3-G
M22S-WLK3-G
M22M-WLK3-G
Yellow
M22-WLK3-Y
M22S-WLK3-Y
M22M-WLK3-Y
Blue
M22-WLK3-B
M22S-WLK3-B
M22M-WLK3-B
White
M22-WRLK3-W
M22S-WRLK3-W
M22M-WRLK3-W
Red
M22-WRLK3-R
M22S-WRLK3-R
M22M-WRLK3-R
Green
M22-WRLK3-G
M22S-WRLK3-G
M22M-WRLK3-G
Yellow
M22-WRLK3-Y
M22S-WRLK3-Y
M22M-WRLK3-Y
Blue
M22-WRLK3-B
M22S-WRLK3-B
M22M-WRLK3-B
M22M-WRLK3-1-W
40°
40°
1
1
Maintained
1
60°
60°
1
Maintained, return from right
1
40°
1
40° 60°
60°
1
Maintained, return from left
1
40°
1
1
40° 60°
60°
White
M22-WRLK3-1-W
M22S-WRLK3-1-W
Red
M22-WRLK3-1-R
M22S-WRLK3-1-R
M22M-WRLK3-1-R
Green
M22-WRLK3-1-G
M22S-WRLK3-1-G
M22M-WRLK3-1-G
Yellow
M22-WRLK3-1-Y
M22S-WRLK3-1-Y
M22M-WRLK3-1-Y
Blue
M22-WRLK3-1-B
M22S-WRLK3-1-B
M22M-WRLK3-1-B
White
M22-WRLK3-2-W
M22S-WRLK3-2-W
M22M-WRLK3-2-W
Red
M22-WRLK3-2-R
M22S-WRLK3-2-R
M22M-WRLK3-2-R
Green
M22-WRLK3-2-G
M22S-WRLK3-2-G
M22M-WRLK3-2-G
Yellow
M22-WRLK3-2-Y
M22S-WRLK3-2-Y
M22M-WRLK3-2-Y
Blue
M22-WRLK3-2-B
M22S-WRLK3-2-B
M22M-WRLK3-2-B
Notes
1 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
2 Momentary selector switches can be converted in the field to maintained operation with the removal of a color coded
adapter. See Page V7-T1-112.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-80
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Illuminated Selector Switches
1
1
1
1
ma
x
thic . 5mm
kne
ss
1
1
1
Note: Included
with operator.
M22-LED-W
Light Units
LED
Color 2
Light Unit
Voltage
Screw
White
Red
Green
Blue
White
Red
Green
Blue
White
Red
Green
Blue
Red/Green/
Yellow
Red, Green,
Blue, Yellow,
White, Violet,
Turquoise
12–30
Vac/Vdc
M22-FLED-_
Spring-cage
Contact
Configuration
Screw
NO
NO, early-make
NC
NC, late-break
NO
NC
NC, late-break
2NO
2NC
NO-NC
NC
NO
Spring-cage
M22-FK01
85–264
Vac
12–30
Vac/Vdc
24 Vdc
Catalog Number
M22-LED-W
M22-LED-R
M22-LED-G
M22-LED-B
M22-LED230-W
M22-LED230-R
M22-LED230-G
M22-LED230-B
M22-FLED-W
M22-FLED-R
M22-FLED-G
M22-FLED-B
M22-FLED-RG 3
M22-FLED-RGB 3
M22-XW
Description
Catalog Number
Plunger bridge 6
M22-XW
1
1
1
M22-XWS
Key cover
M22-XWS
1
1
M22-XC-R
Key withdraw adapter
7
M22-XC-R
1
1
1
M22-XC-Y
Coding adapter
M22-XC-Y
1
1
Contact Blocks 1
Terminal
Type
1
Accessories
Terminal
Type
Screw
M22-K10
1
M22-XGWK
4
Guard ring
M22-XGWK
Catalog Number
M22-K10
M22-K10P
M22-K01
M22-K01D
M22-CK10
M22-CK01
M22-CK01D
M22-CK20
M22-CK02
M22-CK11
M22-FK01 5
M22-FK10 5
1
1
Notes
1
For complete listing of available light units and contact blocks, see Accessories,
Pages V7-T1-105 to V7-T1-110.
2 Select the same color LED element as lens color; for yellow lens, choose a white LED.
Select a white lens if utilizing multi-color LED, M22-FLED-RG or M22-FLED-RGB.
3 Please see color input key on Page V7-T1-108.
4 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
5 Additional contacts may not be stacked behind M22-F type contact blocks,
M22-F can be stacked behind standard M22 contacts only.
6
Plunger needed to actuate center-mounted contact blocks. Used for non-illuminated
three-position selector switches only.
7 Enables a keyed selector switch to be set to user-selected key withdraw position.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-81
1.4
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
Key-Operated Selector Switches
M22 – WS – MS2 – A1
1
1
Bezel
M22 = Silver
M22S = Black
M22M = Metal
1
1
WS =
WS3 =
WRS =
WRS3 =
Handle Type
Two-position, momentary
Three-position, momentary
Two-position, maintained
Three-position, maintained
1
Key Code
Blank = MS1
MS2 = MS2
MS3 = MS3
MS4 = MS4
MS5 = MS5
MS6 = MS6
MS7 = MS7
MS8 = MS8
Key Removal Position
Refer to coding adapter assembly
and functional test guide on Page
V7-T1-112.
1
1
1
1
Product Selection
Key-Operated Selector Switches 12
Components
M22-WS
Operators Only 3
Type
Switching Position
Key Removal Position
Key Code
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Two-position
Momentary 4
Return from right, key
removable left
MS1
M22-WS
M22S-WS
M22M-WS
MS2
M22-WS-MS2
M22S-WS-MS2
M22M-WS-MS2
MS3
M22-WS-MS3
M22S-WS-MS3
M22M-WS-MS3
MS4
M22-WS-MS4
M22S-WS-MS4
M22M-WS-MS4
MS5
M22-WS-MS5
M22S-WS-MS5
M22M-WS-MS5
MS6
M22-WS-MS6
M22S-WS-MS6
M22M-WS-MS6
MS7
M22-WS-MS7
M22S-WS-MS7
M22M-WS-MS7
MS8
M22-WS-MS8
M22S-WS-MS8
M22M-WS-MS8
MS1
M22-WRS-A1
M22S-WRS-A1
M22M-WRS-A1
MS2
M22-WRS-MS2-A1
M22S-WRS-MS2-A1
M22M-WRS-MS2-A1
MS3
M22-WRS-MS3-A1
M22S-WRS-MS3-A1
M22M-WRS-MS3-A1
MS4
M22-WRS-MS4-A1
M22S-WRS-MS4-A1
M22M-WRS-MS4-A1
MS5
M22-WRS-MS5-A1
M22S-WRS-MS5-A1
M22M-WRS-MS5-A1
MS6
M22-WRS-MS6-A1
M22S-WRS-MS6-A1
M22M-WRS-MS6-A1
MS7
M22-WRS-MS7-A1
M22S-WRS-MS7-A1
M22M-WRS-MS7-A1
MS8
M22-WRS-MS8-A1
M22S-WRS-MS8-A1
M22M-WRS-MS8-A1
MS1
M22-WRS
M22S-WRS
M22M-WRS
MS2
M22-WRS-MS2
M22S-WRS-MS2
M22M-WRS-MS2
MS3
M22-WRS-MS3
M22S-WRS-MS3
M22M-WRS-MS3
1
MS4
M22-WRS-MS4
M22S-WRS-MS4
M22M-WRS-MS4
MS5
M22-WRS-MS5
M22S-WRS-MS5
M22M-WRS-MS5
1
MS6
M22-WRS-MS6
M22S-WRS-MS6
M22M-WRS-MS6
MS7
M22-WRS-MS7
M22S-WRS-MS7
M22M-WRS-MS7
MS8
M22-WRS-MS8
M22S-WRS-MS8
M22M-WRS-MS8
1
1
40°
1
1
M22S-WRS
1
1
Two-position
Maintained
Key removable left
40°
1
1
1
1
1
Key removable left/right
1
1
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Metal Bezel
Catalog Number
Notes
1
Includes one key.
2
Key removal positions can be modified in the field using coding adapters; see chart on Page V7-T1-112.
3
Includes contact block mounting adapter.
4
Momentary selector switches can be converted in the field to maintained operation with the removal of a color coded adapter. See Page V7-T1-112.
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-82
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.4
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Key-Operated Selector Switches 12
Components
M22-WS3-X93
1
Operators Only, continued 3
1
Type
Switching Position
Key Removal Position
Key Code
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Three-position
Momentary 4
Return from left/right,
key removable center
MS1
M22-WS3
M22S-WS3
M22M-WS3
MS2
M22-WS3-MS2
M22S-WS3-MS2
M22M-WS3-MS2
MS3
M22-WS3-MS3
M22S-WS3-MS3
M22M-WS3-MS3
MS4
M22-WS3-MS4
M22S-WS3-MS4
M22M-WS3-MS4
MS5
M22-WS3-MS5
M22S-WS3-MS5
M22M-WS3-MS5
MS6
M22-WS3-MS6
M22S-WS3-MS6
M22M-WS3-MS6
MS7
M22-WS3-MS7
M22S-WS3-MS7
M22M-WS3-MS7
MS8
M22-WS3-MS8
M22S-WS3-MS8
M22M-WS3-MS8
MS1
M22-WRS3-A1
M22S-WRS3-A1
M22M-WRS3-A1
MS2
M22-WRS3-MS2-A1
M22S-WRS3-MS2-A1 M22M-WRS3-MS2-A1
MS3
M22-WRS3-MS3-A1
M22S-WRS3-MS3-A1 M22M-WRS3-MS3-A1
MS4
M22-WRS3-MS4-A1
M22S-WRS3-MS4-A1 M22M-WRS3-MS4-A1
MS5
M22-WRS3-MS5-A1
M22S-WRS3-MS5-A1 M22M-WRS3-MS5-A1
MS6
M22-WRS3-MS6-A1
M22S-WRS3-MS6-A1 M22M-WRS3-MS6-A1
MS7
M22-WRS3-MS7-A1
M22S-WRS3-MS7-A1 M22M-WRS3-MS7-A1
MS8
M22-WRS3-MS8-A1
M22S-WRS3-MS8-A1 M22M-WRS3-MS8-A1
MS1
M22-WRS3-A2
M22S-WRS3-A2
MS2
M22-WRS3-MS2-A2
M22S-WRS3-MS2-A2 M22M-WRS3-MS2-A2
MS3
M22-WRS3-MS3-A2
M22S-WRS3-MS3-A2 M22M-WRS3-MS3-A2
MS4
M22-WRS3-MS4-A2
M22S-WRS3-MS4-A2 M22M-WRS3-MS4-A2
MS5
M22-WRS3-MS5-A2
M22S-WRS3-MS5-A2 M22M-WRS3-MS5-A2
MS6
M22-WRS3-MS6-A2
M22S-WRS3-MS6-A2 M22M-WRS3-MS6-A2
MS7
M22-WRS3-MS7-A2
M22S-WRS3-MS7-A2 M22M-WRS3-MS7-A2
MS8
M22-WRS3-MS8-A2
M22S-WRS3-MS8-A2 M22M-WRS3-MS8-A2
MS1
M22-WRS3-A3
M22S-WRS3-A3
MS2
M22-WRS3-MS2-A3
M22S-WRS3-MS2-A3 M22M-WRS3-MS2-A3
MS3
M22-WRS3-MS3-A3
M22S-WRS3-MS3-A3 M22M-WRS3-MS3-A3
MS4
M22-WRS3-MS4-A3
M22S-WRS3-MS4-A3 M22M-WRS3-MS4-A3
MS5
M22-WRS3-MS5-A3
M22S-WRS3-MS5-A3 M22M-WRS3-MS5-A3
MS6
M22-WRS3-MS6-A3
M22S-WRS3-MS6-A3 M22M-WRS3-MS6-A3
MS7
M22-WRS3-MS7-A3
M22S-WRS3-MS7-A3 M22M-WRS3-MS7-A3
MS8
M22-WRS3-MS8-A3
M22S-WRS3-MS8-A3 M22M-WRS3-MS8-A3
MS1
M22-WRS3
M22S-WRS3
M22M-WRS3
MS2
M22-WRS3-MS2
M22S-WRS3-MS2
M22M-WRS3-MS2
MS3
M22-WRS3-MS3
M22S-WRS3-MS3
M22M-WRS3-MS3
MS4
M22-WRS3-MS4
M22S-WRS3-MS4
M22M-WRS3-MS4
MS5
M22-WRS3-MS5
M22S-WRS3-MS5
M22M-WRS3-MS5
MS6
M22-WRS3-MS6
M22S-WRS3-MS6
M22M-WRS3-MS6
MS7
M22-WRS3-MS7
M22S-WRS3-MS7
M22M-WRS3-MS7
MS8
M22-WRS3-MS8
M22S-WRS3-MS8
M22M-WRS3-MS8
40°
40°
M22M-WS3-X93
Three-position
Maintained
60°
Key removable
left/center/right
60°
Key removable
center/left
Key removable
center/right
Key removable
left/right
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Metal Bezel
Catalog Number
M22M-WRS3-A2
M22M-WRS3-A3
Notes
1 Includes one key.
2 Key removal positions can be modified in the field using coding adapters; see chart on Page V7-T1-112.
3 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
4 Momentary selector switches can be converted in the field to maintained operation with the removal of a color coded adapter. See Page V7-T1-112.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-83
1.4
1
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Key-Operated Selector Switches 12
Components
M22-WS3-X93
1
Operators Only, continued 3
Type
Switching Position
Three-position
Maintained
Key Removal
Position
Key Code
Return from left,
MS1
key removable center
MS2
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Metal Bezel
Catalog Number
M22-WRS3-A7
M22S-WRS3-A7
M22M-WRS3-A7
M22-WRS3-MS2-A7
M22S-WRS3-MS2-A7
M22M-WRS3-MS2-A7
MS3
M22-WRS3-MS3-A7
M22S-WRS3-MS3-A7
M22M-WRS3-MS3-A7
MS4
M22-WRS3-MS4-A7
M22S-WRS3-MS4-A7
M22M-WRS3-MS4-A7
MS5
M22-WRS3-MS5-A7
M22S-WRS3-MS5-A7
M22M-WRS3-MS5-A7
MS6
M22-WRS3-MS6-A7
M22S-WRS3-MS6-A7
M22M-WRS3-MS6-A7
MS7
M22-WRS3-MS7-A7
M22S-WRS3-MS7-A7
M22M-WRS3-MS7-A7
MS8
M22-WRS3-MS8-A7
M22S-WRS3-MS8-A7
M22M-WRS3-MS8-A7
MS1
M22-WRS3-A6
M22S-WRS3-A6
M22M-WRS3-A6
MS2
M22-WRS3-MS2-A6
M22S-WRS3-MS2-A6
M22M-WRS3-MS2-A6
MS3
M22-WRS3-MS3-A6
M22S-WRS3-MS3-A6
M22M-WRS3-MS3-A6
MS4
M22-WRS3-MS4-A6
M22S-WRS3-MS4-A6
M22M-WRS3-MS4-A6
MS5
M22-WRS3-MS5-A6
M22S-WRS3-MS5-A6
M22M-WRS3-MS5-A6
MS6
M22-WRS3-MS6-A6
M22S-WRS3-MS6-A6
M22M-WRS3-MS6-A6
MS7
M22-WRS3-MS7-A6
M22S-WRS3-MS7-A6
M22M-WRS3-MS7-A6
MS8
M22-WRS3-MS8-A6
M22S-WRS3-MS8-A6
M22M-WRS3-MS8-A6
MS1
M22-WRS3-A4
M22S-WRS3-A4
M22M-WRS3-A4
MS2
M22-WRS3-MS2-A4
M22S-WRS3-MS2-A4
M22M-WRS3-MS2-A4
MS3
M22-WRS3-MS3-A4
M22S-WRS3-MS3-A4
M22M-WRS3-MS3-A4
MS4
M22-WRS3-MS4-A4
M22S-WRS3-MS4-A4
M22M-WRS3-MS4-A4
MS5
M22-WRS3-MS5-A4
M22S-WRS3-MS5-A4
M22M-WRS3-MS5-A4
MS6
M22-WRS3-MS6-A4
M22S-WRS3-MS6-A4
M22M-WRS3-MS6-A4
1
MS7
M22-WRS3-MS7-A4
M22S-WRS3-MS7-A4
M22M-WRS3-MS7-A4
MS8
M22-WRS3-MS8-A4
M22S-WRS3-MS8-A4
M22M-WRS3-MS8-A4
1
Return from right,
MS1
key removable center
MS2
M22-WRS3-A5
M22S-WRS3-A5
M22M-WRS3-A5
M22-WRS3-MS2-A5
M22S-WRS3-MS2-A5
M22M-WRS3-MS2-A5
MS3
M22-WRS3-MS3-A5
M22S-WRS3-MS3-A5
M22M-WRS3-MS3-A5
MS4
M22-WRS3-MS4-A5
M22S-WRS3-MS4-A5
M22M-WRS3-MS4-A5
MS5
M22-WRS3-MS5-A5
M22S-WRS3-MS5-A5
M22M-WRS3-MS5-A5
MS6
M22-WRS3-MS6-A5
M22S-WRS3-MS6-A5
M22M-WRS3-MS6-A5
MS7
M22-WRS3-MS7-A5
M22S-WRS3-MS7-A5
M22M-WRS3-MS7-A5
MS8
M22-WRS3-MS8-A5
M22S-WRS3-MS8-A5
M22M-WRS3-MS8-A5
1
1
60°
60°
M22M-WS3-X93
1
1
Return from left,
key removable
center/right
1
1
1
1
1
Three-position
1
Maintained
60°
1
1
1
1
1
1
60°
Return from right,
key removable left/
center
Notes
1
Includes one key.
2
Key removal positions can be modified in the field using coding adapters; see chart on Page V7-T1-112.
3
Includes contact block mounting adapter.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-84
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Key-Operated Selector Switches
1
1
1
1
ma
x
thic . 5mm
kne
ss
1
1
1
Note: Included
with operator.
1
Components
M22-K10
1
Contact Blocks 1
Accessories
Terminal
Type
Contact
Configuration 2
Catalog Number
Screw
NO
NO, early-make
NC
NC, late-break
NO
NC
NC, late-break
2NO
2NC
NO-NC
NC
NO
M22-K10
M22-K10P
M22-K01
M22-K01D
M22-CK10
M22-CK01
M22-CK01D
M22-CK20
M22-CK02
M22-CK11
M22-FK01 3
M22-FK10 3
Spring-cage
M22-FK01
Description
M22-XW
M22-XW
1
1
1
M22-XWS
Key cover
M22-XWS
1
1
M22-XC-R
Key withdraw adapter 5
M22-XC-R
1
1
M22-XC-Y
M22-ES-MS1
Plunger bridge
Catalog Number
4
Coding adapter
1
M22-XC-Y
1
Extra Keys
Key Code
Catalog Number
MS1
MS2
MS3
MS4
MS5
MS6
MS7
MS8
M22-ES-MS1
M22-ES-MS2
M22-ES-MS3
M22-ES-MS4
M22-ES-MS5
M22-ES-MS6
M22-ES-MS7
M22-ES-MS8
1
M22-XGWK
Guard ring
M22-XGWK
1
1
Notes
1 For complete listing of available contact blocks, see Accessories,
Pages V7-T1-105 to V7-T1-110.
2 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
3 Additional contacts may not be stacked behind M22-F type contact blocks,
M22-F can be stacked behind standard M22 contacts only.
4 Plunger needed to actuate center-mounted contact blocks. Used for non-illuminated
three-position selector switches only.
5 Enables a keyed selector switch to be set to user-selected key withdraw position.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-85
1.4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Mushroom Head Pushbuttons
Product Description
Features
Eaton’s M22 mushroom head
operators are a durable and
unique way to include
standard pushbutton
functionality. Like the
standard pushbutton line,
the maintained pushbuttons
are field convertible to
momentary. They also offer
laser engraving and a robust
five million mechanical
operations on the standard
momentary operator. As with
all operators, they can be
ordered as a ready to install
complete device or as
modular components.
●
●
●
Field convertible from
maintained to momentary
(available on maintained
pushbuttons only)
Customizable laser
engraving on all buttons
More than five million
mechanical operations on
momentary and one million
on maintained pushbuttons
●
●
Modular construction
makes assembly fast and
simplifies stocking of
components and complete
devices
Capable of communicating
via ASi protocol with ASi
adapter modules
Protection Type
●
IP67, IP69K
●
NEMA 4X, 13
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-86
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Catalog Number Selection
1
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1
Mushroom Head Pushbuttons
M22 – DP – R – GB4 – K01
1
1
Bezel
M22 = Silver
M22S = Black
M22M = Metal
Operator Type
DP = Non-illuminated momentary
mushroom head pushbutton
DRP = Non-illuminated maintained
mushroom head pushbutton
Plate Inscription
Operator Color
R = Red
S = Black
G = Green
Y = Yellow
ETCH =
GB0 =
GB1 =
GB3 =
GB4 =
GB5 =
GB6 =
GB15 =
GB16 =
1
Custom 1
STOP
START
UP
DOWN
OFF
ON
FORWARD
REVERSE
X0 =
X1 =
X4 =
X5 =
X6 =
X7 =
K01 =
K10 =
K11 =
K12 =
Contact Blocks
NC
NO
NO-NC
1NO-2NC
1
1
1
1
1
When ordering, specify inscription per
catalog number suffix from the Symbols
Library (see Pages V7-T1-123 to
V7-T1-130) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-DP-R-ETCH;
Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91,
Line item #_.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-87
1.4
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Product Selection
Mushroom Head Pushbuttons, Momentary 1
1
M22-DP-R-K01
Complete Devices
1
Button
Color
Contact Block
Configuration 2
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Metal Bezel
Catalog Number
1
Red
NC
M22-DP-R-K01
M22S-DP-R-K01
M22M-DP-R-K01
2NC
M22-DP-R-K02
M22S-DP-R-K02
M22M-DP-R-K02
1NO-2NC
M22-DP-R-K12
M22S-DP-R-K12
M22M-DP-R-K12
1NO-1NC
M22-DP-R-K11
M22S-DP-R-K11
M22M-DP-R-K11
1
M22S-DP-R-K01
1
1
1
M22M-DP-R-K01
1
1
1
1
M22-DP-G
1
1
1
1
M22S-DP-G
Operators Only 2
Button Color
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Metal Bezel
Catalog Number
Black
M22-DP-S
M22S-DP-S
M22M-DP-S
Red
M22-DP-R
M22S-DP-R
M22M-DP-R
Green
M22-DP-G
M22S-DP-G
M22M-DP-G
Yellow
M22-DP-Y
M22S-DP-Y
M22M-DP-Y
1
1
1
M22M-DP-G
1
1
1
Notes
1 35 mm diameter mushroom head button.
2 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-88
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Non-Illuminated Mushroom Head Pushbuttons, Momentary 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Note: Included
with operator.
1
Components
M22-XDP-G
Mushroom Head Plates
Color
Black
Red
Inscription
2
-—
M22-XDP-S
Custom
STOP
START
FORWARD
REVERSE
UP
DOWN
OFF
ON
M22-XDP-S-ETCH 3
M22-XDP-S-GB0
M22-XDP-S-GB1
M22-XDP-S-GB15
M22-XDP-S-GB16
M22-XDP-S-GB3
M22-XDP-S-GB4
M22-XDP-S-GB5
M22-XDP-S-GB6
M22-XDP-S-X0
M22-XDP-S-X1
M22-XDP-S-X4
—
Custom
STOP
OFF
Green
M22-DP-G-X
Catalog Number
—
M22-XDP-S-X5
M22-XDP-S-X7
M22-XDP-R 2
White
—
Yellow
Custom
—
Custom
M22-XDP-W-ETCH 3
M22-XDP-Y 2
M22-XDP-Y-ETCH 3
Bezel
Color
Catalog Number
Silver
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
M22-DP-S-X
M22-DP-R-X
M22-DP-G-X
M22-DP-Y-X
M22S-DP-S-X
M22S-DP-R-X
M22S-DP-G-X
M22S-DP-Y-X
M22M-DP-S-X
M22M-DP-R-X
M22M-DP-G-X
M22M-DP-Y-X
Black
Metal
M22-K10
M22-XDP-R-ETCH 3
M22-XDP-R-GB0
M22-XDP-R-GB5
M22-XDP-R-X0
M22-XDP-G 2
M22-XDP-G-ETCH 3
M22-XDP-G-GB1
M22-XDP-G-GB6
M22-XDP-G-X0
M22-XDP-G-X1
M22-XDP-W 2
Custom
START
ON
Insertless Mushroom Head Operators
M22-FK01
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Contact Blocks 4
Terminal
Type
Contact
Configuration 5
Catalog Number
Screw
NO
NO, early-make
NC
NC, late-break
NO
NC
NC, late-break
2NO
2NC
NO-NC
NC
NO
M22-K10
M22-K10P
M22-K01
M22-K01D
M22-CK10
M22-CK01
M22-CK01D
M22-CK20
M22-CK02
M22-CK11
M22-FK01 6
M22-FK10 6
Spring-cage
1
Notes
1 35 mm diameter mushroom head button.
2 Minimum order quantity of (10).
3 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols
Library (see Pages V7-T1-123 to V7-T1-130) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XDP-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
4 For complete listing of available contact blocks, see Accessories,
Pages V7-T1-105 to V7-T1-110.
5 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
6 Additional contacts may not be stacked behind M22-F type contact blocks,
M22-F can be stacked behind standard M22 contacts only.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-89
1.4
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Product Selection
Non-Illuminated Mushroom Head Pushbuttons, Maintained 12
M22-DRP-R-K01
Complete Devices
1
Button
Color
Contact Block
Configuration 3
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Metal Bezel
Catalog Number
1
Red
NC
M22-DRP-R-K01
M22S-DRP-R-K01
M22M-DRP-R-K01
2NC
M22-DRP-R-K02
M22S-DRP-R-K02
M22M-DRP-R-K02
1NO-2NC
M22-DRP-R-K12
M22S-DRP-R-K12
M22M-DRP-R-K12
1NO-1NC
M22-DRP-R-K11
M22S-DRP-R-K11
M22M-DRP-R-K11
1
M22S-DRP-R-K01
1
1
1
1
M22M-DRP-R-K01
1
1
1
1
M22-DRP-G
1
1
1
M22S-DRP-G
Operators Only
Button Color
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Metal Bezel
Catalog Number
Black
M22-DRP-S
M22S-DRP-S
M22M-DRP-S
Red
M22-DRP-R
M22S-DRP-R
M22M-DRP-R
Green
M22-DRP-G
M22S-DRP-G
M22M-DRP-G
Yellow
M22-DRP-Y
M22S-DRP-Y
M22M-DRP-Y
1
1
1
M22M-DRP-G
1
1
1
Notes
1
35 mm diameter mushroom head button.
2
Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by switching the locking ring,
which is accessible through the side of the operator body.
3 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Note: This pilot device features a selectable function switch that enables the device
to be set to either maintained or momentary operation.
1
V7-T1-90
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Non-Illuminated Mushroom Head Pushbuttons, Maintained 12
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Note: Included
with operator.
1
Components
M22-XDP-G
Mushroom Head Plates 3
Color
Black
Red
Green
White
Yellow
Inscription
—
Custom
STOP
START
FORWARD
REVERSE
UP
DOWN
OFF
ON
—
Custom
STOP
OFF
—
Custom
START
ON
—
Custom
—
Custom
M22-DRP-G-X
Catalog Number
4
M22-XDP-S
M22-XDP-S-ETCH 5
M22-XDP-S-GB0
M22-XDP-S-GB1
M22-XDP-S-GB15
M22-XDP-S-GB16
M22-XDP-S-GB3
M22-XDP-S-GB4
M22-XDP-S-GB5
M22-XDP-S-GB6
M22-XDP-S-X0
M22-XDP-S-X1
M22-XDP-S-X4
M22-XDP-S-X5
M22-XDP-S-X7
M22-XDP-R 4
M22-XDP-R-ETCH 5
M22-XDP-R-GB0
M22-XDP-R-GB5
M22-XDP-R-X0
M22-XDP-G 4
M22-XDP-G-ETCH 5
M22-XDP-G-GB1
M22-XDP-G-GB6
M22-XDP-G-X0
M22-XDP-G-X1
M22-XDP-W 4
M22-XDP-W-ETCH 5
M22-XDP-Y 4
M22-XDP-Y-ETCH 5
Insertless Mushroom Head Operators
Bezel
Color
Catalog Number
Silver
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Black
Red
Green
M22-DRP-S-X
M22-DRP-R-X
M22-DRP-G-X
M22-DRP-Y-X
M22S-DRP-S-X
M22S-DRP-R-X
M22S-DRP-G-X
M22S-DRP-Y-X
M22M-DRP-S-X
M22M-DRP-R-X
M22M-DRP-G-X
Yellow
M22M-DRP-Y-X
Black
Metal
M22-K10
M22-FK01
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Contact Blocks 3
Terminal
Type
Contact
Configuration 6
Catalog Number
Screw
NO
NO, early-make
NC
NC, late-break
NO
NC
NC, late-break
2NO
2NC
NO-NC
NC
NO
M22-K10
M22-K10P
M22-K01
M22-K01D
M22-CK10
M22-CK01
M22-CK01D
M22-CK20
M22-CK02
M22-CK11
M22-FK01 7
M22-FK10 7
Spring-cage
1
Notes
1 35 mm diameter mushroom head button.
2 Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by
switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body.
3 For complete listing of available button plates and contact blocks, see Accessories,
Pages V7-T1-105 to V7-T1-110.
4 Minimum order quantity of (10).
5
When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols
Library (see Pages V7-T1-123 to V7-T1-130) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XDP-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
6 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
7 Additional contacts may not be stacked behind M22-F type contact blocks,
M22-F can be stacked behind standard M22 contacts only.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-91
1.4
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Double Pushbuttons
Product Description
Features
●
1
Eaton’s M22 double
pushbutton line is perfect for
applications such as motor
and pump starting, as well as
anytime space is limited. In
addition to the two buttons
that fit in one 22 mm hole is
the integrated white
indicating light between
them. These three operators
allow for multiple functions to
occur in a single space.
Green/red, black/white and
black/black color options
along with laser engraving
allow for further custom
applications.
1
Catalog Number Selection
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
●
●
●
Flush and extended, as
well as color options allow
for the perfect combination
button
Integrated indicating light
adds even more
functionality in one
standard 22 mm hole
Customizable laser
engraving on all buttons
LED offering only for
improved brightness
quality and up to 100,000
hours of operation
●
●
More than 200,000
mechanical operations
Capable of communicating
via ASi protocol with ASi
adapter modules
Protection Type
●
IP66
●
NEMA 4X, 13
1
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1
Double Pushbuttons
M22 – DDL – GR – GB5 – K10 – G
1
1
Bezel
M22 = Silver
M22S = Black
1
1
1
1
Operator Type
DDL = Extended buttons and light
DDLF = Flush buttons and light
DDLM = Extended bottom button
1
1
Button Plate Color
Top
Bottom
GR = Green
Red
WS = White
Black
S = Black
Black
Inscription
GB0 = STOP
GB1 = START
GB3 = UP
GB4 = DOWN
GB5 = OFF
GB6 = ON
GB14 = RESET
GB15 = FORWARD
GB16 = REVERSE
X0 =
X1 =
X5 =
X5 =
X6 =
X7 =
X5 =
K10 =
K01 =
K20 =
K02 =
K11 =
Contact Blocks
1NO
K30 = 3NO
1NC
K03 = 3NC
2NO
K21 = 2NO-1NC
2NC
K12 = 1NO-2NC
1NO-1NC
Light Units
12–30 Vac/Vdc
W = White
R = Red
G = Green
B = Blue
85–264 Vac
230W = White
230R = Red
230G = Green
230B = Blue
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-92
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Product Selection
1
Components
1
Double Pushbuttons, Extended Pushbuttons and Center Light, Momentary
1
Operators Only 1
M22-DDL-GR-GB1-GB0
Bezel
Color
Top
Bottom
Silver
Green
Red
White
Black
M22S-DDL-GR-X1-X0
Black
Green
White
Black
Black
Black
Red
Inscription
Top
Bottom
Catalog Number
—
Custom
—
Custom
M22-DDL-GR
M22-DDL-GR-ETCH 2
START
—
Custom
STOP
—
Custom
START
STOP
—
Custom
—
—
Custom
—
—
Custom
—
Custom
Black
START
—
Custom
STOP
—
Custom
Black
START
—
Custom
STOP
—
Custom
—
1
1
M22-DDL-GR-X1-X0
M22-DDL-GR-GB1-GB0
M22-DDL-WS
M22-DDL-WS-ETCH 2
M22-DDL-WS-X1-X0
M22-DDL-WS-GB1-GB0
1
1
1
M22-DDL-S
M22-DDL-S-ETCH 2
M22-DDL-S-X4-X5
M22-DDL-S-X7-X7
M22S-DDL-GR
M22S-DDL-GR-ETCH 2
1
1
M22S-DDL-GR-X1-X0
M22S-DDL-GR-GB1-GB0
M22S-DDL-WS
M22S-DDL-WS-ETCH 2
M22S-DDL-WS-X1-X0
M22S-DDL-WS-GB1-GB0
M22S-DDL-S
M22S-DDL-S-ETCH 2
M22S-DDL-S-X4-X5
M22S-DDL-S-X7-X7
Notes
1 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
2 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Pages V7-T1-123 to V7-T1-130) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-DDL-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-93
1.4
1
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Double Pushbuttons, Flush Top Pushbuttons and Center Light, Momentary
Operators Only 1
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
M22-DDLF-GR
Bezel
Color
Top
Bottom
Inscription
Top
Bottom
Catalog Number
Silver
Green
Red
—
—
M22-DDLF-GR
Custom
Custom
M22-DDLF-GR-ETCH 2
—
—
M22-DDLF-WS
Custom
Custom
1
White
Black
1
Green
Red
M22-DDLF-GR-X1-X0
White
Black
M22-DDLF-WS-X1-X0
Green
Red
1
1
M22S-DDLF-GR-X1-X0
Black
M22-DDLF-WS-ETCH 2
—
—
Custom
Custom
M22S-DDLF-GR-ETCH 2
—
—
M22S-DDLF-WS
Custom
Custom
M22S-DDLF-GR
1
White
Black
1
Green
Red
M22S-DDLF-GR-X1-X0
White
Black
M22S-DDLF-WS-X1-X0
1
1
M22S-DDLF-WS-ETCH 2
Double Pushbuttons, Flush Top Pushbutton and Center Light, Extended Bottom Pushbutton, Momentary
1
Operators Only 1
1
Bezel
Color
Top
Bottom
Silver
Green
Red
M22-DDLM-GR
1
White
1
1
Black
Inscription
Top
Bottom
Catalog Number
—
—
M22-DDLM-GR
Custom
Custom
M22-DDLM-GR-ETCH 2
—
—
M22-DDLM-WS
Custom
Custom
M22-DDLM-WS-ETCH 2
Green
Red
M22-DDLM-GR-X1-X0
White
Black
M22-DDLM-WS-X1-X0
Green
Red
1
M22-DDLM-GR-X1-X0
Black
1
White
1
1
1
Black
—
—
M22S-DDLM-GR
Custom
Custom
M22S-DDLM-GR-ETCH 2
—
—
M22S-DDLM-WS
Custom
Custom
M22S-DDLM-WS-ETCH 2
Green
Red
M22S-DDLM-GR-X1-X0
White
Black
M22S-DDLM-WS-X1-X0
Notes
1
Includes contact block mounting adapter.
2
When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Pages V7-T1-123 to V7-T1-130) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-DDLM-GR-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-94
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Double Pushbuttons
1
1
1
1
ma
x
thic . 5mm
kne
ss
1
1
1
Note: Included
with operator.
M22-LED-W
Light Units 1
M22-K10
Terminal
Type
LED
Color
Light Unit
Voltage
Screw
White
Red
Green
Blue
White
Red
Green
Blue
White
Red
Green
Blue
Red/Green/
Yellow
Red, Green,
Blue, Yellow,
White, Violet,
Turquoise
12–30
Vac/Vdc
Screw
M22-FLED-_
Spring-cage
85–264
Vac
12–30
Vac/Vdc
24 Vdc
Catalog Number
M22-LED-W
M22-LED-R
M22-LED-G
M22-LED-B
M22-LED230-W
M22-LED230-R
M22-LED230-G
M22-LED230-B
M22-FLED-W
M22-FLED-R
M22-FLED-G
M22-FLED-B
M22-FLED-RG 2
M22-FLED-RGB 2
M22-FK01
1
Contact Blocks 1
Terminal
Type
Contact
Configuration 3
Catalog Number
Screw
NO
NO, early-make
NC
NC, late-break
NO
NC
NC, late-break
2NO
2NC
NO-NC
NC
NO
M22-K10
M22-K10P
M22-K01
M22-K01D
M22-CK10
M22-CK01
M22-CK01D
M22-CK20
M22-CK02
M22-CK11
M22-FK01 4
M22-FK10 4
Spring-cage
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Notes
1 For complete listing of available light units and contact blocks, see Accessories,
Pages V7-T1-105 to V7-T1-110.
2 Please see color input key on Page V7-T1-108.
3 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
4 Additional contacts may not be stacked behind M22-F type contact blocks,
M22-F can be stacked behind standard M22 contacts only.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-95
1.4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Four-Way Pushbuttons
Product Description
Features
Eaton’s M22 four-way pushbutton is a truly unique
offering. A four-way
pushbutton offers four
different buttons mounted
in a single 22 mm hole. This
is ideal not only for an
application with limited
space, but also directional
applications (when ordered
with the four arrow engraving
option). Another unique
option is the interlocked
version, which prevents two
opposite buttons from being
actuated at the same time.
●
●
Four buttons in one
operator allows for
increased functionality in
limited space
Optional interlocking
option, which prevents two
buttons from being
actuated at the same time
●
●
Customizable laser
engraving on all buttons for
directional or other
applications
Capable of communicating
via ASi protocol with ASi
adapter modules
Protection Type
●
IP66
Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
Four-Way Pushbuttons
M22 – D4 – S – X7 – K01
1
1
Bezel
M22 = Silver
M22S = Black
1
1
1
1
Button Color
S = Black
Inscription
ETCH = Custom 1
X7 =
1
Operator Type
D4 = Four-way pushbutton,
momentary, non-interlocked
DI4 = Four-way pushbutton,
momentary, interlocked
1
When ordering, specify
inscription per catalog
number suffix from the Symbols
Library (see Pages V7-T1-123
to V7-T1-130) into the Order
Notes.
For example, M22-D4-S-ETCH;
Order Notes: Mark with symbol
X91, Line item #_.
K10 =
K01 =
K20 =
K02 =
K11 =
Contact Blocks
1NO
K30 =3NO
1NC
K03 =3NC
2NO
K21 =2NO-1NC
2NC
K12 =1NO-2NC
1NO-1NC
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-96
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Product Selection
1
Four-Way Pushbuttons, Momentary
1
1
1
ma
x
thic . 5mm
kne
ss
1
1
1
Note: Included
with operator.
1
1
Components
M22-D4-S-X7
Operators Only
1
Type
Bezel
Color
Non-interlocked
Silver
Black
Black
Interlocked
Silver
Black
M22-K10
Black
Black
Catalog Number
1
1
—
M22-D4-S
Custom
M22-D4-S-ETCH 3
Directional arrows
—
M22-D4-S-X7
M22S-D4-S
Custom
M22S-D4-S-ETCH 3
1
Directional arrows
—
M22S-D4-S-X7
M22-DI4-S
1
Custom
M22-DI4-S-ETCH 3
Directional arrows
—
M22-DI4-S-X7
M22S-DI4-S
Custom
M22S-DI4-S-ETCH 3
Directional arrows
M22S-DI4-S-X7
1
1
1
1
1
Contact Blocks 12
Terminal
Type
Contact
Configuration 4
Catalog Number
Screw
NO
NO, early-make
NC
NC, late-break
NO
NC
NC, late-break
2NO
2NC
NO-NC
NC
NO
M22-K10
M22-K10P
M22-K01
M22-K01D
M22-CK10
M22-CK01
M22-CK01D
M22-CK20
M22-CK02
M22-CK11
M22-FK01 5
M22-FK10 5
Spring-cage
M22-FK01
Black
Inscription
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Notes
1 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
2 For complete listing of available contact blocks, see Accessories, Pages V7-T1-105 to V7-T1-110.
3 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library
(see Pages V7-T1-123 to V7-T1-130) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-D4-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
4 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
5 Additional contacts may not be stacked behind M22-F type contact blocks,
M22-F can be stacked behind standard M22 contacts only.
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-97
1.4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Joysticks
Product Description
Features
Eaton’s M22 joystick line
comes in a wide variety of
options. From vertical and
horizontal two-position
switches to the maintained
four-position, these operators
fit a variety of applications. An
additional option, two switch
points, allows for eight
isolated circuits to be
actuated individually on a
single operator.
●
1
Product Selection
1
Joysticks
1
●
Available in four-position
and two-position
Two switch point option
allows for two contacts in
each direction (up to eight
total contacts in one
operator)
●
Capable of communicating
via ASi protocol with ASi
adapter modules
Protection Type
●
IP66
Components
M22-WJ2H
Operators 1
Number of Directions
Switching
Position
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Metal Bezel
Catalog Number
1
Two-position horizontal
Momentary
M22-WJ2H
M22S-WJ2H
M22M-WJ2H
M22-WJ2H-2P
M22S-WJ2H-2P
M22M-WJ2H-2P
1
Two-position horizontal
Maintained
M22-WRJ2H
M22S-WRJ2H
M22M-WRJ2H
Two-position vertical
Momentary
M22-WJ2V
M22S-WJ2V
M22M-WJ2V
M22-WJ2V-2P
M22S-WJ2V-2P
M22M-WJ2V-2P
1
Two switch points
M22M-WJ2H
1
Two switch points
1
Two-position vertical
Maintained
M22-WRJ2V
M22S-WRJ2V
M22M-WRJ2V
Four-position
Momentary
M22-WJ4
M22S-WJ4
M22M-WJ4
M22-WJ4-2P
M22S-WJ4-2P
M22M-WJ4-2P
M22-WRJ4
M22S-WRJ4
M22M-WRJ4
Two switch points
1
Four-position
1
Maintained
Note
Includes contact block mounting adapter.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-98
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.4
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Joysticks
1
1
1
ma
x
thic . 5mm
kne
ss
1
1
1
Note: Included
with operator.
1
1
M22-K10
Terminal
Type
Contact
Configuration 3
Catalog Number
Screw
NO
NO, early-make
NC
NC, late-break
NO
NC
NC, late-break
2NO
2NC
NO-NC
NC
NO
M22-K10
M22-K10P
M22-K01
M22-K01D
M22-CK10
M22-CK01
M22-CK01D
M22-CK20
M22-CK02
M22-CK11
M22-FK01 4
M22-FK10 4
Spring-cage
M22-FK01
Joystick with Double Contact
Contact Blocks 12
The joystick allows the control
of up to four directions of
movement on machines.
Different variants of the
joystick have two/fourpositions and other variants
have two settings for each
position. This allows, for
example, two-speed settings
for each direction. For this
application, a standard
normally open contact and an
early-make contact are fitted
in series. Momentary contact
and latching contact versions
are available.
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
2
1
1
1
Notes
1 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
2 For complete listing of available contact blocks, see Accessories,
Pages V7-T1-105 to V7-T1-110.
3 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
4 Additional contacts may not be stacked behind M22-F type contact blocks,
M22-F can be stacked behind standard M22 contacts only.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-99
1.4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Potentiometers
Acoustic Devices
Product Description
Product Description
Eaton’s M22 potentiometers allow for a ready to use operator in
a conveniently sized package. M22 potentiometers include the
resistive element, instead of just a knob, and a built in legend
surrounding the knob. The slim design, with integrated contacts
and the range of resistances available, allows for a quick install.
Eaton’s M22 acoustic devices are a simple and aesthetic way to
add a buzzer or indicator to any application. Fitting in the same
22 mm hole, these devices can be ordered in continuous or
pulsed tone and with or without the IP40 enclosure.
Features
Features
●
●
●
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Scale markings on the knob allows the operator to be used
without an additional legend plate
Oversized knob option available
Slim design allows for space saving and simple wiring and
installation
●
●
●
Continuous or pulsed tone available
83 dB / 10 cm decibel rating
Slim design allows for space saving and simple wiring and
installation
Protection Type
●
IP66
●
NEMA 4X, 13
Protection Type
●
IP40
●
NEMA 12
Product Selection
Product Selection
Potentiometers
Acoustic Devices
M22-R10K
1
Complete Devices
Description
1
4.7
10
47
100
470
1
4.7
10
47
100
M22-R1K
M22-R4K7
M22-R10K
M22-R47K
M22-R100K
M22-R470K
M22S-R1K
M22S-R4K7
M22S-R10K
M22S-R47K
M22S-R100K
Indicator with buzzer,
black continuous tone,
18–30 Vac/Vdc
Indicator with buzzer,
black pulsed tone,
18–30 Vac/Vdc
470
Metal
1
4.7
10
47
100
470
Oversized Knob
Silver
1
4.7
10
47
100
470
Black
1
4.7
10
47
100
470
Metal
1
4.7
10
47
100
470
M22S-R470K
M22M-R1K
M22M-R4K7
M22M-R10K
M22M-R47K
M22M-R100K
M22M-R470K
Silver
1
M22M-R10K
1
Black
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-100
Complete Devices
Catalog Number
Bezel
1
M22-AMC-XAM
Resistance
Rk
M22-XAM
Decibel
Rating
Catalog Number
83 dB/
10 cm
M22-AMC-XAM
83 dB/
10 cm
M22-AMC-XAMP
Buzzers
Description
Indicator without
buzzer, black
Buzzer only,
continuous tone,
18–30 Vac/Vdc
Buzzer only, pulsed
tone, 18–30 Vac/Vdc
Decibel
Rating
Catalog Number
83 dB/
10 cm
83 dB/
10 cm
M22-AMC
83 dB/
10 cm
M22-XAMP
M22-R1K-RH
M22-R4K7-RH
M22-R10K-RH
M22-R47K-RH
M22-R100K-RH
M22-R470K-RH
M22S-R1K-RH
M22S-R4K7-RH
M22S-R10K-RH
M22S-R47K-RH
M22S-R100K-RH
M22S-R470K-RH
M22M-R1K-RH
M22M-R4K7-RH
M22M-R10K-RH
M22M-R47K-RH
M22M-R100K-RH
M22M-R470K-RH
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
M22-XAM
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Through-the-Door Operators
Bulkhead Interfaces
Product Description
Product Description
Eaton’s M22 through-the-door operators use the same familiar
flush pushbutton look with the addition of a cut-to-length rod
that allows for a simple reset operator.
Eaton’s M22 bulkhead interfaces are another unique offering in
the M22 line. This device allows for a secure connection to any
USB or RJ45 connected device within an enclosure or panel.
With an IP65 rating when closed, these devices are not only
convenient, but robust and reliable.
Features
Features
●
●
●
Customizable laser engraving on all buttons
More than five million mechanical operations
Pushrod can be cut to length
●
1
Convenient and safe way to make a data connection to inside
of the panel without opening the panel door
1
1
1
1
1
1
Protection Type
●
IP67, IP69K
●
NEMA 4X, 13
Protection Type
●
IP65 when closed, IP20 when connected
Product Selection
Product Selection
1
Through-the-Door Operators 1
Bulkhead Interfaces
1
M22-DZ-B-X6
Complete Devices
M22-USB-SA
Color
Inscription
Catalog Number
Blue
—
RESET
Red
—
M22-DZ-B
M22-DZ-B-GB14
M22-DZ-B-X6
M22-DZ-R
M22-DZ-R-X0
M22-DZ-R-GB0
STOP
1
USB Socket 45
Used for USB connection plug IP65 when
closed, IP20 when connected.
Bezel
Catalog Number
Silver
M22-USB-SA
1
1
1
1
1
M22-DZ-X
Buttonless Operator
Bezel
Catalog Number
Silver
Metal
M22-DZ-X
M22M-DZ-X
M22-RJ45-SA
RJ45 Socket 6
Used for RJ45 Ethernet connection IP65
when closed, IP20 when connected.
Bezel
Catalog Number
Silver
M22-RJ45-SA
1
1
1
1
M22-XD-B
Button Plates 2
Color
Inscription
Catalog Number
Blue
—
RESET
Red
—
M22-XD-B 3
M22-XD-B-GB14
M22-XD-B-X6
M22-XD-R 3
M22-XD-R-X0
M22-XD-R-GB0
STOP
1
Notes
1 The pushrod is 3.24 in long and can be cut to length.
2 Any combination of plate color and inscription is available.
3 Minimum order quantity of (10).
4 USB interface is complete with 2-ft-long USB cable.
5 USB interface is UL Listed, CSA approved and USB 3.0.
6 RJ45 interface is an eight-wire connector.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-101
1.4
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
ASi Adapter Modules
Product Description
1
1
1
1
Eaton’s M22 ASi adapter modules add functionality to every
operator in the M22 line. These devices can be connected to any
operator that uses contact blocks or LED units. The simple snapon design allows for a quick integration of an entire application of
operators to a communicating network.
Features
●
1
●
1
●
1
●
1
●
1
1
1
1
Allows compatible operators to communicate on an ASi
network
Not only can the status of a contact block be read, but LEDs
can be illuminated by an ASi adapter
ASi adapters simply clip on to the back of the contact blocks
and LEDs
Insulation displacement connectors allow for installation of
adapters without any tools
Two integrated LEDs indicate status of communications
Protection Type
●
IP20
Product Selection
ASi Adapter Modules
M22-ASI
1
1
1
1
Complete Devices
Description
Catalog Number
ASi adapter module
ASi adapter module for
base mounting
ASi adapter module for
E-stop
ASi adapter module for
E-stop base mounting
M22-ASI
M22-ASI-C
M22-ASI-S
M22-ASI-CS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-102
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.4
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Palm Switches
Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and
not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
Palm Switches, Type 4X/13 Enclosure
Product Description
Eaton’s M22 palm switches are an oversized button that mount
directly to an enclosure base. This allows for a standalone button
that can be mounted anywhere. The enclosure uses basemounted contact blocks, which allows for quick wiring and
mounting. The palm switches come in momentary or maintained
versions. As with other M22 operators, the palm switches are
available as complete devices, including the enclosure and
contact blocks or as modular components.
Operator Color
S = Black
R = Red
Y = Yellow
●
●
●
Oversized operator in black, red and yellow color options
Button integrated directly into an enclosure
Base mounting contact blocks allow for simple wiring and
installation
More than one million mechanical operations on momentary
and 100,000 on maintained operators
Enclosure
Top Color
I = Gray
IY = Yellow
1
1
1
1
Product Selection
1
Complete Devices
FAK-S-KC11-I
Operator, Base and Contact Blocks 1
1
Button
Color
1
Contact Block
Configuration 2
Momentary
Black
1NO-1NC
Red
1NO-1NC
Yellow
1NO-1NC
Catalog Number
FAK-S-KC11-I
FAK-R-KC11-I
FAK-Y-KC11-I
1
1
1
FAK-R-V-KC01-IY
Protection Type
●
IP67, IP69K
●
NEMA 4X, 13
1
1
Features
●
Contact Blocks
KC10 = NO
KC01 = NC
CKC10 = NO
CKC01 = NC
1
1
FAK – S – KC10 – I
Operator Type
FAK = Palm switch
1
Maintained
Red
NC
2NC
FAK-R-V-KC01-IY
FAK-R-V-KC02-IY
1
1NO-2NC
1NO-1NC
FAK-R-V-KC12-IY
FAK-R-V-KC11-IY
1
1
Notes
1 For complete listing of available contact blocks, see Accessories,
Pages V7-T1-105 to V7-T1-110.
2 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-103
1.4
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Components
FAK-S
1
1
Operators Only
Type
Button Color
Catalog Number
Momentary
Black
Red
Yellow
Red
FAK-S
FAK-R
FAK-Y
FAK-R-V-Y
Maintained
1
1
FAK-IU
Palm Switch Enclosure Base
Catalog Number
1
FAK-IU
1
1
M22-K10
Contact Blocks 1
1
Terminal
Type
Contact
Configuration 2
Catalog Number
1
Screw
1
Spring-cage
NO
NC
NO
NC
NC
NO
M22-KC10
M22-KC01
M22-CKC10
M22-CKC01
M22-FK01 3
M22-FK10 3
1
M22-FK01
1
1
1
1
Notes
1
For complete listing of available contact blocks, see Accessories, Pages V7-T1-105 to V7-T1-110.
2
All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
3
Additional contacts may not be stacked behind M22-F type contact blocks,
M22-F can be stacked behind standard M22 contacts only.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-104
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Accessories
M22-XD-S
M22-XDH-R
M22-XDP-G
1
Button Plates
Color
Inscription
Catalog Number
Flush Pushbutton
Catalog Number
Extended Pushbutton
Catalog Number
Mushroom Head Button
1
Black
—
M22-XD-S
M22-XDH-S
M22-XDP-S
White
Red
Green
—
—
—
M22-XD-W
M22-XD-R
M22-XD-G
M22-XDH-W
M22-XDH-R
M22-XDH-G
M22-XDP-W
M22-XDP-R
M22-XDP-G
1
Yellow
Blue
Black, white, red, green, yellow, blue
Black, red, green
Black
White
Red
Green
Yellow
—
—
—
—
Custom
Custom
Custom
Custom
Custom
M22-XD-Y
M22-XD-B
M22-XD-SWRGYB
M22-XD-SRG
M22-XD-S-ETCH
M22-XD-W-ETCH
M22-XD-R-ETCH
M22-XD-G-ETCH
M22-XD-Y-ETCH
M22-XDH-Y
M22-XDH-B
M22-XDH-SWRGYB
M22-XDH-SRG
M22-XDH-S-ETCH
M22-XDH-W-ETCH
M22-XDH-R-ETCH
M22-XDH-G-ETCH
M22-XDH-Y-ETCH
M22-XDP-Y
—
—
—
M22-XDP-S-ETCH
M22-XDP-W-ETCH
M22-XDP-R-ETCH
M22-XDP-G-ETCH
M22-XDP-Y-ETCH
Blue
Black
Red
Black
White
Green
Black
Black
Black
Black
Red
Black
Green
Black
Blue
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Red
Green
Black
White
Green
Black
Green
Black
Black
Blue
Black
Black
Black
Custom
STOP
STOP
START
START
START
CLOSE
UP
DOWN
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
TEST
RESET
FORWARD
REVERSE
RAISE
LOWER
M22-XD-B-ETCH
M22-XD-S-GB0
M22-XD-R-GB0
M22-XD-S-GB1
M22-XD-W-GB1
M22-XD-G-GB1
M22-XD-S-GB2
M22-XD-S-GB3
M22-XD-S-GB4
M22-XD-S-GB5
M22-XD-R-GB5
M22-XD-S-GB6
M22-XD-G-GB6
M22-XD-S-GB9
M22-XD-B-GB14
M22-XD-S-GB15
M22-XD-S-GB16
M22-XD-S-GB17
M22-XD-S-GB18
M22-XD-S-X0
M22-XD-R-X0
—
M22-XD-S-X1
M22-XD-W-X1
M22-XD-G-X1
M22-XD-S-X2
M22-XD-G-X2
M22-XD-S-X4
M22-XD-S-X5
M22-XD-B-X6
M22-XD-S-X7
M22-XD-S-X8
M22-XDH-B-ETCH
M22-XDH-S-GB0
M22-XDH-R-GB0
M22-XDH-S-GB1
M22-XDH-W-GB1
M22-XDH-G-GB1
M22-XDH-S-GB2
M22-XDH-S-GB3
M22-XDH-S-GB4
M22-XDH-S-GB5
M22-XDH-R-GB5
M22-XDH-S-GB6
M22-XDH-G-GB6
M22-XDH-S-GB9
M22-XDH-B-GB14
M22-XDH-S-GB15
M22-XDH-S-GB16
M22-XDH-S-GB17
M22-XDH-S-GB18
M22-XDH-S-X0
M22-XDH-R-X0
—
M22-XDH-S-X1
M22-XDH-W-X1
M22-XDH-G-X1
M22-XDH-S-X2
M22-XDH-G-X2
M22-XDH-S-X4
M22-XDH-S-X5
M22-XDH-B-X6
M22-XDH-S-X7
M22-XDH-S-X8
—
M22-XDP-S-GB0
M22-XDP-R-GB0
M22-XDP-S-GB1
—
M22-XDP-G-GB1
—
M22-XDP-S-GB3
M22-XDP-S-GB4
M22-XDP-S-GB5
M22-XDP-R-GB5
M22-XDP-S-GB6
M22-XDP-G-GB6
—
—
M22-XDP-S-GB15
M22-XDP-S-GB16
—
—
M22-XDP-S-X0
M22-XDP-R-X0
M22-XDP-G-X0
M22-XDP-S-X1
—
M22-XDP-G-X1
—
—
M22-XDP-S-X4
M22-XDP-S-X5
—
M22-XDP-S-X7
—
Black
Black
See 1 below
See 1 below
Black
Black
Black
See 1 below
See 1 below
See 1 below
See 1 below
See 1 below
See 1 below
M22-XD-S-X9
M22-XD-S-X10
M22-XD-S-X11
M22-XD-S-X12
M22-XD-S-X13
M22-XD-S-X14
M22-XD-S-X15
M22-XD-S-X16
M22-XD-S-X17
M22-XDH-S-X9
M22-XDH-S-X10
M22-XDH-S-X11
M22-XDH-S-X12
M22-XDH-S-X13
M22-XDH-S-X14
M22-XDH-S-X15
M22-XDH-S-X16
M22-XDH-S-X17
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Black
Black
Black
See 1 below
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Note
1 Refer to the Symbols Library, (see Pages V7-T1-123 to V7-T1-130), for symbol image.
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-105
1.4
1
M22-XDLH-W
1
1
M22-XDL-G
1
1
1
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Button Lenses
Color
Inscription
Catalog Number
Flush
Catalog Number
Extended
Color
Inscription
Catalog Number
Flush
Catalog Number
Extended
White
Red
—
—
M22-XDL-W
M22-XDL-R
M22-XDLH-W
M22-XDLH-R
Blue
Red
Custom
STOP
M22-XDL-B-ETCH
M22-XDL-R-GB0
M22-XDLH-B-ETCH
M22-XDLH-R-GB0
Green
Yellow
Blue
White
Red
Green
Yellow
—
—
—
Custom
Custom
Custom
Custom
M22-XDL-G
M22-XDL-Y
M22-XDL-B
M22-XDL-W-ETCH
M22-XDL-R-ETCH
M22-XDL-G-ETCH
M22-XDL-Y-ETCH
M22-XDLH-G
M22-XDLH-Y
M22-XDLH-B
M22-XDLH-W-ETCH
M22-XDLH-R-ETCH
M22-XDLH-G-ETCH
M22-XDLH-Y-ETCH
Green
Red
Green
Blue
Red
Green
Blue
START
OFF
ON
RESET
M22-XDL-G-GB1
M22-XDL-R-GB5
M22-XDL-G-GB6
M22-XDL-B-GB14
M22-XDL-R-X0
M22-XDL-G-X1
M22-XDL-B-X6
M22-XDLH-G-GB1
M22-XDLH-R-GB5
M22-XDLH-G-GB6
M22-XDLH-B-GB14
M22-XDLH-R-X0
M22-XDLH-G-X1
M22-XDLH-B-X6
Mounting Adapters
Description
Catalog Number
M22-A
Contact block mounting adapter
M22-A
M22-A4
Contact block mounting adapter,
four-position (for use with
four-way pushbuttons, joysticks
and four-position selector switches
only).
M22-A4
M22-LS
Allows mounting of M22 pushbuttons
to LS-Titan limit switch bodies
(for the full LS-Titan catalog section,
see PG08301004E).
M22-LS
1
1
1
1
1
1
M22-K10
1
1
Contact Blocks
Mounting
Location
Terminal Type
Front
Screw
1
1
M22-FK01
1
1
Base
1
1
1
1
Front
1
1
1
Base
1
Spring-cage
Contact
Configuration 1
Package
Qty.
Catalog Number
NO
NO
NO
NO, early-make
NC
NC
NC
NC, late-break
SMCB, NC
SMCB, 2NC
NO
NO
NO
NC
NC
NC
SMCB, NC
SMCB, 2NC
NO
NC
NC, late-break
2NO 2
2NC 2
NO-NC 2
NC
NO
NO
NC
1
25
100
1
1
25
100
1
1
1
1
25
100
1
25
100
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
20
20
1
1
M22-K10
M22-K10-B25
M22-K10-B100
M22-K10P
M22-K01
M22-K01-B25
M22-K01-B100
M22-K01D
M22-K01SMC10
M22-K02SMC10
M22-KC10
M22-KC10-B25
M22-KC10-B100
M22-KC01
M22-KC01-B25
M22-KC01-B100
M22-KC01SMC10
M22-KC02SMC10
M22-CK10
M22-CK01
M22-CK01D
M22-CK20
M22-CK02
M22-CK11
M22-FK01 3
M22-FK10 3
M22-CKC10
M22-CKC01
Notes
1 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
2 Not stackable.
3 Additional contacts may not be stacked behind M22-F type contact blocks, M22-F can be stacked behind standard M22 contacts only.
1
1
V7-T1-106
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
M22-LED-W
Light Units
Terminal Type
Mounting
Location
Screw
Front
M22-FLED-_
Base
Spring-cage
Front
Base
Front
M22-XLED60
1.4
1
LED Color
Light Unit Voltage
Catalog Number
White
Red
Green
Blue
White
Red
Green
Blue
White
Red
Green
Blue
White
Red
Green
Blue
White
Red
Green
Blue
White
Red
Green
Blue
White
Red
Green
Blue
White
Red
Green
Blue
White
Red
Green
Blue
White
Red
Green
Blue
White
Red
Green
Blue
Red/Green/Yellow
Red, Green, Blue,
Yellow, White, Violet,
Turquoise
12–30 Vac/Vdc
M22-LED-W
M22-LED-R
M22-LED-G
M22-LED-B
M22-LED230-W
M22-LED230-R
M22-LED230-G
M22-LED230-B
M22-LED230H-W
M22-LED230H-R
M22-LED230H-G
M22-LED230H-B
M22-LEDC-W
M22-LEDC-R
M22-LEDC-G
M22-LEDC-B
M22-LEDC230-W
M22-LEDC230-R
M22-LEDC230-G
M22-LEDC230-B
M22-LEDC230H-W
M22-LEDC230H-R
M22-LEDC230H-G
M22-LEDC230H-B
M22-CLED-W
M22-CLED-R
M22-CLED-G
M22-CLED-B
M22-CLED230-W
M22-CLED230-R
M22-CLED230-G
M22-CLED230-B
M22-CLEDC-W
M22-CLEDC-R
M22-CLEDC-G
M22-CLEDC-B
M22-CLEDC230-W
M22-CLEDC230-R
M22-CLEDC230-G
M22-CLEDC230-B
M22-FLED-W
M22-FLED-R
M22-FLED-G
M22-FLED-B
M22-FLED-RG 1
M22-FLED-RGB 1
85–264 Vac
207–264 Vac
12–30 Vac/Vdc
85–264 Vac
207–264 Vac
12–30 Vac/Vdc
85–264 Vac
12–30 Vac/Vdc
85–264 Vac
12–30 Vac/Vdc
24 Vdc
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
LED Resistor and Test Elements
Terminal Type
Mounting
Location
Element
Type
Screw
Front
Resistor 23
Test
Voltage
Catalog Number
42–60 Vac/Vdc
220 Vdc
12–240 Vac/Vdc
85–264 Vac
M22-XLED60
M22-XLED220
M22-XLED-T
M22-XLED230-T
1
1
1
1
Notes
1
Please see color input key on Page V7-T1-108.
2
Resistor units to be used with 12–30V light units.
3
Refer to IL04716002E for use of resistor elements in series for higher DC voltage.
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1
1
V7-T1-107
1.4
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Multi-Color LED Input Guide
Terminal Color
X1
X2
X3
X4
+R
+G
+B
GND
Red
■
—
—
■
Green
—
■
—
■
Yellow
■
■
—
■
Red
■
—
—
■
Green
—
■
—
■
1
Yellow
■
■
—
■
White
■
■
■
■
1
Blue
—
—
■
■
Violet
■
—
■
■
Turquoise
—
■
■
■
1
1
Catalog Number
M22-FLED-RG
1
1
M22-FLED-RGB
1
1
Legend Plate Holders and Inserts, Pushbuttons and Double Pushbuttons 1
1
1
M22S-ST-X
1
Description
Inscription
Catalog Number
Legend plate holder, without legend plate insert,
for pushbuttons
Legend plate holder, without legend plate insert,
for double pushbuttons
—
M22S-ST-X
—
M22S-STDD-X
Legend plate insert
—
Custom
STOP
START
OFF
ON
RUN
FAULT
OFF ON
MAN. AUTO
MAN. O AUTO
HAND AUTO
HAND O AUTO
1
2
OI
O-I
I O II
M22-XST
M22-XST-ETCH 2
M22-XST-GB0
M22-XST-GB1
M22-XST-GB5
M22-XST-GB6
M22-XST-GB7
M22-XST-GB8
M22-XST-GB10
M22-XST-GB11
M22-XST-GB12
M22-XST-D11
M22-XST-D12
M22-XST-X52
M22-XST-X53
M22-XST-X88
M22-XST-X89
M22-XST-X93
1
1
M22-XST-GB0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Notes
1 Legend plates are IP66 and NEMA 4X/13.
2 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library
(see Pages V7-T1-123 to V7-T1-130) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XD-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
1
1
1
1
1
1
Example
To order a legend plate for a pushbutton with non-standard markings (FORWARD):
1. Select legend plate holder—M22S-ST-X.
2. Select legend plate insert—M22-XST-ETCH.
3. Select FORWARD from the Symbols Library, Pages V7-T1-123 to V7-T1-130, identified by GB15 suffix.
4. Indicate on the order form in the order notes—suffix GB15, line item # ___ .
1
1
V7-T1-108
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.4
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Legend Plates, Complete 1
M22S-ST-GB0
For use with pushbuttons
and indicating lights
Selector switches
M22-XZK
Emergency-stop operators
1
Description
Inscription
Catalog Number
Legend plate holder with insert
STOP
START
OFF
ON
RUN
FAULT
M22S-ST-GB0
M22S-ST-GB1
M22S-ST-GB5
M22S-ST-GB6
M22S-ST-GB7
M22S-ST-GB8
1
1
2
OFF ON
M22S-ST-X52
M22S-ST-X53
M22S-ST-GB10
1
MAN. AUTO
MAN. O AUTO
HAND AUTO
HAND O AUTO
OI
O-I
I O II
—
Custom
M22S-ST-GB11
M22S-ST-GB12
M22S-ST-D11
M22S-ST-D12
M22S-ST-X88
M22S-ST-X89
M22S-ST-X93
M22-XZK
M22-XZK-ETCH 2
EMERGENCY-STOP
M22-XZK-GB99
—
Rectangular yellow legend plate
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Square yellow legend plate
M22-XYK
Round yellow legend plate, 90 mm
Round yellow legend plate, 60 mm
M22-XBK1
—
—
EMERGENCY-STOP four-language
EMERGENCY-STOP (top and bottom)
—
Custom
M22-XYK
M22-XYK-ETCH 2
M22-XYK1
M22-XYK5
M22-XAK
M22-XAK-ETCH 2
EMERGENCY-STOP four-language
EMERGENCY-STOP (top and bottom)
M22-XAK1
M22-XAK5
—
Custom
M22-XBK
M22-XBK-ETCH 2
EMERGENCY-STOP four-language
EMERGENCY-STOP (top and bottom)
M22-XBK1
M22-XBK5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
M22-XCK1
Four-way pushbutton,
joystick and four-position
selector switches
Silver square legend plate
—
Custom
Four directional arrows
0-1-0-2-0-3-0-4
Two directional arrows
1
M22-XCK
M22-XCK-ETCH 2
M22-XCK1
M22-XCK2
M22-XCK3
1
1
1
Notes
1 Legend plates are IP66 and NEMA 4X/13.
2 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Pages V7-T1-123 to V7-T1-130) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XD-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-109
1.4
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Surface Mounting Enclosures 1
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
M22-IY1-PG
Description
Catalog Number
Yellow top, black base for
emergency-stop operators
M22-IY1-PG
Selector Switch Accessories
Description
Catalog Number
M22-XW
Plunger bridge 2
M22-XW
M22-XWS
Key cover
M22-XWS
M22-XC-R
Key withdraw adapter 3
M22-XC-R
M22-XC-Y
Coding adapter
M22-XC-Y
M22-XGWK
Guard ring
M22-XGWK
1
1
1
M22-IY-PG
1
1
1
1
M22-EY1
One-element enclosure
Two-element enclosure
Three-element enclosure
M22-I1-PG
M22-I2-PG
M22-I3-PG
Four-element enclosure
Six-element enclosure
M20 connecting screw
M22-I4-PG
M22-I6-PG
M22-XI
M20 cord grip
V-M20
Flush Mounting Plates, Aluminum
Finish
1
Rating
Catalog Number
—
M22-EY1
IP65
M22-E1
IP65
M22-E2
IP65
M22-E3
IP65
M22-E4
IP65
M22-E5
IP40
M22-E6
Description
Rating
Catalog Number
One-element
Two-element
Three-element
Four-element
Five-element
Six-element
Mounting plate
Plaster keys for
flush mounting
IP55
IP55
IP55
IP40
IP40
IP40
—
—
M22-H1
M22-H2
M22-H3
M22-H4
M22-H5
M22-H6
M22-XE5
M22-UPE
One Hole
Yellow paint for
emergency-stop
operators
Gray anodized
Two Holes
Gray anodized
Three Holes
Gray anodized
Four Holes
Gray anodized
Five Holes
Gray anodized
Six Holes
Anodized
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
M22-H1
1
1
1
1
1
Notes
1 Requires use of base mounted contact blocks.
2 Plunger needed to actuate center-mounted contact blocks. Used for non-illuminated
three-position selector switches only.
3 Enables a keyed selector switch to be set to user-selected key withdraw position.
Shrouds, Plastic
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-110
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
M22-XGPV
M22G-XGPV
1.4
Emergency Stop Operator Accessories
Mounting Accessories
Description
Voltage
Catalog Number
Description
Catalog Number
Yellow guard ring
—
M22-XGPV
Telescopic clip with top-hat rail
Telescopic clip
Telescopic clip extension
M22-TC
M22-TA
M22-TCV
DIN rail mounting adapter
M22-IVS
Gray guard ring
—
M22G-XGPV
M22-TC and M22-TA
M22-IVS
1
1
1
1
1
1
M22-MGTA
Rectangular guard
—
M22-MGTA
M22-GR
Mounting ring
1
M22-GR
1
M22-PL-PV
Sealing shroud
—
M22-PL-PV
M22-MS
Mounting ring tool
1
M22-MS
1
1
1
M22-XPV60-Y-120
Illuminated ring
24 Vac/Vdc
120 Vac
230 Vac
M22-XPV60-Y-24
M22-XPV60-Y-120
M22-XPV60-Y-230
1
M22S-R30
Adapter ring set for
30 mm holes
M22S-R30
1
1
M22-B
M22-NT
1
Blanking Plugs
Color
Catalog Number
Gray
Black
M22-B
M22S-B
Notching Tool
Punching tool used to produce the cutout
for the anti-rotation tab as defined in
IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
Description
Unit
Article
Number
Catalog Number
St 37 sheet steel:
Max. 3 mm thickness
Stainless steel:
Max. 1.5 mm thickness
1
028144
M22-NT
M22-T-D and
M22-T-DD
M22-ADC4
1
Protective Diaphragm
For Use with …
Catalog Number
Flush pushbuttons and
indicating lights
Double pushbuttons
M22-T-D
1
M22-T-DD
1
1
Dust Covers
Description
Catalog Number
Contact block dust cover
Operator dust cover,
max three contact blocks
Operator dust cover,
max four contact blocks
M22-XKDP
M22-ADC
M22-ADC4
1
1
1
1
Kits
Description
Catalog Number
Includes one each: M22-XW,
M22-XC-R, M22-XC-Y, M22S-B,
M22-A, M22-XD-SWRGYB
M22-KT1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-111
1.4
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Coding Adapter Guide
Selector Switches
1
1
Two-Position Selector Switch
Top (B)
Top (B)
Bottom (A)
1
1
Bottom (A)
1
Catalog Number
Function
M22(S)-W(L)(K)
Momentary
M22(S)-WR(L)(K)
Maintained
Three-Position Selector Switch
Catalog Number
Function
Left
Right
M22(S)-W(L)(K)3
Momentary
Momentary
1
M22(S)-WR(L)(K)3
Maintained
Maintained
1
M22(S)-WR(L)(K)3-1 Maintained
Momentary
1
M22(S)-WR(L)(K)3-2 Momentary
Maintained
Top (B)
1
Bottom (A)
1
Two-Position Key-Operated Selector Switch
1
Top (B)
Bottom (A)
1
1
Catalog Number
Center
Key Withdraw
Right
Function
Key Withdraw
M22(S)-WS
Yes
Momentary
No
M22(S)-WRS
Yes
Maintained
Yes
M22(S)-WRS-A1
Yes
Maintained
No
1
1
Three-Position Key-Operated Selector Switch
1
Top (B)
Catalog Number
Left
Function
Key Withdraw
Center
Key Withdraw
Right
Function
Key Withdraw
M22(S)-WS3
Momentary
No
Yes
Momentary
No
1
M22(S)-WRS3
Maintained
Yes
Yes
Maintained
Yes
1
M22(S)-WRS3-A1
Maintained
No
Yes
Maintained
No
1
M22(S)-WRS3-A2
Maintained
Yes
Yes
Maintained
No
1
M22(S)-WRS3-A3
Maintained
No
Yes
Maintained
Yes
M22(S)-WRS3-A4
Maintained
Yes
Yes
Momentary
No
M22(S)-WRS3-A5
Maintained
No
Yes
Momentary
No
1
M22(S)-WRS3-A6
Momentary
No
Yes
Maintained
Yes
1
M22(S)-WRS3-A7
Momentary
No
Yes
Maintained
No
1
Bottom (A)
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-112
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.4
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Technical Data and Specifications
1
Pushbuttons, Indicating Lights, Selector Switches and Emergency-Stop Operators
Description
Momentary
Pushbuttons
Maintained
Pushbuttons
Indicating Lights,
Buzzers and
Potentiometers
Emergency-Stop Selector
Operators
Switches
Key-Operated
Operators
Double
Pushbuttons
IEC/EN 60947
VDE 0660
UL #E29184
IEC/EN 60947
VDE 0660
UL #E29184
IEC/EN 60947
VDE 0660
UL #E29184
IEC/EN 60947
VDE 0660
UL #340491
IEC/EN 60947
VDE 0660
UL #E29184
IEC/EN 60947
VDE 0660
UL #E29184
IEC/EN 60947
VDE 0660
UL #E29184
>1
>1800
—
—
>0.1
>600
>0.1
>2000
>0.1
>100
>0.2
>3600
–
>0.3
—
>0.5
>5
General
Standards
x 10 6
1
1
1
1
Actuating force
n
>5
>3600
>5
>5
—
>50
Operating torque
(screw terminals)
Nm
—
—
—
—
IP
IP67, IP69K
IP67, IP69K
Indicating lights: IP67, 69K IP67, IP69K
Buzzers: IP40
Potentiometers: IP66
IP66
IP66
IP66
1
UL type
4X, 13
4X, 13
Indicating lights: 4X/13
Buzzers: 12
Potentiometers: 4X/13
4X, 13
4X, 13
4X, 13
1
Lifespan, mechanical
Operations
Operating frequency
Operations/h
1
—
1
Protection Type
Climatic proofing
4X, 13
1
Damp heat, constant, according to IEC 60068-2-78
Damp heat, cyclical to IEC 60068-2-30
Ambient temperature,
operating
°F
(°C)
Mounting position
Mechanical shock
resistance to
IEC 60068-2-27
shock duration 11 ms,
half-sinusoidal
g
–13 to 158
(–25 to 70)
–13 to 158
(–25 to 70)
–13 to 158
(–25 to 70)
–13 to 158
(–25 to 70)
–13 to 158
(–25 to 70)
–13 to 158
(–25 to 70)
–13 to 158
(–25 to 70)
As required
As required
As required
As required
As required
As required
As required
>30
>30
>30
>50
>30
>30
>30
1
1
1
Terminal Capacities
Solid
AWG
—
mm2
Stranded
AWG
—
mm2
—
20-16
—
—
0.5–1.5
—
—
20-16
—
—
0.5–1.5
—
—
—
—
1
—
1
—
—
—
—
1
Contacts
Rated impulse withstand Uimp
voltage
Vac
—
—
4000
—
—
—
—
Rated insulation voltage Ui
V
—
—
2500
—
—
—
—
—
—
III/3
—
—
—
—
Overvoltage category/
pollution degree
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-113
1.4
1
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Contact Blocks and Light Units
Contact
Blocks
LED
Light Units
IEC/EN 60947
VDE 0660
UL #E29184
IEC/EN 60947
VDE 0660
UL #E29184
x 10 6
>5
>3600
—
Description
General
Standards
1
Lifespan, mechanical
Operations
Operating frequency
Operations/h
1
Actuating force
n
>5
—
Operating torque (screw terminals)
Nm
<0.8
—
1
Protection Type
1
1
1
1
—
IP
IP20
IP20
UL type
—
—
Climatic proofing
Damp heat, constant, according to IEC 60068-2-78
Damp heat, cyclical to IEC 60068-2-30
Ambient temperature, operating
°F (°C)
–13 to 158 (–25 to 70)
–13 to 158 (–25 to 70)
As required
As required
g
>30
>30
AWG
18–14
18–14
mm2
0.75–2.5
0.75–2.5
AWG
20–14
20–14
mm2
0.5–2.5
0.5–2.5
Mounting position
Mechanical shock resistance to
IEC 60068-2-27 shock duration
11 ms, half-sinusoidal
Terminal Capacities
1
1
Solid
Stranded
1
Contacts
Rated impulse withstand voltage
Uimp
Vac
6000
6000
1
Rated insulation voltage
Ui
V
500
500
Overvoltage category/
pollution degree
III/3
III/3
NEMA contact ratings
A600, Q300
—
Current draw
—
5–15 mA
1
1
1
Control Circuit Reliability
at 24 Vdc/5 mA
HF
Fault probability
<10-7, <1 fault in 107 operations
—
at 5 Vdc/1 mA
HF
Fault probability
<5 x 10 -6, <1 fault in 5 x 10 6 operations
—
gG/gL
A
10
—
1
Max. Short-Circuit Protective Device
1
Switching Capacity
Fuse
Rated Operational Current
1
AC-15
115V
Ie
A
6
—
1
230V
Ie
A
6
—
400V
Ie
A
4
—
1
500V
Ie
A
2
—
DC-13
1
24V
Ie
A
3
—
42V
Ie
A
1.7
—
1
60V
Ie
A
1.2
—
110V
Ie
A
0.6
—
1
220V
Ie
A
0.3
—
—
1
1
1
1
Lifespan, Electrical
AC-15
230V/0.5A
Operations
x 10 6
1.6
230V/1.0A
Operations
x 10 6
1
—
230V/3.0A
Operations
x 10 6
0.7
—
Operations
x 10 6
1.2
—
DV-13
12V/2.8A
Contact Element Note: >200 Vac/60 Hz: –25/55°C
1
V7-T1-114
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Palm Switches
Description
Momentary
Maintained
FAK-R-V-KC11-I
IEC/EN 60947
VDE 0660
IEC/EN 60947
VDE 0660
IEC/EN 60947
VDE 0660
x 10 6
>1
>3600
>0.1
>600
>0.1
>600
Actuating force
n
20–40
40–60
15–25
Operating torque
Nm
—
—
—
Degree of protection, IEC/EN 60529
IP
IP67, IP69K
IP67, IP69K
IP65
UL Type
4X, 13
4X, 13
4X, 13
1
General
Standards
Lifespan, mechanical
Operations
Operating frequency
Operations/h
Climatic proofing
1
1
1
1
1
Damp heat, constant, to IEC 60068-2-78
Damp heat, cyclic, to IEC 60068-2-30
Ambient temperature, operating
°F (°C)
–73 to 104 (–25 to 40)
g
>15
Mounting position
–73 to 104 (–25 to 40)
–73 to 104 (–25 to 40)
1
>15
>15
1
As required
Mechanical shock resistance to
IEC 60068-2-27
shock duration 11 ms, half-sinusoidal
1
ASi Adapter Modules
Description
M22-ASI
M22-ASI-C
Standards
IEC/EN 60947,
DIN EN 50295
IEC/EN 60947,
DIN EN 50295
Radio interference suppression
EN 55011,
EN 55022
EN 55011,
EN 55022
Limit value class
—
—
Protection type
IP20
IP00
Climatic proofing
Damp heat, constant, to IEC 60068-2-78, cyclical, to IEC 60068-2-30
1
1
General
1
1
1
Ambient temperature, operating
°F (°C)
–13 to 131 (–25 to 55)
–13 to 131 (–25 to 55)
Shock resistance shock duration 11 ms
g
>30
>30
Vibration to IEC 60068-2-27
(amplitude 1 mm)
Hz
—
—
1
1
Dimensions
mm
—
—
Weight
kg
—
—
1
Mounting
Front mounting
Front mounting
Mounting position
As required
As required
26.5–31.6
26.5–31.6
Connection technique
Yellow plug-in terminal as insulation
piercing terminal
Two cables onboard
Power supply
Completely from the AS-interface cable
Addressing
Via connection to AS-interface cable
>40
>40
1
1
1
Power Supply
Rated voltage to AS-interface
specification
Total power consumption of
the AS-interface
Vdc
mA
AS-interface
1
1
1
—
—
Rated operational current at full load
mA
—
—
Rated operational current when idle
(no I, O set)
mA
—
—
1
POWER AS-interface cable:
green LED on the rear side of the element
POWER AS-interface cable:
green LED on the board
1
Status LEDs
ERROR AS-interface, AS-interface master
ERROR AS-interface, AS-interface master
failure: red LED on the rear side of the element failure: red LED on the board
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-115
1.4
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
ASi-S Adapter Modules
M22-ASI-S
M22-ASI-CS
Number
Two (normally 22V/5 mA)
Two (normally 22V/5 mA)
Voltage range
Vdc
—
—
1
Rated current per input
mA
—
—
High signal level
V
—
—
1
Low signal
mA
—
—
Length of connecting cables
cm
—
—
1
Outputs
Outputs, protected against
short-circuit
Number
One (normally 19V/8 mA)
One (normally 19V/8 mA)
Voltage range
Vdc
—
—
All outputs
—
—
S three external outputs
—
—
1
1
1
1
1
Description
Inputs
Inputs, protected against
short-circuit
Max. Current Carrying Capacity
Length of connecting cables
1
Profile
1
Addresses
1
1
1
1
cm
Specification
—
—
S-3.A.E
S-3.A.E
2.1
2.1
62
62
Connection of the AS-interface line
Yellow plug terminal with insulation
piercing
Two cables on the circuit board
Power supply
Complete from AS-interface,
cable 26.5–31.6 Vdc
Complete from AS-interface,
cable 26.5–31.6 Vdc
Fixing
Front mounted
Base mounted
Addressing
Via AS-interface cable
Via AS-interface cable
45 mA
45 mA
Number
Emergency-Stop Circuits
Max. total current
A
Ambient temperature, operating
°F (°C)
–13 to 131 (–25 to 55)
–13 to 131 (–25 to 55)
1
Shock resistance
30g/11 ms as per IEC 60068-2-27
30g/11 ms as per IEC 60068-2-27
Protection type
IP20
IP00
1
Climatic proofing
Damp heat, constant, to IEC 60068-2-78,
cyclical, to IEC 60068-2-30
Damp heat, constant, to IEC 60068-2-78,
cyclical, to IEC 60068-2-30
1
Mounting position
As required
As required
Standards
1
EN 50178
EN 50 295
EN 50178
EN 50 295
Inputs
Two-channel input (22V/5 mA)
(moduled by code sequence)
(two break contact sets M22-K01)
Two-channel input (22V/5 mA)
(moduled by code sequence)
(two break contact sets M22-K01)
Outputs
One output, typically 19V/8 mA,
short-circuit proof
One output, typically 19V/8 mA,
short-circuit proof
Power, AS-interface cable
Green LED on the back
Green LED on the back
AS-interface error,
AS-interface master failure
Red LED on the back
Red LED on the back
Profile
S-7.B.E
S-7.B.E
1
1
1
1
Status Displays
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-116
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Dimensions
1
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1
Operators and Indicating Lights
1
Ø 1.16 (29.5)
Ø 1.17 (29.7)
M22 x 0.06 (1.5)
1
1
1.17 (29.7)
1
0.04 (1)–0.24 (6)
1
0.39 (10) 0.75 (19)
1
Pushbuttons
Selector Switches Operators
M22…-D-_
M22…-DH-_
M22…-W-_
1
M22…-WL-_
1
1
1
1
0.39 (10)
0.65 (16.4)
M22-DG(L)-_
0.93 (23.7)
1.06 (26.9)
1
M22…-DD-_
1
M22…-W(R)S-_
1
1
Ø1.17 (29.7)
2.15 (54.7)
Ø1.17 (29.7)
Key-Operated Selector Switches
1
1
0.65 (16.5)
0.52 (13.2)
0.81 (20.6)
1
1.88 (47.75)
M22-D, Base Mounted
1.47 (37.2)
1
>0.01 (0.3)
Indicating Light
1
M22-L_
1
1
0.04 (1)
1
1.78 (45.3)
1
1
0.45 (11.5)
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-117
1.4
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Illuminated Pushbuttons
Contact Block Mounting Adapter
M22…-DL-_
M22-A_
M22…-DLH_
M22S-A…
0.85 (21.5)
1.77 (45)
1
1
0.76 (19.3)
1
1.73 (44)
1
1
1
1
Mushroom Head Pushbutton
Front Mounted Centering Adapter
M22…-DP-_
M22-ZA
0.84 (21.4)
1
0.65 (16.4)
Ø1.44 (36.5)
1
1.18 (30)
0.39 (10)
1
1
1
1
0.93 (23.6)
0.7 (17.8)
Front Mounted Indicating Light
Emergency-Stop Operators
M22-PV_
M22S-PV_
M22-PVL_
M22-PVS_
1.46 (37)
1
1.18 (30)
1.38 (35)
1
1
1
1.5 (38)
1
1.77 (45)
1.18 (30)
Pushbutton, Complete Devices
1.89 (47.9)
1
A
2.96 (75.1)
1
1
1
1.77 (45)
2.8 (71)
1.18 (30)
1
1
0.39 (10)
M22(S)-R_
0.39 (10)
Potentiometer
0.39 (10)
1
A
1.15 (29.2)
1 x M22-K_
2 x M22-K_
1 x M22-CK_
2 x M22-CK_
1.46 (37.2)
1.46 (37.2)
1.54 (39.0)
1.54 (39.0)
1.3 (32.9)
1
1
1
V7-T1-118
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.4
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1
Front Mounted Mounting Plate
DIN-Rail Mounting Adapter
1
M22-E_
M22-D...
M22-L...
M22-W...
M22-P...
0.12 (3.1)
M22-D_
M22-L_
M22-W_
M22-P_
M22-TCV
1
2.2 (56)
0.12 (3)
1
a1
0.18 (4.5 (M4))
M22-TC
1
0.1 (2.5)
1.3 (33)
e
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights with M22-TC Telescopic
Clip and M22-TVC Extension
1
1
1
1.39 (35.2)
2.23 (56.7)
1
4 x M4 x 16
2.83 (72)
2.15 (54.5)
0.88 (22.4)
2.54 (64.5)
1.42 (36)
0.88 (22.4)
1
Catalog
Number
a1
e
Catalog
Number
a1
e
M22-E(Y) 1
M22-E2
M22-E3
2.83 (72)
4.13 (105)
5.43 (138)
2.21 (56)
3.50 (89)
4.80 (122)
M22-E4
M22-E5
M22-E6
6.73 (171)
8.03 (204)
9.33 (237)
6.10 (155)
7.40 (188)
8.70 (221)
1
M22-I_
B
G
H
F
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
1.77
(45)
2.36–3.94
(60–100)
0.79
(20)
0.79
(20)
0.18
(4.5)
0.39
(10)
154
(39)
0.39
(10)
e
1.3 (33)
b
a
M4
M20/M25
Palm Switches
FAK_
M20
L-...
1.57 (40)
1.36 (34.5)
M5 x 20
2.56 (65)
1.42 (36)
M22-I(Y)1
1
M22-I2
2
M22-I3
3
M22-I4
4
M22-I6
6
0.26 (6.5) – 0.3 (7.5)
3.35 (85)
1
1
1
a
b
e
Cable Entries
2.83
(72.0)
4.72
(120.0)
6.02
(153.0)
7.32
(186.0)
9.92
(252.0)
1.68
(42.6)
3.37
(85.6)
4.67
(118.6)
5.97
(151.6)
8.57
(217.6)
2.30
(58.5)
4.19
(106.5)
5.49
(139.5)
6.79
(172.5)
9.39
(238.5)
2 x M16 3 x M20 2 x M25
2 x M20 2 x M25 4 x M20
1
2 x M20 2 x M25 4 x M20
1
2 x M20 2 x M25 4 x M20
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 x M20 3 x M20 2 x M25
0.71 (18)
3.98 (101)
Ø94
1
1
1.89 (48)
Mounting
Locations
1
1
M20
Catalog
Number
1
1
Top-hat rail to IEC/EN 60715.
0.7 (17.8)
2.2 (56)
1
2.62 (66.5)
M20
M20
A
1.73 (44)
3.15 (80)
D
E
1
1
Base Mounted Surface Mounting Enclosure
C
1
3 x M20 lateral, 1 x M16 in bottom.
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-119
1.4
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Covers
Legend Plates
M22-H_
M22S-ST-_
1
M20
2.32 (59)
1
1
M22S-STDD-X
3.74 (95)
a2
M20
1.85 (47)
1
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.38 (35)
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
M20
0.59 (15)
1.18 (30)
Catalog
Number
a2
Cable Entry
Style
1.65 (42)
2.95 (75)
4.25 (108)
5.55 (141)
6.85 (174)
8.15 (207)
3 x M20
4 x M20
4 x M20
4 x M20
5 x M20
6 x M20
One-piece
1
M22-H1
M22-H2
M22-H3
M22-H4
M22-H5
M22-HE6
1
Connecting Screw
1
1
1
M22-XI
1.18 (30)
Split
Mounting Hole with Lug Slot
0.13 (3.2)
0.95 (24.1)
1
1.08 (27.5)
1
1
1
1
0.88 (22.3)
1
1
1
0.04 (1)–0.24 (6)
0.04 (1)
1
Gasket.
Shroud with Plaster Keys
M22-UPE
1
a2 +1.65 (42)
a2 +1.26 (32)
1
a2
M22-H...
1
e
1
e + 0.51 (13)
0.35 (9)
1
1
M22-H...
0.35 (9)
1.02 (26)
1
0.31 (8)
0.31 (8)
1
1
2
1
2
3
1
2.76 (70)
1
0.16 (4)
2.2 (56)
1
4
M22-UPE
3
Box for closing off when plastering.
Plaster thickness less than 8 mm.
Plaster thickness more than 8 mm.
1
V7-T1-120
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Grid Dimension to IEC/EN 60947
1
Grid Dimension for M22-DD_
1
1
1
1.97 (50)
1
1
2.95 (75)
2.48 (63)
1
1
1
1.18 (30)
1
1
Grid Dimension for Various Combinations
1
1
B
1.18 (30)
Grid Dimension for M22-DDL_
1
a 1.18 (30)
1
1
Pushbutton
Diaphragm
M22-T-DD 1
B>
M22(S)-_(IEC/EN 60947)
RMQ-Titan min.
M22-D_ + M22-T-D
M22-D(R)P_
M22-PV_
M22-PV(L) + M22-PL-PV
M22-PV(L)(S_) + M22-D_
M22-DDL_
M22-DDL_ + M22-T-DD
M22-ST_
M22-STDD_
M22-CK_
M22-CLED_
M22-XAK_
M22-XZK_
M22-XBK_
M22-XYK_
M22-D4
M22-WR…4
M22-W…J4
1.18 (30.0)
1.18 (30.0)
1.30 (33.0)
1.50 (38.0)
1.50 (38.0)
1.89 (48.0)
1.30 (33.0)
1.18 (30.0)
1.30 (33.0)
1.18 (30.0)
1.18 (30.0)
1.18 (30.0)
1.18 (30.0)
3.54 (90.0)
1.30 (33.0)
2.36 (60.0)
1.97 (50.0)
2.17 (55.0)
1.97 (50.0)
1.97 (50.0)
1.97 (50.0)
1.58 (40.0)
1.58 (40.0)
1.58 (40.0)
1.58 (40.0)
2.20 (56.0)
1.58 (40.0)
2.17 (55.0)
2.28 (58.0)
1.97 (50.0)
2.95 (75.0)
1.77 (45.0)
1.77 (45.0)
3.54 (90.0)
2.04 (52.0)
2.36 (60.0)
1.97 (50.0)
2.17 (55.0)
1.97 (50.0)
1.97 (50.0)
1
1
1
1
1
Pushbutton diaphragm cannot be combined with label mount.
Emergency Stop Sealing Cover
1
M22-PL-PV
1
2.03 (51.6)
Catalog Number
A>
1
1
1
1
0.41 (10.4)
1.89 (48)
Pushbutton diaphragm cannot be combined with label mount.
b 1.73 (44)
Pushbutton Diaphragm
1
b 2.28 (58)
A
1
1
1
1.26 (32)
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-121
1.4
1
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Blanking Plugs
Emergency Stop Legend Plate
M22…B-_
M22-XAK_
M22-X(Y)ZK_
1.16 (29.5)
1
d= 0.03 (0.8)
0.65 (16.5)
1
1
1.97 (50)
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
1.3 (33)
M22-T-D
3.54 (90)
M22-XBK-_
5)
2.
Ø
0.
1
M22-XYK-_
0.13 (3.2)
(2
1
89
1
1.97 (50)
M22-T-D
2.28 (58)
1
Pushbutton Diaphragm
0.67 (17)
1
1
0.49 (12.5)
1
1
1
Ø 2.36 (60)
M22-XGWK
0.98 (25)
M22…W…J_
1.97 (50)
3.07 (78)
2.95 (75)
1.18 (30)
Key Cover
Four-Way Pushbutton
M22-XWS
0.2 (5)
M22…-D…4-_
0.79 (20)
1
1
Joystick
R35 R41
2.68 (68)
1
1
M22-XGPV
Ø 1.42 (36)
1
1
1.97 (50)
Guard Ring
1
1
0.67 (17)
0.91 (23)
1
1
1.3 (33)
1.3 (33)
1
1
0.47 (12)
Ø 0.98 (25)
2.17 (55)
0.45 (11.5)
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-122
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Symbols Library
1
Instructions for Ordering Laser Inscriptions
1. Identify part number to be inscribed.
1
2. Pick symbol from library and identify suffix code associated with the symbol.
1
3. Order part number already listed in the catalog with -ETCH suffix.
1
4. When placing an order by fax or Vistaline on the Web, reference order item number and
indicate appropriate suffix code.
1
Example
To order a green flush button plate with the inscription AUTO HAND:
1
Order Catalog Number: M22-XD-G-ETCH (see Page V7-T1-49).
1
AUTO HAND inscription is found on Page V7-T1-127 in the Symbols Library, suffix code is X91.
1
In the order notes, reference item number and suffix X91.
1
Letter height 3 mm: max. three lines, max. 12 characters per line.
1
Letter height 5 mm: max. two lines, max. eight characters per line.
1
Note: For symbols or text not found in the Symbols Library, please contact the
Eaton Technical Resource Center at 1-877-ETN CARE (386-2273) or TRC@eaton.com.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-123
1.4
1
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Letter Height Specifications: < five characters; letter height = 0.197 in (5 mm). > five characters; letter height = 0.118 in (3 mm).
Text—English
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Inscription
Text—German
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
GB0
GB18
D0
D25
1
GB1
GB19
D1
D28
1
GB2
GB20
D2
D29
1
GB3
GB21
D3
D30
1
GB4
GB22
D4
D31
1
GB5
GB23
D5
D32
1
GB6
GB24
D6
D33
1
GB7
GB25
D7
D34
1
GB8
GB26
D8
D35
1
GB9
GB27
D9
D36
1
GB10
GB32
D10
D37
1
GB11
GB62
D11
D38
1
GB12
GB63
D12
D39
1
GB14
GB64
D13
D40
1
GB15
GB65
D14
D41
1
GB16
GB66
D15
D42
1
GB17
GB99
D16
D43
1
D17
D44
1
D18
D72
1
D19
D73
1
D20
D74
1
D21
D75
1
D22
D99
1
D23
D100
1
D24
1
1
1
Text Size: 3 mm—Max. eight characters in first line;
10 characters in second line; eight characters in third line.
V7-T1-124
Text Size: 5 mm—Max. five characters per line.
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Letter Height Specifications: < five characters; letter height = 0.197 in (5 mm). > five characters; letter height = 0.118 in (3 mm).
Text—French
Inscription
Text—Swedish
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
Symbols
Catalog
Number Suffix
F0
S0
F1
S1
F2
S2
F3
S3
F4
S4
F5
S5
F6
S6
F7
S7
F8
S8
F9
S9
F10
S10
F11
S11
F12
S12
F14
S14
F15
S15
F16
S16
F17
S17
F18
S18
F19
S19
F20
S20
F67
S21
F68
S22
F99
S23
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
X0
Catalog
Number Suffix
1
X13
1
1
X1
1
X14
1
X2
1
X15
1
X3
X16
1
1
X4
X17
1
1
X5
X18
1
1
X6
X19
X7
X20
X8
X21
X9
X22
X10
X23
X11
X24
X12
X25
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
S32
S45
1
1
1
S46
1
S99
1
Text Size: 3 mm—Max. eight characters in first line;
10 characters in second line; eight characters in third line.
Text Size: 5 mm—Max. five characters per line.
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1
V7-T1-125
1.4
1
Inscription
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
X26
X40
X54
X68
X27
X41
X55
X69
X28
X42
X56
X70
X29
X43
X57
X71
X30
X44
X58
X72
X31
X45
X59
X73
X32
X46
X60
X74
X33
X47
X61
X75
X34
X48
X62
X76
X35
X49
X63
X77
X36
X50
X64
X78
X37
X51
X65
X79
X38
X52
X66
X80
X39
X53
X67
X81
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Text Size: 3 mm—Max. eight characters in first line;
10 characters in second line; eight characters in third line.
V7-T1-126
Text Size: 5 mm—Max. five characters per line.
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
X82
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
X104
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
X118
1.4
Catalog
Number Suffix
1
X132
1
1
X83
X105
X119
X133
1
1
X88
X106
X120
X134
1
1
X89
X107
X121
X135
1
1
X90
X108
X122
X136
1
1
X91
X109
X123
X137
X92
X110
X124
X138
X93
X111
X125
X139
1
1
1
1
1
1
X94
X112
X126
X140
X95
X113
X127
X141
X100
X114
X128
X142
X101
X115
X129
X143
X102
X116
X130
X144
X103
X117
X131
X145
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Text Size: 3 mm—Max. eight characters in first line;
10 characters in second line; eight characters in third line.
Text Size: 5 mm—Max. five characters per line.
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1
V7-T1-127
1.4
1
Inscription
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
X146
X160
X174
X188
X147
X161
X175
X189
X148
X162
X176
X190
X149
X163
X177
X191
X150
X164
X178
X192
X151
X165
X179
X193
X152
X166
X180
X194
X153
X167
X181
X195
X154
X168
X182
X196
X155
X169
X183
X197
X156
X170
X184
X198
X157
X171
X185
X199
X158
X172
X186
X200
X159
X173
X187
X201
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Text Size: 3 mm—Max. eight characters in first line;
10 characters in second line; eight characters in third line.
V7-T1-128
Text Size: 5 mm—Max. five characters per line.
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
X202
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
X216
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
X230
1.4
Catalog
Number Suffix
1
X244
1
1
X203
X217
X231
X245
1
1
X204
X218
X232
X246
1
1
X205
X219
X233
X247
1
1
X206
X220
X234
X248
1
1
X207
X221
X235
X249
X208
X222
X236
X250
X209
X223
X237
X251
1
1
1
1
1
1
X210
X224
X238
X252
X211
X225
X239
X253
X212
X226
X240
X254
X213
X227
X241
X255
X214
X228
X242
X256
X215
X229
X243
X257
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Text Size: 3 mm—Max. eight characters in first line;
10 characters in second line; eight characters in third line.
Text Size: 5 mm—Max. five characters per line.
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1
V7-T1-129
1.4
1
Inscription
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
X258
X265
X272
X279
X259
X266
X273
X280
X260
X267
X274
X281
X261
X268
X275
X282
X262
X269
X276
X283
X263
X270
X277
X284
X264
X271
X278
X285
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Text Size: 3 mm—Max. eight characters in first line;
10 characters in second line; eight characters in third line.
V7-T1-130
Text Size: 5 mm—Max. five characters per line.
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
1.5
Contents
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Description
Page
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and
Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1
V7-T1-133
V7-T1-134
V7-T1-147
V7-T1-150
V7-T1-153
V7-T1-160
V7-T1-162
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Product Overview
Product Description
Eaton’s C22 compact
pushbutton line offers an
industry leading array of
functional, attractive, and
ergonomically designed
“all-in-one” illuminated and
non-illuminated pushbuttons,
selector switches, emergency
stops and indicating lights.
The complete illuminated line
is only offered in LED light
units to ensure high-quality
brightness and up to 100,000
hours of LED illumination.
C22 operators are available
with either a silver or black
bezel and share the exact
same front of the panel
look and feel as Eaton’s
M22 line. The C22’s compact,
“all-in-one” design with the
contact block(s) and
operators integral provides
the user with a simple solution.
The 2017 product extension
C22 with pigtail has more
than doubled the portfolio.
The C22 with pigtail now
allows customers the ability
to directly mount the product
without the need for
pushbutton enclosures.
With three different
connection methods and
multiple lengths, the C22
with pigtail can be used for
a wide range of applications.
Wide Product Breadth
●
In addition to the standard
compact offering of
indicating lights and
pushbuttons, Eaton’s
C22 offers keyed and
non-keyed operators
and emergency stops
●
Hundreds of styles with
standard laser etch
markings with the ability
to use custom M22 laser
etched buttons in
conjunction with C22
buttonless operators
●
Pigtail lengths vary from
0.2 to 3.5 m and allow
three connection options—
M8, M12 and flying lead
LED Indicators
●
100,000 hours of life
in high-vibration
environments
●
Lenses specifically
designed for LED
illumination
Standards and Certifications
1
All operators are IEC/EN
60947 VDE 0660, UL Listed,
and CSA Certified.
1
All operators carry an IP65,
IP66, IP67 or IP69K rating.
All products carry ratings of
NEMA 1, 3R, 4X, 12 and 13
Rugged Design
●
Pushbuttons (momentary)
rated for 5 million
mechanical operations
and selector switches
(non-keyed) rated for
1 million mechanical
operations
●
All components have IP65
rating, and some carry
IP67 and IP69K for washdown environment, which
also means oil tight
●
C22 with pigtail has an
IP65 rear rating, eliminating
the need for an enclosure
in dust and water jet
applications
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-131
1.5
1
●
1
●
1
●
●
1
1
1
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Features
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
●
1
Benefits
Field convertible
maintained pushbuttons
from maintained to
momentary
LED offering only for all
illuminated operators
Laser engraved
pushbuttons and lenses
Heavy-duty construction
with a minimum of IP65
and UL NEMA® Type 4X/13
on front of panel operators.
Many operators even carry
IP67 and IP69K, for the
toughest applications
Silver or black colored
nylon bezels
●
●
●
Notched hole mounting
with anti-rotation tab and
central nut mounting on
each operator
Pushbuttons (momentary)
rated for 5 million
mechanical operations
and selector switches
(non-keyed) rated for
1 million mechanical
operations
Unique compact offerings,
including keyed and nonkeyed operators and
emergency stops
●
●
●
●
●
1
Compact, “all-in-one”
operator and contact block
design simplifies product
selection, inventory, and
installation
Field convertibility of
pushbuttons and selector
switches helps distributors
and customers reduce
inventory and increase
functionality
LED offering only for
improved brightness
quality and up to 100,000
hours of operation
Plastic construction is
corrosion resistant
Eliminate enclosure, on
machine installations
●
●
●
●
●
1
1
●
1
1
1
7
1
1
1
11
1
8
2
12
1
1
1
3
8
13
4
Legend
1 = Pushbutton
8
1
1
Operators are designed
for rugged environments,
ideal for wash-down
applications (reference
each operator’s IP ratings
for ingress protection
definition)
Anti-rotation tab saves
installation time and
prevents operator rotation
High mechanical and
electrical life allows for
use in tough and
challenging applications
Laser inscription
capabilities allow for high
quality, wear-resistant
markings
By having a compact
design emergency stop, the
C22 design eliminates the
need for self-monitoring
contact blocks
M12/M8 connections
allow connection directly
into communications
systems such as
SmartWire-DT or AS6
2 = Illuminated pushbutton
3 = LED indicator
5
9
14
4 = Knob selector
5 = Key selector
1
6 = E-stop
1
7 = Legend plate
6
15
1
10
8 = E-stop legend plates
9 = Guard rings
1
10 = Illuminated guard ring
1
12 = M12 connector: 4-pole
1
14 = M8 connector: 4-pole
11 = Mounting ring
13 = M12 connector: 5-pole
15 = Flying lead
1
V7-T1-132
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Product Selection Guide
1
Pushbuttons
1
1
1
Non-illuminated, flush, pigtail
(M8/M12/flying lead)
Description
Non-illuminated, flush
Operator
Momentary
Maintained
Momentary
Maintained
Momentary
Product Selection
Page V7-T1-135
Page V7-T1-137
Page V7-T1-136
Page V7-T1-138
Page V7-T1-141
Illuminated, flush, pigtail
(M8/M12/flying lead)
1
Maintained
Momentary
Maintained
1
Page V7-T1-143
Page V7-T1-142
Page V7-T1-144
Illuminated, flush
1
Extended Pushbuttons
1
1
1
Description
Non-illuminated, extended
Illuminated, extended
Operator
Momentary
Maintained
Momentary
Maintained
Product Selection
Page V7-T1-139
Page V7-T1-140
Page V7-T1-145
Page V7-T1-146
1
1
1
Indicating Lights
1
1
1
Description
Indicating lights
Indicating lights with pigtail
(M8/M12/flying lead)
Product Selection
Page V7-T1-148
Page V7-T1-149
1
1
Emergency Stops
1
1
1
Description
Twist release
Keyed-release
Twist release with or without
indicator and flying lead/M12
Push-Pull with Pigtail
(flying lead/M12)
Product Selection
Page V7-T1-151
Page V7-T1-151
Page V7-T1-152
Page V7-T1-152
1
1
1
Selector Switches
1
1
1
Description
Non-illuminated, knob type
Key-operated
Non-illuminated, knob type,
with pigtail
Key-operated with pigtail
Product Selection
Page V7-T1-154
Page V7-T1-156
Page V7-T1-155
Page V7-T1-158
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-133
1.5
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Contents
Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated
Description
1
Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush,
Momentary, with Pigtail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Maintained
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush,
Maintained, with Pigtail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons,
Extended, Momentary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons,
Extended, Maintained . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated, Flush, Momentary . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush,
Momentary, with Pigtail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Maintained . .
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush,
Maintained, with Pigtail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Momentary
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Maintained
Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated
1
Product Description
Features
Eaton’s C22 Compact
Pushbuttons are a complete
line of monoblock type
pushbuttons with the contact
blocks, mounting adapter,
and operator all-in-one. The
C22 pushbuttons offer the
same look and feel as their
modular counterpart, the
M22. They also carry many of
the same rugged ratings and
options, such as laser
etching, field convertibility,
and LED technology. They
also feature IP65 rear ratings
when purchased with pigtail,
M8/M12/flying lead.
●
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
●
●
●
●
Field convertible
maintained pushbuttons
from maintained to
momentary
LED offering only for
improved brightness
quality and up to 100,000
hours of operation
Laser engraved
pushbuttons and lenses
Pushbuttons (momentary)
rated for 5 million
mechanical operations
Pigtail option allows direct
machine mounting
Protection Type
IP67/IP69K
●
NEMA 4X, 13
●
IP65 rear (pigtail devices)
●
Note: For additional accessories,
please see Pages V7-T1-105 to
V7-T1-111, 22.5 mm Modular
Pushbuttons—M22 Accessories.
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-134
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Page
V7-T1-135
V7-T1-136
V7-T1-137
V7-T1-138
V7-T1-139
V7-T1-140
V7-T1-141
V7-T1-142
V7-T1-143
V7-T1-144
V7-T1-145
V7-T1-146
V7-T1-147
V7-T1-150
V7-T1-153
V7-T1-160
V7-T1-162
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
1.5
Catalog Number Selection
1
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons
C22 - D - G - X1 - K10 - P1
Bezel
C22 = Silver
C22S = Black
D=
DR =
DH =
DRH =
Operator Type
Flush, momentary
Flush, maintained
Extended, momentary
Extended, maintained
Button Plate Color
G = Green
R = Red
S = Black
W = White
X = Buttonless
Button Etching
X0 =
X1 =
1
Contact Blocks
K10 = 1NO
K20 = 2NO
K01 = 1NC
K02 = 2NC
K11 = 1NO/1NC
1
Connector Type
P1 = 0.2 m M12, 4-pole
P3 = 0.5 m M12, 4-pole
P5 = 1.0 m M12, 4-pole
P30 = 0.2 m M8, 4-pole
P31 = 0.5 m M8, 4-pole
P32 = 1.0 m M8, 4-pole
P62 = 1.0 m flying lead
P65 = 3.5 m flying lead
1
1
1
Product Selection
1
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary
1
C22(S)-D-_
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary
Button
Color
Button
Etching
Contact Block
Configuration
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Green
—
1NO
C22-D-G-K10
C22S-D-G-K10
—
2NO
C22-D-G-K20
C22S-D-G-K20
—
1NO/1NC
C22-D-G-K11
C22S-D-G-K11
X1
1NO
C22-D-G-X1-K10
C22S-D-G-X1-K10
X1
2NO
C22-D-G-X1-K20
C22S-D-G-X1-K20
X1
1NO/1NC
C22-D-G-X1-K11
C22S-D-G-X1-K11
Red
Black
White
Buttonless
—
1NC
C22-D-R-K01
C22S-D-R-K01
—
2NC
C22-D-R-K02
C22S-D-R-K02
—
1NO/1NC
C22-D-R-K11
C22S-D-R-K11
X0
1NC
C22-D-R-X0-K01
C22S-D-R-X0-K01
X0
2NC
C22-D-R-X0-K02
C22S-D-R-X0-K02
X0
1NO/1NC
C22-D-R-X0-K11
C22S-D-R-X0-K11
—
1NC
C22-D-S-K01
C22S-D-S-K01
—
2NC
C22-D-S-K02
C22S-D-S-K02
—
1NO/1NC
C22-D-S-K11
C22S-D-S-K11
X0
1NC
C22-D-S-X0-K01
C22S-D-S-X0-K01
X0
2NC
C22-D-S-X0-K02
C22S-D-S-X0-K02
X0
1NO/1NC
C22-D-S-X0-K11
C22S-D-S-X0-K11
—
1NO
C22-D-W-K10
C22S-D-W-K10
—
2NO
C22-D-W-K20
C22S-D-W-K20
—
1NO/1NC
C22-D-W-K11
C22S-D-W-K11
X1
1NO
C22-D-W-X1-K10
C22S-D-W-X1-K10
X1
2NO
C22-D-W-X1-K20
C22S-D-W-X1-K20
X1
1NO/1NC
C22-D-W-X1-K11
C22S-D-W-X1-K11
—
1NO
C22-D-X-K10
C22S-D-X-K10
—
2NO
C22-D-X-K20
C22S-D-X-K20
—
1NC
C22-D-X-K01
C22S-D-X-K01
—
2NC
C22-D-X-K02
C22S-D-X-K02
—
1NO/1NC
C22-D-X-K11
C22S-D-X-K11
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-135
1.5
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary, with Pigtail
C22-D-_
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary, with Pigtail
1
Button
Color
Contacts
Connector
Length
Connector
Type
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
1
Green
1NO
0.2
M8
C22-D-G-K10-P30
1NO
0.2
M12
C22-D-G-K10-P1
1
1NO
0.5
M8
C22-D-G-K10-P31
1NO
0.5
M12
C22-D-G-K10-P3
1
1NO
1
M8
C22-D-G-K10-P32
1NO
1
M12
C22-D-G-K10-P5
1
1NO
1
Flying lead
C22-D-G-K10-P62
1NO
3.5
Flying lead
C22-D-G-K10-P65
1NC
0.2
M8
C22-D-R-K01-P30
1NC
0.2
M12
C22-D-R-K01-P1
1NC
0.5
M8
C22-D-R-K01-P31
1NC
0.5
M12
C22-D-R-K01-P3
1NC
1
M8
C22-D-R-K01-P32
1NC
1
M12
C22-D-R-K01-P5
1NC
1
Flying lead
C22-D-R-K01-P62
1NC
3.5
Flying lead
C22-D-R-K01-P65
1NC
0.2
M8
C22-D-S-K01-P30
1NC
0.2
M12
C22-D-S-K01-P1
1NC
0.5
M8
C22-D-S-K01-P31
1NC
0.5
M12
C22-D-S-K01-P3
1NC
1
M8
C22-D-S-K01-P32
1NC
1
M12
C22-D-S-K01-P5
1NC
1
Flying lead
C22-D-S-K01-P62
1NC
3.5
Flying lead
C22-D-S-K01-P65
1NO
0.2
M8
C22-D-W-K10-P30
1NO
0.2
M12
C22-D-W-K10-P1
1NO
0.5
M8
C22-D-W-K10-P31
1NO
0.5
M12
C22-D-W-K10-P3
1NO
1
M8
C22-D-W-K10-P32
1
1NO
1
M12
C22-D-W-K10-P5
1NO
1
Flying lead
C22-D-W-K10-P62
1
1NO
3.5
Flying lead
C22-D-W-K10-P65
1NO
0.2
M8
C22-D-X-K10-P30
1
1NO
0.2
M12
C22-D-X-K10-P1
1NO
0.5
M8
C22-D-X-K10-P31
1
1NO
0.5
M12
C22-D-X-K10-P3
1NO
1
M8
C22-D-X-K10-P32
1
1NO
1
M12
C22-D-X-K10-P5
1NO
1
Flying lead
C22-D-X-K10-P62
1
1NO
3.5
Flying lead
C22-D-X-K10-P65
2NO
1
Flying lead
C22-D-X-K20-P62
1
2NO
3.5
Flying lead
C22-D-X-K20-P65
1NC/1NO
1
Flying lead
C22-D-X-K11-P62
1
1NC/1NO
3.5
Flying lead
C22-D-X-K11-P65
1NC
0.2
M8
C22-D-X-K01-P30
1
1NC
0.2
M12
C22-D-X-K01-P1
1NC
0.5
M8
C22-D-X-K01-P31
1NC
0.5
M12
C22-D-X-K01-P3
1NC
1
M8
C22-D-X-K01-P32
1NC
1
M12
C22-D-X-K01-P5
1NC
1
Flying lead
C22-D-X-K01-P62
1NC
3.5
Flying lead
C22-D-X-K01-P65
2NC
1
Flying lead
C22-D-X-K02-P62
2NC
3.5
Flying lead
C22-D-X-K02-P65
1
Red
1
1
1
1
Black
1
1
1
1
White
1
1
Buttonless
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-136
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
1.5
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Maintained
C22(S)-DR-_
1
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Maintained
Button
Color
Button
Etching
Contact Block
Configuration
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Green
—
1NO
C22-DR-G-K10
C22S-DR-G-K10
—
2NO
C22-DR-G-K20
C22S-DR-G-K20
—
1NO/1NC
C22-DR-G-K11
C22S-DR-G-K11
X1
1NO
C22-DR-G-X1-K10
C22S-DR-G-X1-K10
X1
2NO
C22-DR-G-X1-K20
C22S-DR-G-X1-K20
Red
Black
White
Buttonless
X1
1NO/1NC
C22-DR-G-X1-K11
C22S-DR-G-X1-K11
—
1NC
C22-DR-R-K01
C22S-DR-R-K01
—
2NC
C22-DR-R-K02
C22S-DR-R-K02
—
1NO/1NC
C22-DR-R-K11
C22S-DR-R-K11
X0
1NC
C22-DR-R-X0-K01
C22S-DR-R-X0-K01
X0
2NC
C22-DR-R-X0-K02
C22S-DR-R-X0-K02
X0
1NO/1NC
C22-DR-R-X0-K11
C22S-DR-R-X0-K11
—
1NC
C22-DR-S-K01
C22S-DR-S-K01
—
2NC
C22-DR-S-K02
C22S-DR-S-K02
—
1NO/1NC
C22-DR-S-K11
C22S-DR-S-K11
X0
1NC
C22-DR-S-X0-K01
C22S-DR-S-X0-K01
X0
2NC
C22-DR-S-X0-K02
C22S-DR-S-X0-K02
X0
1NO/1NC
C22-DR-S-X0-K11
C22S-DR-S-X0-K11
—
1NO
C22-DR-W-K10
C22S-DR-W-K10
—
2NO
C22-DR-W-K20
C22S-DR-W-K20
—
1NO/1NC
C22-DR-W-K11
C22S-DR-W-K11
X1
1NO
C22-DR-W-X1-K10
C22S-DR-W-X1-K10
X1
2NO
C22-DR-W-X1-K20
C22S-DR-W-X1-K20
X1
1NO/1NC
C22-DR-W-X1-K11
C22S-DR-W-X1-K11
—
1NO
C22-DR-X-K10
C22S-DR-X-K10
—
2NO
C22-DR-X-K20
C22S-DR-X-K20
—
1NC
C22-DR-X-K01
C22S-DR-X-K01
—
2NC
C22-DR-X-K02
C22S-DR-X-K02
—
1NO/1NC
C22-DR-X-K11
C22S-DR-X-K11
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Note: Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by
switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body.
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-137
1.5
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Maintained, with Pigtail
C22-DR-_
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Maintained, with Pigtail
1
Button
Color
Contacts
Connector
Length
Connector
Type
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
1
Green
1NO
0.2
M8
C22-DR-G-K10-P30
1NO
0.2
M12
C22-DR-G-K10-P1
1
1NO
0.5
M8
C22-DR-G-K10-P31
1NO
0.5
M12
C22-DR-G-K10-P3
1
1NO
1
M8
C22-DR-G-K10-P32
1NO
1
M12
C22-DR-G-K10-P5
1
1NO
1
Flying lead
C22-DR-G-K10-P62
1NO
3.5
Flying lead
C22-DR-G-K10-P65
1NC
0.2
M8
C22-DR-R-K01-P30
1NC
0.2
M12
C22-DR-R-K01-P1
1NC
0.5
M8
C22-DR-R-K01-P31
1NC
0.5
M12
C22-DR-R-K01-P3
1NC
1
M8
C22-DR-R-K01-P32
1NC
1
M12
C22-DR-R-K01-P5
1NC
1
Flying lead
C22-DR-R-K01-P62
1NC
3.5
Flying lead
C22-DR-R-K01-P65
1NC
0.2
M8
C22-DR-S-K01-P30
1NC
0.2
M12
C22-DR-S-K01-P1
1NC
0.5
M8
C22-DR-S-K01-P31
1NC
0.5
M12
C22-DR-S-K01-P3
1NC
1
M8
C22-DR-S-K01-P32
1NC
1
M12
C22-DR-S-K01-P5
1NC
1
Flying lead
C22-DR-S-K01-P62
1NC
3.5
Flying lead
C22-DR-S-K01-P65
1NO
0.2
M8
C22-DR-W-K10-P30
1NO
0.2
M12
C22-DR-W-K10-P1
1NO
0.5
M8
C22-DR-W-K10-P31
1NO
0.5
M12
C22-DR-W-K10-P3
1NO
1
M8
C22-DR-W-K10-P32
1
1NO
1
M12
C22-DR-W-K10-P5
1NO
1
Flying lead
C22-DR-W-K10-P62
1
1NO
3.5
Flying lead
C22-DR-W-K10-P65
1NO
0.2
M8
C22-DR-X-K10-P30
1
1NO
0.2
M12
C22-DR-X-K10-P1
1NO
0.5
M8
C22-DR-X-K10-P31
1
1NO
0.5
M12
C22-DR-X-K10-P3
1NO
1
M8
C22-DR-X-K10-P32
1
1NO
1
M12
C22-DR-X-K10-P5
1NO
1
Flying lead
C22-DR-X-K10-P62
1
1NO
3.5
Flying lead
C22-DR-X-K10-P65
2NO
1
Flying lead
C22-DR-X-K20-P62
1
2NO
3.5
Flying lead
C22-DR-X-K20-P65
1NC/1NO
1
Flying lead
C22-DR-X-K11-P62
1
1NC/1NO
3.5
Flying lead
C22-DR-X-K11-P65
1NC
0.2
M8
C22-DR-X-K01-P30
1
1NC
0.2
M12
C22-DR-X-K01-P1
1NC
0.5
M8
C22-DR-X-K01-P31
1NC
0.5
M12
C22-DR-X-K01-P3
1NC
1
M8
C22-DR-X-K01-P32
1NC
1
M12
C22-DR-X-K01-P5
1NC
1
Flying lead
C22-DR-X-K01-P62
1NC
3.5
Flying lead
C22-DR-X-K01-P65
2NC
1
Flying lead
C22-DR-X-K02-P62
2NC
3.5
Flying lead
C22-DR-X-K02-P65
1
Red
1
1
1
1
Black
1
1
1
1
White
1
1
Buttonless
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-138
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
1.5
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Momentary
C22(S)-DH-_
1
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Momentary
Button
Color
Button
Etching
Contact Block
Configuration
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Green
—
1NO
C22-DH-G-K10
C22S-DH-G-K10
—
2NO
C22-DH-G-K20
C22S-DH-G-K20
—
1NO/1NC
C22-DH-G-K11
C22S-DH-G-K11
X1
1NO
C22-DH-G-X1-K10
C22S-DH-G-X1-K10
X1
2NO
C22-DH-G-X1-K20
C22S-DH-G-X1-K20
Red
Black
White
X1
1NO/1NC
C22-DH-G-X1-K11
C22S-DH-G-X1-K11
—
1NC
C22-DH-R-K01
C22S-DH-R-K01
—
2NC
C22-DH-R-K02
C22S-DH-R-K02
—
1NO/1NC
C22-DH-R-K11
C22S-DH-R-K11
X0
1NC
C22-DH-R-X0-K01
C22S-DH-R-X0-K01
X0
2NC
C22-DH-R-X0-K02
C22S-DH-R-X0-K02
X0
1NO/1NC
C22-DH-R-X0-K11
C22S-DH-R-X0-K11
—
1NC
C22-DH-S-K01
C22S-DH-S-K01
—
2NC
C22-DH-S-K02
C22S-DH-S-K02
—
1NO/1NC
C22-DH-S-K11
C22S-DH-S-K11
X0
1NC
C22-DH-S-X0-K01
C22S-DH-S-X0-K01
X0
2NC
C22-DH-S-X0-K02
C22S-DH-S-X0-K02
X0
1NO/1NC
C22-DH-S-X0-K11
C22S-DH-S-X0-K11
—
1NO
C22-DH-W-K10
C22S-DH-W-K10
—
2NO
C22-DH-W-K20
C22S-DH-W-K20
—
1NO/1NC
C22-DH-W-K11
C22S-DH-W-K11
X1
1NO
C22-DH-W-X1-K10
C22S-DH-W-X1-K10
X1
2NO
C22-DH-W-X1-K20
C22S-DH-W-X1-K20
X1
1NO/1NC
C22-DH-W-X1-K11
C22S-DH-W-X1-K11
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-139
1.5
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Maintained
C22(S)-DRH-_
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Maintained
Button
Color
Button
Etching
Contact Block
Configuration
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Green
—
1NO
C22-DRH-G-K10
C22S-DRH-G-K10
1
—
2NO
C22-DRH-G-K20
C22S-DRH-G-K20
—
1NO/1NC
C22-DRH-G-K11
C22S-DRH-G-K11
1
X1
1NO
C22-DRH-G-X1-K10
C22S-DRH-G-X1-K10
X1
2NO
C22-DRH-G-X1-K20
C22S-DRH-G-X1-K20
X1
1NO/1NC
C22-DRH-G-X1-K11
C22S-DRH-G-X1-K11
—
1NC
C22-DRH-R-K01
C22S-DRH-R-K01
—
2NC
C22-DRH-R-K02
C22S-DRH-R-K02
1
—
1NO/1NC
C22-DRH-R-K11
C22S-DRH-R-K11
X0
1NC
C22-DRH-R-X0-K01
C22S-DRH-R-X0-K01
1
X0
2NC
C22-DRH-R-X0-K02
C22S-DRH-R-X0-K02
X0
1NO/1NC
C22-DRH-R-X0-K11
C22S-DRH-R-X0-K11
—
1NC
C22-DRH-S-K01
C22S-DRH-S-K01
—
2NC
C22-DRH-S-K02
C22S-DRH-S-K02
—
1NO/1NC
C22-DRH-S-K11
C22S-DRH-S-K11
X0
1NC
C22-DRH-S-X0-K01
C22S-DRH-S-X0-K01
X0
2NC
C22-DRH-S-X0-K02
C22S-DRH-S-X0-K02
1
1
Red
1
1
Black
1
1
1
X0
1NO/1NC
C22-DRH-S-X0-K11
C22S-DRH-S-X0-K11
—
1NO
C22-DRH-W-K10
C22S-DRH-W-K10
—
2NO
C22-DRH-W-K20
C22S-DRH-W-K20
1
—
1NO/1NC
C22-DRH-W-K11
C22S-DRH-W-K11
X1
1NO
C22-DRH-W-X1-K10
C22S-DRH-W-X1-K10
1
X1
2NO
C22-DRH-W-X1-K20
C22S-DRH-W-X1-K20
X1
1NO/1NC
C22-DRH-W-X1-K11
C22S-DRH-W-X1-K11
White
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Note: Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by
switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-140
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Catalog Number Selection
1
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1
Illuminated Pushbuttons
C22 - DL - G - X1 - K10 - 24 - P1
Bezel
C22 = Silver
C22S = Black
DL =
DRL =
DLH =
DRLH =
Operator Type
Illuminated, flush, momentary
Illuminated, flush, maintained
Illuminated, extended, momentary
Illuminated, extended, maintained
LED/Lens Color
G = Green
R = Red
W = White
B = Blue
XG = Green without lens
XR = Red without lens
XW = White without lens
XB = Blue without lens
Lens Etching
X0 =
X1 =
1
LED Voltage
24 = 24 Vac/Vdc
120 = 120 Vac
230 = 230 Vac
Contact Blocks
K10 = 1NO
K01 = 1NC
Connector Type
P1 = 0.2 m M12, 4-pole
P3 = 0.5 m M12, 4-pole
P5 = 1.0 m M12, 4-pole
P30 = 0.2 m M8, 4-pole
P31 = 0.5 m M8, 4-pole
P32 = 1.0 m M8, 4-pole
P62 = 1.0 m flying lead
P65 = 3.5 m flying lead
LED Color
Button
Color
Green
Green
Buttonless
Red
Buttonless
White
Buttonless
Blue
1
1
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary
White
1
1
Illuminated, Flush, Momentary
Red
1
1
Product Selection
C22(S)-DL-_
1
Blue
Buttonless
Voltage
Button
Etching
Contact Block
Configuration
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
24 Vac/Vdc
—
1NO
C22-DL-G-K10-24
C22S-DL-G-K10-24
120 Vac
—
1NO
C22-DL-G-K10-120
C22S-DL-G-K10-120
1
1
230 Vac
—
1NO
C22-DL-G-K10-230
C22S-DL-G-K10-230
24 Vac/Vdc
X1
1NO
C22-DL-G-X1-K10-24
C22S-DL-G-X1-K10-24
120 Vac
X1
1NO
C22-DL-G-X1-K10-120
C22S-DL-G-X1-K10-120
230 Vac
X1
1NO
C22-DL-G-X1-K10-230
C22S-DL-G-X1-K10-230
—
1NO
C22-DL-XG-K10-24
C22S-DL-XG-K10-24
—
1NO
C22-DL-XG-K10-120
C22S-DL-XG-K10-120
230 Vac
—
1NO
C22-DL-XG-K10-230
C22S-DL-XG-K10-230
24 Vac/Vdc
—
1NC
C22-DL-R-K01-24
C22S-DL-R-K01-24
120 Vac
—
1NC
C22-DL-R-K01-120
C22S-DL-R-K01-120
230 Vac
—
1NC
C22-DL-R-K01-230
C22S-DL-R-K01-230
24 Vac/Vdc
X0
1NC
C22-DL-R-X0-K01-24
C22S-DL-R-X0-K01-24
120 Vac
X0
1NC
C22-DL-R-X0-K01-120
C22S-DL-R-X0-K01-120
1
230 Vac
X0
1NC
C22-DL-R-X0-K01-230
C22S-DL-R-X0-K01-230
—
1NC
C22-DL-XR-K01-24
C22S-DL-XR-K01-24
120 Vac
—
1NC
C22-DL-XR-K01-120
C22S-DL-XR-K01-120
230 Vac
—
1NC
C22-DL-XR-K01-230
C22S-DL-XR-K01-230
—
1NO
C22-DL-W-K10-24
C22S-DL-W-K10-24
—
1NO
C22-DL-W-K10-120
C22S-DL-W-K10-120
230 Vac
—
1NO
C22-DL-W-K10-230
C22S-DL-W-K10-230
1
X1
1NO
C22-DL-W-X1-K10-24
C22S-DL-W-X1-K10-24
X1
1NO
C22-DL-W-X1-K10-120
C22S-DL-W-X1-K10-120
230 Vac
X1
1NO
C22-DL-W-X1-K10-230
C22S-DL-W-X1-K10-230
24 Vac/Vdc
—
1NO
C22-DL-XW-K10-24
C22S-DL-XW-K10-24
120 Vac
—
1NO
C22-DL-XW-K10-120
C22S-DL-XW-K10-120
230 Vac
—
1NO
C22-DL-XW-K10-230
C22S-DL-XW-K10-230
24 Vac/Vdc
—
1NO
C22-DL-B-K10-24
C22S-DL-B-K10-24
—
1NO
C22-DL-B-K10-120
C22S-DL-B-K10-120
—
1NO
C22-DL-B-K10-230
C22S-DL-B-K10-230
1
1
1
1
1
1
24 Vac/Vdc
—
1NO
C22-DL-XB-K10-24
C22S-DL-XB-K10-24
120 Vac
—
1NO
C22-DL-XB-K10-120
C22S-DL-XB-K10-120
230 Vac
—
1NO
C22-DL-XB-K10-230
C22S-DL-XB-K10-230
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1
1
120 Vac
120 Vac
1
1
24 Vac/Vdc
230 Vac
1
1
24 Vac/Vdc
120 Vac
1
1
24 Vac/Vdc
120 Vac
24 Vac/Vdc
1
V7-T1-141
1
1.5
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary, with Pigtail
C22-DL-_
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary, with Pigtail
Button
Color
Contacts
Connector
Length
Connector
Type
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Green
1NO
0.2
M8
C22-DL-G-K10-24-P30
1
1NO
0.2
M12
C22-DL-G-K10-24-P1
1NO
0.5
M8
C22-DL-G-K10-24-P31
1
1NO
0.5
M12
C22-DL-G-K10-24-P3
1NO
1
M8
C22-DL-G-K10-24-P32
1
1NO
1
M12
C22-DL-G-K10-24-P5
1NO
1
Flying lead
C22-DL-G-K10-24-P62
1
1NO
3.5
Flying lead
C22-DL-G-K10-24-P65
1NC
0.2
M8
C22-DL-R-K01-24-P30
1NC
0.2
M12
C22-DL-R-K01-24-P1
1NC
0.5
M8
C22-DL-R-K01-24-P31
1NC
0.5
M12
C22-DL-R-K01-24-P3
1NC
1
M8
C22-DL-R-K01-24-P32
1NC
1
M12
C22-DL-R-K01-24-P5
1NC
1
Flying lead
C22-DL-R-K01-24-P62
1NC
3.5
Flying lead
C22-DL-R-K01-24-P65
1NO
0.2
M8
C22-DL-B-K10-24-P30
1NO
0.2
M12
C22-DL-B-K10-24-P1
1
1NO
0.5
M8
C22-DL-B-K10-24-P31
1NO
0.5
M12
C22-DL-B-K10-24-P3
1
1NO
1
M8
C22-DL-B-K10-24-P32
1NO
1
M12
C22-DL-B-K10-24-P5
1NO
1
Flying lead
C22-DL-B-K10-24-P62
1NO
3.5
Flying lead
C22-DL-B-K10-24-P65
1NO
0.2
M8
C22-DL-W-K10-24-P30
1NO
0.2
M12
C22-DL-W-K10-24-P1
1NO
0.5
M8
C22-DL-W-K10-24-P31
1
1NO
0.5
M12
C22-DL-W-K10-24-P3
1NO
1
M8
C22-DL-W-K10-24-P32
1
1NO
1
M12
C22-DL-W-K10-24-P5
1NO
1
Flying lead
C22-DL-W-K10-24-P62
1
1NO
3.5
Flying lead
C22-DL-W-K10-24-P65
1
Red
1
1
1
1
Blue
1
1
1
White
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-142
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
1.5
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Maintained
C22(S)-DRL-_
1
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Maintained
LED Color
Button
Color
Voltage
Green
Green
Buttonless
Red
Red
Buttonless
White
White
Buttonless
Blue
Blue
Buttonless
Contact Block
Configuration
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
24 Vac/Vdc
1NO
C22-DRL-G-K10-24
C22S-DRL-G-K10-24
120 Vac
1NO
C22-DRL-G-K10-120
C22S-DRL-G-K10-120
230 Vac
1NO
C22-DRL-G-K10-230
C22S-DRL-G-K10-230
24 Vac/Vdc
1NO
C22-DRL-XG-K10-24
C22S-DRL-XG-K10-24
120 Vac
1NO
C22-DRL-XG-K10-120
C22S-DRL-XG-K10-120
230 Vac
1NO
C22-DRL-XG-K10-230
C22S-DRL-XG-K10-230
24 Vac/Vdc
1NC
C22-DRL-R-K01-24
C22S-DRL-R-K01-24
120 Vac
1NC
C22-DRL-R-K01-120
C22S-DRL-R-K01-120
1
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
1
1
1
1
1
230 Vac
1NC
C22-DRL-R-K01-230
C22S-DRL-R-K01-230
24 Vac/Vdc
1NC
C22-DRL-XR-K01-24
C22S-DRL-XR-K01-24
120 Vac
1NC
C22-DRL-XR-K01-120
C22S-DRL-XR-K01-120
230 Vac
1NC
C22-DRL-XR-K01-230
C22S-DRL-XR-K01-230
24 Vac/Vdc
1NO
C22-DRL-W-K10-24
C22S-DRL-W-K10-24
120 Vac
1NO
C22-DRL-W-K10-120
C22S-DRL-W-K10-120
230 Vac
1NO
C22-DRL-W-K10-230
C22S-DRL-W-K10-230
24 Vac/Vdc
1NO
C22-DRL-XW-K10-24
C22S-DRL-XW-K10-24
120 Vac
1NO
C22-DRL-XW-K10-120
C22S-DRL-XW-K10-120
230 Vac
1NO
C22-DRL-XW-K10-230
C22S-DRL-XW-K10-230
24 Vac/Vdc
1NO
C22-DRL-B-K10-24
C22S-DRL-B-K10-24
120 Vac
1NO
C22-DRL-B-K10-120
C22S-DRL-B-K10-120
230 Vac
1NO
C22-DRL-B-K10-230
C22S-DRL-B-K10-230
24 Vac/Vdc
1NO
C22-DRL-XB-K10-24
C22S-DRL-XB-K10-24
120 Vac
1NO
C22-DRL-XB-K10-120
C22S-DRL-XB-K10-120
230 Vac
1NO
C22-DRL-XB-K10-230
C22S-DRL-XB-K10-230
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Note: Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by
switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-143
1.5
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Maintained, with Pigtail
C22_DRL-G-_
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Maintained, with Pigtail
Button
Color
Contacts
Connector
Length
Connector
Type
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Green
1NO
0.2
M8
C22-DRL-G-K10-24-P30
1
1NO
0.2
M12
C22-DRL-G-K10-24-P1
1NO
0.5
M8
C22-DRL-G-K10-24-P31
1
1NO
0.5
M12
C22-DRL-G-K10-24-P3
1NO
1
M8
C22-DRL-G-K10-24-P32
1
1NO
1
M12
C22-DRL-G-K10-24-P5
1NO
1
Flying lead
C22-DRL-G-K10-24-P62
1
1NO
3.5
Flying lead
C22-DRL-G-K10-24-P65
1NC
0.2
M8
C22-DRL-R-K01-24-P30
1NC
0.2
M12
C22-DRL-R-K01-24-P1
1NC
0.5
M8
C22-DRL-R-K01-24-P31
1NC
0.5
M12
C22-DRL-R-K01-24-P3
1NC
1
M8
C22-DRL-R-K01-24-P32
1NC
1
M12
C22-DRL-R-K01-24-P5
1NC
1
Flying lead
C22-DRL-R-K01-24-P62
1NC
3.5
Flying lead
C22-DRL-R-K01-24-P65
1NO
0.2
M8
C22-DRL-B-K10-24-P30
1NO
0.2
M12
C22-DRL-B-K10-24-P1
1
1NO
0.5
M8
C22-DRL-B-K10-24-P31
1NO
0.5
M12
C22-DRL-B-K10-24-P3
1
1NO
1
M8
C22-DRL-B-K10-24-P32
1NO
1
M12
C22-DRL-B-K10-24-P5
1NO
1
Flying lead
C22-DRL-B-K10-24-P62
1NO
3.5
Flying lead
C22-DRL-B-K10-24-P65
1NO
0.2
M8
C22-DRL-W-K10-24-P30
1NO
0.2
M12
C22-DRL-W-K10-24-P1
1NO
0.5
M8
C22-DRL-W-K10-24-P31
1
1NO
0.5
M12
C22-DRL-W-K10-24-P3
1NO
1
M8
C22-DRL-W-K10-24-P32
1
1NO
1
M12
C22-DRL-W-K10-24-P5
1NO
1
Flying lead
C22-DRL-W-K10-24-P62
1
1NO
3.5
Flying lead
C22-DRL-W-K10-24-P65
1
Red
1
1
1
1
Blue
1
1
1
White
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-144
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
1.5
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Momentary
C22(S)-DLH-_
1
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Momentary
LED Color
Button
Color
Voltage
Green
Green
24 Vac/Vdc
120 Vac
230 Vac
—
Red
White
Blue
Red
White
Blue
Button
Etching
1
Contact Block
Configuration
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
—
1NO
C22-DLH-G-K10-24
C22S-DLH-G-K10-24
—
1NO
C22-DLH-G-K10-120
C22S-DLH-G-K10-120
1NO
C22-DLH-G-K10-230
C22S-DLH-G-K10-230
1
24 Vac/Vdc
X1
1NO
C22-DLH-G-X1-K10-24
C22S-DLH-G-X1-K10-24
120 Vac
X1
1NO
C22-DLH-G-X1-K10-120
C22S-DLH-G-X1-K10-12
230 Vac
X1
1NO
C22-DLH-G-X1-K10-230
C22S-DLH-G-X1-K10-23
24 Vac/Vdc
—
1NC
C22-DLH-R-K01-24
C22S-DLH-R-K01-24
120 Vac
—
1NC
C22-DLH-R-K01-120
C22S-DLH-R-K01-120
230 Vac
—
1NC
C22-DLH-R-K01-230
C22S-DLH-R-K01-230
24 Vac/Vdc
X0
1NC
C22-DLH-R-X0-K01-24
C22S-DLH-R-X0-K01-24
120 Vac
X0
1NC
C22-DLH-R-X0-K01-120
C22S-DLH-R-X0-K01-12
230 Vac
X0
1NC
C22-DLH-R-X0-K01-230
C22S-DLH-R-X0-K01-23
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
24 Vac/Vdc
—
1NO
C22-DLH-W-K10-24
C22S-DLH-W-K10-24
120 Vac
—
1NO
C22-DLH-W-K10-120
C22S-DLH-W-K10-120
230 Vac
—
1NO
C22-DLH-W-K10-230
C22S-DLH-W-K10-230
24 Vac/Vdc
X1
1NO
C22-DLH-W-X1-K10-24
C22S-DLH-W-X1-K10-24
120 Vac
X1
1NO
C22-DLH-W-X1-K10-120
C22S-DLH-W-X1-K10-12
230 Vac
X1
1NO
C22-DLH-W-X1-K10-230
C22S-DLH-W-X1-K10-23
24 Vac/Vdc
—
1NO
C22-DLH-B-K10-24
C22S-DLH-B-K10-24
120 Vac
—
1NO
C22-DLH-B-K10-120
C22S-DLH-B-K10-120
230 Vac
—
1NO
C22-DLH-B-K10-230
C22S-DLH-B-K10-230
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-145
1.5
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Maintained
C22(S)-DRLH-_
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush Extended, Maintained
LED Color
Button
Color
Voltage
Button
Etching
Contact Block
Configuration
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Green
Green
24 Vac/Vdc
—
1NO
C22-DRLH-G-K10-24
C22S-DRLH-G-K10-24
1
120 Vac
—
1NO
C22-DRLH-G-K10-120
C22S-DRLH-G-K10-120
230 Vac
—
1NO
C22-DRLH-G-K10-230
C22S-DRLH-G-K10-230
1
24 Vac/Vdc
X1
1NO
C22-DRLH-G-X1-K10-24
C22S-DRLH-G-X1-K10-24
120 Vac
X1
1NO
C22-DRLH-G-X1-K10-120
C22S-DRLH-G-X1-K10-120
230 Vac
X1
1NO
C22-DRLH-G-X1-K10-230
C22S-DRLH-G-X1-K10-230
24 Vac/Vdc
—
1NC
C22-DRLH-R-K01-24
C22S-DRLH-R-K01-24
120 Vac
—
1NC
C22-DRLH-R-K01-120
C22S-DRLH-R-K01-120
1
230 Vac
—
1NC
C22-DRLH-R-K01-230
C22S-DRLH-R-K01-230
24 Vac/Vdc
X0
1NC
C22-DRLH-R-X0-K01-24
C22S-DRLH-R-X0-K01-24
1
120 Vac
X0
1NC
C22-DRLH-R-X0-K01-120
C22S-DRLH-R-X0-K01-120
1
1
Red
1
1
White
Red
White
1
1
1
Blue
1
1
Blue
230 Vac
X0
1NC
C22-DRLH-R-X0-K01-230
C22S-DRLH-R-X0-K01-230
24 Vac/Vdc
—
1NO
C22-DRLH-W-K10-24
C22S-DRLH-W-K10-24
120 Vac
—
1NO
C22-DRLH-W-K10-120
C22S-DRLH-W-K10-120
230 Vac
—
1NO
C22-DRLH-W-K10-230
C22S-DRLH-W-K10-230
24 Vac/Vdc
X1
1NO
C22-DRLH-W-X1-K10-24
C22S-DRLH-W-X1-K10-24
120 Vac
X1
1NO
C22-DRLH-W-X1-K10-120
C22S-DRLH-W-X1-K10-120
230 Vac
X1
1NO
C22-DRLH-W-X1-K10-230
C22S-DRLH-W-X1-K10-230
24 Vac/Vdc
—
1NO
C22-DRLH-B-K10-24
C22S-DRLH-B-K10-24
120 Vac
—
1NO
C22-DRLH-B-K10-120
C22S-DRLH-B-K10-120
230 Vac
—
1NO
C22-DRLH-B-K10-230
C22S-DRLH-B-K10-230
1
1
1
1
1
Note: Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by
switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-146
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
1.5
Contents
Indicating Lights
Description
Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and
Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indicating Lights
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
V7-T1-134
1
1
1
V7-T1-148
V7-T1-148
V7-T1-150
V7-T1-153
V7-T1-160
V7-T1-162
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Indicating Lights
Product Description
Features
C22 indicating lights use a
combination of a durable,
bright LED unit and modern
lenses designed specifically
for this type of LED to create
a bright and visible indicating
light. As with the
pushbuttons, the indicating
light lenses can be laser
etched, simply order without
lens and order M22/C22
custom etched lenses
to attach.
●
Indicating lights with pigtail
have options for M12, M8,
or flying lead connectors,
providing high degree of
protection options.
●
●
●
LED offering only for
improved brightness
quality and up to 100,000
hours of operation
Lenses specifically
designed for LED
illumination
Lenses capable of being
laser etched for custom
solutions that last
Units with pigtail allow for
direct machine mounting
with high degree of
protection backside
1
Protection Type
●
IP67/IP69K
●
NEMA 4X, 13
●
IP65 rear rating with pigtail
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Note: For additional accessories,
please see Pages V7-T1-105 to
V7-T1-111, 22.5 mm Modular
Pushbuttons—M22 Accessories.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-147
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
1
Catalog Number Selection
1
Indicating Lights
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
C22 - L - G - 24 - P1
1
1
Bezel
C22-L = Flush indicating light
1
1
1
1
G=
R=
W=
Y=
B=
XG =
XR =
XW =
XB =
LED/Lens Color
Green
Red
White
Yellow
Blue
Green without lens
Red without lens
White without lens 1
Blue without lens
LED Voltage
24 = 24 Vac/Vdc
120 = 120 Vac
230 = 230 Vac
Connector Type
P1 = 0.2 m M12, 4-pole
P3 = 0.5 m M12, 4-pole
P5 = 1.0 m M12, 4-pole
P30 = 0.2 m M8, 4-pole
P31 = 0.5 m M8, 4-pole
P32 = 1.0 m M8, 4-pole
P62 = 1.0 m flying lead
P65 = 3.5 m flying lead
1
1
1
Product Selection
Indicating Lights
C22-L-_
1
Indicating Lights
Lens Color
LED Color
Voltage
Catalog Number
Green
Green
24 Vac/Vdc
C22-L-G-24
120 Vac
C22-L-G-120
230 Vac
C22-L-G-230
24 Vac/Vdc
C22-L-R-24
120 Vac
C22-L-R-120
230 Vac
C22-L-R-230
24 Vac/Vdc
C22-L-W-24
120 Vac
C22-L-W-120
230 Vac
C22-L-W-230
24 Vac/Vdc
C22-L-Y-24
120 Vac
C22-L-Y-120
1
1
Red
Red
1
White
1
White
1
Yellow
1
1
Blue
White
Blue
1
1
Without Lens
Green
1
Red
1
1
White
1
1
Blue
1
1
230 Vac
C22-L-Y-230
24 Vac/Vdc
C22-L-B-24
120 Vac
C22-L-B-120
230 Vac
C22-L-B-230
24 Vac/Vdc
C22-L-XG-24
120 Vac
C22-L-XG-120
230 Vac
C22-L-XG-230
24 Vac/Vdc
C22-L-XR-24
120 Vac
C22-L-XR-120
230 Vac
C22-L-XR-230
24 Vac/Vdc
C22-L-XW-24
120 Vac
C22-L-XW-120
230 Vac
C22-L-XW-230
24 Vac/Vdc
C22-L-XB-24
120 Vac
C22-L-XB-120
230 Vac
C22-L-XB-230
Note
1 Use white LED for both white and yellow lenses.
1
1
V7-T1-148
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
C22 with Pigtail LED Options
C22_L-_
1
C22 with Pigtail LED Options
24 Vac/Vdc only indicating lights.
Color
Green
Red
White
Yellow
Blue
1
Connector
Type
0.2 m
Catalog Number
0.5 m
Catalog Number
1.0 m
Catalog Number
3.5 m
Catalog Number
1
1
M8
C22-L-G-24-P30
C22-L-G-24-P31
C22-L-G-24-P32
—
M12
C22-L-G-24-P1
C22-L-G-24-P3
C22-L-G-24-P5
—
Flying lead
—
—
C22-L-G-24-P62
C22-L-G-24-P65
M8
C22-L-R-24-P30
C22-L-R-24-P31
C22-L-R-24-P32
—
M12
C22-L-R-24-P1
C22-L-R-24-P3
C22-L-R-24-P5
—
Flying lead
—
—
C22-L-R-24-P62
C22-L-R-24-P65
M8
C22-L-W-24-P30
C22-L-W-24-P31
C22-L-W-24-P32
—
M12
C22-L-W-24-P1
C22-L-W-24-P3
C22-L-W-24-P5
—
Flying lead
—
—
C22-L-W-24-P62
C22-L-W-24-P65
M8
C22-L-Y-24-P30
C22-L-Y-24-P31
C22-L-Y-24-P32
—
M12
C22-L-Y-24-P1
C22-L-Y-24-P3
C22-L-Y-24-P5
—
Flying lead
—
—
C22-L-Y-24-P62
C22-L-Y-24-P65
M8
C22-L-B-24-P30
C22-L-B-24-P31
C22-L-B-24-P32
—
M12
C22-L-B-24-P1
C22-L-B-24-P3
C22-L-B-24-P5
—
Flying lead
—
—
C22-L-B-24-P62
C22-L-B-24-P65
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-149
1.5
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Contents
Emergency Stops
Description
1
Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and
Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency Stops
Non-Illuminated, Twist-Release . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-Illuminated, Keyed-Release . . . . . . . . . . .
Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Emergency Stops
1
Product Description
Features
C22 emergency stops are a
durable and reliable solution
to a variety of e-stop
applications. This compact
e-stop, available as twist-torelease and keyed-release,
is a simple product that
eliminates the need for selfmonitoring contact blocks,
all while still meeting almost
all of the industry safety
standards.
●
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
●
●
Available in push-pull,
twist-release, twist-release
with indicator, and key
release 38 mm through
60 mm operators
Available with M12 or flying
lead pigtails, allowing direct
machine mounting and
easy reliable connections
Meet functional safety
requirements for E-stops
Protection Type
Twist-Release
●
IP67/IP69K
●
●
Keyed-Release
●
IP66
●
NEMA 4X, 13
●
With pigtail
●
IP65 rear rating
E-stops with pigtails allow
for direct machine mounting,
eliminating the need for an
enclosure with high degree
of rear protection. Flying
leads also allow for quick
termination to nearby
controls or functional
safety devices.
Note: For additional accessories,
please see Pages V7-T1-105 to
V7-T1-111, 22.5 mm Modular
Pushbuttons—M22 Accessories.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-150
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Page
V7-T1-134
V7-T1-147
V7-T1-151
V7-T1-151
V7-T1-153
V7-T1-160
V7-T1-162
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
1.5
Catalog Number Selection
1
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1
Emergency Stops
C22 - PVS45P - MS1 - K01 - P10
Operator Type
PVT45P = Twist-release, 45 mm
PVT60P = Twist-release, 60 mm
PVS45P = Key-release, 45 mm
PVS60P = Key-release, 60 mm
MS1 =
MS2 =
MS3 =
MS4 =
MS5 =
MS6 =
MS7 =
MS8 =
RS =
Key Code
MS1
MS2
MS3
MS4
MS5
MS6
MS7
MS8
Ronis-445
Contact Blocks
K02 = 2NC
K11 = 1NO/1NC
1
1
Connector Type
P10 = 0.2 m M12, 5-pole
P62 = 1.0 m flying lead
P65 = 3.5 m flying lead
1
1
1
1
Product Selection
1
Non-Illuminated, Twist-Release
C22-PVT_
1
Non-Illuminated Emergency Stops, Twist-Release
1
Release Method
Operator Size
Contact Block
Configuration
Catalog Number
Twist-release
45 mm
2NC
C22-PVT45P-K02
1NO/1NC
C22-PVT45P-K11
60 mm
2NC
C22-PVT60P-K02
1NO/1NC
C22-PVT60P-K11
1
1
1
1
Non-Illuminated, Keyed-Release
C22-PVS_
1
Non-Illuminated Emergency Stops, Keyed-Release
Release Method
Operator Size
Key Code
Keyed-release
45 mm
MS1
MS2
MS3
MS4
MS5
MS6
MS7
MS8
Ronis
Note:
Contact Block
Configuration
Catalog Number
2NC
C22-PVS45P-MS1-K02
1NO/1NC
C22-PVS45P-MS1-K11
2NC
C22-PVS45P-MS2-K02
1NO/1NC
C22-PVS45P-MS2-K11
2NC
C22-PVS45P-MS3-K02
1NO/1NC
C22-PVS45P-MS3-K11
2NC
C22-PVS45P-MS4-K02
1NO/1NC
C22-PVS45P-MS4-K11
2NC
C22-PVS45P-MS5-K02
1NO/1NC
C22-PVS45P-MS5-K11
2NC
C22-PVS45P-MS6-K02
1NO/1NC
C22-PVS45P-MS6-K11
2NC
C22-PVS45P-MS7-K02
1NO/1NC
C22-PVS45P-MS7-K11
2NC
C22-PVS45P-MS8-K02
1NO/1NC
C22-PVS45P-MS8-K11
2NC
C22-PVS45P-RS-K02
1NO/1NC
C22-PVS45P-RS-K11
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
= Safety function implemented with positive opening as defined in IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-151
1.5
1
C22-PVS_
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Non-Illuminated Emergency Stops, Keyed-Release, continued
Release Method
Operator Size
Key Code
Keyed-release
60 mm
MS1
1
MS2
1
MS3
1
1
MS4
1
MS5
1
MS6
1
MS7
1
MS8
1
Ronis
1
Contact Block
Configuration
Catalog Number
2NC
C22-PVS60P-MS1-K02
1NO/1NC
C22-PVS60P-MS1-K11
2NC
C22-PVS60P-MS2-K02
1NO/1NC
C22-PVS60P-MS2-K11
2NC
C22-PVS60P-MS3-K02
1NO/1NC
C22-PVS60P-MS3-K11
2NC
C22-PVS60P-MS4-K02
1NO/1NC
C22-PVS60P-MS4-K11
2NC
C22-PVS60P-MS5-K02
1NO/1NC
C22-PVS60P-MS5-K11
2NC
C22-PVS60P-MS6-K02
1NO/1NC
C22-PVS60P-MS6-K11
2NC
C22-PVS60P-MS7-K02
1NO/1NC
C22-PVS60P-MS7-K11
2NC
C22-PVS60P-MS8-K02
1NO/1NC
C22-PVS60P-MS8-K11
2NC
C22-PVS60P-RS-K02
1NO/1NC
C22-PVS60P-RS-K11
1
1
E-stop
E-stop
1
Release Method
Operator Size
Contacts
Connector Length
Connector Type
Catalog Number
Push-pull
38 mm
2NC
1
Flying lead
C22-PV-K02-P62
38 mm
2NC
3.5
Flying lead
C22-PV-K02-P65
1
38 mm
1NO/1NC
1
Flying lead
C22-PV-K11-P62
38 mm
1NO/1NC
3.5
Flying lead
C22-PV-K11-P65
1
45 mm
2NC
0.2
M12, 5-pole
C22-PV-K02-P10
38 mm
2NC
1
Flying lead
C22-PVT-K02-P62
1
38 mm
2NC
3.5
Flying lead
C22-PVT-K02-P65
38 mm
1NO/1NC
1
Flying lead
C22-PVT-K11-P62
1
38 mm
1NO/1NC
3.5
Flying lead
C22-PVT-K11-P65
45 mm
2NC
1
Flying lead
C22-PVT45P-K02-P62
45 mm
2NC
3.5
Flying lead
C22-PVT45P-K02-P65
1
C22-PV-K11-P62
C22-PVT-K02-P65
Twist release
1
45 mm
1NO/1NC
1
Flying lead
C22-PVT45P-K11-P62
45 mm
1NO/1NC
3.5
Flying lead
C22-PVT45P-K11-P65
45 mm
2NC
0.2
M12, 5-pole
C22-PVT45P-K02-P10
Twist release
45 mm
mechanical indication
45 mm
2NC
1
Flying lead
C22-PVT45PMPIK02-P62
1
1
C22-PVT45PMPIK
02-P65
1
1
Note:
2NC
3.5
Flying lead
C22-PVT45PMPIK02-P65
45 mm
1NO/1NC
1
Flying lead
C22-PVT45PMPIK11-P62
45 mm
1NO/1NC
3.5
Flying lead
C22-PVT45PMPIK11-P65
= Safety function implemented with positive opening as defined in IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-152
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
1.5
Contents
Selector Switches
Description
Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and
Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selector Switches
Non-Illuminated, Knob Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-Illuminated, Key Operated . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
V7-T1-134
V7-T1-147
V7-T1-150
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-154
V7-T1-156
V7-T1-160
V7-T1-162
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Selector Switches
Product Description
Features
With over 20 variations of
operation and 8 varieties of
key codes, the C22 line offers
a very complete line of
selector switches.
●
Pigtail units come in M12, M8
or flying lead options.
●
Selector switch (nonkeyed) rated for 1 million
mechanical operations
Rear pigtails provide IP65
front and rear ratings,
eliminating enclosure
requirements and reducing
installation times
1
Protection Type
●
IP65
●
NEMA 4X, 13
1
1
1
1
Note: For additional accessories,
please see Pages V7-T1-105 to
V7-T1-111, 22.5 mm Modular
Pushbuttons—M22 Accessories.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-153
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
1
Catalog Number Selection
1
Selector Switches—Non-Keyed
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
C22 - WK - K10 - P1
1
1
Bezel
C22 = Silver
C22S = Black
1
1
1
1
1
1
WK =
WKV =
WRK =
WRKV =
WK3 =
WRK3 =
Operator Type
2-position, momentary
2-position, momentary, “V” position
2-position, maintained
2-position, maintained, “V” position
3-position, momentary
3-position, maintained
Contact Blocks
K10 = 1NO
K20 = 2NO
K01 = 1NC
K02 = 2NC
K11 = 1NO/1NC
Connector Type
P1 = 0.2 m M12, 4-pole
P3 = 0.5 m M12, 4-pole
P5 = 1.0 m M12, 4-pole
P30 = 0.2 m M8, 4-pole
P31 = 0.5 m M8, 4-pole
P32 = 1.0 m M8, 4-pole
P62 = 1.0 m flying lead
P65 = 3.5 m flying lead
Product Selection
Non-Illuminated, Knob Type
C22(S)-WK-_/
C22(S)-WRK_
1
Non-Illuminated Selector Switches, Knob Type
Type
Switching
Position
Two-position
Momentary
Contact Block
Configuration
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
1NO
C22-WK-K10
C22S-WK-K10
2NO
C22-WK-K20
C22S-WK-K20
1
1NC
C22-WK-K01
C22S-WK-K01
2NC
C22-WK-K02
C22S-WK-K02
1
1NO/1NC
C22-WK-K11
C22S-WK-K11
1NO
C22-WKV-K10
C22S-WKV-K10
2NO
C22-WKV-K20
C22S-WKV-K20
1NC
C22-WKV-K01
C22S-WKV-K01
2NC
C22-WKV-K02
C22S-WKV-K02
1NO/1NC
C22-WKV-K11
C22S-WKV-K11
1NO
C22-WRK-K10
C22S-WRK-K10
2NO
C22-WRK-K20
C22S-WRK-K20
1NC
C22-WRK-K01
C22S-WRK-K01
2NC
C22-WRK-K02
C22S-WRK-K02
1NO/1NC
C22-WRK-K11
C22S-WRK-K11
1NO
C22-WRKV-K10
C22S-WRKV-K10
2NO
C22-WRKV-K20
C22S-WRKV-K20
1NC
C22-WRKV-K01
C22S-WRKV-K01
2NC
C22-WRKV-K02
C22S-WRKV-K02
1
40°
Momentary
1
60°
1
1
Maintained
1
40°
1
1
Maintained
60°
1
1
1
Three-position
Momentary
1
40°
1
Maintained
60°
1
40°
60°
1NO/1NC
C22-WRKV-K11
C22S-WRKV-K11
2NO
C22-WK3-K20
C22S-WK3-K20
2NC
C22-WK3-K02
C22S-WK3-K02
1NO/1NC
C22-WK3-K11
C22S-WK3-K11
2NO
C22-WRK3-K20
C22S-WRK3-K20
2NC
C22-WRK3-K02
C22S-WRK3-K02
1NO/1NC
C22-WRK3-K11
C22S-WRK3-K11
Note: Momentary selector switches can be field converted to maintained.
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-154
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
1.5
Non-Illuminated Selector Switches, Knob Type, with Pigtail
C22-W_
1
Non-Illuminated Selector Switches, Knob Type, with Pigtail
Type
Switching
Position
Two-position
Momentary
Maintained
Three-position
Momentary
Maintained
Contacts
Connector
Length
Connector Type
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
1NC
1
Flying lead
C22-WK-K01-P62
1NC
3.5
Flying lead
C22-WK-K01-P65
1NO
0.5
M8
C22-WK-K10-P30
1NO
0.5
M12
C22-WK-K10-P1
1NO
1
M8
C22-WK-K10-P32
1NO
1
M12
C22-WK-K10-P5
1NO
1
Flying lead
C22-WK-K10-P62
1NO
3.5
Flying lead
C22-WK-K10-P65
1NO/1NC
1
Flying lead
C22-WK-K11-P62
1NO/1NC
3.5
Flying lead
C22-WK-K11-P65
2NC
1
Flying lead
C22-WK-K02-P62
2NC
3.5
Flying lead
C22-WK-K02-P65
2NO
1
Flying lead
C22-WK-K20-P62
2NO
3.5
Flying lead
C22-WK-K20-P65
1NC
1
Flying lead
C22-WRK-K01-P62
1NC
3.5
Flying lead
C22-WRK-K01-P65
1NO
0.5
M8
C22-WRK-K10-P30
1NO
0.5
M12
C22-WRK-K10-P1
1NO
1
M8
C22-WRK-K10-P32
1NO
1
M12
C22-WRK-K10-P5
1NO
1
Flying lead
C22-WRK-K10-P62
1NO
3.5
Flying lead
C22-WRK-K10-P65
1NO/1NC
1
Flying lead
C22-WRK-K11-P62
1NO/1NC
3.5
Flying lead
C22-WRK-K11-P65
2NC
1
Flying lead
C22-WRK-K02-P62
2NC
3.5
Flying lead
C22-WRK-K02-P65
2NO
1
Flying lead
C22-WRK-K20-P62
2NO
3.5
Flying lead
C22-WRK-K20-P65
1NO/1NC
1
Flying lead
C22-WK3-K11-P62
1NO/1NC
3.5
Flying lead
C22-WK3-K11-P65
2NC
1
Flying lead
C22-WK3-K02-P62
2NC
3.5
Flying lead
C22-WK3-K02-P65
2NO
1
Flying lead
C22-WK3-K20-P62
2NO
3.5
Flying lead
C22-WK3-K20-P65
1NO/1NC
1
Flying lead
C22-WRK3-K11-P62
1NO/1NC
3.5
Flying lead
C22-WRK3-K11-P65
2NC
1
Flying lead
C22-WRK3-K02-P62
2NC
3.5
Flying lead
C22-WRK3-K02-P65
2NO
1
Flying lead
C22-WRK3-K20-P62
2NO
3.5
Flying lead
C22-WRK3-K20-P65
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-155
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
1
Catalog Number Selection
1
Selector Switches—Keyed
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
C22 - WS - MS1 - A1 - K10 - P1
1
1
1
1
Bezel
C22 = Silver
C22S = Black
Operator Type
WS
= 2-position, momentary
WRS
= 2-position, maintained
WRS-…-A1 = 2-position, maintained,
1
key removal left
WS3
= 3-position, momentary
WRS3
= 3-position, maintained
1
1
Key Code
MS1 = MS1
MS2 = MS2
MS3 = MS3
MS4 = MS4
MS5 = MS5
MS6 = MS6
MS7 = MS7
MS8 = MS8
Contact Blocks
K10 = 1NO
K20 = 2NO
K01 = 1NC
K02 = 2NC
K11 = 1NO/1NC
Connector Type
P1 = 0.2 m M12, 4-pole
P3 = 0.5 m M12, 4-pole
P5 = 1.0 m M12, 4-pole
P30 = 0.2 m M8, 4-pole
P31 = 0.5 m M8, 4-pole
P32 = 1.0 m M8, 4-pole
P62 = 1.0 m flying lead
P65 = 3.5 m flying lead
1
1
1
Non-Illuminated, Key Operated
C22(S)-WS-MS_
Non-Illuminated Selector Switches, Key Operated
Position
Type
Key Code
Contact Block
Configuration
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Two-position
Momentary
key removal left
MS1
1NO
C22-WS-MS1-K10
C22S-WS-MS1-K10
2NO
C22-WS-MS1-K20
C22S-WS-MS1-K20
1NC
C22-WS-MS1-K01
C22S-WS-MS1-K01
2NC
C22-WS-MS1-K02
C22S-WS-MS1-K02
1NO/1NC
C22-WS-MS1-K11
C22S-WS-MS1-K11
1NO
C22-WS-MS2-K10
C22S-WS-MS2-K10
2NO
C22-WS-MS2-K20
C22S-WS-MS2-K20
1NC
C22-WS-MS2-K01
C22S-WS-MS2-K01
2NC
C22-WS-MS2-K02
C22S-WS-MS2-K02
1NO/1NC
C22-WS-MS2-K11
C22S-WS-MS2-K11
1NO
C22-WS-MS3-K10
C22S-WS-MS3-K10
2NO
C22-WS-MS3-K20
C22S-WS-MS3-K20
1NC
C22-WS-MS3-K01
C22S-WS-MS3-K01
2NC
C22-WS-MS3-K02
C22S-WS-MS3-K02
1NO/1NC
C22-WS-MS3-K11
C22S-WS-MS3-K11
1NO
C22-WS-MS4-K10
C22S-WS-MS4-K10
2NO
C22-WS-MS4-K20
C22S-WS-MS4-K20
1NC
C22-WS-MS4-K01
C22S-WS-MS4-K01
2NC
C22-WS-MS4-K02
C22S-WS-MS4-K02
1NO/1NC
C22-WS-MS4-K11
C22S-WS-MS4-K11
1NO
C22-WS-MS5-K10
C22S-WS-MS5-K10
2NO
C22-WS-MS5-K20
C22S-WS-MS5-K20
1
1NC
C22-WS-MS5-K01
C22S-WS-MS5-K01
2NC
C22-WS-MS5-K02
C22S-WS-MS5-K02
1
1NO/1NC
C22-WS-MS5-K11
C22S-WS-MS5-K11
1
1
40°
1
1
MS2
1
1
MS3
1
1
1
MS4
1
1
1
MS5
1
Note: Momentary selector switches can be field converted to maintained.
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-156
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
C22(S)-WRS-MS_
1.5
Non-Illuminated Selector Switches, Key Operated, continued
1
Position
Type
Key Code
Contact Block
Configuration
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Two-position,
continued
Momentary
key removal left
MS6
1NO
C22-WS-MS6-K10
C22S-WS-MS6-K10
2NO
C22-WS-MS6-K20
C22S-WS-MS6-K20
1NC
C22-WS-MS6-K01
C22S-WS-MS6-K01
2NC
C22-WS-MS6-K02
C22S-WS-MS6-K02
1NO/1NC
C22-WS-MS6-K11
C22S-WS-MS6-K11
1NO
C22-WS-MS7-K10
C22S-WS-MS7-K10
2NO
C22-WS-MS7-K20
C22S-WS-MS7-K20
1NC
C22-WS-MS7-K01
C22S-WS-MS7-K01
2NC
C22-WS-MS7-K02
C22S-WS-MS7-K02
1NO/1NC
C22-WS-MS7-K11
C22S-WS-MS7-K11
1NO
C22-WS-MS8-K10
C22S-WS-MS8-K10
2NO
C22-WS-MS8-K20
C22S-WS-MS8-K20
1NC
C22-WS-MS8-K01
C22S-WS-MS8-K01
2NC
C22-WS-MS8-K02
C22S-WS-MS8-K02
1NO/1NC
C22-WS-MS8-K11
C22S-WS-MS8-K11
1NO
C22-WRS-MS1-K10
C22S-WRS-MS1-K10
2NO
C22-WRS-MS1-K20
C22S-WRS-MS1-K20
1NC
C22-WRS-MS1-K01
C22S-WRS-MS1-K01
2NC
C22-WRS-MS1-K02
C22S-WRS-MS1-K02
1NO/1NC
C22-WRS-MS1-K11
C22S-WRS-MS1-K11
1NO
C22-WRS-MS2-K10
C22S-WRS-MS2-K10
2NO
C22-WRS-MS2-K20
C22S-WRS-MS2-K20
1NC
C22-WRS-MS2-K01
C22S-WRS-MS2-K01
2NC
C22-WRS-MS2-K02
C22S-WRS-MS2-K02
1NO/1NC
C22-WRS-MS2-K11
C22S-WRS-MS2-K11
1NO
C22-WRS-MS3-K10
C22S-WRS-MS3-K10
2NO
C22-WRS-MS3-K20
C22S-WRS-MS3-K20
1NC
C22-WRS-MS3-K01
C22S-WRS-MS3-K01
2NC
C22-WRS-MS3-K02
C22S-WRS-MS3-K02
1NO/1NC
C22-WRS-MS3-K11
C22S-WRS-MS3-K11
40°
MS7
MS8
Two-position
Maintained
key removal left/right
MS1
40°
MS2
MS3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Note: Momentary selector switches can be field converted to maintained.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-157
1.5
1
C22(S)-WRS…-MS1_
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Non-Illuminated Selector Switches, Key Operated, continued
Position
Type
Key Code
Contact Block
Configuration
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Two-position,
continued
Maintained
key removal left/right
MS4
1NO
C22-WRS-MS4-K10
C22S-WRS-MS4-K10
2NO
C22-WRS-MS4-K20
C22S-WRS-MS4-K20
1NC
C22-WRS-MS4-K01
C22S-WRS-MS4-K01
2NC
C22-WRS-MS4-K02
C22S-WRS-MS4-K02
1NO/1NC
C22-WRS-MS4-K11
C22S-WRS-MS4-K11
1NO
C22-WRS-MS5-K10
C22S-WRS-MS5-K10
1
2NO
C22-WRS-MS5-K20
C22S-WRS-MS5-K20
1NC
C22-WRS-MS5-K01
C22S-WRS-MS5-K01
1
2NC
C22-WRS-MS5-K02
C22S-WRS-MS5-K02
1NO/1NC
C22-WRS-MS5-K11
C22S-WRS-MS5-K11
1NO
C22-WRS-MS6-K10
C22S-WRS-MS6-K10
2NO
C22-WRS-MS6-K20
C22S-WRS-MS6-K20
1NC
C22-WRS-MS6-K01
C22S-WRS-MS6-K01
2NC
C22-WRS-MS6-K02
C22S-WRS-MS6-K02
1NO/1NC
C22-WRS-MS6-K11
C22S-WRS-MS6-K11
1NO
C22-WRS-MS7-K10
C22S-WRS-MS7-K10
2NO
C22-WRS-MS7-K20
C22S-WRS-MS7-K20
1NC
C22-WRS-MS7-K01
C22S-WRS-MS7-K01
2NC
C22-WRS-MS7-K02
C22S-WRS-MS7-K02
1NO/1NC
C22-WRS-MS7-K11
C22S-WRS-MS7-K11
1NO
C22-WRS-MS7-K10
C22S-WRS-MS7-K10
2NO
C22-WRS-MS7-K20
C22S-WRS-MS7-K20
1NC
C22-WRS-MS7-K01
C22S-WRS-MS7-K01
2NC
C22-WRS-MS7-K02
C22S-WRS-MS7-K02
1NO/1NC
C22-WRS-MS7-K11
C22S-WRS-MS7-K11
1NO
C22-WRS-MS1-A1-K10
C22S-WRS-MS1-A1-K10
2NO
C22-WRS-MS1-A1-K20
C22S-WRS-MS1-A1-K20
1NC
C22-WRS-MS1-A1-K01
C22S-WRS-MS1-A1-K01
2NC
C22-WRS-MS1-A1-K02
C22S-WRS-MS1-A1-K02
1NO/1NC
C22-WRS-MS1-A1-K11
C22S-WRS-MS1-A1-K11
2NO
C22-WS3-MS1-K20
C22S-WS3-MS1-K20
2NC
C22-WS3-MS1-K02
C22S-WS3-MS1-K02
1NO/1NC
C22-WS3-MS1-K11
C22S-WS3-MS1-K11
2NO
C22-WRS3-MS1-K20
C22S-WRS3-MS1-K20
2NC
C22-WRS3-MS1-K02
C22S-WRS3-MS1-K02
1NO/1NC
C22-WRS3-MS1-K11
C22S-WRS3-MS1-K11
1
1
40°
1
1
MS5
1
MS6
1
1
1
MS7
1
1
MS8
1
1
1
Two-position
1
Maintained
key removal left
MS1
40°
1
1
Three Position
1
Momentary
Key Removal Center
40°
MS1
40°
1
Maintained
MS1
Key Removal Left/Right
1
60°
1
1
60°
Note: Momentary selector switches can be field converted to maintained.
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-158
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
1.5
Non-Illuminated Selector Switches, Key Operated, with Pigtail
C22-W_
1
Non-Illuminated Selector Switches, Key Operated, with Pigtail
Position
Switching
Position
Two-position
Momentary
Contacts
40°
Maintained
60°
Three-position
Momentary
40°
40°
Maintained
60°
60°
Connector
Length
Connector Type
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
1NC
1m
Flying lead
C22-WS-MS1-K01-P62
1NC
3.5 m
Flying lead
C22-WS-MS1-K01-P65
1NO
0.2 m
M12
C22-WS-MS1-K10-P1
1NO
0.2 m
M8
C22-WS-MS1-K10-P30
1NO
1m
M12
C22-WS-MS1-K10-P5
1NO
1m
M8
C22-WS-MS1-K10-P32
1NO
1m
Flying lead
C22-WS-MS1-K10-P62
1NO
3.5 m
Flying lead
C22-WS-MS1-K10-P65
1NO/1NC
1m
Flying lead
C22-WS-MS1-K11-P62
1NO/1NC
3.5 m
Flying lead
C22-WS-MS1-K11-P65
2NC
1m
Flying lead
C22-WS-MS1-K02-P62
2NC
3.5 m
Flying lead
C22-WS-MS1-K02-P65
2NO
1m
Flying lead
C22-WS-MS1-K20-P62
2NO
3.5 m
Flying lead
C22-WS-MS1-K20-P65
1NC
1m
Flying lead
C22-WRS-MS1-K01-P62
1NC
3.5 m
Flying lead
C22-WRS-MS1-K01-P65
1NO
0.2 m
M12
C22-WRS-MS1-K10-P1
1NO
0.2 m
M8
C22-WRS-MS1-K10-P30
1NO
1m
M12
C22-WRS-MS1-K10-P5
1NO
1m
M8
C22-WRS-MS1-K10-P32
1NO
1m
Flying lead
C22-WRS-MS1-K10-P62
1NO
3.5 m
Flying lead
C22-WRS-MS1-K10-P65
1NO/1NC
1m
Flying lead
C22-WRS-MS1-K11-P62
1NO/1NC
3.5 m
Flying lead
C22-WRS-MS1-K11-P65
2NC
1m
Flying lead
C22-WRS-MS1-K02-P62
2NC
3.5 m
Flying lead
C22-WRS-MS1-K02-P65
2NO
1m
Flying lead
C22-WRS-MS1-K20-P62
2NO
3.5 m
Flying lead
C22-WRS-MS1-K20-P65
1NO/1NC
1m
Flying lead
C22-WS3-MS1-K11-P62
1NO/1NC
3.5 m
Flying lead
C22-WS3-MS1-K11-P65
2NC
1m
Flying lead
C22-WS3-MS1-K02-P62
2NC
3.5 m
Flying lead
C22-WS3-MS1-K02-P65
2NO
1m
Flying lead
C22-WS3-MS1-K20-P62
2NO
3.5 m
Flying lead
C22-WS3-MS1-K20-P65
1NO/1NC
1m
Flying lead
C22-WRS3-MS1-K11-P62
1NO/1NC
3.5 m
Flying lead
C22-WRS3-MS1-K11-P65
2NC
1m
Flying lead
C22-WRS3-MS1-K02-P62
2NC
3.5 m
Flying lead
C22-WRS3-MS1-K02-P65
2NO
1m
Flying lead
C22-WRS3-MS1-K20-P62
2NO
3.5 m
Flying lead
C22-WRS3-MS1-K20-P65
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-159
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
1
Technical Data and Specifications
1
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
1
Pushbutton Actuators
Illuminated Pushbuttons C22
Description
Unit
1
General
1
Lifespan, mechanical
Operations
Operating frequency
Operations/h
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
5
1
—
1
0.1
0.05
>3600
>3600
—
>2000
>100
>300
N
>5
>5
—
—
—
>50
>0.5
—
Operating torque
Nm
—
—
—
Nm
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
Threaded ring tightening torque
Nm
2
2
2
2
2
2
IP67, IP69K
IP67, IP69K
IP67, IP69K
IP65
IP66
IP67, IP69K
Protection type
Ambient temperature
1
x 106
Terminal screw tightening torque
1
1
Maintained
>0.3
Climatic proofing
1
Key-Operated
Buttons C22
IEC/EN 60947 VDE 0660
Actuating force
1
1
Momentary
Standards
Selector Switch
Actuators C22
Emergency Stop/
Emergency Switching
OFF Pushbuttons C22
Indicator
Lights C22
Damp heat, constant, to IEC 60068-2-78
Damp heat, cyclic, to IEC 60068-2-30
Open
°C
–25° to 70°
–25° to 70°
–25° to 70°
–25° to 70°
–25° to 70°
–25° to 70°
Storage
°C
–30° to 80°
–30° to 80°
–30° to 80°
–30° to 80°
–30° to 80°
–30° to 80°
Mounting position
As required
As required
As required
As required
As required
As required
g
30
30
30
30
30
30
Solid
mm2
2 x 0.5–1.5
2 x 0.5–1.5
2 x 0.5–1.5
2 x 0.5–1.5
2 x 0.5–1.5
2 x 0.5–1.5
Flexible with ferrule
mm2
2 x 0.5–1.5
2 x 0.5–1.5
2 x 0.5–1.5
2 x 0.5–1.5
2 x 0.5–1.5
2 x 0.5–1.5
Mechanical shock resistance to
IEC 60068-2-27 Shock duration
11 ms, half-sinusoidal
Terminal capacities
Contacts
Rated impulse withstand voltage
Uimp
Vac
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
Rated insulation voltage
Ui
V
250
250
250
250
250
250
III/3
III/3
III/3
III/3
III/3
III/3
Values follow
—
Values follow
Values follow
Values follow
Overvoltage category/pollution
degree
Control circuit reliability
at 5 Vdc/1 mA
HF
Fault
probability
Values follow
at 17 Vdc/7 mA
HF
Fault
probability
N/O contact: statistically determined —
1 failure per 17 x 106 operations
N/C contact: statistically determined
1 failure per 0.9 x 106 operations
at 24 Vdc/5 mA
HF
Fault
probability
Values follow
Values follow
—
Values follow
Values follow
Values follow
gG/gL
A
10
10
—
10
10
10
N/O contact: statistically determined 1 failure per
17 x 106 operations
N/C contact: statistically determined 1 failure per
0.9 x 106 operations
Max. short-circuit protective device
Fuse
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-160
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22, continued
Push-button Actuators
Illuminated Pushbuttons C22
Description
Unit
Momentary
Maintained
Indicator
Lights C22
Selector Switch
Actuators C22
Key-Operated
Buttons C22
Emergency Stop/
Emergency Switching
OFF Pushbuttons C22
Switching Capacity
1
AC-15
24V
Ie
A
4
4
110V
Ie
230V
Ie
A
2
2
—
2
2
2
A
1.5
1.5
—
1.5
1.5
1.5
24V
60V
—
4
4
4
Ie
A
3
3
—
3
3
3
Ie
A
1
1
—
1
1
1
110V
Ie
A
0.6
0.6
—
0.6
0.6
0.6
220V
Ie
A
0.3
0.3
—
0.3
0.3
0.3
Operations
x 106
0.4
0.4
—
0.4
0.4
0.4
x 106
0.6
0.6
—
0.6
0.6
0.6
1
1
DC-13
1
1
1
Lifespan, electrical
AC-15
230V/0.5A
230V/1.0A
1
1
1
Contact Travel
1
Contact Travel Diagram
3
1
0
3.15
1
5.5
1
1
2
1
1
Rated operational current
4
1
0
2.2
1
5.5
Contact closed
1
Contact open
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-161
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
1
Dimensions
1
Illuminated Pushbuttons
1
Flat
Extended
C22(S)-DRL_/C22(S)-DL_
C22(S)-DRLH_/C22(S)-DLH_
1
Approximate Dimensions in mm [in]
1
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
1
1
Ø29.7
[1.17]
1
1
10.4
[0.41]
1
1
1
6.0
[0.24]
4.0
[0.16]
9.6
[0.38]
6.0
[0.24]
4.0
[0.16]
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
M22 x 1.5
20.2
[0.80]
Ø29.5
[1.16]
Ø29.7
[1.17]
16.7
[0.66]
54.6 [2.15]
9.6
[0.38]
M22 x 1.5
20.2
[0.80]
60.9 [2.40]
Pushbutton Actuators
Flat
Extended
C22(S)-DR_/C22(S)-D_
C22(S)-DRH_/C22(S)-DH_
1
1
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
1
1
6.0
[0.24]
4.0
[0.16]
Ø29.7
[1.17]
9.6
[0.38]
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
M22 x 1.5
20.2
[0.80]
Ø29.5
[1.16]
6.0
[0.24]
4.0
[0.16]
Ø29.7
[1.17]
9.6
[0.38]
M22 x 1.5
20.2
[0.80]
1
1
1
1
1
Ø29.5
[1.16]
10.4
[0.41]
16.7
[0.66]
54.6 [2.15]
60.9 [2.40]
Indicating Lights
Flat
C22-L_
1
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
1
6.0
[0.24]
4.0
[0.16]
9.6
[0.38]
M22 x 1.5
1
Ø29.7
[1.17]
1
Ø20.2
[0.80]
Ø29.5
[1.16]
1
11.7
[0.46]
1
55.9 [2.20]
1
1
1
V7-T1-162
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Ø29.5
[1.16]
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Approximate Dimensions in mm [in]
1
Emergency Stop/Emergency Switching OFF Pushbuttons
C22-PVT45P_
1
C22-PVT60P_
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
6.0
[0.24]
9.3
[0.37]
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
6.0
[0.24]
45.0
[1.77]
Ø20.4
[0.80]
1
Ø60.0
[2.36]
Ø29.5
[1.16]
48.0
[1.89]
1
4.0
[0.16]
4.0
[0.16]
Ø45.0
[1.77]
1
9.3
[0.37]
Ø29.5
[1.16]
M22 x 1.5
48.0
[1.89]
93.0 [3.66]
45.0
[1.77]
Ø20.4
[0.80]
M22 x 1.5
1
C22-PVT45P-RS_
9.3
[0.37]
6.0
[0.24]
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
4.0
[0.16]
Ø45.0
[1.17]
Ø29.5
[1.16]
48.0
[1.89]
75.0 [2.95]
120.0 [4.72]
45.0
[1.77]
Ø20.4
[0.80]
6.0
[0.24]
1
9.3
[0.37]
4.0
[0.16]
Ø45.0
[1.77]
Ø29.5
[1.16]
48.0
[1.89]
M22 x 1.5
Ø20.4
[0.80]
45.0
[1.77]
1
1
9.3
[0.37]
1
4.0
[0.16]
1
Ø29.5
[1.16]
48.0
[1.89]
45.0
[1.77]
1
1
C22-PVT60P-MS_
Ø60.0
[2.36]
1
1
71.0 [2.80]
6.0
[0.24]
1
M22 x 1.5
116.0 [4.57]
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
1
1
92.0 [3.62]
C22-PVT45P-MS_
1
1
Ø20.4
[0.80]
M22 x 1.5
1
1
75.0 [2.95]
120.0 [4.72]
1
C22-PVT60P-MS_
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
6.0
[0.24]
1
9.3
[0.37]
1
4.0
[0.16]
Ø60.0
[2.36]
1
Ø29.5
[1.16]
48.0
[1.89]
45.0
[1.77]
1
Ø20.4
[0.80]
M22 x 1.5
1
1
71.0 [2.80]
116.0 [4.57]
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-163
1.5
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Approximate Dimensions in mm [in]
Selector Switch Actuators
1
1
Selector Switch Actuators/V Position
C22(S)-W(R)K_
C22(S)-W(R)KV_
1
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
1
9.6
[0.38]
6.0
[0.24]
4.0
[0.16]
30°
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
M22 x 1.5
6.0
[0.24]
4.0
[0.16]
9.6
[0.38]
M22 x 1.5
1
Ø29.7
[1.17]
1
20.2
[0.80]
Ø29.5
[1.16]
Ø29.7
[1.17]
20.2
[0.80]
1
27.8
[1.09]
1
27.8
[1.09]
72.0 [2.83]
72.0 [2.83]
1
1
Key Operated Actuators
C22(S)-WS(3)-MS_/C22(S)-WRS(3)-MS_
1
1
6.0
[0.24]
4.0
[0.16]
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
1
1
Ø29.7
[1.17]
9.6
[0.38]
M22 x 1.5
20.2
[0.80]
Ø29.5
[1.16]
1
20.8
[0.82]
1
44.2 [1.74]
47.9 [1.89]
1
1
92.1 [3.63]
C22(S)-WS(3)-RS_/C22(S)-WRS(3)-RS_
1
1
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
1
1
6.0
[0.24]
4.0
[0.16]
Ø29.7
[1.17]
1
M22 x 1.5
20.2
[0.80]
24.9
[0.98]
1
9.6
[0.38]
Ø29.5
[1.16]
44.2 [1.74]
47.9 [1.89]
1
92.1 [3.63]
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-164
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Ø29.5
[1.16]
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
1.5
Approximate Dimensions in mm [in]
Pushbuttons, M12A
C22-D...-P1/-P3/-P5
1
Pushbuttons, M8
C22-D...-P30/-P31/-P32
1
1
M22 x 1.5
M22 x 1.5
1
Ø29.7
[Ø1.17]
Ø29.7
[Ø1.17]
1
10.4
[0.41]
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
10.4
[0.41]
45.7 [1.80]
1
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
1
45.7 [1.80]
1
Pushbuttons, Unterminated Cable End, Flying Lead
C22-D...-P/-P62/-P65
1
1
M22 x 1.5
1
Ø29.7
[Ø1.17]
1
10.4
[0.41]
1
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
1
45.7 [1.80]
Indicator Lights, M12A
C22-L-...-P1/-P3/-P5
1
Indicator Lights, M8
C22-L-...-P30/-P31/-P32
1
M22 x 1.5
M22 x 1.5
1
Ø29.7
[Ø1.17]
Ø29.7
[Ø1.17]
11.7
[0.46]
1
1
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
11.7
[0.46]
45.7 [1.80]
1
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
1
1
45.7 [1.80]
Indicator Lights, Unterminated Cable End, Flying Lead
C22-L-...-P62/-P65
1
1
M22 x 1.5
1
Ø29.7
[Ø1.17]
1
1
11.7
[0.46]
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
1
1
45.7 [1.80]
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-165
1.5
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Approximate Dimensions in mm [in]
Emergency Switching Off, M12A
C22-PVT...-P10
1
1
M22 x 1.5
Ø45.0
[Ø1.77]
1
1
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
1
48.4 [1.91]
1
1
Emergency Switching Off, Unterminated Cable End, Flying Lead
C22-PVT...-P62/-P65
1
1
45.7 [1.80]
M22 x 1.5
Ø45.0
[Ø1.77]
1
1
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
1
1
1
48.4 [1.91]
Emergency Switching Off, M12
C22-PV-...-P10
1
1
1
45.7 [1.80]
M22 x 1.5
Ø38.0
[Ø1.50]
1
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
1
1
1
48.3 [1.90]
45.7 [1.80]
Emergency Switching Off, Unterminated Cable End, Flying Lead
C22-PV-...-P62/-P65
1
M22 x 1.5
1
1
Ø38.0
[Ø1.50]
1
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
1
1
48.3 [1.90]
45.7 [1.80]
1
V7-T1-166
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
1.5
Approximate Dimensions in mm [in]
1
Key-Operated Buttons, M12A
C22-W(R)S(3)-MS1-...-P1/-P5
1
1
M22 x 1.5
1
Ø29.7
[Ø1.17]
1
27.5
[1.08]
1
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
20.4
[0.80]
1
45.7 [1.80]
1
1
Key-Operated Buttons, M8
C22-W(R)S(3)-MS1-...-P30/-P32
1
M22 x 1.5
1
Ø29.7
[Ø1.17]
1
1
27.5
[1.08]
20.4
[0.80]
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
1
45.7 [1.80]
1
1
Key-Operated Buttons, Unterminated Cable End, Flying Lead
C22-W(R)S(3)-MS1-...-P62/-P65
1
1
M22 x 1.5
1
Ø29.7
[Ø1.17]
1
1
27.5
[1.08]
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
20.4
[0.80]
1
45.7 [1.80]
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-167
1.6
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices—M30 Flat Operators
Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices—M30 Flat Operators
Contents
Description
1
Page
Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices—
M30 Flat Operators
System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1
1
V7-T1-170
V7-T1-172
V7-T1-180
V7-T1-183
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Product Description
Features
The new and modern M30
30 mm operators of the
Global pilot devices offer a
flat design and functionality
while withstanding exposure
to oil, dirt and water. Ability to
be combined with existing
traditional and flat designed
M22 contact blocks and
indicating lights, M30
operators provide modularity,
simplicity and elegance for
more demanding commercial
and industrial applications.
●
Our new offering includes
stainless steel bezel (M30I)
options for extended
corrosion protection along
with the metal bezel (M30C)
options for everyday
operations.
1
●
●
●
Flat design for modern look
and smooth transition
between the machine and
the operator
Compatible with existing
M22 contact blocks
(M22-K…) and indicating
lights for enhanced
modularity (M22-LED…)
and sustainable inventory
management
Compatible with the new
M22 flat contact blocks
(M22-FK…) and indicating
lights for optimized
footprint (M22-FLED-…)
Stainless steel bezel
(M30I) options for
extended corrosion
protection along with the
metal bezel (M30C)
options for everyday
operations
●
●
●
●
●
AFX mounting system
for easy and secure
installation
Robust against vandalism
Up to IP69K for increased
protection
For M30 CAD drawings,
please visit the 3D
drawings section under
the documentation tab at
www.eaton.com/m30
Refer to Instruction Leaflet
IL047019ZU for further
details
Standards and
Certifications
●
●
●
●
All operators and
components are IEC/
EN 60947 VDE 0660
All M30 flat operators (for
enclosed type devices or
flat-front surface mounted
devices only) are
environmentally rated as
Type 1, 3R, 4X, 12 or 13
UL File #: E29184
All operators carry an IP66
rating with some rated for
washdown environments
with IP67 and IP69K
Marine classification
societies: Bureau Veritas
(BV), Germanischer Lloyd
(GL) and Lloyd’s Register of
Shipping (LR) approved
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-168
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices—M30 Flat Operators
1.6
M30 Flat Operators Use M22 Contact Blocks and Indicating Lights
1
1
1
1
1
1
Note: When an M30 part number is ordered,
the operator comes standard with the AFX
mounting system, ring and adapter.
M22-LED-W
Light Units 1
M22-K10
Terminal
Type
LED
Color
Light Unit
Voltage
Screw
White
Red
Green
Blue
White
Red
Green
Blue
White
Red
Green
Blue
Red/Green/
Yellow
Red, Green,
Blue, Yellow,
White, Violet,
Turquoise
12–30
Vac/Vdc
Screw
M22-FLED-_
Spring-cage
85–264
Vac
12–30
Vac/Vdc
24 Vdc
Catalog Number
M22-LED-W
M22-LED-R
M22-LED-G
M22-LED-B
M22-LED230-W
M22-LED230-R
M22-LED230-G
M22-LED230-B
M22-FLED-W
M22-FLED-R
M22-FLED-G
M22-FLED-B
M22-FLED-RG 2
M22-FLED-RGB 2
M22-FK01
1
1
Contact Blocks 1
Terminal
Type
Contact
Configuration 3
Catalog Number
Screw
NO
NO, early-make
NC
NC, late-break
NO
NC
NC, late-break
2NO
2NC
NO-NC
NC
NO
M22-K10
M22-K10P
M22-K01
M22-K01D
M22-CK10
M22-CK01
M22-CK01D
M22-CK20
M22-CK02
M22-CK11
M22-FK01 4
M22-FK10 4
Spring-cage
Notes
1 For complete listing of available light units and contact blocks, see Accessories,
Pages V7-T1-105 to V7-T1-112.
2 Please see color input key on Page V7-T1-108.
3 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
4 Additional contacts may not be stacked behind M22-F type contact blocks,
M22-F can be stacked behind standard M22 contacts only.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-169
1.6
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices—M30 Flat Operators
System Overview
Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices—M30 Flat Operators
13
14
1
12
1
13
1
11
1
10
13
1
14
15
1
12
1
1
1
1
1
11
1
1
13
10
1
16
12
1
2
1
17
1
11
3
1
10
1
1
4
1
18
1
5
1
1
7
1
6
1
8
1
1
1
9
V7-T1-170
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices—M30 Flat Operators
1.6
Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices—M30 Flat Operators (Legend)
1
Item
Description
Item
Description
1
M30 4-Way Selector Switches
4-positions
With rotary head or thumb-grip
0-1-0-2-0-3-0-4 maintained action
See Page V7-T1-173
10
Blanking Plugs
See Page V7-T1-180
2
M30 Joysticks
2- or 4-positions
See Page V7-T1-177
11
RMQ-AFX
Anti-rotation tab
Included with the equipment supplied with M30 front elements
3
M30 Pushbuttons
Momentary and maintained
Flush
Colors: White, green, red, yellow, blue, black
Illuminated pushbutton actuators
Colors: White, green, red, yellow, blue, orange
See Page V7-T1-172
12
Threaded Rings
See Pages V7-T1-116 and V7-T1-117
M30 Selector Switches
2- and 3-positions
With rotary head, thumb-grip
Programmable maintained/momentary action
Illuminated selector switches with transparent thumb-grip
Colors: White, green, red, yellow, blue
See Page V7-T1-173
13
M30 Key-Operated Buttons
For individual lock mechanisms
2- or 3-positions
Programmable momentary/maintained action and key withdraw
Suitable for master key systems
See Page V7-T1-174
14
M30 Indicator Lights
Colors: White, green, red, yellow, blue, orange
See Page V7-T1-177
15
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
1
1
1
1
1
Mounting Adapters
For flush mounting
For contact and LED elements
See Page V7-T1-181
1
1
1
SmartWire-DT Encoders, M30 Potentiometers
Resistances of 1 kΩ–1 MΩ
Three individual connections
See Page V7-T1-179
16
M30 Panel Mount Connectors
USB 3.0
17
M30 Panel Mount Connectors
RJ45
1
18
Traditional and flat contact blocks
M30 flat operators are compatible with M22 traditional
and flat contact blocks
N/C and N/O
Universal contacts suitable for use with electronic devices
Safety function implemented with positive opening as defined in
IEC/EN 60947-5-1
Traditional contact blocks: 2 levels
See Page V7-T1-112
Traditional and flat LED indicating lights
Cage clamp with push-in terminals
M30 flat operators are compatible with M22 traditional and
flat indicating lights
See Page V7-T1-113 and V7-T1-114
1
1
1
1
1
1
Telescopic Clip
For adjusting the depth of rear mounting devices in CI and CI-K
enclosures and cabinets
See Pages V7-T1-117 and V7-T1-125
1
Convenient Labeling
A laser inscription with any text and/or symbol can be added to illuminated
and non-illuminated pushbuttons. When ordering, specify inscription per
catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library.
See Pages V7-T1-129 through V7-T1-136
1
SmartWire-DT
Product Characteristics
• Clip-fit assembly modular system
• Metal bezel, flus
• Mounting hole diameter: 30.5 mm
• Minimum grid dimension: 40 x 50 mm
• Min. degree of protection: IP66
• Up to 6 contacts per mounting location
• For switching differing potential
• Approved throughout the world
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-171
1.6
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices—M30 Flat Operators
Product Selection
M30—Pushbuttons
1
1
IP67, IP69K—Metal Bezel—Flush
Front Dimensions: 36 mm Diameter
NEMA Type 1, 3R, 4X, 12 or 13
1
Button Plate
M30C-FD-
Momentary
Std. Pack
1
Button Plate
Catalog Number
M30C-FDR-S
12
1 unit
Maintained
Std. Pack
Catalog Number
1 unit
M30C-FDR-S
12
M30C-FD-S
1
M30C-FD-W
M30C-FDR-W
1
M30C-FD-R
M30C-FDR-R
M30C-FD-G
M30C-FDR-G
M30C-FD-Y
M30C-FDR-Y
1
M30C-FD-B
M30C-FDR-B
1
M30C-FD-GR
M30C-FDR-S-X0
M30C-FD-S-X0
M30C-FDR-W-X1
M30C-FD-W-X1
M30C-FDR-R-X0
M30C-FD-W-X11
M30C-FDR-G-X1
1
1
1
1
M30C-FD-R-X0
1
M30C-FD-G-X1
1
M30C-FD-B-X217
1
M30C-FD-GR-X66
M30C-FD-X
Without button plate
M30C-FDR-X
Without button plate
M30C-FDR-ETCH 3
1 unit
M30C-FDR-X
M30C-FD-ETCH 3
Custom
1
Custom
1 unit
M30C-FD-X
1
1
1
1
1
Notes
1 Maintained/momentary action can be changed on device.
2 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
3 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Pages V7-T1-123 to V7-T1-130).
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-172
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices—M30 Flat Operators
1.6
M30—Selector Switches
1
IP64, Metal Bezel
Front dimensions: 36 mm diameter
NEMA Type 1, 3R, 4X, 12 or 13
Maintained/momentary action can be changed with M22-XC-Y configuration adapters
1
1
Action
1
Button Plate
With Rotary Head
Std. Pack
Catalog Number
1 unit
M30C-FW
1
Two-Position
1
M30C-FWR
1
M30C-FWR-X91
AUTO HAND
1
M30C-FWR-X92
With Thumb-Grip
1 unit
M30C-FWK
1
M30C-FWRK
1
1
With Thumb-Grip
1 unit
1
M30C-FWKV
1
1
With Rotary Head
Three-Position 1
0
n.
Ma
Auto
1 unit
1 unit
With Thumb-Grip
1
M30C-FW
M30C-FWR3
1
M30C-FWR3-X7
1
M30C-FWR3-X94
1
M30C-FWK3
1
M30C-FWRK3
Selectable
Maintained, return from left
40°
40°
60°
1
60°
Maintained, return from right
40°
With Rotary Head
Four-Position
4
0
3
With Thumb-Grip
4
0
3
0
0
0
0
40°
60°
1
M30C-FWRK3-1
M30C-FWRK3-2
1
60°
1
23
1
0
2
1
0
2
1 unit
1
M30C-FWR4
1
1
M30C-FWRK4
1
1
1
Notes
1 With plunger bridge for middle contact.
2 Not compatible with configuration adapters.
3 Use M22-A4 mounting adapter, see Page V7-T1-180.
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1
V7-T1-173
1.6
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices—M30 Flat Operators
M30—Key-Operated Buttons
Key-Operated Buttons for Individual Lock Mechanisms
IP64, Metal Bezel
Front dimensions: 36 mm diameter
NEMA Type 1, 3R, 4X, 12 or 13
Maintained/momentary action can be changed with M22-XC-Y configuration adapters
Key withdraw can be changed with M22-XC-… configuration adapters
1
1
1
Action
1
1
Two-Position
Lock
Mechanism
Key Withdrawable at Position
—
0
Equipment
Supplied
Key Code
Std. Pack
Catalog Number
MS1
1 unit
M30C-FWS
Two-Position
—
—
With
one key
MS2
M30C-FWS-MS2
MS3
M30C-FWS-MS3
1
MS4
M30C-FWS-MS4
MS5
M30C-FWS-MS5
1
MS6
M30C-FWS-MS6
MS7
M30C-FWS-MS7
MS8
M30C-FWS-MS8
MS1
M30C-FWRS
MS2
M30C-FWRS-MS2
1
MS3
M30C-FWRS-MS3
MS4
M30C-FWRS-MS4
1
MS5
M30C-FWRS-MS5
MS6
M30C-FWRS-MS6
MS7
M30C-FWRS-MS7
MS8
M30C-FWRS-MS8
MS10
M30C-FWRS-MS10
MS1
M30C-FWRS-A1
MS2
M30C-FWRS-MS2-A1
MS3
M30C-FWRS-MS3-A1
MS4
M30C-FWRS-MS4-A1
MS5
M30C-FWRS-MS5-A1
MS6
M30C-FWRS-MS6-A1
MS7
M30C-FWRS-MS7-A1
MS8
M30C-FWRS-MS8-A1
MS10
M30C-FWRS-MS10-A1
1
1
—
1
0
—
I
1
1
—
1
0
—
—
1
1
1
1
1
1
Two-Position
(Ronis 455)
—
I
—
II
Ronis 455
0
—
I
Ronis 455
0
—
—
MS1
With
two keys
MS1
MS1
M30C-FWRS-X95
1 unit
M30C-FWRS-RS
M30C-FWRS-RS-A1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-174
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices—M30 Flat Operators
1.6
IP64, Metal Bezel, continued
Front dimensions: 36 mm diameter
NEMA Type 1, 3R, 4X, 12 or 13
Maintained/momentary action can be changed with M22-XC-Y configuration adapters
Key withdraw can be changed with M22-XC-… configuration adapters
1
1
1
Action
Three-Position
Lock
Mechanism
Key Withdrawable at Position
—
0
Equipment
Supplied
Key
Code
Std. Pack
Catalog Number
With
one key
MS1
1 unit
M30C-FWS3
1
1
Three-Position
Selectable
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Selectable —
Selectable —
Selectable —
Selectable —
MS2
M30C-FWS3-MS2
MS3
M30C-FWS3-MS3
MS4
M30C-FWS3-MS4
MS5
M30C-FWS3-MS5
MS6
M30C-FWS3-MS6
MS7
M30C-FWS3-MS7
MS8
M30C-FWS3-MS8
1
1
1
1
MS1
M30C-FWRS3-MS1-A1
MS2
M30C-FWRS3-MS2-A1
MS3
M30C-FWRS3-MS3-A1
MS4
M30C-FWRS3-MS4-A1
MS5
M30C-FWRS3-MS5-A1
MS6
M30C-FWRS3-MS6-A1
MS7
M30C-FWRS3-MS7-A1
MS8
M30C-FWRS3-MS8-A1
MS1
M30C-FWRS3-MS1-A2
MS2
M30C-FWRS3-MS2-A2
MS3
M30C-FWRS3-MS3-A2
MS4
M30C-FWRS3-MS4-A2
MS5
M30C-FWRS3-MS5-A2
MS6
M30C-FWRS3-MS6-A2
MS7
M30C-FWRS3-MS7-A2
MS8
M30C-FWRS3-MS8-A2
MS1
M30C-FWRS3-MS1-A3
MS2
M30C-FWRS3-MS2-A3
MS3
M30C-FWRS3-MS3-A3
MS4
M30C-FWRS3-MS4-A3
MS5
M30C-FWRS3-MS5-A3
MS6
M30C-FWRS3-MS6-A3
MS7
M30C-FWRS3-MS7-A3
MS8
M30C-FWRS3-MS8-A3
MS1
M30C-FWRS3-MS1-A4
MS2
M30C-FWRS3-MS2-A4
MS3
M30C-FWRS3-MS3-A4
MS4
M30C-FWRS3-MS4-A4
MS5
M30C-FWRS3-MS5-A4
MS6
M30C-FWRS3-MS6-A4
MS7
M30C-FWRS3-MS7-A4
MS8
M30C-FWRS3-MS8-A4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-175
1.6
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices—M30 Flat Operators
IP64, Metal Bezel, continued
Front dimensions: 36 mm diameter
NEMA Type 1, 3R, 4X, 12 or 13
Maintained/momentary action can be changed with M22-XC-Y configuration adapters
Key withdraw can be changed with M22-XC-… configuration adapters
1
1
1
Action
1
1
Lock
Mechanism
Three-Position
Key Withdrawable at Position
Equipment
Supplied
Key
Code
Std. Pack
Catalog Number
With
one key
MS1
1 unit
M30C-FWRS3-MS1-A5
Three-Position, continued
Selectable
—
Selectable —
1
MS2
M30C-FWRS3-MS2-A5
MS3
M30C-FWRS3-MS3-A5
MS4
M30C-FWRS3-MS4-A5
1
MS5
M30C-FWRS3-MS5-A5
MS6
M30C-FWRS3-MS6-A5
1
MS7
M30C-FWRS3-MS7-A5
MS8
M30C-FWRS3-MS8-A5
MS1
M30C-FWRS3-MS1-A6
MS2
M30C-FWRS3-MS2-A6
MS3
M30C-FWRS3-MS3-A6
1
MS4
M30C-FWRS3-MS4-A6
MS5
M30C-FWRS3-MS5-A6
1
MS6
M30C-FWRS3-MS6-A6
MS7
M30C-FWRS3-MS7-A6
1
MS8
M30C-FWRS3-MS8-A6
MS1
M30C-FWRS3-MS1-A7
MS2
M30C-FWRS3-MS2-A7
1
MS3
M30C-FWRS3-MS3-A7
MS4
M30C-FWRS3-MS4-A7
1
MS5
M30C-FWRS3-MS5-A7
MS6
M30C-FWRS3-MS6-A7
1
MS7
M30C-FWRS3-MS7-A7
MS8
M30C-FWRS3-MS8-A7
1
1
—
—
Selectable —
1
—
1
1
Ronis 455
Three-Position
(Ronis 455)
—
0
Selectable —
—
—
With
two keys
—
With
two keys
MS1
1
1 unit
—
M30C-FWRS3-RS
M30C-FWRS3-RS-A1
1
1
1
1
Two- or Three-Position
Two- or Three-Position
—
1
1
1
1
1
—
Selectable —
1 unit
M30C-FWRS3-A1
MS2
M30C-FWRS3-A2
MS3
M30C-FWRS3-A3
MS4
M30C-FWRS3-A4
MS5
M30C-FWRS3-A5
MS6
M30C-FWRS3-A6
MS7
M30C-FWRS3-A7
MS10
M30C-FWRS3-A10
1
V7-T1-176
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.6
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices—M30 Flat Operators
M30—Joysticks, Indicator Lights and Illuminated Operators
Joystick
Joysticks—IP66, Metal Bezel
With one operating point per operating
direction
NEMA Type 1, 3R, 4X, 12 or 13
With metal shaft
Front dimensions: 36 mm diameter
1
Indicator Lights
Indicator Lights—IP67, Metal Bezel
Front dimensions: 36 mm diameter
NEMA Type 1, 3R, 4X, 12 or 13
Lens
Std.
Pack
Catalog
Number
1 unit
M30C-FL-W
1
1
Action
Description
Std.
Pack
Catalog
Number
Two-position
1 unit
M30C-FWRJS2H
Three-position
M30C-FWRJS2V
Four-position
M30C-FWJS4
1
M30C-FL-R
1
M30C-FL-G
1
M30C-FL-Y
1
M30C-FL-B
M30C-FL-A
1
1
1
Illuminated Pushbuttons
IP67, IP69K, Metal Bezel, Flush
Front dimensions: 36 mm diameter
NEMA Type 1, 3R, 4X, 12 or 13
IP67, IP69K, Metal Bezel, Flush
Front dimensions: 36 mm diameter
NEMA Type 1, 3R, 4X, 12 or 13
Button
Plate
Button
Plate
Momentary
Std.
Pack
Catalog
Number
1 unit
M30C-FDL-W
Maintained
Without
button plate
1 unit
1 unit
M30C-FDRL-W
1
1
1
M30C-FDRL-R
M30C-FDL-G
M30C-FDRL-G
1
M30C-FDL-Y
M30C-FDRL-Y
1
M30C-FDL-B
M30C-FDRL-B
1
M30C-FDL-A
M30C-FDRL-A
M30C-FDL-W-X0
M30C-FDRL-W-X0
M30C-FDL-W-X1
M30C-FDRL-W-X1
1
M30C-FDL-W-X100
M30C-FDRL-R-X0
1
M30C-FDL-R-X0
M30C-FDRL-G-X1
1
M30C-FDL-G-X32
Custom
Catalog
Number
M30C-FDL-R
Maintained
Without
button plate
1
M30C-FDRL-ETCH 1
Custom
M30C-FDL-G-X1
Momentary
Std.
Pack
1
1 unit
M30C-FDRL-X
1
M30C-FDL-Y-X162
1
M30C-FDL-ETCH 1
1
M30C-FDL-X
1
Note
1 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library
(see Pages V7-T1-123 to V7-T1-130).
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-177
1.6
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices—M30 Flat Operators
Illuminated Selector Switches
1
1
1
IP64, Metal Bezel, with Thumb-Grip
Front dimensions: 36 mm diameter
NEMA Type 1, 3R, 4X, 12 or 13
Maintained/momentary action can be changed
with M22-XC-Y configuration adapters
IP64, Metal Bezel, with Thumb-Grip
Front dimensions: 36 mm diameter
NEMA Type 1, 3R, 4X, 12 or 13
Maintained/momentary action can be changed
with M22-XC-Y configuration adapters
Action
Action
1
1
Button
Plate
Momentary
Std.
Pack
Button
Plate
Catalog Number
Two-Position
Momentary
1 unit
1
Std.
Pack
Catalog Number
1 unit
M30C-FWLK3-W
Three-Position
M30C-FWLK-W
M30C-FWLK-R
M30C-FWLK3-R
1
M30C-FWLK-G
M30C-FWLK3-G
1
M30C-FWLK-Y
M30C-FWLK3-Y
1
M30C-FWLK-B
M30C-FWLK3-B
1 unit
1
1 unit
M30C-FWRLK-W
M30C-FWRLK3-W
M30C-FWRLK-R
M30C-FWRLK3-R
1
M30C-FWRLK-G
M30C-FWRLK3-G
1
M30C-FWRLK-Y
M30C-FWRLK3-Y
1
M30C-FWRLK-B
M30C-FWRLK3-B
1
Momentary
Two-Position (V-Configuration)
1 unit
M30C-FWLKV-W
1
M30C-FWLKV-R
1
M30C-FWLKV-G
Maintained,
return from left
1 unit
M30C-FWRLK3-1-R
40°
40°
60°
60°
M30C-FWRLK3-1-G
M30C-FWRLK3-1-Y
M30C-FWLKV-Y
1
M30C-FWLKV-B
1
M30C-FWRLK3-1-W
M30C-FWRLK3-1-B
Maintained,
return from right
1 unit
M30C-FWRLK3-2-W
M30C-FWRLK3-2-R
1
40°
40°
1
60°
60°
M30C-FWRLK3-2-G
M30C-FWRLK3-2-Y
M30C-FWRLK3-2-B
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-178
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices—M30 Flat Operators
1.6
Potentiometers
1
IP66, Metal Bezel Potentiometer
Three individual screw connections
NEMA Type 1, 3R, 4X, 12 or 13
Resistance accuracy: ±10% (linear) / Rated power P = 0.5 W
Potentiometer
Resistance
(R) kOhm
Scale/Inscription
1
Standard scale/inscription
4.7
Contact Sequence
Z1
10
1
1
Std. Pack
Catalog Number
1 unit
M30C-FR1K
1
M30C-FR4K7
Z2
M30C-FR10K
47
M30C-FR47K
100
M30C-FR100K
470
M30C-FR470K
2.2
M30C-FR2K2
22
M30C-FR22K
1000
M30C-FR1M
1
1
Without scale/inscription
1 unit
1
1
1
1
M30C-FR1K-BLANK
2.2
M30C-FR2K2-BLANK
4.7
M30C-FR4K7-BLANK
10
M30C-FR10K-BLANK
22
M30C-FR22K-BLANK
47
M30C-FR47K-BLANK
100
M30C-FR100K-BLANK
470
M30C-FR470K-BLANK
1000
M30C-FR1M-BLANK
1
1
1
1
1
IP65, SmartWire-DT Potentiometer
Only in conjunction with M22-SWD-R function element
NEMA Type 1, 3R, 4X, 12 or 13
Bezel
M22-R-SWD
Contact Sequence
Silver bezel (M22)
1
Std. Pack
Catalog Number
1 unit
M22-R-SWD
1
1
1
1
Metal bezel (flat front)
1 unit
1
M30C-FR-SWD
1
IP65, SmartWire-DT Encoders
With actuation function
NEMA Type 1, 3R, 4X, 12 or 13
Only in conjunction with M22-SWD-INC function element
M30C-FINC-SWD
1
1
Bezel
Contact Sequence
Std. Pack
Catalog Number
Silver bezel (M22)
—
1 unit
M22-INC-SWD
Metal bezel (flat front)
—
1 unit
M30C-FINC-SWD
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-179
1.6
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices—M30 Flat Operators
Blanking Plugs
Round design, IP67, IP69K
For sealing spare mounting locations
For use
with …
Std.
Pack
Catalog Number
50 units
M22-B216388
1
250 units
M22-B-GVP216389
1
50 units
M22S-B216390
250 units
M22S-B-GVP216391
1 unit
M30C-FB187028
1
Color
M22
1
M30
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Technical Data
Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices
Description
Unit
Standards
Lifespan, mechanical (operations)
IEC/EN 60947-5-1
—
IEC/EN 60947-5-1
IEC/EN 60947-5-1
—
EC/EN 60947-5-1
—
5
1
—
—
—
5
1
≤ 1800
M22-FLED…
(Illuminated) Pushbuttons,
Mushroom Pushbuttons
Momentary
Maintained
x 106
Operating frequency (operations)
h
≤ 3600
≤ 3600
≤ 3600
—
—
≤ 3600
N
5
4.5
10
—
—
5
5
Operating torque (screw terminals)
Nm
0.8
—
—
0.8
—
—
—
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP67, IP69K
IP67, IP69K
Degree of protection (IEC/EN 60529)
Climatic proofing
Damp heat, constant as defined in IEC 60068-2-7; Damp heat, cyclic as defined in IEC 60068-2-3
Ambient air temperature, open
°C
–25 to +70
–25 to +70
–25 to +70
–25 to +70
–25 to +70
–25 to +70
–25 to +70
Any
Any
Any
Any
Any
Any
Any
g
30
50
30
30
50
M22: 30
M30: 15
M22: 30
M30: 15
Solid
mm2
0.75–2.5
2 x 1 (0.2–1.5)
2 x 1 (0.75–1.5) 1
0.5–1.5
0.75–2.5
1 x 1 (0.2– 1.5)
1 x 1 (0.75–1.5) 1
—
—
Stranded
mm2
0.5–2.5
—
0.5–1.5
0.5–2.5
1 x 1 (0.2–1.5)
—
—
Flexible with ferrule
mm2
0.5–1.5
2 x 1 (0.25–1) 2
0.5–1.5
—
1 x 1 (0.25–1) 2
—
—
Mounting position
1
Terminal capacities
1
LED Elements
M22(C)-LED…
Operating force
Mechanical shock resistance as
defined in IEC 60068-2-27 Shock
duration: 11 ms, half sine shock
1
Double Contact
Elements
M22-CK20/02/11
General
1
1
Contact Elements
M22-(C)K…
M22-FK…
Notes
1 Can be plugged without tools.
2 Use WAGO Variocrimp 4 crimping tool; please enquire for others.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-180
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.6
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices—M30 Flat Operators
Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices, continued
Contact Elements
M22-(C)K…
M22-FK…
Double Contact
Elements
M22-CK20/02/11
LED Elements
M22(C)-LED…
M22-FLED…
(Illuminated) Pushbuttons,
Mushroom Pushbuttons
Momentary
Maintained
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Vac
6000
4000
—
6000
4000
—
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)
500
250
—
500
250
—
—
III/3
III/3
—
III/3
III/3
—
—
Description
Unit
Contacts
V
Overvoltage category/
degree of pollution
1
1
—
1
1
Control circuit reliability
At 24 Vdc/5 mA (failure rate)
HF
< 10-7 1
—
—
—
—
—
—
At 5 Vdc/1 mA (failure rate)
HF
< 5 x 10-6 2
—
—
—
—
—
—
A
PKZM0–10/FAZ-B6/1 FAZ-B4
—
—
—
—
—
10
4
—
—
—
—
—
1
Max. short-circuit protective device
Fuseless (part no.)
1
Fuse (gG/gL)
1
1
Switching Capacity
1
Rated operational current
AC-15: 24 V Ie
A
—
4
—
—
—
—
—
60 V Ie
A
—
4
—
—
—
—
—
100 V Ie
A
—
2
—
—
—
—
—
115 V Ie
A
6
—
—
—
—
—
—
230 V Ie
A
6
1.5
—
—
—
—
—
400 V Ie
A
4
—
—
—
—
—
—
500 V Ie
A
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
DC-13: 24 V Ie
A
3
1.5
—
—
—
—
—
42 V Ie
A
1.7
—
—
—
—
—
—
60 V Ie
A
1.2
0.8
—
—
—
—
—
110 V Ie
A
0.6 (M22-CK...: 0.8) 0.4
—
—
—
—
—
220 V Ie
A
0.3
—
—
—
—
—
1
AC-15: 230 V/0.5 A (operations)
x 106
1.6
—
—
—
—
—
—
1
230 V/1.0 A (operations)
x 106
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
230 V/3.0 A (operations)
x 106
0.7
—
—
—
—
—
—
x 106
1.2
—
—
—
—
—
—
0.2
1
1
1
1
1
Lifespan, electrical
DC-15: 12 V/2.8 A (operations)
1
1
Notes
1 < 10-7 (i.e., one failure every 107 operations).
2 < 5 x 10-6 (i.e., one failure every 5 x 106 operations).
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-181
1.6
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices—M30 Flat Operators
Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices, continued
Unit
IEC/EN 60947-5-1
IEC/EN 60947-5-1
IEC/EN 60947-5-1
IEC/EN 60947-5-1
IEC/EN 60947-5-1
IEC/EN 60947-5-5
Lifespan, mechanical (operations)
x 106
0.2
0.1
0.1
0.1
—
0.1
Operating frequency (operations)
h
≤ 3600
≤ 2000
≤ 2000
≤ 100
—
≤ 600
1
Operating force
N
5
—
5
—
—
50
Operating torque (screw terminals)
Nm
—
0.3
—
0.5
—
—
1
Degree of protection (IEC/EN 60529)
IP66
M22: IP66
M30: IP64
IP66
M22: IP66
M30: IP64
1
Indicator lights: IP67
IP67, IP69K
Acoustic devices: IP40
Potentiometers: IP66
Climatic proofing
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Description
Standards
°C
–25 to +70
–25 to +70
–25 to +70
–25 to +70
–25 to +70
–25 to +70
Any
Any
Any
Any
Any
Any
g
30
M22: 30
M30: 15
M22: 30
M30: 15
M22: 30
M30: 15
M22: 30
M30: —
50
—
Mounting position
Mechanical shock resistance as
defined in IEC 60068-2-27 Shock
duration: 11 ms, half sine shock
Terminal capacities
Solid
mm2
—
—
—
—
0.5–1.5
Stranded
mm2
—
—
—
—
0.5–1.5
—
Flexible with ferrule
mm2
—
—
—
—
—
—
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Vac
—
—
—
—
4000
—
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)
—
—
—
—
250
—
—
—
—
—
III/3
—
Contacts
1
Control circuit reliability
1
Controlled Stop/
Emergency Stop
Damp heat, constant as defined in IEC 60068-2-7; Damp heat, cyclic as defined in IEC 60068-2-3
Ambient air temperature, open
1
1
Joysticks
Key-Operated
Buttons
General
Overvoltage category/
degree of pollution
1
(Illuminated)
Selector Switches
Indicator Lights
Acoustic Devices
Potentiometers
Double Actuator
Pushbuttons
V
—
—
—
—
—
—
At 24 Vdc/5 mA (failure rate)
HF
—
—
—
—
—
—
At 5 Vdc/1 mA (failure rate)
HF
—
—
—
—
—
—
Max. short-circuit protective device
Fuseless (part no.)
A
Fuse (gG/gL)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Switching Capacity
A
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-182
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.6
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices—M30 Flat Operators
Dimensions
1
Approximate Dimensions in mm [inches]
M30… with 2 M22-K… Standard Contact Elements
1
M30… with M22-FK… Flat Rear Contact Elements
1
1
Ø35.4
[Ø1.39]
38.0 46.3
[1.50] [1.82]
Ø35.4
[Ø1.39]
46.3
[1.82]
1
1
1
11.8
[0.46]
11.8
[0.46]
1
52.8 [2.08]
37.5
[1.48]
79.2 [3.12]
1
1
Indicator Lights
M30C-FL…
Pushbuttons, Blanking Plug
M30C-FD…, M30C-FB
M22 x 1.5
1
1
M22 x 1.5
1
Ø35.4 46.0
[Ø1.39] [1.81]
Ø35.4 46.0
[Ø1.39] [1.81]
1
1
36.0 [1.42]
2.65
[0.10]
1
36.0 [1.42]
1.5–5.5
[0.06–0.22]
1.5–5.5
[0.06–0.22]
1
4.82
[0.19]
26.3
[1.04]
2.65
[0.10]
1
26.3
[1.04]
1
Illuminated Selector Switches
With Thumb-Grip, Four-Way M30C-FW(L)K(V)-…
Selector Switches
With Rotary Head M30C-FW…
1
1
M22 x 1.5
M22 x 1.5
1
Ø35.4 46.0
[Ø1.39] [1.81]
Ø35.4 46.0
[Ø1.39] [1.81]
1
1
1
36.0 [1.42]
36.0 [1.42]
2.65
[0.10]
16.4
[0.64]
2.65
[0.10]
26.3
[1.04]
1
1.5–5.5
[0.06–0.22]
1.5–5.5
[0.06–0.22]
1
26.3
[1.04]
1
19.6
[0.77]
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-183
1.6
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices—M30 Flat Operators
Approximate Dimensions in mm [inches]
Key-Operated Buttons
M30C-FW(R)S(3)-RS…
Key-Operated Buttons
M30C-FW(R)S(3)-MS…
1
M22 x 1.5
M22 x 1.5
1
1
Ø35.4 46.0
[Ø1.39] [1.81]
Ø35.4 46.0
[Ø1.39] [1.81]
1
1
36.0 [1.42]
1
1
40.5 [1.59]
2.65
[0.10]
1
1
36.0 [1.42]
1.5–5.5
[0.06–0.22]
1.5–5.5
[0.06–0.22]
38.7 [1.52]
2.65
[0.10]
26.3
[1.04]
26.3
[1.04]
Key-Operated Buttons
M30C-FW(R)S(3)-SA…
1
M22 x 1.5
1
1
Ø35.4 46.0
[Ø1.39] [1.81]
1
1
36.0 [1.42]
1
1.5–5.5
[0.06–0.22]
1
1
1
1
45.2 [1.78]
2.65
[0.10]
26.3
[1.04]
Potentiometers
M30C-FR…
1
Potentiometers, SmartWire-DT
M30C-FR-SWD
M22 x 1.5
M22 x 1.5
1
1
Ø35.4 46.0
[Ø1.39] [1.81]
Ø35.4 46.0
[Ø1.39] [1.81]
1
1
1.5–5.5
[0.06–0.22]
1
1
1
2.65
[0.10]
21.9
[0.86]
40.2
[1.58]
36.0 [1.42]
36.0 [1.42]
1.5–5.5
[0.06–0.22]
2.65
[0.10]
26.3 [1.04]
21.9 [0.86]
1
V7-T1-184
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.6
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices—M30 Flat Operators
Approximate Dimensions in mm [inches]
Encoders, SmartWire-DT
M30C-FINC-SWD
1
Joysticks
M30C-FW(R)JS…
1
M22 x 1.5
M22 x 1.5
Ø35.4
[Ø1.39]
1
1
1
Ø35.4 46.0
[Ø1.39] [1.81]
1
1
36.0 [1.42]
1.5–5.5
[0.06–0.22]
2.65
[0.10]
36.0 [1.42]
1.5–5.5
[0.06–0.22]
26.3 [1.04]
26.4 [1.04]
Mounting hole
without key slot
46.0
[1.81]
2.65
[0.10]
65.9 [2.59]
1
26.3
[1.04]
1
1
Mounting hole
with key slot
M30C-FW(R)(L)K…
M30C-FW(R)(S)
1
1
1
Ø4.8 +0.2
0
[Ø0.19 +0.01
0 ]
1
Ø30.5 +0.5
0
[Ø1.2 +0.02
0 ]
31.9
[1.25]
1
1
Ø30.5 +0.5
0
[Ø1.2 +0.02
0 ]
1
Grid dimensions for
various combinations
1
1
1
50.0
[1.97]
1
40.0
[1.57]
Ø30.5 +0.5
0
[Ø1.2 +0.02
0 ]
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-185
1.7
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Compact 30 mm Pilot Devices—C30 Flat with Pigtail
Global Compact 30 mm Pilot Devices —C30 Flat with Pigtail
Contents
Description
1
Page
Global Compact 30 mm Pilot Devices—
C30 Flat with Pigtail
System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1
1
V7-T1-187
V7-T1-188
V7-T1-192
V7-T1-193
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Product Description
Features
The new and modern all-inone C30 compact and flat
30 mm pilot devices with
pigtail integrate the required
cable, connector and housing
in one single device.
Our product offering includes
momentary and maintained
operators; illuminated and
non-illuminated pushbuttons;
illuminated and nonilluminated selector switches
and indicating lights. C30 pilot
devices come with the
following pigtail options:
Ability to provide protection
up to IP69K at the front and
IP65 at the back make these
devices the perfect choice for
applications where oil-tight
protection from dirt and liquid
is a must.
1
●
●
●
●
P5 for 1 m cable with M12
P32 for 1 m cable with M8
P62 for 1 m cable with
open wire
P65 for 3.5 m
C30 compact and flat with
pigtail 30 mm pilot devices
offer modern look and
smooth transition between
the machine and the
operator.
1
1
1
The cable, plug connector and
housing are already
integrated and permanently
installed for plug and play.
C30 pilot devices are also
fully assembled for easy
stocking and sustainable
inventory management.
Standards and
Certifications
●
●
●
●
All operators and
components are IEC/
EN 60947 VDE 0660
All C30 flat operators (for
enclosed type devices or
flat-front surface mounted
devices only) are
environmentally rated as
Type 1, 3R, 4X, 12 or 13
UL File #: E29184
All operators carry an IP66
rating with some rated for
washdown environments
with IP67 and IP69K
Marine classification
societies: Bureau Veritas
(BV), Germanischer Lloyd
(GL) and Lloyd’s Register of
Shipping (LR) approved
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-186
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.7
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Compact 30 mm Pilot Devices—C30 Flat with Pigtail
System Overview
1
Global Compact 30 mm Pilot Devices—C30 Flat with Pigtail
1
5
1
4
1
6
1
1
1
1
1
7
1
1
1
1
1
8
1
1
2
1
9
1
1
3
1
1
1
Global Compact 30 mm Pilot Devices—C30 Flat with Pigtail (Legend)
Item
1
Description
Item
C30 Pushbuttons
3
Momentary and maintained
Flush
Colors: white, green, red, black
With cable (1.5 or 3 m) and plug (M12A or M8,
4-pole) or unterminated cable end (4-pole)
See Page V7-T1-188
2
C30 Illuminated Pushbutton Actuators
Momentary and maintained
Flush
Colors: white, green, red, blue
With cable (1.5 or 3 m) and plug (M12A or M8,
4-pole) or unterminated cable end (4-pole)
24 Vac/Vdc
See Page V7-T1-191
Description
Item
C30 Indicator Lights
6
Flush
Colors: white, green, red, blue, yellow
With cable (1.5 or 3 m) and plug (M12A or M8,
4-pole) or unterminated cable end (4-pole)
24 Vac/Vdc
See Page V7-T1-190
1
Description
SmartWire-DT I/O Module
For connecting digital input/output signals
to SmartWire-DT
IP67
1
1
1
4
RMQ-AFX Anti-Rotation Tab
Included with C30 compact devices
7
Cable with M12A Plug, 4-Pole
1
5
Threaded Rings
See Page V7-T1-110
8
Cable with M8A Plug, 4-Pole
1
9
Cable End Open, 4-Pole
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-187
1.7
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Compact 30 mm Pilot Devices—C30 Flat with Pigtail
Product Selection
Pushbuttons
1
30 mm Flat Front—Metal Bezel
IP66, IP67, IP69K (at front), IP65 (at rear)
Flush
1
1
Cable
Length (m)
1
1
Cable (Black) with
M12A Plug, 4-Pole
Button
Plate
1
Contact Configuration 1
NO = Normally NC = Normally
Open Contact
Closed Contact
—
1NC
Contact
Sequence 2
Contact
Diagram
1
0
2.2
Std.
Pack
Momentary
Catalog Number
Maintained
Catalog Number
1 Unit
C30C-FD-R-K01-P5
C30C-FDR-R-K01-P5
C30C-FD-S-K01-P5
C30C-FDR-S-K01-P5
C30C-FD-X-K01-P5
C30C-FDR-X-K01-P5
C30C-FD-G-K10-P5
C30C-FDR-G-K10-P5
C30C-FD-W-K10-P5
C30C-FDR-W-K10-P5
C30C-FD-X-K10-P5
C30C-FDR-X-K10-P5
C30C-FD-R-K01-P32
C30C-FDR-R-K01-P32
C30C-FD-S-K01-P32
C30C-FDR-S-K01-P32
C30C-FD-X-K01-P32
C30C-FDR-X-K01-P32
C30C-FD-G-K10-P32
C30C-FDR-G-K10-P32
C30C-FD-W-K10-P32
C30C-FDR-W-K10-P32
C30C-FD-X-K10-P32
C30C-FDR-X-K10-P32
5.5
Zw = 4.5 mm
4
1
Without
button
plate
1
1
1NO
—
1 Unit
1
0
1
3.15
5.5
4
1
1
1
Without
button
plate
Cable (Black) with
M8 Plug, 4-Pole
1
—
1NC
1 Unit
1
0
2.2
5.5
Zw = 4.5 mm
4
Without
button
plate
1
1
1
1NO
—
1 Unit
1
0
1
3.15
5.5
4
Without
button
plate
1
1
Notes
1
= Safety function implemented with positive opening as defined in IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
2 Contact sequence:
= contact closed; = contact open.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-188
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.7
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Compact 30 mm Pilot Devices—C30 Flat with Pigtail
30 mm Flat Front—Metal Bezel, continued
IP66, IP67, IP69K (at front), IP65 (at rear)
Flush
Cable
Length (m)
Cable (Black) with
M12A Plug, 4-Pole
Button
Plate
1
Contact Configuration 1
NO = Normally NC = Normally
Open Contact
Closed Contact
—
1NC
1
1
Contact
Sequence 2
Contact
Diagram
BN
0
2.2
Std.
Pack
Momentary
Catalog Number
Maintained
Catalog Number
1
1 Unit
C30C-FD-R-K01-P62
C30C-FDR-R-K01-P62
1
C30C-FD-S-K01-P62
C30C-FDR-S-K01-P62
C30C-FD-X-K01-P62
C30C-FDR-X-K01-P62
C30C-FD-X-K02-P62
C30C-FDR-X-K02-P62
5.5
Zw = 4.5 mm
BK
Without
button
plate
2NC
BN
WH
0
2.2
5.5
Zw = 4.5 mm
1NO
1NC
BK
BU
BN
WH
BK
1NO
—
BU
2.2
C30C-FD-X-K11-P62
C30C-FDR-X-K11-P62
C30C-FD-G-K10-P62
C30C-FDR-G-K10-P62
C30C-FD-W-K10-P62
C30C-FDR-W-K10-P62
1
C30C-FD-X-K10-P62
C30C-FDR-X-K10-P62
1
C30C-FD-X-K20-P62
C30C-FDR-X-K20-P62
C30C-FD-R-K01-P65
C30C-FDR-R-K01-P65
C30C-FD-S-K01-P65
C30C-FDR-S-K01-P65
1
C30C-FD-X-K01-P65
C30C-FDR-X-K01-P65
1
C30C-FD-X-K02-P65
C30C-FDR-X-K02-P65
5.5
1 Unit
BN
0
3.15
5.5
BK
Without
button
plate
2NO
BN WH
0
BK
3.5
—
1NC
3.15
5.5
BU
1 Unit
BN
0
2.2
1
1
3.15
0
1
5.5
Zw = 4.5 mm
1
1
1
1
BK
Without
button
plate
2NC
BN
WH
0
2.2
1
5.5
Zw = 4.5 mm
1NO
1NO
1NC
—
BK
BU
BN
WH
BK
BU
3.15
0
2.2
C30C-FD-X-K11-P65
1 Unit
3.15
C30C-FD-G-K10-P65
C30C-FDR-G-K10-P65
1
C30C-FD-W-K10-P65
C30C-FDR-W-K10-P65
1
C30C-FD-X-K10-P65
C30C-FDR-X-K10-P65
C30C-FD-X-K20-P65
C30C-FDR-X-K20-P65
5.5
BK
Without
button
plate
2NO
BN WH
0
BK
3.15
1
1
5.5
BN
0
C30C-FDR-X-K11-P65
5.5
1
1
BU
1
Notes
1
= Safety function implemented with positive opening as defined in IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
2 Contact sequence:
= contact closed; = contact open.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-189
1.7
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Compact 30 mm Pilot Devices—C30 Flat with Pigtail
Indicating Lights
30 mm Flat Front—Metal Bezel
LED Rated Operating Voltage: 24 Vac/Vdc
IP66, IP67, IP69K (at Front), IP65 (at Rear)
1
1
C30C-FL-B-24-P5
Cable
Length (m)
Cable (Black) with M12A Plug 4-Pole
1
Lens
LED
Contact Sequence
2
Std.
Pack
Catalog Number
1 Unit
C30C-FL-B-24-P5
LED
1
Connection Type
1
C30C-FL-G-24-P5
3
C30C-FL-R-24-P5
1
C30C-FL-W-24-P5
1
C30C-FL-B-24-P32
Cable (Black) with M8 Plug 4-Pole
1
2
1 Unit
LED
1
C30C-FL-Y-24-P5
1
C30C-FL-G-24-P32
3
C30C-FL-R-24-P32
1
C30C-FL-W-24-P32
1
C30C-FL-Y-24-P32
C30C-FL-B-24-P62
Cable (Black) with Unterminated End 4-Pole
1
WH
1 Unit
LED
1
C30C-FL-B-24-P32
1
C30C-FL-B-24-P62
C30C-FL-G-24-P62
BU
C30C-FL-R-24-P62
1
C30C-FL-W-24-P62
1
C30C-FL-Y-24-P62
1
3.5
1 Unit
C30C-FL-B-24-P65
1
C30C-FL-G-24-P65
1
C30C-FL-R-24-P65
C30C-FL-W-24-P65
1
C30C-FL-Y-24-P65
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-190
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.7
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Compact 30 mm Pilot Devices—C30 Flat with Pigtail
Illuminated Pushbutton Actuators
1
30 mm Flat Front—Metal Bezel
LED Rated Operating Voltage: 24 Vac/Vdc
IP66, IP67, IP69K (at Front), IP65 (at Rear)
Flush
Cable
Length
(m)
1
LED
—
1NC
1
1
Contact
Sequence 2
1
4
0
—
—
1NC
0
1
—
1NC
1NC
BN
C30C-FDRL-GK10-24P5
C30C-FDL-WK10-24P5
C30C-FDRL-WK10-24P5
C30C-FDL-RK01-24P32
C30C-FDRL-RK01-24P32
C30C-FDL-BK10-24P32
C30C-FDRL-BK10-24P32
C30C-FDL-GK10-24P32
C30C-FDRL-GK10-24P32
C30C-FDL-WK10-24P32
C30C-FDRL-WK10-24P32
C30C-FDL-RK01-24P62
C30C-FDRL-RK01-24P62
5.5
2.2
5.5
3.15
2.2
5.5
3.15
C30C-FDL-BK10-24P62
C30C-FDRL-BK10-24P62
C30C-FDL-GK10-24P62
C30C-FDRL-GK10-24P62
C30C-FDL-WK10-24P62
C30C-FDRL-WK10-24P62
C30C-FDL-RK01-24P65
C30C-FDRL-RK01-24P65
5.5
BU
1
WH
0
1
1
1
1
1
Zw = 4.5 mm
BN WH
BN
1
5.5
BU
0
1
1
1
0
2.2
5.5
1
1
1
1
Zw = 4.5 mm
BU
BN WH
0
LED
—
C30C-FDL-GK10-24P5
1
WH
BK
1NO
3.15
0
LED
—
C30C-FDRL-BK10-24P5
3
BK
1
C30C-FDL-BK10-24P5
Zw = 4.5 mm
LED
—
1
3
BK
1NO
C30C-FDRL-RK01-24P5
1
0
LED
1
C30C-FDL-RK01-24P5
2
1
4
Cable (Black) with
Unterminated End,
4-Pole
1
5.5
2
LED
—
1
3
4
1NO
Maintained
Catalog Number
3
LED
1
Momentary
Catalog Number
2
1
4
Cable (Black) with
M8 Plug, 4-Pole
2.2
Std.
Pack
Zw = 4.5 mm
LED
1NO
Contact
Diagram
2
LED
Cable (Black) with
M12A Plug, 4-Pole
Button
Plate
Contact Configuration 1
NO =
NC =
Normally
Normally
Open
Closed
Contact
Contact
1
BK
3.15
C30C-FDL-BK10-24P65
C30C-FDRL-BK10-24P65
C30C-FDL-GK10-24P65
C30C-FDRL-GK10-24P65
C30C-FDL-WK10-24P65
C30C-FDRL-WK10-24P65
5.5
BU
1
1
1
1
Mounting Ring Tool
1
Description
Std.
Pack
Catalog Number
For threaded ring; can be used with cordless screwdriver.
1 Unit
C22-MS
1
Notes
1
= Safety function implemented with positive opening as defined in IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
2 Contact sequence:
= contact closed; = contact open.
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-191
1.7
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Compact 30 mm Pilot Devices—C30 Flat with Pigtail
1
Technical Data
1
Global Compact 30 mm Pilot Devices—C30 Flat with Pigtail
1
1
Description
Unit
1
Selector
switches
Key-operated
buttons
Indicator
lights
IEC/EN 60947-5-5
VDE 0660
IEC/EN 60947-5-1
VDE 0660
IEC/EN 60947-5-1
VDE 0660
IEC/EN 60947-5-1
VDE 0660
IEC/EN 60947-5-1
VDE 0660
0.05
5/1
1
0.1
—
300
3600
2000
100
—
General
Standards
1
(Illuminated)
Controlled stop/
pushbuttons
emergency switching Momentary/
off buttons
maintained
Lifespan, mechanical
Operations
Operating frequency
Operations/h
x 106
Operating force
N
50
5
—
—
—
Operating torque
Nm
—
—
0.3
0.5
—
Plug tightening torque
Nm
M12 = 1, M8 = 0.6
M12 = 1, M8 = 0.6
M12 = 1, M8 = 0.6
M12 = 1, M8 = 0.6
M12 = 1, M8 = 0.6
Threaded ring tightening torque
Nm
2
2
2
2
2
Damp heat, constant
As defined in
IEC 60068-2-78
As defined in
IEC 60068-2-78
As defined in
IEC 60068-2-78
As defined in
IEC 60068-2-78
As defined in
IEC 60068-2-78
1
Damp heat, cyclic
As defined in
IEC 60068-2-30
As defined in
IEC 60068-2-30
As defined in
IEC 60068-2-30
As defined in
IEC 60068-2-30
As defined in
IEC 60068-2-30
1
Degree of protection
IP66, IP67, IP69K
(at front) IP65 (at rear)
IP66, IP67, IP69K
(at front) IP65 (at rear)
IP66, IP67, IP69K
(at front) IP65 (at rear)
IP66, IP67, IP69K
(at front) IP65 (at rear)
IP66, IP67, IP69K
(at front) IP65 (at rear)
1
Ambient air temperature 1
–25 – +70
1
1
1
1
Climatic proofing
Open
°C
–30 – +70
–30 – +70
–30 – +70
–30 – +70
Storage
°C
–30 – +80
–30 – +80
–30 – +80
–30 – +80
–30 – +80
Any
Any
Any
Any
Any
g
>30
>30
>30
>30
>30
Mounting position
1
Mechanical shock resistance for a shock
duration of 11 ms
1
Contacts
Rated impulse withstand voltage
Uimp
Vac
1
M12A/unterminated:
4000 M8: 800
M12A/unterminated:
4000 M8: 800
M12A/unterminated:
4000 M8: 800
M12A/unterminated:
4000 M8: 800
M12A/unterminated:
4000 M8: 800
Rated insulation voltage
Ui
V
1
M12A/unterminated:
250 M8: 30
M12A/unterminated:
250 M8: 30
M12A/unterminated:
250 M8: 30
M12A/unterminated:
250 M8: 30
M12A/unterminated:
250 M8: 30
Overvoltage category/degree of pollution
III/3
III/3
III/3
III/3
III/3
NO (statistically determined)
1 failure per 17 x 106
operations
1 failure per 17 x 106
operations
1 failure per 17 x 106
operations
1 failure per 17 x 106
operations
—
NC (statistically determined)
1 failure per 0.9 x 106
operations
1 failure per 0.9 x 106
operations
1 failure per 0.9 x 106
operations
1 failure per 0.9 x 106
operations
—
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Control circuit reliability at 17 Vdc/7 mA
HF
Fuse
gG/gL
A
4
4
4
4
4
Conditional short-circuit current
Iq
kA
1
1
1
1
1
Switching capacity
Ie
A
AC-15: 24 V
Ie
A
4
4
4
4
—
DC-13: 24 V
Ie
A
3
3
3
3
—
M12A/
unterminated
M12A/M8/
unterminated
M12A/M8/
unterminated
M12A/M8/
unterminated
M12A/M8/
unterminated
PUR
PUR
PUR
PUR
PUR
4.7
4.7
4.7
4.7
4.7
—
—
—
—
—
—
Rated operational current
Cable characteristics
Versions
Material
Diameter
x
mm
Actuator travel and actuation force as per
DIN EN 60947-5-1, K.5.4.1
Positive opening sequence
mm
4.65
4.65
4.65
4.65
Maximum travel
mm
5.11
5.7
5.7
5.7
—
Minimum force for positive opening
N
K01 = 15/
K11 = 20/K02 = 34
K01 = 15/
K11 = 20/K02 = 30
K01 = 15/
K11 = 20/K02 = 35
K01 = 15/
K11 = 20/K02 = 36
—
Note
1 Applicable for C22 with pigtail options.
1
V7-T1-192
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Compact 30 mm Pilot Devices—C30 Flat with Pigtail
1.7
Dimensions
1
Approximate Dimensions in mm [inches]
Pushbuttons, M12A
1
C30C-FD(R)(L)-…-P5
1
1
M20 x 1.5
1
Ø35.39 46.0
(Ø1.39) (1.81)
1
1
1.5–5.5
[0.06–0.22]
1
36.0
[1.42]
1
2.65
[0.10]
1
53.3 [2.10]
Pushbuttons, M8
1
C30C-FD(R)(L)-…-P32
1
1
M20 x 1.5
1
Ø35.39 46.0
(Ø1.39) (1.81)
1
1
1.5–5.5
[0.06–0.22]
1
36.0
[1.42]
1
2.65
[0.10]
53.3 [2.10]
1
Pushbuttons, Unterminated Cable End
1
C30C-FD(R)(L)-…-P62/-65
1
1
M20 x 1.5
1
Ø35.39 46.0
(Ø1.39) (1.81)
1
1
1.5–5.5
[0.06–0.22]
36.0
[1.42]
1
2.65
[0.10]
1
53.3 [2.10]
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-193
1.7
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Compact 30 mm Pilot Devices—C30 Flat with Pigtail
Approximate Dimensions in mm [inches]
Indicator Lights, M12A
C30C-FL-…-P5
1
1
M20 x 1.5
1
Ø35.39 46.0
(Ø1.39) (1.81)
1
1
1
1
1.5–5.5
[0.06–0.22]
36.0
[1.42]
4.82
[0.19]
2.65
[0.10]
1
53.3 [2.10]
1
Indicator Lights, M8
1
C30C-FL-…-P32
1
M20 x 1.5
1
Ø35.39 46.0
(Ø1.39) (1.81)
1
1
1
1.5–5.5
[0.06–0.22]
1
1
36.0
[1.42]
4.82
[0.19]
2.65
[0.10]
53.3 [2.10]
1
1
Indicator Lights, Unterminated Cable End
C30C-FL-…-24-P62/-P65
1
1
M20 x 1.5
1
Ø35.39 46.0
(Ø1.39) (1.81)
1
1
1
1
1.5–5.5
[0.06–0.22]
36.0
[1.42]
4.82
[0.19]
2.65
[0.10]
1
53.3 [2.10]
1
V7-T1-194
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
1.8
Contents
Description
Page
30.5 mm Square Multifunction
Watertight/Oiltight—E30
Product Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection
Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1
V7-T1-196
1
V7-T1-197
V7-T1-200
V7-T1-206
V7-T1-207
V7-T1-210
V7-T1-211
V7-T1-212
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Product Description
Features
The E30 industrial pushbutton
and indicating light line from
Eaton’s Electrical Sector
features a wide selection of
square, multifunction
operators which conveniently
mount in a standard 30.5 mm
(1-13/64 in) diameter panel
hole. Up to six input and
indicating functions can be
grouped into a single
operating head, saving
valuable panel space.
Attractive square operator
styling, coupled with custom
legending of colored buttons
and lenses and many special
function accessories, makes
E30 components ideally
suited for use on control
consoles and for a variety of
industrial OEM applications.
Type E30 control units consist
of a basic operator with one
or more buttons and lenses
and contact block selection
dependent on the specific
operator configuration.
●
●
●
Pushbutton operators will
accommodate up to four
single depth stackable
contact blocks behind each
operating button, up to
eight circuits maximum.
Indicating lights are
supplied complete with
either a transformer light
unit up to 600 Vac supply
line voltage or full voltage
light unit up to 120 Vac/Vdc
supply line voltage.
Combination pushbutton
with indicating light
operators are supplied
complete with a
transformer or full voltage
unit. Contact blocks must
be ordered separately, up to
four circuits maximum.
1
Standards and
Certifications
Die Cast Construction
Each operator has high
pressure type seals to
prevent the passage of oil
and other contaminants
through the operator into the
contact structure or panel
interior. Each operator uses a
Buna N cork gasket between
the mounting flange on the
operator and the panel to
maintain oiltightness.
●
●
UL Listed—File No.
E131568
CSA Certified—File No.
LR68551
1
1
1
1
Ingress Protection
●
●
Single and dual indicating
lights
●
UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3,
3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13
All other operators
●
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R,
4, 4X, 12, 13
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-195
1.8
1
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
Product Identification
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight
Multifunction Operator
(see Pages V7-T1-197 to V7-T1-199)
Upper Contact Block
Operating Plunger
1
Quarter Turn Screw—
Mounts Locking Ring to Operator
Gasket
Single Circuit
Contact Block
1
1
1
1
1
Buttons and Lenses Supplied
Blank or with Custom
Legend(s)
(see Pages V7-T1-200 to
V7-T1-204)
1
Retaining Nut
Secures Operator
to Panel
Lower Contact
Block Operating
Plunger
Locking Ring—Supplied with
Operator—Serves as Mount
for Light Element and
Contact Blocks
Transformer or
Full Voltage Light
Element—Supplied
with Operator
Two Circuit
Contact Block
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-196
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
1.8
Product Selection
1
Operators
1
When Ordering a Complete E30 Control Unit Specify
Catalog Number of …
Ordering Example (E30AB)
Operator
E30KB130
“START”
Button(s)
E30KB231
“STOP”
Contact block(s)
E30KLA1
1NO
Accessories (if required)
E30KLA2
1NC
1
1
1
1
1
Square Multifunction Operators
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
1
Single Button Operator
Single Button Operator/without Button (Order Button Separately)
Button Type
Required 1
1
Operation
Special Features
Catalog Number
Momentary
—
E30AA
1
1
Shown with
Extended Button
1
Two Button Operator
Button Types
Required 1
Shown with
Extended Buttons
Two Button Operator
1
Operation
Top Button
Bottom Button
Special Features
Catalog Number
Momentary
Momentary
—
E30AB
Momentary
Momentary
With mechanical
interlock
E30AC
Maintained
(all contacts)
Release
(all contacts)
—
E30AD 2
Maintained
(all contacts)
Release
(all contacts)
With mechanical
interlock
E30AP 23
1
1
1
1
1
Two Button Operator with Long (OFF) Release Bar—Includes OFF Bar/Button
(Order Other Buttons Separately)
Button Types
Required 45
Shown with Long
Release Bar
1
Two Button Operator/without Buttons (Order Buttons Separately)
1
Operation
Top Button
Bottom Button
Special Features
Catalog Number
Maintained
Maintained
—
E30AF
Maintained
Maintained
With mechanical
interlock
E30AG
Maintained
Momentary
With mechanical
interlock
E30AH
Maintained
(all contacts)
Maintained
(bottom contacts only)
Top button operates
both top and
bottom contacts
E30AK 6
1
1
1
1
1
Notes
1 Order from table on Page V7-T1-200.
2 Limited to two single circuit, one double circuit 600V or two 120V (E30KLA9) contact blocks behind each button.
3 Buttons are interlocked so that one of the two is maintained at all times.
Depressing the other button releases the maintained button and maintains the depressed button.
4 Operators are supplied as standard with red extended bar(s) marked “OFF” as shown in sketch.
For other colors or markings, contact your nearest Eaton Distributor or call our Customer Service Center 1-800-356-1243.
For replacement of standard red release bar, order E30KR100.
5 Order from table on Page V7-T1-201.
6 Limited to two single circuit, one double circuit 600V or two 120V (E30KLA9) contact blocks behind each button.
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-197
1.8
1
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
Square Multifunction Operators and Indicating Lights
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
1
Two Button Operator with (OFF) Release—Includes OFF Bar/Button(s)
(Order Other Buttons Separately)
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Button Types
Required 12
Two Button Operator
Operation
Top Button
Bottom Button
Special Features
Catalog Number
Maintained
Momentary
Release bar for
top button
E30AL
Maintained
Maintained
Individual release
bars for each button
E30AN
Maintained
with interlock
Maintained
with interlock
Individual release
bars for each button
E30AM
1
1
1
1
Shown with Release
Bar for Top Button
Two Button Operator
1
1
1
Shown with Release
Bars for Each Button
1
1
Single Indicating
Light Unit
Single Indicating Light Unit/without Lens (Order Lens Separately)
Type of Light Element
1
Transformer
(60/50 Hertz AC)
1
1
Lens Type
Required 3
Full Voltage
(60/50 Hertz AC or DC)
Voltage
Lamp
Number 4
Catalog Number
Voltage
Lamp
Number 4
Catalog Number
120
#259
E30BA
24
24PSB
E30BJ
120
120PSB
E30BM
Shown with Lens
1
1
1
1
Dual Indicating
Light Unit
Type of Light Element
Transformer
(60/50 Hertz AC)
1
Lens Types
Required 5
1
1
Dual Indicating Light Unit/without Lenses (Order Lenses Separately)
Shown with Lens
Full Voltage
(60/50 Hertz AC or DC)
Lamp
Number 4
Catalog Number
24
24PSB
E30CJ
120
120PSB
E30CM
Voltage
Lamp
Number 4
Catalog Number
Voltage
120
6PSB
E30CA
1
Notes
1 Order from table on Page V7-T1-201.
2 Operators are supplied as standard with red extended release bar(s) marked “OFF” as shown in sketch. For other colors or
markings, contact your nearest Eaton Distributor or call our Customer Service Center 1-800-356-1243. For replacement of
standard red release bar, order E30KR101.
3 Order from table on Page V7-T1-202.
4 Light units will also accept LED lamps. For LED part numbers, see table on Page V7-T1-210.
5 Order from table on Page V7-T1-203.
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-198
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
1.8
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
1
Single Button Operator Single Button Operator with Indicating Light/without Button or Lens
(Order Button and Lens Separately)
and Indicating Light
1
Type of Light Element
Button and
Lens Types
Required 1
Operation
(Bottom
Button)
Transformer
(60/50 Hertz AC)
Voltage
Momentary 120
Shown with Button
and Lens
1
Full Voltage
(60/50 Hertz AC or DC)
Voltage
6PSB
24
24PSB
E30DX3
120
120PSB
E30DF
E30DA
1
Lamp
Number 2 Catalog Number
Lamp
Number 2 Catalog Number
1
1
1
Single Button Operator
with Release Bar and
Indicating Light
1
Single Button Operator with (OFF) Release Bar and Indicating Light—
Includes OFF Bar/Button (Order Other Button and Lens Separately)
1
Type of Light Element
Button and
Lens Types
Required 1
Operation
(Bottom
Button)
Transformer
(60/50 Hertz AC)
Voltage
Maintained 120
Full Voltage
(60/50 Hertz AC or DC)
Lamp
Number 3 Catalog Number
Voltage
Lamp
Number 2 Catalog Number
6PSB
24
24PSB
E30DX13
120
120PSB
E30DM
E30DG
Shown with Button
and Lens
1
1
1
1
Two Button Operator
with Indicating Light
1
Two Button Operator with Indicating Light/without Buttons or Lens
(Order Buttons and Lens Separately)
1
Type of Light Element
Button and
Lens Types
Required 4
Transformer
(60/50 Hertz AC)
Button
Operation
Voltage
Momentary 120
Shown with Button
and Lens
Momentary 120
with
interlock
Two Button Operator
with Dual Indicating
Lights
1
Lamp
Number 2 Catalog Number
Lamp
Number 2 Catalog Number
Voltage
6PSB
24
24PSB
E30EX3
120
120PSB
E30EF
24
24PSB
E30EX13
120
120PSB
E30EM
6PSB
E30EA
E30EG
1
1
1
1
1
Two Button Operator with Dual Indicating Lights/without Buttons and Lens
Type of Light Element
Button and
Lens Types
Required 1
Transformer
(60/50 Hertz AC)
Button
Operation
Voltage
Momentary 120
Shown with Button
and Lens
Full Voltage
(60/50 Hertz AC or DC)
1
Full Voltage
(60/50 Hertz AC or DC)
Lamp
Number 2 Catalog Number
1
24
24PSB
E30JX3
1
120
120PSB
E30JF
Lamp
Number 2 Catalog Number
Voltage
6PSB
E30JA
1
1
Notes
1 Order from tables on Pages V7-T1-200 to V7-T1-204.
2 Light units will also accept LED lamps. For LED part numbers, see table on Page V7-T1-210.
3 Operators are supplied as standard with red extended release bar(s) marked “OFF” as shown in sketch. For other colors or
markings, contact your nearest Eaton Distributor or call our Customer Service Center 1-800-356-1243. For replacement of
standard red release bar, order E30KR101.
4 Order from tables on Pages V7-T1-202 and V7-T1-203.
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-199
1.8
1
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
Operator Components
Operating Buttons Only
Type A Extended
Button
Type A Buttons with Standard Markings 1
Button
Application
1
1
Color
Marking
Extended Button
Catalog Number
Black
Blank
START
Blank
Red
1
1
Green
1
1
1
Type B Extended
Button
1
Short Button
Catalog Number
Color
Marking
Extended Button
Catalog Number
Short Button
Catalog Number
E30KA100
E30KA150
Green
START
E30KA330
E30KA380
—
E30KA180
Yellow Blank
E30KA400
E30KA450
E30KA200
E30KA250
White
Blank
E30KA500
E30KA550
EMERG. STOP E30KA204
—
Gray
Blank
E30KA600
E30KA650
OFF
E30KA218
E30KA268
Brown
Blank
E30KA700
E30KA750
STOP
E30KA231
E30KA281
Orange Blank
E30KA800
E30KA950
Blank
E30KA300
E30KA350
Blue
Blank
E30KA900
E30KA950
Marking
Extended Button
Catalog Number
Short Button
Catalog Number
Type B Buttons with Standard Markings 2
Button
Application
Color
Marking
Extended Button
Catalog Number
Short Button
Catalog Number
Color
Black
Blank
E30KB100
E30KB150
Black
AUTO
E30KB101
E30KB151
REVERSE
E30KB125
E30KB175
RUN
E30KB126
E30KB176
CLOSE
E30KB102
E30KB152
SLOW
E30KB128
E30KB178
DOWN
E30KB103
E30KB153
START
E30KB130
E30KB180
1
FAST
E30KB105
E30KB155
TEST
E30KB132
E30KB182
1
FORWARD
E30KB107
E30KB157
UP
E30KB134
E30KB184
HIGH
E30KB109
E30KB159
Blank
E30KB200
E30KB250
IN
E30KB110
E30KB160
EMERG. STOP E30KB204
—
INCH
E30KB111
E30KB161
OFF
E30KB218
E30KB268
E30KB281
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
JOG
E30KB112
E30KB162
JOG FOR.
E30KB113
E30KB163
JOG REV.
E30KB114
E30KB164
LOW
E30KB115
E30KB165
Red
STOP
E30KB231
Blank
E30KB300
E30KB350
START
E30KB330
E30KB380
Yellow Blank
E30KB400
E30KB450
White
Green
LOWER
E30KB116
E30KB166
Blank
E30KB500
E30KB550
MAN
E30KB117
E30KB167
AUTO
E30KB501
—
ON
E30KB119
E30KB169
HAND
E30KB508
—
OPEN
E30KB120
E30KB170
Gray
Blank
E30KB600
E30KB650
OUT
E30KB121
E30KB171
Brown
Blank
E30KB700
E30KB750
RAISE
E30KB122
E30KB172
Orange Blank
E30KB800
E30KB850
RESET
E30KB124
E30KB174
Blue
E30KB900
E30KB950
Blank
Notes
1 Use with operator E30AA, legend characters 3/16 in (4.8 mm) high.
2 Use with operators E30AB thru AE, AL and DA thru DF, legend characters 3/16 in (4.8 mm) high.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-200
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
Type C Extended
Button
Type C Buttons with Standard Markings 1
Button
Application
Color
Marking
Extended Button
Catalog Number
Short Button
Catalog Number
Color
Marking
Extended Button
Catalog Number
Short Button
Catalog Number
Black
Blank
E30KC100
E30KC150
Black
RESET
E30KC124
E30KC174
AUTO
E30KC101
E30KC151
REVERSE
E30KC125
E30KC175
CLOSE
E30KC102
E30KC152
RUN
E30KC126
E30KC176
DOWN
E30KC103
E30KC153
SLOW
E30KC128
E30KC178
FAST
E30KC105
E30KC155
START
E30KC130
E30KC180
FORWARD
E30KC107
E30KC157
TEST
E30KC132
E30KC182
HAND
E30KC108
E30KC158
UP
E30KC134
E30KC184
HIGH
E30KC109
E30KC159
Blank
E30KC200
E30KC250
IN
E30KC110
E30KC160
OFF
E30KC218
—
INCH
E30KC111
E30KC161
STOP
E30KC231
E30KC281
JOG
E30KC112
E30KC162
JOG FOR.
E30KC113
E30KC163
JOG REV.
E30KC114
E30KC164
LOW
E30KC115
LOWER
E30KC116
MAN
ON
Red
Green
1
1
1
1
1
1
Blank
E30KC300
E30KC350
START
E30KC330
E30KC380
Yellow Blank
E30KC400
E30KC450
E30KC165
White
Blank
E30KC500
E30KC550
E30KC166
Gray
Blank
E30KC600
E30KC650
E30KC117
E30KC167
Brown
Blank
E30KC700
E30KC750
E30KC119
E30KC169
Orange Blank
E30KC800
E30KC850
OPEN
E30KC120
E30KC170
Blue
E30KC900
E30KC950
OUT
E30KC121
E30KC171
RAISE
E30KC122
E30KC172
Blank
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Note
1 Use with operators E30AF thru AK, AL thru AM and DG thru DM, legend characters 1/8 in (3.2 mm) high.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-201
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
1
Operating Buttons and Lens Only
Standard Color Buttons and Lens Marking 1
1
Black lettering on — White, Amber, Yellow and Clear.
White lettering on — Green, Red, Blue, Brown, Black, Orange and Gray.
1
Type E Button
1
Type E Buttons with Standard Markings 2
Button
Application
Color
Marking
Extended Button
Catalog Number
Color
Black
Blank
E30KE100
Black
CLOSE
E30KE102
DOWN
E30KE103
RUN
E30KE126
FAST
E30KE105
SLOW
E30KE128
FORWARD
E30KE107
START
E30KE130
HIGH
E30KE109
TEST
E30KE132
IN
E30KE110
UP
E30KE134
INCH
E30KE111
Blank
E30KE200
JOG
E30KE112
OFF
E30KE218
JOG FOR.
E30KE113
STOP
E30KE231
1
JOG REV.
E30KE114
Blank
E30KE300
LOW
E30KE115
START
E30KE330
1
LOWER
E30KE116
Yellow Blank
E30KE400
ON
E30KE119
White
Blank
E30KE500
OPEN
E30KE120
Gray
Blank
E30KE600
OUT
E30KE121
Brown
Blank
E30KE700
PHASE
E30KE122
Orange Blank
E30KE800
Blue
Blank
E30KE900
Marking
Catalog Number
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Type F Lens
1
1
E30KE124
E30KE125
Marking
Catalog Number
Color
Red
Blank
E30KF10
Green
OFF
E30KF22
MOTOR RUN
E30KF11
Amber
Blank
E30KF30
ON
E30KF12
Blue
Blank
E30KF40
POWER ON
E30KF13
Clear
Blank
E30KF50
Blank
E30KF20
White
Blank
E30KF60
MOTOR STOP
E30KF21
MOTOR RUN
E30KF23
Green
1
RESET
REVERSE
Color
1
1
Green
Extended Button
Catalog Number
Type F Lenses with Standard Markings 3
Button
Application
1
Red
Marking
Notes
1 For lenses with special markings or with standard markings but in a different color, refer to instructions on
Pages V7-T1-207 to V7-T1-209.
2 Use with operators E30EA thru EM, FA thru FM and JA thru JM, legend characters 1/8 in (3.2 mm) high.
3 Use with operators E30BA thru BY, legend characters 3/16 in (4.8 mm) high.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-202
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
1.8
Operating Lens Only
Standard Color Buttons and Lens Marking 1
1
Black lettering on — White, Amber, Yellow and Clear.
White lettering on — Green, Red, Blue, Brown, Black, Orange and Gray.
1
Type G Lens
1
Type G Lenses with Standard Markings 2
Lens
Application
Color
Marking
Catalog Number
Color
Marking
Catalog Number
Red
Blank
E30KG10
Green
OFF
E30KG22
MOTOR RUN
E30KG11
READY
E30KG23
ON
E30KG12
Amber
Blank
E30KG30
POWER ON
E30KG13
Blue
Blank
E30KG40
Blank
E30KG20
Clear
Blank
E30KG50
MOTOR RUN
E30KG24
White
Blank
E30KG60
MOTOR STOP
E30KG21
Green
1
1
1
1
1
1
Type J Lens
Lens
Application
Color
Marking
Catalog Number
Color
Marking
Catalog Number
Red
Blank
E30KJ10
Green
OFF
E30KJ22
MOTOR RUN
E30KJ11
ON
E30KJ24
ON
E30KJ12
Amber
Blank
E30KJ30
POWER ON
E30KJ13
Blue
Blank
E30KJ40
MOTOR STOP
E30KJ14
Clear
Blank
E30KJ50
Blank
E30KJ20
White
Blank
E30KJ60
MOTOR STOP
E30KJ21
MOTOR RUN
E30KJ23
Green
Type K Lenses
1
Type J Lenses with Standard Markings 3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Type K Lenses with Standard Markings (Sold in Pairs Only) 4
Color
Lens
Application
Marking
1
Left Hand
Lens
Right Hand
Lens
Left Hand
Lens
Right Hand
Lens
Catalog Number
Red
Red
ON
ON
E30KK12
Green
ON
OFF
E30KK13
OFF
OFF
E30KK22
OFF
ON
E30KK23
Green
Red
1
1
1
Notes
1 For lenses with special markings or with standard markings but in a different color, refer to instructions on
Pages V7-T1-207 to V7-T1-209.
2 Use with operators E30CA thru CM and DA thru DM, legend characters 3/16 in (4.8 mm) high except MOTOR RUN,
POWER ON and MOTOR STOP are 1/8 in (3.2 mm) high.
3 Use with operators E30EA thru EM, FA thru FM and GA thru GM, legend characters 1/8 in (3.2 mm) high.
4 Use with operators E30JA thru JW, legend characters 1/8 in (3.2 mm) high
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-203
1.8
1
Type K Lenses
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
Type K Lenses—Blank (Sold in Pairs Only)
Color
Color
1
Left Hand
Lens
Right Hand
Lens
Catalog Number
Left Hand
Lens
Right Hand
Lens
1
Red
Catalog Number
Red
E30KK10
Blue
Red
E30KK41
Green
E30KK11
Green
E30KK42
Amber
E30KK17
Amber
E30KK43
Blue
E30KK14
Blue
E30KK40
Clear
E30KK15
Clear
E30KK45
White
E30KK16
White
E30KK46
Red
E30KK21
Red
E30KK51
1
Green
E30KK20
Green
E30KK52
Amber
E30KK27
Amber
E30KK53
1
Blue
E30KK24
Blue
E30KK54
Clear
E30KK25
Clear
E30KK50
White
E30KK56
Red
E30KK61
1
1
1
Green
1
Amber
1
1
1
1
Clear
White
E30KK26
Red
E30KK31
Green
E30KK32
Green
E30KK62
Amber
E30KK30
Amber
E30KK63
Blue
E30KK34
Blue
E30KK64
Clear
E30KK35
Clear
E30KK65
White
E30KK36
White
E30KK60
White
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-204
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
Contact Blocks
Standard Contact Blocks—Molded, phenolic construction.
Enclosed silver contacts with reliability “nibs” that improve the
reliability of switching performance under dry circuit, corrosive
atmosphere and fine dust conditions. For more extreme
conditions, the logic level contact blocks described below are
recommended.
Logic Level Contact Blocks—Feature palladium contacts.
Palladium, which is more inert than gold, is well suited for
voltages and currents approaching zero. When mounted in an
enclosure rated for highly corrosive environments, logic level
contact blocks can be used where exposure to chemicals may
cause failure to other types of materials.
Mounting Limitations
See the contact block mounting limitations for Type E30
pushbutton and combination pushbutton and light operators on
this page. Mounting positions 1 thru 8 indicate single depth
contact blocks. Each of these positions can represent either a
single circuit 600 volt block or a two-circuit 120 volt block. The
two-circuit 600 volt block requires two of the numbered
positions shown.
1
Mounting Positions
Upper Contact Block Stack Operating Plunger
1
5
2
6
3
Upper Contact
Block Stack
1
Contact Block
Mounting
Positions
1
4
7
8
1
Lower Contact
Block Stack
Lower Contact Block Stack
Operating Plunger
Contact Blocks Can Be Mounted in
Positions Listed Below
Catalog Number
of Operator
1
Upper Stack
Lower Stack
E30AA thru E30AM 1
1-2-3-4
5-6-7-8
E30BA thru E30CM
None
None
E30DA thru E30DM
None
5-6-7-8
E30EA thru E30GM
2-3-4
6-7-8
E30JA thru E30JM
3-4
7-8
1
1
1
1
1
1
Contact Block Type 2
Contact Block Selection
Quick Connect Terminals 3
Pressure Terminals
Single Circuit,
Screw Terminals
Circuit
1NO
Two Circuit,
Screw Terminals
Standard
Logic Level
Standard
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
1
1
600 Vac, 250 Vdc—Single Circuit
E30KLA1
E30KLAE1
E30KLB1
1NC
E30KLA2
E30KLAE2
E30KLB2
1NO-1NC
600 Vac, 250 Vdc—Two Circuit
1
1
E30KLA3
E30KLAE3
E30KLB3
2NO
E30KLA4
E30KLAE4
E30KLB4
2NC
E30KLA5
E30KLAE5
E30KLB5
1
Two Circuit, Quick
Connect Terminals
1
1
Special Contact Operation
120 Vac Only—
Two Circuit
1
1NO-1NC
Overlapping
E30KLA6 4
—
E30KLB6 4
1
2NO
(One early closing)
E30KLA7 4
—
E30KLB7 4
1
2NC
(One late opening)
E30KLA8
—
E30KLB8
1NO-1NC
120 Vac Only—Two Circuit
1
1
E30KLA9 5
—
1
E30KLB9 5
1
Notes
1 Except operator E30AD, AJ or AK which will accommodate contact blocks 1, 2, 5 and 6 only. (See Mounting Positions above.)
2 Individually boxed contact blocks master packed 10 per carton.
3 Supplied with non-stacking screws. Limited to 2 contact blocks mounted in positions 1 and 5.
4 Do not use with maintained operators.
5 Contacts must be same polarity.
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-205
1.8
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
Accessories
Accessories
1
Description
Color/Type
Catalog Number
Collar—Snap on mounting for assembly in the field. Permits
color coding of operator heads. Size: 1-19/32 x 1-19/32 x 9/16 in.
Black
E30KR1
Red
E30KR2
Green
E30KR3
Yellow
E30KR4
White
E30KR5
1
Gray
E30KR6
Orange
E30KR8
1
Blue
E30KR9
Brown
E30KR10
1
E30KR_
1
1
1
E30KT_
1
Shroud—Similar to collar above except for extension above
Full shroud
the face of button to prevent accidental actuation of button.
(gray)
Half shroud with an extension on only half the collar may be positioned
Full
Half shroud
to protect top or bottom button.
Shroud
(gray)
E30KT6
E30KT7
1
1
1
Half
Shroud
E30KR3_
Guard—Two collars deep, removable slide prevents accidental
operation. White slide can be marked with grease pencil.
1
Red with white slide
E30KR31
Red with clear slide
E30KR32
1
1
E30KR30
Terminal Block—2 terminals, each will accommodate 2-wire
terminations.
E30KT_
Padlock Attachment for locking single button and bottom button
of multi-function operators in the depressed position. Locks NC
contacts open or early closing NO contacts closed. Cannot be used
in conjunction with collar, shroud or boot.
E30KR30
1
1
1
1
E30KT3
Transparent Boot—Guards against ingress of foreign material
and freezing rain. Note: If this boot is used in conjunction with
operator types AD or AE, an extended type button must be used
in the top position and a short button in the lower position.
E30KT_
Square Hole Plug—
Gray enameled
1
Short button
E30KT1
Extended button
E30KT2
E30KT3 1
1
1
Stainless steel
E30KT4
E30KT5
1
1
1
E30KV1
Lamp and Lens Removal Tool—Will not fit Cat. No. E30B light units
listed on Page V7-T1-198.
E30KV1
E22CW
Octagonal Wrench for mounting operators to panel.
E22CW
E30KV2
Button and Lens Removal Tool
E30KV2
1
1
1
1
Note
1 Color coordinating collars, padlock attachments or legend plates cannot be used with operators equipped with a
transparent boot.
1
V7-T1-206
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
Options
1
Markings and Legend Plates
Buttons or Lenses with NonStandard Horizontal Markings
Markings not listed as
Standard Markings below are
considered non-standard. If
more than one marking is
required on a button or lens,
order non-standard markings.
Ordering Example
Green Type B button to be
marked with non-standard
legend “ALL
ELEVATORS DOWN.”
Ordering Instructions
●
Specify catalog number of
blank button or lens of
desired color, plus suffix
“STAMP” for non-standard
or “STD” for standard
markings in order notes.
See Pages V7-T1-200 to
V7-T1-204.
●
Specify size, legend desired
and location in order notes
by alphas as shown in
example.
●
Do not exceed maximum
number of legend
characters per line.
1
How to Use the Legend
Location Figure
1
No. of Characters per Line
Lenses
Buttons
Line Position
Catalog No.: E30KB300STAMP
Letter Size: 1/8 in
Pos. A—ALL
Pos. C—ELEVATORS
Pos. F—DOWN
7
A
8
9
7
C
E
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
Legend Locations
1
Type A buttons and Type F lenses
1/8 in
(3 mm)
High
Char.
3/16 in
(5 mm)
High
Char.
G
9
9
E
8
9
J
8
8
D
9
F
9
H
D
8
9
G
8
K
9
8
9
B
8
9
F
8
9
9
B
8
9
E
8
9
J
8
9
M
8
8
8
8
9
9
K
9
B
8
9
E
8
9
J
8
9
K
8
8
9
A
8
9
D
8
9
G
8
9
K
8
9
N
8
1
1
1
Type F lens only
A
8
C
8
F
8
J
8
L
8
C
9
8
9
B
8
9
D
8
7
9
7
3/16 in
(5 mm)
High
Char.
8
8
8
A
C
F
C
9
C
6
5
B
5
D
4
6
4
3/16 in
(5 mm)
High
Char.
A
C
E
8
B
8
8
D
8
1
5
B
5
D
1
1
Type K buttons
5
5
B
6
3/16 in
(5 mm)
High
Char.
A
C
6
B
1/8 in
(3 mm)
High
Char.
B 4
E 4
A 4
C 4
D 4
F 4
3/16 in
(5 mm)
High
Char.
1
B 4
E 4
9
B
1
8
7
7
A
C
8
8
3/16 in
(5 mm)
High
Char.
9
B
1
8
1
1
Standard Markings
AUTO
CLOSE
DOWN
EMERG. STOP
FAST
FORWARD
1
1
Type E buttons and Type J lenses
1/8 in
(3 mm)
High
Char.
1
1
6 C
Type D buttons
1/8 in
(3 mm)
High
Char.
1
8
Type C buttons
1/8 in
(3 mm)
High
Char.
1
1
Type B buttons and Type G lenses
1/8 in
(3 mm)
High
Char.
1
HAND
HIGH
IN
INCH
JOG
JOG FOR.
JOG REV.
LOW
LOWER
MAN.
OFF
ON
OPEN
OUT
RAISE
RESET
REVERSE
RUN
SLOW
START
STOP
TEST
UP
MOTOR RUN
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
MOTOR STOP
POWER ON
READY
V7-T1-207
1
1.8
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
Legend Arrangements and Legend Locations
Legend plates
E30KM1 or KM11
Legend plates
E30KM5 or KM15
B
1
H
G
Legend plates
E30KM4 or KM14
1
H
B
A
K
B
1
1
Legend plates
E30KM6 or KM16
D
M
A
J
B
K
Legend plates
E30KM3 or KM13
B
1
F
M
C
C
L
D
M
D
1
1
A
E
B
F
Legend plates
E30KM2 or KM12
G
C
B
B
F
M
A
E
L
B
F
M
D
1
1
B
F
F
1
1
Legend Plates E30KN76 or KN76B
LINE B
1
1
1
L
I
N
E
L
I
N
E
A
C
Legend plates
E30KN76 or KN76B
1/8 in character
size only with a maximum
of six characters.
1
1
1
Maximum Number and Size of Permissible Legend Characters of Custom Stamped Legend Plates
Size and Maximum Number of Characters Per Line
One Span
1
1
1
1
1
Two Span
Three Span
Type
No.of
Lines
3/32 in
(2.5 mm)
1/8 in
(3 mm)
3/16 in
(5 mm)
3/32 in
(2.5 mm)
1/8 in
(3 mm)
3/16 in
(5 mm)
3/32 in
(2.5 mm)
1/8 in
(3 mm)
3/16 in
(5 mm)
Standard
1
13
10
10
30
22
22
47
34
34
Large
1
13
10
10
30
23
23
47
36
36
2
13
10
10
30
23
23
47
36
36
Characters available for non-standard markings
3/32 in (2.5 mm)—1/8 in (3 mm)—3/16 in (5 mm)
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
./—,
1234567890
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-208
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
Buttons or Lenses with Non-Standard Vertical Markings
Ordering Instructions
●
Specify catalog number
of blank button or lens of
desired color, selected
from listings on Pages
V7-T1-200 to V7-T1-204.
●
Specify size, legend
desired, location and state
“vertically marked” in
order notes.
Note: Specify either 1/8 or 3/16 in
(3.2 or 4.8 mm) character height.
Do not exceed maximum number
of characters as outlined in table
below.
Ordering Example:
Green Type K button to be
marked with “RUN” “ON.”
Legend Plates
Legend plates for Type E30
compact pushbutton and
indicating light operators
hook directly onto the
operator and are clamped in
place when the operator
locking nut behind the panel
is secured.
Two and three span plates
are designed for use where
two or more operators are
mounted adjacent to each
other on minimum
horizontal mounting
centers. These legend plates
mount in the same manner as
single span units.
1
When Ordering Legend Plates
with Markings
●
Catalog number of blank
legend plate
●
Insert the following in
order notes:
●
Legends required
●
Size of characters—
3/32, 1/8, 3/16 in (2.4,
3.2, 4.8 mm)
●
Positions of legends on
one line standard and
two line large legend
plates by alphas as
shown in sketches on
following page.
Ordering Example:
Three span legend plate to be
marked “MASTER
CONTROL”, “STATION A”
and “STATION B.”
Catalog No.: E30KM3STAMP
Letter Size: 1/8 in (3.2 mm)
Pos. C—MASTER CONTROL
Pos. B—STATION A
Pos. F—STATION B
Type
Standard
1
1
1
1
1
One Span
Catalog Number
1
E30KM1
1
Maximum Number of Characters
Maximum Number of Characters
Description
Type
1/8 in (3.2 mm)
3/16 in (4.8 mm)
Buttons
A
7
5
B
7
5
C
4
3
D
5
3
E
7
5
Lenses
1
1
Black
Standard— One Span
1
1
Blank Legend Plates and Legend Plates
with Markings
Catalog No.: E30KK20STAMP
Letter Size: 3/16 in (4.8 mm)
Vertically Marked
Pos. B—RUN
Pos. E—ON
1
F
7
5
G
7
5
J
7
5
K
3
2
Large—One Span
Large
1
E30KM4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-209
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
1
Replacement Parts
1
Replacement Light Units for E30 Components
1
Voltage
AC and DC
1
Full Voltage Type
1
Part Numbers—Receptacles without Lamps
Single
Indicating Light
Dual
Indicating Light
Single Light
Single Pushbutton
Single Light
Dual Pushbutton
Dual Light
Dual Pushbutton
6V
57-2579-3A
57-2568A
57-2568A
57-2579-3A
57-2567
12V
57-2579-3A
57-2568A
57-2568A
57-2579-3A
57-2567
18/24V
57-2579-3A
57-2568A
57-2568A
57-2579-3A
57-2567
28V
57-2579-3A
57-2568A
57-2568A
57-2579-3A
57-2567
1
32V
57-2579-3A
57-2568-2A
57-2568-2A
—
57-2567
48V
57-2579-3A
57-2568A
57-2568A
57-2579-3A
57-2567
1
120V
57-2579-3A
57-2568A
57-2568A
57-2579-3A
57-2567
120V
42-2672A
42-2663A
42-2663A
42-2671A
42-2664A
208V
42-2672-2A
42-2663-2A
42-2663-2A
42-2671-2A
42-2664-2A
240V
42-2672-3A
42-2663-3A
42-2663-3A
42-2671-3A
42-2664-3A
1
380V
42-2672-4A
42-2663-4A
42-2663-4A
42-2671-4A
42-2664-4A
480V
42-2672-5A
42-2663-5A
42-2663-5A
42-2671-5A
42-2664-5A
1
600V
42-2672-6A
42-2663-6A
42-2663-6A
42-2671-6A
42-2664-6A
1
Transformer Type
1
1
Description and Part Numbers—Related Parts
1
1
1
1
1
Inner lens
28-1008
28-1010
28-1010
28-1010
28-1010
Retaining nut
15-1885
15-1885
15-1885
15-1885
15-1885
Gasket
16-2092
16-2092
16-2092
16-2092
16-2092
Locking ring
52-1116
52-1116
52-1116
52-1116
52-1116
Replacement Lamps for E30 Illuminated Operators
Mfg. Lamp Type
Voltage
Base Style
Application
Part Number
6PSB
6V
T2 slide
E30 transformer and full voltage
28-1022
12PSB
12V
T2 slide
E30 full voltage
28-1025
24PSB
24V
T2 slide
E30 full voltage
28-1026
28PSB
28V
T2 slide
E30 full voltage
28-1027
1
48PSB
48V
T2 slide
E30 full voltage
28-1028
60PSB
60V
T2 slide
E30 full voltage
28-1598
1
120PSB
120V
T2 slide
E30 full voltage
28-1029
#259
6.3V
T3-1/4 wedge
E30 single transformer
28-949
1
1
1
1
1
Replacement Lamps—Incandescent and LED
Incandescent Lamps
Eaton’s
Part Number
Eaton’s Part Number
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue 1
6PSB
T2 slide
28-1022
35-1523
35-1523-2
35-1523-3
35-1523-17
12PSB
T2 slide
28-1025
35-1523-11
35-1523-12
35-1523-13
35-1523-18
24
24PSB
T2 slide
28-1026
35-1523-4
35-1523-5
35-1523-6
35-1523-19
28
28PSB
T2 slide
28-1027
35-1523-4
35-1523-5
35-1523-6
35-1523-19
48
48PSB
T2 slide
28-1028
35-1523-14
35-1523-15
35-1523-16
35-1523-20
120
120PSB
T2 slide
28-1029
35-1523-7
35-1523-8
35-1523-9
35-1523-21
Manufacturer’s
Part Number
6
1
12
1
1
1
1
LED Lamps
Base
Style
Lamp
Voltage
Note
1 E30 blue LED bulbs may not provide sufficient intensity for some applications.
1
V7-T1-210
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
1.8
Technical Data and Specifications
1
Operator Specifications
Description
1
Specification
1
Climate Conditions
Operating
–20° to 150°F (–29° to 65°C)
1
Terminals
Terminals are saddle clamp type for 2 stranded or solid wires up to 12 AWG (4.0 mm2)
Light units
Contact block
Torque—7 lb-in (0.8 Nm)
1
Terminals are saddle clamp type for 2 stranded or solid wires up to 12 AWG (4.0 mm2)
Torque—7 lb-in (0.8 Nm)
1
Materials
Operator
Zinc base die casting with a copper-nickel-chrome plated finish
Withstands the 200 hr. salt spray test in accordance with MIL Spec. QQ-M-151A and NEMA 4X testing.
Internal parts
Including shafts, washers and springs, are made of stainless steel
Buttons and lenses
Colorfast, wear resistant, molded acetal resin
Contact blocks
Made of molded, heat resistant, mineral filled phenolic
Contact block plungers are molded of nylon filled phenolic
Contacts are silver
Reliability nibs
These nibs combine a scrubbing action with high pressure density when the contacts are closed
They push through particles and films found on contact surfaces in industrial environments
Reliability nibs self-adjust to the application—dry circuit, normal or heavy-duty
1
1
1
1
1
1
Reliability Nibs
1
1
Heavy-Duty
Medium Duty
Dry Circuit
1
Electrical Ratings
1
Contact Blocks
1
Meet or Exceed NEMA Contact Rating Designation A600 and P300
Vac A600
1
Vdc P300
Description
120V
240V
480V
600V
24/28V
125V
250V
Make and emergency
interrupting capacity (Amps)
60
30
15
12
5.73
1.1
0.55
1
Normal load break (Amps)
6
3
1.5
1.2
5.73
1.1
0.55
1
Continuous current (Amps)
10
10
10
10
5
5
5
●
●
●
●
1
UL A600/P300 nominal connect 10A
1NO, 1NC, 2NO, 2NC, 1NO-1NC, early make, late break and
overlapping configurations
Mechanical positive drive operation on NC contacts
Palladium alloy contact for logic level or highly corrosive
environments
1
1
1
1
Maximum Ratings for Logic Level and
Hostile Atmosphere Application
Light Unit
Description
Specification
Description
Maximum amperes
0.5A 1
Bulbs—Average Life
Maximum volts
120 Vac/Vdc
Transformer type
1
Specification
1
20,000 hrs.
Resistor/direct voltage type
2,500 hrs. min. at rated voltage
LED
60,000 to 100,000 hrs.
1
1
Note
1 Logic level contact blocks are UL A600/P500 rated per table above.
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1
V7-T1-211
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
1
Dimensions
1
Pushbutton Operators
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1
0.53
(13.5)
1.75
(44.5)
1
1
1
0.81
(20.6)
1.72
(43.7)
1.72
(43.7)
1.75
(44.5)
Plunger
2 Circ.
Extends to
Cont. Blocks 0.25 (6.4)
1.13
(28.7)
1
1
Combination Pushbutton and Indicating Light Operators
0.53
(13.5)
0.81
(20.6)
1.13
(28.7)
0.88
(22.4)
1.88
(47.8)
1.88
(47.8)
1.47
(37.3) 0.63 (16)
Std.
Square
Button
0.78 (19.8) Ext. Button
1.47
(37.3)
Square
Panel
0.88 0.88
0.06 (1.5) Min.
0.25 (6.4) Max. (22.4) (22.4)
1 Circ.
Cont. Blocks
1.72
(43.7)
0.84
(21.3)
Operator
Types E30EA–
E30GM
Operator
Types E30JA–
E30JW
Transformer
or Full Voltage
Light Element
Panel
Plungers
0.06 (1.5) Min.
Extended
0.25 (6.4) Max. to 0.25 (6.4)
1
Combination Pushbutton and Indicating Light Operators
1
0.53
(13.5)
1.75
(44.5)
1
1.13
(28.7)
1
1
1.47
(37.3)
Square
1
1
1.72
(43.7)
Full Voltage
Types DF,
DM and DX
0.88
(22.4)
1.88
(47.8)
1
0.81
(20.6)
Transformer
Types DA – DL
0.84
(21.3)
0.53
(13.5)
1.13
(28.7)
0.81
(20.6)
1.72
(43.7)
0.88
(22.4)
1.88
(47.8)
Operator
Types E30BA–
E30BM
Operator
Types E30CA–
E30CM
1.47
(37.3)
Square
Plunger Extends
Panel
to 0.25 (6.4) on
0.06 (1.5) Min.
0.25 (6.4) Max. Contact Blocks
0.84
(21.3)
Panel
0.06 (1.5) Min.
0.25 (6.4) Max.
Drilling Dimensions—Minimum Spacing 12
Padlocking Attachment and Half Shroud E30KT7
1.63 a
(41.3)
0.69
(17.5)
1
0.5 (12.7)
1
2.25 a
(57)
0.75
(19.1)
1
1.59
(40.4) 0.56
(14.2)
1.13
(28.7)
1.44
(36.6)
1
0.11 (2.8)
Max.
1
Drill .14
(3.5)
0.6
(15)
1
0.31 (7.9)
Dia. Hole
ø 1.20 (30.5)
Notes
1 Dimensions shown allow adequate space for the addition of one or two high legend plates
and color coordinating collars.
2 Locating nib hole or notch is 0.136 in (3.5 mm) drill. Alternate to drilling mounting holes use
Greenlee Tool Co. punch (No. 730-S) to punch the hole and (No. 730-K) to punch the notch.
Legend Plates
4.69 (119.1) Three Span
1
3.06 (77.7) Two Span
1.44
(36.6)
One Span
1
1
1.75
(44.5)
0.88 (22.4) 0.88 (22.4)
1
1
Indicating Light Operators
0.78
(19.8) 0.39
(9.9)
1
Large
1
Standard
0.08 (1.9)
0.05 (1.3)
0.02
(0.5)
1
V7-T1-212
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Contents
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Description
Page
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection
Point-of-Purchase Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-Illuminated Momentary
Pushbutton Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated Momentary Pushbutton Units .
Indicating Light Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated Pushbuttons and
Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Push-Pull Emergency Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated Push-Pull Units . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Potentiometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Push-Pull Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selector Switch Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selector Switch Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selector Switch Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated Selector Switch Operators . . . .
Joystick Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Joysticks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roto-Push Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roto-Push Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V7-T1-214
V7-T1-214
V7-T1-215
Features
The 30.5 mm pushbutton line
features a zinc die cast
construction with chromeplated housing and mounting
nut. The same durable
construction is also available
with the corrosive resistant
E34 line of pushbuttons.
See E34 section on Pages
V7-T1-284 to V7-T1-325.
●
●
●
●
Heavy-duty zinc die cast
construction
Enclosed silver contacts
with reliability nibs
Diaphragm seals with
drainage holes
Grounding nibs on the
operator casing
Benefits
●
●
●
Reliability nibs improve
contact reliability even
under dry circuit and fine
dust conditions
Drainage holes prevent
buildup of liquid inside the
operator which can prevent
operation in freezing
environments
Grounding nibs bit through
paint and other coatings to
provide secure ground
Application Description
Contact Operation
Slow make and break. All
normally closed contacts
have positive opening
operation, i.e., normally closed
contacts are forced open in
the event of contact weld or
spring breakage.
1
1
1
V7-T1-217
V7-T1-218
V7-T1-219
V7-T1-222
V7-T1-223
V7-T1-224
V7-T1-226
V7-T1-229
V7-T1-232
V7-T1-233
V7-T1-237
V7-T1-238
V7-T1-241
V7-T1-244
V7-T1-245
V7-T1-246
V7-T1-249
V7-T1-250
V7-T1-255
V7-T1-260
V7-T1-269
V7-T1-271
V7-T1-274
Drawings
Online
Product Description
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Standards and
Certifications
●
●
●
CE EN 60947-5-1 and
60947-5-5
UL 508—File No. 131568
CSA C22.2 No. 14—File
No. LR68551
1
1
1
1
Ingress Protection
1
When mounted in similarly
rated enclosure—
1
●
●
Standard indicating lights
●
UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3,
3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13
●
IEC IP65
Most other operators
●
UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3,
3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
●
IEC IP65
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-213
1
1
1
1
1
1.9
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Product Overview
Reliability Nibs
Grounding Nibs
Eaton’s contact blocks
feature enclosed silver
contacts with pointed
“reliability nibs” for reliable
performance from logic level
up to 600V. To ensure reliable
switching, nibs bite through
oxide which can form on silver
contacts, eliminating the
need for expensive logic level
blocks for most applications.
10250T line operators have
“grounding nibs”—four
metal points on the operator
casting designed to bite
through most paints and
other coatings on metal
panels to enhance the ground
connection when the operator
is securely tightened.
Grounding Nibs
Grounding
Nibs
Reliability Nibs
1
1
Dry Circuit
1
1
Medium Duty
Diaphragm Seal with
Drainage Holes
Liquid Drainage
Eaton’s pushbutton operators
offer front of panel drainage
via holes in the operator
bushing. Hidden from view by
the mounting nut, these
holes prevent buildup of liquid
inside the operator, which
can prevent operation in
freezing environments.
The holes also provide a route
for escaping liquid in high
pressure washdowns,
effectively relieving pressure
from the internal diaphragm
seal, ensuring reliable sealing
in applications even beyond
NEMA 4.
Diaphragm Seal
1
Foam Neoprene
Panel Sealing Gasket
Drainage Hole
Heavy-Duty
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Flexible
Diaphragm
Reliability nibs improve
performance in dry circuit,
corrosive, fine dust and other
contaminated atmospheres.
Under normal environmental
conditions, the minimum
operational voltage is 5V and
the minimum operational
current is 1 mA, AC/DC. For
operation under a wider range
of environmental conditions,
logic level contact blocks with
inert palladium tipped
contacts are recommended.
Stainless
Steel
Operating
Spring
Colorfast
Molded
Button
Drainage Hole
Mounting Nut
1
1
1
Product Identification
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Series
Terminal Clamps
Shipped Ready to Wire
1
1
1
1
1
1
Mounting Nut
1
V7-T1-214
Legend Plate
Operator
Color Coded Plungers
Red = NC Green = NO
Stackable Contact
Blocks up to 12 Circuits
per Operator
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Catalog Number Selection
1
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons
10250T 10 1 – 1
1
1
1
Operator
10 = Flush
11 = Extended
12 = 40 mm mushroom
17 = 65 mm mushroom
50 = 1/2 shroud vertical mount
51 = 1/2 shroud horizontal mount
Blank
1
2
3
51
53
Button Color
1 = Black
5 = Gray
2 = Red
6 = White
3 = Green
8 = Blue
4 = Yellow
9 = Orange
1
Circuit
= Operator only
= 1NO-1NC
= 2NO
= 2NC
= 1NC
= 1NO
1
1
1
1
Illuminated and Non-Illuminated Push-Pulls
10250T 5 63 C47
Operator
5 = Two-position maintained
4 = Three-position mom push-mom pull
9 = Three-position mt push-mom pull
10 = Three-position mom push-mom pull
Incandescent
Light Unit
Blank = Non-illuminated
89 = 24V/XFR
63 = 120V/XFR
64 = 208V/XFR
65 = 240V/XFR
82 = 277V/XFR
66 = 380V/XFR
67 = 480V/XFR
68 = 600V/XFR
69 = 6V/FV
70 = 12V/FV
79 = 24V/FV
83 = 32V/FV
80 = 120V/RES
81 = 240V/RES
LED
Light Unit
Blank = Non-illuminated
89L = 24V/XFR
63L = 120V/XFR
64L = 208V/XFR
65L = 240V/XFR
82L = 277V/XFR
66L = 380V/XFR
67L = 480V/XFR
68L = 600V/XFR
97L = Full voltage
– 1
1
1
1
LED Voltage
Blank = Non-illuminated
Blank = Incandescent
06 = 6 Vac/Vdc
12 = 12 Vac/Vdc
24 = 24 Vac/Vdc
48 = 48 Vac/Vdc
60 = 60 Vac/Vdc
2A = 120 Vac
2D = 120 Vdc
B60
B62
B63
B61
B64
J60
J62
J63
J61
J64
Non-Illuminated
Button
= Black 40 mm
= Red 40 mm
= Red 40 mm—“E” STOP
= Green 40 mm
= Blue 40 mm
= Black 65 mm
= Red 65 mm
= Red 65 mm—“E” STOP
= Green 65 mm
= Yellow 65 mm
Incandescent
C47 =
C53 =
C48 =
C49 =
C50 =
C51 =
C52 =
C57 =
C63 =
C58 =
C59 =
C64 =
C60 =
C61 =
C62 =
C65 =
C66 =
C67 =
Blank =
1=
2=
3=
51 =
53 =
Circuit
Operator only
1NO-1NC
2NO
2NC
1NC
1NO
1
1
1
1
1
Illuminated
LED
Lens Type
RD = Red 40 mm
ED = Red 40 mm—“E” STOP
GD = Green 40 mm
LD = Blue 40 mm
AD = Amber 40 mm
WD = White 40 mm
— = Clear 40 mm
RS = Red side light
ES = Red side light—“E” STOP
GS = Green side light
LS = Blue side light
AS = Amber side light
YS = Yellow side light
WS = White side light
— = Clear side light
RH = Red heavy-duty
GH = Green heavy-duty
AH = Amber heavy-duty
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Note
1 Add X at end of catalog number to receive parts assembled from factory.
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-215
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1
Illuminated Pushbuttons
10250T 416 C21
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Incandescent Light Unit
416 = 24V/XFR
411 = 120V/XFR
412 = 240V/XFR
419 = 277V/XFR
413 = 380V/XFR
414 = 480V/XFR
415 = 600V/XFR
473 = 6V/FV
474 = 12V/FV
476 = 24V/FV
477 = 32V/FV
478 = 48V/FV
471 = 120V/RES
472 = 240V/RES
LED Light Unit
397L = Full voltage
416L = 24V/XFR
411L = 120V/XFR
412L = 240V/XFR
419L = 277V/XFR
413L = 380V/XFR
414L = 480V/XFR
415L = 600V/XFR
Incandescent Lens Color
C21 = Red
C22 = Green
C23 = Yellow
C26 = White
C24 = Blue
C43 = Amber
C25 = Clear
LED Lens Color
RD = Red
GD = Green
YD = Yellow
WD = White
LD = Blue
AD = Amber
– 1
1
LED Voltage
Blank = Incandescent
06 = 6 Vac/Vdc
12 = 12 Vac/Vdc
24 = 24 Vac/Vdc
48 = 48 Vac/Vdc
60 = 60 Vac/Vdc
2A = 120 Vac
2D = 120 Vdc
Blank =
1=
2=
3=
51 =
53 =
Circuit
Operator only
1NO-1NC
2NO
2NC
1NC
1NO
Standard Indicating Lights, PresTest and Master Test
10250T 203N C1N
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Light Unit Type
Standard—Incandescent
181N = 120V/XFR
182N = 240V/XFR
198N = 277V/XFR
183N = 380V/XFR
184N = 480V/XFR
185N = 600V/XFR
203N = 6V/FV
204N = 12V/FV
206N = 24V/FV
207N = 32V/FV
208N = 48V/FV
201N = 120V/RES
202N = 240V/RES
226N = 120V/neon
227N = 240V/neon
PresTest—Incandescent
221N = 120V/XFR
222N = 240V/XFR
223N = 380V/XFR
224N = 480V/XFR
225N = 600V/XFR
232N = 6V/FV
233N = 12V/FV
235N = 24V/FV
238N = 32V/FV
239N = 48V/FV
231N = 120V/RES
240N = 240V/RES
Master Test—Incandescent
187N = 120V/XFR
189N = 240 Vac—SS
Standard—LED
181L = 120V/XFR
182L = 240V/XFR
198L = 277V/XFR
183L = 380V/XFR
184L = 480V/XFR
185L = 600V/XFR
197L = Full voltage
PresTest—LED
221L = 120V/XFR
222L = 240V/XFR
223L = 380V/XFR
224L = 480V/XFR
225L = 600V/XFR
297L = Full voltage
LED Voltage
Blank = Incandescent
06 = 6 Vac/Vdc
12 = 12 Vac/Vdc
24 = 24 Vac/Vdc
48 = 48 Vac/Vdc
60 = 60 Vac/Vdc
2A = 120 Vac
2D = 120 Vdc
Plastic
Glass
Lens Color
Standard/Master—Incandescent
C1N =
C7N = Red
C2N =
C8N = Green
C3N =
— = Yellow
C6N =
C12N = White
C4N =
C10N = Blue
C19N =
C9N = Amber
C5N =
C11N = Clear
PresTest—Incandescent
C21 =
C13N = Red
C22 =
C14N = Green
C23 =
— = Yellow
C26 =
C18N = White
C24 =
C16N = Blue
C43 =
C15N = Amber
C25 =
C17N = Clear
Plastic
Glass
Lens Color
Standard/Master/PresTest—LED
RP =
RG = Red
GP =
GG = Green
YP =
— = Yellow
WP =
WG = White
LP =
LG = Blue
AP =
AG = Amber
LED Voltage
Blank = Incandescent
06 = 6 Vac/Vdc
12 = 12 Vac/Vdc
24 = 24 Vac/Vdc
48 = 48 Vac/Vdc
60 = 60 Vac/Vdc
2A = 120 Vac
Note
1 Add X at end of catalog number to receive parts assembled from factory.
1
1
1
V7-T1-216
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Product Selection
1
Point-of-Purchase Packaging
1
Point-of-Purchase
Packaged Pilot Device
10250T Point-of-Purchase Packaged Pilot Devices
Product
Description
Catalog Number
1
Emergency Stop Operators
Red non-illuminated
push-pull
1NO-1NC contact block. Also includes two square engraved
legend plates: EMERG. STOP and STOP.
10250T5B62-1-POP
1
Red mushroom
pushbutton
1NO-1NC contact block. Also includes two square engraved
legend plates: EMERG. STOP and STOP.
10250T32R-POP
1
Red jumbo
mushroom pushbutton
Engraved EMERG. STOP with 1NO-1NC contact block.
10250T33-POP
1
1
Momentary Pushbuttons
Black flush pushbutton
1NO-1NC contact block. Also includes two square engraved
legend plates: START and JOG.
10250T30B-POP
1NO-1NC contact block. Also includes one square engraved
legend plate: STOP.
10250T31R-POP
Red indicating light
Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc with two extra lenses: Green and amber.
Also includes two square engraved legend plates: RUN and JOG.
10250T206NC1N-POP
Red indicating light
Resistor 120 Vac/Vdc with two extra lenses: Green and Amber.
Also includes one square engraved legend plate: RUN and JOG.
10250T34R-POP
Red illuminating
pushbutton
Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc with 1NO-1NC contact block and two
extra lenses: Green and amber. Also includes one square
engraved legend plate: POWER ON.
10250T476C21-1-POP
Red illuminating
pushbutton
Resistor 120 Vac/Vdc with 1NO-1NC contact block and two
extra lenses: Green and amber. Also includes one square
engraved legend plate: POWER ON.
10250T411C21-1-POP
Black knob two-position
selector switch
1NO-1NC contact block. Also includes three square engraved
legend plates: OFF/ON, HAND/AUTO and RUN/JOG.
10250T20KB-POP
1
Black knob three-position
selector switch
2NO-2NC contact blocks. Also includes 1 square engraved
legend plate: HAND/OFF/AUTO.
10250T22KB-POP
1
Black knob three-position
selector switch
1NO-1NC contact block. Also includes legend plate:
HAND/OFF/AUTO
10250T21KB-POP
1
Green flush pushbutton
Red extended
pushbutton
1
10250T30G-POP
1
Indicating Lights
1
1
1
Illuminated Pushbuttons
1
1
1
Selector Switches
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-217
1.9
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Non-Illuminated Momentary Pushbutton Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Flush Button
Pushbutton Units—Flush, Extended, Mushroom Head or Jumbo Mushroom Head Operators
1
Contact
Type
Button Color
Flush Button
Catalog Number
Extended Button
Catalog Number
Mushroom Button
Catalog Number
Jumbo Mushroom
Catalog Number
1
1NO
Black
10250T23B
10250T25B
10250T26B
10250T27B
Red
10250T23R
10250T112-53
10250T122-53
10250T172-53
Green
10250T23G
10250T25G
10250T26G
10250T27G
Yellow
10250T23Y
10250T25Y
10250T26Y
10250T27Y
10250T17213-53
1
Extended Button
1
1NC
1
1
Mushroom Button
1
1NO-1NC
1
1
Jumbo Mushroom
1
2NO
1
1
1
2NC
1
1
1
Red—Engraved EMERG. STOP
—
—
—
Black
10250T101-51
10250T111-51
10250T121-51
10250T171-51
Red
10250T102-51
10250T25R
10250T26R
10250T27R
Green
10250T103-51
10250T113-51
10250T123-51
10250T173-51
Yellow
10250T104-51
10250T120-51
10250T124-51
10250T174-51
Red—Engraved EMERG. STOP
—
—
—
10250T29
Black
10250T30B
10250T31B
10250T32B
10250T33B
Red
10250T30R
10250T31R
10250T32R
10250T33R
Green
10250T30G
10250T31G
10250T32G
10250T33G
Yellow
10250T30Y
10250T31Y
10250T32Y
10250T33Y
Red—Engraved EMERG. STOP
—
—
—
10250T33
Black
10250T101-2
10250T111-2
10250T121-2
10250T171-2
Red
10250T102-2
10250T112-2
10250T122-2
10250T172-2
Green
10250T103-2
10250T113-2
10250T123-2
10250T173-2
Yellow
10250T104-2
10250T120-2
10250T124-2
10250T174-2
Red—Engraved EMERG. STOP
—
—
—
10250T17213-2
Black
10250T101-3
10250T111-3
10250T121-3
10250T171-3
Red
10250T102-3
10250T112-3
10250T122-3
10250T172-3
Green
10250T103-3
10250T113-3
10250T123-3
10250T173-3
Yellow
10250T104-3
10250T120-3
10250T124-3
10250T174-3
Red—Engraved EMERG. STOP
—
—
—
10250T17213-3
Note
1 Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet light applications.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-218
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Pushbuttons
1
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
1
Momentary Pushbutton Operators, Non-illuminated
10250T10_
10250T11_
10250T5_
10250T12_
10250T17_
Button
Color
Catalog Number
Flush button 1
Black
10250T101
Red
10250T102
Green
10250T103
Yellow
10250T104
Gray
10250T105
White
10250T106
Blue
10250T108
Orange
10250T109
Black
10250T111
Red
10250T112
Green
10250T113
Yellow
10250T120
White
10250T116
Blue
10250T118
Orange
10250T119
Extended button
Half shrouded button
Mushroom button
Jumbo mushroom button 2
Note: To order complete assembled unit
using one composite catalog number,
add contact block and legend plate suffix
to the end of operator catalog number.
Example: 10250T101-1TS33
1
1
1
1
1
1
Operator
10250T101
1
1
1
Vertical
Horizontal
Black
10250T501
10250T511
Red
10250T502
10250T512
Green
10250T503
10250T513
Yellow
10250T504
10250T514
Gray
10250T505
10250T515
White
10250T506
10250T516
Blue
10250T508
10250T518
Orange
10250T509
10250T519
Black
10250T121
Red
10250T122
Green
10250T123
Yellow
10250T124
Blue
10250T129
Black
10250T171
Red
10250T172
Red (EMERG. STOP)
10250T17213
Green
10250T173
Yellow
10250T174
Black
10250ED1164-2
Red
10250ED1164-3
Green
10250ED1164-4
Yellow
10250ED1164-5
Clear
10250ED1164
1
1
Contact Block
10250T1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Legend Plate
10250TS33
1
1
1
1
1
10250ED1164_
Low operating force—
jumbo mushroom 23
1
1
1
1
Notes
1 To order operator with factory assembled extended retaining nut, 10250TA12, for thick panel applications,
add suffix letter E to listed catalog number. Example: 10250T101E.
2 Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet light applications.
3 Operating force—Standard = 2.4 lb; low force = 1.6 lb.
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1
1
V7-T1-219
1.9
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
10250TA_
Mechanically Interlocked Pushbutton Operators
Description
Catalog Number
Black flush and green flush
10250TA66
Black flush and long red
10250TA67
1
Black flush and red mushroom head
10250TA68
Black flush and lock-down red mushroom head
10250TA69 1
1
Black flush and red jumbo mushroom head
10250TA76
Green flush and long red
10250TA72
Black long and long red
10250TA73
Green flush and red mushroom head
10250TA77
Green flush and black flush
10250TA75
1
1
1
1
1
Lockout Pushbutton Operators with Padlock Attachments
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
1
The following pushbutton and
mushroom operators include
an integral padlock
attachment for applications
requiring lockout/tagout of
specific machine functions.
They are available in styles
which allow locking of a
button in the down position
1
1
1
(stopped position) or locking a
button in the up position (to
prevent starting). Select the
“Hand” latch type which
functions as a momentary
pushbutton until the operator
presses the button and
moves the padlock
attachment into position for
locking, or choose the
“Spring Loaded” latch type
where the padlock
attachment springs into place
when the button is pressed.
Units accept a customer
supplied 1/4 in padlock.
1
1
10250TA16
1
Padlockable in the Down Position 2
Operator Type
Color
Latch Type
Catalog Number
Flush head
Red
Hand
10250TA16
Mushroom head
Red
Hand
10250TA42
Red
Spring loaded
10250TA45
Red
Hand
10250TA52
Red
Spring loaded
10250TA55
Red (EMERG. STOP)
Spring loaded
10250ED952
Latch Type
Catalog Number
1
Jumbo head 3
1
1
1
1
Padlockable in the Up Position 2
10250TA4_
Operator Type
Color
Mushroom head
Black
Hand
10250TA41
Green
Hand
10250TA43
Black
Hand
10250TA51
Green
Hand
10250TA53
Yellow
Hand
10250TA54
1
1
1
10250TA5_
1
Jumbo mushroom
head 3
1
1
Notes
Hand attachment must be manually moved into place for locking. Spring loaded: when operator is pressed—
attachment springs into place. Must be moved manually to release button.
1
1
1
2
3
1
V7-T1-220
NC contacts must be mounted behind lock-down mushroom head operator to ensure lockout.
Operators can be latched down without a padlock. Padlock not included.
Jumbo mushroom heads are not recommended for use in applications where exposure to ultraviolet light exists.
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Key Pushbutton Operator
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
These devices incorporate an
integral locking mechanism
which enables locking units in
various positions (Locked
Down), locking units to
1
prevent operation (Locked
Up) or setting unit to lock
when the button is pressed
(Push to Lock), requiring the
key to be inserted to return to
1
normal operation. With the
key in the center position,
these operators function as a
normal momentary
pushbutton (Free).
1
1
Replacement Keys or Dissimilar Locks for Key Operators Below
Listed operators have
Replacement Keys
identical locks and keys
Description
Catalog Number
(Key Code H661) Catalog
Replacement keys
10250ED824
Number 10250ED824. For
(code H661)
dissimilar lock and key
combinations, see listing on
Page V7-T1-242.
10250T43_
1
1
1
1
Key Pushbutton Operator
Key Position and
Pushbutton Operations
1
C
L
R
Key Removal
Positions
Vertical Mounting 1
Catalog Number
1
1
Three-Position
1
Lock up
Free
Lock down
All
10250T430
Lock up
Free
Lock down
L and R
10250T431
Lock up
Free
Lock down
C and R
10250T432
1
Lock up
Free
—
L and C
10250T433
1
Two-Position
Lock up
Free
—
L
10250T434
—
Free
Lock down
C and R
10250T435
—
Free
Lock down
R
10250T436
—
Free
Push to lock
C and R
10250T437
—
Free
Push to lock
R
10250T438
1
1
1
1
Latch-In, Twist-to-Release Operator
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
10250ED1043-4
1
1
Operator Only with Button
Description
Catalog Number
Latch-in, twist-to-release operator with red mushroom head button
10250ED1043-4
1
1
1
Note
1 Horizontal mounting available on request.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-221
1.9
1
1
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Illuminated Momentary Pushbutton Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
●
●
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
●
LED or incandescent
Full voltage, resistor or transformer type
Plastic lenses
1
1
24V Full Voltage
Illuminated Pushbutton
Illuminated Pushbutton Units
Illuminated Pushbutton
1NO
Catalog Number
1NO-1NC
Catalog Number
1NC
Catalog Number
10250T397LRD24-53
10250T397LRD24-1
10250T397LRD24-51
10250T397LGD24-53
10250T397LGD24-1
10250T397LGD24-51
Amber
10250T397LAD24-53
10250T397LAD24-1
10250T397LAD24-51
Yellow
10250T397LYD24-53
10250T397LYD24-1
10250T397LYD24-51
Blue
10250T397LLD24-53
10250T397LLD24-1
10250T397LLD24-51
White
10250T397LWD24-53
10250T397LWD24-1
10250T397LWD24-51
Red
10250T397LRD2A-53
10250T397LRD2A-1
10250T397LRD2A-51
Green
10250T397LGD2A-53
10250T397LGD2A-1
10250T397LGD2A-51
Amber
10250T397LAD2A-53
10250T397LAD2A-1
10250T397LAD2A-51
Yellow
10250T397LYD2A-53
10250T397LYD2A-2
10250T397LYD2A-51
Blue
10250T397LLD2A-53
10250T397LLD2A-1
10250T397LLD2A-51
White
10250T397LWD2A-53
10250T397LWD2A-1
10250T397LWD2A-51
Red
10250T411LRD06-53
10250T411LRD06-1
10250T411LRD06-51
1
Green
10250T411LGD06-53
10250T411LGD06-1
10250T411LGD06-51
Amber
10250T411LAD06-53
10250T411LAD06-1
10250T411LAD06-51
1
Yellow
10250T411LYD06-53
10250T411LYD06-1
10250T411LYD06-51
Blue
10250T411LLD06-53
10250T411LLD06-1
10250T411LLD06-51
1
White
10250T411LWD06-53
10250T411LWD06-1
10250T411LWD06-51
1
Type
Voltage
Color
LED/Lamp
Number
LED Lamp
1
Full voltage
24 Vac/Vdc
Red
Green
1
1
1
120 Vac/Vdc
1
1
1
Transformer
120 Vac
Bayonet
base
Incandescent Lamp
1
Full voltage
24 Vac/Vdc
1
1
1
Resistor
1
120 Vac/Vdc
1
1
1
Transformer
120 Vac
Red
#757
10250T476C21-53
10250T476C21-1
10250T476C21-51
Green
10250T476C22-53
10250T476C22-1
10250T476C22-51
Amber
10250T476C43-53
10250T476C43-1
10250T476C43-51
Yellow
10250T476C23-53
10250T476C23-1
10250T476C23-51
Blue
10250T476C24-53
10250T476C24-1
10250T476C24-51
Clear
10250T476C25-53
10250T476C25-1
10250T476C25-51
White
10250T476C26-53
10250T476C26-1
10250T476C26-51
10250T471C21-53
10250T471C21-1
10250T471C21-51
Green
10250T471C22-53
10250T471C22-1
10250T471C22-51
Amber
10250T471C43-53
10250T471C43-1
10250T471C43-51
Yellow
10250T471C23-53
10250T471C23-1
10250T471C23-51
Blue
10250T471C24-53
10250T471C24-1
10250T471C24-51
Clear
10250T471C25-53
10250T471C25-1
10250T471C25-51
White
10250T471C26-53
10250T471C26-1
10250T471C26-51
10250T75R 1
10250T76R 1
10250T77R 1
10250T75G 1
10250T76G 1
10250T77G 1
1
1
10250T77A 1
Red
Red
120MB
#755
1
Green
Amber
10250T75A
1
Yellow
10250T75Y 1
10250T76Y 1
10250T77Y 1
Blue
10250T75B 1
10250T76B 1
10250T77B 1
1
Clear
10250T75C 1
10250T76C 1
10250T77C 1
White
1
10250T75W
1
10250T76A
10250T76W
1
10250T77W 1
Note
1 For flashing module catalog number 10250TFL1, add suffix code FM to listed catalog number. Example: 10250T75RFM.
1
1
V7-T1-222
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Indicating Light Units 1
1
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
●
●
LED or incandescent
Full voltage, resistor or
transformer type
●
●
Standard and PresTest
types
Plastic lenses
PresTest—This device
incorporates a press-to-test
feature whereby depressing
the lens disconnects the light
from the source being
monitored and connects
the lamp to a continuously
energized circuit for
immediate detection of
faulty lamps.
Type
Voltage
Color
24 Vac/Vdc
Red
Green
120 Vac Transformer
PresTest
120 Vac
Transformer
120 Vac
Indicating Light
Catalog Number
PresTest
Catalog Number
1
Bayonet
base
10250T197LRP24
10250T297LRP24
1
10250T197LGP24
10250T297LGP24
Amber
10250T197LAP24
10250T297LAP24
Yellow
10250T197LYP24
10250T297LYP24
Blue
10250T197LLP24
10250T297LLP24
1
1
White
10250T197LWP24
10250T297LWP24
Red
10250T197LRP2A
10250T297LRP2A
Green
10250T197LGP2A
10250T297LGP2A
Amber
10250T197LAP2A
10250T297LAP2A
Yellow
10250T197LYP2A
10250T297LYP2A
Blue
10250T197LLP2A
10250T297LLP2A
Resistor
Transformer 2
24 Vac/Vdc
1
White
10250T197LWP2A
10250T297LWP2A
Red
10250T181LRP06
10250T221LRP06
Green
10250T181LGP06
10250T221LGP06
Amber
10250T181LAP06
10250T221LAP06
Yellow
10250T181LYP06
10250T221LYP06
Blue
10250T181LLP06
10250T221LLP06
White
10250T181LWP06
10250T221LWP06
10250T206NC1N
10250T235NC21
120 Vac/Vdc
120 Vac
Red
#757
Green
10250T206NC2N
10250T235NC22
Amber
10250T206NC19N
10250T235NC43
Yellow
10250T206NC3N
10250T235NC23
Blue
10250T206NC4N
10250T235NC24
Clear
10250T206NC5N
10250T235NC25
White
10250T206NC6N
10250T235NC26
Red
120MB
10250T201NC1N
10250T231NC21
Green
10250T201NC2N
10250T231NC22
Amber
10250T201NC19N
10250T231NC43
Yellow
10250T201NC3N
10250T231NC23
Blue
10250T201NC4N
10250T231NC24
Clear
10250T201NC5N
10250T231NC25
White
10250T201NC6N
10250T231NC26
Red
#755
10250T34R
10250T74NR
Green
10250T34G
10250T74NG
Amber
10250T34A
10250T74NA
Yellow
10250T34Y
10250T74NY
Blue
10250T34B
10250T74NB
Clear
10250T34C
10250T74NC
White
10250T34W
10250T74NW
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Notes
1 Standard indicating lights are rated UL (NEMA) 3S as well.
2 For flashing lamp add letter F to listed catalog number. Example: 10250T34RF.
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1
1
Incandescent Lamp
Full voltage
1
LED/Lamp
Number
LED Lamp
Full voltage
1
1
Indicating Light Units
24V Full Voltage
Illuminated Light
1
1
1
V7-T1-223
1.9
1
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Illuminated Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
●
●
LED or incandescent
Full voltage, resistor or transformer type
Illuminated Pushbutton
Operators without Lens
1
Type
1
Full voltage AC/DC
Indicating Light
1
1
Resistor AC/DC 2
1
PresTest
Transformer AC only 3
1
1
1
Illuminated
Pushbutton
Catalog Number
Indicating Light
Catalog Number
PresTest
Catalog Number
Master Test
Catalog Number
Incandescent Unit
1
1
Voltage
LED/Lamp
Number
Master Test
1
Neon AC/DC 4
1
Solid-state 50/60 Hz only
6
#755
10250T473
10250T203N
10250T232N
—
12
#756
10250T474
10250T204N
10250T233N
—
24
#757
10250T476
10250T206N
10250T235N
—
32
#1828
10250T477
10250T207N
10250T238N
—
48
#1835
10250T478
10250T208N
10250T239N
—
120
120MB
10250T471
10250T201N
10250T231N
—
240
120MB
10250T472
10250T202N
10250T240N
—
24
#755
10250T416
—
—
—
120
10250T411
10250T181N
10250T221N
—
240
10250T422
10250T182N
10250T222N
—
277
10250T419
10250T198N
—
—
380
10250T413
10250T183N
10250T223N
—
480
10250T414
10250T184N
10250T224N
—
600
10250T415
10250T185N
10250T225N
—
120
NE51H-R22
—
10250T226N
—
—
240
NE51H-R68
—
10250T227N
—
—
120
120MB
—
—
—
10250T189N
Bayonet
base
10250T397L
10250T197L
10250T297L
—
10250T416L
—
—
—
—
LED (LEDs not included) 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Full voltage
—
Transformer AC only
24
120
10250T411L
10250T181L
10250T221L
240
10250T412L
10250T182L
10250T222L
—
277
10250T419L
10250T198L
—
—
380
10250T413L
10250T183L
10250T223L
—
480
10250T414L
10250T184L
10250T224L
—
600
10250T415L
10250T185L
10250T225L
—
Notes
1 These units do not include lamps. Order LED separately to match lens color. See Page V7-T1-269 for LED Selection and Page V7-T1-216 for Catalog Numbering
System.
2 Resistor units are not available for use with LEDs, choose either transformer or full voltage LED style.
3 For flashing lamp, add letter F to listed catalog number. Example: 10250T181NF.
4 Resistant to shock and vibration. For best illumination use amber, yellow or clear lens.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-224
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Plastic
Glass
10250TC2_
Plastic
Glass
1.9
Indicating and Master Test Lenses
Color
Plastic
Catalog Number
Glass
Catalog Number
Red
10250TC1N
10250TC7N
Green
10250TC2N
10250TC8N
Amber
10250TC19N
10250TC9N
Yellow
10250TC3N
—
Blue
10250TC4N
10250TC10N
Clear
10250TC5N
10250TC11N
White
10250TC6N
10250TC12N
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Illuminated Pushbutton Lenses
Color
Catalog Number
Red
10250TC21
Green
10250TC22
Yellow
10250TC23
Amber
10250TC43
Blue
10250TC24
Clear
10250TC25
White
10250TC26
1
1
1
1
1
1
PresTest Lenses
Color
Plastic
Catalog Number
Glass
Catalog Number
1
Red
10250TC21
10250TC13N
1
Green
10250TC22
10250TC14N
Amber
10250TC43
10250TC15N
Yellow
10250TC23
—
Blue
10250TC24
10250TC16N
Clear
10250TC25
10250TC17N
White
10250TC26
10250TC18N
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-225
1.9
1
1
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Push-Pull Emergency Stops (Compliant with IEC 60947-5-5)
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
●
●
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
●
Two- and three-position
Non-illuminated
LONC contact block
1
1
10250T579C47-71X
Two-Position Push-Pull Units
Operator Position 1
Pull
Push
1
Button Type/Color
Lamp
Type
Voltage
Catalog Number
X
O
40 mm red—illuminated
Incandescent
Transformer
120 Vac/Vdc
10250T563C47-71X
1
X
O
40 mm red—illuminated EMERG. STOP
Incandescent
Transformer
120 Vac/Vdc
10250T563C53-71X
X
O
40 mm red—illuminated EMERG. STOP
LED
Transformer
120 Vac/Vdc
10250T563LED06-71X
1
X
O
40 mm red—illuminated
Incandescent
Full voltage
24 Vdc
10250T579C47-71X
X
O
40 mm red—illuminated EMERG. STOP
Incandescent
Full voltage
24 Vdc
10250T579C53-71X
X
O
40 mm red—illuminated
Incandescent
Resistor
120 Vac/Vdc
10250T580C47-71X
X
O
40 mm red—illuminated EMERG. STOP
Incandescent
Resistor
120 Vac/Vdc
10250T580C53-71X
1
1
X
O
40 mm red—illuminated
Incandescent
Transformer
24 Vac
10250T589C47-71X
X
O
40 mm red—illuminated EMERG. STOP
Incandescent
Transformer
24 Vac
10250T589C53-71X
X
O
40 mm red—illuminated EMERG. STOP
LED
Transformer
24 Vac
10250T589LED06-71X
1
X
O
40 mm red—illuminated
LED
Transformer
24 Vac
10250T589LRD06-71X
X
O
40 mm red—illuminated EMERG. STOP
LED
Full voltage
24 Vdc
10250T597LED24-71X
1
X
O
40 mm red—illuminated EMERG. STOP
LED
Full voltage
120 Vac/Vdc
10250T597LED2A-71X
X
O
40 mm red—illuminated
LED
Full voltage
24 Vdc
10250T597LRD24-71X
X
O
40 mm red—illuminated
LED
Full voltage
120 Vac/Vdc
10250T597LRD2A-71X
1
1
1
1
1
X
O
40 mm red
—
—
—
10250T5B62-71X
X
O
40 mm red—EMERG. STOP
—
—
—
10250T5B63-71X
X
O
65 mm red
—
—
—
10250T5J62-71X
X
O
65 mm red—EMERG. STOP
—
—
—
10250T5J63-71X
Note
1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-226
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
1
Two-Position Push-Pull Units
1
Operator Position 1
Pull
Push
Button Type/Color
2
Contact
Type
Mounting Location
A
B
Catalog Number
2
1
Two-Position Maintained Push, Maintained Pull
10250T5B62-1X
O
X
X
O
40 mm/red
1
1NO
10250T5B62-1X
1
1NC
1
10250T5B63-1X
O
X
X
O
40 mm engraved
EMERG. STOP/red
1NO
10250T5B63-1X
1
1
1NC
1
10250T5J63-1X
O
X
X
O
65 mm aluminum engraved
EMERG. STOP/red
1NO
10250T5J63-1X
1NC
1
1
1
10250ED1080-2
O
X
X
O
65 mm aluminum engraved
EMERG. STOP/red
1NO
Special security
jumbo mushroom head
1NC
10250ED1080-2
1
1
1
1
Button and Color Selection
Color
Standard
Jumbo Mushroom
Head
Suffix Code
Catalog Number
Red
B62
10250TB62
Red (EMERG. STOP)
B63
10250TB63
Green
B61
10250TB61
Black
B60
10250TB60
Blue
B64
10250TB64
Red
J62
10250TJ62
Red (EMERG. STOP)
J63
10250TJ63
Green
J61
10250TJ61
Black
J60
10250TJ60
Yellow
J64
10250TJ64
1
Standard—40 mm
1
1
1
1
Jumbo Mushroom Head 3
(Anodized) Aluminum—65 mm
1
1
1
1
Notes
1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2 To order different type or color buttons, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from the table.
Example: 10250T5B64-1X.
3 Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet light applications.
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-227
1.9
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
10250T_
Three-Position Push-Pull Units
Operator Position 1
1
Pull
Intermediate
1
Maintained Push, Momentary Pull
Push
Button Type/Color 2
X
X
1
O
X
O
O
Contact
Type
Mounting Location
A
Catalog Number 2
40 mm/black
1NC
10250T9B60-3X
40 mm/red
1NC
10250T9B62-3X
40 mm engraved
EMERG. STOP/red
1
B
10250T9B63-3X
Momentary Push, Momentary Pull
1
1
1
X
X
O
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
X
O
40 mm/black
1NC
10250T4B60-3X
40 mm/red
1NC
10250T4B62-3X
40 mm/black
1NO
10250T10B60-1X
40 mm/red
1NC
10250T10B62-1X
1
1
Button and Color Selection
Suffix Code
Catalog Number
Red
B62
10250TB62
Red (EMERG. STOP)
B63
10250TB63
Green
B61
10250TB61
Black
B60
10250TB60
Blue
B64
10250TB64
Red
J62
10250TJ62
Red (EMERG. STOP)
J63
10250TJ63
Green
J61
10250TJ61
Black
J60
10250TJ60
1
Yellow
J64
10250TJ64
1
Notes
1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2 To order different type or color buttons, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from the table.
Example: 10250T5B64-1X.
3 Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet light applications.
1
Color
Standard
1
1
1
1
Jumbo Mushroom
Head
1
1
1
Standard—40 mm
3
Jumbo Mushroom Head
(Anodized) Aluminum—65 mm
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-228
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Illuminated Push-Pull Units
1
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
●
●
●
1
LED or incandescent
Full voltage, resistor or transformer type
Two-position maintained
1
1
Two-Position PushPull Operator
Two-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Maintained Pull
1
Operator Position 1
Maintained—
Pull
O
X
Maintained—
Push
X
O
Lamp
Type
Voltage
Contact Mounting Location
Type
A
B
LED
Full Voltage
24 Vac/Vdc
1NO
120 Vac/Vdc
1NC
Transformer
24 Vac
LED/Lamp
Number
Bayonet
base
X
O
Incandescent
Full voltage
10250T597LRD2A-1X
10250T563LRD06-1X
24 Vac/Vdc
1NO
Resistor
120 Vac/Vdc
1NC
Transformer
24 Vac
#757
1
1
1
1
10250T579C47-1X
120MB
10250T580C47-1X
#755
10250T589C47-1X
120 Vac
10250ED137_
10250T597LRD24-1X
10250T589LRD06-1X
120 Vac
O
X
Red Standard
Push-Pull
Catalog Number 2
10250T563C47-1X
1
1
1
Jumbo Lens Illuminated E-Stops
Contact
Type
1
Lamp
Button Type/Color
Type
Voltage
LED
Two-position illuminated maintained push/pull—
50 mm jumbo lens/red
Full voltage
24 Vac/Vdc
1NO
1NC
10250ED1375
Catalog Number
LED
Three-position illuminated momentary push/pull—
50 mm jumbo lens/red
Full voltage
24 Vac/Vdc
1NC
1NC
10250ED1376
LED
Three-position illuminated momentary push/pull—
50 mm jumbo lens/red
Full voltage
24 Vac/Vdc
1NO
1NC
10250ED1377
LED
Three-position illuminated maintained push/momentary pull—
50 mm lens/red
Full voltage
1NO
1NC
10250ED1378
Notes
1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2 To order different type or color lens, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from table on next page. Example: 10250T579C63-1X.
For LEDs with different voltages see ordering example on Page V7-T1-235.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-229
1.9
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Lens and Color Selection
1
Incandescent
Suffix Code
LED
Suffix Code
Catalog Number
Red
C47
RD
10250TC47
Red (EMERG. STOP)
C53
ED
10250TC53
Green
C48
GD
10250TC48
Blue
C49
LD
10250TC49
Amber
C50
AD
10250TC50
White
C51
WD
10250TC51
Clear
C52
CD
10250TC52
Color
1
Standard
1
1
1
1
1
Side-Lighted
Aluminum
1
1
1
1
1
Aluminum Transparent
Center
1
1
1
Jumbo Lens
Standard—40 mm
Side-Lighted Aluminum—40 mm 1
Red
C57
RS
10250TC57
Red (EMERG. STOP)
C63
ES
10250TC63
Green
C58
GS
10250TC58
Blue
C59
LS
10250TC59
Amber
C64
AS
10250TC64
Yellow
C60
YS
10250TC60
White
C61
WS
10250TC61
Clear
C62
CS
10250TC62
Aluminum Transparent Center—40 mm 1
Red
C65
RH
10250TC65
Green
C66
GH
10250TC66
Amber
C67
AH
10250TC67
—
—
10250TC77
Jumbo Lens—50 mm
Red
1
1
Note
1 Clear anodized aluminum and colored lens.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-230
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Three-Position PushPull Operator
1
Three-Position Illuminated Momentary Push, Momentary Pull
1
Operator Position 1
Momentary—
Pull
O
X
Maintained—
Intermediate
O
O
Momentary—
Push
X
O
Lamp
Type
Voltage
Contact
Type
LED
Full voltage
24 Vac/Vdc
1NO
120 Vac
1NC
Transformer
X
X
O
X
O
O
Full voltage
Transformer
O
X
O
O
X
O
Incan- Full voltage
descent
Resistor
Transformer
Mounting Location LED/
Lamp
Number
A
B
Bayonet
base
O
X
O
O
Full voltage
10250T1097LRD2A-1X
10250T1089LRD06-1X
120 Vac
10250T1063LRD06-1X
24 Vac/Vdc
1NC
120 Vac
1NC
Bayonet
base
10250T497LRD24-3X
10250T497LRD2A-3X
24 Vac
10250T489LRD06-3X
120 Vac
10250T463LRD06-3X
24 Vac/Vdc
1NO
120 Vac
1NC
24 Vac
#757
10250T1079C47-1X
120MB
10250T1080C47-1X
#755
10250T1089C47-1X
10250T1063C47-1X
24 Vac/Vdc
1NC
Resistor
120 Vac
1NC
Transformer
24 Vac
#757
10250T479C47-3X
120MB
10250T480C47-3X
#755
10250T489C47-3X
120 Vac
1
1
10250T1097LRD24-1X
24 Vac
120 Vac
X
X
Red Standard
Push-Pull
Catalog Number 3
10250T463C47-3X
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Three-Position PushPull Operator
Three-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Momentary Pull
1
Operator Position 1
Momentary—
Pull
X
X
X
X
Maintained—
Intermediate
O
X
O
X
Momentary—
Push
O
O
O
O
Mounting Location LED/
Lamp
Number
A
B
Red Standard
Push-Pull
Catalog Number 2
Lamp
Type
Voltage
Contact
Type
LED
Full voltage
24 Vac/Vdc
1NC
120 Vac
1NC
Transformer
24 Vac
10250T989LRD06-3X
120 Vac
10250T963LRD06-3X
Incandescent
Bayonet
base
10250T997LRD2A-3X
Full voltage
24 Vac/Vdc
1NC
#757
10250T979C47-3X
120 Vac
1NC
120MB
10250T980C47-3X
Transformer
24 Vac
#755
1
10250T997LRD24-3X
Resistor
120 Vac
1
10250T989C47-3X
1
1
1
1
10250T963C47-3X
1
Notes
1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2 To order different type or color lens, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from table on Page V7-T1-230.
Example: 10250T1079C53-1X. For LEDs with different voltages see ordering example on Page V7-T1-235.
3 To order different type or color lens, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from table on Page V7-T1-230.
Example: 10250T979C53X. For LEDs with different voltages see ordering example on Page V7-T1-235.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-231
1.9
1
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Potentiometers
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Vertical or Horizontal 1 Potentiometer
One-Hole Mounting
Potentiometer
Ohms
with Knob and Standard Dial Plate—Linear Type ±10%
Catalog Number
1
2 Watt (60V Max.) Single Potentiometer with Standard Aluminum Dial Plate 23
1000
10250T331
1
2500
10250T332
5000
10250T338
10000
10250T333
1
25000
10250T334
50000
10250T335
1
Operator only 4
10250T330
Alternative—black plastic large legend with standard markings
E34LP99
1
1
Notes
1 Shown with standard aluminum dial plate.
2 Large dial plate with space for legend is available at no charge. To order, add suffix 36 to catalog number.
Example: 10250T33136. To order separately, see footnote 3 below.
3 Large dial plate has space at top for 15 letters. 3/32 in high. For custom stamped legend plates,
order legend plate as separate item 10250TR30 and specify stamping.
4 For use with commercially purchased potentiometers having shaft dimensions per dimension drawing
on Page V7-T1-279.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-232
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Push-Pull Operators
An illuminated push-pull
pushbutton unit, arranged for
one-hole mounting, can
replace two pushbuttons and
a pilot light or the nonilluminated form can replace
two pushbuttons. These units
are available in three basic
types:
●
●
Maintained—(Twoposition). Maintains in the
pulled or pushed position
until manually actuated to
the opposite mode.
Momentary—(Threeposition). Spring returns to
an intermediate position
when pulled or pushed and
released.
●
Momentary Pull,
Maintained Push—(Threeposition). Spring returns to
intermediate position
when pulled. Maintains in
pushed position until
manually returned to
intermediate (ready to
reset) position. Maintained
stop holds circuit open and
will prevent other series
connected operators from
starting the system.
The operators, buttons,
contact blocks, etc., are
offered as building block
components that can be
intermixed to satisfy many
requirements. This minimizes
the need for a varied and
costly inventory.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Typical
Two-Position
Maintained Push-Pull 1 Control
Applications
Three-wire
three-position
momentary
Line—Diagram
L1
M
B Circuit
Two-wire
two-position
maintained
Push-Pull
Operator
A Circuit
L2
OL
L1
Circuits
Operator Mode
Momentary
push and pull
10250T4
2NC
contact block
10250T3
START (mom.)
1
Normal pos.
(maint.)
STOP (mom.)
1
1
M
Push-Pull
Operator
M
Operator
L2
OL
Momentary
push and pull
10250T10
1NO-1NC
contact block
10250T1
Maintained
push and pull
10250T5
1NC
contact block
10250T51
1
1
START (maint.)
No
intermediate
position
STOP (maint.)
1
1
1
A or B Circuit
Three-wire
momentary pull L1
maintained push
A Circuit
Push-Pull
Operator
M
B Circuit
OL
L2
Maintained
push and
momentary
pull
10250T9
2NC
contact block
10250T3
START (mom.)
Normal pos.
(maint.)
STOP (maint.)
1
1
1
M
1
Notes
A and B circuits shown in the application illustrations are defined in the “Application Guide” on the following page.
1 Shown without button on lens.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-233
1.9
1
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Application Guide
To assist in the selection of
contact blocks, the sketch to
the right shows pictorially by
symbols A and B locations of
contact circuits after
assembly of contact blocks
and adapter to the operator.
The table below shows the
effect of the push and pull
operations on either NO or
NC contacts. (X = contact
closed, O = contact open).
Contact Circuit Locations
Locating Nib
A
1
B
1
1
10250T579C47-71X
Push-Pull Operator Components
Operator Position and Circuit Arrangement
1
Out—Pull
1
Intermediate
In—Push
Contact Block Mounting Location
1
Type of Operator
1
Maintained push-pull
A
B
A
B
A
O
X
No intermediate
position
X
O
B
Contact Block 1
Catalog Number
X
O
1NO
1NC
10250T5
X
O
2NO
2NC
X
O
1NO
1NC
X
O
2NO
2NC
O
O
1NO
1NC
O
O
2NO
2NC
O
O
1NO
1NC
O
O
2NO
2NC
X
O
1NO
1NC
X
O
2NO
2ND
Two-Position Operator without Lens
1
O
X
or
O
X
Maintained push-pull with
anti-theft jumbo mushroom
1
O
X
1
O
X
1
Three-Position Operator without Lens
Momentary push-pull
1
O
X
O
X
or
Maintained push-momentary pull
1
O
X
or
or
O
X
1
Momentary push-pull
1
O
X
O
X
1
X
O
No intermediate
position
O
X
O
X
1
O
X
or
or
X
O
or
X
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
or
or
or
O
X
X
O
O
X
X
O
O
X
X
O
O
X
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
O
or
or
or
10250ED1080
10250T4 1
10250T9 1
10250T10 1
Note
1 Maximum of two blocks, four circuits. Special function contact blocks shown on Page V7-T1-265 CANNOT be used with three-position push-pull operators 10250T4,
10250T9 or 10250T10.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-234
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Push-Pull Light Units, Lenses and Buttons
Ordering Example with One Composite Number
1
Non-illuminated:
10250T5 + 10250TB62 + 10250T1 = 10250T5B62-1X
1
1
Incandescent:
10250T5 + 10250T79 + 10250TC47 + 10250T1 = 10250T579C47-1X
1
LED:
10250T5 + 10250T97L + 10250TC47 + Voltage code + 10250T1 = 10250T597LRD24-1X
06—6 Vac/Vdc
12—12 Vac/Vdc
24—24 Vac/Vdc
48—48 Vac/Vdc
1
60—60 Vac/Vdc
2A—120 Vac
2D—120 Vdc
1
1
Light Units for Illuminated Push-Pull Devices
Light Unit
Type
LED
1
(LEDs not included)
Incandescent
Type
Voltage
Full voltage
—
Transformer
AC only
50/60 Hz
24
120
208
240
277
380
480
600
Full voltage
AC or DC
LED/Lamp
Number
Bayonet
base
6
12
24/28
32
1
Catalog Number
1
10250T97L
1
10250T89L
10250T63L
10250T64L
10250T65L
10250T82L
10250T66L
10250T67L
10250T68L
1
1
1
10250T69
10250T70
10250T79
10250T83
Resistor
AC or DC
120
240
120MB
10250T80
10250T81
Transformer
AC only
50/60 Hz
24
120
208
240
277
380
480
600
#755
10250T89
10250T63
10250T64
10250T65
10250T82
10250T66
10250T67
10250T68
1
1
1
1
1
1
Note
1 These units do not include lamps. Order LED separately to match lens color, see Page V7-T1-269.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-235
1.9
Lens Color
Standard
1
1
1
1
1
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Alternate Lenses for Illuminated Push-Pull Devices
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Side-Lighted Anodized
Aluminum Ring
Incandescent
Suffix Code
LED
Suffix Code 1
Catalog Number
Standard
Red
C47
RD
10250TC47
Red (EMERG. STOP)
C53
ED
10250TC53
Green
C48
GD
10250TC48
Blue
C49
LD
10250TC49
Amber
C50
AD
10250TC50
White
C51
WD
10250TC51
Clear
C52
CD
10250TC52
Side-Lighted Anodized Aluminum Ring
Red
C57
RS
10250TC57
Red (EMERG. STOP)
C63
ES
10250TC63
Green
C58
GS
10250TC58
Blue
C59
LS
10250TC59
1
Amber
C64
AS
10250TC64
Yellow
C60
YS
10250TC60
1
White
C61
WS
10250TC61
Clear
C62
CS
10250TC62
1
1
1
Heavy-Duty Aluminum
1
1
1
Jumbo Lens
Heavy-Duty Aluminum with Transparent Center
Red
C65
RH
10250TC65
Green
C66
GH
10250TC66
Amber
C67
AH
10250TC67
White
C68
—
10250TC68
—
—
10250TC77
Jumbo Lens—50 mm
Red
1
1
1
1
Buttons for Non-Illuminated Push-Pull Devices
Color
Standard
1
1
1
1
Jumbo Mushroom
Head
Suffix Code
Catalog Number
Red
B62
10250TB62
Red (EMERG. STOP)
B63
10250TB63
Green
B61
10250TB61
Black
B60
10250TB60
Blue
B64
10250TB64
Standard
Jumbo
Standard
P
S
Jumbo Mushroom Head 2
(Anodized) Aluminum
1
Red
J62
10250TJ62
Red (EMERG. STOP)
J63
10250TJ63
1
Green
J61
10250TJ61
Black
J60
10250TJ60
Yellow
J64
10250TJ64
1
Legend Plates
For a complete listing
of available legend plates
see Pages V7-T1-260 to
V7-T1-262.
R
T
Notes
1 Suffix codes should only be used for assembling composite catalog numbers. To order lens above, order by catalog number.
2 Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet light applications.
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-236
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Selector Switch Units
1
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
●
●
1
Two-, three- and four-position maintained
Non-illuminated and illuminated
1
Two-Position
Maintained Switch
1
Two-Position Selector Switch
Operator Position 1
Non-Illuminated
Operator
Action 2
X
O
O
X
M
Contact
Type
Mounting Location Black Knob
Black Lever
Red Knob
Red Lever
A
B
Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3
1NC
M
Illuminated—120V Transformer
10250T20KB
10250T20LB
10250ED1117-KR
10250ED1117-LR
1
1
1
1NO
1
Three-Position
Maintained Switch
Three-Position Selector Switch
Non-Illuminated
Operator
Action 2
X
O
O
Contact
Type
Illuminated—120V Transformer
Mounting Location Black Knob
Black Lever
Red Knob
Red Lever
Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3
A
B
1NO
M
M
Three-Position
Maintained Switch
1
Operator Position 1
10250T21KB
10250T21LB
10250ED1117-2KR
10250ED1117-2LR
1
1
M
O
O
X
1NO
X
O
O
1NO
O
X
O
2NC (Series)
O
O
X
1NO
1
10250T22KB
10250T22LB
10250ED1117-3KR
10250ED1117-3LR
1
1
1
Three-Position
Maintained Switch
1
Four-Position Selector Switch
Operator Position 1
Operator
Action 2
Contact
Type
Non-Illuminated
Illuminated—120V Transformer
Mounting Location Black Knob
Black Lever
Red Knob
Red Lever
A
B
Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3
1
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
1NO
1
O
O
O
X
1NC
1
M
M
M
1NC
1
10250T46KB
10250T46LB
10250ED1117-4KR
10250ED1117-4LR
1
M 1NO
1
Color Selection
1
Illuminated
Non-Illuminated
Color
Code
Letter
Color
Code
Letter
Color
Code
Letter
Color
Code
Letter
Color
Code
Letter
Color
Code
Letter
Red
Green
R
G
White
Blue
W
B
Amber
Clear
A
C
Black
Red
B
R
Green
White
G
W
Blue
Orange
L
O
Notes
1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2 M = Maintained.
3 To order different type or color selector switch, substitute the underlined character with appropriate suffix code from the Color Selection table. Example: 10250T20KG.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-237
1.9
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Selector Switch Selection
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Cam and Contact Block Selection
Selector switches in their
varied forms (two-position,
three-position and fourposition) are a big factor
contributing to the great
flexibility of control that a well
rounded line of “pushbuttons”
can achieve. Because of their
flexibility, they tend to cause
difficulty with product
selection and application.
The following systematic
approach should simplify
that task.
Cam and contact block
selection is better understood
if you:
●
●
Work with each incoming
and outgoing wire/circuit
separately.
Recognize the terms NO
and NC only identify the
type of contact by its mode
before mounting to the
operator. The “X-O” table
(Page V7-T1-240) shows
how that contact will act
after assembly to the
operator with the selected
cam shape. X = closed
circuit, O = open circuit.
●
●
Up to six NO or NC
contacts may be mounted
behind each plunger
location for a total of
twelve contacts. Single
circuit contact blocks have
only one plunger with the
other side of the block
“open.” Therefore, single
circuit contact blocks
transmit motion to blocks
behind them only for the
position containing the
circuit.
Each cam has two
separate lobes, each of
which operates one of the
two contact block plungers
independently of each
other. Those are identified
as position A (locating nib
side) and position B
(opposite of locating nib).
The position designations
give direction in selecting
and mounting of the
contact blocks.
Contact Circuit Locations
Step 1: Elementary
Diagram.
Construct on paper, or in your
mind, a simple elementary
diagram of the switching
scheme as follows:
HAND
Incoming
Line
Outgoing
Circuit
OFF
AUTO
Outgoing
Circuit
Step 2: “X-O” Pattern.
From the elementary
diagram, you can construct an
“X-O” diagram which
describes when the contacts
are to be closed (X) or open
(O) in the various positions of
the switch. The “X-O” for the
HAND circuit looks like this:
For the AUTO circuit, the
“X-O” diagram would look like
this:
HAND OFF AUTO
O O X
Putting them together, the
complete “X-O” diagram is:
XOO
OOX
Once the “X-O” diagram has
been generated the next step
is to select the cam and
contact block, or blocks,
needed to perform the
desired “X-O” functions.
The selection tables on the
following pages list the
various types (shapes) of
cams by number to choose
from and the type of contact
and position to achieve the
function outlined in your
“X-O” diagram.
Locating Nib
HAND OFF AUTO
A
B
1
Systematic Approach
Application: HAND-OFFAUTO selector switch. In this
circuit, one incoming line is
distributed to two other
outgoing circuits by the
switch. The two circuits can
be looked at individually.
X O O
In this circuit, you want a
contact closed on the left
(HAND) but open in the
center and right.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-238
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Step 3: Cam Selection.
The cam you select
determines the operation of
all contact blocks mounted to
the operator. It is selected on
the basis that it provides the
simplest circuitry for the
desired “X-O” diagram. The
selection tables show all the
“X-O” combinations. For the
purpose of this example, the
applicable portion of those
tables is shown on this page.
Now to make the cam
selection, make a simple
worksheet such as:
Step 5: Selector Switch
Operator.
Lastly, you have to choose
from the many types of
operators—knob and lever
in various colors or keyed.
Also what combinations of
maintained and spring
return functions are
required. Selection of these
operators can be found on
Page V7-T1-242. For the
example in step 4 you may
want a three-position
maintained black knob,
cam 3—Catalog Number
10250T1323.
Example Selection Table
No.
“X-O” Pattern
1
X
O
XOO
OOX
Cam 3
(A)NO-(B)NC
(B)NO
(A)NO
(B)NO
It becomes immediately
obvious that cam 3 is the
better choice for two
reasons, (1) the series
combination can be avoided
making it simpler to wire, (2)
only two contacts are
required, which is less
expensive than the three
contacts required by cam 2.
Step 4: Contact Block
Selection.
Having selected the cam,
contact block selection is
simply a matter of gathering
the A position and B position
circuits into pairs which make
up the most convenient contact
block arrangement. If there is
an imbalance in the number of
circuits under A or B, then
single circuit blocks must be
selected for these leftover
circuits.
Back to the worksheet,
having selected cam 3 do
this:
X O X
O O X
ANO
BNO
10250T2
The Complete Switch:
10250T1323 with one
10250T2 or, for one
composite catalog number,
10250T21KB found on
Page V7-T1-237.
Diagrams
Circuits shown illustrate
connections to obtain a
selector switch circuit
combination and are shown
with their appropriate line
diagrams. Field wiring of
jumper connections required
as shown.
Cam Code #3
Top A
Top A
O
Bottom B
4
O
O
X
1
Bottom B
—
a
NO
NC
—
—
1
NO
1
Two-Position Selector Switch Contact Block Selection
Desired Circuit and
Operator Position
Top Plunger A
X
O
NC
2
O
X
NO
or
or
1
1
Contact Blocks Required to
Accomplish Circuit Function
1
1
1
NO
NO
No.
Cam 2
Cam Code #2
Bottom Plunger B
1
NC
1
1
NO
1
Note
1 Wired in series.
1
1
1
1
X = Closed circuit
O = Open circuit
1
Wiring of Jumper
Connections
1
1
Series Connection
1
1
Parallel Connection
1
Four-position selector
switches are limited to four
contact blocks.
1
1
Contact Blocks
For selection and number
of available contact blocks
per operator, see Pages
V7-T1-265 to V7-T1-268.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-239
1.9
1
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Three-Position Switch—Cam and Contact Block Selection
Contact Blocks Required to Accomplish Circuit Function
(Jumpers must be installed where indicated)
1
Desired Circuit and
Operator Position
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
No.
1
X
O
1
2
X
X
Mounting Location
Top
Plunger
A
Bottom
Plunger
B
Top
Plunger
A
NO
NC
NO
NC
3
X
O
NC
X
NO
4
O
O
X
5
O
X
X
NO
NO
1
NO
NO
NC
1
1
Bottom
Plunger
B
O
1
1
Operator with Cam Code #3
Mounting Location
O
1
1
Operator with Cam Code #2
NC
6
O
X
NO
O
NC
NC
NC
1
1
Four-Position Switch—Contact Block Selection
Contact Blocks
Required to
Accomplish Circuit
Function
1
1
1
Desired Circuit and
Operator Position
Mounting Location
Top
Plunger
A
No.
1
1
1
2
O
X
O
O
1
3
O
O
X
O
4
O
O
O
X
1
1
X
O
O
1
1
Desired Circuit and
Operator Position
Mounting Location
Top
Plunger
A
No.
10
X
O
X
Bottom
Plunger
B
O
NC
NC
NO
NO
11
X
X
X
O
NO
NC
NO
NC
5
X
O
O
X
6
O
X
X
O
7
O
O
X
X
8
X
X
O
O
12
NC
NC
O
1
X
O
V7-T1-240
X
NO
X
NC
NO
NO
X
O
X
X
NC
NO
NC
NO
X
14
NO
NC
1
X
NC
13
NO
9
O
NO
NO
1
1
Bottom
Plunger
B
O
1
1
Contact Blocks
Required to
Accomplish Circuit
Function
X
X
O
NC
X
NC
NO
NC
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Selector Switch Operators
1
Key Operators
1
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Two-Position
Maintained 1
1
Key Operators with Cam
Positions
Two-position—60° throw
Operator Action 2
M
M
M
Three-position—60° throw
M
M
M
1
1, 2, 3
10250T1511_
10250T1611_
1
2
10250T1571_
10250T1581_
1
2
1–7
10250T1522_
10250T1622_
10250T1523_
10250T1623_
1
10250T1532_
10250T1632_
10250T1533_
10250T1633_
10250T1542_
10250T1642_
10250T1543_
10250T1643_
10250T1652_
10250T1662_
10250T1653_
10250T1663_
10250T1677_
10250T1687_
3
S
S
2, 4, 6
3
7
M
4
3
2
M
M
1, 4, 5
3
2
M
S
M
Horizontal Mounting
Catalog Number
2
M
S
M
Vertical Mounting
Catalog Number
7
1
1
S
M
Four-position—40° throw
Cam Code 3
Optional Key
Removal Positions 4
1
1
1
1
1
M
1
Notes
1 Horizontal mount, key removal #1 keyed selector switch, cam 1 shown.
2 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (R).
3 For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection instructions and tables on
Pages V7-T1-238, V7-T1-239 and V7-T1-240.
4 Choose key removal position required for application from table on Page V7-T1-242. Add key removal code no. to listed catalog number.
Example: 10250T15112.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-241
1.9
1
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Key Removal Positions
C
L
R
Code
Suffix
Key Removal
Position
1
Right only
1
2
Left only
3
Right and left
1
4
Center only
5
Right and center
6
Left and center
7
All positions
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Note: Key removal in “spring
return from” positions not
recommended.
Replacement Keys or Dissimilar
Locks for Key Operators
Operators listed on Page
V7-T1-242 have identical
locks and keys (Key Code
H661) Catalog Number
10250ED824. For dissimilar
lock and key combinations,
see listing on this page.
1
1
1
Replacement Key
Description
Catalog Number
Replacement keys
(code H661)
10250ED824
“H” Series Locks without
Master Key—with Key Slot
Cover
Lock and Key Code Numbers
Selector Switch Operators with
Dissimilar Locks and Keys
(UL [NEMA] 4, 4X and 13)
The locks in all key operators
listed on Pages V7-T1-221,
V7-T1-242 and V7-T1-379 are
identical and use key code
number H661. Two keys are
supplied with every lock. For
additional code number H661
keys, order Catalog Number
10250ED824. For others,
order 10250ED1130 and
designate lock number.
When dissimilar locks for
each operator or each group
of operators are required,
select from the lock and key
combination listed below.
When Ordering Operator
Only or a complete control
unit with a substitute lock,
order from table below and
add “except Lock and Key
Code No. …”
Master Keys for Above
Locks
Application
Catalog Number
For code:
H501
H635
H663
MD1–MD20
10250ED825-3
H620
H639
H675
ME2–ME18
10250ED825-4
H621
H643
H683
MJ1–MJ16
10250ED825-5
H634
H654
H688
“M” Series Locks with
Master Key—with Key Slot
Cover
Lock and Key Code Numbers
MD1
MD14
ME8
MJ6
MD2
MD15
ME11
MJ10
MD3
MD16
ME16
MJ11
MD4
MD19
ME17
MJ13
MD5
MD20
ME18
MJ15
MD7
ME2
ME19
MJ16
MD17
MD9
ME3
MJ1
MD10
ME5
MJ3
MD11
ME6
MJ4
MD13
ME7
MJ5
Selector Switch Operators with Caps
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Selector Switch Operators with Caps
1
1
1
Positions
Two-Position
Maintained 1
Two-position—60° throw
1
Operator Action 2
M
M
M
S
Black Knob Selector Switch—
Vertical Mounting 3
Black Lever Selector Switch—
Vertical Mounting 3
Cam Code 4
Catalog Number
Cam Code 4
Catalog Number
1
10250T1311
1
10250T3011
1
10250T1371
1
10250T3071
1
1
Three-Position
Maintained 5
Three-position—60° throw
M
M
1
M
M
S
M
M
1
S
S
M
1
M
Four-position—40° throw
1
M
M
1
S
M
2
10250T1322
2
10250T3022
3
10250T1323
3
10250T3023
2
10250T1332
2
10250T3032
3
10250T1333
3
10250T3033
2
10250T1342
2
10250T3042
3
10250T1343
3
10250T3043
2
10250T1352
2
10250T3052
3
10250T1353
3
10250T3053
7
10250T1367
7
10250T3067
M
Notes
1 Black knob selector switch, cam 1 shown.
2 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (R).
3 Field convertible to horizontal mounting or order operator only and separate operator cap.
4 For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection instructions and
tables on Pages V7-T1-238, V7-T1-239 and V7-T1-240.
5 Black lever selector switch, cam 3 shown.
1
1
1
V7-T1-242
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Selector Switch Operators without Caps
Operators can be ordered
with caps assembled to
them by adding the code
number from the table on
this page to the end of
catalog number below.
Example: 10250T4011KB
Two-Position Selector
Switch Maintained
1
1
1
1
Selector Switch Operators without Caps
Operator Action 1
Positions
Two-position—60° throw
M
M
M
S
Three-position—60° throw
M
M
M
M
S
M
M
S
S
M
M
Four-position—40° throw
M
M
S
M
1
Cam Code 2
Catalog Number
1
10250T4011
1
1
10250T4081
1
2
10250T4022
1
3
10250T4023
2
10250T4032
3
10250T4033
2
10250T4042
3
10250T4043
2
10250T4052
3
10250T4053
7
10250T4067
1
1
1
1
1
M
1
1
Operating Caps
Knob
Coin Slot
Catalog and
Code Number
1
Color
Lever 3
Catalog and
Code Number
10250TLB
Black
10250TSB
10250TCB
1
10250TKR
10250TLR
Red
10250TSR
10250TCR
1
Green
10250TKG
10250TLG
Green
10250TSG
10250TCG
1
Yellow
10250TKY
10250TLY
Yellow
10250TSY
10250TCY
1
White
10250TKW
10250TLW
White
10250TSW
10250TCW
1
Gray
10250TKA
10250TLA
Gray
10250TSA
10250TCA
1
Blue
10250TKL
10250TLL
Blue
10250TSL
10250TCL
1
Orange
10250TKD
10250TLO
Orange
10250TSO
10250TCO
1
Color
Knob
Catalog and
Code Number
Lever
Catalog and
Code Number
Black
10250TKB
Red
Lever
Lever for Use with
Maintained Operators
Coin Slot
Notes
1 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (R).
2 For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection instructions and
tables on Pages V7-T1-238, V7-T1-239 and V7-T1-240.
3 Designed for added ingress protection. For use in maintained operators only.
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-243
1.9
1
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Illuminated Selector Switch Operators
Illuminated Selector Switches without Caps
Two-Position Selector
Switch Maintained
Operator without Knob or Lever
6 Volt #755 Lamp
Cam
Voltage
Code 2
Code Number and
Catalog Number 3
Full Voltage Type—AC or DC 4
Lamps: 6V—#755, 12V—#756, 24V—#757,
48V—#1835, 120/240V—120MB
Code Number and
Cam
Voltage
Catalog Number 3
Code 2
1
24
10250T5961
1
120
10250T5971
Transformer Type—50/60 Hz
1
Positions
1
Operator Action 1
Two-position—60° throw
M
1
M
1
1
1
Three-position—60° throw
+ 2 or 3
M
M
1
M
1
1
+ 2 or 3
M
1
M
S
1
1
1
+ 2 or 3
M
1
S
M
6
10250T6201
12
10250T6211
208
10250T6511
24
10250T6221
240
10250T5981
48
10250T6231
380
10250T5991
120
10250T6361
480
10250T6001
240 5
10250T6371
600
10250T6011
24
10250T602_
120
10250T603_
+ 2 or 3
6
10250T624_
12
10250T625_
208
10250T652_
24
10250T626_
240
10250T604_
48
10250T627_
380
10250T605_
120
10250T638_
480
10250T606_
240 5
10250T639_
600
10250T607_
24
10250T654_
120
10250T620_
+ 2 or 3
6
10250T612_
12
10250T632_
208
10250T655_
24
10250T642_
240
10250T656_
48
10250T672_
380
10250T657_
120
10250T622_
480
10250T658_
240
10250T682_
600
10250T659_
24
10250T660_
120
10250T621_
+ 2 or 3
6
10250T613_
12
10250T633_
1
208
10250T661_
24
10250T643_
240
10250T662_
48
10250T673_
1
380
10250T663_
120
10250T623_
480
10250T664_
240
10250T683_
1
+ 2 or 3
M
S
1
S
1
1
1
Four-position—40° throw
1
M
M
1
1
7
M
M
600
10250T665_
24
10250T614_
120
10250T615_
+ 2 or 3
6
10250T628_
12
10250T629_
208
10250T653_
24
10250T630_
240
10250T616_
48
10250T631_
380
10250T617_
120
10250T640_
480
10250T618_
240 5
10250T641_
600
10250T619_
24
10250T6087
120
10250T6097
7
6
10250T6327
12
10250T6337
208
10250T6547
24
10250T6347
240
10250T6107
48
10250T6357
380
10250T6117
120
10250T6427
480
10250T6127
240 5
10250T6437
600
10250T6137
Notes
1 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (R).
2 For selection of the proper cam and contact block, to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection tables on Pages V7-T1-238, V7-T1-239 and V7-T1-240.
3 Operator includes lens gasket and lens attachment screws.
4 Full voltage light units can be used at other than listed voltages by changing lamp. Replacement lamps are listed on Page V7-T1-269.
5 Resistor type. May generate excess heat if used in high density.
1
1
1
V7-T1-244
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Illuminated Knobs and Levers
Knob
Lever
Color 1
Knob
Code Number and
Catalog Number
Lever
Code Number and
Catalog Number
Red
10250TER
10250TFR
Green
10250TEG
10250TFG
Yellow
10250TEA
10250TFA
Blue
10250TEL
10250TFL
Clear
10250TEC
10250TFC
White
10250TEW
10250TFW
Amber
10250TEM
10250TFM
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Joystick Units
1
Two-Position Joystick
Joystick Units—UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
1
Operator Position 2
Up
Down
Center
Operator
Action 3
X
O
O
O
O
X
Contact
Type
S
1NC
S
1NC
Mounting Location
A
B
Two-Position
Assembled Unit
Catalog Number 4
10250T452-3X
M
1
1
1
1
Notes
1 Amber, clear and white lenses have a black arrow (pointer), red, green and blue lenses have a white arrow (pointer).
2 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
3 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (R).
4 Field convertible momentary to maintained or vice versa.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-245
1.9
1
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Joysticks
Two-Position Joystick Operators
The device mounts in the
standard 30.5 mm mounting
hole. Allow sufficient panel
space for lever movement.
The maximum travel of the
knob operator (full up to full
down) is 2.2 in (24°)
momentary, 2.5 in (30°)
maintained, but ample space
for lever operation must be
allowed. These operators are
field convertible from
momentary to maintained
operation or vice versa.
1
1
1
1
1
Two-Position Joystick
Operator
1
1
1
Application Caution
Joystick operators are not
recommended on certain DC
applications above 24 Vdc
which may involve lightly
engaging the contacts
(teasing) to achieve speed
control, positioning, jogging,
etc. Excessive arcing and
deterioration of the contacts
will occur.
Two-Position Joystick Operators—UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Two-Position Operator Only—AC Applications Only
Catalog Number
Description 1
Contact Block Limitations
1
The use of NC contacts is
preferred because they
provide positive drive contact
opening and a direct
relationship between lever
movement and affected
terminal, i.e., up movement
affects the top terminals.
Momentary Mode
4NC contact blocks max.
3NO contact blocks max.
Momentary up and down
10250T452
Maintained up—momentary down
10250T4521
Maintained down—momentary up
10250T4522
Maintained Mode
2 contact blocks max.
Maintained up and down
10250T4525
Contact Block Operation and Selection
Handle Position 2
Up
Center
1
1
1
Down
Contact Block
Type 4
Mounting Location 23
Top A
Bottom B
Catalog Number
X
O
O
1NC
10250T51
O
O
X
1NC
10250T51
1
O
X
O
2LONC (Series)
10250T45
1
X
O
O
1NC
10250T3
O
O
X
1NC
X
X
O
1LONC
1
O
X
X
1LONC
X
O
O
1NC
1
O
O
X
1NO
1
O
O
X
1NC
X
O
O
1NO
1
10250T45
10250T44 5
1
1
A and B Mounting Location
Locating Nib
1
Top
Contacts
Up
Bottom
Contacts
Down
Center
1
1
Up
NC Contact at Top
Is Closed, NO at
Bottom Is Closed
1
Center
All NC and NO Contacts
Are Open (1/2 Way),
Late Opening NC Is Closed
Down
NC Contact at Bottom
Is Closed, NO at
Top Is Closed
Notes
1 Field convertible momentary to maintained or vice versa. To expedite shipment of maintained types,
order momentary operator 10250T452 which is a stocked device.
2 Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
3 See above for “A” and “B” mounting location.
4 NO = normally open, NC = normally closed, LONC = late opening normally closed.
5 Four circuits in single block depth—rated 300V max.
1
1
1
V7-T1-246
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Four-Position Joystick Operators
The joystick operated control
unit is intended for AC
application only. For other
use, see Application
Caution on preceding page.
Four-Position Joystick
Operator
The panel area required for
the four-position operator is
equivalent to two standard
pushbutton operators.
1
The latch holds the lever in
the center position. The
trigger latch must be released
before lever can moved into
any position.
1
1
1
Four-Position Joystick Operators—UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Contact Block Limitations
Description 1
Catalog Number
1
Four-position—without latch
10250T451_
1
Four-position—with latch
10250T461_
1
To plug unused hole
10250TA7
1
Operator Only—AC Application Only
Four contact blocks max.—two in each position
Hole Plug
Four contact blocks max.—two in each position
Four-Position Joystick
Operator with Latch
1
1
1
1
Field Conversion—Gate
The factory assembled fourposition operator is
assembled with a gate
arranged for four handle
positions.
Handle Positions
Two-, Three- or EightPosition Operation
Adjacent Functions
Left
Up
Up
Right
Up
or
Two-Position
Gate
or
or
Left
Right
or
Three-Position
Gate
Four-Position
Gate
Left
Down
Down
Right
Down
Maintained Position
Three additional gates,
supplied with every operator,
allow on the job conversion to
three- or eight-position
operation as illustrated.
Eight-Position
Gate
The eight-position gate
controls the four functions
shown as “Up,” “Down,”
“Left” and “Right.” The
remaining four diagonal
positions each actuate two
adjacent functions; for
example, “Left Down”
actuates both “Left” and
“Down.” The operator may
be arranged for spring return
of handle to center position,
or maintained in up to eight
positions (see description of
maintained position operator).
For maintained position (nonspring return), locate required
maintained position or
positions of operating lever
and add appropriate suffix
number to the catalog
number selected from the
table above.
Maintained Positions
Maintained Positions
Up
Down
Left
Right
Suffix
Number
X
—
—
—
1
—
—
—
—
2
—
X
—
—
3
—
—
X
—
4
—
—
—
—
5
X
—
X
—
6
X
—
—
X
7
—
X
X
—
8
—
X
—
X
9
—
—
X
X
10
X
X
X
—
11
X
X
—
X
12
X
—
X
X
13
—
X
X
X
14
X
X
X
X
15
On an eight-position gate,
when an adjacent vertical and
horizontal position are both
maintained, the included
diagonal position is also
maintained.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Note
1 Momentary operators—spring return to center. For maintained operators add suffix code from table on this page.
Example: 10250T45110. Operator without latch, maintained in left and right positions.
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-247
1.9
1
1
1
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Contact Block Operation
Blank Legend Plates for Joystick Operators
Contact blocks mount directly to the back of the operator. For
reliable operation, the maximum number of contact blocks that
should be installed behind each operator lever is two (four total).
When ordering engraved legend plates, order by catalog number
and insert the following into order notes:
The figure below identifies the circuits activated by each of the
eight possible lever positions. Contact block plungers 1, 2, 3, 4
are depressed (change state) when handle is in the position
indicated by arrows below.
Legend required
Size of characters: 3/16,
1/8, 3/32 in (4.8, 3.2, 2.4 mm)
Location by letter (A–N)
●
●
●
Locations K and M can accommodate up to two lines
horizontally; L and N up to two lines vertically.
Circuit Activation
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
Maximum number of characters:
Horizontal
3/16 in—13, 1/8 in—14, 3/32 in—19
Vertical
3/16 in—10, 1/8 in—13, 3/32 in—14
●
●
Ordering Example:
Two-position legend plate to be marked “UP” “DOWN.”
1
1
1
1
1
Note: Joystick in its resting state, center position, does not activate
contact block plungers.
Ordering Example:
Suppose you are looking for a four-position momentary joystick
without a latch and the following circuit arrangements.
X = Closed Circuit, O = Open Circuit.
Two-Position
Example Circuit Arrangements
2.19
(55.6)
Sq.
Circuit
Up
Down
Left
Right
1st
X
X
X
X
1
2nd
X
O
O
X
1
The contact blocks and their mounting locations would be as
follows:
1
1
Example Contact Blocks and Locations
2nd
1st
Circuit Circuit
1
1
1
NO
NO
NC
NO
10250T1 10250T2
NC
1
NO
L
N
M
M
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Blank Plate
10250TJS3
10250TJS4
Engraved Plate
10250TJS3STAMP
10250TJS4STAMP
Four-Position
C
A
B
C
D
F
E
G
J
H
Catalog Number
1
A complete bill of material for this example would include:
1
Example Order
1
K
K
A
B
D
F
E
G
J
H
NO
NO
10250T1 10250T2
1
1
Catalog No. 10250TJ2S4STAMP
Letter Size: 3/16 in (4.8 mm)
Pos. K—UP
Pos. M—DOWN
10250TJS1
Qty.
Catalog Number
1
10250T451
2
10250T2
2
10250T1
Catalog Number
Blank Plate
10250TJS2
Engraved Plate
10250TJS1STAMP
10250TJS2STAMP
1
1
1
V7-T1-248
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Roto-Push Units
1
Two-Position Momentary
Complete assembled twoposition Roto-Push® Units are
listed below. These operators
have black flush buttons and
are arranged for vertical
mounting. Order legend
plates separately.
Mounting Location
1
Locating
Nib
1
A
1
B
1
1
Roto-Push—Black
Flush Button
Roto-Push Units—UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
1
Operator Position 1
Collar Left
Typical Applications
(Most Common Examples)
1
Collar Right
Normal
Depressed
Normal
Depressed
FORWARD/REVERSE;
HIGH/LOW; OPEN/CLOSE;
UP/DOWN; etc.
O
O
O
X
O
O
X
O
JOG/RUN; MAN./AUTO;
etc.
O
O
Contact
Type
Mounting Location
A
B
Catalog Number 2
Two-Position
1NO
10250T2411-2
O
X
X
X
1NO
10250T24111-2
O
X
X
X
O
O
X
O
1NO
10250T24111-1
1NC
SAFE/RUN; etc.
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
1NO
1
1
10250T2415-2
1NO
Two-Position Latched
The two-position Roto-Push
Latch Unit is fully assembled
and only requires a legend
plate for a great variety of
applications. When the
selector collar is in the
extreme left position, the
button is in the free or normal
position and can be operated
as a standard pushbutton.
Rotating the collar to the
1
1
1NO
RUN/JOG; START/JOG;
etc.
1
1
1NO
X
O
1
1
1
1
1
extreme right position
automatically depresses and
latches the button in the
depressed position. The
white filled groove in the
button indicates the selector
collar position. The selector
collar has spring return to the
left position except when in
the extreme right latched
position.
1
1
1
1
1
Red Long
Rotates to a Latch-Out Mode
Color and Type
of Button
Contact
Block
Vertical Mounting
Catalog Number
Red long
1NC
2NC
10250T72
1
1
1
10250T73
Notes
1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2 Roto-Push assembled with contact blocks.
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-249
1.9
1
1
1
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Roto-Push Operators
Roto-Push Components
A Roto-Push control unit
combines the function of a
pushbutton and a selector
switch. The contacts are
operated by the combined
action of rotating the outer
collar and pushing a button
contained in the collar.
1
1
In selecting the cam and
contact blocks for the listed
function, the analysis involves
considering the function with
the collar rotated to the given
position with the button free
(designated as “N”) and then
in that same position with
the button depressed
(designated “D”). This is done
for each rotational position of
the collar.
1
1
Operator and Cam
When Ordering Specify
Catalog number of
operator with cam code
suffix from tables below
and on following pages,
Example: 10250T2411.
●
Catalog number(s) for
contact blocks and legend
plates if required.
●
To select the cam and
contact blocks needed for
two-position and threeposition switches, use the
tables on following pages.
●
Operator and Cam
1
Color and
Type of
Button
Cam Code No.
Select from Tables
Vertical Mounting
Catalog and
Code Number
1
Black flush
+ 1 to 18
Horizontal Mounting
Catalog and
Code Number
10250T241_
10250T251_
Red flush 1
10250T242_
10250T252_
Green flush
10250T243_
10250T253_
1
Black long
10250T261_
10250T271_
Red long 1
10250T262_
10250T272_
1
Green long
10250T263_
10250T273_
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Two-Position Roto-Push Operator—Rotates to a Latch-Out Mode
Special Rotor Latch
This differs from the other
Roto-Push operators in that
as the collar is rotated to the
right it depresses the button
and releases the button when
rotated left. But the button in
the released position can be
momentarily pushed
independent of the collar or
its position. As the button is
depressed by rotating the
collar, the button also rotates
and indicates its mode by a
white line on the button face.
This button can be used as an
emergency stop or latched
stop.
1
1
Special Roto Latch—
Red Long Button
1
1
1
Special Rotor Latch—
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Color and Type
of Button
Vertical Mounting
Catalog Number
Red long
10250T3213
Black long
10250T3214
Note
1 Not to be used for emergency stop application.
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-250
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Cam and Contact Block Selection for Two-Position Roto-Push
1
Collar Position
1
1
Combination
Number
Circuit Sequence
N
D
N
D
1
O
O
O
X
Cam Code 1
A
2
O
3
O
O
O
X
X
O
X
Cam Code 2
NO
—
A
Cam Code 4
—
—
Cam Code 5
A
—
—
—
O
X
O
O
B
5
O
X
O
X
A
B
NO
NO
NO
A
NC
B
NO
—
NC
A
NC
B
NO
B
NO
NO
O
X
X
O
—
—
—
7
O
X
X
X
—
—
A or B NO
8
X
O
O
O
—
9
X
O
O
X
—
10
X
O
X
O
A
NC
B
NC
11
X
O
X
X
B
12
X
X
O
O
—
13
X
X
O
O
—
14
X
X
X
O
A
—
—
NC
—
A
6
B
NC
1
A
NO
A
NC
B
NO
—
—
—
—
—
NO
A or B NC
B
NC
—
—
—
A
NC
1
1
1
—
B
1
1
NO
B
NO
—
B
NC
—
—
—
—
1
1
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
B
—
—
NO
NC
NO
—
—
A
B
1
—
—
—
B
1
NO
A
B
4
1
Cam Code 6
—
NO
—
—
Cam Code 3
A
B
NC
A
NO
NC
NC
1
1
1
NC
A
NC
—
A
B
—
NO
NC
A
B
A
NO
NC
NC
—
1
1
—
1
Series and Parallel
Connections
A
B
NO
NC
Circuit Location
1
Locating
Nib
1
1
A
Series Connection
B
A
B
1
NO
NC
Parallel Connection
The connections are not
made at the factory. They are
illustrated in the selection
table as requirements, but
must be made on the job.
1
Letters “A” and “B”
represent the locations which
the two circuits of a contact
block will occupy in relation
to the locating nib of the
operator.
1
1
1
Note
1 N = Button in free or normal position. D = Button depressed.
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1
V7-T1-251
1.9
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Cam and Contact Block Selection for Two-Position Roto-Push, continued
Collar Position
1
1
Combination
Number
Circuit Sequence 1
N
D
N
D
Cam Code 10
15
O
X
—
O
O
Cam Code 11
1
1
1
1
A
B
16
O
17
O
O
18
O
O
X
X
X
O
O
1
1
19
O
X
O
1
1
1
1
1
A
NO
A
B
X
A
20
O
X
X
O
21
O
X
X
X
22
X
O
O
23
X
O
24
X
25
1
1
—
1
1
—
O
A
NC
A
NC
B
NC
B
NC
O
X
—
—
O
X
O
—
A
X
O
X
X
A
NC
A
B
26
X
X
O
O
B
NC
B
27
X
X
O
O
—
X
X
O
Series and Parallel
Connections
A
B
A
—
—
—
—
—
NC
B
—
B
A
B
NC
NO
A
B
NO
NC
—
NC
NO
NO
NC
—
—
—
A
B
—
—
—
—
—
A
B
—
—
—
—
B
—
—
—
B
NC
NO
NC
A
A
B
NC
NC
—
NO
A
—
—
Circuit Location
A
B
A
B
NO
NC
Parallel Connection
Letters “A” and “B”
represent the locations which
the two circuits of a contact
block will occupy in relation
to the locating nib of the
operator.
1
1
Note
1 N = Button in free or normal position. D = Button depressed.
V7-T1-252
NO
NC
NO
NO
NC
NC
A or B NO
A
B
Locating
Nib
NO
NC
NC
NO
—
NO
NO
The connections are not
made at the factory. They are
illustrated in the selection
table as requirements, but
must be made on the job.
1
NO
A
B
Series Connection
1
NO
NC
NO
NO
X
A or B NC
A
NO
A
B
28
Cam Code 14
—
—
1
1
NO
B
1
1
NC
B
NO
O
1
1
A
B
Cam Code 13
—
NO
NO
X
1
1
—
Cam Code 12
—
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
NO
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Cam and Contact Block Selection for Three-Position Roto-Push
1
Collar Position
1
Combination
Number
Circuit Sequence 1
N D N D N
D
1
O
X
O
O
O
O
Cam Code 7
A
B
2
O
3
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
O
X
O
Cam Code 8
A
NO
NO B
—
NC
—
—
B
NO
O
O
X
O
X
—
—
5
O
O
O
X
X
X
—
—
NO
A
B
NO
NC
—
7
O
O
8
O
O
9
O
O
10
O
O
11
X
O
X
X
X
X
X
O
O
X
X
X
X
O
O
O
O
X
X
O
O
O
X
O
—
NO
NO
B
NO
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
B
A
B
A
—
—
A
B
NO
1
NO
A
NO A
NO B
O
X
X
—
—
—
—
—
13
O
X
O
X
O
O
—
—
—
—
—
X
X
O
O
—
16
O
X
X
X
O
X
—
17
O
X
X
X
X
X
—
A
A
B
A
B
NO
NO
NO
NO
—
The connections are not made at the factory.
They are illustrated in the selection table as
requirements, but must be made on the job.
NO
NC
Series Connection
NO
NO
NO
NO
—
A
B
NO
NC
—
NO
NO
1
—
1
—
A
NO
A
B
NO
NO
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
A
1
1
1
1
Letters “A” and “B” represent the locations
which the two circuits of a contact block will
occupy in relation to the locating nib of the
operator.
NO
NC
1
1
Parallel Connection
1
Notes
1 N = Button in free or normal position. D = Button depressed.
2 Limited to 4 contact blocks. See Note on Page V7-T1-266.
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1
1
B
A
B
1
1
Circuit Location
Locating
Nib
1
1
NO
Series and Parallel Connections
A
B
1
2
NO
NC
O
X
1
1
X
O
1
1
O
15
NO
—
12
—
B
—
—
—
X
NO
NO
—
NO A
NC B
O
A
B
—
A
B
X
1
—
—
O
O
1
—
NO
1
NO
X
1
—
B
O
NO
—
NO
14
NC
B
—
B
A
A
—
NC
X
1
—
A
X
NO
Cam Code 18
NO
—
A
B
B
A
—
2
Cam Code 17
—
—
—
A
O
NO
—
B
—
O
Cam Code 16
2
—
4
6
Cam Code 15 2
Cam Code 9
1
V7-T1-253
1.9
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Cam and Contact Block Selection for Three-Position Roto-Push, continued
Collar Position
1
Circuit Sequence 1
1
Combination
Number
N
D
N
D
N
D
Cam Code 7
1
18
X
O
O
O
O
O
A
NC
B
NC
Cam Code 8 2
Cam Code 9
Cam Code 15
Cam Code 16
Cam Code 17
Cam Code 18
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
A
NC
B
NC
1
19
X
O
O
O
X
X
—
A
1
20
X
O
O
O
X
O
—
A
NC
B
NC
1
1
1
1
21
X
O
X
X
O
O
—
NC
—
22
X
O
X
X
X
X
A
B
NC A
NO B
23
X
O
X
X
X
O
A
NC —
NC —
NO
—
A
—
—
A
NC
B
NC
1
1
24
X
O
X
O
X
O
—
—
1
25
X
O
X
O
X
X
—
1
26
X
X
O
O
O
O
B
1
27
X
X
O
O
O
X
28
X
X
O
O
X
O
—
B
29
X
X
O
O
X
X
—
A
B
1
30
X
X
X
X
O
O
—
—
1
31
X
X
X
X
X
O
A
B
32
X
X
X
O
X
O
—
1
A
B
NC
NO
NC
—
—
—
—
A
—
NC
A
NC
B
NC
A
2
NC
NC
—
B
NC
—
A
B
—
—
—
A
NC
B
NC
—
—
A
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
NC —
NO
—
—
—
—
—
A
—
B
NC2
NC
NO
NC
1
1
1
1
33
X
X
X
O
X
X
—
NC A
NC B
NC A
NO B
B
NO
NC
—
—
NC
—
—
2
—
1
1
Series and Parallel Connections
1
A
B
1
Series Connection
1
1
1
NO
NC
The connections are not made at the factory.
They are illustrated in the selection table as
requirements, but must be made on the job.
B
NC
A
B
NO
NC
NC
NC
—
—
B
—
—
A
B
NO
NC
NC
NC
NC
Circuit Location
Locating
Nib
A
Letters “A” and “B” represent the locations
which the two circuits of a contact block will
occupy in relation to the locating nib of the
operator.
NO
NC
Parallel Connection
Notes
1 N = Button in free or normal position. D = Button depressed.
2 Limited to 4 contact blocks. See Note on Page V7-T1-266.
1
V7-T1-254
A
B
—
B
A
B
—
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Accessories
1
Padlocks not included with
padlocking attachments. For
operators with built-in
padlock attachment, see
Page V7-T1-220.
1
1
1
Accessories
Description
Catalog Number
1
Padlock Attachments
10250TA2
10250TA26
Padlocking Attachment for Flush Pushbutton Operators
Permits locking NC contacts in open position with 1/4 in padlock.
Will not lock NO contact.
10250TA2
Padlocking Attachment for Use with Extended Pushbutton
Permits locking NC contacts in open position with 1/4 in padlock.
10250TA26
1
1
1
1
10250TA36
10250TA38
Padlocking Cover Guard
Cover locked over flush button makes it unaccessible or on extended button
locks NC contacts open. Takes 1/4 in shank size padlock.
10250TA36
Padlock Hasp or Flip-Up Guard
When used with a 1/4 in padlock, makes flush and long button and knob selector
switch unaccessible, but not locked down. Without the padlock, it is a flip-up guard.
Padlock hasp can be removed before assembly.
10250TA38
1
1
1
1
1
10250TA63
Padlocking Attachment for Use with Flexible Weather Resistant Boot
Used on long button operators. Stainless steel. Use only for locking NC contacts open.
10250TA63
1
1
10250TA64
10250TA11
Padlock Attachment
For use with illuminated pushbuttons and maintained push-pull operators having
standard button or lens only. Use 1/4 in padlock. Locks in down position only.
10250TA64
Padlocking Attachment for Non-Illuminated Knob Selector Switches
Provision for up to 5, 1/4 in padlocks.
10250TA11
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-255
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Accessories, continued
1
Description
1
Catalog Number
Shrouds and Guards
10250TA6
Shroud for Mushroom Head Operator
Prevents accidental operation. (Not for push-pull operators.)
10250TA6
10250TA12
Extended Retaining Nut
Replaces standard nut and provides guard for flush head pushbutton operators.
10250TA12
10250TA15
Guard for Illuminated Pushbutton
10250TA15
10250TA56_
Shroud
For jumbo mushroom head operator.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Gray
10250TA56
Yellow
10250TA56Y
10250ED1241
Half Shroud—Yellow
For jumbo mushroom head operator.
10250ED1241
10250TA101
Fingerproof Shroud—10 per package
Fits new style contact blocks and light units.
10250TA101
1
1
1
1
1
1
Boots
10250TA_
1
1
1
Flexible Weather Resistant Boot
For use with button operators (extended buttons preferred).
Temperature to –25°F (–32°C).
(See Page V7-T1-259 for 10250TA96 Tightening Tool.)
Black
10250TA3
Red
10250TA4 1
Green
10250TA25
Transparent Boot
For regular illuminated pushbutton operators and PresTest—
Temperature to –38°F (–39°C). 2
10250TA4_
Boot for Flush Pushbutton
1
10250TA10
10250TA25
1
1
Clear
10250TA46
1
Black
10250TA47
Red
10250TA48
1
Green
10250TA49
Notes
1 Should not be used on flush button for STOP function.
2 Not suitable for single contact block depth cast enclosure. Cover is too thick.
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-256
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Accessories, continued
Description
1
Catalog Number
1
Hardware and Kits
10250TK3
10250TK5
56-9337
Thrust Washers—
To meet Ford Motor Co. mounting specifications.
10250TK3
Contact Block Tape Seal—
Seals plunger openings on last contact block. Order in multiples of 10 pieces.
10250TK5
Selector Switch Operator Gasket—
Seals out dust from getting in-between the cam and contact block plungers.
Supplied as standard with all selector switches.
56-9337
1
1
1
1
1
1
10250TA3_
10250TA62
Special Retaining Nut—
To accommodate thick panel:
1
Indicating lights
10250TA30
PresTest, pushbuttons and selector switches
10250TA31
Terminal Block—
Two terminals, each will accommodate two wire terminations.
1
1
10250TA62
1
1
10250TA8
Spacer Ring—
Used when legend plate is not required.
10250TA8
10250TA79
Stacking Screw—
Replaces transformer mounting screws on indicating light so terminal block
10250TA62 can be mounted to light to support and connect a series resistor.
This screw also fits all contact blocks. Order in multiples of 10.
10250TA79
10250TA2_
Base Mounting Spacers 1—
1
1
10250TKG_
10250TA7_
1
1
Equivalent to contact block in depth
(one block deep).
10250TA22
1
Complete with screws, washers, etc.
(two block deep).
10250TA23
1
1
Grounding Kits—
Kits consist of a ring connector and a #6 screw for mounting connector to rear
of contact block mounting screw.
1
All components except standard indicating lights and PresTest indicating lights.
10250TKG1
Standard indicating lights
10250TKG2 2
PresTest indicating lights
10250TKG3 2
1
1
Contact Block Terminal Jumpers—
Available in multiples of 100 only.
1
Terminal to terminal—within block (short)
100 per pkg.
10250TA70
1000 per pkg.
10250TA70-2
1
Terminal to terminal—block to block (long)
1
100 per pkg.
10250TA71
1000 per pkg.
10250TA71-2
1
Notes
1 Component only. Not to be used for custom built (factory assembled) stations.
2 Not suitable for single contact block depth cast enclosure. Cover is too thick.
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-257
1.9
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Accessories, continued
1
Description
1
Catalog Number
Special Operators and Attachments
10250TA5
Wobble Stick
Complete with retaining nut—fits standard button.
10250TA5
10250TA14
Lever Operator
For use with two vertically mounted flush pushbuttons.
10250TA14
10250TA_
Maintained Contact Attachment Release Button Assembly 1
Mechanically interlocks with another pushbutton and contact block (not included).
Provides mode indication. Minimum hole centers 1.62 in (41.1 mm), maximum
2.313 in (58.8 mm).
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
1
1
1
1
1
Black
10250TA17
Red
10250TA18
1
Green
10250TA19
Yellow
10250TA20
1
1
Same with Long Button—Black
10250TA39
1
10250TA1
Maintained Contact Attachment
Mechanically interlocks two buttons and provides position indication for one.
Use with two pushbutton operators and one or more contact blocks.
10250TA1
10250TA13
Roto-Push Lever Operator—
Used to provide lever operation for Roto-Push operators.
10250TA13
1
1
1
1
1
1
Special Light Modules
10250TA79
1
48 Vdc
1
1
10250TFL_
1
1
1
Master Test (Dual Input) Module—
Internal Form C relay suitable for either AC or DC applications. Total electrical isolation
between monitored and test circuit. Fits all illuminated 10250T, E22, E30 and E34 devices.
10250ED986-4
1
10250TMT8
Flasher Module—
Changes any AC illuminated device to a controlled flashing light.
Fits 10250T, E30 and E34 devices.
24V
10250TFL2
120V
10250TFL1
Flashing Incandescent Lamp—
For use with 120V transformer type or 6V full voltage type indicating lights including
PresTest and most E29 devices.
10250ED986-4
1
1
Note
1 Not suitable for single contact block depth cast enclosure. Cover is too thick.
1
1
1
V7-T1-258
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Accessories, continued
Description
1
Catalog Number
1
Hole Plugs
10250TA7
Plug—
For unused holes—steel, painted gray (stainless steel, use E30KT5, see Page V7-T1-206)
10250TA7
1
1
Tools
10250TA95
Octagonal 10250T (notched to fit over selector switch lever), E29 and E30
1
10250TA95
1
1
E22CW
E22, E30, E34 and octagonal 10250T (will not fit over selector switch levers)
E22CW
10250TA96
Tool for Tightening Boots—
Used to install boot Catalog Numbers 10250TA3, A4, A10 and A25.
10250TA96
10250T, E34 Allen Wrench—
Used for removal of jumbo mushroom head.
10250TA102
10250TA74
Lamp Removal Tools—
For transformer type illuminated pushbuttons, push-pull and selector switches.
Fits #12 lamp.
10250TA74
E30KV1
For full voltage and resistor type illuminated pushbuttons, push-pull and
selector switches and E30.
E30KV1
E29KLT
Standard indicating lights. Fits #44, #755, #6S6 and #10S6.
E29KLT
10250TA102
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-259
1.9
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Options
Legend Plates
1
1
1
1
1
Legend Plates with Standard Markings
The legend plates listed
spacing less than 1.75 in,
below are sized for all
replace the S in the catalog
standard commercial
number with MS, or the M
enclosures and Eaton’s cast
with P (except push-pull). No
enclosures. For vertical
change in price. The smaller
size legend plates, “MS” or
“P” size, have limited space
for legend.
For Pushbutton Operators and Indicating Lights—Standard
Square Legend Plate
1
Legend
Color of
Field
Square 1
Catalog Number
1/2 Round
Catalog Number
Legend
Color of
Field
Square 1
Catalog Number
1/2 Round
Catalog Number
Blank—see table on Page V7-T1-262.
1
1/2 Round Legend Plate
Letters on Legend Plates Below are 3/16 in High
1
CLAMP
10250TS90
10250TM90
OFF
Red
10250TS24
10250TM24
CLOSE
10250TS73
10250TM11
ON
Black
10250TS25
10250TM25
1
DOWN
10250TS74
10250TM12
OPEN
10250TS26
10250TM26
1
Black
EMERG. STOP
Red
10250TS13
10250TM13
OUT
10250TS27
10250TM27
FAST
Black
10250TS75
10250TM14
POWER ON
10250TS80
10250TM80
1
FASTER
10250TS87
10250TM87
RAISE
10250TS28
10250TM28
FEEDER ON
10250TS94
10250TM94
READY
10250TS86
10250TM86
1
FEEDER OFF
10250TS95
10250TM95
RESET
10250TS29
10250TM29
FORWARD
10250TS15
10250TM15
REVERSE
10250TS30
10250TM30
HIGH
10250TS16
10250TM16
RUN
10250TS31
10250TM31
IN
10250TS17
10250TM17
SAFE
10250TS85
10250TM85
INCH
10250TS18
10250TM18
SLOW
10250TS32
10250TM32
1
JOG
10250TS19
10250TM19
SLOWER
10250TS88
10250TM88
JOG FOR.
10250TS20
10250TM20
START
10250TS33
10250TM33
1
JOG REV.
10250TS21
10250TM21
STOP
Red
10250TS34
10250TM34
LOW
10250TS22
10250TM22
TEST
Black
10250TS83
10250TM83
LOWER
10250TS23
10250TM23
TRANSFER
10250TS93
10250TM93
LUBE-FAIL
10250TS92
10250TM92
TRIP
10250TS84
10250TM84
MOTOR RUN
10250TS81
10250TM81
UNCLAMP
10250TS91
10250TM91
MOTOR STOP
10250TS82
10250TM82
UP
10250TS35
10250TM35
1
1
1
1
1
1
Blank Plastic Legend Plates—Square
1
Color
1
1
Lettering
Field
Standard
Catalog Number
Jumbo 2
Catalog Number
Extra Large
Catalog Number
Black
White or silver 3
10250TSP76
10250TLP76
10250TEP76
White
Red or black 3
10250TSP77
10250TLP77
10250TEP77
Notes
1 Square legend plates have a satin aluminum field. Color is on lower portion.
2 Cannot be used on cast enclosures except for top row. Suitable for most sheet metal enclosures.
3 If legend plate is to be engraved, specify field color required.
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-260
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Square Legend Plate
1.9
For Selector Switch and Roto-Push Operators—Standard Size
Square 1
Catalog Number
1/2 Round
Catalog Number
Legend
10250TS38
10250TM38
AUTO OFF HAND
HAND AUTO
10250TS39
10250TM39
HIGH LOW
10250TS40
10250TM40
JOG RUN
10250TS41
MAN. AUTO
10250TS67
OFF ON
Legend
Color of
Field
Color of
Field
Square 1
Catalog Number
1/2 Round
Catalog Number
Blank—see table on Page V7-T1-262.
1/2 Round Legend Plate
70 mm Round—Plastic
Legend Plate
2-Position—5/32 in High Lettering
FOR. REV.
Black
3-Position—1/8 in High Lettering
Black
10250TS49
10250TM49
FOR. OFF REV.
10250TS50
10250TM50
FOR. SAFE REV.
10250TS69
10250TM69
10250TM41
HAND OFF AUTO
10250TS51
10250TM51
10250TM67
MAN. OFF AUTO
10250TS68
10250TM68
10250TS42
10250TM42
OPEN OFF CLOSE
10250TS53
10250TM53
OPEN CLOSE
10250TS43
10250TM43
RUN SAFE JOG
10250TS70
10250TM70
RUN JOG
10250TS44
10250TM44
UP OFF DOWN
10250TS54
10250TM54
SAFE RUN
10250TS45
10250TM45
ON STOP SAFE
10250TS71
10250TM71
START JOG
10250TS46
10250TM46
START STOP
10250TS47
10250TM47
UP DOWN
10250TS48
10250TM48
Red
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Color
Field
Catalog Number
Yellow or red 2
10250TRP78
Blank
Yellow or red
10250TRP76
Red EMERG. STOP
Yellow
1
45 mm
Blank
1
1
45 mm and 70 mm Plastic—Round
Lettering
1
1
70 mm
2
1
10250TRP79
1
For Push-Pull Units
Legend
3
Color of
Field
Square 1
Catalog Number
1
1/2 Round
Catalog Number
1
Standard Size—Letters on Legend Plates Below are 3/32 in High
1
PULL START/PUSH STOP
Green/red
10250TPP2
10250TR2
PUSH ON/PULL OFF
Black
10250TPP5
10250TR5
PULL OPEN/PUSH CLOSE
Black
10250TPP8
10250TR8
PULL UP/PUSH DOWN
Black
10250TPP11
10250TR11
1
1
1
Jumbo Size—Letters on Legend Plates Below are 1/8 in High
PULL START/PUSH STOP
Green/red
10250TPP3
10250TR3
PULL ON/PUSH OFF
Black
10250TPP6
10250TR6
PULL OPEN/PUSH CLOSE
Black
10250TPP9
10250TR9
PULL UP/PUSH DOWN
Black
10250TPP12
10250TR12
1
1
Notes
1 Square legend plates have a satin aluminum field. Color is on lower portion.
2 If legend plate is to be engraved, specify field color required.
3 All push-pull legend plates include the symbols
in the center of the plate.
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-261
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1
Legend Plates with Non-Standard Markings
When Ordering Specify
Ordering Example:
1
●
1
1
1
1
1
●
Catalog number of blank
plate phase plus Suffix
“STAMP.”
Insert the following into
Order Notes: legend, letter
size and locations (letters
A–W)—combine letters for
definitive locations as
shown.
Catalog No.:
10250TS36STAMP
Letter Size: 3/32 in (2.4 mm)
Pos. A—POWER HOUSE
Pos. B—START PUMP 1
Legend Characters
Available
Blackening Kit
Solution blackens aluminum
exposed by engraving
process. Must be applied
immediately after engraving.
0.3 oz. bottle—sufficient for
approximately 1100 legend
plates.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO
PQRSTUVWXYZ/-.,1
234567890
Legend characters on black
and red plates are white—
on satin aluminum plates,
characters are black.
Catalog Number: 10250TBK
Legend Positions
1
Extra Large Size
Cat. No. 10250TNP99
Small Size
10250TMS or TP Series
A
A
1
Standard Size
10250TS or TM Series
A
B
Jumbo Size
10250TL or TJ Series
C
1
D
A
B
C
D
K
K
1
L
1
B
G
F
AB
AE
AF
B4
C4
A4
D4
G
A
H
I
1
1
1
1
Blank and Custom Engraved Legend Plates
Jumbo 2
Catalog Number
Extra Large 3
Catalog Number
Four-Position Selector Switch
Standard
Custom 4
Catalog Number Catalog Number
Push-Pull with Symbols 1
Standard
Jumbo 2
Catalog Number Catalog Number
Style
Color
Square 5
Black
10250TMS36
10250TS36
10250TL36
—
10250TS76
10250TS72
10250TPP17
10250TPP18
Red
10250TMS37
10250TS37
10250TL37
—
—
—
—
—
1
1
Standard
Catalog Number
Small
Catalog Number
1/2 Round
1
Green/red
—
—
—
—
—
—
10250TPP20
10250TPP21
Satin alum.
—
—
—
10250TNP99
—
—
—
—
Black
10250TP36
10250TM36
10250TJ36
—
—
10250TM72
10250TR17
10250TR18
Red
10250TP37
10250TM37
10250TJ37
—
—
—
—
—
Green/red
—
—
—
—
—
—
10250TR20
10250TR21
Satin alum.
—
10250TM89
10250TJ89
—
—
—
—
—
1
1
1
1
1
Maximum Characters per Legend Plate and Approximate Dimensions
Top
(Aluminum
and Plastic)
Approximate Dimensions
in Inches (mm)
Width
Height
Small 6
1.59 (40.4)
1.59 (40.4)
Standard and
custom
1.75 (44.5)
1
Jumbo 7
2.19 (55.6)
2.19 (55.6)
1
Extra large 3
2.44 (62.0)
2.44 (62.0)
1
1
1
1
1.75 (44.5)
Character Size
3/32 in High
Number
Number of
of Lines
Characters
1/8 in High
Number
of Lines
Square
1
17
1/2 Round
1
15
Style
Number of
Characters
3/16 in High
Number
of Lines
—
—
—
—
1
12
1
9
9
Square
2
18
2
13
1
1/2 Round
2
15
2
12
1
9
Square
5
23
3
18
2
12
1/2 Round
5
19
4
15
2
11
Square
6
25
3
18
3
12
Notes
1 All push-pull legend plates include the symbols
in the center of the plate.
2 Cannot be used on cast enclosures except for top row. Suitable for most sheet metal enclosures.
3 When used to meet Ford Motor Co. specifications, specify engraved legend. Cannot be used on standard cast or sheet metal enclosures.
4 Slightly larger than standard size for legends requiring more space—fits cast enclosures.
5 Square legend plates have a satin aluminum field. Color is on lower portion.
6 Recommended only when mounting on minimum centers (less than 1-3/4 in [44.5 mm] vertical centers).
7 Can be used on top row only of any enclosure.
V7-T1-262
Number of
Characters
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Enclosures
1
Die Cast, Polyester and Stainless Steel Enclosures
1
Enclosures (Case and Cover)—Surface Mounting 1
Number of
Elements
1
Two Contact Block Depth
Catalog Number
1
Die Cast Enclosure—In-Line 234 NEMA 4, 4X, 12, 13
Die Cast Enclosure
Polyester Enclosure
1
10250TN1
10250TN11
2
10250TN2
10250TN12
3
10250TN3
10250TN13
4
—
10250TN14
1
1
1
Polyester 4—In-Line NEMA 3, 4X, 12
1
Stainless Steel
Enclosure
One Contact Block Depth
Catalog Number
—
E34N51
2
—
E34N52
3
—
E34N53
4
—
E34N54
1
1
1
Stainless Steel 45—In-Line NEMA 4, 4X, 12
1
—
10250TN33
2
—
10250TN34
3
—
10250TN35
4
—
10250TN36
1
1
1
1
Dimensions, see Page V7-T1-276.
1
1
Mounting Instructions
One and Two Contact Block
Depth Enclosures
1
Enclosure Layouts
1
Top – For Vertical Mounting
1
One Contact
Block Depth
Enclosure
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
Two Contact
Block Depth
Enclosure
4
Top – For Horizontal
Mounting
Two-position joystick must be
used with two contact block
deep enclosures (maximum
number of contact blocks = 1).
Four-position joysticks cannot
be used within these
enclosures.
1
1
1
1
Notes
1 For spacing increments, see Page V7-T1-264.
2 All die cast enclosures can be converted to base mounting of contact blocks, with spacers 10250TA22 or 10250TA23.
See listing on Page V7-T1-257.
3 When used with E30 pushbuttons, only the one element enclosure can be used.
4 When used with resistor light units, only the 2 contact block depth enclosure can be used.
5 14 gauge, type 304.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-263
1.9
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Die Cast and Stainless Steel—Flush Mount, Covers Only
Flush Mounting Covers
Covers Only—Flush Mounting
Number of
Elements
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
In-Line Flat
Cover
1
10250TF11
10250TF1
2
10250TF12
10250TF2
3
10250TF13
10250TF3
4
10250TF14
10250TF4
With Pullbox
Without Pullbox
1
10250TS10
10250TS1
2
10250TS11
10250TS2
3
10250TS12
10250TS3
4
10250TS14
10250TS4
Dimensions, see Page V7-T1-277.
1
1
In-Line Deep
Cover
In-Line Stainless Steel Flush Plates 1
1
1
Catalog Number
Flush Die Cast Covers
1
1
Catalog Number
Spacing Increments
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Type
F
G
H
Die cast
2.44 (62.0)
2.5 (63.5)
1.88 (47.8)
Polyester
1.88 (47.8)
Min. 2.13 (54.1)
2.25 (57.2)
Stainless steel
1.69 (42.9)
Min. 1.73 (43.9)
2.25 (57.2)
1
1
Spacing Increments for
Enclosures
Top – For Vertical Mounting
G
1
H
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
4
F
Top – For Horizontal
Mounting
1
1
Enclosure Layouts
Note
1 Not oiltight. NEMA 1 applications only.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-264
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Contact Blocks
Standard Contact Blocks
●
UL A600/P600 rated
●
Color-coded plungers—red/
green for NC/NO circuits
●
Silver contact tips with
“reliability nibs”
●
Gray (opaque) or amber
(translucent) housings
●
Pressure plate or spade
terminals
●
Fingerproof shrouds (for
pressure terminals only)
Logic Level Contact Blocks
●
UL A600/P600 rated
●
Color-coded plungers
●
Inert palladium knife-blade
contacts
●
Gray (opaque) housings
●
Pressure plate or spade
terminals
Special Function Contact Blocks
●
UL A600/P600 rated
●
Color-coded plungers
●
Silver contact tips with
“reliability nibs”
●
Gray (opaque) housings
●
Pressure plate terminals
only
1
Special Purpose Contact Block
●
Maximum 300V rated
●
Black plungers
●
Silver contact tips with
“reliability nibs”
●
Black (opaque) housings
●
Pressure plate terminals
only
●
Fingerproof shrouds not
available
Reliability Nibs
Reliability nibs are the
hallmark of Eaton’s contact
blocks. A pointed silver nib on
the contact tip ensures
reliable switching from logic
level (5V) up to 600V
applications. Therefore
standard contact blocks can
be used for most logic level
applications where the
contacts are not exposed to
any harsh environmental
conditions.
Palladium Contacts
Palladium, which is more
inert than gold, is well suited
for voltages and currents
approaching zero and is
recommended for applications
where environmental
conditions are a factor.
1
1
1
1
Maximum Contact Block
Mounting per Operator Type
1
Max.
Stack
1
Pushbuttons
6
Push-pull operators
2
1
Operator
Roto-push operators
4
Two- or three-position
selector switches
6
Four-position selector
switches
4
Joysticks
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-265
1.9
1
10250T1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Contact Blocks
Standard
1
Symbol
Circuit
Description 1
Logic Level
Pressure Terminal
Catalog Number
Spade Terminal 2
Catalog Number
Pressure Terminal
Catalog Number
Spade Terminal 2
Catalog Number
1
Blank
No
Plunger
1NC
Stack up to six blocks (six circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T51
10250T59
10250T51E
10250T59E
1
Blank
No
Plunger
1NO
Stack up to six blocks six circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T53
10250T60
10250T53E
10250T60E
NO-NC
Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T1
10250T40
10250T1E
10250T40E
2NC
Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T3
10250T42
10250T3E
10250T42E
2NO
Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T2
10250T41
10250T2E
10250T41E
1
1
1
Special Function Blocks 3
1
LONC
Late opening NC. Stack up to six
blocks (six circuits) unless
otherwise noted.
10250T71 3
—
10250T71E 3
—
ECNONC
Early closing NO and standard NC.
Stack up to six blocks unless
otherwise noted.
10250T47 34
—
10250T47E 3
—
1
ECNONO
Early closing NO and standard NO.
Stack up to four blocks unless
otherwise noted.
10250T57 34
—
10250T57E 3
—
1
2LONC
Two late opening NC contacts.
Stack up to six blocks unless
otherwise noted.
10250T45 3
—
10250T45E 3
—
LONCECNO
Overlapping contacts. Stack up to
10250T55 34
four blocks unless otherwise noted.
—
10250T55E 3
—
Blank
No
Plunger
1
1
1
1
Special Purpose Blocks 5
1
2NO2NC
1
Four circuits in single block depth.
Rated 300V max. Stack up to four
blocks unless otherwise noted.
10250T44 5
—
Notes
1 All 10250T contact blocks shown are suitable for use on standard 10250T and E34 operators. These contact blocks are not suitable for Class I Division 2
type 10250T or E34 devices.
2 Contact blocks with spade terminals are limited to a maximum of one contact block per operator and minimum spacing between devices is 2.5 in (63.5 mm).
Not suitable for use in 10250T or E34 enclosures. Also available in amber housing. Not available with fingerproof shrouds.
3 Special function contact blocks are not suitable for use with roto-push operators, three-position push-pull operators, or four-position selector switches.
4 ECNO contact blocks are not suitable for use with two-position joysticks or when operators are used with padlock attachments.
5 Special purpose 10250T44 contact blocks are not suitable on selector switches or roto-push operators. Okay to use with three-position push-pull operators only
on low voltage (30V or less) circuits. Fingerproof shrouds not available.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-266
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
10250T1CP
Contact Blocks with Fingerproof Shrouds
Circuit
Description 1
Standard
Pressure Terminal 2
Catalog Number
Blank
No
Plunger
1NC
Stack up to six blocks (six circuits) unless otherwise noted.
10250T51P
10250T51EP
Blank
No
Plunger
1NO
Stack up to six blocks (six circuits) unless otherwise noted.
10250T53P
10250T53EP
NO-NC
Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted.
10250T1P
10250T1EP
2NC
Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted.
10250T3P
10250T3EP
2NO
Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted.
10250T2P
10250T2EP
Symbol
Logic Level
Pressure Terminal 2
Catalog Number
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Special Function Blocks 3
LONC
Late opening NC. Stack up to six blocks (six circuits) unless
otherwise noted.
10250T71P 4
10250T71EP 4
1
ECNO-NC
Early closing NO and standard NC. Stack up to six blocks
unless otherwise noted.
10250T47P 34
10250T47EP 4
1
ECNO-NO
Early closing NO and standard NO. Stack up to four blocks
unless otherwise noted.
10250T57P 34
10250T57EP 4
1
2LONC
Two late opening NC contacts. Stack up to six blocks unless
otherwise noted.
10250T45EP
4
1
LONC-ECNO
Overlapping contacts. Stack up to four blocks unless
otherwise noted.
10250T55EP
4
1
Notes
1 All 10250T contact blocks shown are suitable for use on standard 10250T and E34 operators. These contact blocks are not suitable for Class I Division 2
type 10250T or E34 devices.
2 To order contact blocks with translucent amber housing, change suffix P to CP in catalog number e.g. 10250T51CP.
3 ECNO contact blocks are not suitable for use with two-position joysticks or when operators are used with padlock attachments.
4 Special function contact blocks are not suitable for use with roto-push operators, three-position push-pull operators, or four-position selector switches.
1
Blank
No
Plunger
10250T45P
4
10250T55P
34
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-267
1.9
1
10250T1C
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Amber Contact Blocks
Standard
1
Symbol
Circuit
Description 1
Logic Level
Pressure Terminal 2
Catalog Number
Spade Terminal 3
Catalog Number
Pressure Terminal 2
Catalog Number
Spade Terminal 3
Catalog Number
1
Blank
No
Plunger
1NC
Stack up to six blocks (six circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T51C
10250T59C
10250T51EC
10250T59EC
1
Blank
No
Plunger
1NO
Stack up to six blocks (six circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T53C
10250T60C
10250T53EC
10250T60EC
NO-NC
Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T1C
10250T40C
10250T1EC
10250T40EC
2NC
Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T3C
10250T42C
10250T3EC
10250T42EC
2NO
Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T2C
10250T41C
10250T2EC
10250T41EC
1
1
1
Special Function Blocks 3
1
LONC
Late opening NC. Stack up to six
10250T71C 4
blocks (six circuits) unless otherwise
noted.
—
10250T71EC 4
—
ECNONC
Early closing NO and standard NC.
Stack up to six blocks unless
otherwise noted.
10250T47C 45
—
10250T47EC 4
—
1
ECNONO
Early closing NO and standard NO.
Stack up to four blocks unless
otherwise noted.
10250T57C 45
—
10250T57EC 4
—
1
2LONC
Two late opening NC contacts.
Stack up to six blocks unless
otherwise noted.
10250T45C 4
—
10250T45EC 4
—
LONCECNO
Overlapping contacts. Stack up to
10250T55C 45
four blocks unless otherwise noted.
—
10250T55EC 4
—
Blank
No
Plunger
1
1
1
1
Notes
1 All 10250T contact blocks shown are suitable for use on standard 10250T and E34 operators. These contact blocks are not suitable for Class I Division 2
type 10250T or E34 devices.
2 To order amber contact blocks with fingerproof shrouds, change suffix to CP in the catalog number e.g. 10250T51CP. Not available with spade terminals.
3 Contact blocks with spade terminals are limited to a maximum of one contact block per operator and minimum spacing between devices is 2.5 in (63.5 mm).
Not suitable for use in 10250T or E34 enclosures. Also available in amber housing. Not available with fingerproof shrouds.
4 Special function contact blocks are not suitable for use with roto-push operators, three-position push-pull operators, or four-position selector switches.
5 ECNO contact blocks are not suitable for use with two-position joysticks or when operators are used with padlock attachments.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-268
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Replacement Parts
1
Replacement Lamps—For 10250T Illuminated Operators
Mfg. Lamp Type
Voltage
Base Style
Application
Part Number
120MB
120V
T 3-1/4 bayonet
10250T resistor indicating light
28-3044
#267
6.3V
T 3-1/4 bayonet
10250T flasher
10250ED986-4
#755
6.3V
T 3-1/4 bayonet
10250T transformer, PresTest and full voltage
28-2202
#756
12V
T 3-1/4 bayonet
10250T full voltage
28-5184
#757
24V
T 3-1/4 bayonet
10250T full voltage
28-5185
#1828
32V
T 3-1/4 bayonet
10250T full voltage
28-5186
#1835
55V
T 3-1/4 bayonet
10250T resistor
28-5187
NE48
120V
T 4-1/2 bayonet
10250T neon
28-494
NE51H-R22
120V
T 3-1/4 bayonet
10250T neon
28-3754
NE51H-R68
240V
T 3-1/4 bayonet
10250T neon
28-3755
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Standard LED Lamp
Replacement LED Lamps—For 10250T, E34 and E22 Units
Voltage
6–12V
24V
48V
60V
120V
1
Continuous
Flashing
Color
AC/DC
Catalog Number
AC
Catalog Number
DC
Catalog Number
Red
E22LED612RN
E22LED006RAF
E22LED006RDF
Orange
E22LED612ON
E22LED006OAF
E22LED006ODF
Yellow
E22LED612YN
E22LED006YAF
E22LED006YDF
Green
E22LED612GN
E22LED006GAF
E22LED006GDF
Blue
E22LED612BN
E22LED006BAF
E22LED006BDF
White
E22LED612WN
E22LED006WAF
E22LED006WDF
Red
E22LED024RN
E22LED024RAF
E22LED024RDF
Orange
E22LED024ON
E22LED024OAF
E22LED024ODF
Yellow
E22LED024YN
E22LED024YAF
E22LED024YDF
Green
E22LED024GN
E22LED024GAF
E22LED024GDF
Blue
E22LED024BN
E22LED024BAF
E22LED024BDF
White
E22LED024WN
E22LED024WAF
E22LED024WDF
Red
E22LED048RN
E22LED048RAF
E22LED048RDF
Orange
E22LED048ON
E22LED048OAF
E22LED048ODF
Yellow
E22LED048YN
E22LED048YAF
E22LED048YDF
Green
E22LED048GN
E22LED048GAF
E22LED048GDF
Blue
E22LED048BN
E22LED048BAF
E22LED048BDF
White
E22LED048WN
E22LED048WAF
E22LED048WDF
Red
E22LED060RN
E22LED060RAF
E22LED060RDF
Orange
E22LED060ON
E22LED060OAF
E22LED060ODF
Yellow
E22LED060YN
E22LED060YAF
E22LED060YDF
Green
E22LED060GN
E22LED060GAF
E22LED060GDF
Blue
E22LED060BN
E22LED060BAF
E22LED060BDF
White
E22LED060WN
E22LED060WAF
E22LED060WDF
Red
E22LED120RN
E22LED120RAF
E22LED120RDF
Orange
E22LED120ON
E22LED120OAF
E22LED120ODF
Yellow
E22LED120YN
E22LED120YAF
E22LED120YDF
Green
E22LED120GN
E22LED120GAF
E22LED120GDF
Blue
E22LED120BN
E22LED120BAF
E22LED120BDF
White
E22LED120WN
E22LED120WAF
E22LED120WDF
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-269
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1
1
1
1
Flush Head
Pushbutton
Operator
Two-Position
Joystick Operator
Mushroom Head
Pushbutton
Operator
Mushroom Head
Operator with
Padlock Attachment
Jumbo Mushroom
Head Operator
Knob-Operated
Selector Switch
Operator
1
1
1
1
1
1
Four-Position Joystick
Operator (without Latch)
Illuminated
Pushbutton Operator
Full Voltage, Resistor
and Transformer Type
Illuminated Selector Switch
1
10250T Style Operator Replacement Parts
1
Item
No.
Description
No.
Req.
1
1
Gasket
2
Mounting nut
1
3
4
1
1
1
15
Handle
1
24-5045
Knob
1
53-3157
1
53-3159
Gasket (supplied with basic unit)
1
32-803
Round head screw (#4-40 x 0.344 in long)
(supplied with basic unit)
2
11-4553
16
Mounting screw
2
11-1632
17
Simple potentiometer
(does not include items 18, 28 or 29)
1
As Req. Below
2
16-3400
1,000 ohms
—
41-782-2
Set screw (#6-32 x 0.250 in long hollow hex)
2
11-2014
2,500 ohms
—
41-782-3
7
Mushroom head button (includes [2] Item 6)
1
As Req. Below
5,000 ohms
—
41-782-10
Black
—
53-1317
10,000 ohms
—
41-782-4
Red
—
53-1317-2
25,000 ohms
—
41-782-5
Yellow
—
53-1317-3
50,000 ohms
—
41-782-6
Green
—
53-1317-4
18
Connector (includes screw and lug)
2
25-1851
Blue
—
53-1317-22
19
Indicating plate
1
As Req. Above
8
Set screw (#10-32 x 0.250 in long hollow hex)
2
11-544
Standard size (without legend)
—
30-4460
9
Jumbo mushroom head button
(aluminum—includes [2] Item 8)
1
As Req. Below
Large size (specify legend)
—
10250TR30
Red
—
10
11
1
1
12
1
13
53-1317-9
Black
—
53-1317-10
Yellow
—
53-1317-11
Green
1
1
14
15-1530
Part Number
Common gate (supplied with operator)
1
1
16-1548
1
No.
Req.
Description
6
1
1
1
Potentiometers
5
1
1
Item
No.
Knob (not shown) for joystick operator with latch
1
1
Part Number
Transformer Type
Indicating Light
—
Jumbo mushroom head button
(aluminum—red EMERG. STOP)
does not include Item 8
1
53-1317-12
53-1349-18
Position gate:
Two-position
1
54-7278
Three-position
1
54-7173
Four-position
1
54-12278
Eight-position
1
54-12279
2
10250TA79
Mounting screw (#6-32 x 0.710 in long)
Washer
2
16-2038
Terminal screw and lug (captive)
Req.
80-5502KIT
V7-T1-270
20
Retaining nut
1
15-1547
21
Knob
1
53-1314
Socket set screw (#6-32 x 0.250 in long)
2
11-2014
22
Coupling
1
29-3749-2
23
Set screw (#6-32 x 0.188 in long)
1
11-1199
24
Spacer
2
56-1066-18
25
Connector (includes screw and lug)
1
25-1851-2
26
Mounting nut
1
15-1938
27
Four-position joystick operating mechanism
(complete)
1
24-6565
28
Four-position joystick operating mechanism
(not shown) (with latch) complete
1
24-6565-2
29
Spring loaded latch
1
52-1214-2
30
Hand operated latch
1
52-913-3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Technical Data and Specifications
1
Mechanical Ratings
Description
1
Specification
1
Frequency of Operation
All pushbuttons
6000 operations/hr.
Key and lever selection switches
3000 operations/hr.
Auto-latch devices
1200 operations/hr.
1
1
Life
Pushbuttons
10 x 106 operations
Contact blocks
10 x 106 operations
PresTest units
10 x 106 operations
Lever and key selector switches
0.25 x 106 operations
Twist to release pushbuttons
0.3 x 106 operations
1
1
1
Shock Resistance
1
20 ms >5g
Duration
1
General Specifications
Description
1
Specification
1
Climate Conditions
Operating temperature
1° to 150°F (–17° to 66°C)
Storage temperature
–40° to 176°F (–40° to 80°C)
Altitude
6,562 ft (2,000m)
Humidity
Max. 95% RH at 60°C
1
1
1
Terminals
Marking
NC-NO on the contact block to meet the NEMA requirements. Dual marking system 1–2
for normally closed, 3–4 for normally open to meet BS5472 (Cenelec EN50 005).
Clamps
Terminals are saddle clamp type for 1 x 22 AWG (0.34 mm2) to 2 x 14 AWG (2.5 mm2)
conductors
Torque
7 lb-in (0.8 Nm)
Degree of protection against direct electrical contact
IP2X with fingerproof shroud
1
Will withstand short-circuit for 1 hour per IEC 60997-5-1
1
1
1
Light Units
Transformers
Bulbs—average life:
Transformer type
20,000 hrs.
Resistor/direct voltage type
2500 hrs. minimum at rated voltage
LED
60,000 to 100,000 hrs.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-271
1.9
1
1
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Electrical Ratings
Description
Specification
Insulation
Ui = 660 Vac or Vdc
Thermal
Ith = 10A
Short Circuit Coordination to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
Rated conditional short circuit current
1 kA
Fuse type
GE power controls TIA 10, red spot type gG, 10A, 660 Vac, 460 Vdc, BS88-2,
IEC 60269-2-1
UL rating
A600, P600
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
AC load life duty cycle 1200 operations/hour
10A
110V pf 0.4—1 x 106 operations
5A
250V pf 0.4—1 x 106 operations
2A
600V pf 0.4—1 x 106 operations
Switching capacity
AC 15 rated make/break (11 x le at 1.1 x Ue)
6A
120V pf 0.3
4A
240V pf 0.3
2A
660V pf 0.3
DC13 rated make/break (1.1 x le at 1.1 x Ue)
1
1.0A
125V L/R >0.95 at 300 ms
0.55A
250V L/R >0.95 at 300 ms
1
0.1A
660V L/R >0.95 at 300 ms
10A
110V pure resistive
1
1
1
Maximum ratings for logic level and
hostile atmosphere application
Maximum amperes
0.5A
Maximum volts
120 Vac/Vdc
1
Electrical Ratings—Contact Block
1
Description
1
1
1
1
50 Vac or 60 Hz
120
240
Vdc
480
600
24/28
125
250
Meet or Exceed NEMA Rating Designations A600, A300 and B300 for AC and P600 for DC
Make and emerg. interrupting capacity (amp)
60
30
15
12
5.7
1.1
0.55
Normal load break (amp)
6
3
1.5
1.2
5.7
1.1
0.55
Thermal current (amp)
10
10
10
10
5.0
5.0
5.0
Voltamperes:
Make and emerg. interrupting capacity
7200
7200
7200
7200
138
138
138
Normal load break
720
720
720
720
138
138
138
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-272
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Mounting Options
1
Panel Thickness
●
Minimum: 0.06 in (1.6 mm)
●
Maximum: 0.25 in (8 mm) including legend plate
●
Maximum can be increased to 0.375 in (15.9 mm) using optional retaining nut
●
Indicating light: 10250TA30
●
Pushbutton/selector switch: 10250TA31
1
1
1
1
Mounting Matrix
1
Legend
Plate
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
A
B
C
D
Small
1.63 (41.3)
2.25 (57.2)
2.25 (57.2)
1.63 (41.3)
Medium
1.75 (44.5)
2.25 (57.2)
2.25 (57.2)
1.75 (44.5)
Large
2.25 (57.2)
2.25 (57.2)
2.25 (57.2)
2.25 (57.2)
1
1
1
1
Mounting Options in Inches (mm)
Terminals on Top
0.14 (3.6)
Dia.
1
0.6
(15.2)
D
Min.
1
B
Min.
A
Min.
C
Min.
1
1.22
(31)
1
Terminals at Side
Horizontal Mounting
1
Vertical Mounting
1
Horizontal mounting means terminals are located top and bottom of contact block.
Vertical mounting means terminals are left and right of contact block.
This allows close spacing of adjacent operators with easy access to terminals.
1
Locating nib hole or notch is 0.14 in (3.6 mm) #29 drill.
1
1
Drilling Dimensions in Inches (mm)
0.14 (3.6)
Dia.
1
0.6
(15.2)
1
1
1.20
(30.5)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-273
1.9
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Mechanically Interlocked Pushbutton Operators
1
Adjustable
1
1.62 (41.1)
Min.
1
1
1
1
0.88 (22.4)
for Each
Additional
Contact Block
1.07
(27.2)
0.89
(22.6)
Lockout Pushbutton Operator Padlockable
in the Down Position
2.03
(51.6)
1.09
(27.7)
2.0
(50.8)
Lockout Pushbutton Operator Padlockable
in the Up Position—Mushroom Head
2.5 (63.5)
1
1
0.94
(23.9)
0.94
(23.9)
0.94
(23.9)
0.75
(19.1)
Potentiometer
A
B
C
2 watt single
1.31 (33.3)
0.94 (23.9)
0.94 (23.9)
25 watt—up to 25 mohms
2.38 (60.5)
1.19 (30.2)
0.81 (20.6)
50 mohms
2.56 (65.0)
1.69 (42.9)
1.25 (31.8)
1.63
(41.4)
3.88
(98.6)
2.2 (55.9)
mom.
2.5 (63.5)
main.
2.06
(52.3)
2.13
(54.1)
0.88 (22.4)
per Block
0.06 (1.5) to
0.26 (6.6)
Panel Thickness
1.25
(31.8)
2.0 (50.8)
Four-Position Joystick Operator
1
1
Std. Dial Plate
Contact 0.89
Block (22.6)
1
1
1.31
(33.3)
1.09
1.0
(27.7) (25.4)
Two-Position Joystick Operator
1.78
(45.2)
1
1
1.88
(47.8)
1.13
(28.7)
1
1
Large Dial Plate
2.5 (63.5)
Max.
1
1
Potentiometer
1.75
(44.5)
1.5
(38.1)
4.0
(101.6)
Lockout Pushbutton Operator Padlockable
in the Up Position—Jumbo Mushroom Head
1
2.31
(58.7)
2.38
(60.5)
1.88
1.19
(47.8) 0.88 (22.4) (30.2)
Per Unit
1.25
(31.8)
3.75
(95.3)
1
1.75
(44.5)
1
1
2.5 (63.5)
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-274
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Key Operated Pushbutton Operator
1
Operator and Cam
1.53
(38.9)
1.5
(38.1)
Latch-In, Twist-to-Release Operator
Only with Button
0.24 (6)
1
1.38
(35.1)
1.38
(35.1)
0.86
(21.8)
1
1.13
(28.7)
1.13
(28.7)
1
1
0.38 (9.7)
Long
Button
Only
1
1
Special Rotor Latch
1
1.13
(28.7)
1.55 (39.3)
Spring Return
2.37 (60.3)
Auto-Latch
1
1.38
(35.1)
1.5
(38.1)
1.53
(38.9)
1
0.38 (9.7)
Long
Button
Only
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-275
1.9
1
1
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Surface Mounting
Die Cast, Polyester and Stainless Steel Enclosures
4 Mtg. Holes — 10-32 Screw Size for
1 – 4 Element Die Cast/
Stainless Steel Enclosure
7/32 Screw Size for
Polyester
1
1
E
B
1
1
D
A
1
1
1
1
1
1
C
Surface
Element
Arrangement
Wide
A
High
B
Deep
C
Mounting
D
E
Conduit
Entrance
In-line
3.88 (98.6)
4.00 (101.6)
3.00 (76.3) 1
2.69 (68.3)
3.25 (82.6)
3/4
2
3.88 (98.6)
5.88 (149.4)
3.00 (76.3) 1
2.69 (68.3)
5.13 (130.3)
3
3.88 (98.6)
7.75 (196.9)
3.00 (76.3) 1
2.69 (68.3)
7.00 (177.8)
4
3.88 (98.6)
9.63 (244.6)
3.00 (76.3) 1
2.69 (68.3)
8.88 (225.6)
3.81 (96.8)
6.63 (168.4)
3.38 (85.9)
2.94 (74.7)
4.88 (124.0)
Number of
Elements
Die Cast
1
Polyester
1
1
2
3.81 (96.8)
6.63 (168.4)
3.38 (85.9)
2.94 (74.7)
4.88 (124.0)
1
3
3.81 (96.8)
8.88 (225.6)
3.38 (85.9)
2.94 (74.7)
7.13 (181.1)
4
3.81 (96.8)
11.13 (282.7)
3.38 (85.9)
2.94 (74.7)
9.38 (238.3)
3.00 (76.2)
3.50 (88.9)
3.00 (76.2)
1.50 (38.1)
4.25 (108.0)
1
In-line
1
2
3.50 (88.9)
6.75 (171.5)
3.00 (76.2)
1.50 (38.1)
7.50 (190.5)
1
3
3.50 (88.9)
9.00 (228.6)
3.00 (76.2)
1.50 (38.1)
9.00 (228.6)
4
3.50 (88.9)
11.25 (285.8)
3.00 (76.2)
1.50 (38.1)
12.00 (304.8)
1
2
Stainless Steel
1
1
1
In-line
2
Notes
1 Depth given is for two contact block deep stations. One contact block deep stations subtract 3/4 in (19.1 mm).
2 No conduit entrance holes provided. Drill as required.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-276
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1
Flush Mounting
1
Die Cast and Stainless Steel Covers Only
1
4 Mtg. Holes - 10-32 Screw Size
for 1-11 Element Encl, 1/4-20
Screw Size for 12 Element
and Larger
1
1
E
1
B
1
1
D
C
A
Surface or Pendant
1
Wide
A
High
B
Deep
C
Mounting
1
3.88 (98.6)
4.00 (101.6)
0.25 (6.4) 1
2
3.88 (98.6)
5.88 (149.4)
0.25 (6.4) 1
3
3.88 (98.6)
7.75 (196.9)
4
3.88 (98.6)
9.63 (244.6)
1
5.00 (127.0)
2
Number of
Elements
D
1
E
1
3.50 (88.9)
3.63 (92.2)
1
3.50 (88.9)
5.50 (139.7)
0.25 (6.4) 1
3.50 (88.9)
6.00 (152.4)
0.25 (6.4) 1
3.50 (88.9)
9.25 (235.0)
5.00 (127.0)
2.50 (63.5) 2
3.25 (82.6)
1.88 (47.8)
5.00 (127.0)
6.88 (174.8)
2.50 (63.5)
2
3.25 (82.6)
3.63 (92.2)
3
5.00 (127.0)
8.63 (219.2)
2.50 (63.5) 2
3.25 (82.6)
5.50 (139.7)
4
5.00 (127.0)
10.50 (266.7)
2.50 (63.5) 2
3.25 (82.6)
7.25 (184.2)
Die Cast
1
1
Stainless Steel
1
1
1
Notes
1 Depth given is for flat cover. Deep cover is 3/4 in (19.1 mm) deeper.
2 Depth given includes pull box.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-277
1.9
1
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Flush and Long Pushbutton Half Shroud
1.81
(46)
1.09
(27.7)
1.06
(26.9)
0.38
(9.7)
Long
Button
Only
Push-Pull Switch
0.88
0.88
(22.4) (22.4)
0.06 (1.5) to 0.25 (6.4)
Panel Thickness
1
1
1
1
1
1.38
(35.1)
1.78
(45.2)
Half Shroud Is Same as Long Pushbutton with
Lower Half of Guard Ring Cut Back
Mushroom and Jumbo Head Pushbutton
1
0.06 (1.5) to 0.25 (6.4)
Panel Thickness
1
1
1
1.78
(45.2)
Flush Pushbutton Operator with
Padlock Attachment
1.13
(28.7)
1.78
(45.2)
1.13
0.88 (22.4) (28.7)
for Each
Additional
Contact Block
1.63
(41.4)
1.75
(44.5)
1
1
0.25
(6.4)
2.63
(66.8)
1.65
(41.9)
2.5
1.5 (63.5)
(38.1)
1
1
1.13
(28.7)
Pushbutton with Cylinder Lock
1.13
(28.7)
1
2.03
(51.6)
1.09
(27.7)
2.0
(50.8)
Mushroom Head Pushbutton Operator
with Padlock Attachment
2.5
(63.5)
2.0
(50.8)
1.63
(41.4)
1
1
1
1.91
(48.5)
1.75
(44.5)
1.38
(35.1)
1.5
(38.1)
1
1
1
Illuminated Pushbutton
1.09
(27.7)
1.09
(27.7)
0.69
(17.5)
1
1.13
(28.7)
1
1
1.38
(35.1)
Indicating Light—Transformer Type
1.8
(45.7)
1.78
(45.2)
1.38
(35.1)
1.1
(27.9)
A
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-278
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1
PresTest Indicating Light—Transformer Type
PresTest Indicating Light—Resistor Type
1
1.88
(47.8)
1.78
(45.2)
1
1.38
(35.1)
1.78
(45.2)
2.19
(55.6)
1.94
(49.3)
1
1.38
(35.1)
1.56
(39.6)
1
1.88
(47.8)
1
1.56
(39.6)
1
Jumbo Mushroom Head Pushbutton Operator
with Padlock Attachment
2.31
(58.7)
2.38
(60.5)
Plastic 1.38 (35.1)
Glass 1.59 (40.4)
1.63
(41.4)
1.75
(44.5)
1.78
(45.2)
2.5
(63.5)
1
Master Test Indicating Light
B
Spade Terminal
1
A
Screw Terminal
1
1
1.38
(35.1)
1
Description
B
C
Relay type
4.38 (111.2)
4.28 (108.7)
Solid-state type
2.94 (74.7)
2.88 (73.2)
1
1
1
Indicating Light—Resistor and Neon Type
1
Threaded
Bushing
A
1.78
(45.2)
1
Potentiometer Shaft
1.38
(35.1)
1
B
Shaft
1.1
(27.9)
1.81
(46)
Lens
A
Plastic
1.38 (35.1)
Glass
1.56 (39.6)
A
1
Shaft Dimensions of Potentiometer
That C-H Operator Will Accept
Operator
Catalog Number
10250T330
1
A
B
0.38 (9.7) dia. x
0.38 (9.7) long
0.25 (6.4) dia. x
0.63 (16) long
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-279
1.9
1
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Coin Operated Selector Switch
Wobble Stick Catalog No. 10250TA5
1.44
(36.6)
Coin Slot
Knob
2.44
(62)
21°
1.38
(35.1)
1
21°
1
1
1
1
Lever
A
1.22
(31)
Operator
Dim. A
Knob
1.38 (35.1)
Lever
1.50 (38.1)
Coin slot
1.38 (35.1)
Lever Operator—For Use with Two
Vertically Mounted Flush Pushbuttons
Catalog No. 10250TA14
2.19
(55.6)
1
1
Key Operated Selector Switch
1.38
(35.1)
1
1
1
Cam
1.13
(28.7)
1
1
Illuminated Selector Switch
Flexible Boot—For Protecting
Flush or Long Pushbutton
Catalog No. 10250TA3 Typical
1.13
(28.7)
1.47
(37.3)
1.38
(35.1)
1
1
1
1.09
(27.7)
1.59
(40.4)
1.96
(49.8)
Roto-Push
1
1.13
(28.7)
1
1.38
(35.1)
1
1
1.88
(47.8)
3.75
(95.3)
1.75
(44.5)
1
1
3.59
(91.2)
1.53
(38.9)
1
0.38 (9.7)
Long
Button
Only
Transparent Flexible Boot—
For Illuminated Pushbutton
Catalog No. 10250TA25
1.59
(40.4)
1.33
(33.8)
1.88
(47.8)
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-280
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Padlock Attachment—For Knob Selector Switch
Catalog No. 10250TA11
1
Maintained Contact Attachment
Catalog No. 10250TA17 Typical
1
0.97
(24.6)
1
1.63
(41.4)
1
1.63 (41.4)
Min.
0.44
(11.2)
1
2.31 (58.7)
Max.
1
Padlock Attachment—For Flush Pushbutton
Catalog No. 10250TA2
0.75
(19.1)
0.84
(21.3)
0.94
(23.9)
1
1.63
(41.4)
0.38
(9.7)
Padlock Attachment—For Extended Pushbutton
Catalog No. 10250TA26
1.16
(29.5)
0.75
(19.1)
1
1
1.0
(25.4)
1
1
2.19
(55.6)
1.06
(26.9)
1
1.91
(48.5)
1
0.91
(23.1)
2.06
(52.3)
0.84
(21.3)
1
Padlock Cover Guard for Flush Pushbutton
Catalog No. 10250TA36
0.25
(6.4)
0.38
(9.7)
0.91
(23.1)
1.13
(28.7)
1
Padlock Attachment for Maintained Push-Pull Operator
Catalog No. 10250TA64
1.5
(38.1)
1
0.38
(9.7)
1
Maintained Pushbutton
Catalog No. 10250TA66 Typical
2.19
(55.6)
1
1
Adjustable
0.94
(23.9)
1.62 (41.1)
Min.
2.5 (63.5)
Max.
0.88
(22.4)
for Each
Additional
Contact
Block
1
1.47
(37.3)
1.25
(31.8)
1
Protecting Shroud for Jumbo Mushroom Head Button
Catalog No. 10250TA56
1
1
1.07
(27.2)
1
0.89
(22.6)
3.25
(82.6)
1
1
1.65
(41.9)
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-281
1.9
1
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Protecting Shroud for
Mushroom Head Button
Catalog No. 10250TA6
1.53
(38.9)
1.38
(35.1)
A
Min.
A
Min.
1.22
(31)
Terminals at
Side
Horizontal Rows
Protecting Shroud for
Illuminated Pushbutton
Catalog No. 10250TA15
1.75
(44.5)
1
Lever for
Roto-Push Operator
Catalog No. 10250TA13
Legend
Plate
Vertical Rows
A
Min.
B
Min.
1 or 2 Circuit Contact Blocks
0.44
(11.2)
1.50
(38.1)
1
0.6
(15.2)
B
Min.
1.25
(31.8)
1
1
B
Min.
1.69
(42.9)
1
1
Panel Drilling and Minimum Spacing
Terminals on Top
1.31
(33.3)
1
1
Extended Retaining Nut
Catalog No. 10250TA12
1.81
(46)
Small or none
1.63 (41.4)
2.25 (57.2)
Standard
1.75 (44.5)
2.25 (57.2)
Jumbo 1
2.25 (57.2)
2.25 (57.2)
Extra large
2.50 (63.5)
2.60 (66.0)
4 Circuit Contact Block 10250T44
1
Small or none
1.88 (47.8)
Standard
1.88 (47.8)
2.25 (57.2)
1
Jumbo 1
2.25 (57.2)
2.25 (57.2)
Extra large
2.50 (63.5)
2.60 (66.0)
1
1
1
Padlock Hasp or
Flip-Up Guard
Catalog No. 10250TA38
Notes
Locating nib hole or notch is 1.36–1.4 in (34.5–35.6 mm) #29 drill.
1
0.84
(21.3)
1.50
(38.1)
2.25 (57.2)
If jumbo plates are to be placed one above the other vertically, add 0.13 (3.3) to minimum
dimensions listed.
1.75
(44.5)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-282
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1
Multiple Button Guard
Chain Hook Bracket
2.16
(54.9)
1.88
(47.8)
4.0 (101.6)
5.88 (149.4)
4
7.88 (200.2)
7
13.38 (339.9)
1
C
1
Enclosure Size
(No. of Elements)
Wide
A
High
B
Deep
C
Mounting
D
E
1
2, 3 and 4
3.75
(95.3)
1.94
(49.3)
0.13
(3.3)
2.69
(68.3)
1.38
(35.1)
1
6 and 7
4.0
(101.6)
2.19
(55.6)
0.13
(3.3)
2.88
(73.2)
1.63
(41.4)
1
A
3
1
D
A
0.75
(19.1)
2
1
B E
A
Number of
Elements
1
0.38 (9.7)
Dia. Hole
1.31
(33.3)
1
1
1
Master Test Module, Flasher Module and Legend Plate
1.63
(41.4)
1.78
(45.2)
1
A
1
B
1.31
(33.3)
1
6 Mounting Holes
1.14
(29)
Master Test Module,
Flasher Module
Legend
Plate
1
Legend Plate
A
B
1.56 (39.6)
0.91 (23.1)
1
1
1
1/2 Round Legend Plates
Small
Standard
1.59 (40.4)
1.07 (27.2)
Jumbo
2.06 (52.3)
1.53 (38.9)
1
1
Square Legend Plates
Small
1.59 (40.4) sq.
0.90 (22.9)
Standard
1.75 (44.5) sq.
1.06 (26.9) 1
Jumbo
2.19 (55.6) sq.
1.50 (38.1)
Extra large
2.44 (62.0) sq.
1.63 (41.4)
1
1
1
Notes
Locating nib hole or notch is 1.36–1.4 in (34.5–35.6 mm) #29 drill.
1
1
For plastic legend plate, Dimension B is 1.12 (28.4).
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-283
1.10
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Description
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Page
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V7-T1-285
Product Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V7-T1-286
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V7-T1-287
Ordering Complete Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V7-T1-289
Product Selection
Non-Illuminated Momentary
Pushbutton Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V7-T1-290
Plastic Lens Indicating Light Units . . . . . . .
V7-T1-290
Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V7-T1-291
Illuminated Pushbuttons and
Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V7-T1-292
Push-Pull Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V7-T1-294
Illuminated Push-Pull Units . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V7-T1-295
Potentiometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V7-T1-297
Push-Pull Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V7-T1-298
Selector Switch Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V7-T1-302
Selector Switch Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V7-T1-303
Selector Switch Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V7-T1-306
Key Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V7-T1-306
Illuminated Selector Switch Operators . . . .
V7-T1-308
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V7-T1-309
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V7-T1-311
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V7-T1-317
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
V7-T1-319
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V7-T1-322
1
1
Contents
Product Description
Features
Eaton’s E34 Series 30.5 mm
pushbutton line features the
same rugged die cast
construction of our 10250T
line with an additional
two-layer 100% solid
thermosetting cathodic epoxy
coating. This coating provides
a flat black smooth,
consistent, corrosion
resistant surface that has
passed a demanding 600
hour salt spray test. (The
industry standard for this 4X
test requires only 200 hours.)
●
1
●
●
●
Epoxy-coated metal
operators
Corrosion resistant
Integral ground screw
terminal on operators
FDA approved for sanitary
chemical resistance
requirements
Standards and
Certifications
●
●
●
●
Ingress Protection
When mounted in similarly
rated enclosure—
●
Standard indicating lights
●
UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3,
3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13
●
IEC IP65
●
All other operators
●
UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3,
3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
●
IEC IP65
1
1
1
1
CE EN60947-5-1 and
60947-5-5
UL 508—File No. E131568
CSA C22.2 No. 14—File No.
LR68551
FDA 3-A Sanitary
Standards
1
1
1
V7-T1-284
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
1.10
Product Overview
Ultraviolet Light
Reliability Nibs
E34 cathodic coating is not
recommended for use in
applications where exposure
to ultraviolet light exists—use
NEMA 4X 10250T operators.
Eaton’s contact blocks
feature enclosed silver
contacts with pointed
“reliability nibs” for reliable
performance from logic level
up to 600V. To ensure reliable
switching, nibs bite through
oxide which can form on silver
contacts, eliminating the
need for expensive logic level
blocks for most applications.
Reliability Nibs
Dry Circuit
Medium Duty
1
Diaphragm Seal with
Drainage Holes
1
Liquid Drainage
Eaton’s pushbutton operators
offer front of panel drainage
via holes in the operator
bushing. Hidden from view by
the mounting nut, these
holes prevent buildup of liquid
inside the operator, which
can prevent operation in
freezing environments. The
holes also provide a route for
escaping liquid in high
pressure washdowns,
effectively relieving pressure
from the internal diaphragm
seal, ensuring reliable sealing
in applications even beyond
NEMA 4.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Diaphragm Seal
Heavy-Duty
1
Foam Neoprene
Panel Sealing Gasket
Drainage Hole
1
Flexible
Diaphragm
1
Stainless
Steel
Operating
Spring
1
Colorfast
Molded
Button
1
1
Drainage Hole
Mounting Nut
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-285
1.10
1
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Product Identification
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 Series
Octagonal Mounting Nut Self-Adjusts to
Panel Thickness—Eliminates Spacer Washers
and Set Screws
Internal Sealing Diaphragm
for Excellent Sealing
1
Terminal Clamps Shipped
Open Ready to Wire
1
1
1
1
1
Die Cast Construction with Thick,
Tough Corrosion Resistant Coating
Three Styles of Legend Plates
in Four Sizes
Wide Variety of Operator
Types and Colors
Stackable Contact Blocks up
to 12 Circuits per Operator
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-286
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.10
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Catalog Number Selection
1
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons
E34 PB 1 – 1
1
1
1
PB =
EB =
LB =
JB =
EVB =
EHB =
Operator
Flush
Extended
40 mm mushroom
65 mm mushroom
1/2 shroud vertical mount
1/2 shroud horizontal mount
Button Color
1 = Black
7 = Gray
2 = Red
5 = White
3 = Green
6 = Blue
4 = Yellow
8 = Orange
Blank =
1=
2=
3=
51 =
53 =
1
Circuit
Operator only
1NO-1NC
2NO
2NC
1NC
1NO
1
1
1
1
Illuminated and Non-Illuminated Push-Pulls
1
E34 GDB 63 M2
GDB =
GEB =
GFB =
GHB =
Operator
Two-position maintained
Three-position mom push-mom pull
Three-position mt push-mom pull
Three-position mom push-mom pull
Incandescent
Light Unit
Blank = Non-illuminated
89 = 24V/XFR
63 = 120V/XFR
64 = 208V/XFR
65 = 240V/XFR
82 = 277V/XFR
66 = 380V/XFR
67 = 480V/XFR
68 = 600V/XFR
69 = 6V/FV
70 = 12V/FV
79 = 24V/FV
83 = 32V/FV
80 = 120V/RES
81 = 240V/RES
LED
Light Unit
Blank = Non-illuminated
89L = 24V/XFR
63L = 120V/XFR
64L = 208V/XFR
65L = 240V/XFR
82L = 277V/XFR
66L = 380V/XFR
67L = 480V/XFR
68L = 600V/XFR
97L = Full voltage
– 1
1
1
LED Voltage
Blank = Non-illuminated
Blank = Incandescent
06 = 6 Vac/Vdc
12 = 12 Vac/Vdc
24 = 24 Vac/Vdc
48 = 48 Vac/Vdc
60 = 60 Vac/Vdc
2A = 120 Vac
2D = 120 Vdc
Non-Illuminated
Button
C1 = Black 40 mm
C2 = Red 40 mm
C2N8 = Red 40 mm—“E” STOP
C3 = Green 40 mm
C6 = Blue 40 mm
— = Black 65 mm
J2 = Red 65 mm
J2N8 = Red 65 mm—“E” STOP
— = Green 65 mm
— = Yellow 65 mm
Incandescent
M2 =
M2N8 =
M3 =
M6 =
M9 =
M5 =
M0 =
Blank =
1=
2=
3=
51 =
53 =
Circuit
Operator only
1NO-1NC
2NO
2NC
1NC
1NO
1
1
1
1
1
1
Illuminated
LED
Lens Type
RD = Red 40 mm
ED = Red 40 mm—“E” STOP
GD = Green 40 mm
LD = Blue 40 mm
AD = Amber 40 mm
WD = White 40 mm
— = Clear 40 mm
1
1
1
1
1
Note
1 Add X at end of catalog number to receive parts assembled from factory.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-287
1.10
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
1
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1
Illuminated Pushbuttons
E34 XB 24 V2
1
1
1
1
1
Light Unit Type
XB = Transformer
CB = Full voltage
SB = Resistor
Incandescent Light Unit
024 = 24V/XFR
120 = 120V/XFR
240 = 240V/XFR
277 = 277V/XFR
380 = 380V/XFR
480 = 480V/XFR
600 = 600V/XFR
06 = 6V/FV
12 = 12V/FV
24 = 24V/FV
32 = 32V/FV
48 = 48V/FV
120 = 120V/RES
240 = 240V/RES
1
1
1
1
1
1
Blank =
1=
2=
3=
51 =
53 =
LED Light Unit
024L = 24V/XFR
120L = 120V/XFR
240L = 240V/XFR
277L = 277V/XFR
380L = 380V/XFR
480L = 480V/XFR
600L = 600V/XFR
397L = Full voltage
Blank =
06 =
12 =
24 =
Incandescent Lens Color
V2 = Red
V3 = Green
V4 = Yellow
V5 = White
V6 = Blue
V9 = Amber
V0 = Clear
1
1
– 1
LED Voltage
Incandescent
48 =
6 Vac/Vdc
60 =
12 Vac/Vdc
2A =
24 Vac/Vdc
2D =
Circuit
Operator only
1NO-1NC
2NO
2NC
1NC
1NO
48 Vac/Vdc
60 Vac/Vdc
120 Vac
120 Vdc
LED Lens Color
RD = Red
GD = Green
YD = Yellow
WD = White
LD = Blue
AD = Amber
Standard Indicating Lights, PresTest and Master Test
1
E34 FB06 H2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Light Unit Type
Standard—Incandescent
Standard—LED
TB120 = 120V/XFR
TB120L = 120V/XFR
TB240 = 240V/XFR
TB240L = 240V/XFR
TB277 = 277V/XFR
TB277L = 277V/XFR
TB380 = 380V/XFR
TB380L = 380V/XFR
TB480 = 480V/XFR
TB480L = 480V/XFR
TB600 = 600V/XFR
TB600L = 600V/XFR
FB06 = 6V/FV
FB197L = Full voltage
FB12 = 12V/FV
PresTest—LED
FB24 = 24V/FV
TPB120L = 120V/XFR
FB32 = 32V/FV
TPB240L = 240V/XFR
FB48 = 48V/FV
TPB380L = 380V/XFR
RB120 = 120V/RES
TPB480L = 480V/XFR
RB240 = 240V/RES
TPB600L = 600V/XFR
NB120 = 120V/neon
FPB297L = Full voltage
NB240 = 240V/neon
PresTest—Incandescent
TPB120 = 120V/XFR
TPB240 = 240V/XFR
TPB380 = 380V/XFR
TPB480 = 480V/XFR
TPB600 = 600V/XFR
FPB06 = 6V/FV
FPB12 = 12V/FV
FPB24 = 24V/FV
FPB32 = 32V/FV
FPB48 = 48V/FV
RPB120 = 120V/RES
RPB240 = 240V/RES
LED Voltage
Blank = Incandescent
06 = 6 Vac/Vdc
12 = 12 Vac/Vdc
24 = 24 Vac/Vdc
48 = 48 Vac/Vdc
60 = 60 Vac/Vdc
2A = 120 Vac
2D = 120 Vdc
Plastic
Glass
Lens Color
Standard/Master—Incandescent
H2 =
G2 = Red
H3 =
G3 = Green
H4 =
G4 = Yellow
H5 =
G5 = White
H6 =
G6 = Blue
H9 =
G9 = Amber
H0 =
G0 = Clear
PresTest—Incandescent
V2 =
P2 = Red
V3 =
P3 = Green
V4 =
P4 = Yellow
V5 =
P5 = White
V6 =
P6 = Blue
V9 =
P9 = Amber
V0 =
P0 = Clear
Plastic
Glass
Lens Color
Standard/Master/PresTest—LED
RP =
RG = Red
GP =
GG = Green
YP =
YG = Yellow
WP =
WG = White
LP =
LG = Blue
AP =
AG = Amber
Note
1 Add X at end of catalog number to receive parts assembled from factory.
1
V7-T1-288
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
1.10
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1
Ordering Complete Devices
Complete E34 pushbuttons,
indicating lights and/or
selector switch operators
including contact block(s) and
legend plate can be ordered
using a single composite
catalog number. The
individually packaged
components will be shipped
unassembled in a single
overpack carton marked with
the composite catalog
number.
1
Ordering Example
Illuminated Pushbutton
Device—Catalog Number
E34XB120V2-153SP90
1
1
For a complete Catalog
Number breakdown, see
Pages V7-T1-287 to
V7-T1-288.
1
1
1
For Complete E34 Device Ordering
1
E34XB120 V2 – 153 SP90
Operator
1
1
Legend Plate
E34;SP90
Lens
E34V2
1
Contact Blocks
10250T1 and 10250T53
1
Insert Hyphen Before
Contact Block(s)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-289
1.10
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Product Selection
Non-Illuminated Momentary Pushbutton Units
1
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
1
Flush Button
1
Pushbutton Units
Button Color
1NO
Black
E34PB1-53X
E34EB1-53X
E34LB1-53X
E34JB1-53X
Red
E34PB2-53X
E34EB2-53X
E34LB2-53X
E34JB2-53X
Green
E34PB3-53X
E34EB3-53X
E34LB3-53X
E34JB3-53X
Red—Engraved EMERG. STOP
—
—
—
E34JB2N8-53X
1
1
Extended Button
1NC
1
1
1
Mushroom Button
1NO-1NC
1
1
1
Flush Button
Catalog Number
Extended Button
Catalog Number
Mushroom Button
Catalog Number
Jumbo Mushroom 1
Catalog Number
Contact
Type
Black
E34PB1-51X
E34EB1-51X
E34LB1-51X
E34JB1-51X
Red
E34PB2-51X
E34EB2-51X
E34LB2-51X
E34JB2-51X
Green
E34PB3-51X
E34EB3-51X
E34LB3-51X
E34JB3-51X
Red—Engraved EMERG. STOP
—
—
—
E34JB2N8-51X
Black
E34PB1-1X
E34EB1-1X
E34LB1-1X
E34JB1-1X
Red
E34PB2-1X
E34EB2-1X
E34LB2-1X
E34JB2-1X
Green
E34PB3-1X
E34EB3-1X
E34LB3-1X
E34JB3-1X
Red—Engraved EMERG. STOP
—
—
—
E34JB2N8-1X
Jumbo Mushroom
1
1
1
1
1
1
Plastic Lens Indicating Light Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
24V Full Voltage
Indicating Light
Indicating Light Units
Type
Voltage
Color
LED/Lamp
Number
Indicating Light 1
Catalog Number
Red
Bayonet base
E34FB197LRP24
LED Lamp
1
Full voltage
24 Vac/Vdc
1
1
120 Vac
1
Green
E34FB197LGP24
Amber
E34FB197LAP24
Red
E34FB197LRP2A
Green
E34FB197LGP2A
Amber
E34FB197LAP2A
Incandescent Lamp
1
Full voltage
24 Vac/Vdc
1
Red
#757
Green
E34FB24H3X
Amber
1
Resistor
120 Vac/Vdc
1
Transformer
1
1
120 Vac
50/60 Hz
Red
E34FB24H2X
E34FB24H9X
120MB
E34RB120H2X
Green
E34RB120H3X
Amber
E34RB120H9X
Red
#755
E34TB120H2X
Green
E34TB120H3X
Amber
E34TB120H9X
Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-213 to V7-T1-283.
1
1
1
V7-T1-290
Anodized aluminum head—may not be suitable for some corrosive environments.
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
1.10
Pushbuttons
1
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
1
Momentary Pushbutton Operators, Non-Illuminated
E34PB_
E34EB_
E34EHB_
E34LB_
E34JB_
Button
Color
Catalog Number
Flush button
Black
E34PB1
Red
E34PB2
Green
E34PB3
Yellow
E34PB4
White
E34PB5
Blue
E34PB6
Gray
E34PB7
Orange
E34PB8
Black
E34EB1
Red
E34EB2
Green
E34EB3
Yellow
E34EB4
White
E34EB5
Blue
E34EB6
Gray
E34EB7
Orange
E34EB8
Extended button
Half shrouded button
Mushroom button
Anodized aluminum jumbo
mushroom button 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Vertical
Horizontal
Black
E34EVB1
E34EHB1
Red
E34EVB2
E34EHB2
Green
E34EVB3
E34EHB3
Yellow
E34EVB4
E34EHB4
White
E34EVB5
E34EHB5
Blue
E34EVB6
E34EHB6
Gray
E34EVB7
E34EHB7
Orange
E34EVB8
E34EHB8
1
1
1
1
1
Black
E34LB1
Red
E34LB2
Green
E34LB3
Yellow
E34LB4
Blue
E34LB6
1
Black
E34JB1
1
Red
E34JB2
Red (Engraved EMERG. STOP)
E34JB2N8
Green
E34JB3
Yellow
E34JB4
1
1
1
1
1
Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-213 to V7-T1-283.
1
1
Anodized aluminum head—may not be suitable for some corrosive environments.
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-291
1.10
1
1
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Illuminated Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Illuminated Pushbutton
1
Operators without Lens
Type
Indicating Light
Full voltage
—
Transformer AC only
24
1
1
1
Voltage
Lamp Number
Illuminated
Pushbutton
Catalog Number
Indicating
Light
Catalog Number
E34CB497L
E34FB197L
E34FPB297L
E34XB024L
—
—
PresTest
Catalog Number
LED Lamp (LEDs not included) 1
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
PresTest
Bayonet
base
120
E34XB120L
E34TB120L
E34TPB120L
240
E34XB240L
E34TB240L
E34TPB240L
277
E34XB277L
E34TB277L
—
380
E34XB380L
E34TB380L
E34TPB380L
480
E34XB480L
E34TB480L
E34TPB480L
600
E34XB600L
E34TB600L
E34TPB600L
Incandescent Lamp
1
Full voltage AC/DC
1
1
1
Resistor AC/DC 2
6
#755
E34CB06
E34FB06
E34FPB06
12
#756
E34CB12
E34FB12
E34FPB12
24
#757
E34CB24
E34FB24
E34FPB24
32
#1828
E34CB32
E34FB32
E34FPB32
48
#1835
E34CB48
E34FB48
E34FPB48
120
120MB
E34SB120
E34RB120
E34RPB120
E34SB240
E34RB240
E34RPB240
240
1
Transformer AC only
1
1
1
1
Neon AC/DC
1
24
#755
E34XB024
—
—
120
E34XB120
E34TB120
E34TPB120
240
E34XB240
E34TB240
E34TPB240
277
E34XB277
E34TB277
—
380
E34XB380
E34TB380
E34TPB380
480
E34XB480
E34TB480
E34TPB480
600
E34XB600
E34TB600
E34TPB600
120
NE51H-R-22
—
E34NB120
—
240
NE51H-4-68
—
E34NB240
—
Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-213 to V7-T1-283.
1
1
1
2
These units do not include lamps. Order LED separately to match lens color, see Page V7-T1-269 for LED Selection and Pages V7-T1-287 to V7-T1-288 for Catalog
Numbering Selection.
Resistor units are not available for use with LEDs, choose either transformer or full voltage LED style.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-292
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Plastic
Glass
E34V_
Plastic
Glass
1.10
Indicating Light Lens
Color
Plastic
Catalog Number
Glass 1
Catalog Number
Red
E34H2
E34G2
Green
E34H3
E34G3
Yellow
E34H4
E34G4
White
E34H5
E34G5
Blue
E34H6
E34G6
Ambler
E34H9
E34G9
Clear
E34H0
E34G0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Illuminated Pushbutton Lens
Color
Catalog Number
Red
E34V2
Green
E34V3
Yellow
E34V4
White
E34V5
Blue
E34V6
Ambler
E34V9
Clear
E34V0
1
1
1
1
1
1
PresTest Lens
Color
Plastic
Catalog Number
Glass 1
Catalog Number
1
Red
E34V2
E34P2
1
Green
E34V3
E34P3
Yellow
E34V4
E34P4
White
E34V5
E34P5
Blue
E34V6
E34P6
Ambler
E34V9
E34P9
Clear
E34V0
E34P0
1
1
1
1
Note
1 Glass lens has black anodized aluminum bezel.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-293
1.10
1
1
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Push-Pull Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
●
●
Two- and three-position
Non-illuminated
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Two-Position
Push-Pull Unit
Two-Position Push-Pull Units, Non-Illuminated
Operator Position 1
Pull
Push
1
Mounting Location
Button Type/Color 2
Contact
Type
40 mm/red
1NO
E34GDBC2-1X
40 mm engraved
EMERG. STOP/red
1NC
E34GDBC2N8-1X
A
B
Catalog Number
Maintained Push, Maintained Pull
1
O
X
1
X
O
65 mm aluminum engraved
EMERG. STOP/red
1
E34GDBJ2N8-1X
1
1
Three-Position
Push-Pull Unit
Three-Position Push-Pull Units, Non-Illuminated
Operator Position 1
Pull
1
Intermediate
Push
Button Type/Color 2
1
Contact
Type
Mounting Location
A
B
Catalog Number
Maintained Push, Momentary Pull
X
X
1
O
X
O
O
40 mm/black
1NC
E34GFBC1-3X
40 mm/red
1NC
E34GFBC2-3X
40 mm engraved
EMERG. STOP/red
1
E34GFBC2N8-3X
Momentary Push, Momentary Pull
1
1
1
1
X
X
O
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
X
O
40 mm/black
1NC
E34GEBC1-3X
40 mm/red
1NC
E34GEBC2-3X
40 mm/black
1NO
E34GHBC1-1X
40 mm/red
1NC
E34GHBC2-1X
Button and Color Selection
1
Suffix Code
Catalog Number
Black
C1
E34C1
1
Red
C2
E34C2
Red (EMERG. STOP)
C2N8
E34C2N8
1
Green
C3
E34C3
Blue
C6
E34C6
1
1
Color
Standard
Jumbo Mushroom
Head
1
Standard—40 mm
Jumbo Mushroom Head 3
(Anodized) Aluminum—65 mm
Red
J2
E34J2
Red (EMERG. STOP)
J2N8
E34J2N8
1
1
Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-213 to V7-T1-283.
1
1
2
1
3
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
To order different type or color buttons, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code
from the table. Example: E34GDBC6-1X.
Anodized aluminum may not be suitable for use on some corrosive applications.
1
1
V7-T1-294
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
1.10
Illuminated Push-Pull Units
1
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
●
●
1
Two-position maintained
Illuminated
Illuminated Push-Pull
Unit
1
Two-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Maintained Pull
1
Operator Position 1
Maintained—
Pull
O
X
Maintained—
Intermediate
X
O
Lamp
Type
Voltage
LED
Full voltage
Contact
Type
24 Vac/Vdc
1NO
120 Vac/Vdc
1NC
Mounting Location
A
B
LED/Lamp
Number
Bayonet
base
X
O
Incandescent
1
E34GDB97LRD24-1X
1
E34GDB97LRD2A-1X
Transformer
24 Vac
Full voltage
24 Vac/Vdc
1NO
#757
E34GDB79M2-1X
Resistor
120 Vac/Vdc
1NC
120MB
E34GDB80M2-1X
Transformer
24 Vac
#755
E34GDB89M2-1X
E34GDB89LRD06-1X
120 Vac
O
X
Red Standard
Push-Pull
Catalog Number 2
E34GDB63LRD06-1X
120 Vac
E34GDB63M2-1X
1
1
1
1
1
Standard
Lens and Color Selection
1
Incandescent
Suffix Code
LED
Suffix Code
Catalog Number
Red
M2
RD
E34M2
Red (EMER. STOP)
M2N8
ED
E34M2N8
Green
M3
GD
E34M3
Blue
M6
LD
E34M6
Amber
M9
AD
E34M9
White
M5
WD
E34M5
Clear
M0
CD
E34M0
Color
1
Standard
1
1
1
1
1
Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-213 to V7-T1-283.
1
2
1
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
To order different type or color lens, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from Lens and Color Selection table above.
Example: E34GDB79M3 -1X. For LEDs with different voltages see ordering example on Page V7-T1-301.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-295
1.10
1
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
●
●
Three-position maintained
Illuminated
Illuminated Push-Pull
Unit
1
Three-Position Illuminated Momentary Push, Momentary Pull
Operator Position 1
Momentary—
Pull
Maintained—
Intermediate
Momentary—
Push
1
O
X
1
O
O
X
O
Lamp
Type
Voltage
Contact
Type
LED
Full
voltage
24 Vac/Vdc
1NO
120 Vac
1NC
1
Transformer
1
1
X
X
1
O
X
O
O
Full
voltage
1
Transformer
1
O
X
1
O
O
X
O
1
1
Incandescent
Mounting Location
A
B
LED/Lamp
Number
Bayonet
base
X
X
1
1
1
O
X
O
O
24 Vac
E34GHB89LRD06-1X
120 Vac
E34GHB63LRD06-1X
24 Vac/Vdc
1NC
120 Vac
1NC
Bayonet
base
24 Vac
E34GEB89LRD06-3X
120 Vac
E34GEB63LRD06-3X
Full
voltage
24 Vac/Vdc
1NO
#757
E34GHB79M2-1X
Resistor
120 Vac
1NC
120MB
E34GHB80M2-1X
Transformer
24 Vac
#755
E34GHB89M2-1X
E34GHB63M2-1X
Full
voltage
24 Vac/Vdc
1NC
#757
E34GEB79M2-3X
Resistor
120 Vac
1NC
120MB
E34GEB80M2-3X
Transformer
24 Vac
#755
E34GEB89M2-3X
1
Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-213 to V7-T1-283.
1
1
1
E34GEB97LRD24-3X
E34GEB97LRD2A-3X
120 Vac
2
E34GHB97LRD24-1X
E34GHB97LRD2A-1X
120 Vac
1
Red Standard
Push-Pull
Catalog Number 2
E34GEB63M2-3X
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
To order different type or color lens, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from Lens and Color Selection table on the
bottom of Page V7-T1-295. Example: E34GEB79M3-3X. For LEDs with different voltages see ordering example on Page V7-T1-301.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-296
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
1.10
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
●
●
1
Three-position—maintained push, momentary pull
Illuminated
Illuminated Push-Pull
Unit
1
Three-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Momentary Pull
1
Operator Position 1
Momentary—
Pull
X
X
Maintained—
Intermediate
O
X
Maintained—
Push
O
O
Lamp
Type
Voltage
Contact
Type
LED
Full
voltage
24 Vac/Vdc
1NC
120 Vac
1NC
Transformer
X
X
O
X
O
O
Incandescent
Mounting Location
A
B
LED/Lamp
Number
Bayonet
base
Red Standard
Push-Pull
Catalog Number 2
E34GFB97LRD24-3X
1
1
1
E34GFB97LRD2A-3X
1
24 Vac
E34GFB89LRD06-3X
120 Vac
E34GFB63LRD06-3X
1
Full
voltage
24 Vac/Vdc
1NC
#757
E34GFB79M2-3X
1
Resistor
120 Vac
1NC
120MB
E34GFB80M2-3X
1
Transformer
24 Vac
#755
E34GFB89M2-3X
1
E34GFB63M2-3X
1
120 Vac
1
Vertical or Horizontal
One-Hole Mounting 3
Potentiometers
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
1
Potentiometer with Knob and Standard Dial Plate—Linear Type ±10%
1
Potentiometer
Ohms
1
Catalog Number
2 Watt (60V Max.) Single Potentiometer with Standard Aluminum Dial Plate 45
1000
E34PDB1F1
2500
E34PDB1F2
5000
E34PDB1F5
10000
E34PDB1F10
25000
E34PDB1F25
50000
E34PDB1F50
Operator only 6
E34PDB1A0
Alternative—black plastic large legend with standard markings
E34LP99
1
1
1
1
1
Dimensions, see Page V7-T1-322.
1
Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-213 to V7-T1-283.
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
To order different type or color lens, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from table
on the bottom of Page V7-T1-295.
Example: E34GFB79M3-3X. For LEDs with different voltages see ordering example on Page V7-T1-301.
Shown with standard aluminum dial plate.
Large dial plate with space for legend is available at no charge. To order, add suffix 36 to catalog number.
Example: E34PDB1F136. To order separately, see footnote 5 below.
Large dial plate has space at top for 15 letters. 3/32 in high. For custom stamped legend plates, order legend plate
as separate item 10250TR30 and specify stamping.
For use with commercially purchased potentiometers having shaft dimensions per dimension drawing on Page V7-T1-274.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-297
1.10
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
●
Maintained—(Twoposition). Maintains in the
pulled or pushed position
until manually actuated to
the opposite mode.
Momentary—(Threeposition). Spring returns to
an intermediate position
when pulled or pushed and
released.
1
1
●
An illuminated push-pull
pushbutton unit, arranged for
one-hole mounting, can
replace two pushbuttons and
a pilot light or the nonilluminated form can replace
two pushbuttons. These units
are available in three basic
types:
●
1
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Push-Pull Operators
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Two-Position Maint.
Push-Pull 1
Application Guide
To assist in the selection of
contact blocks, the sketch
below shows pictorially by
symbols A and B locations of
contact circuits after
assembly of contact blocks
and adapter to the operator.
The table below shows the
effect of the push and pull
operations on either NO or
NC contacts. (X = contact
closed, O = contact open).
Momentary Pull,
Maintained Push—(Threeposition). Spring returns to
intermediate position when
pulled. Maintains in pushed
position until manually
returned to intermediate
(ready to reset) position.
Maintained stop holds
circuit open and will
prevent other series
connected operators from
starting the system.
The operators, buttons,
contact blocks, etc., are
offered as building block
components that can be
intermixed to satisfy many
requirements. This minimizes
the need for a varied and
costly inventory.
Contact Circuit Locations
Locating Nib
A
B
Push-Pull Operator Components
Operator Position and Circuit Arrangement
Out—Pull
Intermediate
1
In—Push
Contact Block Mounting Location
1
Type of Operator
1
A
B
A
B
A
O
X
No intermediate
position
X
O
B
Contact Block 2
Catalog Number
X
O
1NO
1NC
E34GDB
X
O
2NO
2NC
O
O
1NO
1NC
O
O
2NO
2NC
O
O
1NO
1NC
O
O
2NO
2NC
X
O
1NO
1NC
X
O
2NO
2NC
Two-Position Operator without Lens
Maintained push-pull
1
O
X
or
O
X
1
O
X
or
X
O
Three-Position Operator without Lens
1
Momentary push-pull
1
O
X
or
O
X
Maintained push-momentary pull
1
O
X
or
O
X
1
Momentary push-pull
1
O
X
O
X
1
or
O
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
or
or
or
O
X
X
O
O
X
X
O
O
X
X
O
O
X
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
O
or
or
or
E34GEB 2
E34GFB 2
E34GHB 2
Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-213 to V7-T1-283.
1
See Typical Applications on Page V7-T1-233.
1
1
2
1
Shown without button on lens.
Maximum of two blocks, four circuits. Special function contact blocks shown on Page V7-T1-316 CANNOT be used with
three-position push-pull operators E34GEB, E34GFB or E34GHB.
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-298
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
1.10
Push-Pull Light Units, Lenses and Buttons
Ordering Example with One Composite Number
1
Non-illuminated:
E34GDB + E34C2 + 10250T1 = E34GDBC2-1X
1
1
Incandescent:
E34GDB + 10250T79 + E34M2 + 10250T1 = E34GDB79M2-1X
1
LED:
E34GDB + 10250T97L + E34M2 + Voltage Code + 10250T1 = E34GDB97LRD24-1X
06—6 Vac/Vdc
12—12 Vac/Vdc
24—24 Vac/Vdc
48—48 Vac/Vdc
1
60—60 Vac/Vdc
2A—120 Vac
2D—120 Vdc
1
1
1
Light Units for Illuminated Push-Pull Devices
Light Unit
Type
LED
(LEDs not included) 1
Incandescent
Type
Voltage
Full voltage
—
Transformer
AC only
50/60 Hz
24
Full voltage
AC or DC
LED/Lamp
Number
Bayonet
base
10250T97L
10250T63L
208
10250T64L
240
10250T65L
277
10250T82L
380
10250T66L
480
10250T67L
600
10250T68L
12
24/28
#755
#756
#757
#1828
10250T70
120MB
10250T80
#755
10250T89
32
Resistor
AC or DC
120
Transformer
AC only
50/60 Hz
24
1
10250T89L
120
6
1
Catalog Number
1
1
1
1
1
10250T69
1
10250T79
10250T83
240
1
1
10250T81
120
10250T63
208
10250T64
240
10250T65
277
10250T82
380
10250T66
480
10250T67
600
10250T68
1
1
1
1
1
Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-213 to V7-T1-283.
1
1
These units do not include lamps. Order LED separately to match lens color from chart on Page V7-T1-301.
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-299
1.10
Incandescent
Suffix Code
Catalog Number
Black
C1
E34C1
Red
C2
E34C2
Red (EMERG. STOP)
C2N8
E34C2N8
Green
C3
E34C3
Blue
C6
E34C6
Red 1
J2
E34J2
Red (EMERG. STOP)
J2N8
E34J2N8
Color
Standard
1
1
1
1
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Buttons for Non-Illuminated Push-Pull Devices
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Jumbo Mushroom
Head
1
Standard Button
Jumbo Mushroom Head
1
1
1
E34M_
Alternate Lenses for Illuminated Push-Pull Devices
Color
Incandescent
Suffix Code
LED
Suffix Code 2
Catalog Number
Red
M2
RD
E34M2
Red (EMERG. STOP)
M2N8
ED
E34M2N8
Green
M3
GD
E34M3
1
Blue
M6
LD
E34M6
Amber
M9
AD
E34M9
1
White
M5
WD
E34M5
Clear
M0
—
E34M0
1
1
1
Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-213 to V7-T1-283.
1
1
2
1
Anodized aluminum may not be suitable for use on some corrosive applications.
Suffix codes should only be used for assembling composite catalog numbers. To order lens, order by catalog number.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-300
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.10
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Standard LED Lamp
LED Selection
Voltage
Color
Catalog Number
Voltage
Color
Catalog Number
6 Vac/Vdc
suitable for
use with
transformers
Red
E22LED006RN
60 Vac/Vdc
Red
E22LED060RN
Orange
E22LED006ON
Orange
E22LED060ON
Yellow
E22LED006YN
Yellow
E22LED060YN
Green
E22LED006GN
Green
E22LED060GN
Blue
E22LED006BN
Blue
E22LED060BN
12 Vac/Vdc
24 Vac/Vdc
48 Vac/Vdc
White
E22LED006WN
Red
E22LED012RN
120 Vac
White
E22LED060WN
Red
E22LED120RA
Orange
E22LED012ON
Orange
E22LED120OA
Yellow
E22LED012YN
Yellow
E22LED120YA
Green
E22LED012GN
Green
E22LED120GA
Blue
E22LED012BN
Blue
E22LED120BA
White
E22LED012WN
White
E22LED120WA
Red
E22LED024RN
Red
E22LED120RD
Orange
E22LED024ON
Orange
E22LED120OD
Yellow
E22LED024YN
Yellow
E22LED120YD
Green
E22LED024GN
Green
E22LED120GD
Blue
E22LED024BN
Blue
E22LED120BD
White
E22LED120WD
White
E22LED024WN
Red
E22LED048RN
Orange
E22LED048ON
Yellow
E22LED048YN
Green
E22LED048GN
Blue
E22LED048BN
White
E22LED048WN
120 Vdc
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-301
1.10
1
1
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Selector Switch Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
●
●
Two-, three- and four-position—maintained
Non-illuminated and illuminated
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Two-Position Maint.
Switch Knob
Two-Position Selector Switch
Operator Position 1
Operator
Action 2
1
X
O
1
O
X
M
M
Non-Illuminated
Illuminated—120V Transformer
Mounting Location Cam Black Knob
Black Lever
Red Knob
Red Lever
Code Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3
A
B
Contact
Type
1NC
1
E34VFBL1-1X
E34VFBK1-1X
E34VFB120ER-1X
E34VFB120FR-1X
1NO
1
1
Three-Position Maint.
Switch Knob
Three-Position Selector Switch
Operator Position 1
1
Operator
Action 2
1
X
O
O
O
O
X
Contact
Type
1NO
M
M
1
Mounting Location Cam
Code
A
B
Non-Illuminated
Illuminated—120V Transformer
Black Knob
Black Lever
Red Knob
Red Lever
Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3
3
E34VHBK1-2X
E34VHBL1-2X
E34VHB120TER-2X
3
E34VHBK1-23X
E34VHBL1-23X
E34VHB120TER-23X E34VHB120TFR-23X
E34VHB120TFR-2X
M
1NO
1
X
O
O
1
O
X
O
O
O
X
1NO
2NC
(Series)
1NO
1
1
1
Four-Position Maint.
Switch Lever
Four-Position Selector Switch
Operator Position 1
Operator
Action 2
1
X
O
O
O
1
1
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
M
M
Contact
Type
Mounting Location Cam
A
B
Code
1NC
M
7
Non-Illuminated
Illuminated—120V Transformer
Black Lever
Red Knob
Red Lever
Black Knob
Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3
E34VTBK1-23X
E34VTBL1-23X
E34VRB120TER-23X E34VRB120TFR-23X
M 1NO
1NO
1
1NC
1
1
Color Selection, Non-Illuminated
Color
Code Letter
Color
Code Letter
Black
1
White
5
Red
2
Blue
6
Green
3
Gray
7
1
Yellow
4
Orange
8
1
Notes
For Light Unit Voltage Suffix and Knobs, Levers tables, see Page V7-T1-308.
1
1
1
1
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-213 to V7-T1-283.
2
1
3
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
M = Maintained.
To order different type or color selector switch, substitute the underlined character with appropriate suffix code from
the Color Selection table. Example: E34VFBK2-X1.
1
1
V7-T1-302
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.10
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Selector Switch Selection
1
1
1
1
Cam and Contact Block Selection
Selector switches in their
varied forms (two-position,
three-position and fourposition) are a big factor
contributing to the great
flexibility of control that a well
rounded line of “pushbuttons”
can achieve. Because of their
flexibility, they tend to cause
difficulty with product
selection and application.
The following systematic
approach should simplify
that task.
Cam and contact block
selection is better understood
if you:
●
●
Work with each incoming
and outgoing wire/circuit
separately.
Recognize the terms NO
and NC only identify the
type of contact by its mode
before mounting to the
operator. The “X-O” chart
(Page V7-T1-305) shows
how that contact will act
after assembly to the
operator with the selected
cam shape. X = closed
circuit, O = open circuit.
●
●
Up to six NO or NC
contacts may be mounted
behind each plunger
location for a total of
twelve contacts. Single
circuit contact blocks have
only one plunger with the
other side of the block
“open.” Therefore, single
circuit contact blocks
transmit motion to blocks
behind them only for the
position containing the
circuit.
Each cam has two
separate lobes, each of
which operates one of the
two contact block plungers
independently of each
other. Those are identified
as position A (locating nib
side) and position B
(opposite of locating nib).
The position designations
give direction in selecting
and mounting of the
contact blocks.
Contact Circuit Locations
Systematic Approach
Application: HAND-OFFAUTO selector switch. In this
circuit, one incoming line is
distributed to two other
outgoing circuits by the
switch. The two circuits can
be looked at individually.
Step 1: Elementary
Diagram.
Construct on paper, or in your
mind, a simple elementary
diagram of the switching
scheme as follows:
HAND
Incoming
Line
Outgoing
Circuit
OFF
AUTO
Outgoing
Circuit
Step 2: “X-O” Pattern.
From the elementary
diagram, you can construct an
“X-O” diagram which
describes when the contacts
are to be closed (X) or open
(O) in the various positions of
the switch. The “X-O” for the
HAND circuit looks like this:
1
For the AUTO circuit, the
“X-O” diagram would look like
this:
1
HAND OFF AUTO
1
O O X
1
Putting them together, the
complete “X-O” diagram is:
1
1
1
XOO
OOX
1
Once the “X-O” diagram has
been generated, the next
step is to select the cam
and contact block, or blocks,
needed to perform the
desired “X-O” functions.
The selection tables on the
following pages list the
various types (shapes) of
cams by number to choose
from and the type of contact
and position to achieve the
function outlined in your
“X-O” diagram.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Locating Nib
HAND OFF AUTO
1
A
B
X O O
1
In this circuit, you want a
contact closed on the left
(HAND) but open in the
center and right.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-303
1.10
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Step 3: Cam Selection.
The cam you select
determines the operation of
all contact blocks mounted to
the operator. It is selected on
the basis that it provides the
simplest circuitry for the
desired “X-O” diagram. The
selection tables show all the
“X-O” combinations. For the
purpose of this example, the
applicable portion of those
tables is shown on this page.
Now to make the cam
selection, make a simple
worksheet such as:
XOO
OOX
Cam 2
Cam 3
(A)NO-(B)NC
(B)NO
(A)NO
(B)NO
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
It becomes immediately
obvious that cam 3 is the
better choice for two
reasons, (1) the series
combination can be avoided
making it simpler to wire,
(2) only two contacts are
required, which is less
expensive than the three
contacts required by cam 2.
Step 4: Contact Block
Selection.
Having selected the cam,
contact block selection is
simply a matter of gathering
the A position and B position
circuits into pairs which make
up the most convenient contact
block arrangement. If there is
an imbalance in the number of
circuits under A or B, then
single circuit blocks must be
selected for these leftover
circuits.
Back to the worksheet,
having selected cam 3 do
this:
X O X
O O X
ANO
1
BNO
10250T2
Step 5: Selector Switch
Operator.
Lastly, you have to choose
from the many types of
operators—knob and lever
in various colors or keyed.
Also what combinations
of maintained and spring
return functions are
required. Selection of these
operators can be found on
Page V7-T1-306. For the
example in step 4, you
may want a three-position
maintained black knob,
cam 3—Catalog Number
E34VHBK1.
The Complete Switch:
E34VHBK1 with one
10250T2 or, for one
composite catalog number,
E34VHBK1-Y1 found on
Page V7-T1-303.
Diagrams
Circuits shown illustrate
connections to obtain a
selector switch circuit
combination and are shown
with their appropriate line
diagrams. Field wiring of
jumper connections required
as shown.
Example Selection Table
No.
“X-O” Pattern
1
X
O
O
4
O
O
X
Cam Code #2
Cam Code #3
Top A
Top A
Bottom B
NO
NC
—
NO
—
NO
NO
Two-Position Selector Switch Contact Block Selection
Desired Circuit and
Operator Position
Contact Blocks Required to
Accomplish Circuit Function
No.
1
Top Plunger A
X
O
NC
2
O
X
NO
Bottom Plunger B
or
or
NC
NO
Note
1 Wired in series.
X = Closed circuit
O = Open circuit
Wiring of Jumper
Connections
Series Connection
Parallel Connection
Four-position selector
switches are limited to four
contact blocks.
Contact Blocks
For selection and number
of available contact blocks
per operator, see Page
V7-T1-315.
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-304
Bottom B
—
a
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
1.10
Three-Position Switch—Cam and Contact Block Selection
1
Contact Blocks Required to Accomplish Circuit Function
(Jumpers must be installed where indicated)
Desired Circuit and
Operator Position
No.
1
X
2
O
X
Operator with Cam Code #2
Operator with Cam Code #3
Mounting Location
Mounting Location
Top
Plunger
A
Bottom
Plunger
B
Top
Plunger
A
NO
NC
NO
X
X
O
O
1
1
X
O
O
1
NC
NO
1
NO
X
1
NO
5
1
O
NO
4
1
Bottom
Plunger
B
O
NC
3
1
X
NO
1
X
NC
NC
6
O
X
1
NO
O
NC
NC
1
NC
1
1
Four-Position Switch—Contact Block Selection
Contact Blocks
Required to
Accomplish Circuit
Function
Desired Circuit and
Operator Position
Mounting Location
Top
Plunger
A
No.
1
X
O
O
Contact Blocks
Required to
Accomplish Circuit
Function
Bottom
Plunger
B
O
Desired Circuit and
Operator Position
No.
10
X
O
X
1
Mounting Location
1
Top
Plunger
A
1
Bottom
Plunger
B
1
O
NC
2
O
X
O
NC
NO
O
NO
3
O
O
X
O
4
O
O
O
X
5
X
O
O
X
6
O
X
X
O
11
X
X
X
1
1
O
NO
NC
NO
NC
12
NC
O
O
X
X
8
X
X
O
O
NC
O
X
O
X
NO
1
X
1
NC
NC
NO
1
NO
13
NO
9
X
NO
NO
7
O
1
X
O
X
1
X
1
NC
NO
NC
NO
X
14
NO
NC
X
X
O
1
NC
1
X
NC
1
NO
NC
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1
V7-T1-305
1.10
1
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Selector Switch Operators
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Two-Position Knob
Selector Switch
Operators with Knob Assembled
Positions
1
Black Knob Selector Switch—
Vertical Mounting 2
Operator
Action 1
Two-position—60° throw
M
M
M
S
1
1
Three-position—60° throw
M
1
M
1
S
M
M
1
M
M
S
S
1
M
M
1
Four-position—40° throw
M
1
1
M
Catalog Number 4
1
E34VFBK1
1
E34VEBK1
2
E34VGBK1
3
E34VHBK1
2
E34VJBK1
3
E34VKBK1
2
E34VLBK1
3
E34VMBK1
2
E34VNBK1
3
E34VPBK1
7
E34VTBK1
M
M
Key Operators
1
1
S
Cam Code 3
Three-Position Keyed
Selector Switch
Key Operators with Cam and Cap
Positions
1
Two-position—60° throw
1
1
Operator
Action 1
M
M
M
S
Three-position—60° throw
1
M
M
M
S
1
M
S
S
M
Four-position—40° throw
1
M
M
Horiz.
Mounting
Catalog Number
1
1, 2, 3
E34KFB_
E34KFHB_
1
2
E34KEB_
E34KEHB_
2
1–7
E34KGB_
E34KGHB_
3
S
4
3
2, 4, 6
3
7
M
1, 4, 5
3
2
M
1
Vertical
Mounting
Catalog Number
2
M
1
Key
Removal
Positions 5
2
M
1
Cam
Code 3
7
E34KHB_
E34KHHB_
E34KJB_
E34KJHB_
E34KKB_
E34KKHB_
E34KLB_
E34KLHB_
E34KMB_
E34KMHB_
E34KNB_
E34KNHB_
E34KPB_
E34KPHB_
E34KTB_
E34KTHB_
M
1
Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-213 to V7-T1-283.
1
1
2
3
1
4
1
5
1
M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (R).
Field convertible to horizontal mounting.
For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection instructions and
tables on Pages V7-T1-303 to V7-T1-305.
For other colors of either the knob or lever, replace the underlined characters of the catalog number with the
appropriate suffix code from Alternate Knob and Lever table on Page V7-T1-307. Example: E34VFBL2.
Choose key removal position required for application from table on Page V7-T1-307. Add key removal code number to listed catalog number.
Example: E34KFB2.
1
V7-T1-306
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Dissimilar Locks and Keys
Listed operators have
identical locks and keys (Key
Code H661), Catalog Number
10250ED824. For dissimilar
lock and key combinations,
see Page V7-T1-242.
Key Removal Positions 1
C
L
R
Code
Suffix
Key Removal
Position
1
Right only
2
Left only
3
Right and left
4
Center only
6
Left and center
7
All positions
1.10
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
E34K_
Knob
E34L_
E34A_
1
Alternate Knobs and Levers for Operators 2
Lever
Lever Designed for
Added Ingress Protection 3
1
1
Color
Suffix
Code
Catalog Number
Suffix
Code
Catalog Number
Suffix
Code
Catalog Number
Black
K1
E34K1
L1
E34L1
A1
E34A1
Red
K2
E34K2
L2
E34L2
A2
E34A2
Green
K3
E34K3
L3
E34L3
A3
E34A3
Yellow
K4
E34K4
L4
E34L4
A4
E34A4
White
K5
E34K5
L5
E34L5
A5
E34A5
Blue
K6
E34K6
L6
E34L6
A6
E34A6
Gray
K7
E34K7
L7
E34L7
A7
E34A7
Orange
K8
E34K8
L8
E34L8
A8
E34A8
1
1
1
1
1
Notes
1 Key removal in “spring return from” positions not recommended.
2 See operators on Page V7-T1-306.
3 For use on maintained operators only.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-307
1.10
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Illuminated Selector Switch Operators
120 Vac Transformer
Selector Switch, Cam 1
1
Operator without Knob or Lever
Transformer Type—50/60 Hz
Positions
Operator Action
Two-position—60° throw
1
M
1
Three-position—60° throw
M
M
M
1
M
M
1
M
1
S
M
S
Four-position—40° throw
Catalog Number 4
Cam Code 1 5
Cam Code 1 5
E34VFB_
E34SFB_
Cam Code 2 5
Cam Code 3 5
Cam Code 2 5
Cam Code 3 5
E34VGB_
E34VHB_
E34SGB_
E34SHB_
E34VNB_ 6
E34VPB_ 6
E34SNB_ 7
E34SPB_ 7
E34VJB_ 6
E34VKB_ 6
E34SJB_ 7
E34SKB_ 7
E34VLB_
E34VMB_
E34SLB_
E34SMB_
E34VRB_
—
E34SRB_
—
M
1
1
Lamps—#755, #757, #1835, 120MB 2
Catalog Number 34
S
M
1
Full Voltage Type—AC or DC 1
6V #755 Lamp
S
M
M
M
M
1
1
Knob
1
1
Lever
1
1
Knobs and Levers
Color 9
Lever
Catalog Number
and Code Number
Red
10250TER
10250TFR
Transformer Type
50/60 Hz
Green
10250TEG
10250TFG
Voltage
Suffix Code
Voltage
Suffix Code
Yellow
10250TEA
10250TFA
24
024
6
06
Blue
10250TEL
10250TFL
120
120
12
12
10250TFC
208
208
24
24
240
48
48
Clear
1
Light Unit Voltage Suffix
Add to operator Catalog Number listed in table above.
Knob
Catalog Number
and Code Number
10250TEC
Type of Light Unit
Full Voltage Type
AC or DC 1
White
10250TEW
10250TFW
240
Amber
10250TEM
10250TFM
380
380
120
120
480
480
240 8
240
600
600
1
1
Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-213 to V7-T1-283.
1
1
1
2
3
4
1
5
1
6
7
1
8
9
Full voltage light units can be used at other than listed voltages by changing lamp. Replacement lamps are listed on Page V7-T1-269.
120MB lamps are used on both 120V and 240V operators.
Operator includes lens gasket and lens attachment screws.
Add suffix code for light unit voltage to listed catalog number from Light Unit Voltage Suffix table above.
Example: For 24V transformer type light unit, order E34VFB024.
For selection of the proper cam and contact block required to obtain a specific circuit sequence, see selection tables on Pages V7-T1-303 to V7-T1-305.
120 and 240V transformer only.
120 full voltage only.
Resistor type. May generate excess heat if used in high density.
Amber, clear and white lenses have a black arrow (R). Red, green and blue lenses have a white arrow (R).
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-308
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
1.10
Accessories
1
Accessories
E34TA2
Description
Catalog Number
Padlocking Attachment for Flush Pushbutton Operators.
Permits locking NC contacts in open position with 1/4 in padlock.
Will not lock NO contact.
E34TA2
1
1
1
1
10250TA_
Flexible Weather Resistant Boot for use with flush pushbutton operators.
Clear
10250TA46
Black
10250TA47
Red
10250TA48
Green
10250TA49
1
1
1
Flexible Weather Resistant Boot for use with button operators (extended
buttons preferred).
Black
10250TA3
Red
10250TA4 1
Green
10250TA10
Clear
10250TA85
Transparent Boot for regular, illuminated pushbutton operators and PresTest.
E34TA3_
E34TA6
1
1
1
10250TA25 2
1
Special Retaining Nut—to accommodate thick panel.
Indicating light
E34TA30
PresTest, pushbuttons and selector switches
E34TA31
Shroud for Mushroom Head Operator—prevents accidental operation.
(Not for push-pull operators.)
1
1
E34TA6
1
1
E34TA12
Extended Retaining Nut—replaces standard nut and provides guard for
flush type pushbutton operators.
1
E34TA12
1
1
E34TA15
Guard for illuminated pushbutton
1
E34TA15
1
1
E34TA11
Padlocking Attachment for non-illuminated knob selector switches—
accommodates up to five, 1/4 in padlocks.
E34TA11
1
1
1
Notes
1 Should not be used on flush button for STOP function.
2 Not suitable for single contact block depth cast enclosure. Cover is too thick.
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-309
1.10
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Accessories, continued
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Description
Catalog Number
E34TK3
Thrust Washer—To meet Ford Motor Company mounting specifications.
E34TK3
10250TA7_
Contact Block Terminal Jumps—Available in multiples of 100 only.
1
1
1
Terminal to terminal—within block (short):
1
10250TA70
1000 per package
10250TA70-2
Terminal to terminal—block to block (long):
1
1
100 per package
10250TMT8
1
100 per package
10250TA71
1000 per package
10250TA71-2
Master Test (Dual Input) Module—Internal Form C relay suitable for either
AC or DC applications. Total electrical isolation between monitored and test circuit.
Fits all illuminated 10250T, E22, E30 and E34 devices.
48 Vdc
10250TMT8
1
1
1
10250TFL_
1
Flasher Module—Internal Form C relay suitable for AC applications.
One unit required for each operator in master test circuit.
24 Vac
10250TFL2
120 Vac
10250TFL1
1
1
E22CW
Panel Mounting Nut Wrench—E22, E30, E34 and octagonal 10250T.
E22CW
10250TA101
Fingerproof Shroud—10 per package
Fits new style contact blocks and light units.
10250TA101
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-310
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
1.10
Options
1
Legend Plates 1
1
Field Color
Legend plates can be
supplied printed on black, red,
silver or white field. To order
legend printed on a color
other than indicated—add
Standard
suffix code to the end of the
catalog number as follows:
1
Example: E34SP26R—
Standard plate with red field
marked OPEN.
“R” for Red field;
“W” for White field; or
“S” for Silver field.
1
1
1
For Pushbutton Operators and Indicating Lights
Color of
Field
Legend
Standard 2
Catalog Number
Jumbo
Catalog Number
Legend
Color of
Field
Standard 2
Catalog Number
Jumbo
Catalog Number
1
Letters on Legend Plates Below are 3/16 in High
CLAMP
Black
CLOSE
Jumbo
DOWN
E34SP90
E34LP90
OFF
Red
E34SP24
E34LP24
E34SP73
E34LP73
ON
Black
E34SP25
E34LP25
E34SP74
E34LP74
OPEN
E34SP26
E34LP26
EMERG. STOP
Red
E34SP13
E34LP13
OUT
E34SP27
E34LP27
FAST
Black
E34SP75
E34LP75
POWER ON
E34SP80
E34LP80
FASTER
E34SP87
E34LP87
RAISE
E34SP28
E34LP28
FEEDER ON
E34SP94
E34LP94
READY
E34SP86
E34LP86
FEEDER OFF
E34SP95
E34LP95
RESET
E34SP29
E34LP29
FORWARD
E34SP15
E34LP15
REVERSE
E34SP30
E34LP30
HIGH
E34SP16
E34LP16
RUN
E34SP31
E34LP31
IN
E34SP17
E34LP17
SAFE
E34SP85
E34LP85
INCH
E34SP18
E34LP18
SLOW
E34SP32
E34LP32
JOG
E34SP19
E34LP19
SLOWER
E34SP88
E34LP88
JOG FOR.
E34SP20
E34LP20
START
E34SP33
E34LP33
JOG REV.
E34SP21
E34LP21
STOP
Red
E34SP34
E34LP34
LOW
E34SP22
E34LP22
TEST
Black
E34SP83
E34LP83
LOWER
E34SP23
E34LP23
TRANSFER
E34SP93
E34LP93
LUBE-FAIL
E34SP92
E34LP92
TRIP
E34SP84
E34LP84
MOTOR RUN
E34SP81
E34LP81
UNCLAMP
E34SP91
E34LP91
MOTOR STOP
E34SP82
E34LP82
UP
E34SP35
E34LP35
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Blank Plastic Legend Plates—Square 3
Color
Field
Lettering
Side 1
1
Side 2
Standard
Catalog Number
Jumbo
Catalog Number
Extra Large
Catalog Number
1
1
Black
White
Silver
10250TSP76
10250TLP76
10250TEP76
White
Red
Black
10250TSP77
10250TLP77
10250TEP77
1
Notes
1 For dimensions, see Page V7-T1-288.
2 3/32 in high lettering.
3 Legend plates with non-standard markings or aluminum legend plates see 10250T listing on Page V7-T1-262.
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-311
1.10
1
Standard
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
For Selector Switch Operators
Legend
1
Color of
Field
Standard
Catalog Number
Jumbo
Catalog Number
Two-Position—3/16 in High Lettering
FOR. REV.
Color of
Field
Standard
Catalog Number
Jumbo
Catalog Number
Three-Position—3/16 in High Lettering
E34SP38
E34LP38
AUTO OFF HAND
E34SP49
E34LP49
HAND AUTO
E34SP39
E34LP39
FOR. OFF REV.
E34SP50
E34LP50
HIGH LOW
E34SP40
E34LP40
FOR. SAFE REV.
E34SP69
E34LP69
JOG RUN
E34SP41
E34LP41
HAND OFF AUTO
E34SP51
E34LP51
MAN. AUTO
E34SP67
E34LP67
MAN. OFF AUTO
E34SP68
E34LP68
1
OFF ON
E34SP42
E34LP42
OPEN OFF CLOSE
E34SP53
E34LP53
OPEN CLOSE
E34SP43
E34LP43
RUN SAFE JOG
E34SP70
E34LP70
1
RUN JOG
E34SP44
E34LP44
UP OFF DOWN
E34SP54
E34LP54
SAFE RUN
E34SP45
E34LP45
ON STOP SAFE
E34SP71
E34LP71
START JOG
E34SP46
E34LP46
START STOP
E34SP47
E34LP47
UP DOWN
E34SP48
E34LP48
1
1
Jumbo
1
1
1
Black
Legend
Black
1
For Push-Pull Units
1
Color of
Field
Standard 1
Catalog Number
Jumbo 2
Catalog Number
PULL ON/PUSH OFF
Black
E34PP5
E34R5
PULL OPEN/PUSH CLOSE
Black
E34PP8
E34R8
PULL UP/PUSH DOWN
Black
E34PP11
E34R11
Legend
1
1
1
Notes
1 3/32 in (2.4 mm) high lettering.
2 1/8 in (3.2 mm) high lettering.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-312
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
1.10
Enclosures
1
Die Cast, Polyester and Stainless Steel Enclosures
1
Enclosures (Case and Cover)—Surface Mounting 1
Number of
Elements
1
Two Contact Block Depth
Catalog Number
1
Die Cast Enclosure—In-Line 23 NEMA 4, 4X, 12, 13
Die Cast Enclosure
Polyester Enclosure
Stainless Steel
Enclosure
One Contact Block Depth
Catalog Number
1
E34N1
E34N11
2
E34N2
E34N12
3
E34N3
E34N13
4
—
E34N14
1
1
1
Polyester—In-Line NEMA 3, 4X, 12
1
—
E34N51
2
—
E34N52
3
—
E34N53
4
—
E34N54
1
1
1
Stainless Steel 4—In-Line NEMA 4, 4X, 12
1
—
10250TN33
2
—
10250TN34
3
—
10250TN35
4
—
10250TN36
1
1
1
1
Dimensions, see Page V7-T1-322.
1
1
Mounting Instructions
One and Two Contact Block
Depth Enclosures
Enclosure Layouts
1
Top – For Vertical Mounting
1
1
One Contact
Block Depth
Enclosure
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
Two Contact
Block Depth
Enclosure
4
Top – For Horizontal
Mounting
These E34 Die Cast
Enclosures feature a
corrosion resistant coating
identical to finish on the E34
operators except gray in
color. Not for use in
ultraviolet light applications.
1
1
1
1
Notes
1 For spacing increments, see Page V7-T1-314.
2 All die cast enclosures can be converted to base mounting of contact blocks with spacers 10250TA22 or 10250TA23.
See listing on Page V7-T1-257.
3 When used with E30 pushbuttons, only the one element enclosure can be used.
4 14 gauge, type 304.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-313
1.10
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Die Cast and Stainless Steel—Flush Mount, Covers Only 1
Flush Mounting Covers
Covers Only—Flush Mounting
Number of
Elements
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
In-Line Flat
Cover
1
E34F11
E34F1
2
E34F12
E34F2
3
E34F13
E34F3
4
E34F14
E34F4
With Pullbox
Without Pullbox
1
10250TS10
10250TS1
2
10250TS11
10250TS2
3
10250TS12
10250TS3
4
10250TS14
10250TS4
Dimensions, see Page V7-T1-323.
1
1
In-Line Deep
Cover
In-Line Stainless Steel Flush Plates 2
1
1
Catalog Number
Flush Die Cast Covers
1
1
Catalog Number
Spacing Increments
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Type
F
G
H
Die cast
2.44 (62.0)
2.5 (63.5)
1.88 (47.8)
Polyester
1.88 (47.8)
Min. 2.13 (54.1)
2.25 (57.2)
Stainless steel
1.69 (42.9)
Min. 1.73 (43.9)
2.25 (57.2)
1
1
Spacing Increments for
Enclosures
Top – For Vertical Mounting
G
1
H
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
4
F
Top – For Horizontal
Mounting
1
1
Enclosure Layouts
Notes
1 These E34 die cast covers feature a corrosion resistant coating identical to the finish on the E34 operators except gray in color.
2 Not oiltight. NEMA 1 applications only.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-314
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
1.10
Contact Blocks
Standard Contact Blocks
●
UL A600/P600 rated
●
Color-coded plungers—red/
green for NC/NO circuits
●
Silver contact tips with
“reliability nibs”
●
Black (opaque) or amber
(translucent) housings
●
Pressure plate or spade
terminals
●
Fingerproof shrouds (for
pressure terminals only)
Logic Level Contact Blocks
●
UL A600/P600 rated
●
Black plungers
●
Inert palladium knife-blade
contacts
●
Black (opaque) housings
●
Pressure plate or spade
terminals
●
Fingerproof shrouds not
available
1
Special Purpose Contact Block
●
Maximum 300V rated
●
Black plungers
●
Silver contact tips with
“reliability nibs”
●
Black (opaque) housings
●
Pressure plate terminals
only
●
Fingerproof shrouds not
available
Reliability Nibs
Reliability nibs are the
hallmark of Eaton’s contact
blocks. A pointed silver nib on
the contact tip ensures
reliable switching from logic
level (5V) up to 600V
applications. Therefore
standard contact blocks can
be used for most logic level
applications where the
contacts are not exposed to
any harsh environmental
conditions.
Palladium Contacts
Palladium, which is more
inert than gold, is well suited
for voltages and currents
approaching zero and is
recommended for
applications where
environmental conditions are
a factor.
1
1
1
1
1
Maximum Contact Block
Mounting per Operator Type
1
Operator
Max.
Stack
Pushbuttons
6
Push-pull operators
2
Roto-push operators
4
Two- or three-position
selector switches
6
1
Four-position selector
switches
4
1
Joysticks
4
1
1
1
1
Special Function Contact Blocks
●
UL A600/P600 rated
●
Black plungers
●
Silver contact tips with
“reliability nibs”
●
Black (opaque) housings
●
Pressure plate terminals
only
●
Fingerproof shrouds not
available
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-315
1.10
1
10250T1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Contact Blocks
Standard
1
Symbol
Circuit
Description 1
Logic Level
Pressure Terminal
Catalog Number
Spade Terminal 2
Catalog Number
Pressure Terminal
Catalog Number
Spade Terminal 2
Catalog Number
1
Blank
No
Plunger
1NC
Stack up to six blocks (six circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T51
10250T59
10250T51E
10250T59E
1
Blank
No
Plunger
1NO
Stack up to six blocks six circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T53
10250T60
10250T53E
10250T60E
NO-NC
Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T1
10250T40
10250T1E
10250T40E
2NC
Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T3
10250T42
10250T3E
10250T42E
2NO
Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T2
10250T41
10250T2E
10250T41E
1
1
1
Special Function Blocks 3
1
LONC
Late opening NC. Stack up to six
blocks (six circuits) unless
otherwise noted.
10250T71 3
—
10250T71E 3
—
ECNONC
Early closing NO and standard NC.
Stack up to six blocks unless
otherwise noted.
10250T47 34
—
10250T47E 3
—
1
ECNONO
Early closing NO and standard NO.
Stack up to four blocks unless
otherwise noted.
10250T57 34
—
10250T57E 3
—
1
2LONC
Two late opening NC contacts.
Stack up to six blocks unless
otherwise noted.
10250T45 3
—
10250T45E 3
—
LONCECNO
Overlapping contacts. Stack up to
10250T55 34
four blocks unless otherwise noted.
—
10250T55E 3
—
Blank
No
Plunger
1
1
1
1
Special Purpose Blocks 5
1
2NO2NC
1
Four circuits in single block depth.
Rated 300V max. Stack up to four
blocks unless otherwise noted.
10250T44 5
—
Notes
1 All 10250T contact blocks shown are suitable for use on standard 10250T and E34 operators. These contact blocks are not suitable for Class I Division 2
type 10250T or E34 devices.
2 Contact blocks with spade terminals are limited to a maximum of one contact block per operator and minimum spacing between devices is 2.5 in (63.5 mm).
Not suitable for use in 10250T or E34 enclosures. Also available in amber housing. Not available with fingerproof shrouds.
3 Special function contact blocks are not suitable for use with roto-push operators, three-position push-pull operators, or four-position selector switches.
4 ECNO contact blocks are not suitable for use with two-position joysticks or when operators are used with padlock attachments.
5 Special purpose 10250T44 contact blocks are not suitable on selector switches or roto-push operators. Okay to use with three-position push-pull operators only
on low voltage (30V or less) circuits.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-316
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.10
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
10250T1CP
Contact Blocks with Fingerproof Shrouds
Circuit
Description 1
Standard
Pressure Terminal 2
Catalog Number
Blank
No
Plunger
1NC
Stack up to six blocks (six circuits) unless otherwise noted.
10250T51P
10250T51EP
Blank
No
Plunger
1NO
Stack up to six blocks (six circuits) unless otherwise noted.
10250T53P
10250T53EP
NO-NC
Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted.
10250T1P
10250T1EP
2NC
Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted.
10250T3P
10250T3EP
2NO
Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted.
10250T2P
10250T2EP
Symbol
Logic Level
Pressure Terminal 2
Catalog Number
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Special Function Blocks 3
Blank
No
Plunger
LONC
Late opening NC. Stack up to six blocks (six circuits) unless
otherwise noted.
10250T71P 4
10250T71EP 4
1
ECNO-NC
Early closing NO and standard NC. Stack up to six blocks
unless otherwise noted.
10250T47P 34
10250T47EP 4
1
ECNO-NO
Early closing NO and standard NO. Stack up to four blocks
unless otherwise noted.
10250T57P 34
10250T57EP 4
1
2LONC
Two late opening NC contacts. Stack up to six blocks unless
otherwise noted.
10250T45EP
4
1
LONC-ECNO
Overlapping contacts. Stack up to four blocks unless
otherwise noted.
10250T55EP
4
1
10250T45P
4
10250T55P
34
1
Replacement Parts
1
Replacement Lamps—For E34 Illuminated Operators
Mfg. Lamp Type
Voltage
Base Style
Application
Part Number
120MB
120V
T 3-1/4 bayonet
10250T resistor indicating light
28-3044
#267
6.3V
T 3-1/4 bayonet
10250T flasher
10250ED986-4
#755
6.3V
T 3-1/4 bayonet
10250T transformer, PresTest and full voltage
28-2202
#756
12V
T 3-1/4 bayonet
10250T full voltage
28-5184
#757
24V
T 3-1/4 bayonet
10250T full voltage
28-5185
#1828
32V
T 3-1/4 bayonet
10250T full voltage
28-5186
#1835
55V
T 3-1/4 bayonet
10250T resistor
28-5187
NE48
120V
T 4-1/2 bayonet
10250T neon
28-494
NE51H-R22
120V
T 3-1/4 bayonet
10250T neon
28-3754
NE51H-R68
240V
T 3-1/4 bayonet
10250T neon
28-3755
Notes
1 All 10250T contact blocks shown are suitable for use on standard 10250T and E34 operators. These contact blocks are not suitable for Class I Division 2
type 10250T or E34 devices.
2 To order contact blocks with translucent amber housing, change suffix P to CP in catalog number, e.g., 10250T51CP.
3 ECNO contact blocks are not suitable for use with two-position joysticks or when operators are used with padlock attachments.
4 Special function contact blocks are not suitable for use with roto-push operators, three-position push-pull operators, or four-position selector switches.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-317
1.10
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
1
1
1
1
1
1
Flush Head
Pushbutton Operator
Mushroom Head
Pushbutton Operator
Jumbo Mushroom
Head Operator
Potentiometers
Illuminated
Pushbutton Operator
Transformer Type
Indicating Light
Knob-Operated
Selector Switch
Operator
Full Voltage, Resistor
and Transformer Type
Illuminated Selector Switch
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
E34 Style Operator Replacement Parts
Item
No.
Description
No.
Req.
1
Gasket
2
Mounting nut
3
4
1
16-1548
12
1
15-1530-4
13
Set screw (#6-32 x 0.250 in long hollow hex)
2
11-2014
Mushroom head button (includes [2] item 5)
1
As Req. Below
—
—
6
1
1
7
1
8
53-1317
53-1317-2
Yellow
—
53-1317-3
Green
—
53-1317-4
Blue
5
1
1
Red
1
1
Item
No.
Black
1
1
Part
Number
—
Set screw (#10-32 x 0.250 in long hollow hex)
Jumbo mushroom head button
(aluminum—includes [2] item 5)
2
1
53-1317-22
11-544
As Req. Below
No.
Req.
Part
Number
Mounting screw
2
11-1632
Simple potentiometer
(does not include items 18, 28 or 29)
1
As Req. Below
1,000 ohms
—
41-782-2
2,500 ohms
—
41-782-3
5,000 ohms
—
41-782-10
10,000 ohms
—
41-782-4
25,000 ohms
—
41-782-5
50,000 ohms
—
41-782-6
Description
14
Connector (includes screw and lug)
2
25-1851
15
Indicating plate
1
As Req. Above
Standard size (without legend)
—
30-4460
Large size (specify legend)
—
10250TR30
Red
—
53-1317-9
Black
—
53-1317-10
16
Retaining nut
1
15-1547-3
Yellow
—
53-1317-11
17
Knob
1
53-1314
Green
—
53-1317-12
Socket set screw (#6-32 x 0.250 in long)
1
11-2014
1
53-1349-18
18
Coupling
1
11-2014
10250TA79
19
Set screw (#6-32 x 0.188 in long)
1
11-1199
16-2038
20
Spacer
2
56-1066-18
80-5502
21
Connector (includes screw and lug)
1
25-1851-2
22
Mounting nut
1
15-1938-2
Jumbo mushroom head button
(aluminum—red EMERG. STOP)
does not include item 5
Mounting screw (#6-32 x 0.710 in long)
Washer
29-3749-2
2
2
1
9
Terminal screw and lug (captive)
Req.
10
Gasket (supplied with basic unit)
1
32-803
1
11
Round head screw (#4-40 x 0.344 in long)
(supplied with basic unit)
2
11-4553
1
1
V7-T1-318
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
1.10
Technical Data and Specifications
1
Mechanical Ratings
Description
1
Specification
1
Frequency of Operation
All pushbuttons
6000 operations/hr.
Key and lever selector switches
3000 operations/hr.
Auto-latch devices
1200 operations/hr.
1
1
Life
Pushbuttons
10 x 106 operations
Contact blocks
10 x 106 operations
PresTest units
10 x 106 operations
Lever and key selector switches
0.25 x 106 operations
Twist to release pushbuttons
0.3 x 106 operations
1
1
1
Shock Resistance
1
210 ms >5g
Duration
1
General Specifications
Description
1
Specification
1
Climate Conditions
Operating temperature
1° to 150°F (–17° to 66°C)
Storage temperature
–40° to 176°F (–40° to 80°C)
Altitude
6,562 ft (2,000m)
Humidity
Max. 95% RH at 60°C
1
1
1
Terminals
Marking
NC-NO on the contact block to meet the NEMA requirements. Dual marking system 1–2
for normally closed, 3–4 for normally open to meet BS5472 (Cenelec EN50 005).
Clamps
Terminals are saddle clamp type for 1 x 22 AWG (0.34 mm2) to 2 x 14 AWG (2.5 mm2)
conductors
Torque
7 lb-in (0.8 Nm)
Degree of protection against direct electrical contact
IP2X with fingerproof shroud
1
Will withstand short-circuit for 1 hour per IEC 60947-5-1
1
Transformer type
20,000 hrs.
1
Resistor/direct voltage type
2500 hrs. minimum at rated V
LED
60,000 to 100,000 hrs.
1
1
Light Units
Transformers
Bulbs—average life:
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-319
1.10
1
1
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Electrical Ratings
Description
Specification
Insulation
Ui = 660 Vac or Vdc
Thermal
Ith = 10A
Short Circuit Coordination to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
Rated conditional short circuit current
1 kA
Fuse type
GE power controls TIA 10, red spot type gG, 10A, 660 Vac, 460 Vdc, BS88-2,
IEC 60269-2-1
UL rating
A600, P600
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
AC load life duty cycle 1200 operations/hour
10A
110V pf 0.4—1 x 106 operations
5A
250V pf 0.4—1 x 106 operations
2A
600V pf 0.4—1 x 106 operations
Switching capacity
AC 15 rated make/break (11 x le at 1.1 x Ue)
6A
120V pf 0.3
4A
240V pf 0.3
2A
660V pf 0.3
DC13 rated make/break (1.1 x le at 1.1 x Ue)
1
1.0A
125V L/R >0.95 at 300 ms
0.55A
250V L/R >0.95 at 300 ms
1
0.1A
660V L/R >0.95 at 300 ms
10A
110V pure resistive
1
1
1
Maximum ratings for logic level and
hostile atmosphere application
Maximum amperes
0.5A
Maximum volts
120 Vac/Vdc
Low voltage switching
Conical shaped points or “reliability nibs” improve performance in dry circuit,
corrosive, fine dust and other contaminated atmospheres. Under normal
environmental conditions, the minimum operational voltage is 5V and the minimum
operational current is 1 mA, Vac/Vdc.
Contact operation
Slow make and break. All normally closed contacts have positive opening operation,
i.e., normally closed contacts are forced open in the event of contact weld or spring
breakage.
1
1
1
1
Electrical Ratings—Contact Block
1
Meet or Exceed NEMA Rating Designations A600, A300 and B300 for AC and P600 for DC
1
Description
1
Make and emerg. interrupting capacity (amp)
60
30
15
12
5.7
1.1
0.55
Normal load break (amp)
6
3
1.5
1.2
5.7
1.1
0.55
Thermal current (amp)
10
10
10
10
5.0
5.0
5.0
1
1
1
50 Vac or 60 H
120
240
Vdc
480
600
24/28
125
250
Meet or Exceed NEMA Rating Designations A600, A300 and B300 for AC and P600 for DC
Voltamperes:
Make and emerg. interrupting capacity
7200
7200
7200
7200
138
138
138
Normal load break
720
720
720
720
138
138
138
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-320
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
1.10
Mounting Options
1
Panel Thickness
●
Minimum: 0.06 in (1.6 mm)
●
Maximum: 0.25 in (8 mm) including legend plate
●
Maximum can be increased to 0.375 in (15.9 mm) using optional retaining nut
●
Indicating light: 10250TA30
●
Pushbutton/selector switch: 10250TA31
1
1
1
1
Mounting Matrix
1
Legend
Plate
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
A
B
C
D
Small
1.63 (41.3)
2.25 (57.2)
2.25 (57.2)
1.63 (41.3)
Medium
1.75 (44.5)
2.25 (57.2)
2.25 (57.2)
1.75 (44.5)
Large
2.25 (57.2)
2.25 (57.2)
2.25 (57.2)
2.25 (57.2)
1
1
1
1
Mounting Options in Inches (mm)
Terminals on Top
0.14 (3.6)
Dia.
1
0.6
(15.2)
D
Min.
1
B
Min.
A
Min.
C
Min.
1
1.22
(31)
1
Terminals at Side
Horizontal Mounting
1
Vertical Mounting
1
Horizontal mounting means terminals are located top and bottom of contact block.
Vertical mounting means terminals are left and right of contact block.
This allows close spacing of adjacent operators with easy access to terminals.
1
Locating nib hole or notch is 0.14 in (3.6 mm) #29 drill.
1
1
Drilling Dimensions in Inches (mm)
0.14 (3.6)
Dia.
1
0.6
(15.2)
1
1
1.20
(30.5)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-321
1.10
1
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Potentiometer
Legend Plates
Large Dial Plate
1.88
(47.8)
1
1.09
1.0
(27.7) (25.4)
Std. Dial Plate
1
1.31
(33.3)
0.94
(23.9)
0.94
(23.9)
0.75
(19.1)
1
1
1
1
2.19
(55.6)
1.77
(45)
0.94
(23.9)
1
1
2.19
(55.6)
1.77
(45)
Jumbo
Standard
Surface Mounting
Die Cast, Polyester and Stainless Steel Enclosures
4 Mtg. Holes — 10-32 Screw Size for
1 – 4 Element Die Cast/
Stainless Steel Enclosure
7/32 Screw Size for
Polyester
1
1
E
B
1
1
D
A
1
1
1
C
Surface
Number of
Elements
Element
Arrangement
Wide
A
High
B
Deep
C
Mounting
D
E
Conduit
Entrance
In-line
3.88 (98.6)
4.00 (101.6)
3.00 (76.3) 1
3/4
Die Cast
1
1
2.69 (68.3)
3.25 (82.6)
2
3.88 (98.6)
5.88 (149.4)
3.00 (76.3) 1
2.69 (68.3)
5.13 (130.3)
1
3
3.88 (98.6)
7.75 (196.9)
3.00 (76.3) 1
2.69 (68.3)
7.00 (177.8)
4
3.88 (98.6)
9.63 (244.6)
3.00 (76.3) 1
2.69 (68.3)
8.88 (225.6)
3.81 (96.8)
6.63 (168.4)
3.38 (85.9)
2.94 (74.7)
4.88 (124.0)
1
Polyester
1
1
2
3.81 (96.8)
6.63 (168.4)
3.38 (85.9)
2.94 (74.7)
4.88 (124.0)
1
3
3.81 (96.8)
8.88 (225.6)
3.38 (85.9)
2.94 (74.7)
7.13 (181.1)
4
3.81 (96.8)
11.13 (282.7)
3.38 (85.9)
2.94 (74.7)
9.38 (238.3)
1
Stainless Steel
1
1
1
1
1
1
In-line
3.00 (76.2)
3.50 (88.9)
3.00 (76.2)
1.50 (38.1)
4.25 (108.0)
2
In-line
3.50 (88.9)
6.75 (171.5)
3.00 (76.2)
1.50 (38.1)
7.50 (190.5)
3
3.50 (88.9)
9.00 (228.6)
3.00 (76.2)
1.50 (38.1)
9.00 (228.6)
4
3.50 (88.9)
11.25 (285.8)
3.00 (76.2)
1.50 (38.1)
12.00 (304.8)
2
2
Notes
1 Depth given is for two contact block deep stations. One contact block deep stations subtract 3/4 in (19.1 mm).
2 No conduit entrance holes provided. Drill as required.
1
1
V7-T1-322
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
1.10
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1
Flush Mounting
1
Die Cast and Stainless Steel Covers Only
1
4 Mtg. Holes - 10-32 Screw Size
for 1-11 Element Encl, 1/4-20
Screw Size for 12 Element
and Larger
1
1
E
1
B
1
1
D
C
A
Surface or Pendant
1
Wide
A
High
B
Deep
C
Mounting
1
3.88 (98.6)
4.00 (101.6)
0.25 (6.4) 1
2
3.88 (98.6)
5.88 (149.4)
0.25 (6.4) 1
3
3.88 (98.6)
7.75 (196.9)
4
3.88 (98.6)
9.63 (244.6)
1
5.00 (127.0)
2
Number of
Elements
D
1
E
1
3.50 (88.9)
3.63 (92.2)
1
3.50 (88.9)
5.50 (139.7)
0.25 (6.4) 1
3.50 (88.9)
6.00 (152.4)
0.25 (6.4) 1
3.50 (88.9)
9.25 (235.0)
5.00 (127.0)
2.50 (63.5) 2
3.25 (82.6)
1.88 (47.8)
5.00 (127.0)
6.88 (174.8)
2.50 (63.5)
2
3.25 (82.6)
3.63 (92.2)
3
5.00 (127.0)
8.63 (219.2)
2.50 (63.5) 2
3.25 (82.6)
5.50 (139.7)
4
5.00 (127.0)
10.50 (266.7)
2.50 (63.5) 2
3.25 (82.6)
7.25 (184.2)
Die Cast
1
1
Stainless Steel
1
1
1
Notes
1 Depth given is for flat cover. Deep cover is 3/4 in (19.1 mm) deeper.
2 Depth given includes pull box.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-323
1.10
1
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Padlocking Attachment for Flush
Pushbutton Operators
0.84
(21.3)
0.75
(19.1)
0.94
(23.9)
1.63
(41.4)
1
1
Flexible Weather Resistant Boot
1
1.47
(37.3)
1.59
(40.4)
1
Transparent Boot
1
1.92
(48.8)
1.31
(33.3)
1.14
(29)
1.06
(26.9)
1.53
(38.9)
0.88
(22.4)
Contact
Blk.
Shroud for Mushroom
Head Operator
Each Addl.
Contact Blk.
1.78
(45.2)
Extended Pushbutton
1.44
(36.6)
Extended Retaining Nut
0.88
(22.4)
1.25
(31.8)
1.38
(35.1)
1.31
(33.3)
Contact
Blk.
1.78
(45.2)
Each Addl.
Contact Blk.
1
1
1.38
(35.1)
1.09
(27.7)
1.50
(38.1)
1
1.38
(35.1)
1.09
(27.7)
Half Shroud Pushbutton
1.44
(36.6)
1
1.63
(41.4)
1
1.50
(38.1)
1
1.78
(45.2)
0.88
(22.4)
Contact
Blk.
Guard for Illuminated
Pushbutton
Each Addl.
Contact Blk.
1
1.78
(45.2)
1.59
(40.4)
1
1
Master Test Module and
Flasher Module
Flush Pushbutton
1
1
0.86
(21.8)
6 Mounting Holes
1
1
0.45
(11.4)
1.63
(41.4)
1
1
0.25
(6.4)
0.25
(6.4)
0.25
(6.4)
1
1
Contact Block Terminal Jumps
1.38
(35.1)
1.09
(27.7)
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-324
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
1.10
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1.63
(41.4)
1.09
(27.7)
0.88
(22.4)
1.50
(38.1)
1.09
(27.7)
1.78
(45.2)
Contact
Blk.
1
1.58
(40.1)
Knob
1
1
Contact
Block
1.75
(44.5)
1
Selector Switch
Each Additional
Contact Block
Each Addl.
Contact Blk.
2.50
(63.5)
1.09
(27.7)
1
1.13
(28.7)
Jumbo Mushroom Pushbutton
0.88
(22.4)
1
1.38
(35.1)
1.09
(27.7)
1.78
(45.2)
1
0.69
(17.5)
Light
Unit
Contact
Blk.
Each Addl.
Contact Blk.
1.78
(45.2)
1
Illuminated Pushbutton
Mushroom Pushbutton
1
1
Push-Pull Switch
0.88
(22.4)
0.88
(22.4)
0.06 (1.5) to 0.25 (6.4)
Panel Thickness
0.25
(6.4)
1.78
(45.2)
1.09
(27.7)
1
1
Key Selector Switch
1
1
1
0.88
1.09
(22.4) (27.7)
Indicating Light
1.78
(45.2)
1
1.58
(40.1)
Lever
Contact
Block
2.63
(66.8)
1.65
(41.9)
1.13
(28.7)
Each Addl.
Contact Blk.
Contact Light
Block Unit
0.88
(22.4)
1.5
(38.1)
1
1.58 (40.1)
to Remove
Key
1.38
(35.1)
1
1
1.1
(27.9)
1.38
(35.1)
Illuminated Selector Switch
PresTest Indicating Light
0.69
(17.5)
1.38
(35.1)
1.13
(28.7)
1
1
Light
Unit
Contact
Blk.
Each Addl.
Contact Blk.
1.78
(45.2)
1.09
(27.7)
Each Additional
Contact Block
1.9
(48.3)
1
1.58
(40.1)
Knob
1
1
0.88
(22.4)
1.09
(27.7)
1.58
(40.1)
Lever
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-325
1.11
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
Contents
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
Description
1
Page
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection
Momentary Pushbutton Units,
Non-Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated Pushbutton Units . . . . . . . . . . .
Guarded Illuminated Pushbutton
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indicating Light Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Push-Pull Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated Push-Pull Units . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selector Switch Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selector Switch Contact Block
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-327
V7-T1-328
V7-T1-330
V7-T1-332
V7-T1-334
V7-T1-336
V7-T1-337
V7-T1-338
V7-T1-340
V7-T1-341
V7-T1-342
V7-T1-345
V7-T1-346
V7-T1-347
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Product Description
Features
The HT800 Series from
Eaton’s Electrical Sector is a
family of 30.5 mm pushbutton
devices which includes
momentary, illuminated
and mushroom head
pushbuttons, selector
switches, indicating lights
and push-pull switches. The
HT800 devices have a familiar
appearance found in most
industrial applications and are
suitable for replacement of
several other manufacturers’
30.5 mm pushbutton devices.
●
1
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
1
●
1
1
●
1
●
1
1
●
1
Anodized aluminum
mounting rings
Watertight double V-gasket
seals
Extended height bulbs
Transparent housing
contact blocks
Color-coded contact blocks
Gold-plated contacts (on
low voltage contact block)
Reliability ridge on movable
contact
Stackable screw-mounted
contact blocks
Contact blocks can be
mounted in left/right or top/
bottom positions
Standard NC contact
opens before NO contact
closes (break before make
operation)
Bright and long lasting LED
indicating lights in six
colors
Field convertible maintained
selector switches—from
two- to three-position and
vice versa
Field selectable knob/lever
mounting positions—at any
22.5° increment
Benefits
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Corrosion resistant NEMA
4X finish
Watertight and oiltight
NEMA 4, 13 ingress
protection
Increased side illumination
of indicating lights and
illuminated pushbuttons
Easy visual inspection of
contact conditions
Easily identifiable NO
(white) or NC (black)
contact blocks
Gold-plated contacts
suitable for logic level
circuits
Reliability ridge penetrates
contamination buildup on
stationary contacts
Left/right or top/bottom
mounted contact blocks
allow correct positioning in
retrofit applications
All-purpose selector
switches are convertible
and can rotate in 22.5°
increments to suit panel
layouts
Standards and
Certifications
●
●
UL508 per File No.
E131568
CSA C22.2 No. 14 per File
No. LR68551
Ingress Protection
●
UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3,
3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13 when
mounted in similarly rated
enclosures
1
V7-T1-326
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
1.11
Catalog Number Selection
1
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1
HT800 Pushbuttons, Push-Pulls and Indicating Lights
1
HT8 GB R AB T1
1
Style
Pushbuttons
AA = Flush
AB = Extended
AE = Mushroom head
Illuminated Pushbuttons
GB = Illuminated PB
Push-Pull Operators
CB = Two-position, maintained
Indicating Lights
HF = Full voltage/resistor type
HB = Transformer type
Push-to-Test Operators
GT = All types
G
H
R
A
B
C
G
R
W
Y
Button Color
= Green
= Black
= Red
Lens Color
= Amber/Orange
= Blue
= Clear
= Green
= Red
= White
= Yellow
A
A2
B1
B2
C
C2
D1
D2
E1
F1
F4
Contact Block Location
(viewed from rear) 1
Left Side
Right Side
= NO
A5 = NO
= 2NO
A6 = 2NO
= NC
B = NC
= 2NC
B6 = 2NC
= NOEM
C5 = NOEM
= 2 NOEM
C6 = 2 NOEM
= NCLB
D = NCLB
= 2NCLB
D6 = 2NCLB
= NOEM-NCLB
E5 = NOEM-NCLB
= NO and NC
Q1 = NO and NC
= 1NO-1NC
F3
F7
L1
T1
V3
V7
1
Light Unit Type/Voltage
= 24V FV, LED
= 120V FV, LED
= 120V transformer, LED
= 120V transformer, incandescent
= 24V FV, incandescent
= 120V res., incandescent
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
HT800 Selector Switch
1
HT8 JA H 3A F1Q1
JA
JB
JC
JD
JE
JF
JK
JL
JN
JP
JR
JS
JU
JV
JX
JY
LN
LP
LR
LS
Operator
= Two-pos., knob, maint.
= Three-pos., knob, maint.
= Four-pos., knob, maint.
= Two-pos., lever, maint.
= Three-pos., lever, maint.
= Four-pos., lever, maint.
= Two-pos., knob, spr. rtn., left
= Two-pos., lever, spr. rtn., left
= Two-pos., knob, spr. rtn., right
= Two-pos., lever, spr. rtn., right
= Three-pos., knob, spr. rtn., left
= Three-pos., lever, spr. rtn., left
= Three-pos., knob, spr. rtn., right
= Three-pos., lever, spr. rtn., right
= Three-pos., knob, spr. rtn., both
= Three-pos., lever, spr. rtn., both
= Four-pos., knob, spr. rtn., pos 1 to 2
= Four-pos., lever, spr. rtn., pos 1 to 2
= Four-pos., knob, spr. rtn., pos 4 to 3
= Four-pos., lever, spr. rtn., pos 4 to 3
Switch Color
H = Black
Cam Location/Type
1D = For all three-pos.
3A = For all two-pos.
8E = For all four-pos.
1
A
A2
B1
B2
C
C2
D1
D2
E1
F1
F4
1
Contact Block Location
(viewed from rear) 2
Left Side
Right Side
= NO
A5 = NO
= 2NO
A6 = 2NO
= NC
B = NC
= 2NC
B6 = 2NC
= NOEM
C5 = NOEM
= 2 NOEM
C6 = 2 NOEM
= NCLB
D = NCLB
= 2NCLB
D6 = 2NCLB
= NOEM-NCLB
E5 = NOEM-NCLB
= NO and NC
Q1 = NO and NC
= 1NO-1NC
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Notes
1 Maximum of four contact blocks per side or a total of eight contact blocks recommended.
2 Maximum of two contact blocks per side or a total of four contacts blocks recommended.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-327
1.11
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
Product Selection
Momentary Pushbutton Units, Non-Illuminated
1
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13
Flush, extended or 40 mm mushroom head operators
1
●
1
HT800 Pushbuttons
HT800 Pushbuttons—Point-of-Purchase Units
Description
Catalog Number
1
Two-position maintained selector switch 1NO/1NC contact block, three square legend
plates: OFF ON, MAN. AUTO, UP DOWN
HT8JAH3AAB-POP
1
Three-position maintained selector switch, black knob, 1NO/1NC contact block,
three square legend plates: HAND OFF AUTO, FOR. OFF REV., OPEN OFF CLOSE
HT8JBH1DAB-POP
1
Three-position selector switch, spring return from left and right, black knob,
1NO/1NC contact block, three square legend plates: UP OFF DOWN, FOR OFF REV.,
OPEN OFF CLOSE
HT8JXH1DAB-POP
Red push-pull emergency stop, 1NO/1NC contact block, three square legend plates:
STOP, EMERG. STOP, OFF
HT8CBRAB-POP
Illuminated push-pull maintained red pushbutton, 120V full voltage low profile LED,
three square legend plates: STOP, EMERG. STOP, OFF
HT8FBRABFL7-POP
Illuminated push-pull maintained red pushbutton, 24V full voltage low profile LED,
three square legend plates: STOP, EMERG. STOP, OFF
HT8FBRABFL3-POP
Green flush pushbutton, 1NO/1NC contact block, three square legend plates:
START, ON, RUN
HT8AAGAB-POP
1
Black flush pushbutton, 1NO/1NC contact block, three square legend plates:
RESET, JOG, OPEN
HT8AAHAB-POP
1
Red flush pushbutton, 1NO/1NC contact block, three square legend plates:
STOP, CLOSE, OFF
HT8AARAB-POP
1
Red extended pushbutton, 1NO/1NC contact block, three square legend plates:
STOP, CLOSE, OFF
HT8ABRAB-POP
1
Black extended pushbutton, 1NO/1NC contact block, three square legend plates:
RESET, JOG, OPEN
HT8ABHAB-POP
1
Illuminated green pushbutton, 120V full voltage incandescent, 1NO/1NC contact block,
three square legend plates: START, ON, RUN
HT8GBGABV7-POP
1
Illuminated green pushbutton, 24V full voltage incandescent, 1NO/1NC contact block,
three square legend plates: START, ON, RUN
HT8GBGABV3-POP
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-328
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
Flush Head Operator
Extended Head
Operator
Momentary Contact Pushbutton Units, Non-Illuminated
Contact Type
Button Color
Flush Head
Catalog Number
Extended Head
Catalog Number
Mushroom Head (40 mm)
Catalog Number
No contact
Black
HT8AAH
HT8ABH
HT8AEH
Red
HT8AAR
HT8ABR
HT8AER
Green
HT8AAG
HT8ABG
HT8AEG
Black
HT8AAHA
HT8ABHA
HT8AEHA
Red
HT8AARA
HT8ABRA
HT8AERA
1NO
1NC
40 mm Mushroom
Head Operator
1.11
1NO-1NC
2NO-2NC
Green
HT8AAGA
HT8ABGA
HT8AEGA
Black
HT8AAHB
HT8ABHB
HT8AEHB
Red
HT8AARB
HT8ABRB
HT8AERB
Green
HT8AAGB
HT8ABGB
HT8AEGB
Black
HT8AAHAB
HT8ABHAB
HT8AEHAB
Red
HT8AARAB
HT8ABRAB
HT8AERAB
Green
HT8AAGAB
HT8ABGAB
HT8AEGAB
Black
HT8AAHF1Q1
HT8ABHF1Q1
HT8AEHF1Q1
Red
HT8AARF1Q1
HT8ABRF1Q1
HT8AERF1Q1
Green
HT8AAGF1Q1
HT8ABGF1Q1
HT8AEGF1Q1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-329
1.11
1
1
1
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
Illuminated Pushbutton Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13
●
●
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
●
Incandescent or LED
Full voltage or transformer type
24V and 120V
Illuminated Pushbutton
Operator
1
Illuminated Pushbuttons
Type
Volts
Lens Color
Operator Only
Catalog Number
1NO
Catalog Number
1NC
Catalog Number
1NO-1NC
Catalog Number
2NO-2NC
Catalog Number
—
Incandescent Lamp
1
Full voltage
120 Vac/Vdc
No lens 1
HT8GBFV
—
—
—
Red
HT8GBRV7
HT8GBRAV7
HT8GBRBV7
HT8GBRABV7
HT8GBRF1Q1V7
Green
HT8GBGV7
HT8GBGAV7
HT8GBGBV7
HT8GBGABV7
HT8GBGF1Q1V7
1
Amber
HT8GBAV7
HT8GBAAV7
HT8GBABV7
HT8GBAABV7
HT8GBAF1Q1V7
Clear
HT8GBCV7
HT8GBCAV7
HT8GBCBV7
HT8GBCABV7
HT8GBCF1Q1V7
1
White
HT8GBWV7
HT8GBWAV7
HT8GBWBV7
HT8GBWABV7
HT8GBWF1Q1V7
Yellow
HT8GBYV7
HT8GBYAV7
HT8GBYBV7
HT8GBYABV7
HT8GBYF1Q1V7
Blue
HT8GBBV7
HT8GBBAV7
HT8GBBBV7
HT8GBBABV7
HT8GBBF1Q1V7
No lens 1
HT8GBFV
—
—
—
—
Red
HT8GBRV3
HT8GBRAV3
HT8GBRBV3
HT8GBRABV3
HT8GBRF1Q1V3
Green
HT8GBGV3
HT8GBGAV3
HT8GBGBV3
HT8GBGABV3
HT8GBGF1Q1V3
Amber
HT8GBAV3
HT8GBAAV3
HT8GBABV3
HT8GBAABV3
HT8GBAF1Q1V3
Clear
HT8GBCV3
HT8GBCAV3
HT8GBCBV3
HT8GBCABV3
HT8GBCF1Q1V3
White
HT8GBWV3
HT8GBWAV3
HT8GBWBV3
HT8GBWABV3
HT8GBWF1Q1V3
Yellow
HT8GBYV3
HT8GBYAV3
HT8GBYBV3
HT8GBYABV3
HT8GBYF1Q1V3
Blue
HT8GBBV3
HT8GBBAV3
HT8GBBBV3
HT8GBBABV3
HT8GBBF1Q1V3
No lens 1
HT8GBT1
—
—
—
—
Red
HT8GBRT1
HT8GBRAT1
HT8GBRBT1
HT8GBRABT1
HT8GBRF1Q1T1
Green
HT8GBGT1
HT8GBGAT1
HT8GBGBT1
HT8GBGABT1
HT8GBGF1Q1T1
Amber
HT8GBAT1
HT8GBAAT1
HT8GBABT1
HT8GBAABT1
HT8GBAF1Q1T1
Clear
HT8GBCT1
HT8GBCAT1
HT8GBCBT1
HT8GBCABT1
HT8GBCF1Q1T1
White
HT8GBWT1
HT8GBWAT1
HT8GBWBT1
HT8GBWABT1
HT8GBWF1Q1T1
Yellow
HT8GBYT1
HT8GBYAT1
HT8GBYBT1
HT8GBYABT1
HT8GBYF1Q1T1
Blue
HT8GBBT1
HT8GBBAT1
HT8GBBBT1
HT8GBBABT1
HT8GBBF1Q1T1
1
1
24 Vac/Vdc
1
1
1
1
1
Transformer
1
1
1
1
1
120 Vac
Note
1 Light unit base operator without lens or bulb.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-330
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
1.11
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13
Illuminated Pushbutton
Operator
1
Illuminated Pushbuttons, continued
Type
Volts
Lens Color
Operator Only
Catalog Number
1NO
Catalog Number
1NC
Catalog Number
1NO-1NC
Catalog Number
2NO-2NC
Catalog Number
120 Vac/Vdc
No lens 1
HT8GBFV
—
—
—
—
Red
HT8GBRF7
HT8GBRAF7
HT8GBRBF7
HT8GBRABF7
HT8GBRF1Q1F7
Green
HT8GBGF7
HT8GBGAF7
HT8GBGBF7
HT8GBGABF7
HT8GBGF1Q1F7
Amber
HT8GBAF7
HT8GBAAF7
HT8GBABF7
HT8GBAABF7
HT8GBAF1Q1F7
Clear
HT8GBCF7
HT8GBCAF7
HT8GBCBF7
HT8GBCABF7
HT8GBCF1Q1F7
White
HT8GBWF7
HT8GBWAF7
HT8GBWBF7
HT8GBWABF7
HT8GBWF1Q1F7
Yellow
HT8GBYF7
HT8GBYAF7
HT8GBYBF7
HT8GBYABF7
HT8GBYF1Q1F7
Blue
HT8GBBF7
HT8GBBAF7
HT8GBBBF7
HT8GBBABF7
HT8GBBF1Q1F7
No lens 1
HT8GBFV
—
—
—
—
Red
HT8GBRF3
HT8GBRAF3
HT8GBRBF3
HT8GBRABF3
HT8GBRF1Q1F3
Green
HT8GBGF3
HT8GBGAF3
HT8GBGBF3
HT8GBGABF3
HT8GBGF1Q1F3
Amber
HT8GBAF3
HT8GBAAF3
HT8GBABF3
HT8GBAABF3
HT8GBAF1Q1F3
Clear
HT8GBCF3
HT8GBCAF3
HT8GBCBF3
HT8GBCABF3
HT8GBCF1Q1F3
White
HT8GBWF3
HT8GBWAF3
HT8GBWBF3
HT8GBWABF3
HT8GBWF1Q1F3
Yellow
HT8GBYF3
HT8GBYAF3
HT8GBYBF3
HT8GBYABF3
HT8GBYF1Q1F3
Blue
HT8GBBF3
HT8GBBAF3
HT8GBBBF3
HT8GBBABF3
HT8GBBF1Q1F3
No lens 1
HT8GBT1
—
—
—
—
Red
HT8GBRL1
HT8GBRAL1
HT8GBRBL1
HT8GBRABL1
HT8GBRF1Q1L1
Green
HT8GBGL1
HT8GBGAL1
HT8GBGBL1
HT8GBGABL1
HT8GBGF1Q1L1
Amber
HT8GBAL1
HT8GBAAL1
HT8GBABL1
HT8GBAABL1
HT8GBAF1Q1L1
Clear
HT8GBCL1
HT8GBCAL1
HT8GBCBL1
HT8GBCABL1
HT8GBCF1Q1L1
White
HT8GBWL1
HT8GBWAL1
HT8GBWBL1
HT8GBWABL1
HT8GBWF1Q1L1
Yellow
HT8GBYL1
HT8GBYAL1
HT8GBYBL1
HT8GBYABL1
HT8GBYF1Q1L1
Blue
HT8GBBL1
HT8GBBAL1
HT8GBBBL1
HT8GBBABL1
HT8GBBF1Q1L1
1
LED
Full voltage
24 Vac/Vdc
Transformer
1
120 Vac
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Note
1 Light unit base operator without lens or bulb.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-331
1.11
1
1
1
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
Guarded Illuminated Pushbutton Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13
●
●
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
●
Incandescent or LED
Full voltage or transformer type
24V and 120V
Guarded Illuminated
Pushbutton Operator
1
Guarded Illuminated Pushbuttons
Type
Volts
Lens Color
Operator Only
Catalog Number
1NO
Catalog Number
1NC
Catalog Number
1NO-1NC
Catalog Number
2NO-2NC
Catalog Number
—
Incandescent Lamp
1
Full voltage
120 Vac/Vdc
No lens 1
HT8GDFV
—
—
—
Red
HT8GDRV7
HT8GDRAV7
HT8GDRBV7
HT8GDRABV7
HT8GDRF1Q1V7
Green
HT8GDGV7
HT8GDGAV7
HT8GDGBV7
HT8GDGABV7
HT8GDGF1Q1V7
1
Amber
HT8GDAV7
HT8GDAAV7
HT8GDABV7
HT8GDAABV7
HT8GDAF1Q1V7
Clear
HT8GDCV7
HT8GDVAV7
HT8GDCBV7
HT8GDCABV7
HT8GDCF1Q1V7
1
White
HT8GDWV7
HT8GDWAV7
HT8GDWBV7
HT8GDWABV7
HT8GDWF1Q1V7
Yellow
HT8GDYV7
HT8GDYAV7
HT8GDYBV7
HT8GDYABV7
HT8GDYF1Q1V7
Blue
HT8GDBV7
HT8GDBAV7
HT8GDBBV7
HT8GDBABV7
HT8GDBF1Q1V7
No lens 1
HT8GDFV
—
—
—
—
Red
HT8GDRV3
HT8GDRAV3
HT8GDRBV3
HT8GDRABV3
HT8GDRF1Q1V3
Green
HT8GDGV3
HT8GDGAV3
HT8GDGBV3
HT8GDGABV3
HT8GDGF1Q1V3
Amber
HT8GDAV3
HT8GDAAV3
HT8GDABV3
HT8GDAABV3
HT8GDAF1Q1V3
Clear
HT8GDCV3
HT8GDVAV3
HT8GDCBV3
HT8GDCABV3
HT8GDCF1Q1V3
White
HT8GDWV3
HT8GDWAV3
HT8GDWBV3
HT8GDWABV3
HT8GDWF1Q1V3
Yellow
HT8GDYV3
HT8GDYAV3
HT8GDYBV3
HT8GDYABV3
HT8GDYF1Q1V3
Blue
HT8GDBV3
HT8GDBAV3
HT8GDBBV3
HT8GDBABV3
HT8GDBF1Q1V3
No lens 1
HT8GDT1
—
—
—
—
Red
HT8GDRT1
HT8GDRAT1
HT8GDRBT1
HT8GDRABT1
HT8GDRF1Q1T1
Green
HT8GDGT1
HT8GDGAT1
HT8GDGBT1
HT8GDGABT1
HT8GDGF1Q1T1
Amber
HT8GDAT1
HT8GDAAT1
HT8GDABT1
HT8GDAABT1
HT8GDAF1Q1T1
Clear
HT8GDCT1
HT8GDCAT1
HT8GDCBT1
HT8GDCABT1
HT8GDCF1Q1T1
White
HT8GDWT1
HT8GDWAT1
HT8GDWBT1
HT8GDWABT1
HT8GDWF1Q1T1
Yellow
HT8GDYT1
HT8GDYAT1
HT8GDYBT1
HT8GDYABT1
HT8GDYF1Q1T1
Blue
HT8GDBT1
HT8GDBAT1
HT8GDBBT1
HT8GDBABT1
HT8GDBF1Q1T1
1
1
24 Vac/Vdc
1
1
1
1
1
Transformer
1
1
1
1
1
120 Vac
Note
1 Light unit base operator without lens or bulb.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-332
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
1.11
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13
Guarded Illuminated
Pushbutton Operator
1
Guarded Illuminated Pushbuttons, continued
Type
Volts
Lens Color
Operator Only
Catalog Number
1NO
Catalog Number
1NC
Catalog Number
1NO-1NC
Catalog Number
2NO-2NC
Catalog Number
120 Vac/Vdc
No lens 1
HT8GDFV
—
—
—
—
Red
HT8GDRF7
HT8GDRAF7
HT8GDRBF7
HT8GDRABF7
HT8GDRF1Q1F7
Green
HT8GDGF7
HT8GDGAF7
HT8GDGBF7
HT8GDGABF7
HT8GDGF1Q1F7
Amber
HT8GDAF7
HT8GDAAF7
HT8GDABF7
HT8GDAABF7
HT8GDAF1Q1F7
Clear
HT8GDCF7
HT8GDCAF7
HT8GDCBF7
HT8GDCABF7
HT8GDCF1Q1F7
White
HT8GDWF7
HT8GDWAF7
HT8GDWBF7
HT8GDWABF7
HT8GDWF1Q1F7
Yellow
HT8GDYF7
HT8GDYAF7
HT8GDYBF7
HT8GDYABF7
HT8GDYF1Q1F7
Blue
HT8GDBF7
HT8GDBAF7
HT8GDBBF7
HT8GDBABF7
HT8GDBF1Q1F7
No lens 1
HT8GDFV
—
—
—
—
Red
HT8GDRF3
HT8GDRAF3
HT8GDRBF3
HT8GDRABF3
HT8GDRF1Q1F3
Green
HT8GDGF3
HT8GDGAF3
HT8GDGBF3
HT8GDGABF3
HT8GDGF1Q1F3
Amber
HT8GDAF3
HT8GDAAF3
HT8GDABF3
HT8GDAABF3
HT8GDAF1Q1F3
Clear
HT8GDCF3
HT8GDCAF3
HT8GDCBF3
HT8GDCABF3
HT8GDCF1Q1F3
White
HT8GDWF3
HT8GDWAF3
HT8GDWBF3
HT8GDWABF3
HT8GDWF1Q1F3
Yellow
HT8GDYF3
HT8GDYAF3
HT8GDYBF3
HT8GDYABF3
HT8GDYF1Q1F3
Blue
HT8GDBF3
HT8GDBAF3
HT8GDBBF3
HT8GDBABF3
HT8GDBF1Q1F3
No lens 1
HT8GDT1
—
—
—
—
Red
HT8GDRL1
HT8GDRAL1
HT8GDRBL1
HT8GDRABL1
HT8GDRF1Q1L1
Green
HT8GDGL1
HT8GDGAL1
HT8GDGBL1
HT8GDGABL1
HT8GDGF1Q1L1
Amber
HT8GDAL1
HT8GDAAL1
HT8GDABL1
HT8GDAABL1
HT8GDAF1Q1L1
Clear
HT8GDCL1
HT8GDCAL1
HT8GDCBL1
HT8GDCABL1
HT8GDCF1Q1L1
White
HT8GDWL1
HT8GDWAL1
HT8GDWBL1
HT8GDWABL1
HT8GDWF1Q1L1
Yellow
HT8GDYL1
HT8GDYAL1
HT8GDYBL1
HT8GDYABL1
HT8GDYF1Q1L1
Blue
HT8GDBL1
HT8GDBAL1
HT8GDBBL1
HT8GDBABL1
HT8GDBF1Q1L1
1
LED
Full voltage
24 Vac/Vdc
Transformer
1
120 Vac
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Note
1 Light unit base operator without lens or bulb.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-333
1.11
1
1
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
Indicating Light Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13
●
●
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Incandescent or LED
Full voltage or transformer
type
●
●
Standard and PresTest
types
24V and 120V
1
1
Indicating Light Unit
1
PresTest—This device
incorporates a press-to-test
feature whereby depressing
the lens disconnects
the light from the source
Indicating Light Units
Type
Volts
Lens Color
Indicating Light
Catalog Number
PresTest
Catalog Number
Incandescent
1
No lens 1
HT8HFFV
HT8GTFV
Red
HT8HFRV7
HT8GTRV7
Green
HT8HFGV7
HT8GTGV7
Amber
HT8HFAV7
HT8GTAV7
Clear
HT8HFCV7
HT8GTCV7
White
HT8HFWV7
HT8GTWV7
Yellow
HT8HFYV7
HT8GTYV7
Blue
HT8HFBV7
HT8GTBV7
No lens 1
HT8HFFV
HT8GTFV
Red
HT8HFRV3
HT8GTRV3
Green
HT8HFGV3
HT8GTGV3
1
Amber
HT8HFAV3
HT8GTAV3
Clear
HT8HFCV3
HT8GTCV3
1
White
HT8HFWV3
HT8GTWV3
Yellow
HT8HFYV3
HT8GTYV3
Blue
HT8HFBV3
HT8GTBV3
No lens 1
HT8HBT1
HT8GTT1
Red
HT8HBRT1
HT8GTRT1
1
Green
HT8HBGT1
HT8GTGT1
Amber
HT8HBAT1
HT8GTAT1
1
Clear
HT8HBCT1
HT8GTCT1
White
HT8HBWT1
HT8GTWT1
Yellow
HT8HBYT1
HT8GTYT1
Blue
HT8HBBT1
HT8GTBT1
1
being monitored
and connects the lamp to a
continuously energized
circuit for immediate
detection of faulty lamps.
Full voltage
120 Vac/Vdc
PresTest Light Unit
1
1
1
1
24 Vac/Vdc
1
1
Transformer
1
1
1
120 Vac
50/60 Hz
Note
1 Light unit base operator without lens or bulb.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-334
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
1.11
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13
Indicating Light Unit
1
Indicating Light Units, continued
Type
Volts
Lens Color
Indicating Light
Catalog Number
PresTest
Catalog Number
120 Vac/Vdc
No lens 1
HT8HFFV
HT8GTFV
Red
HT8HFRF7
HT8GTRF7
Green
HT8HFGF7
HT8GTGF7
Amber
HT8HFAF7
HT8GTAF7
Clear
HT8HFCF7
HT8GTCF7
White
HT8HFWF7
HT8GTWF7
Yellow
HT8HFYF7
HT8GTYF7
Blue
HT8HFBF7
HT8GTBF7
No lens 1
HT8HFFV
HT8GTFV
Red
HT8HFRF3
HT8GTRF3
Green
HT8HFGF3
HT8GTGF3
Amber
HT8HFAF3
HT8GTAF3
Clear
HT8HFCF3
HT8GTCF3
White
HT8HFWF3
HT8GTWF3
Yellow
HT8HFYF3
HT8GTYF3
Blue
HT8HFBF3
HT8GTBF3
1
1
LED
Full voltage
PresTest Light Unit
24 Vac/Vdc
Transformer
120 Vac
50/60 Hz
No lens 1
HT8HBT1
HT8GTT1
Red
HT8HBRL1
HT8GTRL1
Green
HT8HBGL1
HT8GTGL1
Amber
HT8HBAL1
HT8GTAL1
Clear
HT8HBCL1
HT8GTCL1
White
HT8HBWL1
HT8GTWL1
Yellow
HT8HBYL1
HT8GTYL1
Blue
HT8HBBL1
HT8GTBL1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Note
1 Light unit base operator without lens or bulb.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-335
1.11
1
1
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
Push-Pull Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13
●
●
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
●
40 mm mushroom head
Two-position maintained
Non-illuminated
1
1
Round Head TwoPosition Push-Pull Unit
Two-Position Push-Pull, Maintained, Non-Illuminated
Operator Position—Maintained
1
1
1
Out
In
Button
Color
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
No contact
—
—
Black
HT8CBH
HT8DBH
Red
HT8CBR
HT8DBR
Green
HT8CBG
HT8DBG
Black
HT8CBHA
HT8DBHA
Red
HT8CBRA
HT8DBRA
Green
HT8CBGA
HT8DBGA
Black
HT8CBHB
HT8DBHB
Red
HT8CBRB
HT8DBRB
Green
HT8CBGB
HT8DBGB
NO
O
X
1
1
NC
X
O
1
NO-NC
1
1
NCLB 1
NC
1
1
NCLB 1
NCLB 1
O
X
X
X
X
X
1
1
Flat Head
Mushroom Head
Button
Contact Type
Flat Head Two-Position
Push-Pull Unit
1
Round Head
Mushroom Head
Button
X
O
O
O
O
O
Black
HT8CBHAB
HT8DBHAB
Red
HT8CBRAB
HT8DBRAB
Green
HT8CBGAB
HT8DBGAB
Black
HT8CBHD1B
HT8DBHD1B
Red
HT8CBRD1B
HT8DBRD1B
Green
HT8CBGD1B
HT8DBGD1B
Black
HT8CBHD1D
HT8DBHD1D
Red
HT8CBRD1D
HT8DBRD1D
Green
HT8CBGD1D
HT8DBGD1D
Note
1 NCLB = normally closed late break.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-336
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.11
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
Illuminated Push-Pull Units
1
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13
●
●
●
1
Incandescent or LED
Full voltage or transformer type
24V and 120V
Illuminated
Push-Pull Unit
1
1
Illuminated Push-Pull Units
Type
Volts
Lens
Color
Operator Only
Catalog Number
1NO
Catalog Number
1NC
Catalog Number
1NO-1NC
Catalog Number
2NCLB
Catalog Number
1
Incandescent Lamp
Full voltage
120 Vac/Vdc
24 Vac/Vdc
Transformer
120 Vac
1
Red
HT8FBRV7
HT8FBRAV7
HT8FBRBV7
HT8FBRABV7
HT8FBRD1DV7
Green
HT8FBGV7
HT8FBGAV7
HT8FBGBV7
HT8FBGABV7
HT8FBGD1DV7
Red
HT8FBRV3
HT8FBRAV3
HT8FBRBV3
HT8FBRABV3
HT8FBRD1DV3
Green
HT8FBGV3
HT8FBGAV3
HT8FBGBV3
HT8FBGABV3
HT8FBGD1DV3
Red
HT8FBRT1
HT8FBRAT1
HT8FBRBT1
HT8FBRABT1
HT8FBRD1DT1
Green
HT8FBGT1
HT8FBGAT1
HT8FBGBT1
HT8FBGABT1
HT8FBGD1DT1
1
1
1
1
LED Lamp
Full voltage
120 Vac/Vdc
24 Vac/Vdc
Transformer
120 Vac
Red
HT8FBRF7
HT8FBRAF7
HT8FBRBF7
HT8FBRABF7
HT8FBRD1DF7
Green
HT8FBGF7
HT8FBGAF7
HT8FBGBF7
HT8FBGABF7
HT8FBGD1DF7
Red
HT8FBRF3
HT8FBRAF3
HT8FBRBF3
HT8FBRABF3
HT8FBRD1DF3
Green
HT8FBGF3
HT8FBGAF3
HT8FBGBF3
HT8FBGABF3
HT8FBGD1DF3
Red
HT8FBRL1
HT8FBRAL1
HT8FBRBL1
HT8FBRABL1
HT8FBRD1DL1
Green
HT8FBGL1
HT8FBGAL1
HT8FBGBL1
HT8FBGABL1
HT8FBGD1DL1
Note: Complete illuminated push-pull switches will not fit in a standard 3 in deep enclosure.
Color
Fingersafe
120
Vac/Vdc
Red
Yes
HT8FBRFL7P
Red
No
HT8FBRFL7
HT8FBRAFL7
HT8FBRBFL7
HT8FBRABFL7
HT8FBRD1DFL7
24
Vac/Vdc
Red
Yes
HT8FBRFL3P
HT8FBRAFL3P
HT8FBRBFL3P
HT8FBRABFL3P
HT8FBRD1DFL3P HT8FBRD1BFL3P
Red
No
HT8FBRFL3
HT8FBRAFL3
HT8FBRBFL3
HT8FBRABFL3
HT8FBRD1DFL3
120
Vac/Vdc
Red
Yes
HT8FBRVL7P
HT8FBRAVL7P
HT8FBRBVL7P
HT8FBRABVL7P
HT8FBRD1DVL7P HT8FBRD1BVL7P
Red
No
HT8FBRVL7
HT8FBRAVL7
HT8FBRBVL7
HT8FBRABVL7
HT8FBRD1DVL7
24
Vac/Vdc
Red
Yes
HT8FBRVL3P
HT8FBRAVL3P
HT8FBRBVL3P
HT8FBRABVL3P
HT8FBRD1DVL3P HT8FBRD1BVL3P
Red
No
HT8FBRVL3
HT8FBRAVL3
HT8FBRBVL3
HT8FBRABVL3
HT8FBRD1DVL3
LED Lamp
Full
voltage
HT8FBRAFL7P
HT8FBRBFL7P
HT8FBRABFL7P
HT8FBRD1DFL7P HT8FBRD1BFL7P
HT8FBRD1BFL7
HT8FBRD1BFL3
Incandescent
Full
voltage
1
1
Operator Only
1NO
1NC
1NO-1NC
2NCLB
1NO-1NCLB
Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
Voltage
1
1
Illuminated Push-Pull Units with Low Profile Light Units
Type
1
HT8FBRD1BVL7
HT8FBRD1BVL3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-337
1.11
1
1
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
Selector Switch Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13
●
●
Two-, three- and four-position
Non-illuminated
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Standard Knob
Operator
Two-Position Selector Switch Units, Non-Illuminated
Operator Position 1
Operating Mode 2
Contact
Type
1
No contacts
—
—
1
1
Standard Lever
Operator
1NO
O
X
1
1
2NO
X
O
O
X
1
2NO-2NC
1
X
O
O
X
1
1
1
Standard Knob
Operator
O
X
X
O
M
M
HT8JAH3A
HT8JDH3A
M
HT8JKH3A
HT8JLH3A
M
S
HT8JNH3A
HT8JPH3A
M
M
HT8JAH3AA5
HT8JDH3AA5
S
M
HT8JKH3AA5
HT8JLH3AA5
M
S
HT8JNH3AA5
HT8JPH3AA5
M
M
HT8JAH3AAA5
HT8JDH3AAA5
S
M
HT8JKH3AAA5
HT8JLH3AAA5
M
S
HT8JNH3AAA5
HT8JPH3AAA5
M
M
HT8JAH3AF1Q1
HT8JDH3AF1Q1
S
M
HT8JKH3AF1Q1
HT8JLH3AF1Q1
M
S
HT8JNH3AF1Q1
HT8JPH3AF1Q1
Standard
Black Knob
Catalog Number
Standard
Black Lever
Catalog Number
Three-Position Selector Switch Units, Non-Illuminated
Operator Position 1
Operating Mode 2
No contacts
—
—
—
1
1
Standard Lever
Operator
1
2NO
X
O
O
O
O
X
1
1
2NO-2NC
1
1
2NO-2NC
1
1
Standard
Black Lever
Catalog Number
S
Contact
Type
1
Standard
Black Knob
Catalog Number
3
X
O
O
X
O
O
X
O
X
O
O
X
O
X
O
O
X
O
X
X
O
M
M
M
HT8JBH1D
HT8JEH1D
S
M
M
HT8JRH1D
HT8JSH1D
M
M
S
HT8JUH1D
HT8JVH1D
S
M
S
HT8JXH1D
HT8JYH1D
M
M
M
HT8JBH1DAA5
HT8JEH1DAA5
S
M
M
HT8JRH1DAA5
HT8JSH1DAA5
M
M
S
HT8JUH1DAA5
HT8JVH1DAA5
S
M
S
HT8JXH1DAA5
HT8JYH1DAA5
M
M
M
HT8JBH1DF1Q1
HT8JEH1DF1Q1
S
M
M
HT8JRH1DF1Q1
HT8JSH1DF1Q1
M
M
S
HT8JUH1DF1Q1
HT8JVH1DF1Q1
S
M
S
HT8JXH1DF1Q1
HT8JYH1DF1Q1
M
M
M
HT8JBH1DF1Q1
HT8JEH1DF1Q1
S
M
M
HT8JRH1DF1Q1
HT8JSH1DF1Q1
M
M
S
HT8JUH1DF1Q1
HT8JVH1DF1Q1
S
M
S
HT8JXH1DF1Q1
HT8JYH1DF1Q1
Notes
1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2 M = Maintained, S = Momentary.
3 For OXO, NC contacts must be wired in series—see Three-Position Selector Switch table on Page V7-T1-340.
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-338
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.11
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13
Standard Knob
Operator
1
1
Four-Position Selector Switch Units, Non-Illuminated
Operator
Position 1
Operating Mode
2
M
M
M
S
M
M
M
M
Standard
Black Knob
Catalog Number
Standard
Black Lever
Catalog Number
M
HT8JCH8E
HT8JFH8E
M
M
HT8LNH8E
HT8LPH8E
M
S
HT8LRH8E
HT8LSH8E
M
M
M
HT8JCH8EF1Q1
HT8JFH8EF1Q1
S
M
M
M
HT8LNH8EF1Q1
HT8LPH8EF1Q1
M
M
M
S
HT8LRH8EF1Q1
HT8LSH8EF1Q1
Contact
Type
No contacts
Standard Lever
Operator
2NO-2NC
—
X
O
O
O
—
O
X
O
O
—
O
O
X
O
—
O
O
O
X
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Notes
1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2 M = Maintained, S = Momentary.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-339
1.11
1
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
Selector Switch Contact Block Selection
For Two-, Three- and Four-Position Selector Switches
Two-Position Selector Switch (Cam Code 3A)
Operator Position
1
Left
X
O
1
1
Right
or
NO
O
NC
X
or
NC
NO
1
1
1
Three-Position Selector Switch (Cam Code 1D)
Operator Position
Left
1
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
1
O
X
X
1
X
X
O
1
—
NO
1
1
Right
NC
NC
—
NO
—
NC
—
1
NC
1
Four-Position Selector Switch (Cam Code 8E)
1
Operator Position
1
Left
X
O
O
O
1
O
X
O
O
1
O
O
X
O
—
O
O
O
X
—
1
1
Right
—
NO
—
NC
NO
1
NC
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-340
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
1.11
Accessories
1
HT800 Accessories
HT8A15
Description
Catalog Number
Illuminated Pushbutton Guard
HT8A15
1
1
1
HT8WRENCH
Wrench Tool
1
HT8WRENCH
1
1
HT8LAMPTOOL
Lamp/Bulb Removal Tool
1
HT8LAMPTOOL
1
HT8X1
Thrust Washer (Anti-rotation)
(Included with every operator)
1
HT8X1
1
1
HT8X2
Trim Ring
(Included with every operator)
1
HT8X2
1
1
1
HT8X3
Sealing/Spacer Washer
(Five included with every operator)
HT8X3
1
1
1
HT8GR1
Grounding Kit for Pushbuttons and Selector Switches
(Included with every operator)
HT8GR1
1
1
1
HT8GR2
Grounding Kit for Indicating Lights
(Included with indicating lights)
1
HT8GR2
1
1
1
Light Unit
1
Light Units
Type
Voltage
Catalog Number
Full voltage
24 Vac/Vdc
HT8F3V3
120 Vac/Vdc
HT8F7V8
Transformer
120 Vac
HT8L1T1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-341
1.11
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
Options
Legend Plates 1
1
Standard
1
For Pushbutton Operators and Indicating Lights
Legend
1
Color of
Field
Standard
Catalog Number
Jumbo
Catalog Number
Legend
Color of
Field
Standard
Catalog Number
Jumbo
Catalog Number
Letters on Legend Plates Below are 3/16 in High
CLAMP
HT8SP90
HT8LP90
OFF
Red
HT8SP24
HT8LP24
CLOSE
HT8SP73
HT8LP73
ON
Black
HT8SP25
HT8LP25
DOWN
HT8SP74
HT8LP74
OPEN
HT8SP26
HT8LP26
EMERG. STOP
HT8SP13
HT8LP13
OUT
HT8SP27
HT8LP27
FAST
HT8SP75
HT8LP75
POWER ON
HT8SP80
HT8LP80
FASTER
HT8SP87
HT8LP87
RAISE
HT8SP28
HT8LP28
1
FEEDER ON
HT8SP94
HT8LP94
READY
HT8SP86
HT8LP86
FEEDER OFF
HT8SP95
HT8LP95
RESET
HT8SP29
HT8LP29
1
FORWARD
HT8SP15
HT8LP15
REVERSE
HT8SP30
HT8LP30
HIGH
HT8SP16
HT8LP16
RUN
HT8SP31
HT8LP31
1
IN
HT8SP17
HT8LP17
SAFE
HT8SP85
HT8LP85
INCH
HT8SP18
HT8LP18
SLOW
HT8SP32
HT8LP32
JOG
HT8SP19
HT8LP19
SLOWER
HT8SP88
HT8LP88
JOG FOR.
HT8SP20
HT8LP20
START
HT8SP33
HT8LP33
JOG REV.
HT8SP21
HT8LP21
STOP
Red
HT8SP34
HT8LP34
LOW
HT8SP22
HT8LP22
TEST
Black
HT8SP83
HT8LP83
LOWER
HT8SP23
HT8LP23
TRANSFER
HT8SP93
HT8LP93
LUBE-FAIL
HT8SP92
HT8LP92
TRIP
HT8SP84
HT8LP84
MOTOR RUN
HT8SP81
HT8LP81
UNCLAMP
HT8SP91
HT8LP91
MOTOR STOP
HT8SP82
HT8LP82
UP
HT8SP35
HT8LP35
Jumbo
Catalog Number
Legend
Standard
Catalog Number
Jumbo
Catalog Number
HT8SP38
HT8LP38
AUTO OFF HAND
HT8SP49
HT8LP49
HAND AUTO
HT8SP39
HT8LP39
FOR. OFF REV.
HT8SP50
HT8LP50
HIGH LOW
HT8SP40
HT8LP40
FOR. SAFE REV.
HT8SP69
HT8LP69
1
JOG RUN
HT8SP41
HT8LP41
HAND OFF AUTO
HT8SP51
HT8LP51
MAN. AUTO
HT8SP67
HT8LP67
MAN. OFF AUTO
HT8SP68
HT8LP68
1
OFF ON
HT8SP42
HT8LP42
OPEN OFF CLOSE
HT8SP53
HT8LP53
OPEN CLOSE
HT8SP43
HT8LP43
RUN SAFE JOG
HT8SP70
HT8LP70
RUN JOG
HT8SP44
HT8LP44
UP OFF DOWN
HT8SP54
HT8LP54
SAFE RUN
HT8SP45
HT8LP45
ON STOP SAFE
HT8SP71
HT8LP71
START JOG
HT8SP46
HT8LP46
START STOP
HT8SP47
HT8LP47
UP DOWN
HT8SP48
HT8LP48
1
Jumbo
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Standard
For Selector Switch Operators
1
Legend
1
FOR. REV.
1
Black
Color of
Field
Standard
Catalog Number
Two-Position—3/16 in High Lettering
Jumbo
1
1
1
Black
Color of
Field
Three-Position—3/16 in High Lettering
Black
1
1
1
1
1
1
For Push-Pull Units
Blank Plastic Legend Plates—Square
Legend
Color of
Field
Standard 2
Catalog Number
Jumbo 3
Catalog Number
Legend
Color of
Field
Standard
Catalog Number
Jumbo
Catalog Number
ON/OFF
Black
HT8PP5
HT8R5
Black
White/Silver
HT8SP76
HT8LP76
OPEN/CLOSE
HT8PP8
HT8R8
White
Red/ Black
HT8SP77
HT8LP77
UP/DOWN
HT8PP11
HT8R11
Notes
1 For dimensions, see Page V7-T1-350.
2 3/32 in high lettering.
3 1/8 in high lettering.
V7-T1-342
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
1.11
Legend Plates with Non-Standard Markings
When Ordering Specify
●
●
1
Ordering Example:
Catalog number of blank
plate.
Insert the following into
Order Notes: legend, letter
size and locations. See
information below.
Legend Characters
Available
Catalog no.: HT85P76STAMP
Letter size: 3/32 in (2.4 mm)
Pos. A—POWER HOUSE
Pos. B—START PUMP 1
1
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO
PQRSTUVWXYZ/-.,1
234567890
1
1
1
Legend Positions
1
Standard Size
HT8SP Series
Jumbo Size
HT8LP Series
1
A
A
B
C
D
K
B
G
F
AB
AE
AF
B4
A4
1
1
C4
D4
G
1
A
H
I
1
1
Blank Plastic Legend Plates for Non-Standard Markings—Plastic
Color of
Field
Standard
Catalog Number
Jumbo
Catalog Number
1
Black
White/Silver
HT8SP76STAMP
HT8LP76STAMP
White
Red/Black
HT8SP77STAMP
HT8LP77STAMP
1
Legend
1
1
Maximum Characters per Legend Plate and Approximate Dimensions
Character Size
Top
(Aluminum
and Plastic)
3/32 in High
1/8 in High
1
3/16 in High
Style
Number
of Lines
Number of
Characters
Number
of Lines
Number of
Characters
Number
of Lines
Number of
Characters
Standard
Square
2
18
2
13
1
9
Jumbo 1
Square
5
23
3
18
2
12
1
1
Note
1 Can be used on top row only of any enclosure.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-343
1.11
1
1
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
Contact Blocks
NO Contact Block
1
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
NC Contact Block
1
1
Contact Blocks 12
Description/Function
Contact
Type
Without Guard
Catalog Number
Fingerproof
Catalog Number
Standard normally open contact
NO
HT8A
HT8AP
Standard normally closed contact
NC
HT8B
HT8BP
Normally open early make contact will
make circuit before standard NO contact.
DC ratings do not apply.
NOEM
HT8C
HT8CP
Normally closed late break contact will
open after standard NC contact.
DC ratings do not apply.
NCLB
HT8D
HT8DP
Logic level, low voltage NO contact.
Gold plated contacts.
NO
HT8E
HT8EP
1
1
Contact Block Location (Viewed from Rear)
Suffix Codes 34
1
Left Side
Right Side
A = NO
A5 = NO
A2 = 2NO
A6 = 2NO
B1 = NC
B = NC
B2 = 2NC
B6 = 2NC
1
C = NOEM
C5 = NOEM
C2 = 2 NOEM
C6 = 2 NOEM
1
D1 = NCLB
D = NCLB
D2 = 2 NCLB
D6 = 2 NCLB
E1 = NOEM-NCLB
E5 = NOEM-NCLB
F1 = NO and NC
Q1 = NO and NC
1
1
1
1
F4 = 1NO-1NC
1
Notes
1 See Page V7-T1-346 for contact block electrical ratings.
2 Maximum of four contact blocks per side or a total of eight contact blocks recommended.
3 Maximum of two contact blocks per side or a total of four contact blocks recommended.
4 Standard contact blocks without fingerproof protection.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-344
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
1.11
Replacement Parts
1
Replacement Bulbs and LEDs
Voltage
Incandescent Bulb
Color
Catalog Number
6V
—
HT8BULBV1
24V
—
HT8BULBV3
120V
—
HT8BULBV7
1
Incandescent
1
1
1
1
LED Bulb
1
LED
6–12V
(For use with transformers with 6V
secondary winding)
24V
120V
Red
HT8LEDRF1
Green
HT8LEDGF1
Amber/orange
HT8LEDAF1
White/clear
HT8LEDWF1
Yellow
HT8LEDYF1
Blue
HT8LEDBF1
Red
HT8LEDRF3
Green
HT8LEDGF3
Amber/orange
HT8LEDAF3
White/clear
HT8LEDWF3
Yellow
HT8LEDYF3
Blue
HT8LEDBF3
Red
HT8LEDRF7
Green
HT8LEDGF7
Amber/orange
HT8LEDAF7
White/clear
HT8LEDWF7
Yellow
HT8LEDYF7
Blue
HT8LEDBF7
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Replacement Lenses
PresTest Lights
Illuminated Pushbuttons
Catalog Number
1
Color
Indicating Lights
Catalog Number
Amber
HT8LA
HT8BA
1
Blue
HT8LB
HT8BB
Clear
HT8LC
HT8BC
Green
HT8LG
HT8BG
Red
HT8LR
HT8BR
White
HT8LW
HT8BW
Yellow
HT8LY
HT8BY
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-345
1.11
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
Technical Data and Specifications
HT800—Specifications
Description
Specification
Mechanical Ratings
Frequency of operation
Pushbuttons
6,000 operations per hour
Selector switches
3,000 operations per hour
Push-pull operators
3,000 operations per hour
Mechanical endurance/life
Pushbuttons
10 x 106 operations 6K ops/hr with 6 NO on left and 6 NC on right
Selector switches
250 x 103 operations 3K ops/hr with 2 NO on left and 2 NC on right
Push-pull operators
250 x 103 operations 3K ops/hr with 6 NO on left and 6 NC on right
1
Climatic Conditions
Operating temperature
10° to 140°F (–12° to 60°C)
1
Storage temperature
–40° to 176°F (–40° to 80°C)
Altitude
6,562 ft (2,000m)
Humidity
95% RH at 60°C
1
1
Terminals
Contact blocks
#6-32 posidrive saddle clamp type, 1 x 16 AWG to 2 x 14 AWG, 12 in-lbs max.
1
Light units
#6-32 posidrive saddle clamp type, 1 x 22 AWG to 2 x 14 AWG, 7 in-lbs max.
Electrical Ratings
1
1
Standard contact blocks UL (NEMA) rating
See table below.
Logic level contact block power rating
5V 1 mA (minimum)
28V 500 mA (maximum)
1
Electrical Ratings—HT800 Standard Contact Blocks, UL Rating
1
1
1
1
1
Description/Function
Contact
Type
AC
Standard normally open contact
NO
A600
Standard normally closed contact
NC
Normally open early make contact will make circuit before standard
NO contact. DC ratings do not apply.
DC
P600
1
Catalog Number
2
HT8A
A600 1
P600 2
HT8B
NOEM
A600 1
—
HT8C
Normally closed late break contact will open after standard NC
contact. DC ratings do not apply.
NCLB
A600 1
—
HT8D
Logic level, low voltage NO contact. Gold plated contacts.
NO
5V 1 mA (minimum)
28V 500 mA (maximum)
HT8E
1
1
UL A600 and P600 Ratings
1
Description
120
240
480
600
125
250
Make and emerg. interrupting capacity (amp)
60
30
15
12
1.1
0.55
0.2
Normal load break (amp)
6
3
1.5
1.2
1.1
0.55
0.2
Thermal current (amp)
10
10
10
10
5
5
5
1
1
1
1
1
1
Vdc 3
50 Vac or 60 Hz
600
Voltamperes:
Make and emerg. interrupting capacity
7200
7200
7200
7200
138 4
138 4
138 4
Normal load break
720
720
720
720
138
138
138
Notes
1 Heavy-duty.
2 Standard-duty.
3 DC ratings do not apply to NOEM (Normally Open Early Make) and NCLB (Normal Closed Late Break) contact blocks HT8C and HT8D.
4 Maximum make or break volt-amperes at 300V or less.
1
V7-T1-346
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
1.11
Dimensions
1
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1
Momentary Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated
Back, side and bottom views of pushbutton operator with attached contact blocks.
Stacking Screw Torque:
12 in-lbs Max.
1
4.60 (116.8)
Panel
3.70 (94.0)
2.90 (73.7)
2.00 (50.8)
1
0.90 (22.9)
Extended
1
1
1.40
(35.6)
#6-32 Posi-drive
Saddle Clamp Type
1x16 AWG to 2 x14 AWG
Terminal Torque:
12 in-lbs Max.
Copper Wire Only
1
1
0.75 (19.1)
Flush
1.00
(25.4)
1
Side View
2.00 (50.8)
1
1
Back View
1
1
1
Optional
2 Stacks
1
Recommended 4 Stacks
(8 Contact Blocks Total)
Bottom View
1
1
Illuminated Pushbuttons
Back, side and bottom views of pushbutton operator with attached contact blocks.
Light Unit #6-32 Posi-drive
Saddle Clamp Type
1x16 AWG to 2x14 AWG
Terminal Torque:
7 in-lbs Max.
Copper Wire Only
4.35 (110.5)
3.55 (90.2)
2.75 (69.9)
Stacking Screw Torque:
12 in-lbs Max.
1
5.15 (130.8)
Panel
1
1.50
(38.1)
1
1
1.40
(35.6)
1
Contact Block
#6-32 Posi-drive
Saddle Clamp Type
1x16 AWG to 2 x14 AWG
Terminal Torque:
12 in-lbs Max.
Copper Wire Only
1
1.00
(25.4)
1
Side View
2.00 (50.8)
Back View
1
1
1
1
1
Optional
2 Stacks
Recommended 4 Stacks
(8 Contact Blocks Total)
1
Bottom View
1
Note
1 Recommended maximum of four tandem stacks of contact blocks behind operator. At users’ discretion, two additional tandem stacks may be added.
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1
V7-T1-347
1.11
1
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Mushroom Head Pushbuttons and Round Head MRH Push-Pull Operators
Back, side and bottom views of mushroom head operator with attached contact blocks.
Stacking Screw Torque:
12 in-lbs Max.
4.60 (116.8)
Panel
3.70 (94.0)
2.90 (73.7)
2.00 (50.8)
1
1.50
(38.1)
1
1.40
(35.6)
1
1
1
1
1
#6-32 Posi-drive
1.00
Saddle Clamp Type
(25.4)
1x16 AWG to 2 x14 AWG
Terminal Torque:
2.00 (50.8)
12 in-lbs Max.
Copper Wire Only
Back View
Side View
1
1
1
Optional
2 Stacks
1
Recommended 4 Stacks
(8 Contact Blocks Total)
Bottom View
1
1
Illuminated and Non-Illuminated Flat Head MRH Push-Pull Operators
Back, side and bottom views of push-pull operator with attached contact blocks.
1
Light Unit
#6-32 Posi-drive
Saddle Clamp Type
1x22 AWG to 2 x14 AWG
Terminal Torque:
7 in-lbs Max.
Copper Wire Only
1
1
1
1
1
1.30
(33.0)
3.55 (90.2)
2.75 (69.9)
1.40
(35.6)
1
1
5.15 (130.8)
4.35 (110.5)
Panel
Stacking Screw Torque:
12 in-lbs Max.
Contact Block
1.00
#6-32 Posi-drive
(25.4)
Saddle Clamp Type
1x16 AWG to 2 x14 AWG
2.00 (50.8)
Terminal Torque:
12 in-lbs Max.
Copper Wire Only
Back View
Side View
12
1
1
1
1
Optional
2 Stacks
1
1
1
Recommended 4 Stacks
(8 Contact Blocks Total)
Bottom View
Notes
1 Recommended maximum of four tandem stacks of contact blocks behind operator. At users’ discretion, two additional tandem stacks may be added.
2 Contact blocks mount directly to operator adaptor in non-illuminated version.
V7-T1-348
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
1.11
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1
Indicating Lights
Back, side and bottom views of indicating light operator with attached contact blocks.
1
Panel
#6-32 Posi-drive
Saddle Clamp Type
1x22 AWG to 2 x14 AWG
Terminal Torque:
7 in-lbs Max.
Copper Wire Only
1
1
1
1.30
(33.0)
1
1
Stacking Screw Torque:
12 in-lbs Max.
1
1.68
(42.7)
Back View
Light Unit
Assembly
Side View
1.67
(42.4)
1
1
1.26
(32.0)
1
1
1
1
Bottom View
1
Selector Switches
Back, side and bottom views of selector switch operator with attached contact blocks.
Stacking Screw Torque:
12 in-lbs Max.
Panel
2.90 (73.7)
2.00 (50.8)
1
1
1.20
(38.1)
1
1
1.40
(35.6)
#6-32 Posi-drive
Saddle Clamp Type
1x16 AWG to 2 x14 AWG
Terminal Torque:
12 in-lbs Max.
Copper Wire Only
1
1
1.00
(25.4)
1
Side View
1
2.00 (50.8)
1
Back View
1
1
1
Recommended
2 Stacks
(4 Contact Blocks Total)
1
1
Bottom View
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-349
1.11
1
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Mounting Matrix and Minimum Panel Spacing Requirements
2.19
(55.6)
2.50 (63.5)
0.18 (4.6)
1.77
(45)
0.68
(17.3)
1
1
2.50
(63.5)
1
1
Legend Plates
2.19
(55.6)
1.77
(45)
Optional Notch
Locations
Standard
Jumbo
1
1
1.20 (30.5)
Diameter
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-350
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
1.12
Contents
Description
Page
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—
10250T/E34
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection
Momentary Pushbutton Units . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-Illuminated Pushbutton Units . . . . . . .
Illuminated Pushbutton Units . . . . . . . . . . .
Guarded Illuminated Pushbutton Units . . . .
Indicating Light Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated Pushbuttons and
Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Push-Pull Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated Push-Pull Units . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Push-Pull Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selector Switch Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selector Switch Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selector Switch Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated Selector Switch Operators . . . .
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1
V7-T1-352
V7-T1-353
V7-T1-353
V7-T1-354
V7-T1-358
V7-T1-360
V7-T1-361
V7-T1-362
V7-T1-363
V7-T1-365
V7-T1-367
V7-T1-370
V7-T1-374
V7-T1-376
V7-T1-379
V7-T1-382
V7-T1-384
V7-T1-387
V7-T1-389
V7-T1-390
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Product Description
All the Industry-Proven
Quality of Eaton’s 10250T and
E34 Series of Logic Devices,
plus Class I Division 2
Certification
The 10250T1H consists of a
normally open-normally
closed factory sealed contact
block that is UL Listed for use
in Class I, Division 2, Groups
B, C and D (NEC 500–503)—
Class I, Zone 2, IIB + H2 (NEC
505) hazardous locations and
is rated for both NEMA A600
and NEMA Q300. 10250T and
E34 illuminated components
have also been UL Listed for
use in Class I, Division 2,
Groups B, C and D (NEC 500–
503)—Class I, Zone 2, IIB +
H2 (NEC 505).
This, combined with the
industry-proven Eaton
10250T 30.5 mm pushbutton
line, offers a complete
solution to Division 2
hazardous location
requirements.
Benefits
Single composite catalog
numbers for complete
assembled stations and
operators for use in Division 2
hazardous locations are
featured throughout this
section.
●
●
●
Features
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Factory sealed contact
blocks
Heavy-duty zinc die cast
construction
NEMA rated 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4,
4X, 12, 13
Front-of-panel drainage
holes
Grounding nibs on the
operator casing
Solid thermosetting
cathodic epoxy coating on
E34
Corrosion resistance in E34
●
●
Pushbutton for hazardous
locations
Drainage holes prevent
buildup of liquid inside the
operator which can prevent
operation in freezing
environments
Grounding nibs bite
through paint and other
coatings to provide secure
ground
Suitable for corrosive
environments (E34 only)
Earth terminal provides
additional grounding point
and allows for daisy chain
grounding (E34 line)
Standards and
Certifications
●
●
●
●
1
UL 508—File No. E131568
UL 1604—File No. E10323
CSA Certified C22.2
No.14—File No. LR 68551
CSA Certified C22.2 No.
213-M1987—File No. LR
20713
1
1
1
1
1
Ingress Protection
●
●
Standard indicating lights
●
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R,
3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13
●
IEC IP65
All other operators
●
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R,
4, 4X, 12, 13
●
IEC IP65
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-351
1.12
1
1
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Product Overview
Operator
10250T Grounding Nibs
The 30.5 mm 10250T
pushbutton line features a
zinc die cast construction with
chrome-plated housing and
mounting nut.
10250T line operators have
“grounding nibs”—four metal
points on the operator casting
designed to bite through
most paints and other
coatings on metal panels to
enhance the grounding
connection when the
operator is securely
tightened.
1
Eaton’s E34 Series 30.5 mm
pushbutton line features the
same rugged die cast
construction of our 10250T
line with an additional twolayer 100% solid thermosetting
cathodic epoxy coating. This
coating provides a flat black
smooth, consistent, corrosion
resistant surface that has
passed a demanding 600 hour
salt spray test. (The industry
standard for this 4X test
requires only 200 hours.)
1
Ultraviolet Light
1
1
1
1
1
1
E34 epoxy coating is not
recommended for use in
applications where exposure
to ultraviolet light exists—use
NEMA 4X 10250T operators.
1
Ratings
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Our Class I Division 2 line of
pushbuttons are UL Listed
(NEMA type) 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4,
4X, 12 and 13. Our Class I
Division 2 E34 line meets IEC
947-1 IP66 standards and the
cathodic coating meets FDA
3A sanitary chemical
resistance requirements.
For a complete listing of all
applicable ratings see
Pages V7-T1-387 to
V7-T1-388.
Diaphragm Seal with
Drainage Holes
10250T Grounding Nibs
Liquid Drainage
Eaton’s pushbutton operators
offer front of panel drainage
via holes in the operator
bushing. Hidden from view by
the mounting nut, these
holes prevent buildup of liquid
inside the operator, which
can prevent operation in
freezing environments. The
holes also provide a route for
escaping liquid in high
pressure washdowns,
effectively relieving pressure
from the internal diaphragm
seal, ensuring reliable sealing
in applications even beyond
NEMA 4.
E34 Grounding Nibs
Diaphragm Seal
E34 line of operators is
equipped with a ground
screw terminal as part of its
die cast construction. This
earthing terminal provides an
easily accessible point for
grounding operators when
used in a painted or
nonmetallic enclosure and
eliminates the need for extra
kits when daisy chain
grounding is required.
E34 Grounding Nibs
Foam Neoprene
Panel Sealing Gasket
Drainage Hole
Flexible
Diaphragm
Stainless
Steel
Operating
Spring
Colorfast
Molded
Button
Drainage Hole
Mounting Nut
Nib
Earth
Terminal
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-352
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.12
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Product Identification
1
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1
Non-Illuminated Assembled Operators
1
1
10250T 718 E J
1
Operator Type
10250T = Heavy-duty oiltight
E34EX = Corrosion resistant oiltight
706 =
707 =
708 =
709 =
710 =
711 =
712 =
713 =
714 =
715 =
716 =
717 =
718 =
721 =
Operator and Contact Block
Flush 1NO-1NC
722 = 2P SS MT XO,OX-CAM1
Flush 2NO-2NC
723 = 2P SS MT XO,OX,XO,OX-CAM1
Extended 1NO-1NC
724 = 2P SS SPR-R XO,OX-CAM1
Extended 2NO-2NC
725 = 2P SS SPR-R XO,OX,XO,OX-CAM1
Mushroom 1NO-1NC
726 = 3P SS MT XOO,OOX-CAM3
Mushroom 2NO-2NC
727 = 3P SS MT XOO,OXO,OOX-CAM3
JMB mushroom 1NO-1NC
728 = 3P SS SPR-L XOO,OOX-CAM3
JMB mushroom 2NO-2NC
729 = 3P SS SPR-L XOO,OXO,OOX-CAM3
2P MT push-pull 1NO-1NC
730 = 3P SS SPR-L&R XOO,OOX-CAM3
2P MT push-pull 2NO-2NC
731 = 3P SS SPR-L&R XOO,OXO,OOX-CAM3
3P MT push-mom pull 1NO-1NC 732 = 3P SS SPR-R XOO,OOX-CAM3
3P MT push-mom pull 2NO-2NC 733 = 3P SS SPR-R XOO,OXO,OOX-CAM3
3P mom push-pull 1NO-1NC
743 = 4P SS MT XOOO,OXOO,OOXO,OOOX-CAM7
3P mom push-pull 2NO-2NC
B
R
G
Y
W
L
N
E
T
Button Color
= Black
= Red
= Green
= Yellow
= White
= Blue
= Orange
= Red EMERG. STOP
= Keyed-SS
ACC/SS Type
Blank = None
J = JMB push-pull
B = Booted-FL/EXT
G = Guarded-FL
K = Knob-SS
L = Lever-SS
A = Lever W/IP-SS
C = Coin-SS
Keyed-SS
— —
Cam
1
2
3
7
1
1
1
1
1
Key Removal
1 = RT only
2 = LT only
3 = RT and LT
4 = CT only
5 = RT and CT
6 = LT and CT
7 = All
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-353
1.12
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Product Selection
Momentary Pushbutton Units
1
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
1
10250T Flush Button
Non-Illuminated Flush and Extended Pushbuttons
Flush Button
1
1
1
Extended Button
Contact Type
Button
Color 1
10250T
Catalog Number
E34
Catalog Number
10250T
Catalog Number
E34
Catalog Number
1NO-1NC
Black
10250T706B
E34EX706B
10250T708B
E34EX708B
Red
10250T706R
E34EX706R
10250T708R
E34EX708R
Green
10250T706G
E34EX706G
10250T708G
E34EX708G
Black
10250T707B
E34EX707B
10250T709B
E34EX709B
Red
10250T707R
E34EX707R
10250T709R
E34EX709R
Green
10250T707G
E34EX707G
10250T709G
E34EX709G
E34 Flush Button
1
1
1
10250T Extended
Button
1
2NO-2NC
1
1
1
E34 Extended Button
1
1
1
1
Color Selection
Color
Suffix Code
Color
Suffix Code
Black
B
White
W
Red
R
Blue
L2
Green
G
Orange 3
N
1
Yellow
Y
Red (EMERG. STOP) 4
E
1
Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light.
1
1
1
1
2
1
3
4
To order different color guarded button, simply substitute the underlined character in catalog number with
appropriate suffix code from Color Selection table above. Example: 10250T710Y.
Blue not available on jumbo mushroom pushbutton.
Orange is only available on flush or extended pushbuttons.
Red with EMERG. STOP engraved on button head for jumbo mushroom pushbutton only.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-354
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.12
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
1
Non-Illuminated Mushroom and Jumbo Mushroom Pushbuttons
10250T Mushroom
Button
Mushroom Button
1
Jumbo Mushroom Button
Contact Type
Button
Color 1
10250T
Catalog Number
E34
Catalog Number
10250T 2
Catalog Number
E34 2
Catalog Number
1NO-1NC
Black
10250T710B
E34EX710B
10250T712B
E34EX712B
1
1
1
E34 Mushroom Button
Red
10250T710R
E34EX710R
10250T712R
1
E34EX712R
1
Green
10250T710G
E34EX710G
10250T712G
1
E34EX712G
1
10250T Jumbo
Mushroom Button
1
2NO-2NC
Black
10250T711B
E34EX711B
10250T713B
E34EX713B
1
1
Red
10250T711R
E34EX711R
10250T713R
E34EX713R
1
E34 Jumbo Mushroom
Button
1
Green
10250T711G
E34EX711G
10250T713G
1
E34EX713G
1
1
1
Color Selection
Color
Suffix Code
Color
Suffix Code
Black
B
White
W
Red
R
Blue
L3
Green
G
Orange 4
N
Yellow
Y
Red (EMERG. STOP) 5
E
1
1
1
1
Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light.
1
2
3
4
5
1
To order different color guarded button, simply substitute the underlined character in catalog number with
appropriate suffix code from Color Selection table above. Example: 10250T710Y.
Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet applications.
Blue not available on jumbo mushroom pushbutton.
Orange is only available on flush or extended pushbuttons.
Red with EMERG. STOP engraved on button head for jumbo mushroom pushbutton only.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-355
1.12
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
●
●
●
Momentary contact
Non-illuminated
Booted or guarded
1
1
Booted Flush Button
1
10250T Pushbuttons Booted and Guarded
Contact Type
Button Color
Booted Flush Button
Catalog Number
Booted Extended Button
Catalog Number
Guarded Extended Button 1
Catalog Number
1NO-1NC
Black
10250T706BB
10250T708BB
10250T706BG
Red
10250T706RB 2
10250T708RB
10250T706RG
Green
10250T706GB
10250T708GB
10250T706GG
Black
10250T707BB
10250T709BB
10250T707BG
Red
10250T707RB 2
10250T709RB
10250T707RG
Green
10250T707GB
10250T709GB
10250T707GG
1
1
1
Booted Extended
Button
1
1
2NO-2NC
1
1
Guarded Extended
Button
1
1
1
1
Color Selection
1
1
1
Color
Suffix Code
Color
Suffix Code
Black
B
White
W
Red
R
Blue
L
Green
G
Orange
N
Yellow
Y
1
Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light.
1
1
2
1
To order different color guarded button, simply substitute the underlined character in catalog number with
appropriate suffix code from Color Selection table above. Example: 10250T706YG.
Red booted flush pushbutton is not recommended for STOP function.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-356
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
1.12
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
●
●
●
1
Momentary contact
Non-illuminated
Booted or guarded
Booted Flush Button
1
1
E34 Pushbuttons Booted and Guarded
Contact Type
Button Color
Booted Flush Button
Catalog Number
Booted Extended Button
Catalog Number
Guarded Extended Button 1
Catalog Number
1
1NO-1NC
Black
E34EX706BB
E34EX708BB
E34EX706BG
1
Red
E34EX706RB 2
E34EX708RB
E34EX706RG
Green
E34EX706GB
1
1
Booted Extended
Button
E34EX708GB
1
E34EX706GG
1
2NO-2NC
Guarded Extended
Button
Black
E34EX707BB
E34EX709BB
E34EX707BG
Red
E34EX707RB 2
E34EX709RB
E34EX707RG
1
1
1
Green
E34EX707GB
E34EX709GB
1
E34EX707GG
1
1
Color Selection
Color
Suffix Code
Color
Suffix Code
Black
B
White
W
Red
R
Blue
L
Green
G
Orange
N
Yellow
Y
1
1
1
1
Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light.
1
2
1
To order different color guarded button, simply substitute the underlined character in catalog number with
appropriate suffix code from Color Selection table above. Example: 10250T706YG.
Red booted flush pushbutton is not recommended for STOP function.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-357
1.12
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Non-Illuminated Pushbutton Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, and 13
10250T Flush Button
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Momentary Contact
Half Shrouded Button
1
Flush Button
1
1
Extended Button
10250T
E34
Color
10250T 1
Catalog
Number
E34
Catalog
Number
10250T
Catalog
Number
E34
Catalog
Number
Vertical
Catalog
Number
Horizontal
Catalog
Number
Vertical
Catalog
Number
Horizontal
Catalog
Number
Black
10250T101
E34PB1
10250T111
E34EB1
10250T501
10250T511
E34EVB1
E34EHB1
Red
10250T102
E34PB2
10250T112
E34EB2
10250T502
10250T512
E34EVB2
E34EHB2
Green
10250T103
E34PB3
10250T113
E34EB3
10250T503
10250T513
E34EVB3
E34EHB3
Yellow
10250T104
E34PB4
10250T120
E34EB4
10250T504
10250T514
E34EVB4
E34EHB4
Gray
10250T105
E34PB5
—
E34EB5
10250T505
10250T515
E34EVB5
E34EHB5
White
10250T106
E34PB6
10250T116
E34EB6
10250T506
10250T516
E34EVB6
E34EHB6
Blue
10250T108
E34PB7
10250T118
E34EB7
10250T508
10250T518
E34EVB7
E34EHB7
Orange
10250T109
E34PB8
10250T119
E34EB8
10250T509
10250T519
E34EVB8
E34EHB8
E34 Flush Button
1
1
1
1
10250T Extended
Button
1
1
1
1
E34 Extended Button
1
1
1
10250T Half Shrouded
Button
1
1
1
1
E34 Half Shrouded
Button
1
1
1
Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light.
1
1
1
To order operator with factory assembled extended retaining nut, 10250TA12, for thick panel applications, add suffix letter E to listed catalog number.
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-358
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.12
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, and 13
1
Mushroom Head Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Momentary Contact
10250T Mushroom
Button
Anodized Aluminum Jumbo Mushroom Button
1
Color
10250T
Catalog Number
E34
Catalog Number
10250T 1
Catalog Number
E34 2
Catalog Number
1
Black
10250T121
E34LB1
10250T171
E34JB1
Red
10250T122
E34LB2
10250T172
E34JB2
Mushroom Button
1
1
E34 Mushroom Button
1
1
Red (EMERG. STOP)
—
—
10250T17213
E34JB2N8
1
10250T Jumbo
Mushroom Button
1
Green
10250T123
E34LB3
10250T173
E34JB3
1
1
E34 Jumbo Mushroom
Button
Yellow
10250T124
E34LB4
10250T174
E34JB4
1
1
Blue
10250T129
E34LB6
—
1
—
1
1
Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light.
1
2
1
Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet light applications.
Anodized aluminum head may not be suitable for some corrosive environments.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-359
1.12
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Illuminated Pushbutton Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
●
●
Momentary contact
Illuminated
Plastic lenses
1
●
1
10250T8_
Illuminated Pushbuttons
10250T
1
Type
1
Color
Contact
Red
1NO-1NC
E34
Catalog Number 1
LED/Lamp
Number
Catalog Number 1
LED Lamp
Full voltage
1
1
Voltage
LED/Lamp
Number
24 Vac/Vdc
Green
Bayonet
base
Amber
E34EX8_
120 Vac
Red
1
1
Transformer
120 Vac
10250T828GD24
Bayonet
base
E34EX828GD24
E34EX828AD24
10250T828AD24
1NO-1NC
E34EX828RD24
10250T828RD2A
E34EX828RD2A
Green
10250T828GD2A
E34EX828GD2A
Amber
10250T828AD2A
E34EX828AD2A
Red
1
10250T828RD24
1NO-1NC
10250T802RD06
Green
10250T802GD06
Amber
10250T802AD06
Bayonet
base
6 Vac
E34EX802RD06
E34EX802GD06
E34EX802AD06
Incandescent Lamp
1
Full voltage
24 Vac/Vdc
1
1
Resistor
120 Vac/Vdc
1
Transformer
1
120 Vac
1
Red
1NO-1NC
#757
10250T818RD
Green
10250T818GD
Amber
10250T818AD
Red
1NO-1NC
120MB
10250T824RD
Green
10250T824GD
Amber
10250T824AD
Red
1NO-1NC
#755
10250T802RD
Green
10250T802GD
Amber
10250T802AD
#757
E34EX818RD
E34EX818GD
E34EX818AD
120MB
E34EX824RD
E34EX824GD
E34EX824AD
#755
6 Vac
E34EX802RD
E34EX802GD
E34EX802AD
1
1
10250TC_
Lens Selection
Suffix
Code
Catalog Number
Suffix
Code
Catalog Number
Red
R
10250TC21
Green
G
10250TC22
Red
R
E34V2
Green
G
1
Yellow
Y
E34V3
10250TC23
Yellow
Y
Amber
E34V4
A
10250TC43
Amber
A
E34V9
Blue
L
10250TC24
Blue
L
1
E34V6
Clear
C
10250TC25
Clear
C
E34V0
White
W
10250TC26
White
W
E34V5
Color
1
1
10250T
E34V _
1
Color
E34
Note
1 To order different color lens, simply substitute the underlined character in the catalog number with appropriate
suffix code from Lens Selection table above. Example: 10250T828YD24.
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-360
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
1.12
Guarded Illuminated Pushbutton Units
1
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
●
●
●
1
Momentary contact
Guarded illuminated
Plastic lenses
10250T8_
1
1
Guarded Illuminated Pushbuttons
10250T
Type
Voltage
Color
Contact
24 Vac/Vdc
Red
1NO-1NC
LED/Lamp
Number
E34
Catalog Number 1
LED/Lamp
Number
Catalog Number 1
1
1
LED Lamp
Full voltage
Green
Bayonet
base
Amber
E34EX8_
120 Vac
Transformer
10250T828GG24
Bayonet
base
E34EX828RG24
E34EX828GG24
10250T828AG24
E34EX828AG24
10250T828RG2A
E34EX828RG2A
Green
10250T828GG2A
E34EX828GG2A
Amber
10250T828AG2A
E34EX828AG2A
10250T802RG06
E34EX802RG06
Green
10250T802GG06
E34EX802GG06
Amber
10250T802AG06
E34EX802AG06
Red
120 Vac
10250T828RG24
Red
1NO-1NC
1NO-1NC
Incandescent Lamp
Full voltage
24 Vac/Vdc
Resistor
120 Vac/Vdc
Transformer
120 Vac
Red
1NO-1NC
#757
10250T818RG
#757
E34EX818RG
Green
10250T818GG
E34EX818GG
Amber
10250T818AG
E34EX818AG
Red
1NO-1NC
120MB
10250T824RG
120MB
E34EX824RG
Green
10250T824GG
E34EX824GG
Amber
10250T824AG
E34EX824AG
Red
1NO-1NC
#755
10250T802RG
Green
10250T802GG
Amber
10250T802AG
#755
6 Vac
E34EX802RG
E34EX802GG
E34EX802AG
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
10250TC2_
Lens Selection
Suffix
Code
Catalog Number
Red
R
10250TC21
Catalog Number
Red
R
E34V2
Green
G
10250TC22
Green
G
E34V3
Yellow
Amber
Y
10250TC23
Yellow
Y
E34V4
A
10250TC43
Amber
A
E34V9
Blue
L
10250TC24
Blue
L
E34V6
Clear
C
10250TC25
Clear
C
E34V0
White
W
10250TC26
White
W
E34V5
10250T
E34V_
1
Suffix
Code
Color
Color
1
E34
1
1
1
1
Note
1 To order different color lens, simply substitute the underlined character in the catalog number with appropriate
suffix code from Lens Selection table above. Example: 10250T828YD24.
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-361
1.12
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Indicating Light Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
●
●
Standard
Plastic lenses
1
1
10250T_
1
Indicating Lights
Type
Voltage
Full voltage
24 Vac/Vdc
Red
120 Vac
E34_
1
Transformer
1
1
E34
Catalog Number 1
Catalog Number 1
10250T197HLRP24
E34FB197HLRP24
10250T197HLGP24
E34FB197HLGP24
Amber
10250T197HLAP24
E34FB197HLAP24
Red
10250T197HLRP2A
E34FB197HLRP2A
Green
10250T197HLGP2A
E34FB197HLGP2A
Amber
10250T197HLAP2A
E34FB197HLAP2A
120 Vac
Red
10250T181HLRP06
E34TB120HLRP06
Green
10250T181HLGP06
E34TB120HLGP06
Amber
10250T181HLAP06
E34TB120HLAP06
Incandescent Lamp
1
Full voltage
24 Vac/Vdc
Red
1
Resistor
1
120 Vac/Vdc
Transformer
120 Vac
1
E34FB24HRP
10250T206HGP
E34FB24HGP
Amber
10250T206HAP
E34FB24HAP
10250T201HRP
E34RB120HRP
Green
10250T201HGP
E34RB120HGP
Amber
10250T201HAP
E34RB120HAP
10250T181HRP
E34TB120HRP
Green
10250T181HGP
E34TB120HGP
Amber
10250T181HAP
E34TB120HAP
Glass
120MB
#755
Lens Selection
1
Color
1
10250T206HRP
Red
1
Plastic
#757
Green
Red
1
1
Bayonet
base
Green
1
1
10250T
LED Lamp
1
1
LED/Lamp
Number
Color
Plastic
Glass
Plastic
Suffix
Code
Suffix
Code
Suffix
Code
Catalog Number
Suffix
Code
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
10250T
Glass
1
1
1
Color
E34
Red
RP
10250TC1N
RG
10250TC7N
Red
RP
E34H2
RG
E34G2
Green
GP
10250TC2N
GG
10250TC8N
Green
GP
E34H3
GG
E34G3
Amber
AP
10250TC19N
AG
10250TC9N
Amber
AP
E34H9
AG
E34G9
Yellow
YP
10250TC3N
—
—
Yellow
YP
E34H4
YG
E34G4
Blue
LP
10250TC4N
LG
10250TC10N
Blue
LP
E34H6
LG
E34G6
Clear
CP
10250TC5N
CG
10250TC11N
Clear
CP
E34H0
CG
E34G0
White
WP
10250TC6N
WG
10250TC12N
White
WP
E34H5
WG
E34G5
1
Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light.
1
1
To order different color lens, simply substitute the underlined characters in the catalog number with appropriate suffix code from the Lens Selection table above.
Example: 10250T201HYP.
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-362
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.12
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Illuminated Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
1
NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
1
Operators without Lenses
10250T Illuminated
Pushbutton
Illuminated Pushbutton
Type
Voltage
LED/Lamp
Number
10250T
Catalog Number
Indicating Light
E34
Catalog Number
10250T
Catalog Number
E34
Catalog Number
LED Light Unit Type (LEDs not included) 1
E34 Illuminated
Pushbutton
10250T Indicating Light
Full voltage
—
Transformer
AC only
24
Bayonet
base
E34CB497HL
10250T197HL
E34FB197HL
10250T416HL
E34XB024HL
—
—
120
10250T411HL
E34XB120HL
10250T181HL
E34TB120HL
240
10250T412HL
E34XB240HL
10250T182HL
E34TB240HL
277
10250T419HL
E34XB277HL
10250T198HL
E34TB277HL
380
10250T413HL
E34XB380HL
10250T183HL
E34TB380HL
480
10250T414HL
E34XB480HL
10250T184HL
E34TB480HL
600
10250T415HL
E34XB600HL
10250T185HL
E34TB600HL
1
1
6
#755
10250T473H
E34CB06H
10250T203H
E34FB06H
12
#756
10250T474H
E34CB12H
10250T204H
E34FB12H
24
#757
10250T476H
E34CB24H
10250T206H
E34FB24H
32
#1828
10250T477H
E34CB32H
10250T207H
E34FB32H
48
#1835
10250T478H
E34CB48H
10250T208H
E34FB48H
Resistor 2
AC/DC
120
120MB
10250T471H
E34SB120H
10250T201H
E34RB120H
240
120MB
10250T472H
E34SB240H
10250T202H
E34RB240H
Transformer
AC only
24
#755
10250T416H
E34XB024H
—
—
10250T411H
E34XB120H
10250T181H
E34TB120H
E34 Indicating Light
Neon
AC/DC
120
240
10250T412H
E34XB240H
10250T182H
E34TB240H
277
10250T419H
E34XB277H
10250T198H
E34TB277H
380
10250T413H
E34XB380H
10250T183H
E34TB380H
480
10250T414H
E34XB480H
10250T184H
E34TB480H
600
10250T415H
E34XB600H
10250T185H
E34TB600H
120
NE51H-R-22
—
—
10250T226H
E34NB120H
240
NE51H-4-68
—
—
10250T227H
E34NB240H
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light.
1
1
10250T397HL
Incandescent Light Unit Type
Full voltage
AC/DC
1
1
These units do not include lamps. Order LED separately to match lens color from the LED Selection table on Page V7-T1-373.
Resister units are not available for use with LEDs, choose either transformer or full voltage LED style.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-363
1.12
10250T
Catalog Number
E34
Catalog Number
Red
10250TC1N
E34H2
Green
10250TC2N
E34H3
Amber
10250TC19N
E34H9
Yellow
10250TC3N
E34H4
Blue
10250TC4N
E34H6
Clear
10250TC5N
E34H0
E34H_
White
10250TC6N
E34H5
Glass
Glass
Red
10250TC7N
E34G2
Green
10250TC8N
E34G3
Amber
10250TC9N
E34G9
Yellow
—
E34G4
Blue
10250TC10N
E34G6
Color
Plastic
1
1
10250TC_
1
1
1
1
1
10250TC_
1
1
Plastic
Clear
10250TC11N
E34G0
E34G_
White
10250TC12N
E34G5
10250TC_
Illuminated Pushbutton Lenses
1
1
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Indicating Light Lenses
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Color
10250T
Catalog Number
E34
Catalog Number
Red
10250TC21
E34V2
Green
10250TC22
E34V3
Yellow
10250TC23
E34V4
1
Amber
10250TC43
E34V9
Blue
10250TC24
E34V6
1
Clear
10250TC25
E34V0
White
10250TC26
E34V5
1
1
E34V_
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-364
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.12
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Push-Pull Units
1
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
●
●
1
Two- and three-position
Non-illuminated
10250T71_
1
Two-Position Maintained Push, Maintained Pull
1
Operator Function (Position) 1
Maintained—
Pull
Maintained—
Push
O
X
Red Standard Push-Pull 2
Mounting Location 1
Contact
Type
X
O
1
2
1NO
1NC
10250T
Catalog Number
E34
Catalog Number
10250T714R
E34EX714R
1
1
1
E34EX71_
O
X
O
X
X
O
X
O
2NO
2NC
10250T715R
1
E34EX715R
1
1
1
10250T71_
1
Three-Position Maintained Push, Momentary Pull
Operator Function (Position) 1
Momentary—
Pull
O
X
Maintained—
Intermediate
O
O
Maintained—
Push
X
O
Contact
Type
1NO
1NC
Mounting Location 1
1
2
Red Standard Push-Pull 3
1
10250T
Catalog Number
E34
Catalog Number
1
10250T716R
E34EX716R
1
E34EX71_
1
X
X
O
X
O
O
1NC
1NC
10250T717R
E34EX717R
1
1
1
Notes
1 Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2 To order different type or color buttons, simply substitute underlined character with appropriate suffix code from the Button and Color Selection
table on Page V7-T1-366. Example: 10250T714G.
3 To order different type or color buttons, simply substitute underlined character with appropriate suffix code from the Button and Color Selection
table on Page V7-T1-366. Example: 10250T716G.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-365
1.12
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
●
Two- and three-position
Non-illuminated
1
●
1
10250T7_
Three-Position Momentary Push, Momentary Pull
Operator Function (Position) 1
1
Momentary—
Pull
Maintained—
Intermediate
Momentary—
Push
1
1
Red Standard Push-Pull 2
Contact
Type
Mounting Location 1
1
2
10250T
Catalog Number
E34
Catalog Number
O
X
O
O
X
O
1NO
1NC
10250T718R
E34EX718R
X
X
O
X
O
O
1NC
1NC
10250T721R
E34EX721R
E34EX7_
1
1
1
1
Button and Color Selection
1
Suffix
Code
10250T
Catalog Number
E34
Catalog Number
Red
R
10250TB62
E34C2
Red (EMERG. STOP)
E
10250TB63
E34C2N8
Green
G
10250TB61
E34C3
Black
B
10250TB60
E34C1
Blue
L
10250TB64
E34C6
Red
RJ
10250TJ62
E34J2
Red (EMERG. STOP)
EJ
10250TJ63
E34J2N8
1
Green
GJ
10250TJ61
—
Black
BJ
10250TJ60
—
1
Yellow
YJ
10250TJ64
—
1
Color
Standard
1
1
1
1
Jumbo Mushroom
Head
1
Standard
Jumbo Mushroom Head
(Anodized) Aluminum
Notes
1 Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2 To order different type or color buttons, simply substitute underlined character with appropriate suffix code from the
Button and Color Selection table above. Example: 10250T718G.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-366
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
1.12
Illuminated Push-Pull Units
1
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
●
●
1
Two-position maintained
Illuminated
1
Two-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Maintained Pull
10250T8_
1
Operator Function (Position) 1
Maintained—
Pull
Maintained—
Push
Red Standard Push-Pull 2
Mounting Location 1
10250T
Catalog Number
E34
Catalog Number
10250T853RD24
E34EX853RD24
10250T853RD2A
E34EX853RD2A
24 Vac
10250T843RD06
E34EX843RD06
120 Vac
10250T844RD06
E34EX844RD06
10250T849RD
E34EX849RD
Type
Voltage
Full voltage
24 Vac/Vdc
Contact
Type
1
2
1
LED Lamp
O
X
X
O
1NO
1NC
120 Vac
E34EX8_
Transformer
1
1
1
Incandescent Lamp
O
X
1
X
O
Full voltage
24 Vac/Vdc
1NO
1NC
Resistor
120 Vac/Vdc
10250T851RD
E34EX851RD
Transformer
24 Vac
10250T843RD
E34EX843RD
120 Vac
10250T844RD
E34EX844RD
1
1
1
Lens and Color Selection
10250T
Suffix Code
Catalog Number
Suffix Code
Catalog Number
1
Red
RD
10250TC47
RD
E34M2
1
Red (EMERG. STOP)
ED
10250TC53
ED
E34M2N8
Green
GD
10250TC48
GD
E34M3
Blue
LD
10250TC49
LD
E34M6
Amber
AD
10250TC50
AD
E34M9
White
WD
10250TC51
WD
E34M5
Clear
CD
10250TC52
CD
E34M0
Color
Standard
Standard
Side-Lighted
(Anodized) Aluminum
HD Aluminum with
Transparent Center
1
E34
1
1
1
1
Side-Lighted (Anodized) Aluminum
Red
RS
10250TC57
—
—
Red (EMERG. STOP)
ES
10250TC63
—
—
Green
GS
10250TC58
—
—
Blue
LS
10250TC59
—
—
Amber
AS
10250TC64
—
—
1
Yellow
YS
10250TC60
White
WS
10250TC61
—
—
1
Clear
CS
10250TC62
—
—
1
1
1
1
Heavy-Duty Aluminum with Transparent Center
Red
RH
10250TC65
—
—
Green
GH
10250TC66
—
—
Amber
AH
10250TC67
—
—
1
1
Notes
1 Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2 To order different type or color lens, simply substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from the
Lens and Color Selection table above. Example: 10250T851GS.
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-367
1.12
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
●
Three-position—maintained push, momentary pull
Illuminated
1
●
1
10250T8_
Three-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Momentary Pull
Operator Function (Position) 1
1
Momentary—
Pull
Maintained—
Intermediate
Maintained—
Push
1
Red Standard Push-Pull 2
Type
Voltage
1
Contact Mounting Location
Type
1
2
10250T
Catalog Number
E34
Catalog Number
LED Lamp
1
1
O
X
O
O
X
O
Full voltage
E34EX8_
Transformer
1
X
X
1
O
X
O
O
Full voltage
1NO
1NC
10250T864RD24
E34EX864RD24
10250T864RD2A
E34EX864RD2A
24 Vac
10250T854RD06
E34EX854RD06
120 Vac
10250T855RD06
E34EX855RD06
24 Vac/Vdc
1NC
1NC
10250T875RD24
E34EX875RD24
10250T875RD2A
E34EX875RD2A
24 Vac
10250T865RD06
E34EX865RD06
120 Vac
10250T866RD06
E34EX866RD06
120 Vac
Transformer
1
24 Vac/Vdc
120 Vac
Incandescent Lamp
1
O
X
1
O
O
X
O
Full voltage
24 Vac/Vdc
Resistor
120 Vac
Transformer
24 Vac
Full voltage
24 Vac/Vdc
Resistor
120 Vac
Transformer
1
1NO
1NC
10250T860RD
E34EX860RD
10250T862RD
E34EX862RD
10250T854RD
E34EX854RD
10250T855RD
E34EX855RD
10250T871RD
E34EX871RD
10250T873RD
E34EX873RD
24 Vac
10250T865RD
E34EX865RD
120 Vac
10250T866RD
E34EX866RD
120 Vac
X
X
1
1
1
O
X
O
O
1NC
1NC
Notes
1 Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2 To order different type or color lens, simply substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from the Lens and
Color Selection table on the bottom of Page V7-T1-367. Example: 10250T862AS.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-368
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
1.12
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
●
●
1
Three-position—momentary
Illuminated
10250T8_
1
Three-Position Illuminated Momentary Push, Momentary Pull
1
Operator Function (Position) 1
Momentary—
Pull
Maintained—
Intermediate
Maintained—
Push
1
Red Standard Push-Pull 2
Type
Voltage
Contact
Type
Mounting Location 1
1
2
10250T
Catalog Number
E34
Catalog Number
1
LED Lamp
O
X
O
O
X
O
Full voltage
E34EX8_
Transformer
X
X
O
X
O
O
24 Vac/Vdc
Full voltage
10250T886RD24
E34EX886RD24
E34EX886RD2A
24 Vac
10250T876RD06
E34EX876RD06
120 Vac
10250T877RD06
E34EX877RD06
10250T897RD24
E34EX897RD24
24 Vac/Vdc
120 Vac
Transformer
1NO
1NC
10250T886RD2A
120 Vac
1NC
1NC
O
O
X
O
O
X
O
O
1
1
10250T897RD2A
E34EX897RD2A
10250T887RD06
E34EX887RD06
120 Vac
10250T888RD06
E34EX888RD06
1
10250T882RD
E34EX882RD
1
10250T884RD
E34EX884RD
10250T876RD
E34EX876RD
10250T877RD
E34EX877RD
10250T893RD
E34EX893RD
10250T895RD
E34EX895RD
Full voltage
24 Vac/Vdc
1NO
1NC
Resistor
120 Vac
Transformer
24 Vac
Full voltage
24 Vac/Vdc
Resistor
120 Vac
Transformer
24 Vac
10250T887RD
E34EX887RD
120 Vac
10250T888RD
E34EX888RD
120 Vac
X
X
1
24 Vac
Incandescent Lamp
O
X
1
1NC
1NC
1
1
1
1
1
Notes
1 Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2 To order different type or color lens, simply substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from the Lens and
Color Selection table on the bottom of Page V7-T1-367. Example: 10250T862AS.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-369
1.12
1
1
1
1
1
An illuminated push-pull
pushbutton unit, arranged for
one-hole mounting, can
replace two pushbuttons and
a pilot light or the nonilluminated form can replace
two pushbuttons. These units
are available in three basic
types:
●
1
1
1
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Push-Pull Operators
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
●
Maintained—(Twoposition). Maintains in the
pulled or pushed position
until manually actuated to
the opposite mode.
Momentary—(Threeposition). Spring returns to
an intermediate position
when pulled or pushed and
released.
●
Application Guide
To assist in the selection of
contact blocks, the sketch
below shows pictorially by
symbols 1 and 2 locations of
contact circuits after
assembly of contact blocks
and adapter to the operator.
The table below shows the
effect of the push and pull
operations on either NO or
NC contacts. (X = contact
closed, O = contact open).
Momentary Pull,
Maintained Push—(Threeposition). Spring returns to
intermediate position when
pulled. Maintains in pushed
position until manually
returned to intermediate
(ready to reset) position.
Maintained stop holds
circuit open and will
prevent other series
connected operators from
starting the system.
The operators, buttons,
contact blocks, etc., are
offered as building block
components that can be
intermixed to satisfy many
requirements. This minimizes
the need for a varied and
costly inventory.
Locating Nibs
Locating Nib
1
2
1
1
10250T_
Push-Pull Operator Components
Operator Position and Circuit Arrangement
1
Out—Pull
1
Type of Operator
1
1
Intermediate
Contact
Block
Contact Block Mounting Location
1NO
1NC
O
X
2NO
2NC
O
X
1NO
1NC
O
X
2NO
2NC
O
X
1NO
1NC
O
X
2NO
2NC
O
X
1
2
In—Push
2
1
1
O
X
No intermediate X
position
O
O
X
X
O
2
10250T
Catalog Number
E34
Catalog Number
10250T5
E34GDB
10250T4
E34GEB
10250T9
E34GFB
10250T10
E34GHB
Two-Position Operator without Lens
E34G_
Maintained push-pull
1
or
or
X
O
X
O
Three-Position Operator without Lens
1
Momentary push-pull
1
Maintained push-momentary pull
1
Momentary push-pull
1
1
or
or
O
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
or
or
O
X
X
O
O
X
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
O
or
O
O
O
O
or
X
O
X
O
Note
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-370
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
1.12
Push-Pull Light Units, Lenses and Buttons
NEC Class I Division 2 Groups B, C and D
1
1
Light Units for Illuminated Push-Pull Devices
Light Unit
Type
LED
(LEDs not included) 1
Incandescent
Type
Voltage
Full voltage
—
Transformer
AC only
50/60 Hz
24
Full voltage
AC or DC
LED/Lamp
Number
Bayonet
base
10250T97HL
10250T63HL
208
10250T64HL
240
10250T65HL
277
10250T82HL
380
10250T66HL
480
10250T67HL
600
10250T68HL
12
24/28
#755
#756
#757
#1828
32
Resistor
AC or DC
120
Transformer
AC only
50/60 Hz
24
1
10250T89HL
120
6
1
Catalog Number
1
1
1
1
1
10250T69H
10250T70H
1
10250T79H
10250T83H
120MB
240
1
10250T80H
10250T81H
#755
1
10250T89H
120
10250T63H
208
10250T64H
240
10250T65H
277
10250T82H
380
10250T66H
480
10250T67H
600
10250T68H
1
1
1
1
1
Note
1 These units do not include lamps. Order LED separately to match lens color from table on Page V7-T1-373.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-371
1.12
10250T
Catalog Number
E34
Catalog Number
Red
10250TC47
E34M2
Red (EMERG. STOP)
10250TC53
E34M2N8
Green
10250TC48
E34M3
Blue
10250TC49
E34M6
Amber
10250TC50
E34M9
White
10250TC51
E34M5
Clear
10250TC52
E34M0
Color
Standard
1
1
1
1
1
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Alternate Lenses for Illuminated Push-Pull Devices
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Side-Lighted
(Anodized) Aluminum
Standard
Side-Lighted Anodized Aluminum Ring
Red
10250TC57
—
Red (EMERG. STOP)
10250TC63
—
Green
10250TC58
—
Blue
10250TC59
—
1
Amber
10250TC64
—
Yellow
10250TC60
—
1
White
10250TC61
—
Clear
10250TC62
—
1
1
1
HD Aluminum with
Transparent Center
1
1
Heavy-Duty Aluminum with Transparent Center
Red
10250TC65
—
Green
10250TC66
—
Amber
10250TC67
—
1
1
Buttons for Non-Illuminated Push-Pull Devices
1
Color
1
Standard
1
1
1
1
Jumbo Mushroom
Head
1
1
10250T
Catalog Number
E34
Catalog Number
Red
10250TB62
E34C2
Red (EMERG. STOP)
10250TB63
E34C2N8
Green
10250TB61
E34C3
Black
10250TB60
E34C1
Blue
10250TB64
E34C6
Standard
Jumbo Mushroom Head (Anodized) Aluminum 1
Red
10250TJ62
E34J2
Red (EMERG. STOP)
10250TJ63
E34J2N8
Green
10250TJ61
—
Black
10250TJ60
—
Yellow
10250TJ64
—
1
Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light.
1
1
Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use with ultraviolet light applications.
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-372
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.12
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Standard LED Lamp
LED Selection
Voltage
Color
Catalog Number
Voltage
Color
Catalog Number
6 Vac/Vdc
suitable for
use with
transformers
Red
E22LED006RN
60 Vac/Vdc
Red
E22LED060RN
Orange
E22LED006ON
Orange
E22LED060ON
Yellow
E22LED006YN
Yellow
E22LED060YN
Green
E22LED006GN
Green
E22LED060GN
Blue
E22LED006BN
Blue
E22LED060BN
12 Vac/Vdc
24 Vac/Vdc
48 Vac/Vdc
White
E22LED006WN
Red
E22LED012RN
120 Vac
White
E22LED060WN
Red
E22LED120RA
Orange
E22LED012ON
Orange
E22LED120OA
Yellow
E22LED012YN
Yellow
E22LED120YA
Green
E22LED012GN
Green
E22LED120GA
Blue
E22LED012BN
Blue
E22LED120BA
White
E22LED012WN
White
E22LED120WA
Red
E22LED024RN
Red
E22LED120RD
Orange
E22LED024ON
Orange
E22LED120OD
Yellow
E22LED024YN
Yellow
E22LED120YD
Green
E22LED024GN
Green
E22LED120GD
Blue
E22LED024BN
Blue
E22LED120BD
White
E22LED120WD
White
E22LED024WN
Red
E22LED048RN
Orange
E22LED048ON
Yellow
E22LED048YN
Green
E22LED048GN
Blue
E22LED048BN
White
E22LED048WN
120 Vdc
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Note
For a complete listing of all LEDs available, see Page V7-T1-269.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-373
1.12
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Selector Switch Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
●
●
Two- and three-position
Non-illuminated
1
10250T72_
1
Two-Position Selector Switch—Non-Illuminated
Operator Position 1
1
X
O
1
1
O
X
E34EX72_
1
X
O
X
O
1
O
X
O
X
1
1
10250T_
1
Black Knob—Selector Switch 3
Operator
Action 2
Contact
Type
M
M
1NC
1NO
M
S
M
M
M
S
Mounting Location 1
1
2
1NC
1NO
1NC
1NO
Cam
Code
10250T
Catalog Number
E34
Catalog Number
1
10250T722BK
E34EX722BK
10250T724BK
E34EX724BK
10250T723BK
E34EX723BK
10250T725BK
E34EX725BK
1
Three-Position Selector Switch—Non-Illuminated
Operator Position 1
Black Knob—Selector Switch 4
Operator
Action 2
1
X
O
1
O
O
O
X
Contact
Type
M
M
M
1NO
1NO
Mounting Location 1
1
2
Cam
Code
10250T
Catalog Number
E34
Catalog Number
3
10250T726BK
E34EX726BK
10250T728BK
E34EX728BK
10250T730BK
E34EX730BK
10250T732BK
E34EX732BK
10250T727BK
E34EX727BK
10250T729BK
E34EX729BK
10250T731BK
E34EX731BK
10250T733BK
E34EX733BK
M
1
S
1
S
1
M
M
M
S
M
X
O
O
1
1
O
X
O
O
O
X
S
M
M
M
M
S
1
1NO
1NC-1NC
(Series)
1NO
3
M
M
S
1
S
M
M
1
S
Notes
1 Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ( ).
W
3 To order different type or color selector switch, simply substitute the underlined characters with appropriate
suffix code from the table on Page V7-T1-375.
Example: 10250T722LL. For keyed selector switch, substitute the underlined characters with
T_ (cam)+_ (key removal position). Example: 10250T722T13.
4 To order different type or color selector switch, simply substitute the underlined characters with appropriate
suffix code from the Switch and Color Selection table on Page V7-T1-375.
Example: 10250T726LL. For keyed selector switch, substitute the underlined characters with
T_ (cam)+_ (key removal position). Example: 10250T726T13.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-374
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
1.12
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
●
●
1
Four-position maintained
Non-illuminated
1
Four-Position Selector Switch—Non-Illuminated
10250T743_
1
Operator Position 1
Black Knob—Selector Switch 3
Operator
Action 2
X
O
O
O
E34EX743_
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
M
M
Contact
Type
M
M
Mounting Location 1
1
2
1NC
1NO
1NO
1NC
Cam
Code
10250T
Catalog Number
E34
Catalog Number
1
7
10250T743BK
E34EX743BK
1
1
1
1
1
Lever
Coin Slot 5
BC
1
RC
BL
RK
RL
Green
GK
GL
GA
GC
Yellow
YK
YL
YA
YC
White
WK
WL
WA
WC
Gray
AK
AL
AA
AC
Blue
LK
LL
LA
LC
Orange
NK
NL
NA
NC
M
T1 + 1, 2, 3
3
M
QS
BA
RA
BK
Red
2
M
1
Black
Suffix and
Removal
Position
M
Coin Slot 5
Suffix Code
Knob
Suffix Code
Number of Operator
Position
Action 6
T1 + 2
Lever
Suffix Code
Lever 4
Suffix Code
Color
Key Operated Selection
4
1
Switch and Color Selection
Knob
1
1
1
1
1
Key Removal Positions 7
C
L
1
R
1
T3 + 1–7
Code
Suffix
Key Removal
Position
1
S
WM M
WMQS
M M S
Q
T3 + 1, 4, 5
1
Right only
S
T3 + 4
2
Left only
1
T3 + 2, 4, 6
3
Right and left
MMMM
T7 + 7
4
Center only
6
Left and center
7
All positions
M
M
1
1
1
Notes
1 Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2 M = Maintained.
3 To order different type or color selector switch, simply substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from the
Switch and Color Selection table above. Example: 10250T743LL. For keyed selector switch, substitute the underlined characters with
T_ (cam) + _ (key removal position). Example: 10250T743T77.
4 Designed for added ingress protection. For use in maintained operators only.
5 10250T only.
6 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ( ).
W
7 Key removal in “spring return from” positions not recommended.
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-375
1.12
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Selector Switch Selection
1
1
1
1
10250T
E34
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Cam and Contact Block Selection
Selector switches in their
varied forms (two-position,
three-position, and fourposition) are a big factor
contributing to the great
flexibility of control that a well
rounded line of “pushbuttons”
can achieve. Because of their
flexibility, they tend to cause
difficulty with product
selection and application.
The following systematic
approach should simplify
that task.
1
Cam and contact block
selection is better understood
if you:
1
●
1
●
1
1
1
1
1
Work with each incoming
and outgoing wire/circuit
separately.
Recognize the terms NO
and NC only identify the
type of contact by its mode
before mounting to the
operator. The “X-O” table
(Page V7-T1-378) shows
how that contact will act
after assembly to the
operator with the selected
cam shape. X = closed
circuit, O = open circuit.
●
●
One NO-NC contact block
may be mounted behind
each plunger of the
mounting adapter for a
total of four circuits.
Each cam has two
separate lobes, each of
which operates one of the
two contact block plungers
independently of each
other. Those are identified
as position 1 (locating nib
side) and position 2
(opposite of locating nib).
The position designations
give direction in selecting
and mounting of the
contact blocks.
Step 1: Elementary
Diagram.
Construct on paper, or in your
mind, a simple elementary
diagram of the switching
scheme as follows:
HAND
Incoming
Line
Locating Nib
2
Outgoing
Circuit
Step 2: “X-O” Pattern.
From the elementary
diagram, you can construct an
“X-O” diagram which
describes when the contacts
are to be closed (X) or open
(O) in the various positions of
the switch. The “X-O” for the
HAND circuit looks like this:
HAND OFF AUTO
X O O
1
In this circuit, you want a
contact closed on the left
(HAND) but open in the
center and right.
For the AUTO circuit, the “XO” diagram would look like
this:
HAND OFF AUTO
O O X
Putting them together, the
complete “X-O” diagram is:
Outgoing
Circuit
OFF
AUTO
Contact Circuit Locations
1
Systematic Approach
Application: HAND-OFFAUTO selector switch. In this
circuit, one incoming line is
distributed to two other
outgoing circuits by the
switch. The two circuits can
be looked at individually.
XOO
OOX
Once the “X-O” diagram has
been generated, the next
step is to select the cam and
contact block, or blocks,
needed to perform the
desired “X-O” functions. The
selection tables on the
following pages list the
various types (shapes) of
cams by number to choose
from and the type of contact
and position to achieve the
function outlined in your
“X-O” diagram.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-376
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.12
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Step 3: Cam Selection.
The cam you select
determines the operation of
all contact blocks mounted to
the operator. It is selected on
the basis that it provides the
simplest circuitry for the
desired “X-O” diagram. The
selection tables show all the
“X-O” combinations. For the
purpose of this example, the
applicable portion of those
tables is shown on this page.
Now to make the cam
selection, make a simple
worksheet such as below.
(1) or (2) = mounting location
from chart above:
Cam 2
XOO
OOX
(1)NO-(2)NC 1
(2)NO
Cam 3
(1)NO
(2)NO
It becomes obvious that
cam 3 is the better choice
because the series
connection can be avoided,
making it simpler to wire.
Step 4: Contact Block
Selection.
Having selected the cam,
contact block selection is
simply a matter of determining
if you require one NO-NC
contact block (Cat. No
10250T1H) or two. Given the
limitations of the factory
sealed contact block and the
desired “X-O” application,
you may have circuits that
will not be needed—as seen
here with the two additional
NC circuits. (1) or (2) =
mounting location from chart
above.
Qty
2
Step 5: Selector Switch
Operator.
Lastly, you have to choose
from the many types of
operators—knob and lever
in various colors or keyed.
Also what combinations of
maintained and spring
return functions are
required. Selection of these
operators can be found on
Page V7-T1-379. For the
example in step 4, you may
want a three-position
maintained black knob,
cam 3—Catalog Number
10250T1323 (or 34VHBK1).
The Complete Switch:
10250T1323 (or 34VHBK1)
with two 10250T1H or for
one composite catalog
number—10250T726BK (or
E34EX726BK) found on
Page V7-T1-374.
Example Selection Table
Desired Circuit and
Operator Position
No.
1
X
O
Cam Code #2
Cam Code #3
1
Contact Blocks and
Mounting Location
Contact Blocks and
Mounting Location
1
1
1
2
2
—
O
1
1
NO
4
O
O
X
NC 1
—
1
NO
—
NO
1
NO
1
1
Note
1 Wired in series.
1
1
1
1
Diagrams
Circuits shown illustrate
connections to obtain a
selector circuit combination
and are shown with their
appropriate line diagrams in
BOLD. Field wiring of jumper
connections required as
shown.
1
1
1
1
X = Closed circuit
O = Open circuit
1
1
1
1
1
1
Catalog No.
Cam 3
10250TIH (1)NO (2)NC
(1)NC (2)NO
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-377
1.12
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Two-Position Selector Switch
1
1
Four-Position Selector Switch
Desired Circuit and
Operator Position
Number
Cam Code #1
1
1
X
O
2
O
X
Desired Circuit and
Operator Position
Contact Blocks and
Mounting Location
2
Cam Code #7
Contact Blocks and
Mounting Location
Number
1
1
X
O
O
O
2
O
X
O
O
3
O
O
X
O
4
O
O
O
X
5
X
O
O
X
6
O
X
X
O
7
O
O
X
X
8
X
X
O
O
2
—
1
1
NC
NC
NC
—
1
1
1
NO
1
Desired Circuit and
Operator Position
No.
1
X
O
Cam Code #2
Cam Code #3
Contact Blocks and
Mounting Location
Contact Blocks and
Mounting Location
1
1
2
NO
NO (Series)
2
X
X
O
NC
—
NO
—
NC
3
X
O
X
NC
4
O
O
X
NO
NO (Parallel)
—
—
NO
5
O
X
NC (Parallel)
NC
NO (Parallel)
NO
NO (Parallel)
NC
NC (Parallel)
NO
—
NO
1
1
—
NC
1
1
—
—
1
1
2
O
1
1
NO
Three-Position Selector Switch
1
1
NO
NO
X
—
1
1
1
NC (Parallel) NO
6
O
1
X
O
1
9
O
X
O
X
—
—
NC
1
NC
NC (Series)
NC
NO/NC
(Parallel)
10
X
O
X
O
—
NO/NC
(Parallel)
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-378
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.12
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Selector Switch Operators
1
10250T Selector Switch Operators with Caps
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Black Knob Selector
Switch
Operator Action 1
Two-position—60° throw
M
M
M
S
Three-position—60° throw
M
M
M
M
S
M
M
S
S
M
M
Four-position—40° throw
S
M
M
Positions
M
Three-position—60° throw
1
M
Catalog Number
Cam Code 3
Catalog Number
1
10250T1311
1
10250T3011
1
1
10250T1371
1
10250T3071
1
2
10250T1322
2
10250T3022
1
3
10250T1323
3
10250T3023
2
10250T1332
2
10250T3032
3
10250T1333
3
10250T3033
2
10250T1342
2
10250T3042
3
10250T1343
3
10250T3043
2
10250T1352
2
10250T3052
3
10250T1353
3
10250T3053
7
10250T1367
7
10250T3067
1
1
1
1
M
Vertical Mounting
Catalog Number 4
Horizontal Mounting
Catalog Number 4
1
1, 2, 3
10250T1511_
10250T1611_
1
2
10250T1571_
10250T1581_
2
1–7
10250T1522_
10250T1622_
10250T1523_
10250T1623_
10250T1532_
10250T1632_
10250T1533_
10250T1633_
10250T1542_
10250T1642_
10250T1543_
10250T1643_
10250T1652_
10250T1662_
10250T1653_
10250T1663_
10250T1677_
10250T1687_
Cam Code
M
S
M
S
2, 4, 6
3
7
M
4
3
2
M
M
1, 4, 5
3
2
M
S
M
3
2
M
Four-position—40° throw
Optional Key
Removal Positions 4
3
1
1
1
1
M
S
1
1
S
M
C
Cam Code 3
1
Operator Action
M
L
Black Lever Selector Switch—
Vertical Mounting 2
10250T Key Operators with Cam
Two-position—60° throw
Key Removal Positions
Black Knob Selector Switch—
Vertical Mounting 2
M
M
Horizontal Mounting
1
10250T Selector Switch Operators with Caps
Positions
Black Lever Selector
Switch
1
7
1
1
1
1
1
1
M
Key Removal Positions 5
Replacement Keys or Dissimilar Locks for Above Key Operators
Listed operators have identical locks and keys (Key Code H661)
Catalog Number 10250ED824.
Code
Suffix
Key Removal
Position
Code
Suffix
Key Removal
Position
1
Right only
5
Right and center
2
Left only
6
Left and center
Replacement Keys
3
Right and left
7
All positions
Description
Catalog Number
4
Center only
Replacement keys (code H661)
10250ED824
R
1
1
1
1
Notes
1 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ( ).
W
2 Field convertible to horizontal mounting or order operator only and separate operator cap.
3 For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection instructions and table on Pages V7-T1-376 to V7-T1-378.
4 Choose key removal position required for application from table above. Add key removal code no. to listed catalog number. Example: 10250T15112.
5 Key removal in “spring return from” positions not recommended.
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-379
1
1
1
1.12
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Black Knob Selector
Switch
1
E34 Selector Switch Operators with Knob Assembled
Black Knob Selector Switch—
Vertical Mounting 2
Operator Action 1
Positions
Two-position—60° throw
1
1
M
M
M
S
Three-position—60° throw
1
M
M
M
1
M
S
M
1
M
S
1
S
M
M
1
Four-position—40° throw
S
M
M
1
Cam Code 3
Catalog Number 4
1
E34VFBK1
1
E34VEBK1
2
E34VGBK1
3
E34VHBK1
2
E34VJBK1
3
E34VKBK1
2
E34VLBK1
3
E34VMBK1
2
E34VNBK1
3
E34VPBK1
7
E34VTBK1
M
M
1
1
E34KFB_
E34 Key Operators with Cam and Cap
Positions
1
Two-position—60° throw
Operator Action 1
M
M
M
S
1
1
Three-position—60° throw
1
M
M
M
S
1
S
M
S
Four-position—40° throw
M
M
1
Horizontal Mounting
Catalog Number
1
1, 2, 3
E34KFB_
E34KFHB_
1
2
E34KEB_
E34KEHB_
2
1–7
E34KGB_
E34KGHB_
E34KHB_
E34KHHB_
3
S
4
3
2, 4, 6
3
7
M
1, 4, 5
3
2
M
M
1
Vertical Mounting
Catalog Number
2
M
1
Key Removal
Positions 5
2
M
1
Cam Code 3
7
E34KJB_
E34KJHB_
E34KKB_
E34KKHB_
E34KLB_
E34KLHB_
E34KMB_
E34KMHB_
E34KNB_
E34KNHB_
E34KPB_
E34KPHB_
E34KTB_
E34KTHB_
M
Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Page V7-T1-379.
1
1
1
2
3
4
1
5
M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ( ).
W
Field convertible to horizontal mounting.
For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection instructions and table on Pages V7-T1-376 to V7-T1-378.
For other colors of either knob or lever, replace the underlined characters of the catalog number with the appropriate suffix code from Alternate Knobs and Levers table on
Page V7-T1-381. Example: E34VFBL2.
Choose key removal position required for application from table on Page V7-T1-381. Add key removal code no. to listed catalog number. Example: E34KFB2.
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-380
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Key Removal Positions
C
L
1.12
Key Removal Positions
Code
Suffix
Key Removal
Position
Code
Suffix
Key Removal
Position
1
Right only
5
Right and center
2
Left only
6
Left and center
3
Right and left
7
All positions
4
Center only
1
1
R
1
1
1
Knob
Alternate Knobs and Levers for Operators 1
Knob
Lever
Lever for Added
Ingress Protection
1
Lever Designed for
Added Ingress Protection 2
Lever
Color
Suffix
Code
Catalog Number
Suffix
Code
Catalog Number
Suffix
Code
Catalog Number
Black
K1
E34K1
L1
E34L1
A1
E34A1
Red
K2
E34K2
L2
E34L2
A2
E34A2
Green
K3
E34K3
L3
E34L3
A3
E34A3
Yellow
K4
E34K4
L4
E34L4
A4
E34A4
White
K5
E34K5
L5
E34L5
A5
E34A5
Blue
K6
E34K6
L6
E34L6
A6
E34A6
Gray
K7
E34K7
L7
E34L7
A7
E34A7
Orange
K8
E34K8
L8
E34L8
A8
E34A8
1
1
1
1
1
1
Notes
1 Key removal in “spring return from” positions not recommended.
2 For use on maintained operators only.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-381
1.12
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Illuminated Selector Switch Operators
Two-Position Maint.
Selector Switch
10250T Illuminated Selector Switch Operator Only without Knob or Lever
Full Voltage Type—AC or DC 4
Transformer Type—50/60 Hz
1
1
Operator Action 1
Position
Two-position—60° throw
1
M
6V #755 Lamp
Cam
Voltage
Code 3
Catalog and
Code Number 2
Lamps: 6V—#755, 12V—#756, 24V—#757,
48V—#1835, 120/240V—120MB
Cam
Catalog and
Code 3
Voltage
Code Number 2
1
24
10250T5961H
1
120
10250T5971H
M
6
10250T6201H
12
10250T6211H
1
208
10250T6511H
24
10250T6221H
240
10250T5981H
48
10250T6231H
1
380
10250T5991H
120
10250T6361H
480
10250T6001H
240 5
10250T6371H
600
10250T6011H
24
10250T602_H
120
10250T603_H
1
Three-position—60° throw
+ 2 or 3
M
M
1
M
1
1
1
+ 2 or 3
M
M
1
S
+ 2 or 3
M
1
S
1
S
M
+ 2 or 3
M
S
+ 2 or 3
6
10250T624_H
12
10250T625_H
208
10250T652_H
24
10250T626_H
240
10250T604_H
48
10250T627_H
380
10250T605_H
120
10250T638_H
480
10250T607_H
240 5
10250T639_H
600
10250T607_H
120
10250T620_H
+ 2 or 3
120
10250T622_H
240
10250T656_H
120
10250T621_H
+ 2 or 3
120
10250T623_H
240
10250T662_H
24
10250T614_H
120
10250T615_H
+ 2 or 3
6
10250T628_H
12
10250T629_H
208
10250T653_H
24
10250T630_H
1
240
10250T616_H
48
10250T631_H
380
10250T617_H
120
10250T640_H
1
480
10250T618_H
240 5
10250T641_H
600
10250T619_H
24
10250T6087H
120
10250T6097H
1
Four-position—40° throw
1
M
M
7
M
M
1
1
7
6
10250T6327H
12
10250T6337H
208
10250T6547H
24
10250T6347H
240
10250T6107H
48
10250T6357H
380
10250T6117H
120
10250T6427H
480
10250T6127H
240 5
10250T6437H
600
10250T6137H
1
1
Knob
Knob
Catalog and
Code Number
Lever
Catalog and
Code Number
Color
Red
10250TER
10250TFR
Green
10250TEG
Yellow
Blue
Color
1
1
Knobs and Levers
6
Knob
Catalog and
Code Number
Lever
Catalog and
Code Number
Clear
10250TEC
10250TFC
10250TFG
White
10250TEW
10250TFW
10250TEA
10250TFA
Amber
10250TEM
10250TFM
10250TEL
10250TFL
6
Lever
1
1
Notes
1 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ( ).
W
2 For selection of the proper cam and contact block, to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection table on Page V7-T1-378.
3 Operator includes lens gasket and lens attachment screws.
4 Full voltage light units can be used at other than listed voltages by changing lamp. Replacement lamps are listed on Page V7-T1-269.
5 Resistor type. May generate excess heat if used in high density.
6 Amber, clear and white lenses have a black arrow (pointer), red, green and blue lenses have a white arrow (pointer).
1
1
1
V7-T1-382
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
120 Vac Transformer
Selector Switch, Cam 1
Illuminated Selector Switch Operator Only without Knob or Lever
Transformer Type—50/60 Hz
Positions
Operator Action
Two-position—60° throw
M
Three-position—60° throw
M
M
M
M
M
M
S
S
Lamps—#755, #757, #1835, 120MB
Catalog Number 12
Catalog Number 2
Cam Code 1 5
Cam Code 1 5
E34VFB_H
E34SFB_H
M
Cam Code 2 5
Cam Code 3 5
Cam Code 2 5
Cam Code 3 5
E34VGB_H
E34VHB_H
E34SGB_H
E34SHB_H
E34VNB_H 6
E34VPB_H 6
E34SNB_H 7
E34SPB_H 7
E34VJB_H 6
E34VKB_H 6
E34SJB_H 7
E34SKB_H 7
E34VLB_H
E34VMB_H
E34SLB_H
E34SMB_H
1
—
E34SRB_H
—
1
Type of Light Unit
1
Red
10250TER
10250TFR
Transformer Type
50/60 Hz
Green
10250TEG
10250TFG
Voltage
Suffix Code
Voltage
Suffix Code
Yellow
10250TEA
10250TFA
24
024
6
06
120
12
12
Full Voltage Type
AC or DC 3
Blue
10250TEL
10250TFL
120
Clear
10250TEC
10250TFC
208
208
24
24
240
48
48
380
120
480
480
240
600
600
White
10250TEW
10250TFW
240
Amber
10250TEM
10250TFM
380
1
1
120
8
6
7
8
9
1
1
240
1
1
Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Page V7-T1-382.
5
1
Light Unit Voltage Suffix
Add to operator catalog number listed in table above.
Color 9
4
1
1
Lever
Catalog Number
and Code Number
3
1
1
M
Knob
Catalog Number
and Code Number
2
1
1
E34VRB_H
M
Knobs and Levers
1
1
1
S
M
Lever
6V #755 Lamp
4
M
M
Four-position—40° throw
1
Full Voltage Type—AC or DC 3
S
M
Knob
1.12
Operator includes lens gasket and lens attachment screws.
Replace underscore with proper voltage suffix code from Light Unit Voltage Suffix table above. Example: three-position maintained with 120V transformer type light unit:
E34VGB120H.
Full voltage light units can be used at other than listed voltages by changing lamp. Replacement lamps are listed on Page V7-T1-269.
120MB lamps are used on both 120V and 240V operators.
For selection of the proper cam and contact block required to obtain a specific circuit sequence, see selection table on Page V7-T1-378.
120 and 240V transformer only.
120 full voltage only.
Resistor type. May generate excess heat if used in high density.
Amber, clear and white lenses have a black arrow (pointer). Red, green and blue lenses have a white arrow (pointer).
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-383
1.12
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Options
Contact Blocks and Mounting Adapters
1
NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
1
Contact Block
1
Contact Block
Description
Catalog Number
Class I Division 2 factory sealed contact block with 1NO-1NC
10250T1H
1
Dimensions, see Page V7-T1-389.
1
1
1
Mounting Adapter
1
1
Mounting Adapter
Description
Catalog Number
Mounting adapter for pushbuttons
10250TD2
Mounting adapter for selector switches
10250TD3
Dimensions, see Page V7-T1-389.
1
1
Mounting Adapters with Contact Block(s)—Overpacked
1
1
1
Description
Catalog Number
Pushbutton adapter with 1NO-1NC
10250TD21H
Pushbutton adapter with 2 (1NO-1NC)
10250TD21H1H
Selector switch adapter with 1NO-1NC
10250TD31H
Selector switch adapter with 2 (1NO-1NC)
10250TD31H1H
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-384
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.12
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Mounting and Assembly
1
Panel Thickness
●
Minimum: 0.06 in (1.6 mm)
●
Maximum: 0.25 in (8 mm) including legend plate
●
Maximum can be increased to 0.375 in (15.9 mm) using
optional retaining nut
●
Indicating light: 10250TA30/E34TA30
●
Pushbutton/selector switch: 10250TA31/E34TA31
Mounting Matrix
1
Legend
Plate
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
A
B
C
D
Small
2.87 (72.6)
2.25 (57.2)
2.25 (57.2)
2.87 (72.6)
Jumbo
2.87 (72.6)
2.32 (58.6)
2.32 (58.6)
2.87 (72.6)
Extra large
2.87 (72.6)
2.56 (65.2)
2.52 (64.1)
2.87 (72.6)
1
1
Panel Spacing and Drilling
Notch for
Locating Nib
1
1
Terminals for
Light Unit
“B” Min.
ø.14
(ø3.4)
1
Terminals for
Light Unit
“D” Min.
1
.19
(5.0)
1
.60
(15.2)
1
“C” Min.
“A” Min.
.67
(17.0)
Notch for
Locating Nib
ø1.2
(ø30.5)
1
ø1.2
(ø30.5)
1
NOTE: Suitable for Use
in This Alternate
Mounting Hole.
1
Drilling for One Hole Mounting
and Dimensions for Minimum
Spacing in Horizontal Rows.
Drilling for One Hole Mounting
and Dimensions for Minimum
Spacing in Vertical Rows.
1
1
1
1
Operator Assembly
Illuminated
Pushbutton
Lens
Washer
Nameplate
Thrust
Washer
(Optional)
Operator Operator
Gasket
E34 Earth
Terminal
Contact Block
Mounting Adapter
RATINGS ARE STAMPED
ON LIGHT UNIT
AND CONTACT BLOCK
1
1
1
Lamp
1
Indicator
Light
1
1
1
Push/Pull
Retaining Nut
5 lb-ft (6.8 Nm)
Panel
0.06" – 0.25"
(1.6 – 8 mm)
with Optional
Retaining Nut
Up to 0.375"
(15.9 mm)
Light Unit
Terminal Clamp:
One or Two Copper Conductors
22 – 12 AWG (0.34 – 4.0 mm2)
7 lb-in (0.8 Nm)
1
Contact Block
Terminal Clamp:
Single Copper Conductor
18 – 14 AWG (0.75 – 2.5 mm2)
9 lb-in (1.0 Nm)
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-385
1.12
1
1
Die Cast, Polyester and Stainless Steel Enclosures
Enclosures (Case and Cover)—Surface Mounting 1
Number of
Elements
Die Cast Enclosure
1
1
1
Polyester Enclosure
1
1
1
1
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Enclosures
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Stainless Steel
Enclosure
1
1
10250T
Catalog Number
E34
Catalog Number
Die Cast Enclosure—Deep Cover—In-Line NEMA 4, 4X, 12, 13
1
10250TN11
E34N11
2
10250TN12
E34N12
3
10250TN13
E34N13
4
10250TN14
E34N14
Polyester—In-Line NEMA 3, 4X, 12
1
—
E34N51
2
—
E34N52
3
—
E34N53
4
—
E34N54
Stainless Steel 2—In-Line NEMA 4, 4X, 12
1
—
10250TN33
2
—
10250TN34
3
—
10250TN35
4
—
10250TN36
1
Dimensions, see Page V7-T1-389.
1
Notes
1 For spacing increments, see Page V7-T1-264.
2 14 gauge, type 304.
1
1
1
1
1
2. Polyester enclosures
must be used when
mounting illuminated
operators.
Enclosure Layouts
Top – For Vertical Mounting
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
4
1
Top – For Horizontal
Mounting
1
Application Notes:
1. Operators need to be
mounted in their
horizontal orientation for
all enclosures. For die
cast enclosures remove
locating nib on operators
and use thrust washer
(Catalog Number
10250TK3).
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-386
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
1.12
Technical Data and Specifications
1
Mechanical Ratings
Description
1
Specification
1
Frequency of Operation
All pushbuttons
6000 operations/hr.
Key and lever selector switches
3000 operations/hr.
1
Pushbuttons
10 x 106 operations
1
Contact block
10 x 106 operations
Key and lever selector switches
0.25 x 106 operations
Life
1
1
Shock Resistance
20 ms >5g
Duration/force
1
1
Climatic Conditions
Description
Specification
Operating temperature
32° to 140°F (0° to 66°C)
Storage temperature
–40° to 176°F (–40° to 80°C)
Altitude
6,562 ft (2,000m)
Humidity
Max. 95% RH at 60°C
1
1
1
1
Terminals
Description
1
Specification
Light Units
1
Clamps
Terminals are saddle clamp type for 1 x 22 AWG (0.34 mm2) to 2 x 14 AWG (4.0 mm2)
conductors
Torque
7 lb-in (0.8 Nm)
Degree of protection against direct electrical contact
IP2X with fingerproof shroud
1
Clamps
Terminals are stainless steel saddle clamp type for 1 x 18–14 AWG (0.75–2.5 mm2)
solid or stranded copper conductor
1
Torque
9 lb-in (1.0 Nm) with size 2 Phillips screwdriver
1
Degree of protection against direct electrical contact
IP2X with fingerproof shroud
1
Contact Blocks
1
1
Electrical Ratings
Description
Specification
1
Light Units
Bulbs—average life:
Transformer type
20,000 hrs.
Resistor/direct voltage type
2500 hrs. minimum at rated voltage
LED
60,000 to 100,000 hrs.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-387
1.12
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Electrical Ratings—Contact Block
Meet or Exceed NEMA Contact Rating Designations A600 and Q300
A600 (AC)
Description
120V
Q300 (DC)
240V
480V
600V
125V
250V
1
Make and emerg. interrupting capacity (amps)
60
30
15
12
0.55
0.27
Normal load break (amps)
6
3
1.5
1.2
0.55
0.27
1
Thermal current (amps)
10
10
10
10
2.5
2.5
Maximum make
7200
7200
7200
7200
69
69
Maximum break
720
720
720
720
69
69
1
1
1
1
1
Voltamperes:
Temperature Codes
All illuminated devices have operating temperatures below
100°C except for the following catalog numbers with
temperature codes per NEC table 500.5(d) and UL 1604:
10250T
E34
Temp. Code
10250T201H
E34RB120H
T3C
10250T202H
E34RB240H
T3A
10250T471H
E34SB120H
TC3
1
10250T472H
E34SB240H
T3B
10250T80H
—
T3C
1
10250T81H
—
1
1
T3B
All selector switches w/120 MB lamp
T3C
1
All illuminated devices with lamp 1835
T4A
1
Note: For additional technical information, see Publication Number
TD.7.4.T.E.04.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V7-T1-388
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
1.12
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Dimensions
1
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Surface Mounting
1
Die Cast, Polyester and Stainless Steel Enclosures
1
4 Mtg. Holes — 10-32 Screw Size for
1 – 4 Element Die Cast/
Stainless Steel Enclosure
7/32 Screw Size for
Polyester
1
1
1
E
1
B
1
D
A
1
C
Surface
1
Element
Arrangement
Wide
A
High
B
Deep
C
Mounting
D
E
Conduit
Entrance
In-line
3.88 (98.6)
4.00 (101.6)
3.00 (76.3)
2.69 (68.3)
3.25 (82.6)
3/4
2
3.88 (98.6)
5.88 (149.4)
3.00 (76.3)
2.69 (68.3)
5.13 (130.3)
3
3.88 (98.6)
7.75 (196.9)
3.00 (76.3)
2.69 (68.3)
7.00 (177.8)
4
3.88 (98.6)
9.63 (244.6)
3.00 (76.3)
2.69 (68.3)
8.88 (225.6)
3.81 (96.8)
6.63 (168.4)
3.38 (85.9)
2.94 (74.7)
4.88 (124.0)
2
3.81 (96.8)
6.63 (168.4)
3.38 (85.9)
2.94 (74.7)
4.88 (124.0)
3
3.81 (96.8)
8.88 (225.6)
3.38 (85.9)
2.94 (74.7)
7.13 (181.1)
4
3.81 (96.8)
11.13 (282.7)
3.38 (85.9)
2.94 (74.7)
9.38 (238.3)
3.00 (76.2)
3.50 (88.9)
3.00 (76.2)
1.50 (38.1)
4.25 (108.0)
2
3.50 (88.9)
6.75 (171.5)
3.00 (76.2)
1.50 (38.1)
7.50 (190.5)
3
3.50 (88.9)
9.00 (228.6)
3.00 (76.2)
1.50 (38.1)
9.00 (228.6)
4
3.50 (88.9)
11.25 (285.8)
3.00 (76.2)
1.50 (38.1)
12.00 (304.8)
Number of
Elements
1
1
Die Cast
1
1
1
1
Polyester
1
In-line
1
1
1
1
Stainless Steel
1
In-line
Contact Block
1
1
1
1
1
Mounting Adapter
1.70
(43.2)
1.43
(36.3)
1.88
(47.8)
1.85
(47.0)
0.25
(6.4)
1
1
1
1.02
(25.9)
1.72
(43.7)
1.86
(47.2)
2.57
(65.3)
1
0.84
(21.3)
1
1
0.44
(11.2)
1.23
(31.2)
1
Note
1 No conduit entrance holes provided. Drill as required.
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-389
1.12
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Ratings
Summary of Classifications
Summary of NEC Article 500
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
The NEC Article 500 explains
in great detail the
requirements for the
installation of wiring and
electrical equipment in
hazardous locations. The
purpose of this summary is
for general reference only,
the National Electrical Code
along with other applicable
authorities having jurisdiction
over the site should be the
installer’s guidelines when
wiring or installing electrical
equipment in any hazardous
or potentially hazardous
location.
Class I, Division 2 Definition
Class I, Division 2 covers
hazardous locations where
flammable gases, vapors or
volatile liquids are handled
either in a closed system, or
confined within suitable
enclosures, or where
hazardous concentrations are
normally prevented by
positive mechanical
ventilation. Areas adjacent to
Division 1 locations, into
which gases might
occasionally flow, would
also belong to Division 2
(NEC (500.5[b])).
Hazardous Location
Any area where there is the
possibility of explosion and
fire resulting from the
presence of flammable
vapors, liquids or gas, or
combustible dust or fibers.
NEC 500–503
Class
I. Gas
Division
1. Hazard may exist—May exist in
atmosphere under normal operating
conditions
A. Acetylene
B. Hydrogen and manufactured gases containing 30% hydrogen by
volume (e.g. butadiene, ethylene oxide, propylene oxide)
C. Petrochemicals (e.g. carbon monoxide, ether, ethylene, hydrogen
sulfide, morpholine, cyclopropane)
D. Petrochemicals (e.g. gasoline, benzene, butane, propane, acetone,
ammonia, vinyl chloride)
2. Potential hazard—May be present in
atmosphere only under abnormal
circumstances OR location adjacent to
Class I, Division 1 location
A. Acetylene
B. Hydrogen and manufactured gases containing 30% hydrogen by
volume (e.g. butadiene, ethylene oxide, propylene oxide)
C. Petrochemicals (e.g. carbon monoxide, ether, ethylene, hydrogen
sulfide, morpholine, cyclopropane)
D. Petrochemicals (e.g. gasoline, benzene, butane, propane, acetone,
ammonia, vinyl chloride)
II. Dust
1. Hazard may exist—May exist in
atmosphere under normal operating
conditions
E. Conductive and combustible dust (resistivity <105 ohm/cm)
(metal dusts)
F. Carbonaceous dusts (resistivity >102 ohms/cm but <108 ohms/cm) (e.g.
carbon black, coke dust, coal)
G. Non-conductive combustible dust (resistivity >105 ohms/cm) (e.g. grain
dust, flour, starch, sugar, plastics)
III. Fibers
2. Potential hazard—May be present in
atmosphere only under abnormal
circumstances
F. Carbonaceous dusts (resistivity >102 ohms/cm but <108 ohms/cm) (e.g.
carbon black, coke dust, coal)
1. Production areas
Easily ignitable fibers or flyings
2. Handling and storage areas
Easily ignitable fibers or flyings
G. Non-conductive combustible dust (resistivity >105 ohms/cm) (e.g. grain
dust, flour, starch, sugar, plastics)
NEC 505
Class
I. Gas
Zone
0. Continuously present or present for long
periods of time
Group
IIC. Acetylene, hydrogen or equivalent hazard
IIB. Acetaldehyde, ethylene or equivalent hazard
IIA. Acetone, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, gasoline, methane, propane or
equivalent hazard
1. Likely to exist under normal operating or
maintenance conditions or adjacent to
Zone 0
IIC. Acetylene, hydrogen or equivalent hazard
IIB. Acetaldehyde, ethylene or equivalent hazard
IIA. Acetone, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, gasoline, methane, propane or
equivalent hazard
Summary of NEC Article 505
The NEC also classifies
hazardous locations for
flammable gases and vapors
into zones under NEC 505.
This system is more in line
with the European
Standards, CENELEC and
IEC, with the major
difference being that NEC
505 only classifies gases and
vapors while CENELEC and
IEC also include dusts.
Group
2. Not likely to occur in normal operation
and if they do occur will only exist for
short period or adjacent to Zone 1
IIC. Acetylene, hydrogen or equivalent hazard
IIB. Acetaldehyde, ethylene or equivalent hazard
IIA. Acetone, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, gasoline, methane, propane or
equivalent hazard
Note
For additional information on grouping of compounds, see NFPA 497M-1991 and NFPA 325-1994.
1
1
1
V7-T1-390
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
1.12
Summary of Basic Methods Available for Class I, Division 2 Locations
1
1
Features
Method
Configuration
Advantages
Disadvantages
Factory sealed contact block
Closed-ended labyrinth contact block with an
incendive circuit incapable of external ignition
Higher continuous carrying amperages—up to 10A
May not be suitable for logic level circuits
Direct drive contacts—contacts can be forced open
1
Suitable for use in all enclosures
Best suited for motor control applications
Hermetically sealed block
Reed switch sealed against an external
atmosphere
Suitable for low energy level circuits
Lower continuous carrying amperages are not
suitable for motor control applications
(typically 3A to 5A rated)
Suitable for use in all enclosures
Contacts cannot be forced open
Permanent magnet attracts metallic dust and
filings that can reduce the electrical creepage
distance between live terminals
Explosion proof enclosures
(Class I, Division 1 and 2)
Enclosures capable of withstanding an internal
explosion while preventing external ignition.
Enclosures designed for Class I, Division 1 can
safely be used in Class I, Division 2
Factory Sealed Contact Blocks
Internal
Ignition
Higher level of protection than required for Class I
Division 2
Higher material and installation costs
1
1
1
1
1
Conduit sealing is still required
Time consuming maintenance
1
Hermetically Sealed Reed Contact Block
Cooled
Escaping
Gas
1
1
1
Hermetically sealed
reed does not allow
external atmosphere to
enter switching chamber.
1
1
1
1
1
Depression of plunger
rotates magnet and either
opens/closes contacts.
Contacts can not be
forced apart if subject to
arch/fault current, because no
mechanical connection exists.
Direct Drive Contacts
• Contacts can be
mechanically forced
apart if subject to an
arch/fault current.
1
1
1
1
1
Explosion Proof Enclosure
1
1
Threaded Joint
Cooled
Escaping
Gas
1
Flat Joint
Internal
Ignition
Internal
Ignition
1
Cooled
Escaping
Gas
1
1
1
1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
V7-T1-391
Stacklights
SL Series Stacklights
2.1
SL Series
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Component Identification—SL7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection—SL7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Component Identification—SL4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection—SL4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2
E26 Series Stacklights
V7-T2-2
V7-T2-2
V7-T2-2
V7-T2-2
V7-T2-3
V7-T2-4
V7-T2-6
V7-T2-12
V7-T2-14
V7-T2-19
V7-T2-20
V7-T2-25
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
E26 Series
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
V7-T2-32
V7-T2-32
V7-T2-32
V7-T2-32
V7-T2-33
V7-T2-34
V7-T2-35
V7-T2-40
V7-T2-41
V7-T2-42
V7-T2-43
V7-T2-44
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
V7-T2-1
2.1
2
Stacklights
SL Series
Contents
Stacklights—SL Series
Description
2
Page
SL Series
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Component Identification—SL7 . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection—SL7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Component Identification—SL4 . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection—SL4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
2
2
V7-T2-3
V7-T2-4
V7-T2-6
V7-T2-12
V7-T2-14
V7-T2-19
V7-T2-20
V7-T2-25
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Product Description
The new Eaton SL7 and SL4
stacklights provide reliable
control over all key processes
and machine availability.
Now available in two sizes,
70 mm (SL7) and 40 mm
(SL4), the new stacklights
are engineered to keep you
informed about potential
material requirements,
downtime and hazards.
Modules are available in
a wide selection of audible,
illuminating and mounting
options that are well suited
to adapt to any industrial
application.
2
2
2
2
Features
Optimal Performance in
Rugged Applications
●
●
●
●
●
All elements have IP66 and
UL Type 4/4X/13 ratings for
protection against strong
jets of water
Bright and efficient LEDs
with a lifespan of up to
100,000 hours
High-performance LEDs for
maximum illumination in
direct sunlight
Acoustic modules with up
to 100 dB sound levels
Operating temperatures:
–22° to +140°F
(–30º to +60ºC)
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
●
2
●
Easily configurable
components
Simple bayonet mounting
mechanism for quick
assembly
Flexible mounting and
lighting options
Volume-adjustable alarms
2
●
●
●
●
●
2
●
2
●
●
●
●
●
UL 508—File No. E29184
IEC/EN 60947-5-1
CSA C22.2 No. 14-10
CSA C22.2 No. 94-91
CSA Class No. NKCR7
Benefits
Highly Modular and
Versatile Line
●
Six lens colors: red, amber,
yellow, green, blue, white
Continuous, flashing,
strobe and multi-strobe
lighting functions
Mono-tone, dual-tone and
multi-tone audible alarms
LED or incandescent
lighting options
Control up to five modules
on a single stack, 10 with
dual-arm base
24V, 120 Vac and 230 Vac
operating voltages
Standards and
Certifications
Simplified twist-and-lock
assembly, no tools
required
Compact components
reduce inventory
requirements and increase
flexibility
Versatile hardware for
quick installation and
minimized downtime
New slim 40 mm size is
ideal for applications with
constrained space
Lean automation with
SmartWire-DT connectivity
Ideal for indoor and
outdoor usage
2
2
V7-T2-2
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
Stacklights
SL Series
2.1
Product Overview
Diameter
2
SL7
SL4
70 mm
40 mm
2
2
2
2
Acoustic Modules
Page V7-T2-9
2
Page V7-T2-16
2
2
2
2
2
2
Light Modules
Continuous light, LED: Page V7-T2-6
Continuous light, LED: Page V7-T2-16
Flashing light, LED: Page V7-T2-7
Flashing light, LED: Page V7-T2-15
Strobe light, LED: Page V7-T2-7
Strobe light, LED: Page V7-T2-15
Continuous light, high-performance LED: Page V7-T2-8
Multi-strobe light, LED: Page V7-T2-17
Strobe light, high-performance LED: Page V7-T2-8
Continuous light, Incandescent: Page V7-T2-17
2
2
2
Multi-strobe light, high-performance LED: Page V7-T2-8
2
Continuous light, Incandescent: Page V7-T2-8
2
2
2
2
2
2
Base Modules
Page V7-T2-10, V7-T2-11
Page V7-T2-17
2
Accessories
Page V7-T2-19
Page V7-T2-19
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
V7-T2-3
2.1
2
2
Stacklights
SL Series
Component Identification—SL7
Component Identification
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Light Modes
2
Continuous
Incandescent
Flashing
Strobe
Multi-Strobe
—
—
—
2
LED
2
V7-T2-4
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
Stacklights
SL Series
2.1
SL7—Component Identification Descriptions
Item
Number
Item
Description
Page
Reference
Acoustic Modules
Easy mounting with bayonet mount, place at highest position
Sound pressure up to 100 dB, adjustable with internal potentiometer
Operating mode: 100% DF (duty factor)
Degree of protection: UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66
Operational voltages: 24 Vac/Vdc, 110/120 Vac, 230/240 Vac
2
2
1
Continuous tone or pulsed tone, adjustable with internal DIP switches
Frequency: 2800 Hz
V7-T2-9
2
2
Continuous tone or pulsed tone; can be actuated externally; takes up to
two inputs (two modules)
Frequency: 2800 Hz
V7-T2-9
2
3
Multi-tone (eight tones) adjustable with internal DIP switch
Frequency 500–2700 Hz
V7-T2-9
2
2
Incandescent Bulb
4
Accessory
V7-T2-19
Tool for Replacing Incandescent Bulb
5
Accessory
V7-T2-19
Light Modules
Easy mounting with bayonet mount, modules can be arranged in any order
Operating mode: 100% DF (duty factor)
Degree of protection: UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66
Max. 5 modules per stack or up to 10 via dual-arm base option
2
2
2
Light Module for Incandescent Bulb
Continuous light
6
BA15d socket, without incandescent bulb
V7-T2-7
2
V7-T2-6
2
Light Modules with LED
Continuous light
7
Flashing light
8
Flashing frequency: 2 Hz
V7-T2-7
Strobe light
9
Flashing frequency: 1.4 Hz
V7-T2-7
2
2
Light Modules with High-Output LED
Continuous light
10
V7-T2-8
Strobe light
11
High-performance LED, flashing frequency: 1.4 Hz
V7-T2-8
Strobe light, multi-strobe light
12
High-performance LED, with various strobe sequences
Flashing frequency: 1–2.6 Hz
V7-T2-8
2
2
Base Modules
2
Easy mounting with bayonet mount, includes cover plate, with spring-cage terminals
Degree of protection: UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66
Base for mounting on both sides
13
Max. 2 x 5 modules that can be actuated individually
V7-T2-11
Base with aluminum tube and plastic foot
14
Aluminum tube 100 mm, 250 mm or 400 mm
V7-T2-10
Base with aluminum tube and M20 thread
15
Aluminum tube 100 mm, 250 mm or 400 mm
V7-T2-10
Base with external fixing holes
16
—
V7-T2-10
Vertical base with bracket
17
—
V7-T2-11
Base with internal (on the inside) fixing holes
18
—
V7-T2-10
Base with built-in fixing screws (pre-assembled)
19
—
V7-T2-10
Base with base adapter for slipping onto place (rapid mounting and wiring system)
20
Aluminum tube 100 mm, 250 mm or 400 mm
V7-T2-10
Base with base adapter for slipping onto place (rapid mounting and wiring system)
and SmartWire-DT ™ connection
21
Aluminum tube 100 mm
V7-T2-10
Bracket
22
Accessory
V7-T2-19
Bracket
23
Accessory, includes M20 cable gland
V7-T2-19
Mounting Bracket
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
V7-T2-5
2.1
2
Stacklights
SL Series
Product Selection—SL7
Complete Devices
2
SL7-100-L-R_
Continuous Light, LED, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66
2
Rated Operational
Voltage (Ue V)
2
Base Module with Foot and 100 mm Tube
24 Vac/Vdc
2
Number of
Modules
Color
2
Red/Green
3
Red/Amber/
Green
Function
Standard
Pack
1
Catalog Number
SL7-100-L-RG-24LED
SL7-100-L-RAG-24LED
2
2
2
2
2
2
Light Module with LED
2
SL7-L_
2
Continuous Light, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66
Rated Operational
Voltage (Ue V)
Color
24 Vac/Vdc
Blue
2
2
2
Function
Standard
Pack
Catalog Number
1
SL7-L24-B
Green
SL7-L24-G
Red
SL7-L24-R
White
SL7-L24-W
Yellow
SL7-L24-Y
Amber
110/120 Vac
2
2
2
Blue
SL7-L24-A
1
Green
SL7-L120-G
Red
SL7-L120-R
White
SL7-L120-W
Yellow
SL7-L120-Y
Amber
2
230/240 Vac
SL7-L120-B
Blue
SL7-L120-A
1
SL7-L230-B
2
Green
SL7-L230-G
Red
SL7-L230-R
2
White
SL7-L230-W
Yellow
SL7-L230-Y
Amber
SL7-L230-A
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V7-T2-6
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
Stacklights
SL Series
2.1
Light Module with LED, continued
SL7-BL_
2
Flashing Light, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66, 2 Hz
Rated Operational
Voltage (Ue V)
Color
24 Vac/Vdc
Blue
Function
Catalog Number
1
SL7-BL24-B
Green
SL7-BL24-G
Red
SL7-BL24-R
White
SL7-BL24-W
Yellow
SL7-BL24-Y
Amber
110/120 Vac
230/240 Vac
2
Standard
Pack
2
2
2
2
SL7-BL24-A
Blue
1
SL7-BL120-B
Green
SL7-BL120-G
Red
SL7-BL120-R
White
SL7-BL120-W
Yellow
SL7-BL120-Y
Amber
SL7-BL120-A
Blue
1
2
2
2
2
SL7-BL230-B
Green
SL7-BL230-G
Red
SL7-BL230-R
White
SL7-BL230-W
Yellow
SL7-BL230-Y
Amber
SL7-BL230-A
2
2
2
2
SL7-FL_
Strobe Light, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66, 1.4 Hz
Rated Operational
Voltage (Ue V)
Color
24 Vac/Vdc
Blue
Function
Catalog Number
1
SL7-FL24-B
Green
SL7-FL24-G
Red
SL7-FL24-R
White
SL7-FL24-W
Yellow
SL7-FL24-Y
Amber
110/120 Vac
230/240 Vac
2
Standard
Pack
Blue
2
2
2
SL7-FL24-A
1
SL7-FL120-B
Green
SL7-FL120-G
Red
SL7-FL120-R
White
SL7-FL120-W
Yellow
SL7-FL120-Y
Amber
SL7-FL120-A
Blue
2
1
2
2
2
2
SL7-FL230-B
Green
SL7-FL230-G
Red
SL7-FL230-R
White
SL7-FL230-W
Yellow
SL7-FL230-Y
Amber
SL7-FL230-A
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
V7-T2-7
2.1
2
2
Stacklights
SL Series
SL7 Light Module with High-Output LED
SL7-L24-_
Continuous Light, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66
Rated Operational
Voltage (Ue V)
2
Function
Standard
Pack
Catalog Number
1
SL7-L24-B-HP
High-Performance LED for Maximum Signaling Effect
24 Vac/Vdc
2
2
2
2
2
Color
SL7-FL24-_-HP
Blue
Green
SL7-L24-G-HP
Red
SL7-L24-R-HP
White
SL7-L24-W-HP
Yellow
SL7-L24-Y-HP
Amber
SL7-L24-A-HP
Strobe Light, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66
Standard
Pack
2
Rated Operational
Voltage (Ue V)
2
High-Performance LED for Maximum Signaling Effect, 1.4 Hz
24 Vac/Vdc
2
2
2
Color
Function
Blue
1
Catalog Number
SL7-FL24-B-HP
Green
SL7-FL24-G-HP
Red
SL7-FL24-R-HP
White
SL7-FL24-W-HP
Yellow
SL7-FL24-Y-HP
Amber
SL7-FL24-A-HP
2
2
SL7-FL24-_-HPM
Multi-Strobe Light, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66
Rated Operational
Voltage (Ue V)
2
Color
Function
Standard
Pack
Catalog Number
High-Performance LED for Maximum Signaling Effect, 1–2.6 Hz
2
24 Vac/Vdc
2
2
2
Blue
1
SL7-FL24-B-HPM
Green
SL7-FL24-G-HPM
Red
SL7-FL24-R-HPM
White
SL7-FL24-W-HPM
Yellow
SL7-FL24-Y-HPM
Amber
SL7-FL24-A-HPM
2
2
2
2
SL7 Light Module for Incandescent Bulb
SL7-L-_
Continuous Light, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66
For incandescent bulb selection, see Page V7-T2-19.
Rated Operational
Voltage (Ue V)
2
Color
Function
Standard
Pack
Catalog Number
1
SL7-L-B
Without Light Elements, Incandescent Bulb, Maximum 7W
2
<250 Vac/Vdc
Blue
2
Green
SL7-L-G
Red
SL7-L-R
2
White
SL7-L-W
Yellow
SL7-L-Y
Amber
SL7-L-A
2
2
V7-T2-8
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
2.1
Stacklights
SL Series
SL7 Acoustic Modules
SL7-AP_
2
Continuous Tone or Pulsed Tone, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66 1
Adjustable with internal DIP switches.
Sound pressure 100 dB, adjustable with internal potentiometer.
f = 2800 Hz.
Rated Operational
Voltage (Ue V)
Rated Operational
Current (Ie mA)
Color
24 Vac/Vdc
Maximum 92
Black
Function
2
2
Sound Type
Standard
Pack
Catalog Number
1
SL7-AP24
110/120 Vac
Maximum 41
Black
SL7-AP120
230/240 Vac
Maximum 43
Black
SL7-AP230
2
2
2
2
SL7-AP_-E
2
Continuous Tone or Pulsed Tone, External Actuation, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66 1
Assigned two inputs (two modules).
Sound pressure 100 dB, adjustable with internal potentiometer.
f = 2800 Hz.
Rated Operational
Voltage (Ue V)
Rated Operational
Current (Ie mA)
Color
Function
Sound Type
2
2
Standard
Pack
Catalog Number
1
SL7-AP24-E
24 Vac/Vdc
Maximum 92
Black
110/120 Vac
Maximum 41
Black
SL7-AP120-E
230/240 Vac
Maximum 43
Black
SL7-AP230-E
2
2
2
2
SL7-AP_-M
Multi-Tone; Eight Tones, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66 1
Adjustable with internal DIP switch.
Sound pressure 100 dB, adjustable with internal potentiometer.
f = 500–2700 Hz.
2
2
Rated Operational
Voltage (Ue V)
Rated Operational
Current (Ie mA)
Color
24 Vac/Vdc
Maximum 115
Black
110/120 Vac
Maximum 45
Black
SL7-AP120-M
230/240 Vac
Maximum 43
Black
SL7-AP230-M
Function
Sound Type
Standard
Pack
Catalog Number
1
SL7-AP24-M
2
2
2
2
Note
1 Place only at the highest position on a pole.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
V7-T2-9
2.1
2
SL Series
SL7 Base Modules
For Horizontal Mounting—Includes Cover, Maximum 5 Modules
2
2
Stacklights
Description
SL7-CB-_
2
Base with aluminum tube and plastic foot
Spring-loaded terminals
Tube
Length
100 mm
250 mm
Color
Black
aluminum
color tube
Standard
Pack
1
400 mm
For use with …
Catalog Number
SL7-L-…
SL7-BL-…
SL7-FL-…
SL7-AP-…
SL7-CB-100
SL7-L-…
SL7-BL-…
SL7-FL-…
SL7-AP-…
SL7-CB-T-100
SL7-CB-250
SL7-CB-400
2
2
2
2
2
SL7-CB-T-_
Base with aluminum tube and M20 threaded base
Spring-loaded terminals
2
100 mm
250 mm
Black
aluminum
color tube
1
400 mm
SL7-CB-T-250
SL7-CB-T-400
2
2
2
2
2
SL7-CB-IMH
Base with internal (on the inside) fixing holes
Spring-loaded terminals
—
Black
1
SL7-L-…
SL7-BL-…
SL7-FL-…
SL7-AP-…
SL7-CB-IMH
SL7-CB-IMS
Base with built-in (pre-assembled) fixing screws
Spring-loaded terminals
—
Black
1
SL7-L-…
SL7-BL-…
SL7-FL-…
SL7-AP-…
SL7-CB-IMS
SL7-CB-EMH
Base with external fixing holes
Spring-loaded terminals
—
Black
1
SL7-L-…
SL7-BL-…
SL7-FL-…
SL7-AP-…
SL7-CB-EMH
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V7-T2-10
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
Stacklights
SL Series
2.1
SL7 Base Modules, continued
2
For Horizontal Mounting—Includes Cover, Maximum 5 Modules, continued
Tube
Length
Description
SL7-FMS_
Base with base adapter for slipping onto place (rapid mounting
and wiring system)
Screw terminals
100 mm
250 mm
Color
Black
aluminum
color tube
Standard
Pack
1
400 mm
2
For use with …
Catalog Number
SL7-L-…
SL7-BL-…
SL7-FL-…
SL7-AP-…
SL7-FMS-100
SL7-FMS-250
SL7-FMS-400
2
2
2
2
2
SL7-SWD
Base with base adapter for slipping onto place (rapid mounting
and wiring system)
Blade terminal SWD4-8MF2
Maximum 0.3A per module
External power supply connectable (24 Vdc)
Configurable with SWD‐Assist (planning and ordering help)
100 mm
—
1
SL7-L-…
SL7-BL-…
SL7-FL-…
SL7-AP-…
2
SL7-SWD
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
SL7-CB-FW
2
For Vertical Mounting—Includes Cover, Maximum 5 Modules
Description
Color
Standard
Pack
Vertical base with bracket
Spring-loaded terminals
Black
1
For use with …
Catalog Number
SL7-L-…
SL7-BL-…
SL7-FL-…
SL7-AP-…
SL7-CB-FW
2
2
2
2
SL7-CB-D
2
For Mounting on Both Sides—Includes Cover, Maximum 2 x 5 Modules
Description
Color
Standard
Pack
Base with external fixing holes
Spring-loaded terminals
Black
1
For use with …
Catalog Number
SL7-L-…
SL7-BL-…
SL7-FL-…
SL7-AP-…
SL7-CB-D
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
V7-T2-11
2.1
2
2
Stacklights
SL Series
Component Identification—SL4
Component Identification
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Light Modes
2
Continuous
Incandescent
Flashing
Strobe
Multi-Strobe
—
—
—
2
LED
2
V7-T2-12
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
Stacklights
SL Series
2.1
SL4—Component Identification Descriptions
Item
Number
Item
Description
Page
Reference
Acoustic Modules
Sound pressure 80 dB, adjustable with internal potentiometer, frequency 4000 Hz
Easy mounting with bayonet mount, set up as highest module
Permanently integrated cover plate
Operating mode: 100% DF (duty factor)
Degree of protection: UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66
1
Continuous tone or pulsed tone, adjustable with internal DIP switches
Frequency: 2800 Hz
V7-T2-16
2
2
2
Incandescent Bulb
2
Accessory
V7-T2-19
Tool for Replacing Incandescent Bulb
3
Accessory
V7-T2-19
2
2
Light Modules
Easy mounting with bayonet mount, modules can be arranged in any order
Without light element (incandescent bulb with BA15d socket),
easy mounting with bayonet mount.
Operating mode: 100% DF (duty factor)
Flashing frequency 2 Hz
Degree of protection: UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66
2
2
2
Light Module for Incandescent Bulb
Continuous light
2
4
BA15d socket, without incandescent bulb
V7-T2-16
Light Modules with LED
Continuous light
5
Flashing light
6
V7-T2-14
Strobe light
7
Flashing frequency: 1.4 Hz
V7-T2-15
Strobe light, multi-strobe light
8
High-performance LED, with various strobe sequences
Flashing frequency: 1–2.6 Hz
V7-T2-16
Flashing frequency: 2 Hz
V7-T2-15
2
2
2
2
Base Modules
2
Easy mounting with bayonet mount, includes cover plate, with spring-cage terminals
Degree of protection: UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66
Base for mounting on both sides
9
Max. 2 x 5 modules that can be actuated individually
V7-T2-17
Base with aluminum tube and plastic foot
10
Aluminum tube 100 mm, 250 mm or 400 mm
V7-T2-17
Base with aluminum tube and M20 thread
11
Aluminum tube 100 mm, 250 mm or 400 mm
V7-T2-17
Base with external fixing holes
12
—
V7-T2-17
Vertical base with bracket
13
—
V7-T2-17
Base with internal (on the inside) fixing holes
14
—
V7-T2-17
Base with built-in fixing screws (pre-assembled)
15
—
V7-T2-17
Base with base adapter for slipping onto place (rapid mounting and wiring system)
16
Aluminum tube 100 mm, 250 mm or 400 mm
V7-T2-17
Base with base adapter for slipping onto place (rapid mounting and wiring system)
and SmartWire-DT ™ connection
17
Aluminum tube 100 mm
V7-T2-17
Bracket
18
Accessory
V7-T2-19
Bracket
19
Accessory, includes M20 cable gland
V7-T2-19
Mounting Bracket
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
V7-T2-13
2.1
Stacklights
SL Series
2
Product Selection—SL4
2
Complete Devices
2
SL4-100-L-R_
Continuous Light, LED, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66
Rated Operational
Voltage (Ue V)
2
Number of
Modules
Color
Function
Standard
Pack
Catalog Number
Base Module with Foot and 100 mm Tube
24 Vac/Vdc
2
2
Red/Green
3
Red/Amber/
Green
2
1
SL4-100-L-RG-24LED
SL4-100-L-RAG-24LED
2
2
2
2
Light Module with LED
2
SL4-L_
Continuous Light, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66
2
Rated Operational
Voltage (Ue V)
Color
2
24 Vac/Vdc
Blue
2
2
Function
Standard
Pack
Catalog Number
1
SL4-L24-B
Green
SL4-L24-G
Red
SL4-L24-R
White
SL4-L24-W
Yellow
SL4-L24-Y
Amber
2
110/120 Vac
2
2
2
Blue
SL4-L24-A
1
Green
SL4-L120-G
Red
SL4-L120-R
White
SL4-L120-W
Yellow
SL4-L120-Y
Amber
2
230/240 Vac
2
2
2
SL4-L120-B
Blue
SL4-L120-A
1
SL4-L230-B
Green
SL4-L230-G
Red
SL4-L230-R
White
SL4-L230-W
Yellow
SL4-L230-Y
Amber
SL4-L230-A
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V7-T2-14
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
Stacklights
SL Series
2.1
Light Module with LED, continued
SL4-BL_
2
Flashing Light, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66, 2 Hz
Rated Operational
Voltage (Ue V)
Color
24 Vac/Vdc
Blue
Function
Catalog Number
1
SL4-BL24-B
Green
SL4-BL24-G
Red
SL4-BL24-R
White
SL4-BL24-W
Yellow
SL4-BL24-Y
Amber
110/120 Vac
230/240 Vac
2
Standard
Pack
2
2
2
2
SL4-BL24-A
Blue
1
SL4-BL120-B
Green
SL4-BL120-G
Red
SL4-BL120-R
White
SL4-BL120-W
Yellow
SL4-BL120-Y
Amber
SL4-BL120-A
Blue
1
2
2
2
2
SL4-BL230-B
Green
SL4-BL230-G
Red
SL4-BL230-R
White
SL4-BL230-W
Yellow
SL4-BL230-Y
Amber
SL4-BL230-A
2
2
2
2
SL4-FL_
2
Strobe Light, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66, 1.4 Hz
Rated Operational
Voltage (Ue V)
Color
24 Vac/Vdc
Blue
110/120 Vac
Function
Standard
Pack
Catalog Number
1
SL4-FL24-B
Green
SL4-FL24-G
Red
SL4-FL24-R
White
SL4-FL24-W
Yellow
SL4-FL24-Y
Amber
SL4-FL24-A
Blue
1
SL4-FL120-G
Red
SL4-FL120-R
White
SL4-FL120-W
Yellow
SL4-FL120-Y
Blue
2
2
2
2
SL4-FL120-B
Green
Amber
230/240 Vac
2
2
2
2
SL4-FL120-A
1
SL4-FL230-B
Green
SL4-FL230-G
Red
SL4-FL230-R
White
SL4-FL230-W
Yellow
SL4-FL230-Y
Amber
SL4-FL230-A
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
V7-T2-15
2.1
2
2
Stacklights
SL Series
Light Module with LED, continued
SL4-FL24-_-M
Multi-Strobe Light, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66
Rated Operational
Voltage (Ue V)
2
Color
Function
Standard
Pack
Catalog Number
1
SL4-FL24-B-M
LED for Effective Signaling Effect
With Various Strobe Sequences, 1–2.6 Hz
2
24 Vac/Vdc
Blue
2
Green
SL4-FL24-G-M
Red
SL4-FL24-R-M
2
White
SL4-FL24-W-M
Yellow
SL4-FL24-Y-M
Amber
SL4-FL24-A-M
2
2
2
2
SL4 Light Module for Incandescent Bulb
SL4-L-_
2
Continuous Light, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66
For incandescent bulb selection, see Page V7-T2-19.
Rated Operational
Voltage (Ue V)
2
Color
Function
Standard
Pack
Catalog Number
1
SL4-L-B
Without Light Elements, Incandescent Bulb, Maximum 4W
<250 Vac/Vdc
2
2
2
2
Blue
Green
SL4-L-G
Red
SL4-L-R
White
SL4-L-W
Yellow
SL4-L-Y
Amber
SL4-L-A
2
2
SL4 Acoustic Modules
2
SL4-AP_
2
Continuous Tone or Pulsed Tone, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66
Adjustable with internal DIP switches.
Sound pressure 80 dB, adjustable with internal potentiometer.
f = 4000 Hz.
2
Rated Operational
Voltage (Ue V)
2
Place only at the highest position on a pole.
24 Vac/Vdc
Maximum 39
Black
2
110/120 Vac
Maximum 21
Black
SL4-AP120
230/240 Vac
Maximum 21
Black
SL4-AP230
Rated Operational
Current (Ie mA)
Color
Function
Sound Type
Standard
Pack
1
Catalog Number
SL4-AP24
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V7-T2-16
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
Stacklights
SL Series
2.1
SL4 Base Modules
2
For Horizontal Mounting—Includes Cover, Maximum 5 Modules
Description
SL4-PIB-_
Base with aluminum tube and plastic foot
Spring-loaded terminals
Tube
Length
100 mm
250 mm
Color
Black
aluminum
color tube
Standard
Pack
1
400 mm
2
For use with …
Catalog Number
SL4-L-…
SL4-BL-…
SL4-FL-…
SL4-AP-…
SL4-PIB-100
2
SL4-PIB-250
2
SL4-PIB-400
2
2
2
2
SL4-PIB-T-_
Base with aluminum tube and M20 threaded base
Spring-loaded terminals
100 mm
250 mm
Black
aluminum
color tube
1
400 mm
SL4-L-…
SL4-BL-…
SL4-FL-…
SL4-AP-…
SL4-PIB-T-100
SL4-PIB-T-250
SL4-PIB-T-400
2
2
2
2
2
2
SL4-PIB-IMH
Base with internal (on the inside) fixing holes
Spring-loaded terminals
—
Black
1
SL4-L-…
SL4-BL-…
SL4-FL-…
SL4-AP-…
SL4-PIB-IMH
2
2
2
2
2
SL4-PIB-IMS
Base with built-in (pre-assembled) fixing screws
Spring-loaded terminals
—
Black
1
SL4-L-…
SL4-BL-…
SL4-FL-…
SL4-AP-…
SL4-PIB-IMS
2
2
2
2
SL4-PIB-EMH
Base with external fixing holes
Spring-loaded terminals
—
Black
1
SL4-L-…
SL4-BL-…
SL4-FL-…
SL4-AP-…
SL4-PIB-EMH
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
V7-T2-17
2.1
2
SL Series
SL4 Base Modules, continued
For Horizontal Mounting—Includes Cover, Maximum 5 Modules, continued
2
2
Stacklights
Tube
Length
Description
SL4-FMS_
2
Base with base adapter for slipping onto place (rapid mounting
and wiring system)
Screw terminals
100 mm
250 mm
Color
Black
aluminum
color tube
Standard
Pack
1
400 mm
For use with …
Catalog Number
SL4-L-…
SL4-BL-…
SL4-FL-…
SL4-AP-…
SL4-FMS-100
SL4-L-…
SL4-BL-…
SL4-FL-…
SL4-AP-…
SL4-SWD
SL4-FMS-250
SL4-FMS-400
2
2
2
2
SL4-SWD
2
2
Base with base adapter for slipping onto place (rapid mounting
and wiring system)
Blade terminal SWD4-8MF2
Maximum 0.3A per module
External power supply connectable (24 Vdc)
Configurable with SWD‐Assist (planning and ordering help)
100 mm
—
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
SL4-PIB-FW
2
2
For Vertical Mounting—Includes Cover, Maximum 5 Modules
Description
Color
Standard
Pack
One-sided base with bracket
Spring-loaded terminals
Black
1
2
For use with …
Catalog Number
SL4-L-…
SL4-BL-…
SL4-FL-…
SL4-AP-…
SL4-PIB-FW
2
2
SL4-PIB-D
2
2
For Mounting on Both Sides—Includes Cover, Maximum 2 x 5 Modules
Description
Color
Standard
Pack
Base with external fixing holes
Spring-loaded terminals
Black
1
For use with …
Catalog Number
SL4-L-…
SL4-BL-…
SL4-FL-…
SL4-AP-…
SL4-PIB-D
2
2
2
2
2
2
V7-T2-18
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
Stacklights
SL Series
2.1
Accessories
2
SL7 and SL4 Series
2
Mounting Brackets
2
Mounting Brackets for Vertical
Mounting, Plastic
SL7/4-FW
Standard
Pack
1
2
Catalog
Number
For Use With …
SL4-PIB…
SL7-CB...
2
SL7/4-FW
2
2
M20 Cable Gland for Vertical Mounting,
Metal (Includes Mounting Bracket)
SL7/4-FW-T
Standard
Pack
1
2
Catalog
Number
For Use With …
SL4-PIB-T…
SL7-CB-T...
2
SL7/4-FW-T
2
2
Incandescent Bulb Tool
Tool for Replacing Incandescent Bulb
SL7/4-BET
Standard
Pack
1
2
Catalog
Number
For Use With …
SL7-L-…
SL4-L-…
2
SL7/4-BET
2
2
2
Incandescent Bulbs
2
SL7 Series
SL7-L12
Incandescent Bulbs, Mounting: Ba15d
2
Lifespan (h)
Rated Operational
Voltage (Ue V)
Power
(Watts)
Standard
Pack
For Use With …
Catalog Number
3000
12
5
1
SL7-L-…
SL7-L12
24
6.5
SL7-L24
120
7
SL7-L120
230
6.5
SL7-L230
2
2
2
2
SL4 Series
SL4-L12
2
Incandescent Bulbs, Mounting: Ba15d
Lifespan (h)
Rated Operational
Voltage (Ue V)
Power
(Watts)
Standard
Pack
For Use With …
Catalog Number
3000
12
4
1
SL4-L-…
SL4-L12
24
SL4-L24
120
SL4-L120
230
SL4-L230
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
V7-T2-19
2.1
Stacklights
SL Series
2
Technical Data and Specifications
2
SL7 Series
2
SL7 General Specifications
Description
Specification
Standards
IEC/EN 60947-5-1
Lens color
Blue, green, red, clear, yellow, amber
2
Number of signal elements
Max. 5 with standard base
Max. 10 with base for mounting on both sides
2
Mechanical Ratings
2
2
2
2
Shock (IEC 68-2-27)
11 ms, 15g
Vibration (IEC 68-2-6)
20 sweeps 10–150 Hz, 1g
Climate Conditions
Climatic proofing
Damp heat, constant, to IEC 60068-2-78
Damp heat, cyclic, to IEC 60069-2-30
Operating temperature
–22° to +140°F (–30° to +60°C)
2
Storage temperature
–22° to +185°F (–30° to +85°C)
2
IEC degree of protection
UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66
IEC/EN 60529
2
Protection type UL
Type 4/4X/13
Environmental Ratings
Materials
2
Cover
Polycarbonate
Lenses
Polycarbonate
Stacklight base
Polycarbonate
2
Tubes
Aluminum
2
Solid or flexible conductor
0.13–2.5 mm2
Flexible with ferrule with plastic collar
0.25–1.5 mm2
AWG 24–AWG 14
2
2
Terminal Capacity
Contacts
2
2
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp)
4000 Vac
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)
250V
Overvoltage category/pollution degree
III/3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V7-T2-20
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
Stacklights
SL Series
2.1
SL7 Light Module Specifications
SL7-L-…-…
SL7-BL-…-…
SL7-FL-…-…
SL7-L24-…-HP
SL7-FL24-…-HP
SL7-FL24-…-HPM
SL7-L-…
2
Type of light
Continuous light
Flashing light
Strobe light
Continuous light
Strobe light
Multi-strobe light
Continuous
light
2
Light elements
LED
LED
LED
High-performance LED
High-performance LED
High-performance LED
Incandescent
bulb (max. 7W)
2
2
Unit
Mounting
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ba15d
Flashing/strobe
frequency
—
2 Hz
1.4 Hz
—
1.4 Hz
1–2.6 Hz
—
Transmission angle
360°
360°
360°
360°
360°
360°
360°
A
< 0.003
< 0.003
<0.003
< 0.003
< 0.003
< 0.003
< 0.003
24 Vac/Vdc
A
0.049–0.054
0.058
0.130–0.135
0.170–0.200
0.260–0.265
0.260–0.265
—
110/120 Vac
A
0.028–0.031
0.028–0.030
0.010
—
—
—
—
230/240 Vac
A
0.027–0.028
0.030–0.031
0.010
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Max. 7W with
the specified
voltages
24 Vac/Vdc ± 10%
110/120 Vac ± 10%
230/240 Vac ± 10%
24 Vac/Vdc ± 10%
110/120 Vac ± 10%
230/240 Vac ± 10%
24 Vac/Vdc ± 10%
110/120 Vac ± 10%
230/240 Vac ± 10%
18–30 Vdc/
18–26 Vac
18–30 Vdc/
18–26 Vac
18–30 Vdc/
18–26 Vac
Up to
250 Vac/Vdc
Leakage current
2
Current-/power
consumption
Power
consumption
Voltage levels
Lifespan
h
100,000
100,000
100,000
50,000
50,000
50,000
3000
Weight
g
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
V7-T2-21
2.1
2
Stacklights
SL Series
SL7 Acoustic Module Specifications
Unit
SL7-AP…
SL7-AP…-E
SL7-AP…-M
2
Type of tone
Continuous or pulsed tone
Continuous or pulsed tone
Continuous or pulsed tone
Eight types of sound
2
Types of sound
Two versions,
table of sound types
Two versions,
table of sound types
Eight versions,
table of sound types
2
Sound setting
2
2
Internal; single-pole DIP
Can be externally actuated
Internal; three-pole DIP
Max.: 100
Min.: 88
Max.: 100
Min.: 88
Max.: 100
Min.: 88
Sound pressure level adjustment
Built-in, potentiometer
Built-in, potentiometer
Built-in, potentiometer
Transmission angle
360°
360°
360°
Sound pressure
dB
Current-/power consumption
2
2
2
2
24 Vac/Vdc
A
0.092
0.092
0.115
110/120 Vac
A
0.041
0.041
0.045
230/240 Vac
A
0.043
0.043
0.043
24 Vac/Vdc ± 10%
110/120 Vac ± 10%
230/240 Vac ± 10%
24 Vac/Vdc ± 10%
110/120 Vac ± 10%
230/240 Vac ± 10%
24 Vac/Vdc ± 10%
110/120 Vac ± 10%
230/240 Vac ± 10%
102
102
102
Voltage levels
Weight
g
2
2
SL7 Table of Sound Types
2
Sound Type
Diagram
Repeat Rate
Continuous tone
Approx. 2800
—
—
100
Pulsed tone
Approx. 2800
Approx. 2 Hz
—
100
Continuous tone
Approx. 2800
—
—
100
Pulsed tone
Approx. 2800
Approx. 2 Hz
—
Continuous tone
2700
—
ON
Tone 01
100
2
Continuous tone
1350
—
ON
Tone 02
100
2
Pulsed tone
2700
250 ms on, 250 ms off
ON
Tone 03
100
2
Pulsed tone
1350
250 ms on, 250 ms off
ON
Tone 04
100
2
Falling
1200–500
1 Hz
ON
Tone 05
98
2
Rising
500–1200
Rising 3s, 0.5s off
ON
Tone 06
98
2
Alternating
800–1000
2 Hz
ON
Tone 07
94
2
rising/falling
500–1500
10 Hz
ON
Tone 08
94
2
SL7-AP…
Frequency (Hz)
Maximum
Volume
at 1M (dB)
DIP Switch
Position
2
SL7-AP…-E
2
SL7-AP…-M
100
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V7-T2-22
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
Stacklights
SL Series
2.1
SL4 Series
2
SL4 General Specifications
2
Description
Specification
Standards
IEC/EN 60947-5-1
Lens color
Blue, green, red, clear, yellow, orange
Number of signal elements
Max. 5 with standard base
Max. 10 with base for mounting on both sides
2
Mounting position
As required
2
2
Mechanical Ratings
Mechanical shock resistance
2
>15g according to IEC 60068-2-27
Shock duration 11 ms
Sinusoidal
2
Climate Conditions
Climatic proofing
Damp heat, constant, to IEC 60068-2-78
Damp heat, cyclic, to IEC 60069-2-30
2
Ambient temperature
–22°F to +140°F (–30°C to +60°C)
2
Environmental Ratings
2
IEC degree of protection
UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66
IEC/EN 60529
Protection type UL
Type 4/4X/13
2
Enclosure
Polycarbonate (PC), black
2
Cap
Polycarbonate (PC)
2
Solid or flexible conductor
0.2–1.5 mm2
0.25–1.5 mm2
2
Solid or flexible conductor, with ferrule
Flexible with ferrule with plastic collar
0.25–0.75 mm2
AWG 24–AWG 16
Materials
Terminal Capacity
2
2
Contacts
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp)
4000 Vac
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)
250V
Overvoltage category/pollution degree
III/3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
V7-T2-23
2.1
2
2
Stacklights
SL Series
SL4 Light Module Specifications
Unit
SL4-L…-…
SL4-BL…-…
SL4-FL…-…
SL4-FL24-…-M
SL4-L…
Type of light
Continuous light
Flashing light
Light elements
LED
LED
Strobe light
Multi-strobe light
Continuous light
LED
LED
Incandescent bulb
(max. 4W)
Mounting
—
Flashing/strobe frequency
—
—
—
—
Ba15d
2 Hz
1.4 Hz
1–2.6 Hz
Transmission angle
—
360°
360°
360°
360°
360°
A
< 0.003
< 0.003
< 0.003
< 0.003
< 0.003
24 Vac/Vdc
A
0.022–0.033
0.028–0.036
0.035–0.065
0.048–0.068
—
110/120 Vac
A
0.030
0.030
0.10
—
—
230/240 Vac
A
0.030
0.030
0.10
—
—
—
—
—
—
Maximum 4W with the
specified voltages
24 Vac/Vdc ± 10%
110/120 Vac ± 10%
230/240 Vac ± 10%
24 Vac/Vdc ± 10%
110/120 Vac ± 10%
230/240 Vac ± 10%
24 Vac/Vdc ± 10%
110/120 Vac ± 10%
230/240 Vac ± 10%
24 Vac/Vdc ± 10%
Up to 250 Vac/Vdc
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Leakage current
Current/power consumption
Power consumption
Voltage levels
Lifespan
h
100,000
100,000
100,000
100,000
100,000
Weight
g
45
45
45
45
45
SL4 Acoustic Module Specifications
2
2
Unit
SL4-AP…
Type of tone
Continuous or pulsed tone
Types of sound
Two versions, table of sound types
2
Sound setting
2
Sound pressure level adjustment
—
Sound pressure can be lowered
to a minimum of
—
Transmission angle
360°
2
2
2
2
Internal; single-pole DIP
Sound pressure
dB
Current/power consumption
24 Vac/Vdc
A
0.039
110/120 Vac
A
0.021
230/240 Vac
A
Voltage levels
2
0.021
24 Vac/Vdc ± 10%
110/120 Vac ± 10%
230/240 Vac ± 10%
2
2
80
Weight
g
43
SL4 Table of Sound Types
Sound Type
Frequency (Hz)
Repeat Rate
Maximum
Volume
at 1M (dB)
Continuous tone
Approx. 4000
—
80
Pulsed tone
Approx. 4000
Approx. 2 Hz
80
2
2
SL4-AP…
2
Diagram
2
2
2
2
V7-T2-24
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
Stacklights
SL Series
2.1
Dimensions
2
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2
SL7 Series
Complete Devices
SL7-100-L-RG-24LED
2
Light Modules
SL7-100-L-RYG-24LED
SL7-(B)(F)L…
2
2
2.40
(61.0)
2
2
2
Ø2.87 (Ø73.0)
11.61
(295.0)
14.02
(356.0)
2
Acoustic Modules
2
SL7-AP…
2
2
2.80
(71.0)
2
2
Ø2.88 (Ø73.2)
Ø2.84
(Ø72.0)
2
2
2
Ø2.84
(Ø72.0)
2
2
Ø0.22 (Ø5.5)
Ø2.13
(Ø54.0)
2
2
Ø0.22 (Ø5.5)
2
Ø2.13
(Ø54.0)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
V7-T2-25
2.1
2
2
Stacklights
SL Series
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Basic Modules
SL7-CB-T…
SL7-CB-…
SL7-CB-D
2
2
2
2
A
4.68
(119.0)
A
2
1.22
(31.0)
2
2
2
Ø0.23 (Ø5.8)
Ø2.83
(Ø72.0)
3.23 (82.0)
M20
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Catalog
Number
A
SL7-CB-T-100
7.48 (190.0)
SL7-CB-T-250
13.38 (340.0)
SL7-CB-T-400
19.29 (490.0)
3.78 (96.0)
3.31
(84.0)
Ø0.22 (Ø5.5)
Ø2.13
(Ø54.0)
Catalog
Number
A
SL7-CB-100
6.73 (171.0)
SL7-CB-250
12.64 (321.0)
SL7-CB-400
18.54 (471.0)
SL7-CB-EMH
2
3.25
(82.5)
2
2
2
Ø3.94 (Ø100.0)
2
2
2
2
2
2
Ø0.23 (Ø5.8)
Ø3.35 (Ø85.0)
2
2
V7-T2-26
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
Stacklights
SL Series
2.1
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
SL7-CB-FW
2
SL7-CB-IMS
2
2
2
3.23
(82.0)
2
4.21
(107.0)
2
Ø0.24
(Ø6.0)
M5
2.05
(52.0)
2.76 (70.0)
2
0.79
(20.0)
2
2.87 (73.0)
3.54 (90.0)
2
SL7-SWD 1
SL7-FMS-…
2
2
3.31
(84.0)
2
2
A
7.56
(192.0)
SL7-CB-IMH
2
2
2
3.23
(82.0)
2
Ø3.15
(Ø80.0)
Ø3.15
(Ø80.0)
2
2
2.87 (72.0)
2
2
Ø0.22 (Ø5.5)
Ø0.22 (Ø5.5)
Ø2.13
(Ø54.0)
Ø2.13
(Ø54.0)
Ø0.23 (Ø5.8)
Ø2.05
(Ø52.0)
Catalog
Number
A
SL7-FMS-100
7.55 (192.0)
SL7-FMS-250
13.46 (342.0)
SL7-FMS-400
19.37 (192.0)
2
2
2
2
2
Note
1 For connecting to SmartWire-DT.
2
2
2
2
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
V7-T2-27
2.1
2
2
2
Stacklights
SL Series
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
SL4 Series
Complete Devices
Light Modules
SL4-100-L-RG-24LED
SL4-100-L-RYG-24LED
SL4-(B)(F)L…
2
2
2.44
(62.0)
2
2
1.69
(43.0)
2
10.28
(261.0)
12.72
(323.0)
2
Acoustic Modules
SL4-AP…
2
2
2.80
(71.0)
2
2
2
Ø2.84
(Ø72.0)
1.73
(44.0)
2
Ø2.84
(Ø72.0)
2
2
2
2
Ø0.22 (Ø5.5)
Ø2.13
(Ø54.0)
Ø0.22 (Ø5.5)
2
Ø2.13
(Ø54.0)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V7-T2-28
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
Stacklights
SL Series
2.1
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2
Basic Modules
SL4-PIB-T…
SL4-PIB-…
2
SL4-PIB-D
2
2
2
A
3.82
(97.0)
A
2
1.38
(35.0)
2
2
Ø0.23 (Ø5.9)
Ø2.83
(Ø72.0)
2
1.77 (45.0)
M20
2
Catalog
Number
A
SL4-PIB-T-100
5.90 (150.0)
SL4-PIB-T-250
11.81 (300.0)
SL4-PIB-T-400
17.72 (450.0)
2
2.21
(56.0)
2
2
Ø0.22 (Ø5.5)
Ø2.13
(Ø54.0)
2.44 (62.0)
Catalog
Number
A
SL4-PIB-100
3.53 (136.0)
SL4-PIB-250
11.26 (286.0)
SL4-PIB-400
17.16 (436.0)
2
2
SL4-PIB-EMH
2
2
2.24
(57.0)
2
2
Ø2.72 (Ø69.0)
2
2
2
2
2
2
Ø0.23 (Ø5.8)
Ø2.13
(Ø54.0)
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
V7-T2-29
2.1
2
Stacklights
SL Series
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
SL4-PIB-FW
SL4-PIB-IMS
2
2
2
2.24
(57.0)
3.15
(80.0)
2
Ø0.23
(Ø5.8)
2
M5
0.83 (21.0)
0.87 (22.0)
2
1.77 (45.0)
2
1.69 (43.0)
SL4-SWD 1
SL4-FMS-…
2
2.21
(56.0)
2
2
2
2
2.56
(65.0)
A
6.18
(157.0)
SL4-PIB-IMH
2
2
2.24
(57.0)
2
2
Ø3.15
(Ø80.0)
Ø3.15
(Ø80.0)
1.34 (43.0)
2
2
2
Ø0.22 (Ø5.5)
2
Ø0.23 (Ø5.8)
Ø0.87 (Ø22.0)
2
2
2
Ø0.22 (Ø5.5)
Ø2.13
(Ø54.0)
Ø2.13
(Ø54.0)
Catalog
Number
A
SL4-FMS-100
6.18 (157.0)
SL4-FMS-250
12.09 (307.0)
SL4-FMS-400
17.99 (457.0)
Note
1 For connecting to SmartWire-DT.
2
2
2
2
2
2
V7-T2-30
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
Stacklights
SL Series
2.1
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2
Mounting Brackets
Incandescent Bulbs
SL7/4-FW
SL7-L12 and SL4-L12
2
2
Ø0.25 (Ø6.4)
1.38
(35.0)
1.81
(46.0)
1.97
(50.0)
2.83 (72.0)
2
Ø0.51 (Ø13.0)
2
Ø0.60 (Ø15.3)
2
3.58 (91.0)
0.67 (17.0)
2
2
Ø0.64 (Ø16.2)
2
2
Tool for Replacing Incandescent Bulb
SL7/4-BET
Ø0.22 (Ø5.5)
2
2
Ø2.13
(Ø54.0)
2.97
(75.5)
SL7/4-FW-T
2
0.94 (24.0)
2.56
(65.0) 2.76
(70.0)
2
2.13
(54.0)
Ø0.47 (Ø12.0)
Ø0.79 (Ø20.0)
2
2
2
1.73
(44.0)
2
1.38 (35.0)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
V7-T2-31
2.2
2
Stacklights
E26 Series
Contents
Stacklights—E26 Series
Description
2
Page
E26 Series
Product Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
2
2
V7-T2-33
V7-T2-34
V7-T2-35
V7-T2-40
V7-T2-41
V7-T2-42
V7-T2-43
V7-T2-44
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Product Description
Features
The E26 stacklight unit is a
modular system that provides
illuminated and audible status
indication in all directions.
Easily assembled plug-in
modular units include
constant, flashing and strobe
light units, as well as monotonal, bi-tonal, intermittent
audible alarms. Stacklights
may be assembled in a
variety of configurations,
which are identified in the
Maximum Configurations
table on Page V7-T2-33.
Several lamp, color and
mounting options further
enhance the stacklight’s
versatility.
●
2
●
●
●
Modular construction
Six lens colors
Variety of lamp types and
voltages
Mono-tonal, bi-tonal and
intermittent audible alarms
Benefits
●
●
●
●
Combination of visible and
audible alarms
Modular components
reduce inventory
requirements, increase
flexibility
Steady and flashing modes
allow one light to signal
multiple conditions
No-tools assembly permits
easy lamp replacement
Standards and
Certifications
●
●
●
CE 60947-5-1
UL 508—File No. E131568
cUL C22.2 No. 14—File
No. E131568
Ingress Protection
●
Stacklight base and light
units: IP65, NEMA 4, 4X
and 13
●
Alarm units: IP20, NEMA 1
Electrical Shock Protection
●
Stacklight base and light
unit: IP2X
●
Alarm units: IP0X
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V7-T2-32
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
2.2
Stacklights
E26 Series
Product Identification
2
Complete Stacklight Modules
●
Level
3
Level
2
Standard Stacklight Base
For use with incandescent or
standard LEDs for steady,
non-flashing illumination or
with flashing LEDs for
flashing illumination. Bases
include terminal block for
wiring, stacklight cover and
gasket. See Page V7-T2-38.
Flashing Stacklight Base
Allows configuration of each
light in the stack for either
steady or 60 times per
minute flashing illumination.
Flashing circuit for use with
incandescent lamps only.
(Maximum allowable number
of light modules is 2 at 12V, 4
at 24V and 6 at 48V and
above.) See Page V7-T2-38.
For flashing LEDs use
standard base with flashing
LED light module.
Level
1
Xenon Strobe
Sets are similar to standard
lens/diffuser units, except
each set consists of two lens
units. The lower unit includes
the electronics and is
permanently fused to the
upper unit which contains the
Xenon lamp. Xenon units may
be placed in any position in a
complete stacklight unit.
They will flash 60 times per
minute when used with a
standard or flashing base.
See Page V7-T2-36.
Alarms
●
Stacklight
Base
Stacklights accept a
maximum of six
incandescent or LED light
modules or two Xenon
Flasher modules and can
be mounted in any position
on the stack.
Alarm units are mounted in
the top most position only.
2
2
2
2
2
2
Extension
Tube
2
Mounting
Base
2
2
2
Maximum Configurations
Incandescent
or
LED Modules
Xenon
Modules
Alarm
Modules
Max. Number
of Modules
6
—
—
6
5
—
1
6
4
1
—
5
3
1
1
5
2
2
—
4
1
2
1
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
May be fitted to the top of a
complete stacklight unit or
directly to the stacklight
bases, if desired. Available in
three versions, each with
adjustable sound levels. See
Page V7-T2-39.
2
2
2
2
2
Light Modules
2
Available in a variety of colors
for both incandescent lamps
and LED lamps. To maximize
illumination and light dispersion,
incandescent units include an
opal white diffuser while LED
diffusers are clear. See Page
V7-T2-36.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
V7-T2-33
2.2
2
2
Stacklights
E26 Series
Catalog Number Selection
Stacklight Catalog Numbering System
E26X 9 KM L 39R W – V 4
2
2
Mounting Base 1
Description
Code
2
W
4
8
9
2
None (base mount)
3/4 in NPT hub, chrome
Standard three-hole
Standard four-hole
2
2
Code
2
W
HM
JM
KM
MM
2
2
HU
JU
KU
MU
RU
2
2
Extension Tube 5
Description
None (base mount)
Gray Aluminum
20 mm 3/4 in NPT
160 mm 3/4 in NPT
360 mm 3/4 in NPT
760 mm 3/4 in NPT
Black Aluminum
20 mm 3/4 in NPT
160 mm 3/4 in NPT
360 mm 3/4 in NPT
760 mm 3/4 in NPT
Right angle 3/4 in NPT
2
Code
2
L
F
2
Component
Catalog No.
—
E26S104
E26S108
E26S109
Code
W
Q
N
P
Component
Catalog No.
—
E26BHM
E26BJM
E26BKM
E26BMM
E26BHU
E26BJU
E26BKU
E26BMU
E26BRU
Stacklight Base
Description
Component
Catalog No. 2
Standard
E26BL
E26BF_
Flashing 6
M
E
U
V
K
Z
X0
X2
X3
X4
X6
X9
2
2
2
2
None
Mono-tonal
Bi-tonal
Intermittent
Code
V1
V2
V3
V4
V5 4
Component
Catalog No. 2
—
E26BQ_
E26BN_
E26BP_
Light Module
Description
Code
0
2
3
4
6
9
W
R
G
Y
B
A
W1
R1
G1
Y1
B1
A1
Alarm
Description
Voltage 3
Description
12V
24V
48V
120V
240V
Component
Catalog No. 2
E26B0_
E26B2_
E26B3_
E26B4_
E26B6_
E26B9_
E26BW_
E26BR_
E26BG_
E26BY_
E26BB_
E26BA_
E26BW1_
E26BR1_
E26BG1_
E26BY1_
E26BB1_
E26BA1_
Clear incandescent
Red incandescent
Green incandescent
Yellow incandescent
Blue incandescent
Amber incandescent
White cluster LED with clear lens
Red cluster LED with red lens
Green cluster LED with green lens
Yellow cluster LED with yellow lens
Blue cluster LED with blue lens
Amber cluster LED with amber lens
White cylindrical LED with clear lens 4
Red cylindrical LED with red lens 4
Green cylindrical LED with green lens 4
Yellow cylindrical LED with yellow lens 4
Blue cylindrical LED with blue lens 4
Amber cylindrical LED with amber lens 4
Flashing white cluster LED with clear lens
Flashing red cluster LED with red lens
Flashing green cluster LED with green lens
Flashing yellow cluster LED with yellow lens
Flashing blue cluster LED with blue lens
Flashing amber cluster LED with amber lens
Xenon flasher with clear lens
Xenon flasher with red lens
Xenon flasher with green lens
Xenon flasher with yellow lens
Xenon flasher with blue lens
Xenon flasher with amber lens
E26BM_
E26BE_
E26BU_
E26BV_
E26BK_
E26BZ_
E26BX0_
E26BX2_
E26BX3_
E26BX4_
E26BX6_
E26BX9_
2
2
2
Voltage Codes
Voltage Code
Incandescent Lamp
Cluster LED
Cylindrical LED
Xenon Flasher
Flasher Base/Alarm
(Blank)
No lamp supplied
No LED supplied
No LED supplied
—
—
2
V1
12 Vac/Vdc
12 Vac/Vdc
12 Vac/Vdc
12 Vac/Vdc
12 Vac/Vdc
V2
24 Vac/Vdc
24 Vac/Vdc
24 Vac/Vdc
24 Vac/Vdc
24 Vac/Vdc
2
V3
48 Vac/Vdc
48 Vac/Vdc
48 Vac/Vdc
48 Vac/Vdc
48 Vac/Vdc
V4
120 Vac/Vdc
120 Vac
120 Vac
120 Vac
120 Vac/Vdc
V5
240 Vac/Vdc
240 Vac
—
240 Vac
240 Vac/Vdc
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Unless base mount is specified, an extension tube must be selected for a complete unit.
2 Component catalog numbers for flashing bases, alarm units and light modules are incomplete and require the addition of a suffix code to specify the required voltage rating. See table above.
3 If no voltage is specified, assembled stacklight will be supplied without lamps or LEDs.
4 240V not available for cylindrical LEDs.
5 For complete length (extension tube and base), see Page V7-T2-39.
6 Flashing base is for use with incandescent lamps.
2
V7-T2-34
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
2.2
Stacklights
E26 Series
Product Selection
2
Assembled Units
2
One-, Two- and Three-Light Assembled Stacklights
●
Base mountable
●
Incandescent or LED versions
●
24V and 120V versions
2
2
2
One-Light Unit Stacklight
Volts
AC/DC
Alarm
First Level
Color
Illumination Type
Catalog Number
24V
None
Red
Incandescent—steady
E26XWWL2W-V2
24V
None
Red
Cylindrical LED—steady
E26XWWLR1W-V2
24V
None
Green
Incandescent—steady
E26XWWL3W-V2
24V
None
Green
Cylindrical LED—steady
E26XWWLG1W-V2
24V
None
Amber
Incandescent—steady
E26XWWL9W-V2
24V
None
Amber
Cylindrical LED—steady
E26XWWLA1W-V2
120V
None
Red
Incandescent—steady
E26XWWL2W-V4
120V 1
None
Red
Cylindrical LED—steady
E26XWWLR1W-V4
120V
None
Green
Incandescent—steady
E26XWWL3W-V4
120V 1
None
Green
Cylindrical LED—steady
E26XWWLG1W-V4
120V
None
Amber
Incandescent—steady
E26XWWL9W-V4
120V 1
None
Amber
Cylindrical LED—steady
E26XWWLA1W-V4
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Two-Light Unit Stacklight
Volts
AC/DC
Alarm
First Level
Color
24V
None
Green
24V
None
Green
120V
None
Green
120V 1
None
Green
2
Illumination Type
Second Level
Color
Illumination Type
Catalog Number
Incandescent—steady
Red
Incandescent—steady
E26XWWL32W-V2
Cylindrical LED—steady
Red
Cylindrical LED—steady
E26XWWLG1R1W-V2
Incandescent—steady
Red
Incandescent—steady
E26XWWL32W-V4
Cylindrical LED—steady
Red
Cylindrical LED—steady
E26XWWLG1R1W-V4
2
2
2
2
Three-Light Unit Stacklight
Volts
AC/DC
24V
24V
Alarm
First
Level
Color
None
Green
None
Green
Illumination Type
Second
Level
Color
Incandescent—steady
Amber
Cylindrical LED—steady
Amber
2
Illumination Type
Third
Level
Color
Illumination Type
Catalog Number
Incandescent—steady
Red
Incandescent—steady
E26XWWL392W-V2
Cylindrical LED—steady
Red
Cylindrical LED—steady
E26XWWLG1A1R1W-V2
2
120V
None
Green
Incandescent—steady
Amber
Incandescent—steady
Red
Incandescent—steady
E26XWWL392W-V4
120V 1
None
Green
Cylindrical LED—steady
Amber
Cylindrical LED—steady
Red
Cylindrical LED—steady
E26XWWLG1A1R1W-V4
2
2
2
Note
1 LED modules have very low current draw and should not be used with triac output devices like PLC triac output modules.
It is recommended that dry contact outputs be used to switch 120 Vac modules.
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
V7-T2-35
2.2
2
2
Light modules include lens
diffusers which provide
even illumination and
eliminate hot spots.
2
Light/LED Module
2
Without bulb
or LED
2
Xenon Strobe Module
2
2
12 Vac/Vdc
2
2
2
24 Vac/Vdc
2
2
2
48 Vac/Vdc
2
2
2
2
120 Vac 2
2
2
2
240 Vac
2
2
2
2
●
Xenon strobes emit a
bright attention-getting
white flashing light. Flash
rate = 60/min.
●
Xenon strobe modules
occupy two positions in the
stacklight assembly.
Light and Xenon Strobe Modules 1
LED/Lamp
Voltage
2
2
E26 Series
Light and Xenon Strobe Modules
●
2
Stacklights
2
Incandescent
Cylindrical LED
Cluster LED
Cluster LED
Xenon
Lens Color
Steady or Flashing
Catalog Number
Steady Only
Catalog Number
Steady
Catalog Number
Flashing
Catalog Number
Flashing
Catalog Number
Red
E26B2
E26B
E26BR
E26BR
—
Green
E26B3
E26BG
E26BG
E26BG
—
Yellow
E26B4
E26BY
E26BY
E26BY
—
Blue
E26B6
E26BB
E26BB
E26BB
—
Amber
E26B9
E26BA
E26BA
E26BA
—
Clear
E26B0
E26BW
E26BW
E26BW
—
Red
E26B2V1
E26BR1V1
E26BRV1
E26BEV1
E26BX2V1
Green
E26B3V1
E26BG1V1
E26BGV1
E26BUV1
E26BX3V1
Yellow
E26B4V1
E26BY1V1
E26BYV1
E26BVV1
E26BX4V1
Blue
E26B6V1
E26BB1V1
E26BBV1
E26BKV1
E26BX6V1
Amber
E26B9V1
E26BA1V1
E26BAV1
E26BZV1
E26BX9V1
Clear
E26B0V1
E26BW1V1
E26BWV1
E26BMV1
E26BX0V1
Red
E26B2V2
E26BR1V2
E26BRV2
E26BEV2
E26BX2V2
Green
E26B3V2
E26BG1V2
E26BGV2
E26BUV2
E26BX3V2
Yellow
E26B4V2
E26BY1V2
E26BYV2
E26BVV2
E26BX4V2
Blue
E26B6V2
E26BB1V2
E26BBV2
E26BKV2
E26BX6V2
Amber
E26B9V2
E26BA1V2
E26BAV2
E26BZV2
E26BX9V2
Clear
E26B0V2
E26BW1V2
E26BWV2
E26BMV2
E26BX0V2
Red
E26B2V3
E26BR1V3
E26BRV3
E26BEV3
E26BX2V3
Green
E26B3V3
E26BG1V3
E26BGV3
E26BUV3
E26BX3V3
Yellow
E26B4V3
E26BY1V3
E26BYV3
E26BVV3
E26BX4V3
Blue
E26B6V3
E26BB1V3
E26BBV3
E26BKV3
E26BX6V3
Amber
E26B9V3
E26BA1V3
E26BAV3
E26BZV3
E26BX9V3
Clear
E26B0V3
E26BW1V3
E26BWV3
E26BMV3
E26BX0V3
Red
E26B2V4
E26BR1V4
E26BRV4
E26BEV4
E26BX2V4
Green
E26B3V4
E26BG1V4
E26BGV4
E26BUV4
E26BX3V4
Yellow
E26B4V4
E26BY1V4
E26BYV4
E26BVV4
E26BX4V4
Blue
E26B6V4
E26BB1V4
E26BBV4
E26BKV4
E26BX6V4
Amber
E26B9V4
E26BA1V4
E26BAV4
E26BZV4
E26BX9V4
Clear
E26B0V4
E26BW1V4
E26BWV4
E26BMV4
E26BX0V4
Red
E26B2V5
—
E26BRV5
E26BEV5
E26BX2V5
Green
E26B3V5
—
E26BGV5
E26BUV5
E26BX3V5
Yellow
E26B4V5
—
E26BYV5
E26BVV5
E26BX4V5
Blue
E26B6V5
—
E26BBV5
E26BKV5
E26BX6V5
Amber
E26B9V5
—
E26BAV5
E26BZV5
E26BX9V5
Clear
E26B0V5
—
E26BWV5
E26BMV5
E26BX0V5
Notes
1 Include lens, diffusers and lamps unless otherwise noted.
2 Incandescent bulbs are AC/DC rated, LEDs are AC rated only.
2
2
2
V7-T2-36
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
Stacklights
E26 Series
2.2
LEDs—Cylindrical or Cluster
Cylindrical
Stacklight LED
2
Cylindrical or Cluster LEDs
Cylindrical LED
Cluster LED
Cluster LED
2
Voltage
Color
Steady Only
Catalog Number
Steady
Catalog Number
Flashing
Catalog Number
2
12 Vac/Vdc
Red
E26S110
E26S15
E26S48
Green
E26S114
E26S19
E26S53
2
Yellow
E26S112
E26S23
E26S58
Blue
E26S115
E26S27
E26S63
White
E26S116
E26S71
E26S75
Amber
E26S111
E26S79
E26S84
Red
E26S117
E26S16
E26S49
Green
E26S121
E26S20
E26S54
Yellow
E26S119
E26S24
E26S59
Blue
E26S122
E26S28
E26S64
White
E26S123
E26S72
E26S76
Cluster LED
24 Vac/Vdc
48 Vac/Vdc
120 Vac/Vdc
240 Vac/Vdc
Amber
E26S118
E26S80
E26S85
Red
E26S124
E26S17
E26S50
Green
E26S128
E26S21
E26S55
Yellow
E26S126
E26S25
E26S60
Blue
E26S129
E26S29
E26S65
White
E26S130
E26S73
E26S77
Amber
E26S125
E26S81
E26S86
Red
E26S138
E26S18
E26S51
Green
E26S142
E26S22
E26S56
Yellow
E26S140
E26S26
E26S61
Blue
E26S143
E26S30
E26S66
White
—
E26S74
E26S78
Amber
E26S139
E26S82
E26S87
Red
—
E26S44
E26S52
Green
—
E26S45
E26S57
Yellow
—
E26S46
E26S62
Blue
—
E26S47
E26S67
White
—
E26S101
E26S102
Amber
—
E26S83
E26S88
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
V7-T2-37
2.2
2
Stacklights
E26 Series
Mounting Bases Components
Standard Base
Flashing Base
2
2
C
or
5
2
2
or
4
3
or
2
1
or
- C
2
Factory
Wiring
or
Field
Wiring
- C
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
Flashing
Circuit
8
External
Switching
Devices
Supply
7
Description
Steady
Circuit
9 10
Flashing
Orange Module
Wire
Voltage
Catalog Number
12 Vac/Vdc to 240 Vac/Vdc
E26BL
Standard Base
Flashing Base
12 Vdc
E26BFV1
24 Vac/Vdc
E26BFV2
2
48 Vac/Vdc
E26BFV3
120 Vac/Vdc
E26BFV4
2
240 Vac/Vdc
E26BFV5
Enables configuration of incandescent light modules for steady or flashing operation
Voltage
Catalog Number
2
2
2
Flasher
Max. Allowable
No. of Light
Modules
12 Vdc
2
24 Vac/Vdc
4
48 Vac/Vdc
6
120 Vac/Vdc
6
240 Vac/Vdc
6
Flasher
Base Voltage
6
For use with steady incandescent or steady/flashing LED
2
9 10
Orange Flasher
Wire
External
Switching
Devices
Supply
2
2
7 8
2
2
2
or
1
2
2
1 2 3 4 5 6
2
2
2
C
1 2
3
2
2
1 2
or
5
1 2 3 4 5 6
2
4
or
6
2
2
1 2
2
or
6
Mounting Bases and Hubs
Description
Standard Three-Hole
Mounting Base
Mounting Base
Standard three-hole mounting base
—
E26S108
Standard Four-Hole
Mounting Base
Standard four-hole mounting base
—
E26S109
Myers Type Hub
Myers Type Hub
—
E26S104
2
2
2
2
2
3/4 in NPT threaded hub
2
2
Notes
1 Audible alarm units must be wired via the steady circuit on flashing base units.
2 Audible alarm units can be wired in positions as shown but only one unit is permitted on each stack and unit must occupy
the last or top mounting position.
2
2
V7-T2-38
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
Stacklights
E26 Series
2.2
Alarm Units and Extension Tubes Components
2
Audible Alarm Units-NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
E26B_
Description
1
2
Voltage
Catalog Number
12 Vac/Vdc
E26BQV1
12.6 mA
24 Vac/Vdc
E26BQV2
9.4 mA
48 Vac/Vdc
E26BQV3
11.5 mA
120 Vac/Vdc
E26BQV4
5.1 mA
240 Vac/Vdc
E26BQV5
2
4.5 mA
12 Vac/Vdc
E26BNV1
2
12.6 mA
24 Vac/Vdc
E26BNV2
9.4 mA
48 Vac/Vdc
E26BNV3
11.5 mA
120 Vac/Vdc
E26BNV4
5.1 mA
240 Vac/Vdc
E26BNV5
12 Vac/Vdc
E26BPV1
12.6 mA
24 Vac/Vdc
E26BPV2
9.4 mA
48 Vac/Vdc
E26BPV3
11.5 mA
120 Vac/Vdc
E26BPV4
5.1 mA
240 Vac/Vdc
E26BPV5
2
Mono-Tonal
4.5 mA
2
2
Bi-Tonal
2
2
2
Intermittent
4.5 mA
2
2
2
2
Extension Tubes
Voltage
Catalog Number
2
0.79 in (20 mm) extension
—
E26BHM
2
6.30 in (160 mm) extension
—
E26BJM
14.17 in (360 mm) extension
—
E26BKM
29.92 in (760 mm) extension
—
E26BMM
2
0.79 in (20 mm) extension
—
E26BHU
2
6.30 in (160 mm) extension
—
E26BJU
14.17 in (360 mm) extension
—
E26BKU
29.92 in (760 mm) extension
—
E26BMU
Right angle extension tube
—
E26BRU
Description
Extension Tube
A
Extension Tube
A
E26BRU
Extension “A”
2
2
Extension “A” 3
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Volume adjustment range: 64 dB to 90 dB typical current draw (mA).
2 For use with standard mounting base or 3/4 in NPT threaded hub—gray aluminum.
3 For use with standard mounting base or 3/4 in NPT threaded hub—black aluminum.
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
V7-T2-39
2.2
Stacklights
E26 Series
2
Replacement Parts
2
Stacklight Replacement Parts
2
Description
Notes
Replacement
cover
Normally included with
stacklight base
1
E26S68
Replacement
lens O-ring
Normally included with light
modules
2
E26S106 1
Replacement lenses
Clear
3
E26S38
2
2
Typical Stacklight Assemblies
Number in
Diagram
Catalog Number
2
Red
E26S39
Green
E26S40
2
Yellow
E26S41
Blue
E26S42
2
2
Amber
Replacement Xenon
strobe dual high
(does not include lenses)
2
2
2
Replacement diffusers
E26S34
48 Vac/Vdc
E26S35
120 Vac
E26S36
2
2
12V
4
Light
Diffuser
Lamp 5
E26S31
Terminal
Board
E26S32
5
E26S8
24V
E26S9
48V
E26S10
120V
E26S11
240V
E26S12
2
Replacement extension
tube O-rings
Normally included with
extension tubes
6
E26S107
2
Replacement mounting
gasket 4
Normally included with
stacklight base
7
E26S105
Lamp removal tool
For E26 and E22
incandescent lamps
2
Lens 3
E26S37
4
Clear — normally supplied
with LED light modules
Replacement lamps 2
2 O-Ring
E26S33
24 Vac/Vdc
White — normally supplied
with incandescent light
modules
Alarm
E26S43
4
240 Vac
2
2
12 Vac/Vdc
1 Cover
O-Ring 2
3
E22BA3
Set Screw
Recommended
Tightening
Torque
Is 7 in-lb
(0.79 Nm)
7
Mounting
Gasket
Stacklight
Base
O-Rings 6
Extension
Tube
2
2
Mounting
Base
2
Typical Stacklight Assembly
(Exploded View)
2
2
2
Panel
2
Myers Type
ST-2 or
ST-2CP Hub
2
Alternate Conduit Hub
2
2
2
Notes
1 Sold in packages of 5 pieces.
2 For replacement LEDs, see table on Page V7-T2-37.
3 Sold in packages of 10 pieces.
4 Mounting gaskets have two sets of mounting holes—one set with center-to-center spacing of
1.75 in (44.5 mm) and another set with center-to-center spacing of 1.65 in (42 mm).
V7-T2-40
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
Stacklights
E26 Series
2.2
Technical Data and Specifications
2
General Specifications
Description
2
Specification
Mechanical Ratings
Shock (IEC 68-2-27)
2
11 ms, 15g
Vibration (IEC 68-2-6)
10 sweeps 10–150 Hz, 2g
Bump (IEC 68-2-29)
1000 pulses, 6 ms, 15g
2
2
Climate Conditions
Operating
Maximum 104°F (40°C) at 95% RH,
Temperature –4° to 140°F (–20° to 60°C)
Storage
Temperature –40° to 176°F (–40° to 80°C)
2
2
Materials
Cover
Polycarbonate
Lenses
Polycarbonate
Stacklight base
Nylon
Extension tubes
Aluminum
Mounting base
Zinc die cast
2
Single conductor
14–30 AWG (2.5–0.05 mm2)
2
Two conductors (same size))
18–26 AWG (0.75–0.14 mm2)
Do not mix solid and stranded wire in the same terminal
2
Recommended tightening torque
4.4–5.3 lb-in (0.5–0.6 Nm)
2
Insulation voltage (Ui)
690V
2
Operational voltage (Ue)
250V
Impulse withstand voltage (Uimp)
1.5 kV
2
Incandescent lamp type
BA15d
2
Maximum lamp wattage
6W
2
Incandescent
7,000 to 12,000 hrs. (based on voltage)
2
Xenon flasher
20,000 hrs.
LED
60,000 to 100,000 hrs. (based on colors)
2
2
Terminals
Electrical Ratings
Bulb Specifications
Bulbs—average life
2
LED/Incandescent Comparison
Incandescent lamps
Average operating life of 7,000 hours
Each lamp can be used with any color lens
Low cost results in short term savings
LED lamps
Average operating life of 60,000 to 100,000 hours
Low power consumption
Extended life results in long-term savings
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
V7-T2-41
2.2
2
Stacklights
E26 Series
Ratings
2
Published theoretical lamp lives are based on ideal laboratory
conditions and should be used for comparison only.
Actual life may be shorter due to various application conditions.
2
Stacklight Incandescent Application Data
2
Type
of Light
Lamp
Used
Approximate Current,
mA per Light
Theoretical Lamp Life,
Hours as Applied
2
12V
BA15d
417
7,000
24V
BA15d
208
7,000
48V
BA15d
104
7,000
110–140V
BA15d
36–50
7,000
220–260V
BA15d
23–27
12,000
2
2
2
Xenon Flasher Application Data
2
Type
of Light
2
12V
2
24V
2
48V
Lamp
Used
Approximate Current,
mA per Light
LED Application Data
Type of
Light
Color
Cluster LED
Approximate
Current, mA
at Rated Volts
Cylindrical LED
Approximate
Current, mA
at Rated Volts
Theoretical
Lamp Life,
Hours as Applied
Continuous/Flashing Stacklight LED
12
Vac/Vdc
Theoretical Lamp Life,
Hours as Applied
24
Vac/Vdc
Red
92
92
100,000
Amber
92
92
100,000
Yellow
92
92
100,000
Green
60
60
80,000
60,000
Blue
60
60
White
60
60
60,000
Red
47
47
100,000
100,000
DC
460 mA
20,000
AC
780 mA
20,000
Amber
47
47
20,000
Yellow
47
47
100,000
Green
59
59
80,000
60,000
DC
190 mA
AC
320 mA
20,000
DC
100 mA
20,000
Blue
59
59
AC
150 mA
20,000
White
59
59
60,000
Red
25
25
100,000
Amber
25
25
100,000
Yellow
25
25
100,000
2
Green
18
18
80,000
Blue
31
31
60,000
2
White
31
31
60,000
Red
25
25
100,000
Amber
25
25
100,000
Yellow
25
25
100,000
Green
18
18
80,000
60,000
2
2
1
20,000
20,000
120V
AC
60 mA
240V
AC
30 mA 1
48
Vac/Vdc
60
Vac/Vdc
2
2
2
2
120
Vac/Vdc
2
Blue
17
17
White
17
17
60,000
Red
24
24
100,000
Amber
24
24
100,000
Yellow
24
24
100,000
2
Green
17
17
80,000
Blue
16
16
60,000
2
White
16
16
60,000
Note
1 Represents average current draw, 1.6A peak for 120V and 0.8A peak at 240V.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V7-T2-42
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
Stacklights
E26 Series
2.2
Mounting Instructions
Stacklight bases may be
mounted without the use of
an extension tube or
mounting base. If additional
height is required, choose
Base Mounting
Customer
Supplied
0.8–30 in (20–760 mm)
extension tubes that fit
between the mounting base
and stacklight base. The
extension tubes are threaded
with 3/4 in NPT threads,
allowing for direct connection
to conduit fittings or threaded
holes without the use of a
mounting base.
Utilizing Extension Tube
and Mounting Base
Utilizing Extension Tube
and 3/4 In (19.1 mm)
Conduit Hub
Set Screw
Recommended
Tightening Torque
Is 7 in-lb
(0.79 Nm)
Set Screw
Recommended
Tightening Torque
Is 7 in-lb
(0.79 Nm)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Stacklight
Base
Stacklight
Base
Mounting
Gasket
Panel
Stacklight
Base
O-Rings
O-Rings
Extension
Tube
Extension
Tube
Mounting
Base
Myers Type
ST-2 or
ST-2CP Hub
Mounting
Gasket
Customer
Supplied
2
2
2
2
2
2
Panel
2
Panel
2
2
(Use Rubber-Jawed Pliers for
Installation to Avoid Scratching
the Black Anodized Coating)
2
2
Mounting Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Base Mounting
0.18 (4.6) Dia.
or #8–32 Thread
or (M4 x 0.7)
2
Three-Hole Mounting for
E26S108
Four-Hole Mounting for
E26S109
1.06 Dia.
(27)
2.12 (53.8)
Dia.
1.92 (48.8)
Dia.
2
2
0.87
(22.1)
Dia.
0.87
(22.1)
Dia.
0.87 Dia.
(22.1)
Conduit Hub for E26S104—
3/4 In (19.1 mm)
2
2
2
1.75 (44.5)
or 1.65 (42.0) a
90°
120°
0.18 (4.6) Dia.
or #8–32 Thread
or (M4 x 0.7)
2
0.20 (5.08) Dia.
or #10–32 Thread
or (M5 x 0.7)
2
2
Note
1 Stacklight base and gasket are supplied as standard with two sets of base mount holes.
One set with center-to-center spacing of 1.75 in (44.5 mm) and another set with center-to-center spacing of 1.65 in (42 mm).
2
2
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
V7-T2-43
2.2
2
Stacklights
E26 Series
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2
2
Standard and Flashing Bases 1
Assembled Extension Tubes
2
2
1.75
(44)
2
2
2
2
2
2.32
(59)
A
Alarm Units
2.56
(65)
2
0.59
(15)
2
1.69
(42.9)
2
Tube Extension
Height A
0.79 (20)
1.77 (45)
6.30 (160)
7.28 (185)
14.17 (360)
15.16 (385)
29.92 (760)
30.91 (785)
Right Angle Extension Tubes
2
2
2.00
(50.8)
2
2
2.50
(63.5)
2
2
2
Notes
1 Bases also suitable for mounting with extension tubes listed on Page V7-T2-39.
2 Mounting gasket and cover are supplied as standard with stacklight bases.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V7-T2-44
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
Stacklights
E26 Series
2.2
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2
One-Light Unit Stacklight
Standard
2
With Alarm
With Xenon Flasher
2
2.56 (65)
2.56 (65)
2.56 (65)
0.59 (15)
0.59 (15)
2.72 (69)
2.24 (57)
2
2.72 (69)
Light
Unit
2.72 (69)
1.73 (44)
2
Alarm
Xenon
Light
Unit
(2 High)
Light
Unit
2
2
2.72 (69)
Base
1.73 (44)
2
Base
1.73 (44)
Base
2
2
Two-Light Unit Stacklight
Standard
2
With Alarm
2.56 (65)
2.56 (65)
Light
Unit
2.24 (57)
2
Xenon
Light
Unit
(2 High)
Light
Unit
Light
Unit
2
2
2.72 (69)
2.72 (69)
1.73 (44)
2
Alarm
2.72 (69)
2.72 (69)
2.72 (69)
2
2.56 (65)
0.59 (15)
0.59 (15)
2.72 (69)
With Xenon Flasher
2
Light
Unit
Base
1.73 (44)
2.72 (69)
Light
Unit
1.73 (44)
Base
2
Base
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
V7-T2-45
2.2
2
2
Stacklights
E26 Series
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Three-Light Unit Stacklight
Standard
2
2.56 (65)
2
0.59 (15)
2
2.72 (69)
2
2.56 (65)
2.24 (57)
Light
Unit
2.56 (65)
2.72 (69)
Light
Unit
2.72 (69)
Light
Unit
1.73 (44)
Base
Alarm
2.72 (69)
Light
Unit
Xenon
Light
Unit
(2 High)
2.72 (69)
2.72 (69)
2
2
With Xenon Flasher
0.59 (15)
2.72 (69)
2
2
With Alarm
2.72 (69)
1.73 (44)
2
Light
Unit
2.72 (69)
Light
Unit
2.72 (69)
Light
Unit
1.73 (44)
Base
Light
Unit
Base
2
2
2
2
Light Modules
Standard
a
Xenon
2.56 (65)
a
2
0.59 (15)
0.59 (15)
2
2.72 (69.1)
2.72 (69.1)
2.56 (65)
2
2.72 (69.1)
2
2
2
Note
1 Cover included with stacklight base.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V7-T2-46
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
Control Relays and Timers
easyRelay Programmable Relays
3.1
Relay Products
Control Relays and Timers Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2
V7-T3-2
3
XR Series Terminal Block Relays
Standard, OptoCoupler and High Current
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3
3
V7-T3-3
3
Programmable Relays
easy500, easy700, easy800, easy802/806 Relays and
MFD-Titan Multi-Function Displays
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D1 Series General Purpose Relay
3.4
3
V7-T3-19
3.5
V7-T3-49
9575H Series 3000 Relay
3.6
V7-T3-118
D93, D96 and D99 Series
V7-T3-122
D96 Series Solid-State Relay
3.7
D15, BF/BFD, AR/ARD and D26 Series
3.8
3
V7-T3-141
Timing Relays
3.9
V7-T3-167
Alternating Relays
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.10
V7-T3-188
Safety Relays
3.11
V7-T3-193
easySafety
3
3
ES4P Series
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
3
ESR5 Series
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
3
D85 Series
Universal TR Series Timing Relay
3
3
Universal TR, TR and TMR Series
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
3
Machine Tool Relays
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
3
Solid-State Relays
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
3
General Purpose Open Style Relays
9575H Series 3000—Type AA, AC and DC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
3
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
General Purpose Relays—D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D7, D8 and D9 Series
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
V7-T3-199
3
3
Safety Relay
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-1
3.1
3
Control Relays and Timers
Relay Product Overview
Contents
Relay Products
Description
3
Page
Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programmable Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Purpose Plug-In Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Purpose Type AA Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Solid-State Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Machine Tool Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timing Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alternating Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-3
V7-T3-19
V7-T3-49
V7-T3-118
V7-T3-122
V7-T3-141
V7-T3-167
V7-T3-188
V7-T3-193
3
3
3
3
3
Control Relays and Timers Comparison
3
Selection Guide by Catalog Number Prefix
Relays
Type
Mounting
Contacts
Maximum
Amperage
(AC)
9575H3
General purpose
Panel mount
Fixed
40 A
AR/ARD
Machine tool
Panel mount
Convertible
10 A
3
3
3
3
3
Page
Number
UL
CSA
CE
—
■
■
■
V7-T3-119
—
■
■
—
V7-T3-154
BF/BFD
Machine tool
Panel mount
Fixed
10 A
■
—
■
—
V7-T3-148
D2RF
Full featured plug-in
DIN rail / panel mount
Fixed
10 A
■
—
■
■
V7-T3-59
D2RR
Standard plug-in
DIN rail / panel mount / flange
Fixed
10 A
■
—
■
■
V7-T3-59
■
V7-T3-69
D3RF
Full featured plug-in
DIN rail / panel mount
Fixed
16 A
■
—
■
D3RR
Standard plug-in
DIN rail / panel mount
Fixed
16 A
■
—
■
■
V7-T3-69
D4PR
Standard plug-in
DIN rail / panel mount
Fixed
10 A
■
—
■
■
V7-T3-77
3
D5RF
Full featured plug-in
DIN rail / panel mount
Fixed
16 A
■
—
■
■
V7-T3-82
D5RR
Standard plug-in
DIN rail / panel mount / PC board
Fixed
16 A
■
—
■
■
V7-T3-82
3
D7PF
Full featured plug-in
DIN rail / panel mount
Fixed
20 A
■
—
■
■
V7-T3-91
D7PR
Standard plug-in
DIN rail / panel mount / flange
Fixed
20 A
■
—
■
■
V7-T3-91
D8PR
Standard plug-in
DIN rail / panel mount / flange
Fixed
30 A
■
—
■
■
V7-T3-104
—
V7-T3-109
3
3
D9PR
Standard plug-in
Panel mounting
Fixed
25 A
■
—
■
D15
Machine tool
DIN rail / panel mount
Fixed
10 A
—
■
■
■
V7-T3-143
D26
Machine tool
Panel or channel mount
Convertible
10 A
—
■
■
—
V7-T3-159
D85
Alternating relays
DIN rail / panel mount
Fixed
10 A
■
■
—
■
V7-T3-189
D1RF
Full featured plug-in
DIN rail / panel mount
Fixed
20 A
■
—
■
■
V7-T3-54
D1RR
Standard plug-in
DIN rail / panel mount
Fixed
20 A
■
—
■
■
V7-T3-54
easyRelay
Programmable relay
DIN rail
Fixed
8A
—
■
■
■
V7-T3-23
3
TMR5
Timing relay (non-programmable)
DIN rail / panel mount
Fixed
10 A
■
■
—
■
V7-T3-180
TMR6
Timing relay (non-programmable)
DIN rail / panel mount
Fixed
10 A
■
■
—
■
V7-T3-184
3
TR
Timing relay (programmable)
DIN rail / panel mount
Fixed
10 A
—
■
■
—
V7-T3-177
Universal TR
Timing relay (programmable)
DIN rail
Fixed
8A
—
■
■
■
V7-T3-173
XR
Terminal block relay
DIN rail
Fixed
6 A, 10 A
■
—
—
■
V7-T3-5
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-2
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
Control Relays and Timers
Terminal Block Relays
3.2
Contents
Terminal Block Relays
Description
Page
Terminal Block Relays
Standard Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . . . . .
OptoCoupler Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . .
High Current Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . .
XR Series Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
3
V7-T3-4
V7-T3-12
V7-T3-15
V7-T3-18
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Catalog Number Selection
3
XR Series—Overview
3
XR U 1 D 12 G
3
Gold-Flashed Contacts
Blank = No
G = Yes
Description
XR = XR terminal block relay
Connection Type
U = Screw
P = Spring
R = Replacement relay
3
3
3
Poles
1 = 1PDT
2 = 2PDT
Type
D = Standard relay
S = Octocoupler (solid-state)
H = High current
12 =
24 =
24U =
120U =
230U =
Voltage
12 Vdc
24 Vdc
24 Vac/Vdc
120 Vac/110 Vdc
230 Vac/220 Vdc
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-3
3.2
3
Control Relays and Timers
Terminal Block Relays
Contents
Standard Terminal Block Relay
Description
3
Page
Standard Terminal Block Relays
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Schematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OptoCoupler Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . . . .
High Current Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . . . .
XR Series Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-5
V7-T3-6
V7-T3-11
V7-T3-11
V7-T3-12
V7-T3-15
V7-T3-18
3
3
3
3
3
Standard Terminal Block Relays
3
Product Description
Application Description
Features
The XR Series Terminal
Block Relays are ideal for
applications that require a
high switching capacity and
long electrical service life.
The relays are plug-in
interfaces that connect to
basic terminal blocks. The
XR Series uses screw or
spring-cage technology, as
well as offers quick system
wiring, superior safety
features, clear labeling and
a high level of modularity.
Used in automation systems,
electromechanical relays
guarantee a safe connection
between process I/O and
electronic controls. The
following functions are
covered by relay coupling
elements:
●
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
●
3
●
●
3
●
●
●
●
●
3
●
Electrical isolation
between the input and
output circuits
Independence of the type
of switching current (AC
and DC)
High short-term overload
resistance in the event of
short circuits or voltage
peaks
Low switching losses
Ease of operation
●
●
Pluggable relay allows for
field replacement
Functional plug-in bridges
Choice of screw
connections or spring-cage
connection
LED status indication
DIN rail mount
Only 6.2 mm wide for
single-pole versions,
14 mm wide for doublepole
All common input
voltages between
12 Vdc to 120 Vac
●
●
Gold-plated contacts
available
Equipped with a robust,
miniature relay:
●
IP67 protection
●
Environmentally friendly,
cadmium-free contact
material
●
Easy, cost-effective
installation and
replacement using the
engagement lever
Standards and Certifications
●
●
cULus listed
CE
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-4
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
Control Relays and Timers
Terminal Block Relays
3.2
Product Selection
XRU1D 24U
3
Standard Terminal Block Relays
Gold-Plated
Contacts
Rated
Current
Supply
Voltage
Standard
Pack
Catalog
Number
3
3
1PDT Screw Connection
No
6A
12 Vdc
10
XRU1D12
No
6A
120 Vac/110 Vdc
10
XRU1D120U
Yes
6A
120 Vac/110 Vdc
10
XRU1D120UG
No
6A
24 Vdc
10
XRU1D24
No
6A
24 Vac/Vdc
10
XRU1D24U
Yes
6A
24 Vac/Vdc
10
XRU1D24UG
No
6A
230 Vac/220 Vdc
10
XRU1D230U
10
XRP1D12
3
3
3
3
3
1PDT Spring Cage Connection
No
6A
12 Vdc
No
6A
120 Vac/110 Vdc
10
XRP1D120U
No
6A
24 Vdc
10
XRP1D24
No
6A
24 Vac/Vdc
10
XRP1D24U
No
6A
230 Vac/220 Vdc
10
XRP1D230U
3
3
3
3
DPDT Screw Connection
No
6A
12 Vdc
10
XRU2D12
No
6A
120 Vac/110 Vdc
10
XRU2D120U
No
6A
24 Vdc
10
XRU2D24
No
6A
24 Vac/Vdc
10
XRU2D24U
No
6A
230 Vac/220 Vdc
10
XRU2D230U
3
3
3
Standard Replacement Relays
Gold-Plated
Contacts
Rated
Current
Supply
Voltage 1
Standard
Pack
Catalog
Number
3
3
1PDT
No
6A
12 Vdc
10
XRR1D12
No
6A
120 Vac/110 Vdc
10
XRR1D120U
Yes
6A
120 Vac/110 Vdc
10
XRR1D120UG
No
6A
24 Vdc
10
XRR1D24
Yes
6A
24 Vdc
10
XRR1D24G
No
6A
12 Vdc
10
XRR2D12
No
6A
120 Vac/110 Vdc
10
XRR2D120U
No
6A
24 Vdc
10
XRR2D24
No
6A
230 Vac/220 Vdc
10
XRR2D230U
3
3
3
3
DPDT
3
3
3
Note
1 Voltage is the rating at the base. It may not match the voltage on the specific replacement relay.
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-5
3.2
3
3
3
Control Relays and Timers
Terminal Block Relays
Technical Data and Specifications
Standard 1PDT Screw Connection Terminal Block Relays
Catalog Number
XRU1D12
XRU1D24
XRU1D24U
Replacement Relay
XRR1D12
XRR1D24
XRR1D24
XRU1D120U
XRR1D120U
Input voltage
12 Vdc
24 Vdc
24 Vac/Vdc
120 Vac/110 Vdc
3
Connection Data
Rigid solid AWG (mm2)
26–14 (0.14–2.5)
26–14 (0.14–2.5)
26–14 (0.14–2.5)
26–14 (0.14–2.5)
3
Flexible stranded AWG (mm2)
26–14 (0.14–2.5)
26–14 (0.14–2.5)
26–14 (0.14–2.5)
26–14 (0.14–2.5)
120 Vac/110 Vdc
3
Input Data for 1PDT Screw Connection Versions
Input voltage
12 Vdc
24 Vdc
24 Vac/Vdc
Permissible range
See Page V7-T3-10
See Page V7-T3-10
See Page V7-T3-10
See Page V7-T3-10
Typical input current
15.3 mA
9 mA
11 mA (24 Vac)/8.5 mA (24 Vdc)
3.5 mA (120 Vac)/3 mA (110 Vdc)
Typical response time
5 ms
5 ms
6 ms
6 ms
Typical release time
8 ms
8 ms
15 ms
15 ms
3
Input protection
Polarity protection diode,
free-wheeling diode
Polarity protection diode,
free-wheeling diode
Bridge rectifier
Bridge rectifier
3
Output Data
3
Contact type
1PDT
1PDT
1PDT
1PDT
Contact material
AgSnO
AgSnO
AgSnO
AgSnO
3
Max. switching voltage
250 Vac/Vdc 1
250 Vac/Vdc 1
250 Vac/Vdc 1
250 Vac/Vdc 1
Min. switching voltage
12 Vac/Vdc
12 Vac/Vdc
12 Vac/Vdc
12 Vac/Vdc
3
Limiting continuous current
6A
6A
6A
6A
Min. switching current
10 mA
10 mA
10 mA
10 mA
Min. switching power
120 mW
120 mW
120 mW
120 mW
Ambient temp range
–4 °F to +140 °F (–20 °C to +60 °C)
–4 °F to +140 °F (–20 °C to +60 °C)
–4 °F to +140 °F (–20 °C to +60 °C)
–4 °F to +140 °F (–20 °C to +60 °C)
3
Rated operating mode
100% operating factor
100% operating factor
100% operating factor
100% operating factor
Inflammability class
V0, in accordance with UL 94
V0, in accordance with UL 94
V0, in accordance with UL 94
V0, in accordance with UL 94
3
Mechanical service life
2 x 107 cycles
2 x 107 cycles
2 x 107 cycles
2 x 107 cycles
3
Note
1 The separating plate, XRAPLCESK, should be installed for voltages greater than 250 V (L1, L2, L3) between identical terminal points of adjacent modules.
Potential bridging is then possible with the XRAFBST bridge system.
3
3
3
3
Miscellaneous Data
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-6
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
Control Relays and Timers
Terminal Block Relays
3.2
Standard 1PDT Screw Connection Terminal Block Relays with Gold Contacts
Catalog Number
3
XRU1D24UG
XRU1D120UG
Replacement Relay
XRR1D24G
XRR1D120UG
Input voltage
24 Vac/Vdc
120 Vac/110 Vdc
Rigid solid AWG (mm2)
26–14 (0.14–2.5)
26–14 (0.14–2.5)
Flexible stranded AWG (mm2)
26–14 (0.14–2.5)
26–14 (0.14–2.5)
3
120 Vac/110 Vdc
3
3
3
Connection Data
Input Data for 1PDT Screw Connection Versions with Gold Contacts
Input voltage
24 Vac/Vdc
Permissible range
See Page V7-T3-10
See Page V7-T3-10
Typical input current
11 mA (24 Vac)/8.5 mA (24 Vdc)
3.5 mA (120 Vac)/3 mA (110 Vdc)
Typical response time
6 ms
6 ms
Typical release time
15 ms
15 ms
Input protection
Bridge rectifier
Bridge rectifier
Contact type
1PDT
1PDT
Contact material
AgSnO, gold plated 1
3
3
3
Output Data
3
3
AgSnO, gold plated 1
2
30 Vac/36 Vdc (250 Vac/Vdc) 2
Max. switching voltage
30 Vac/36 Vdc (250 Vac/Vdc)
Min. switching voltage
100 mV (12 Vac/Vdc) 2
100 mV (12 Vac/Vdc) 2
Limiting continuous current
50 mA (6 A) 2
50 mA (6 A) 2
Min. switching current
1 mA (10 mA) 2
1 mA (10 mA) 2
Min. switching power
100 mW (120 mW) 2
100 mW (120 mW) 2
3
3
3
3
Miscellaneous Data
Ambient temp range
–4 °F to +140 °F (–20 °C to +60 °C)
–40 °F to +131 °F (–20 °C to +55 °C)
Rated operating mode
100% operating factor
100% operating factor
Inflammability class
V0, in accordance with UL 94
V0, in accordance with UL 94
Mechanical service life
2 x 107 cycles
2 x 107 cycles
3
3
Notes
1 The separating plate, XRAPLCESK, should be installed for voltages greater than 250 V (L1, L2, L3) between identical terminal
points of adjacent modules. Potential bridging is then possible with the XRAFBST bridge system.
2 If the maximum values are exceeded, the gold layer is destroyed and the values in parentheses apply.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-7
3.2
3
Control Relays and Timers
Terminal Block Relays
Standard 1PDT Spring Cage Terminal Block Relays
Catalog Number
XRP1D12
XRP1D24
XRP1D24U
XRP1D120U
3
Replacement Relay
XRR1D12
XRR1D24
XRR1D24
XRR1D120U
Input voltage
12 Vdc
24 Vdc
24 Vac/Vdc
120 Vac/110 Vdc
3
Connection Data
Rigid solid AWG (mm2)
26–14 (0.14–2.5)
26–14 (0.14–2.5)
26–14 (0.14–2.5)
26–14 (0.14–2.5)
Flexible stranded AWG (mm2)
26–14 (0.14–2.5)
26–14 (0.14–2.5)
26–14 (0.14–2.5)
26–14 (0.14–2.5)
120 Vac/110 Vdc
3
3
Input Data for 1PDT Spring Cage Versions
Input voltage
12 Vdc
24 Vdc
24 Vac/Vdc
3
Permissible range
See Page V7-T3-10
See Page V7-T3-10
See Page V7-T3-10
See Page V7-T3-10
Typical input current
15.3 mA
9 mA
11 mA (24 Vac)/8.5 mA (24 Vdc)
3.5 mA (120 Vac)/3 mA (110 Vdc)
Typical response time
5 ms
5 ms
6 ms
6 ms
3
Typical release time
8 ms
8 ms
15 ms
15 ms
Input protection
Polarity protection diode,
free-wheeling diode
Bridge rectifier
Bridge rectifier
3
Polarity protection diode,
free-wheeling diode
Output Data
3
Contact type
1PDT
1PDT
1PDT
1PDT
Contact material
AgSnO
AgSnO
AgSnO
AgSnO
Max. switching voltage
250 Vac/Vdc 1
250 Vac/Vdc 1
250 Vac/Vdc 1
250 Vac/Vdc 1
Min. switching voltage
12 Vac/Vdc
12 Vac/Vdc
12 Vac/Vdc
12 Vac/Vdc
Limiting continuous current
6A
6A
6A
6A
Min. switching current
10 mA
10 mA
10 mA
10 mA
Min. switching power
120 mW
120 mW
120 mW
120 mW
3
3
3
3
3
Miscellaneous Data
Ambient temp range
–4 °F to +140 °F (–20 °C to +60 °C)
–4 °F to +140 °F (–20 °C to +60 °C)
–4 °F to +140 °F (–20 °C to +60 °C)
–4 °F to +131 °F (–20 °C to +55 °C)
3
Rated operating mode
100% operating factor
100% operating factor
100% operating factor
100% operating factor
Inflammability class
V0, in accordance with UL 94
V0, in accordance with UL 94
V0, in accordance with UL 94
V0, in accordance with UL 94
Mechanical service life
2 x 107 cycles
2 x 107 cycles
2 x 107 cycles
2 x 107 cycles
3
3
3
Note
1 The separating plate, XRAPLCESK, should be installed for voltages greater than 250 V (L1, L2, L3) between identical terminal points of adjacent modules.
Potential bridging is then possible with the XRAFBST bridge system.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-8
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
3.2
Control Relays and Timers
Terminal Block Relays
Standard DPDT Screw Connection Terminal Block Relays
3
Catalog Number
XRU2D12
XRU2D24
XRU2D24U
XRU2D120U
Replacement Relay
XRR2D12
XRR2D24
XRR2D24
XRR2D120U
Input voltage
12 Vdc
24 Vdc
24 Vac/Vdc
120 Vac/110 Vdc
Rigid solid AWG (mm2)
26–14 (0.14–2.5)
26–14 (0.14–2.5)
26–14 (0.14–2.5)
26–14 (0.14–2.5)
Flexible stranded AWG (mm2)
26–14 (0.14–2.5)
26–14 (0.14–2.5)
26–14 (0.14–2.5)
26–14 (0.14–2.5)
3
24 Vdc
24 Vac/Vdc
120 Vac/110 Vdc
3
3
3
Connection Data
Input Data for 1PDT Spring Cage Versions
Input voltage
12 Vdc
Permissible range
See Page V7-T3-10
See Page V7-T3-10
See Page V7-T3-10
See Page V7-T3-10
Typical input current
33 mA
18 mA
17.5 mA
4.5 mA (120 Vac)/4.2 mA (110 Vdc)
Typical response time
8 ms
8 ms
8 ms
7 ms
Typical release time
10 ms
10 ms
10 ms
10 ms
Input protection
Polarity protection diode,
free-wheeling diode
Polarity protection diode,
free-wheeling diode
Bridge rectifier
Bridge rectifier
3
3
3
3
Output Data
Contact type
2PDT
Single contact, 2PDT
Single contact, 2PDT
Single contact, 2PDT
Contact material
AgNi
AgNi
AgNi
AgNi
1
250 Vac/Vdc
1
250 Vac/Vdc
1
250 Vac/Vdc
3
1
Max. switching voltage
250 Vac/Vdc
Min. switching voltage
5V
5V
5V
5V
Limiting continuous current
6A
6A
6A
6A
Max. inrush current
15 A (300 ms)
15 A (300 ms)
15 A (300 ms)
15 A (300 ms)
3
3
3
Min. switching current
10 mA
10 mA
10 mA
10 mA
Min. switching power
50 mW
50 mW
50 mW
50 mW
3
Ambient temp range
–4 °F to +140 °F (–20 °C to +60 °C)
–4 °F to +140 °F (–20 °C to +60 °C)
–4 °F to +140 °F (–20 °C to +60 °C)
–4 °F to +140 °F (–20 °C to +60 °C)
3
Rated operating mode
100% operating factor
100% operating factor
100% operating factor
100% operating factor
General Data
Inflammability class
V0, in accordance with UL 94
V0, in accordance with UL 94
V0, in accordance with UL 94
V0, in accordance with UL 94
Mechanical service life
3 x 107 cycles
3 x 107 cycles
3 x 107 cycles
3 x 107 cycles
3
3
Note
1 The separating plate, XRAPLCESK, should be installed for voltages greater than 250 V (L1, L2, L3) between identical terminal points of adjacent modules.
Potential bridging is then possible with the XRAFBST bridge system.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-9
3.2
3
3
3
1.4
DPDT Relay Modules
Operating Range Voltage for 12 Vdc
1.4
A
1.2
1.2
U 1.1
UN
1.0
U 1.1
UN
1.0
UN = 12 Vdc
0.9
0.9
0.8
0.8
B
0.7
20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65
TN [°C]
3
Operating Range Voltage for 120 Vac/110 Vdc
3
1.4
Operating Range Voltage for 120 Vac/110 Vdc
1.4
A
1.2
1.2
3
U 1.1
UN
1.0
U 1.1
UN
1.0
3
0.9
UN = 110 Vdc/120 Vac
B
Operating Range Voltage for 24 Vdc
Operating Range Voltage for 24 Vdc
1.4
1.4
A
1.3
1.2
1.2
U 1.1
UN
1.0
3
UN = 24 Vdc
0.9
0.8
0.8
B
0.7
20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65
TN [°C]
B
0.7
20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65
TN [°C]
1.4
Operating Range Voltage for 24 Vac/Vdc
1.4
A
1.2
1.2
3
U 1.1
UN
1.0
U 1.1
UN
1.0
3
0.9
UN = 24 Vdc/24 Vac
0.8
3
3
UN = 24 Vdc/24 Vac
0.9
B
0.8
0.7
20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65
TN [°C]
3
A
1.3
3
1.3
3
UN = 24 Vdc
0.9
Operating Range Voltage for 24 Vac/Vdc
3
A
1.3
U 1.1
UN
1.0
3
3
B
0.7
20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65
TN [°C]
3
3
UN = 110 Vdc
0.7
20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65
TN [°C]
3
3
UN = 120 Vac
0.9
0.8
0.8
3
A
1.3
3
3
UN = 12 Vdc
B
0.7
20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65
TN [°C]
1.3
3
A
1.3
1.3
3
3
Terminal Block Relays
Permissible Range Diagrams
1PDT Relay Modules
Operating Range Voltage for 12 Vdc
3
3
Control Relays and Timers
B
0.7
20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65
TN [°C]
Notes
General Conditions — Direct alignment in the block, all devices 100% operating factor, horizontal or vertical mounting.
Curve A — Maximum permissible continuous operating voltage Umax with limiting continuous current on the contact side (see respective technical data).
Curve B — Minimum permissible relay operate voltage Uop after pre-excitation 1) (see respective technical data).
1
Pre-excitation: Relay has been operated in a thermally steady state at the ambient temperature TU with nominal voltage UN and limiting continuous current on the contact side (see respective
technical data) (warm coil). After being switched off for a short time, the relay must reliably pick up again at Uop.
V7-T3-10
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
3.2
Control Relays and Timers
Terminal Block Relays
Electrical Schematics
1PDT Terminal Block Relays
3
DPDT Terminal Block Relays
3
3
21
24
A2
3
3
11
22
A2
14
A1
3
11
3
3
A1
12
14
3
3
12
3
Dimensions
3
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Standard 1PDT Terminal Block Relays
3
Standard DPDT Terminal Block Relays
3
3
3
3
3
3.70 (94.0)
3.70 (94.0)
3
3
3
3
3.15 (80.0)
3.15 (80.0)
3
0.24 (6.2)
3
0.55 (14.0)
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-11
3.2
3
Control Relays and Timers
Terminal Block Relays
Contents
OptoCoupler Terminal Block Relay
Description
3
Page
Standard Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OptoCoupler Terminal Block Relays
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Current Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . . . .
XR Series Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-4
V7-T3-13
V7-T3-13
V7-T3-14
V7-T3-14
V7-T3-15
V7-T3-18
3
3
3
3
3
OptoCoupler Terminal Block Relays
3
Product Description
Application Description
The XR Series OptoCoupler
Terminal Block Relays can be
used in all applications and
consist of a pluggable
miniature OptoCoupler and a
basic terminal block. The XR
Series uses screw or springcage technology, as well as
offers quick system wiring,
superior safety features, clear
labeling and a high level of
modularity.
The XR Series OptoCoupler
relays can be used as an input
or output interface. They
provide the typical reliability
of OptoCouplers and are
especially suited for high
operating frequencies.
3
3
3
3
3
Features
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
3
●
3
●
3
●
3
Pluggable relay allows for
field replacement
Functional plug-in bridges
LED status indication
DIN rail mount
Only 6.2 mm wide
Switching capacity up to
24 Vdc/3 A
IP67-protected optical
electronics
Wear-resistant and bouncefree switching
Insensitive to shock and
vibration
Integrated protection
circuit
Zero voltage switch at AC
output
Standards and Certifications
●
●
cULus listed
CE
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-12
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
Control Relays and Timers
Terminal Block Relays
3.2
Product Selection
3
OptoCoupler Terminal Block Relays
XRU1S24
Rated Current
Supply Voltage
Standard Pack
Catalog
Number
2A
120 Vac/110 Vdc
10
XRU1S120U
2A
24 Vdc
10
XRU1S24
3
3
3
3
OptoCoupler Replacement Relays
Rated Current
Supply Voltage 1
Standard Pack
Catalog
Number
2A
24 Vdc
18
XRR1S24
2A
120 Vac/110 Vdc
10
XRR1S120U
3
3
3
3
Technical Data and Specifications
3
Pluggable Power OptoCoupler (Solid-State) Terminal Block Relays
Catalog Number
XRU1S24
XRU1S120U
Replacement Relay
XRR1S24
XRR1S120U
Input voltage
24 Vdc
120 Vac/110 Vdc
3
Rigid solid AWG (mm2)
26–14 (0.14–2.5)
26–14 (0.14–2.5)
3
Flexible stranded AWG (mm2)
26–14 (0.14–2.5)
26–14 (0.14–2.5)
3
Connection Data
3
Input Data
Input voltage
24 Vdc
120 Vac/110 Vdc
Permissible range
0.8–1.2
0.8 –1.1
Typical input current
9 mA
4 mA
Switching level 1 signal (“H”)
>0.8
>0.8
Switching level 0 signal (“L”)
<0.4
<0.25
Typical switch-on time
20 μS
6 ms
Typical turn-off time
500 μS
10 ms
Input protection
Polarity protection diode,
free-wheeling diode
Bridge rectifier
Max. switching voltage
33 Vdc
33 Vdc
Min. switching voltage
3 Vdc
3 Vdc
Limiting continuous current
3 A (See derating curve)
3 A (See derating curve)
Max. inrush current
15 A (10 ms)
15 A (10 ms)
3
3
3
3
3
Output Data
Output circuit
2-conductor floating
2-conductor floating
Output protection
Polarity protection, surge protection
Polarity protection, surge protection
Voltage drop at maximum
limiting continuous current
< 200 mV
< 200 mV
Ambient temp range
–4 °F to +140 °F (–20 °C to +60 °C)
–4 °F to +140 °F (–20 °C to +60 °C)
Rated operating mode
100% operating factor
100% operating factor
Inflammability class
V0, in accordance with UL 94
V0, in accordance with UL 94
Mechanical service life
2 x 107 cycles
2 x 107 cycles
3
3
3
3
3
General Data
3
3
3
3
Note
1 Voltage is the rating at the base. It may not match the voltage on the specific replacement relay.
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-13
3.2
3
3
3
Derating Curve
OptoCoupler
Dimensions
Pluggable Power OptoCoupler (Solid-State)
Terminal Block Relays
3
3
3
3
Terminal Block Relays
Load Current (A)
3
Control Relays and Timers
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
3
2
1
0
0
10
20 30 40 50 60
Ambient Temperature (°C)
Electrical Schematic
Pluggable Power OptoCoupler (Solid-State)
Terminal Block Relays
3.70 (94.0)
3
3
3
3
3
A2
13+
A1
14
3.15 (80.0)
0.24 (6.2)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-14
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
Control Relays and Timers
Terminal Block Relays
3.2
Contents
High Current Terminal Block Relay
Description
Page
Standard Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OptoCoupler Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Current Terminal Block Relays
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
XR Series Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V7-T3-4
V7-T3-12
V7-T3-16
V7-T3-16
V7-T3-17
V7-T3-17
V7-T3-18
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
High Current Terminal Block Relays
Product Description
Application Description
Features
The XR Series Relays include
products designed to meet
high continuous current and/
or long electrical service life
applications. The XR Series
Relays are plug-in interfaces
that connect to basic terminal
blocks that use screw
connection technology.
Overall width is 14 mm.
These relays are best suited
for applications that require
higher continuous load
currents than miniature
relays can carry and switch.
They can withstand inrush
currents or brief overloads
without damage, and allow
for continuous load currents
of up to 10 A. The XR Series
Relay boasts an average
service life of the contacts
that is two or three times
the normal life of a less
powerful relay, resulting in
service cost savings.
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
14 mm wide
Pluggable relay allows for
field replacement
Convenient plug-in bridge
system
LED status indication
DIN Rail Mount
IP67-protected optical
electronics
Wear-resistant and bouncefree switching
Insensitive to shock and
vibration
Integrated protection
circuit
Zero voltage switch at AC
output
Environmentally friendly,
cadmium-free contact
material
Electrical isolation
between input and output
Standards and Certifications
●
●
cULus listed
CE
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-15
3.2
3
3
Control Relays and Timers
Terminal Block Relays
Product Selection
High Current Terminal Block Relays
XRU1H24
Supply Voltage
Standard Pack
Catalog
Number
10 A
12 Vdc
10
XRU1H12
10 A
120 Vac/110 Vdc
10
XRU1H120U
10 A
24 Vdc
10
XRU1H24
3
10 A
24 Vac/Vdc
10
XRU1H24U
3
High Current Replacement Relays
3
Rated Current
Supply Voltage 1
Standard Pack
Catalog
Number
10 A
24 Vdc
10
XRR1H24
10 A
24 Vac/Vdc
10
XRR1H24U
10 A
12 Vdc
10
XRR1H12
10 A
120 Vac/110 Vdc
10
XRR1H120U
Rated Current
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Technical Data and Specifications
High Current Terminal Block Relays (1PDT)
Catalog Number
Replacement Relay
XRU1H12
XRR1H12
XRU1H24
XRR1H24
XRU1H24U
XRR1H24U
XRU1H120U
XRR1H120U
Input voltage
12 Vdc
24 Vdc
24 Vac/Vdc
120 Vac/110 Vdc
Rigid solid AWG (mm2)
26–14 (0.14–2.5)
26–14 (0.14–2.5)
26–14 (0.14–2.5)
26–14 (0.14–2.5)
Flexible stranded AWG (mm2)
26–14 (0.14–2.5)
26–14 (0.14–2.5)
26–14 (0.14–2.5)
26–14 (0.14–2.5)
120 Vac/110 Vdc
Connection Data
Input Data for 1PDT Spring Cage Versions
3
Input voltage
12 Vdc
24 Vdc
24 Vac/Vdc
Permissible range
See Page V7-T3-10
See Page V7-T3-10
See Page V7-T3-10
See Page V7-T3-10
3
Typical input current
33 mA
18 mA
17.5 mA
4.5 mA (120 Vac)/4.2 mA (110 Vdc)
Typical response time
8 ms
8 ms
8 ms
7 ms
Typical release time
10 ms
10 ms
10 ms
10 ms
Input protection
Polarity protection diode,
free-wheeling diode
Polarity protection diode,
free-wheeling diode
Bridge rectifier
Bridge rectifier
3
3
Output Data
3
Contact type
Single contact, 1PDT
Single contact, 1PDT
Single contact, 1PDT
Single contact, 1PDT
Contact material
AgNi
AgNi
AgNi
AgNi
Max. switching voltage
250 Vac/Vdc 2
250 Vac/Vdc 2
250 Vac/Vdc 2
250 Vac/Vdc 2
3
Min. switching voltage
12 Vac/Vdc
12 Vac/Vdc
12 Vac/Vdc
12 Vac/Vdc
Limiting continuous current
10 A 3
10 A 3
10 A 3
10 A 3
3
Max. inrush current
30 A (300 ms)
30 A (300 ms)
30 A (300 ms)
30 A (300 ms)
Min. switching current
100 mA
100 mA
100 mA
100 mA
3
Min. switching power
1.2 W
1.2 W
1.2 W
1.2 W
Ambient temp range
–4 °C to +140 °F (–20 °C to +60 °C)
–4 °C to +140 °F (–20 °C to +60 °C)
–4 °C to +140 °F (–20 °C to +60 °C)
–4 °C to +140 °F (–20 °C to +60 °C)
Rated operating mode
100% operating factor
100% operating factor
100% operating factor
100% operating factor
3
Miscellaneous Data
3
3
3
3
3
Inflammability class
V0, in accordance with UL 94
V0, in accordance with UL 94
V0, in accordance with UL 94
V0, in accordance with UL 94
Mechanical service life
3 x 107 cycles
3 x 107 cycles
3 x 107 cycles
3 x 107 cycles
Notes
1 Voltage is the rating at the base. It may not match the voltage on the specific replacement relay.
2 The separating plate, XRAPLCESK, should be installed for voltages greater than 250 V (L1, L2, L3) between identical terminal points of adjacent modules.
Potential bridging is then possible with the XRAFBST bridge system.
3 The current rating for the normally open contact (#14) is 10 A. The current rating for the normally closed contact (#12) is 6 A and can be increased to 10 A by bridging the
two #12 contact connections.
3
V7-T3-16
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
Control Relays and Timers
Terminal Block Relays
3.2
Electrical Schematic
3
High Current Terminal Block Relays
3
3
3
3
A2
11
A1
14
3
3
3
12
3
3
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
3
High Current Terminal Block Relays
3
3
3
3
3
3.70 (94.0)
3
3
3
3
3
3.15 (80.0)
3
3
0.55 (14.0)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-17
3.2
3
Control Relays and Timers
Terminal Block Relays
XR Series Accessories
Product Description
3
Power Terminal Block
Product Selection
Bridges
3
XR Series Accessories
Color
Standard
Pack
Catalog
Number
3
2-Position Snap-In Jumper
Red
10
XRAFBST2RD
3
Blue
10
XRAFBST2BU
Gray
10
XRAFBST2GY
3
80-Position Snap-In Jumper
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
The XRAPLCESK power
terminal block has the same
shape as the relay modules
and is used to feed in the
bridging potentials. The
nominal current is 32 A.
When the total current is less
than or equal to 6 A, supply
can take place directly at the
connecting terminal blocks of
one of the connected relays.
End Cover
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
The XRAATPBK end cover
is required at the start and
stop of a relay strip. It can
also be used for visual
separation of groups of
relays as well as separating
relays with voltages greater
than 250 V and separating
neighboring bridges with
different potentials. It is
equipped with pre-scored
break out points at the
bridging positions so that
individual bridges can be
passed through as needed.
It may also be necessary to
use the end cover between
adjacent relays when three
phases (L1, L2, L3) are
used on the contact side
of the relay.
Red
5
XRAFBST500RD
Blue
5
XRAFBST500BU
Gray
5
XRAFBST500GY
5
XRAPLCESK
5
XRAATPBK
Power Terminal Block
The XRAFBST colored,
insulated plug-in bridge
system reduces wiring
time by up to 70% compared
to conventionally wired
relays. The XRAFBST2,
2-position bridges, are
suited for bridging a smaller
number of relays and total
currents <6 A. When a circuit
is supplied from both sides,
the circuit can be opened at
any point, allowing all other
modules to continue being
supplied at the same time.
The XRAFBST500 allow up
to 80 modules to be bridged
at one time. If bridges with
different potentials meet in
neighboring modules, the
end cover XRAATPBK
should be used. All bridges
are equipped with a groove
for removal with a standard
screwdriver.
Gray
End Cover
Black
Technical Data and Specifications
Power Terminal Block
Description
Specification
Connection Data
Rigid solid AWG (mm2)
24–10 (0.2–4)
Flexible stranded AWG (mm2)
24–10 (0.2–4)
Miscellaneous Data
Max. current
32 A
Max. voltage
250 Vac 1
Note
1 The separating plate, XRAPLCESK, should be installed for voltages greater than 250 V
(L1, L2, L3) between identical terminal points of adjacent modules. Potential bridging is
then possible with the XRAFBST bridge system.
3
3
V7-T3-18
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays
3.3
Contents
Programmable Relays
Description
Programmable Relays
easy500/700/800 Programmable Relays . . . . .
easy802/806 Programmable Relays
with SmartWire-DT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
easyRelay and MFD Expansion Modules . . . . .
MFD-Titan Multi-Function Displays . . . . . . . . .
easyRelay Communication Modules . . . . . . . .
easyRelay Power Supplies, Accessories
and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
3
3
V7-T3-20
V7-T3-26
V7-T3-30
V7-T3-33
V7-T3-40
V7-T3-43
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Product Overview
The easyRelays combine
timers, relays, counters,
special functions, inputs and
outputs into one compact
device that is easily
programmed. The easyRelay
family of products provides an
exceptional level of flexibility
together with a substantial
savings of commissioning
time and effort.
The easyRelays are available
in more than 35 styles that
support from 12 I/O up to
a network of up to 320 I/O
points, providing the ideal
solution for lighting, energy
management, industrial
control, irrigation, pump
control, HVAC and home
automation.
Once easyRelays are
installed, changes are
easily accomplished through
front panel programming,
eliminating the need
to change wiring and
minimizing downtime.
3
Application Description
The easy802/806 relays are
even more powerful than
the easy800 series and
include an integrated
SmartWire-DT gateway.
Conventional hardwiring
to pushbuttons, selector
switches, pilot devices and
contactors can now be
eliminated, allowing for a
dramatic increase in panel
wiring productivity. For more
information on SmartWire-DT
and how it can increase
productivity, go to
www.eaton.com/smartwiredt.
3
The easyRelays excel in
traditional applications where
multiple relays, timers and
pushbuttons are used.
Applications span residential,
commercial and industrial
installations.
3
3
3
Typical control
applications are:
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
3
Lighting controls
Duplex pump controls
Water fountain controls
Parking garage access
controls
Refrigeration control
system
Greenhouse temperature
and ventilation controls
Booster pump controls
3
3
3
3
3
See publication no.
AP05013001E for the
easyRelay application guide.
Download from
www.eaton.com/easyrelays.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-19
3.3
3
Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays
Contents
easy500/700/800 Programmable Relays
Description
3
Page
easy500/700/800 Programmable Relays
System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
easy802/806 Programmable Relays
with SmartWire-DT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
easyRelay and MFD Expansion Modules . . . . . . .
MFD-Titan Multi-Function Displays . . . . . . . . . . . .
easyRelay Communication Modules . . . . . . . . . . .
easyRelay Power Supplies, Accessories
and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-21
V7-T3-23
V7-T3-24
V7-T3-25
V7-T3-26
V7-T3-30
V7-T3-33
V7-T3-40
V7-T3-43
3
3
3
easy500/700/800 Programmable Relays
3
Product Description
Standards
Three families make up the
easyRelay programmable
relay product line. All models
are available with and without
displays. DIN rail mounted.
●
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
●
●
●
●
easy500—for controlling
small applications with up
to 12 input/output signals.
Connectable to Ethernet.
easy700—for controlling
medium-sized applications
with 20 I/O points (expandable
to 40 I/O points). Connectable
to Ethernet and bus systems.
●
●
●
●
Certifications
●
●
●
easy800—for controlling
large-scale applications
with 20 points, expandable
to 40 points locally, and
expandable using the
easyNet network up to
320 I/O points. Connectable
to Ethernet and bus systems.
The easyNet integrated
network provides easy and
inexpensive linking of up
to eight easy800 devices
over a distance of up to
1000 meters. Each easy800
device can run its own
program, or be used as a
distributed input/output
module. Connect up to
eight controllers with up
to 40 I/O to obtain 320 I/O.
CSA C22.2 No. 142-M1987
CSA C22.2 No. 213-M1987
EN 55011
EN 50178
EN 61131-2
IEC EN 61000-4
IEC 60068-2-6
IEC 60068-2-27
UL 508
●
●
●
●
UL
CSA
CE
CSA Class I, Div. 2,
Groups A, B, C, D;
Temp. Code T3C
C-Tick
GOST-R
Ukrain-GOST
Catalog Number Selection
easy500/700/800
EASY512 - AC - R C
Module Type
EASY5xx = 500 Series
EASY7xx = 700 Series
EASY8xx = 800 Series
Digital Inputs
AB = 24 Vac
AC = 110–240 Vac
DA = 12 Vdc
DC = 24 Vdc
Display
Blank = Display
X = No display
Clock
C = Clock
Blank = No clock
Digital Outputs
R = Relay
T = Transistor
Note: Not all combinations are possible. See selection tables.
Shipping Approvals
●
Bureau Veritas
●
Det Norske Veritas
●
Germanischer Lloyd
●
Lloyd’s Register of Shipping
3
3
V7-T3-20
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
3.3
Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays
System Overview
3
easy500/700 Programmable Relays
3
3
3
1
3
4
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
3
5
3
6
7
8
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
11
12
3
10
3
Item
Description
1
easy500 basic devices, standalone
2
easy700 basic devices, expandable:
digital inputs/outputs, bus systems
3
MFD-Titan remote text display
4
Ethernet gateway
5
PROFIBUS-DP bus module
6
AS-Interface bus module
7
CANopen bus module
8
DeviceNet bus module
9
Output expansion
10, 11
I/O expansions
12
Coupling module for the remote connection
of a digital input/output expansion
9
3
3
11
3
3
10
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-21
3.3
3
Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays
easy800 Programmable Relay
3
2
1
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
13
3
3
3
4
3
5
6
7
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
10
11
3
9, 12
Item
Description
1
easy800 basic devices, expandable:
digital inputs/outputs and bus systems,
easyNet onboard
2
MFD-Titan remote text display
3
Ethernet gateway
3
4
PROFIBUS-DP bus module
5
AS-Interface bus module
3
6
CANopen bus module
7
DeviceNet bus module
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
8
Output expansion
9, 10
I/O expansions
11
Coupling module for the remote connection of
a digital input/output expansion
12
I/O expansion
13
MFD-Titan multi-function display
8
10
12
3
V7-T3-22
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays
3.3
Product Selection
easy500—Display
3
easy500 Programmable Relays (Standalone)
Description
Inputs
24 Vac
110–240 Vac
12 Vdc
Outputs
Relay
Analog 1
24 Vdc
Transistor
Catalog
Number
3
3
Display
12 I/O, no clock
12 I/O, clock
easy500—No Display
—
8
—
—
—
4
—
EASY512-AC-R
—
—
—
8
2
4
—
EASY512-DC-R
3
8
—
—
—
2
4
—
EASY512-AB-RC
—
8
—
—
—
4
—
EASY512-AC-RC
—
—
8
—
2
4
—
EASY512-DA-RC
—
—
—
8
2
4
—
EASY512-DC-RC
—
—
—
8
2
—
4
EASY512-DC-TC
3
8
—
—
—
2
4
—
EASY512-AB-RCX
3
—
8
—
—
—
4
—
EASY512-AC-RCX
—
—
8
—
2
4
—
EASY512-DA-RCX
—
—
—
8
2
4
—
EASY512-DC-RCX
—
—
—
8
2
—
4
EASY512-DC-TCX
No Display
12 I/O, clock
3
3
3
3
3
easy700—Display
easy700 Programmable Relays (Expandable and Networkable)
Description
Inputs
24 Vac
110–240 Vac
12 Vdc
Outputs
Relay
Analog 1
24 Vdc
Transistor
Catalog
Number
3
3
Display
18 I/O, clock
easy700—No Display
20 I/O, clock
—
—
—
4
6
—
EASY719-AB-RC
12
—
—
—
6
—
EASY719-AC-RC
—
—
12
—
4
6
—
EASY719-DA-RC
—
—
—
12
4
6
—
EASY719-DC-RC
—
—
—
12
4
—
8
EASY721-DC-TC
3
12
—
—
—
4
6
—
EASY719-AB-RCX
3
—
12
—
—
—
6
—
EASY719-AC-RCX
—
—
12
—
4
6
—
EASY719-DA-RCX
—
—
—
12
4
6
—
EASY719-DC-RCX
—
—
—
12
4
—
8
EASY721-DC-TCX
No Display
18 I/O, clock
20 I/O, clock
3
12
—
3
3
3
3
easy800—Display
easy800 Programmable Relays (Expandable and Networkable)
Description
Inputs
110–240 Vac
24 Vdc
Analog 1
Outputs
Relay
3
Transistor
Analog
Catalog
Number
3
Display
18 I/O, clock
easy800—No Display
12
—
—
6
—
—
EASY819-AC-RC
—
12
4
6
—
—
EASY819-DC-RC
19 I/O, clock
—
12
4
6
—
1
EASY820-DC-RC
20 I/O, clock
—
12
4
—
8
—
EASY821-DC-TC
21 I/O, clock
—
12
4
—
8
1
EASY822-DC-TC
12
—
—
6
—
—
EASY819-AC-RCX
—
12
4
6
—
—
EASY819-DC-RCX
—
12
4
6
—
1
EASY820-DC-RCX
No Display
18 I/O, clock
19 I/O, clock
20 I/O, clock
—
12
4
—
8
—
EASY821-DC-TCX
21 I/O, clock
—
12
4
—
8
1
EASY822-DC-TCX
3
3
3
3
3
3
Note
1 Analog inputs optional. Use of analog inputs will result in a decrease in the same number of available digital inputs.
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
3
3
V7-T3-23
3.3
3
3
Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays
Technical Data and Specifications
easy500 Series
Type
EASY512-AB…
EASY512-AC…
EASY512-DA…
EASY512-DC-R…
EASY512-DC-TC.
24 Vdc
3
Supply voltage
24 Vac
100–240 Vac
12 Vdc
24 Vdc
Heat dissipation
5 VA
5 VA
2W
2W
2W
3
Continuous current outputs 1
8A
8A
8A
8A
0.5 A
3
3
3
3
Short-circuit proof with power factor 1
Line protection B16, 600 A
—
Short-circuit proof with power factor 0.7…0.7
Line protection B16, 900 A
—
Mounting
On 35 mm DIN rail or screw mounting with ZB4-101-GF1 mounting feet
Connection cables
Solid
0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
Flexible
0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
Degree of protection
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
RFI suppression
EN 55011, EN 55022 Class B, IEC 61000-6-1, 2, 3, 4
Ambient operating temperature
–25 °C to +55 °C
–25 °C to +55 °C
–25 °C to +55 °C
–25 °C to +55 °C
–25 °C to +55 °C
Transport and storage temperature
–40 °C to +70 °C
–40 °C to +70 °C
–40 °C to +70 °C
–40 °C to +70 °C
–40 °C to +70 °C
3
Hazardous location
CSA Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Temp. Code T3C
3
easy700 Series
EASY721-DC-TC.
3
Type
EASY719-AB…
EASY719-AC…
EASY719-DA…
EASY719-DC-RC…
Supply voltage
24 Vac
100–240 Vac
12 Vdc
24 Vdc
24 Vdc
3
Heat dissipation
7 VA
10 VA
3.5 W
3.5 W
3.5 W
Continuous current outputs 1
8A
8A
8A
8A
0.5 A
3
Short-circuit proof with power factor 1
Line protection B16, 600 A
Line protection B16, 600 A
Line protection B16, 600 A
Line protection B16, 600 A
—
Short-circuit proof with power factor 0.7…0.7
Line protection B16, 900 A
Line protection B16, 900 A
Line protection B16, 900 A
Line protection B16, 900 A
—
3
Mounting
On 35 mm DIN rail or screw mounting with ZB4-101-GF1 mounting feet
3
Connection cables
3
Solid
0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
Flexible
0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
Degree of protection
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
3
RFI suppression
EN 55011, EN 55022 Class B, IEC 61000-6-1, 2, 3, 4
Ambient operating temperature
–25 °C to +55 °C
–25 °C to +55 °C
–25 °C to +55 °C
–25 °C to +55 °C
–25 °C to +55 °C
3
Transport and storage temperature
–40 °C to +70 °C
–40 °C to +70 °C
–40 °C to +70 °C
–40 °C to +70 °C
–40 °C to +70 °C
Hazardous location
CSA Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Temp. Code T3C
3
3
3
3
easy800 Series
Type
EASY819-AC…
EASY819-DC-RC…
EASY820-DC-RC…
EASY821-DC-TC…
EASY822-DC-TC.
Supply voltage
100–240 Vac
24 Vdc
24 Vdc
24 Vdc
24 Vdc
Heat dissipation
10 VA
3.4 W
3.4 W
3.4 W
3.4 W
Continuous current outputs 1
8A
8A
8A
8A
0.5 A
Short-circuit proof with power factor 1
Line protection B16, 600 A
Line protection B16, 600 A
Line protection B16, 600 A
Line protection B16, 600 A
—
3
Short-circuit proof with power factor 0.7…0.7
Line protection B16, 900 A
Line protection B16, 900 A
Line protection B16, 900 A
Line protection B16, 900 A
—
Mounting
On 35 mm DIN rail or screw mounting with ZB4-101-GF1 mounting feet
3
Connection cables
3
3
3
Solid
0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
Flexible
0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
Degree of protection
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
RFI suppression
EN 55011, EN 55022 Class B, IEC 61000-6-1, 2, 3, 4
3
Ambient operating temperature
–25 °C to +55 °C
–25 °C to +55 °C
–25 °C to +55 °C
–25 °C to +55 °C
–25 °C to +55 °C
Transport and storage temperature
–40 °C to +70 °C
–40 °C to +70 °C
–40 °C to +70 °C
–40 °C to +70 °C
–40 °C to +70 °C
3
Hazardous location
CSA Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Temp. Code T3C
3
Note
1 Relay = 8 A (10 A to UL) with resistive load, 3 A with inductive load. Transistor outputs = 0.5 A/24 Vdc, maximum four outputs switchable in parallel.
V7-T3-24
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays
3.3
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
3
easy500 Series, Drawing Number MD05013001E
3
0.42 (10.8)
3
1.97 (50.0)
easy500
3
3
3.54
(90.0)
3
4.02
(102.0)
1.77
(45.0)
3
4.33
(110.0)
3
0.18 (4.5)
(M4) 0.157 Dia.
(3.9)
1.87 (47.5)
3
1.41
(35.8)
2.81 (71.5)
2.22 (56.5)
2.28 (58.0)
3
3
easy700 Series, Drawing Number MD05013002E
0.64 (16.3)
2.96 (75.0)
3
0.64 (16.3)
3
easy700
3
3.54
(90.0)
3
4.02
(102.0)
1.77
(45.0)
3
4.33
(110.0)
3
3
0.18 (4.5)
(M4) 0.157 Dia.
(3.9)
3
1.87 (47.5)
4.23 (107.5)
2.22 (56.5)
3
2.28 (58.0)
3
easy800 Series, Drawing Number MD05013003E
0.64 (16.3)
2.96 (75.0)
0.64 (16.3)
3
easy800
3
3.54
(90.0)
3
4.02
(102.0)
1.77
(45.0)
3
3
4.33
(110.0)
3
0.18 (4.5)
1.91 (48.5)
2.78 (70.5)
2.83 (72.0)
(M4)
3
0.157
Dia.
(3.9)
3
4.23 (107.5)
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-25
3.3
3
Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays
easy802/806 Programmable Relays with SmartWire-DT
Contents
Description
3
Page
easy500/700/800 Programmable Relays . . . . . . . .
V7-T3-20
easy802/806 Programmable Relays with SmartWire-DT
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V7-T3-27
Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V7-T3-27
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . .
V7-T3-28
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V7-T3-29
easyRelay and MFD Expansion Modules . . . . . . .
V7-T3-30
MFD-Titan Multi-Function Displays . . . . . . . . . . . .
V7-T3-33
easyRelay Communication Modules . . . . . . . . . . .
V7-T3-40
easyRelay Power Supplies, Accessories
and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V7-T3-43
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
easy802/806 Programmable Relays with SmartWire-DT
3
Product Description
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
SmartWire-DT is a highperformance system that can
be used to quickly and easily
connect motor control
components such as relays,
contactors, pilot devices,
manual motor protectors,
soft starters 1 and variable
frequency drives 1 as well
as digital and analog input/
output modules. On the new
easy800 with integrated
SmartWire-DT master, up to
99 SmartWire-DT devices in
total with up to 166 inputs/
outputs can be connected
via the SmartWire-DT line.
All required supply voltages,
including those for bus
devices as well as 24 Vdc for
the contactors, are provided
directly with the flat eightpole SmartWire-DT bus line.
This reduces wiring effort and
troubleshooting and saves
time and costs.
Standards
The easy802 features a POW
power feeder for regulating
power to the device as well
as the SmartWire-DT devices.
A second AUX power feeder
provides the connected
contactors with 24 Vdc. A
separate 24 Vdc power
supply is required to provide
24 Vdc power to the easy802
or easy806 controllers. The
configuration of the
SmartWire-DT devices is
undertaken at a touch of
the provided Configuration
button. LEDs provide
feedback on the connecting
states on the device and
the SmartWire-DT line. The
serial interface serves for
programming as well as for
connection of a remote text
display, touch panel or for
connection to the Ethernet.
In addition to the functionality
of the easy802, the easy806
also features four fast inputs
(5 kHz). Two of the four
inputs can also be configured
as fast outputs (5 kHz)
(transistor 24 Vdc, 0.1 A).
In addition to the additional
inputs/outputs on easy806,
there is a connection option
to the easyNet. Up to eight
EASY806-DC-SWD controllers
can be connected via
easyNet, allowing up to
1360 inputs/outputs.
●
●
●
EN 50178
IEC/EN 60947
UL 508
Certifications
●
●
●
cULus
CE
C-Tick
For more information on
SmartWire-DT and related
components, see Tab 9 of
this volume or go to
www.eaton.com/smartwiredt.
Note
1 Soft starters and variable frequency
drives will be available with direct
SmartWire-DT connectivity in late 2013.
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-26
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays
3.3
Product Selection
3
Control relay for connection of SmartWire-DT and
simultaneously for supply of power to the SmartWire-DT
devices, such as switchgear and contactors.
EASY802-DC-SWD
3
easy800 with SmartWire-DT
3
Supply
Voltage
3
24 Vdc
Description
Catalog Number
Control relay with
SmartWire-DT
EASY802-DC-SWD
3
3
3
EASY806-DC-SWD
24 Vdc
3
Control relay with
EASY806-DC-SWD
SmartWire-DT, four inputs,
two of which can be used as
outputs (transistor 24 Vdc,
0.1 A), easyNet onboard
3
3
3
3
3
Remote Displays
3
Both the easy802 and easy806 controllers can be connected to
a MFD remote display or a XV touch panel display with Galileo.
3
3
Accessories
MFD-80
3
Accessories—easy800
Description
Catalog Number
MFD display, NEMA 4X indoor rated
MFD-80
3
3
3
MFD-CP4
3
24 Vdc power / communication module
MFD-CP4
easy802/806 to MFD-CP4 communication
cable, 1.5m
EU4A-RJ45-CAB2
3
easy802/806 to XV HMI communication
cable, 2m
EU4A-RJ45-CAB1
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-27
3.3
3
3
3
3
3
Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays
Technical Data and Specifications
easy802/806 Programmable Relays with SmartWire-DT
Description
Unit
Specification
Ambient Climatic Conditions
Cold to IEC 60068-2-1, heat to IEC 60068-2-2, damp heat, constant, to IEC 60068-2-78;
cyclical to IEC 60068-2-30; temperature change to IEC 68000-2-14
Operating ambient temperature
°C (°F)
Condensation
–25 ° to +55 ° (–13 ° to +131 °)
Prevent condensation by means of suitable measures
LCD display (reliable legible)
°C (°F)
0 ° to +55 ° (32 ° to +131 °)
3
Storage
°C (°F)
–40 ° to +70 ° (–40 ° to +158 °)
Relative humidity, noncondensing (IEC EN 60068-2-30)
%
5 to 95
3
Air pressure (in operation)
hPa
795 up to 1080
3
Protection type EN 50178, IEC 60529, VBG4
3
Ambient Mechanical Conditions
IP20
Vibrations (IEC EN 60068-2-6)
Constant amplitude: easy800-SWD; 3.5 mm
Hz
5–8.4
Constant acceleration: easy800-SWD: 1g
Hz
8.4–150
3
Mechanical shock resistance (IEC EN 60068-2-27)
semi-sinusoidal 15g / 11 ms
Shocks
3
Drop (IEC EN 60068-2-31)
Drop height
Free fall, packaged (IEC EN 60068-2-32)
3
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
3
Electrostatic discharge (ESD), to IEC EN 61000-4-2
Air discharge
3
3
Contact discharge
Electromagnetic fields (RFI), to IEC EN 61000-4-3
0.8–1.0 GHz
kV
8
kV
6
V/m
10
3
2.0–2.7 GHz
V/m
1
3
Burst, to IEC EN 61000-4-4
Supply cables
3
50
0.3
V/m
Radio interference suppression
3
mm
m
1.4–2.0 GHz
3
3
18
EN 55011 Class B
kV
2
Signal cables
kV
2
easyNet
kV
2
SWD-line
kV
2
Power pulses (surge), to IEC EN 61000-4-5 (supply cables, symmetrical)
kV
1
Radiated RFI, to IEC EN 61000-4-6
V
10
Insulation Resistance
3
3
3
Overvoltage category
III
Pollution degree
2
Clearance in air and creepage distances
EN 50178, UL 508, CSA C22.2, No. 142
Insulation resistance
EN 50178
Terminal Capacity
3
Solid, minimum to maximum
mm2
0.2 to 1.5 (AWG 24–16)
Flexible with ferrule, minimum to maximum
mm2
0.2 to 1.5 (AWG 24–16)
3
DC POW Rated Operational Voltage
Rated value Ue
Vdc, (%)
24 DC (–15/+20)
3
Permissible range 1
Vdc
20.4–28.8
Residual ripple
%
<5
3
Protection against polarity reversal
3
Input current
At rated operating voltage
Yes
mA
Inrush current and duty factor
12.5 A for 6 ms
3
Voltage dips (IEC EN 61131-2)
3
Note
1 Use power-feed modules if the cable length of the SWD line causes excessive voltage drop.
V7-T3-28
easy802: 500 / easy806: 900
ms
10
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays
3.3
easy802/806 Programmable Relays with SmartWire-DT, continued
3
Description
Unit
Specification
Heat dissipation
At 24 Vdc
W
easy802: max. 5 / easy806: max. 6
A
>3
3
Yes
3
Fuse
Potential isolation (easy800-SWD)
To auxiliary 1
To easyNet 1
Yes
To serial interface
Yes
To easyLink 1
No
To inputs 1
No
To outputs
3
1
3
3
No
To SWD 1
3
No
3
DC AUX Rated Operational Voltage (easy800-SWD)
Rated value Ue
Vdc, (%)
Permissible range UAUX
Vdc
20.4–28.8
Residual ripple
%
<5
Input current 2 (max.)
A
2 (UL) / 3 (CE)
Rated operational voltage of the 24 Vdc stations
V
UAUX –0.3 V
Protection against polarity reversal
24 (–15/+20)
3
3
3
Yes
Short-circuit strength
No
Fuse
A
< 2 (UL) external fuse with FAZ B2
Heat dissipation
At 24 Vdc
W
Normally 1
Potential isolation (easy800-SWD)
To POW power supply, inputs and outputs
3
3
3
Yes
To PC interface (COM), easyNet
Yes
To SWD
Yes
3
3
Notes
1 If present.
2 If contactors with a higher total power consumption are connected, an EU5C-SWD-PF1 or EU5C-SWD-PF2 power-feed module must be used.
3
3
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
3
easy802 and easy806 Controllers
3
0.30 (7.5)
3
4.94 (125.5)
3
3
4.33
(110.0)
3
4.72
(120.0)
3
5.12
(130.0)
3
3
0.18 (4.5)
1.38 (35.0)
3
4.72 (120.0)
3
0.30 (7.5)
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-29
3.3
3
Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays
Contents
easyRelay Expansion Modules
Description
3
easy500/700/800 Programmable Relays . . . . . . . .
easy802/806 Programmable Relays
with SmartWire-DT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
easyRelay and MFD Expansion Modules
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MFD-Titan Multi-Function Displays . . . . . . . . . . . .
easyRelay Communication Modules . . . . . . . . . . .
easyRelay Power Supplies, Accessories
and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
easyRelay and MFD Expansion Modules
3
Product Description
Standards
Expansion modules are
available for increasing the
input/output of the easy700/
800 and MFD-Titan multifunction displays to 24 inputs
and up to 16 outputs.
Expansion modules can be
mounted directly to the
easy700 or easy800 relays
or up to 98 ft (30m) away
using coupling module
EASY200-EASY.
●
3
3
3
3
3
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
CSA C22.2 No. 142-M1987
CSA C22.2 No. 213-M1987
EN 55011
EN 50178
EN 61131-2
IEC EN 61000-4
IEC 60068-2-6
IEC 60068-2-27
UL 508
Certifications
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
UL
CSA
CE
CSA Class I, Div. 2,
Groups A, B, C, D;
Temp. Code T3C
C-Tick
GOST-R
Ukrain-GOST
3
3
Shipping Approvals
●
Bureau Veritas
●
Det Norske Veritas
●
Germanischer Lloyd
●
Lloyd’s Register of Shipping
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-30
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
Page
V7-T3-20
V7-T3-26
V7-T3-31
V7-T3-31
V7-T3-32
V7-T3-33
V7-T3-40
V7-T3-43
3.3
Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays
Product Selection
EASY618_
3
Digital I/O Expansion Modules
Can be used via easyLink.
3
Outputs
Supply Voltage
Digital Inputs
100–240 Vac
12
24 Vdc
12
Transistor
Catalog
Number
3
6
—
EASY618-AC-RE
6
—
EASY618-DC-RE
3
Relay 10 A (UL)
24 Vdc
12
—
8
EASY620-DC-TE
24 Vdc
6
4
—
EASY410-DC-RE
24 Vdc
6
—
4
EASY410-DC-TE
24 Vdc
—
2
—
EASY202-RE
For distributed connection of a digital input/output expansion at up to 98 ft (30m) distance
3
3
3
EASY200-EASY
3
EASY406_
Analog I/O Expansion Modules
Can be used via easyLink.
Inputs
3
3
Digital Outputs
Supply
Voltage
Digital/
Analog
Can Be Used
for Digital
Relay 10 A (UL) Transistor
Analog
Outputs
Catalog
Number
24 Vdc
1/2
2
—
2
1
EASY406-DC-ME
24 Vdc
1/6
2
—
2
2
EASY411-DC-ME
3
3
3
3
Technical Data and Specifications
easyRelay I/O Expansion Modules
3
Type
EASY202-RE
EASY618-AC-RE
EASY618-DC-RE
EASY620-DC-TE
EASY200-EASY
Supply voltage
—
100 – 240 Vac
24 Vac
24 Vac
—
Heat dissipation
1W
10 VA
4W
4W
1W
Continuous current outputs 1
8A
8A
8A
0.5 A
—
Short-circuit proof with
power factor 1
Line protection
B16, 600 A
Line protection
B16, 600 A
Line protection
B16, 600 A
Line protection
B16, 600 A
—
3
Short-circuit proof with
power factor 0.7…0.7
Line protection
B16, 900 A
Line protection
B16, 900 A
Line protection
B16, 900 A
Line protection
B16, 900 A
—
3
Solid
0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
Flexible
0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
3
3
Connection cables
Degree of protection
3
3
3
RFI suppression
EN 55011, EN 55022 Class B, IEC 61000-6-1,2,3,4
Ambient operating temperature
–25 °C to +55 °C
–25 °C to +55 °C
–25 °C to +55 °C
–25 °C to +55 °C
–25 °C to +55 °C
Transport and storage temperature
–40 °C to +70 °C
–40 °C to +70 °C
–40 °C to +70 °C
–40 °C to +70 °C
–40 °C to +70 °C
Certification, standards
EN 50178, IEC/EN 60947, UL, CSA
Mounting
On 35 mm DIN rail or screw mounting with ZB4-101-GF1 mounting feet
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-31
3.3
3
3
3
Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
easy600 Series, Drawing Number MD05013002E
0.64 (16.3)
2.96 (75.0)
0.64 (16.3)
easy600
3
3
3.54
(90.0)
3
4.02
(102.0)
1.77
(45.0)
3
4.33
(110.0)
3
3
3
3
3
0.18 (4.5)
(M4)
1.87 (47.5)
4.23 (107.5)
2.22 (56.5)
2.28 (58.0)
EASY202-RE/EASY200-EASY/EASY205-ASI Series, Drawing Number MD05013012E
3
3
0.157
Dia.
(3.9)
0.30
(7.5)
easy200
3
3
3.54
(90.0)
3
4.02
(102.0)
1.77
(45.0)
3
4.33
(110.0)
3
3
0.18
(4.5)
3
1.87
(47.5)
2.22
(56.5)
3
(M4)
0.157
Dia.
(3.9)
0.30
(7.5)
1.40
(35.5)
2.28
(58.0)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-32
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays
3.3
Contents
MFD-Titan Multi-Function Displays
Description
Page
easy500/700/800 Programmable Relays . . . . . . . .
easy802/806 Programmable Relays
with SmartWire-DT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
easyRelay and MFD Expansion Modules . . . . . . .
MFD-Titan Multi-Function Displays
System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
easyRelay Communication Modules . . . . . . . . . . .
easyRelay Power Supplies, Accessories
and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
V7-T3-20
3
V7-T3-26
V7-T3-33
3
3
V7-T3-34
V7-T3-35
V7-T3-36
V7-T3-37
V7-T3-38
V7-T3-40
V7-T3-43
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
MFD-Titan Multi-Function Displays
Product Description
The MFD-Titan multi-function
displays can be used as
remote text displays for
easy500, easy700, easy800
and easy802/806 relays or
can be configured as
standalone or networked
multi-function displays. As a
multi-function display, the
MFD-Titan combines the
control functions of an
easy800 with a door-mounted
graphics display.
MFD-Titan multi-function
display is comprised of three
parts: display, controller and
I/O modules. Match each
piece to the needs of your
application. If you need to
both monitor and modify
parameters within your
application, choose the MFD80-B display. The
preprogrammed and user
programmable buttons give
you the capability to make
small changes to the way your
application is running, start or
stop a process, or change
your program completely.
Select a controller with or
without easyNet support, and
with AC or DC power. Finally,
add the MFD I/O module that
best suits your application.
Standards
MFD-Titan—for controlling
small applications that require
graphic visualization and for
large-scale applications with
20 points, expandable to 40
points locally, and expandable
using the easyNet network
up to 320 I/O points.
●
The MFD-Titan display can be
linked to the easy500/700/
800 models to provide an
enhanced text based operator
interface.
●
The easyNet integrated
network provides easy and
inexpensive linking of up to
eight MFD-Titan devices over
a distance of up to 1000
meters. Each MFD-Titan
device can run its program,
or be used as a distributed
input/output module. Connect
up to eight controllers with up
to 40 I/O to obtain 320 I/O.
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
CSA C22.2 No. 142-M1987
CSA C22.2 No. 213-M1987
EN 55011
EN 50178
EN 61131-2
IEC EN 61000-4
IEC 60068-2-6
IEC 60068-2-27
UL 508
3
Certifications
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
UL
CSA
CE
CSA Class I, Div. 2,
Groups A, B, C, D;
Temp. Code T3C
C-Tick
GOST-R
Ukrain-GOST
3
3
3
3
3
3
Shipping Approvals
●
Bureau Veritas
●
Det Norske Veritas
●
Germanischer Lloyd
●
Lloyd’s Register of Shipping
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-33
3.3
3
3
Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays
System Overview
MFD-Titan Multi-Function Display
3
1
3
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
3
5
6
3
3
3
3
3
3
9
3
11
3
8, 10
3
3
3
3
7
Item
Description
1
MFD-Titan, consisting of:
display/operating unit, power supply unit,
CPU module, I/O module
2
Ethernet gateway
3
3
PROFIBUS-DP bus module
4
AS-Interface bus module
3
5
CANopen bus module
6
DeviceNet bus module
7
Output expansion
8, 9, 10
I/O expansions
11
Coupling module for the remote connection
of a digital input/output expansion
3
3
3
V7-T3-34
9
10
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays
3.3
Product Selection
MFD-80-B
3
MFD-Titan Display/Operator Units
Monochrome display 132 x 64 pixels with switchable backlight and
removable front frame.
Description
Keypad
Eaton
Logo
Custom
Engraving
Catalog
Number
MFD display, NEMA 4X indoor rated
—
—
—
MFD-80-X
MFD display, NEMA 4X indoor rated
—
■
—
MFD-80
MFD display, NEMA 4X indoor rated
—
—
■
MFD-80-ETCH 1
MFD display with keypad 2
■
—
—
MFD-80-B-X
MFD display with keypad 2
■
■
—
MFD-80-B
MFD display with keypad 2
—
—
■
MFD-80-B-ETCH 1
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
MFD-CP4
MFD-Titan Text/Graphics Display Power Module
For use with MFD-Titan displays for use as remote text/graphics display.
3
Supply
Voltage
Description
Catalog
Number
3
100–240 Vac
AC power supply / communication module (no cable)
MFD-AC-CP4
AC module for easy500/700 relays and cable MFD-CP4-500-CAB5
MFD-AC-CP4-500
3
AC module for easy800 relays and cable MFD-CP4-800-CAB5
MFD-AC-CP4-800
DC power supply / communication module (no cable)
MFD-CP4
DC module for easy500/700 relays and cable MFD-CP4-500-CAB5
MFD-CP4-500
DC module for easy800 relays and cable MFD-CP4-800-CAB5
MFD-CP4-800
24 Vdc
MFD-CP
3
3
3
3
MFD-Titan Controller Modules
For use with MFD-Titan display/operator units.
Add MFD-Titan I/O modules as needed.
Supply
Voltage
100–240 Vac
24 Vdc
3
Description
Catalog
Number
3
3
Program and screen memory
MFD-AC-CP8-ME
Program and screen memory, with easyNet
MFD-AC-CP8-NT
Program and screen memory
MFD-CP8-ME
Program and screen memory, with easyNet
MFD-CP8-NT
Double program and screen memory (as MFD-CP8)
MFD-CP10-ME
Double program and screen memory (as MFD-CP8), with easyNet
MFD-CP10-NT
3
3
3
Notes
1 To order an MFD display with custom engraving, a marking file with the required text and/or graphics must be created
as a Labeleditor ZIP file. The ZIP file has to be sent to the Eaton factory, and the name of the file must be referenced
in the order notes section. To download the Labeleditor configuration software, please visit www.eaton.com/software.
2 To obtain a NEMA 4X indoor rating on MFD displays with keypads, use with a protective membrane cover MFD-XM-80.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-35
3.3
3
MFD-R16
Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays
MFD-Titan I/O Modules
For use with MFD-Titan controller modules.
Inputs
3
Supply
Voltage
Description
Digital
3
100–240 Vac
16 I/O
12
12
12
24 Vdc
3
24 Vdc
3
17 I/O
Outputs
Relay
Transistor Analog
Catalog
Number
—
4
—
—
MFD-AC-R16
4
4
—
—
MFD-R16
4
—
4
—
MFD-T16
12
4
4
—
1
MFD-RA17
12
4
—
4
1
MFD-TA17
Analog 1
3
3
MFD-TP_
MFD-Titan I/O Modules with Temperature Detection
For use with MFD-CP8-_ 2 and MFD-CP10-_ MFD-Titan controller modules.
Inputs
3
Supply
Voltage
3
24 Vdc
3
3
3
Digital
Outputs
Can Be Used
For Analog
Pt100
Relay
10 A (UL)
Transistor
Analog
Temperature Ranges
6
2
2
—
4
—
–40 ° to +90 °C/0 ° to +250 °C/0 ° to +400 °C MFD-TP12-PT-A
6
2
2
—
4
—
–200 ° to +200 °C/0 ° to +850 °C
MFD-TP12-PT-B
6
2
—
—
4
—
–40 ° to +90 °C/0 ° to +250 °C
MFD-TP12-NI-A
6
2
2
—
4
1
–40 ° to +90 °C/0 ° to +250 °C/0 ° to +400 °C MFD-TAP13-PT-A
6
2
2
—
4
1
–200 ° to +200 °C/0 ° to +850 °C
MFD-TAP13-PT-B
6
2
—
—
4
1
–40 ° to +90 °C/0 ° to +250 °C
MFD-TAP13-NI-A
3
3
Accessories
Miscellaneous Parts
3
Description
Catalog Number
3
MFD-Titan display protective membrane cover
MFD-XM-80
MFD-Titan display protective plastic cover
MFD-XS-80
3
MFD-Titan display DIN rail mount kit
MFD-TS-144
3
Notes
1 Analog inputs optional. Use of analog inputs will result in a decrease in the same number of available digital inputs
2 Version 8 and higher MFD-CP8_ controllers are compatible with the temperature detection modules.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-36
Catalog
Number
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
3.3
Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays
Technical Data and Specifications
3
MFD-80, MFD-CP4, MFD-CP8
Type
MFD-80…
MFD-CP4/CP8
Solid
—
0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
Flexible
—
0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
IP65
IP20
3
Connection cables
Degree of protection
3
3
RFI suppression
EN 55011, EN 55022 Class B, IEC 61000-6-1, 2, 3, 4
EN 55011, EN 55022 Class B, IEC 61000-6-1, 2, 3, 4
Ambient operating temperature
Clearly legible at –5 °C to +50 °C
–25 °C to +55 °C
Transport and storage temperature
–40 °C to +70 °C
–40 °C to +70 °C
Hazardous location
CSA Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Temp. Code T3C
CSA Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Temp. Code T3C
3
3
3
MFD-Titan I/O Modules
3
Type
MFD-AC-R16
MFD-R16
MFD-RA17
MFD-T16
MFD-TA17
Supply voltage
Supply via
MFD-CP8 module
Supply via
MFD-CP8 module
Supply via
MFD-CP8 module
Supply via
MFD-CP8 module
Supply via
MFD-CP8 module
0.5 W
0.5 W
0.5 W
0.5 W
0.5 W
8A
8A
8A
0.5 A
0.5 A
Short-circuit proof with
power factor 1
Line protection
B16, 600 A
Line protection
B16, 600 A
Line protection
B16, 600 A
—
—
3
Short-circuit proof with
power factor 0.7…0.7
Line protection
B16, 600 A
Line protection
B16, 600 A
Line protection
B16, 600 A
—
—
3
Solid
0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
Flexible
0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
Degree of protection
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
RFI suppression
EN 55011, EN 55022 Class B, IEC 61000-6-1,2,3,4
3
3
Heat dissipation
Continuous current outputs
1
3
3
3
Connection cables
Ambient operating temperature
–25 °C to +55 °C
–25 °C to +55 °C
–25 °C to +55 °C
–25 °C to +55 °C
–25 °C to +55 °C
Transport and storage temperature
–40 °C to +70 °C
–40 °C to +70 °C
–40 °C to +70 °C
–40 °C to +70 °C
–40 °C to +70 °C
Mounting
Snap fitted to
MFD-CP8 module
Snap fitted to
MFD-CP8 module
Snap fitted to
MFD-CP8 module
Snap fitted to
MFD-CP8 module
Snap fitted to
MFD-CP8 module
3
3
3
MFD-CP4 and CP8 Communication Modules
Type
MFD-80…
MFD-CP4-…
MFD-CP8…
3
MFD-AC-CP8…
Supply voltage
Supply from -CP
24 Vdc
24 Vdc
100–240 Vac
Heat dissipation
3W
1.5 W
3W
8 VA
Mounting
Front mounting in 2 x 22.5 mm
Standard drill holes
Snap fitted to MFD-80
Snap fitted to MFD-80 or on 35 mm DIN rail or screw mounting with
ZB4-101-GF1 mounting feet
3
3
3
Note
1 Relay = 8 A with resistive load, 3 A with inductive load.
Transistor outputs = 0.5 A/24 Vdc, maximum four outputs switchable in parallel.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-37
3.3
3
3
Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
MFD-80 Series, Drawing Number MD05013005E
3
0.89
(22.5)
MFD-80
3
0.67
(17.0)
0.88 + 0.02
(22.3) + 0.4
3
1.26
(32.0)
3
1.18
(30.0)
3
3.41
(86.5)
3
3
1.18 ± 0.01
(30.0) ± 0.2
3
3
MFD-CP…
0.79
(20.0)
1.18
(30.0)
0.54
(13.7)
1.11
(28.3)
1.11
(28.3)
2.44
(62.0)
3
MFD-80
Template for Holes, Scale 1:1
3.41
(86.5)
3
3
3
MFD-CP4, MFD-80 and MFD-CP4 Series Combined, Drawing Number MD013013E
1-6
-0.24
(0.04)
MFD-80
MFD-CP4
3
0.81
(20.5)
3
3
1.70
(43.2)
MFD-CP4
MFD-CP4
3
2.28
(58.0)
3
3
3
0.89
(22.5)
3
1.08
(27.5)
0.89
(22.5)
1.43
(36.2)
1.18
(30.0)
2.95
(75.0)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-38
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays
3.3
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
3
MFD-CP8 Series, Drawing Number MD05013006E
3
MFD-CP8
2.95
(75.0)
0.64
(16.3)
3
0.640
(16.3)
3
3
3
3.54
(90.0)
3
3
3
0.18
(4.5)
1.18 ± 0.01
(30.0 ± 0.2)
1.53
(38.8)
1.53
(38.8)
3
1.16
(29.5)
3
3
4.23
(107.5)
3
MFD-R/MFD-T I/O Module, Drawing Number MD05013007E
3
MFD-R and MFD-T I/O
3
3
3.54
(90.0)
3
3
3.47
(88.1)
0.75
(19.0)
3
0.98
(25.0)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-39
3.3
3
Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays
Contents
easyRelay Communication Modules
Description
3
Page
easy500/700/800 Programmable Relays . . . . . . . .
easy802/806 Programmable Relays
with SmartWire-DT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
easyRelay and MFD Expansion Modules . . . . . . .
MFD-Titan Multi-Function Displays . . . . . . . . . . . .
easyRelay Communication Modules
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
easyRelay Power Supplies, Accessories
and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-20
V7-T3-26
V7-T3-33
V7-T3-33
V7-T3-41
V7-T3-41
V7-T3-43
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
easyRelay
Communication Modules
Product Description
Product Selection
Four network modules are
available for easily connecting
to world-standard networks.
The network modules can be
used with the easy700/800
programmable relays and
MFD-Titan multi-function
displays.
The Ethernet gateway connects devices provided with an RS-232 serial
interface with the Ethernet network. This gateway can be used with easy500
as well as easy700/800 relays and MFD-Titan displays.
EASY209-SE
Ethernet Gateway Module
Ethernet gateway
Available communication
modules support:
●
●
●
●
DeviceNet
PROFIBUS-DP
AS-Interface
CANopen
Catalog
Number
Description
EASY204-DP
Serial interface easyRelay or MFD-…CP8/CP10_ to
Ethernet, for connecting to easyOPC server,
easySoft or easyCom
Network Interface Modules
Catalog
Number
Description
All modules operate
exclusively as nodes on
the given network.
EASY209-SE 1
DeviceNet interface module
Addresses available 0 to 63
EASY222-DN
PROFIBUS-DP interface module
Device addresses available 1 to 126
EASY204-DP
3
AS-Interface interface module with
4 in and 4 out
Device: 4 inputs, 4 outputs, 4 parameter bits
Addresses available 0 to 31
EASY205-ASI
3
CANopen interface module
Addresses available 1 to 127
EASY221-CO
3
3
Note
1 To set up the Ethernet gateway, download the EASY209-SE configuration software at www.eaton.com/easyrelays.
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-40
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
3.3
Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays
Technical Data and Specifications
3
easy700/800/MFD Communication Interface Modules
EASY204-DP, EASY205-ASI, EASY221-CO, EASY222-DN, EASY209-SE 1
Description
3
Specification
Supply voltage
3
24 Vdc
2
1W
3
Solid
0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
3
Flexible
Heat dissipation
Connection cables
3
Degree of protection
IP20
RFI suppression
EN 55011, EN 55022 Class B, IEC 61000-6-1,2,3,4
Ambient operating temperature
–25 °C to +55 °C
Transport and storage temperature
–40 °C to +70 °C
Certification, standards
EN 50178, IEC/EN 60947, UL, CSA
Mounting
On 35 mm DIN rail or screw mounting with ZB4-101-GF1 mounting feet
3
3
3
Notes
1 EASY209-SE is also compatible with easy500 programmable relays.
2 EASY204-DP dissipates 2 W.
3
3
3
Dimensions
3
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
EASY202-RE/EASY200-EASY/EASY205-ASI/
EASY209-SE Series, Drawing Number MD05013012E
EASY202-RE
EASY200-EASY
EASY205-ASI
EASY221-CO/EASY222-DN Series,
Drawing Number MD05013010E
0.30
(7.5)
EASY221-CO
EASY222-DN
0.157
(M4)
Dia.
(3.9)
3
3
0.30
(7.5)
3
3
3.54
(90.0)
3.54
(90.0)
4.02
(102.0)
1.77
(45.0)
1.77
(45.0)
3
4.02
(102.0)
4.33
(110.0)
4.33
(110.0)
3
3
3
0.18
(4.5)
1.87
(47.5)
2.22
(56.5)
2.28
(58.0)
3
0.18
(4.5)
0.157
(M4)
Dia.
(3.9)
0.30
(7.5)
1.40
(35.5)
0.30
(7.5)
1.87
(47.5)
2.22
(56.5)
2.64
(67.0)
3
1.40
(35.5)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-41
3.3
3
Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays
EASY204-DP Series,
Drawing Number MD05013011E
3
3
0.30
(7.5)
EASY204-DP
3
3.54
(90.0)
4.02
(102.0)
4.33
(110.0)
3
1.77
(45.0)
3
3
3
3
0.18
(4.5)
3
1.87
(47.5)
2.22
(56.5)
3
(M4)
0.157
Dia.
(3.9)
1.40
(35.5)
0.30
(7.5)
2.44
(62.0)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-42
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
3.3
Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays
Contents
easyRelay Power Supplies, Accessories and Software
Description
Page
easy500/700/800 Programmable Relays . . . . . . . .
easy802/806 Programmable Relays
with SmartWire-DT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
easyRelay and MFD Expansion Modules . . . . . . .
MFD-Titan Multi-Function Displays . . . . . . . . . . . .
easyRelay Communication Modules . . . . . . . . . . .
easyRelay Power Supplies, Accessories
and Software
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
V7-T3-20
3
V7-T3-26
V7-T3-30
V7-T3-33
V7-T3-40
3
V7-T3-44
V7-T3-46
V7-T3-46
V7-T3-47
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
easyRelay Power
Supplies, Accessories
and Software
3
3
Product Description
Product Selection
Power Supplies—12 Vdc
and 24 Vdc power supplies
for applications where only
100–240 Vac is available.
Power supply units are
primary switched-mode
power supplies that are
optimally suited for the
easyRelay and easySafety
product series in terms of
functions and design. The
new and high-performance
power supply units support
safe operation in plants and
machines. They are simple
and flexible in handling.
Accessories—Memory
modules, cables and other
components to complete
your automation solutions.
Software—The easySoft
software is used to program
all of the easyRelays and
MFD-Titan displays. The
Windows®-based software
provides straightforward
circuit diagram input and
editing and the diagrams can
be displayed in the format
desired. When easy800
and MFD-Titan controllers are
connected using easyNet,
all connected devices can
be accessed and their
programs loaded from a
single controller.
easySoft includes an
integrated offline simulation
tool that allows users to
test a circuit diagram
before commissioning.
Fast diagnosis of the voltage
output: continuous light on
the LED—fault-free
operation; flashing on the
LED—short circuit or
overload on voltage output.
●
●
●
●
●
EASY…-POW
The primary switched-mode
power supply units can be
used everywhere:
Suitable for worldwide
use due to wide range
input from 85 V to 264 Vac,
50/60 Hz
Output voltages can be
connected in parallel to
increase power output or
for redundant operation to
achieve greater system
availability
Compliance with
international standards and
approvals
Safety extra low voltage
(SELV to EN 60 950)
Radio interference Class B
to EN 55 011 and EN 55 022
for use in industrial and
public networks
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Power Supply Units
Rated input voltage 100–240 Vac, single-phase.
3
Input Voltage
Range
Rated Output
Voltage
Output Voltage
Setting Range
Rated Output
Power
Rated Output
Current
Catalog Number
100–240 Vac
24 Vdc/12 Vdc
—
8W
0.35 A/20 mA
EASY200-POW
24 Vdc
—
30 W
1.25 A
EASY400-POW
24 Vdc
—
60 W
2.5 A
EASY500-POW
24 Vdc
—
100 W
4.2 A
EASY600-POW
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-43
3.3
3
3
3
3
3
Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays
Bluetooth Adapter
Conveniently commission and service machines and other equipment remotely.
●
●
●
Simple communication
An 8-digit PIN security
Simple recognition in
with easy800 or MFD-Titan
code prevents
Windows 7
from outside loud and/or
unauthorized remote
●
Full online functionality
dangerous areas
access
with easySoft-Pro
V6.91or higher
EASY800-BLT-ADP
3
●
Has all necessary radio
type approvals for USA,
Canada and Europe
Bluetooth Adapter
Description
Catalog Number
easy800/MFD Bluetooth adapter
EASY800-BLT-ADP
The Blue tooth adapter provides wireless connectivity to easySoft-Pro for easy programming
download and upload. Use it with the easyRemote Display Android App for simple and fast access
to your easy800 relays up to a distance of 10 meters.
3
3
3
3
3
Accessories
easySoft
3
3
Programming Software
Description
Catalog Number
Programming software for easy500/700
EASY-SOFT-BASIC
Programming software for easy800, easy 802/806 and MFD-Titan
includes SWD-Assist for configuration of the SmartWire-DT network
EASY-SOFT-PRO
3
3
3
3
EASY-USB-CAB
Programming Cables
Description
Catalog Number
3
easy500/700 to PC programming cable—USB
EASY-USB-CAB
easy500/700 to PC programming cable—RS-232
EASY-PC-CAB
3
easy800/MFD to PC programming cable—RS-232
EASY800-PC-CAB
easy800/MFD to PC programming cable—USB
EASY800-USB-CAB
easy802/806 to PC programming cable—USB, 2m
EU4A-RJ45-USB-CAB1
3
3
3
MFD-CP4-800-CAB5
Cables and Connectors
Description
Catalog Number
3
easy500/700 to MFD-CP4 communication cable, 5m
MFD-CP4-500-CAB5
easy800 to MFD-CP4 communication cable, 5m
MFD-CP4-800-CAB5
3
easy800 to MFD-CP8 communication cable, 2m
MFD-800-CAB
easy800 to MFD-CP8 communication cable, 5m
MFD-800-CAB5
3
easy800 modem, printer, programming cable
EASY800-MO-CAB
easy802/806 to MFD-CP4 communication cable, 1.5m
EU4A-RJ45-CAB2
easy802/806 to XV HMI communication cable, 2m
EU4A-RJ45-CAB1
3
easy800/MFD easyNet cable, 0.3m networking cable
EASY-NT-30
easy800/MFD easyNet cable, 0.8m networking cable
EASY-NT-80
3
easy800/MFD easyNet cable, 1.5m networking cable
EASY-NT-150
easy800/MFD easyNet cable (cable only, no connectors, see EASY-NT-RJ45), 100m
EASY-NT-CAB
RJ45 network connectors for easyNet cable (EASY-NT-CAB), 10/pack
EASY-NT-RJ45
easy800/MFD network termination resistor, 2/pack
EASY-NT-R
EASY800-MO-CAB
3
3
3
V7-T3-44
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays
EASY-M-32K
EASY-M-256K
3.3
Memory Storage Modules
Description
Catalog Number
easy500/700 32K memory storage module
EASY-M-32K
easy800/MFD 256K memory storage module
EASY-M-256K
easy800/MFD 512K memory storage module
EASY-M-512K
3
3
3
3
3
3
Panel Window
Mounting Kit
3
Miscellaneous Parts
Description
Catalog Number
easy500 panel window
SKF-FF4
easy700/800 panel window
SKF-FF6
easy500/700/800 panel window mounting kit to front mount units
SKF-HA
High current input adapter, six-channel
EASY256-HCI
Base to expander, interface connector
EASY-LINK-DS
easy500 relay simulator
EASY412-DC-SIM-NA
Mounting feet, 9/pack
ZB4-101-GF1
Grounding kit
ZB4-102-KS1
3
3
3
3
3
3
Simulator
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-45
3.3
3
3
3
Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays
Technical Data and Specifications
easyRelay Power Supplies
Type
EASY200-POW
EASY400-POW
Supply voltage
100–240 Vac
100–240 Vac
85–264 Vac
Maximum range
85–264 Vac
3
Output voltage
24 Vdc (±3%)
24 Vdc (±3%)
Output current (rated value)
0.25 A
1.25 A
3
Overcurrent limitation form
0.3 A
1.4 A
Short-circuit proof (secondary)
Yes
Yes
3
Overload proof
Yes
Yes
3
Potential isolation (prim/sec.)
Yes, SELV, (to EN 600950, VDE 805)
Yes, SELV, (to EN 600950, VDE 805)
Others
Additional output voltage 12 DC, 20 mA
Additional output voltage 12 DC, 20 mA
Solid
0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
Flexible
0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
Degree of protection
IP20
IP20
RFI suppression
EN 55011, EN 55022 Class B, IEC 61000-6-1, 2, 3, 4
EN 55011, EN 55022 Class B, IEC 61000-6-1, 2, 3, 4
3
Ambient operating temperature
–25 °C to +55 °C
–25 °C to +55 °C
Transport and storage temperature
–40 °C to +70 °C
–40 °C to +70 °C
3
Mounting
On 35 mm DIN rail or screw mounting with ZB4-101-GF1 mounting feet
3
3
3
3
Connection cables
Wiring Diagram
3
EASY256-HCI
3
L
N
3
>1A
S.. S..
3
3
L
3
N
N
115/230 Vh
3
3
EASY5..-AC-..
EASY7..-AC-..
3
I1
I2
I3
I4
I5
.....
N
N
1
2
3
4
5
6
Input 115/230 Vh
EASY256-HCI
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-46
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays
3.3
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
3
EASY200-POW/EASY256-HCI and EASY400-POW Series, Drawing Number MD05013004E
3
EASY200-POW
EASY256-HCI
EASY400-POW
0.42
(10.8)
3
3
0.30
(7.5)
1.97
(50.0)
3
3
3.54
(90.0)
3.54
(90.0)
4.02
(102.0)
1.77
(45.0)
3
4.02
(102.0)
4.33
(110.0)
3
3
4.33
(110.0)
3
3
0.18
(4.5)
1.87
(47.5)
0.157
(M4)
Dia.
(3.9)
1.41
(35.8)
2.22
(56.5)
0.30
(7.5)
3
1.40
(35.5)
2.81
(71.5)
3
3
MFD-XS-80 and MFD-XM-80 Series, Drawing Number MD05013009E
MFD-XS-80
3
MFD-XM-80
3
3
3.48
(88.5)
3.74
(95.0)
3
3
3
3.41
(86.5)
3
0.89
(22.5)
3.48
(88.5)
0.98
(25.0)
3
SKF-FF4 and SKF-FF6 Series, Drawing Number MD05013014E
SKF-FF4
SKF-FF6
0.63
(16.0)
3
0.63
(16.0)
3
3
2.99
(76.0)
2.99
(76.0)
3
3
3.70
(94.0)
0.98
(25.0)
5.12
(130.0)
3
0.98
(25.0)
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-47
3.3
3
3
Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
SKF-HA Series, Drawing Number MD05013015E
0.43
(11.0)
SKF-HA
3
3
3
2.60
(66.0)
1.89
(48.0)
3
3
3
3.23
(82.0)
3
3
ZB4-101-GF1 Mounting Feet
Fitting on 35 mm Top-Hat Rail
3
Fitting on Mounting Plate (Horizontal)
*
*
ZB4-101-GF1
3
3
3
3
*
3
3
3
*
* 3 mounting feet are sufficient
ZB4-102-KS1 Series—
Grounding the Screen for Top-Hat Rail
EASY412-DC-SIM-NA Series
3
Connect Outputs
Connection
Cable
3
Digital Inputs
3
3
DEL
ALT
ESC
OK
3
3
3
ZB4-102-KS1 Series—
Grounding the Screen for Mounting Plate
3
3
3
Power Supply Unit
3
3
V7-T3-48
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
Contents
General Purpose Plug-In Relay
Description
D1RR/D1RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D2RR/D2RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D3RR/D3RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D4 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D5RR/D5RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D7PR/D7PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D8 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D9 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
V7-T3-53
V7-T3-57
V7-T3-67
V7-T3-76
V7-T3-80
V7-T3-89
V7-T3-103
V7-T3-108
V7-T3-112
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Product Selection Guide
3
General Purpose Relay Selection Characteristics
●
●
●
●
Current rating: 1 A–30 A
Contact arrangement:
SPDT, DPDT, 3PDT, 4PDT,
etc.
Coil voltage: 6 V–240 Vac/
6 V–110 Vdc
Mounting options: socket,
flange, DIN rail, panel
●
●
Specifications: CSA, CE,
IEC, NEMA, UL, etc.
Other: physical
dimensions, maximum
voltage, mechanical/
electrical life, etc.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-49
3.4
3
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
Relay Series
D1RR/D1RF
D2RR/D2RF
D3RR/D3RF
Note: UL when used with the appropriate socket.
Note: UL when used with the appropriate socket.
Note: UL when used with the appropriate socket.
3
3
3
3
3
3
Approvals
3
3
Features
3
3
3
3
Polycarbonate cover
Polycarbonate cover
Polycarbonate cover
Indicator lamp and pushbutton available
Indicator lamp and pushbutton available
Indicator lamp and pushbutton available
Panel, DIN and flange mounting
Panel and DIN mounting
Panel and DIN mounting
Latching
Contact Data
Configuration
SPDT
DPDT
4PDT
6A
Max. allowable load
15 A
12 A
Material
Silver alloy
Silver alloy
Silver alloy
3
Dielectric strength
between poles
1500 V
1500 V
1500 V
3
Coil Data
AC
6 to 240 Vac
6 to 240 Vac
6 to 240 Vac
3
DC
6 to 110 Vdc
6 to 110 Vdc
6 to 110 Vdc
3
10 A
DPDT
3PDT
10 A
10 A
Power
3
3
3
3
VA (Vac)
0.9 VA
1.2 VA
3 VA 1.4 W (D3RR and D3RF)
Watts (Vdc)
0.7 W
0.9 W
—
General Data
Ambient temperature
Storage
–40 °F to +185 °F (–40 °C to +85 °C)
–40 °F to +185 °F (–40 °C to +85 °C)
–40 °F to +185 °F (–40 °C to +85 °C)
Operational
–40 °F to +131 °F (–40 °C to +55 °C)
–40 °F to +131 °F (–40 °C to +55 °C)
–40 °F to +131 °F (–40 °C to +55 °C)
20 milliseconds
20 milliseconds
20 milliseconds
Mechanical operations 10 million
10 million
5 million (D3RR and D3RF)
Electrical operations
100,000
200,000
100,000
Page Numbers
V7-T3-53 to V7-T3-56
V7-T3-57 to V7-T3-66
V7-T3-67 to V7-T3-75
V7-T3-50
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
Response time
3
3
3
Life
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.4
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
General Purpose Plug-In Relays, continued
Relay Series
D4
D5RR/D5RF
3
D7PR/D7PF
3
3
3
3
Approvals
3
3
Note: UL when used with the appropriate socket.
Note: UL when used with the appropriate socket.
Polycarbonate cover
Polycarbonate cover
Polycarbonate cover
Indicator lamp available
Indicator lamp and pushbutton available
Indicator lamp and pushbutton available
Panel and DIN mounting
Panel, DIN and flange mounting
Panel and DIN mounting
3
Features
3
3
Socket has built-in hold-down spring
3
Contact Data
Configuration
SPDT
DPDT
DPDT
3PDT
DPDT
3PDT
4PDT
Max. allowable load
10 A at 250 Vac
5 A at 240 Vac
10 A
10 A
15 A
15 A
15 A
Material
AgCdO
Silver alloy
Silver alloy
Dielectric strength
5000 V
1500 V
1500 V
2500 V
2500 V
AC
6 to 240 Vac
6 to 240 Vac
6 to 240 Vac
DC
6 to 110 Vdc
6 to 110 Vdc
6 to 110 Vdc
VA (Vac)
0.9 VA
3 VA
1.2 VA
1.5 VA
1.5 VA
Watts (Vdc)
0.5 W
1.4 W
0.9 W
1.4 W
1.5 W
Storage
–40 °F to +158 °F (–40 °C to +70 °C)
–40 °F to +185 °F (–40 °C to +85 °C)
–40 °F to +185 °F (–40 °C to +85 °C)
Operational
–40 °F to +158 °F (–40 °C to +70 °C)
–40 °F to +131 °F (–40 °C to +55 °C)
–40 °F to +131 °F (–40 °C to +55 °C)
15 milliseconds
20 milliseconds
20 milliseconds (30 milliseconds for latching)
3
Mechanical operations
10 million
5 million
10 million
3
Electrical operations
100,000
100,000
100,000
V7-T3-76 to V7-T3-79
V7-T3-80 to V7-T3-88
V7-T3-89 to V7-T3-102
3
3
3
Coil Data
3
Power
3
3
General Data
3
Ambient temperature
Response time
3
Life
Page Numbers
200,000
200,000
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-51
3.4
3
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
General Purpose Plug-In Relays, continued
Relay Series
D8
D9
3
3
3
3
3
Approvals
3
Features
3
3
3
3
Dust cover
Dust cover
Panel, DIN and flange mounting
Pushbutton available
Quick-connect and screw terminals
Panel mounting
Screw terminals
Contact Data
Configuration
4PST
3
SPST-NO
DPST-NO
NO
NC
Max. allowable load
3
30 A at
220 Vac
25 A at
220 Vac
25 A at
220 Vac
8 A at
220 Vac
Material
AgCdO
AgCdO
3
Dielectric strength
4000 V
4000 V
3
AC
6 to 240 Vac
24 to 240 Vac
DC
12 to 24 Vdc
12 to 110 Vdc
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Coil Data
Power
VA (Vac)
2.5 VA
2.6 VA
Watts (Vdc)
1.9 W
2.0 W
Storage
–4 °F to +185 °F (–20 °C to +85 °C)
–13 °F to +140 °F (–25 °C to +60 °C)
Operational
–4 °F to +131 °F (–20 °C to +55 °C)
–13 °F to +140 °F (–25 °C to +60 °C)
30 milliseconds
50 milliseconds
Mechanical operations
5 million
1 million
Electrical operations
100,000
100,000
V7-T3-103 to V7-T3-107
V7-T3-108 to V7-T3-111
General Data
Ambient temperature
Response time
Life
Page Numbers
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-52
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
3.4
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
Contents
D1 Series Relay
Description
Page
D1RR/D1RF Series
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D2RR/D2RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D3RR/D3RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D4 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D5RR/D5RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D7PR/D7PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D8 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D9 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
3
V7-T3-54
V7-T3-54
V7-T3-55
V7-T3-56
V7-T3-56
V7-T3-57
V7-T3-67
V7-T3-76
V7-T3-80
V7-T3-89
V7-T3-103
V7-T3-108
V7-T3-112
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
D1RR/D1RF Series
Product Description
The D1 Series of relay
provides a compact singlepole relay capable of handling
15 A. Multiple feature and
voltage options allow for the
perfect fit for any application.
Features
D1RR
●
Compact relay capable of
breaking relatively large
load currents
●
Panel and DIN rail
mounting
D1RF
●
The contact operation
can be easily checked by
Push-to-Test button
●
Flag indicator shows relay
status in manual or
powered condition
●
LED status lamp shows
coil ON or OFF status—
ideal for use in low light
applications
●
Push-to-Test button allows
for manual operation of
relay without the need for
coil power
●
Lock-down door holds
pushbutton and contacts in
the operate position when
activated
●
Finger-grip cover allows
operator to remove relays
from sockets easily
●
ID tag/write label to
identify relays in multiplerelay circuits
●
Bipolar LED allows for
reverse polarity
applications
3
Standards and Certifications
3
UL Listed
3
When used with
accompanying Eaton
screw terminal socket.
3
Catalog Number Selection
3
D1RF/D1RR Series
3
D1RF 1 A
Family Type
D1RF = Full-featured style 1
D1RR = Plain cover style
Contact Configuration
1 = SPDT
3
Coil Voltage
A = 120 Vac
A1 = 110 Vdc
B = 240 Vac
R1 = 12 Vdc
T = 24 Vac
T1 = 24 Vdc
W1 = 48 Vdc
Note
1 Full-featured, LED test button, flag
indicator, lock-down door, finger-grip
cover, ID tag.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-53
3.4
3
3
3
3
3
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
Product Selection
D1RR/D1RF Relay/Socket Quick Reference
Relay
Type
Socket
Clip
Module
Type
ID
Tag
Jumper
D1RR1
D1RAA
PMC-1781
B
—
—
D1RF1
D1RAA
PMC-1781
B
—
—
D1RF Series Relay
D1RR/D1RF Series
3
Coil
Voltage
3
Full Featured
12 Vdc
3
24 Vac 50/60 Hz
24 Vdc
110 Vdc
Coil Resistance
(Ohms)
Catalog
Number
SPDT
188
D1RF1R1
SPDT
180
D1RF1T
SPDT
750
D1RF1T1
SPDT
13,800
D1RF1A1
3
120 Vac 50/60 Hz
SPDT
4430
D1RF1A
240 Vac 50/60 Hz
SPDT
15,720
D1RF1B
3
Plain Cover
12 Vdc
SPDT
188
D1RR1R1
24 Vdc
SPDT
750
D1RR1T1
48 Vdc
SPDT
2600
D1RR1W1
3
3
3
3
Contact
Configuration
110 Vdc
SPDT
13,800
D1RR1A1
120 Vac 50/60 Hz
SPDT
4430
D1RR1A
240 Vac
SPDT
15,270
D1RR1B
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Accessories
D1RR/D1RF Sockets and Accessories
Type
Module
Size
Nominal Voltage
(Max. for Sockets)
Nominal
Current
Mounting Style
Wire Size
Wire
Connection
Standard
Pack
Catalog
Number
Socket
B
300
20
Panel/DIN rail
12 /14 (2) AWG, 4 /2.5 (2) mm2
Screw clamping
10
D1RAA 1
Flange mount adapter
—
—
—
Flange
—
—
25
PFC-D11
Metal spring clip
—
—
—
—
—
—
25
PMC-1781
Protection diode
B
6 to 250 Vdc
—
—
—
—
20
MOD-BD250
LED indicator
MOV suppressor
3
B
24 Vac/Vdc
—
—
—
—
20
MOD-BLG24
B
120/240 Vac/Vdc
—
—
—
—
20
MOD-BLG240
B
120 Vac/Vdc
—
—
—
—
20
MOD-BMV120
B
24 Vac/Vdc
—
—
—
—
20
MOD-BMV24
B
240 Vac/Vdc
—
—
—
—
20
MOD-BMV240
—
—
—
—
—
—
25
PFP-P
3
Plastic DIN rail end stop
3
Note
1 Protection Category (Finger Safe), EN 60529: IP20.
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-54
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
Technical Data and Specifications
3
D1RF/D1RR Relay Specifications
Description
D1RR
D1RF
3
15 A
15 A
3
Contact Characteristics
Contact rating
Terminal style
Plug-in
Plug-in
Contact materials
Silver alloy
Silver alloy
Maximum switching voltage
300 V
300 V
Switching current at voltage—resistive
20 A at 120 Vac 50/60 Hz
20 A at 120 Vac 50/60 Hz
20 A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz
20 A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz
20 A at 28 Vdc
20 A at 28 Vdc
Switching current at voltage
1/2 hp at 120 Vac
1/2 hp at 120 Vac
1 hp at 277 Vac
1 hp at 277 Vac
Pilot duty
B300
B300
Minimum switching requirement
100 mA at 5 Vdc (0.5 W)
100 mA at 5 Vdc (0.5 W)
% of nominal (AC)
85 to 110%
85 to 110%
% of nominal (DC)
80 to 110%
80 to 110%
3
3
3
3
3
3
Coil Characteristics
3
Operating range
Average consumption
Dropout voltage threshold
0.9 VA
0.9 VA
0.7 W
0.7 W
15% (AC)
15% (AC)
10% (DC)
10% (DC)
3
3
3
3
Performance
Electrical life (UL 508) operations at rated current
100,000 operations
100,000 operations
Mechanical life operations unpowered
10,000,000 operations
10,000,000 operations
Response time
20 ms
20 ms
3
Between coil and contact Vac (rms)
2500 V (rms)
2500 V (rms)
3
Between poles Vac (rms)
1500 V (rms)
1500 V (rms)
Storage
–40 °F to +131 °F (–40 °C to +55ºC)
–40 °F to +131 °F (–40 °C to +55 °C)
Operation
3
Dielectric strength
3
Environment
Ambient air temperature around the device
–40 °F to +185 °F (–40 °C to +85ºC)
–40 °F to +185 °F (–40 °C to +85 °C)
Vibration resistance—operational
3 g-n at 10–55 Hz
3 g-n at 10–55 Hz
Shock resistance
10 g-n
10 g-n
Degree of protection
IP40
IP40
Cover options
Plain cover
Full featured
Features
Mechanical flag indicator (optional LED)
Locking pushbutton/
Bipolar LED/
Removable ID tag/
Mechanical flag indicator
3
3
3
3
Features
Product certifications
RoHS/UL/CE/CSA
3
3
3
RoHS/UL/CE/CSA
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-55
3.4
3
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
Wiring Diagram
D1RF/D1RR
3
12
1
14
5
11
9
3
3
3
3
3
A1
A2
3
13
14
IEC
NEMA
3
3
3
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
D1RF/D1RR
3
3
0.53
(14.0)
0.53
(14.0)
0.10
(2.1)
3
1.10
(27.9)
1.10
(27.9)
3
3
1.60
(40.6)
3
3
3
3
1.40
(35.5)
D1RAA
1.18
(30.0)
0.74
(19.0)
0.67
(17.0)
3
3
14
5
12
1
1
3
0.16
(4.0)
3.14
(80.0)
3
9
A2
A1 Input
Input
3
3
COM
14 13
Module
Input
1.57
(40.0)
3
Input
N.O.
9
COM
14 13
N.C.
5
N.O.
3.33
(84.0)
3
1
N.C.
5
0.82
(21.0)
Input
Module
Input
14
13
Input
Input
11
9
IEC
NEMA
3
3
V7-T3-56
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
Contents
D2 Series Relay
Description
Page
D1RR/D1RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D2RR/D2RF Series
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D3RR/D3RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D4 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D5RR/D5RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D7PR/D7PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D8 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D9 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V7-T3-53
V7-T3-58
V7-T3-58
V7-T3-60
V7-T3-61
V7-T3-62
V7-T3-63
V7-T3-67
V7-T3-76
V7-T3-80
V7-T3-89
V7-T3-103
V7-T3-108
V7-T3-112
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
D2RR/D2RF Series
Product Description
The D2 Series is a compact
line of relays with quick
response time and long life.
Available in DPDT and 4PDT
configurations.
Features
D2RR
●
Ultra-high sensitivity relay
with quick response
●
High reliability, long life
●
Panel, DIN rail and flange
mounting
●
Small size
Standards and Certifications
D2RF
Flag indicator shows relay
status in manual or powered
condition
●
Bipolar LED status lamp
allows for reverse polarity
applications
●
Shows coil ON or OFF
status
●
Ideal in low light
conditions
●
Color-coded pushbutton
identifies AC coils with red
or DC coils with blue
pushbuttons
●
Allows for manual
operation of relay without
the need for coil power
●
Ideal for field service
personnel to test control
circuits
●
Lock-down door, when
activated, holds pushbutton
and contacts in the operate
position
●
Excellent for analyzing
circuit problems
●
Finger-grip cover allows
operator to remove relays
from sockets more easily
than conventional relays
●
White plastic ID tag/write
label used for identification
of relays in multi-relay
circuits
3
3
●
UL Listed
When used with
accompanying Eaton
screw terminal socket.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-57
3.4
3
3
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
Catalog Number Selection
D2RF/D2RR 1
D2RF 2 A
3
3
Family Type
Coil Voltage
A = 120 Vac
A1 = 110 Vdc
B = 240 Vac
R1 = 12 Vdc
T = 24 Vac
T1 = 24 Vdc
W1 = 48 Vdc
D2RF = Full-featured style 2
D2RR = Plain cover style
3
3
Contact Configuration
2 = DPDT
4 = 4PDT
3
3
Product Selection
3
D2RF/D2RR Relay/Socket Quick Reference
3
Relay
Type
Socket
Clip
Module
Type
ID
Tag
D2RR2, D2RF2
D2PAL
PWC-D24
B
PWF-D2P
D2PJ1
PQC-1782
—
—
—
3
3
D2RR4, D2RF4
3
D2PA6
PQC-1342
None
—
—
D2PAP
PWC-D24
B
PWF-D2P
D2PJ1
PQC-1782
—
—
—
D2PA7
PWC-D24
B
—
—
PQC-1782
B
—
—
PQC-1342
None
—
—
3
3
3
Jumper
D2PA6
Notes
1 For deciphering catalog numbers. Do not use for ordering as not all combinations are readily available.
2 Full-featured, LED test button, flag indicator, lock-down door, finger-grip cover, ID tag.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-58
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
D2RF Series Relay
3.4
D2RF/D2RR Series
Coil
Voltage
Contact
Configuration
Coil Resistance
(Ohms)
Catalog
Number
12 Vdc
DPDT
160
D2RF2R1
24 Vac
DPDT
180
D2RF2T
24 Vdc
DPDT
650
D2RF2T1
48 Vdc
DPDT
2600
D2RF2W1
3
3
Full Featured Style
110/125 Vdc
DPDT
11,000
D2RF2A1
120 Vac
DPDT
4430
D2RF2A
220/240 Vac
DPDT
15,720
D2RF2B
12 Vdc
4PDT
160
D2RF4R1
24 Vac
4PDT
180
D2RF4T
24 Vdc
4PDT
650
D2RF4T1
48 Vdc
4PDT
2600
D2RF4W1
110/125 Vdc
4PDT
11,000
D2RF4A1
120 Vac
4PDT
4430
D2RF4A
220/240 Vac
4PDT
15,720
D2RF4B
12 Vdc
DPDT
160
D2RR2R1
24 Vac
DPDT
180
D2RR2T
24 Vdc
DPDT
650
D2RR2T1
120 Vac
DPDT
4430
D2RR2A
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Plain Cover Style
220/240 Vac
DPDT
15,720
D2RR2B
12 Vdc
4PDT
160
D2RR4R1
24 Vac
4PDT
180
D2RR4T
24 Vdc
4PDT
650
D2RR4T1
110/125 Vdc
4PDT
11,000
D2RR4A1
120 Vac
4PDT
4430
D2RR4A
220/240 Vac
4PDT
15,720
D2RR4B
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-59
3.4
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3
Accessories
3
D2RF/D2RR Sockets and Accessories
3
Type
Socket
3
3
3
3
Mounting Style
Wire Size
Wire
Connection
Standard
Pack
Catalog
Number
B
300
12
DIN rail/panel
14/16 (2) AWG, 2.5/1.5 (2) mm2
Elevator
1
D2PAL 1
300
10
DIN rail/panel
12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) mm2
Screw clamping
10
D2PA6
B
300
10
DIN rail/panel
14/16 (2) AWG, 2.5/1.5 (2) mm2
Elevator
1
D2PAP 1
12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2)
mm2
Screw clamping
10
D2PA7 1
mm2
300
10
DIN rail/panel
None
300
10
DIN rail/panel
12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2)
Screw clamping
5
D2PA4
—
—
—
Flange
—
—
25
PFC-D2D72
Plastic ejector clip
—
—
—
—
—
—
10
PWC-D24
Metal spring clip
—
—
—
—
—
—
25
PQC-1782
PQC-1342
—
—
—
—
—
—
25
Hold-down spring
—
—
—
—
—
—
100
PYC-A1
Protection diode
B
6 to 250 Vdc
—
—
—
—
20
MOD-BD250
MOD-BLG24
LED indicator
3
MOV suppressor
B
24 Vac/Vdc
—
—
—
—
20
B
120/240 Vac/Vdc
—
—
—
—
20
MOD-BLG240
B
120 Vac/Vdc
—
—
—
—
20
MOD-BMV120
B
24 Vac/Vdc
—
—
—
—
20
MOD-BMV24
B
240 Vac/Vdc
—
—
—
—
20
MOD-BMV240
Coil bus jumpers
—
—
—
—
—
—
10
D2PJ1
Plastic DIN rail end stop
—
—
—
—
—
—
25
PFP-P
3
3
Nominal
Current
Flange mount adapter
3
3
Nominal Voltage
(Max. for Sockets)
None
B
3
3
Module
Size
Note
1 Protection category (finger safe), EN 60529: IP20.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-60
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
Technical Data and Specifications
3
D2RF/D2RR Relay Specifications
Description
D2RR2/D2RR4
D2RF
12 A / 6 A
6A
3
3
Contact Characteristics
Contact rating
3
Terminal style
Plug-in
Plug-in
Contact materials
Silver alloy
Silver alloy
Maximum switching voltage
300 V
300 V
3
Switching current at voltage—resistive
10 A at 120 Vac
50/60 Hz
10 A at 277 Vac
50/60 Hz
3
8 A at 277 Vac
50/60 Hz
8 A at 120 Vac
50/60 Hz
3
3
8 A at 28 Vdc
8 A at 28 Vdc
Switching current at voltage
1/3 hp at 120 Vac
1 hp at 277 Vac
1/3 hp at 120 Vac
1 hp at 277 Vac
Pilot duty
B300
B300
3
Minimum switching requirement
100 mA at 5 Vdc
(0.5 W)
100 mA at 5 Vdc
(0.5 W)
3
Coil Characteristics
3
Operating range
% of nominal (AC)
85 to 110%
85 to 110%
% of nominal (DC)
80 to 110%
80 to 110%
Average consumption
Dropout voltage threshold
3
3
1.2 VA
1.2 VA
0.9 W
0.9 W
15% (AC)
15% (AC)
10% (DC)
10% (DC)
3
3
3
Performance
Electrical life (UL 508) operations at rated current
200,000
200,000
Mechanical life operations unpowered
10,000,000
10,000,000
Response time
20 ms
20 ms
Between coil and contact Vac (rms)
1500 rms
1500 rms
Between poles Vac (rms)
1500 rms
1500 rms
Operation
–40 °F to +131 °F (–40 °C to +55 °C)
–40 °F to +131 °F (–40 °C to +55 °C)
Storage
–40 °F to +185 °F (–40 °C to +85 °C)
–40 °F to +185 °F (–40 °C to +85 °C)
3
Dielectric strength
3
3
Environment
3
Ambient air temperature around the device
3
Vibration resistance—operational
3 g-n at 10–55 Hz
3 g-n at 10–55 Hz
Shock resistance
10 g-n
10 g-n
Degree of protection
IP40
IP40
3
Cover options
Plain cover
Full featured
3
Features
Mechanical flag indicator
Locking pushbutton/
Bipolar LED/
Removable ID tag/
Mechanical flag indicator
Product certifications
RoHS/UL/CE/CSA
RoHS/UL/CE/CSA
3
Features
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-61
3.4
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3
Wiring Diagrams
3
D2RF2/D2RR2
3
3
12
42
1
4
14
44
5
8
11
41
9
12
A1
A2
13
14
3
3
3
3
IEC
3
3
3
3
NEMA
D2RF4/D2RR4
12
22
32
42
1
2
3
4
14
24
34
44
5
6
7
8
11
21
31
41
9
10
11
12
A2
13
3
3
3
3
A1
3
IEC
14
NEMA
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-62
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
3.4
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
3
D2RF2/D2RR2
3
0.27
(7.0)
0.83
(21.0)
0.02
(0.5)
3
0.83
(21.0)
3
1.10
(27.9)
3
1.10
(27.9)
3
0.24
(6.0)
1.54
(39.1)
0.24
(6.0)
1.40
(35.5)
3
3
D2RF4/D2RR4
0.27
(7.0)
0.83
(21.0)
0.02
(0.5)
3
0.83
(21.0)
3
1.10
(27.9)
0.24
(6.0)
1.54
(39.1)
3
1.10
(27.9)
3
3
0.24
(6.0)
1.40
(35.5)
3
D2PA6
3
0.71
(18.0)
3
44
34
24
14
8
7
6
5
42
32
22
12
4
3
2
1
3
6
5
2
1
7
3
8
4
2.51
(64.0)
2.71
(69.0)
1.25
(32.0)
1
3
1
4
0.17
(4.3)
Dia.
Typ.
1
1
1
0
0.89
(22.7)
1.20
(30.7)
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
12
11
10
9
13
INPUT
N.C.
N.O.
COM
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
12
11
10
9
14
INPUT
A1
4
14
13
INPUT
3
3
N.C.
N.O.
3
COM
3
INPUT
3
3
13
3
9
41
1.00
(25.4)
4
14
A2
1
2
3
31
21
IEC
11
12
11
10
3
9
NEMA
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-63
3.4
3
3
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
D2PA7
1.57
(40.0)
3
1.00
(25.4)
0.14
(3.8)
0.74
(19.0)
3
34
7
24
6
44
14
8
5
42
32
22
12
4
3
2
1
3
3
3.30
(84.0)
3
42
3
3.11
(79.0)
3
3
2.40
(61.0)
11
3
A2
3
7
6
44
14
8
5
32
22
A1
INPUT
INPUT
14
13
41
31
21
12
11
10
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
12
11
10
9
1.18
(30.0)
3
0.82
(21.0)
3
4
N.C.
N.O.
COM
13
2
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
12
11
10
9
A2
21
31
0.25
(6.4)
INPUT
12
11
10
NEMA
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-64
INPUT
13
1.18
(30.0)
3
COM
9
14
A1
N.O.
MODULE
INPUT
11
9
N.C.
13
14
INPUT
1
8
MODULE
INPUT
IEC
3
12
8
1.55
(39.5)
41
3
24
14
0.14
(3.80)
3
34
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
INPUT
3.4
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
3
D2PAP
2.40
(61.0)
3
3
0.74
(19.0)
3.34
(85.0)
41
31
21
11
12
11
10
9
44
34
24
14
8
7
6
5
42
32
22
12
4
3
2
1
41
31
21
11
12
11
10
9
3
44
34
24
14
8
7
6
5
3
42
32
22
12
4
3
2
1
0.20
(5.6)
3.11
(79.0)
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
12
11
10
9
14
13
N.C.
N.O.
COM
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
12
11
10
9
14
13
INPUT
3
N.C.
N.O.
3
COM
3
INPUT
3
MODULE
INPUT
MODULE
INPUT
1.49
(38.0)
3
3
3
IEC:
A2
A1
NEMA:
14 INPUT 13
A2
INPUT
A1
14
IEC
INPUT
13
3
3
NEMA
0.90
(22.0)
3
1.06
(26.9)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-65
3.4
3
3
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
D2PAL
2.40
(61.0)
3
1.06
(27.0)
0.74
(19.0)
3
3
41
11
12
9
44
14
42
3
3.34
(85.0)
3
3
11
12
9
44
14
8
5
42
12
4
1
5
8
3
41
12
4
1
0.20
(5.6)
3.11
(79.0)
4
1
8
5
12
9
14
13
N.C.
N.O.
COM
INPUT
4
1
8
5
12
9
14
13
N.C.
N.O.
COM
INPUT
3
3
MODULE
INPUT
1.49
(38.0)
3
A2 IEC:
3
A1
A2
INPUT
A1
MODULE
INPUT
14
INPUT
NEMA:
14 INPUT 13
3
3
IEC
NEMA
0.92
(23.5)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-66
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
13
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
Contents
D3 Series Relay
Description
Page
D1RR/D1RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D2RR/D2RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D3RR/D3RF Series
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D4 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D5RR/D5RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D7PR/D7PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D8 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D9 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V7-T3-53
V7-T3-57
V7-T3-68
V7-T3-68
V7-T3-70
V7-T3-71
V7-T3-72
V7-T3-76
V7-T3-80
V7-T3-89
V7-T3-103
V7-T3-108
V7-T3-112
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
D3RR/D3RF Series
Product Description
Features
The D3 Series of relays
provides excellent
functionality in a popular
octal base design. Rigid
pins and guide allow for
quick and easy installation
with little risk of damage.
D3RR
●
Compact relay capable of
breaking relatively large
load currents
●
Panel and DIN rail
mounting
●
8- or 11-pin octal plug-in
Standards and Certifications
D3RF
The contact operation can
be easily checked by Pushto-Test button
●
Flag indicator shows relay
status in manual or
powered condition
●
LED status lamp shows
coil ON or OFF status—
ideal for use in low light
applications
●
Push-to-Test button allows
for manual operation of
relay without the need for
coil power
●
Lock-down door holds
pushbutton and contacts in
the operate position when
activated
●
Finger-grip cover allows
operator to remove relays
from sockets easily
●
ID tag/write label to
identify relays in multiplerelay circuits
●
Bipolar LED allows for
reverse polarity
applications
3
3
●
UL Listed
When used with
accompanying Eaton
screw terminal socket
(for D3RF only)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-67
3.4
3
3
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
Catalog Number Selection
D3RR/D3RF Series 1
D3RR 2 1
3
3
3
3
Family Type
D3RR = Standard relay
D3RF = Full featured relay
Coil Voltage
A = 120 Vac
A1 = 110 Vdc
B = 240 Vac
R1 = 12 Vdc
T = 24 Vac
T1 = 24 Vdc
W1 = 48 Vdc
Contact Configuration
2 = DPDT (8-pin)
3 = 3PDT (11-pin)
3
3
3
3
Product Selection
D3 Relay/Socket Quick Reference
Relay
Type
D3RR2, D3RF2
3
3
D3RR3, D3RF3
3
3
Socket
Clip
Module
Type
ID
Tag
Jumper
D3PJ1
D3PA6
PQC-1332
A
—
D3PAL8
PQC-1351
A
PWF-D3D5
—
D3PA2
PQC-1351
None
—
—
D3PJ1
D3PA7
PQC-1332
A
—
D3PAL11
PQC-1351
A
PWF-D3D5
—
D3PA3
PQC-1351
None
—
—
Notes
1 For deciphering catalog numbers. Do not use for ordering as not all combinations are readily available.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-68
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
D3 Series Relay
3.4
D3RR/D3RF Series
Coil
Voltage
Contact
Configuration
Coil Resistance
(Ohms)
Catalog
Number
3
3
Full Featured Style
3
120 Vac
DPDT
1700
D3RF2A
240 Vac
DPDT
7200
D3RF2B
12 Vdc
DPDT
120
D3RF2R1
24 Vdc
DPDT
470
D3RF2T1
120 Vac
3PDT
1700
D3RF3A
220/240 Vac
3PDT
7200
D3RF3B
24 Vac
3PDT
72
D3RF3T
24 Vdc
3PDT
470
D3RF3T1
3
120 Vac
DPDT
1700
D3RR2A
3
110/125 Vdc
DPDT
10,000
D3RR2A1
220/240 Vac
DPDT
7200
D3RR2B
12 Vdc
DPDT
120
D3RR2R1
24 Vac
DPDT
72
D3RR2T
24 Vdc
DPDT
470
D3RR2T1
48 Vdc
DPDT
1800
D3RR2W1
120 Vac
3PDT
1700
D3RR3A
3
3
3
Plain Cover Style
110/125 Vdc
3PDT
10,000
D3RR3A1
220/240 Vac
3PDT
7200
D3RR3B
12 Vdc
3PDT
120
D3RR3R1
24 Vac
3PDT
72
D3RR3T
24 Vdc
3PDT
470
D3RR3T1
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-69
3.4
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3
Accessories
3
D3RR/D3RF Series Sockets and Accessories
3
Type
Socket
3
3
Module
Size
Nominal
Current
Mounting Style
Wire Size
Wire
Connection
Standard
Pack
Catalog
Number
A
300
16
DIN rail/panel
12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) mm2
Screw clamping
1
D3PA6 1
A
300
12
DIN rail/panel
12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) mm2
Elevator
10
D3PAL8 1
None
300/600
15/10
DIN rail/panel
12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) mm2
Screw clamping
10
D3PA2
DIN rail/panel
12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2)
mm2
Screw clamping
1
D3PA7 1
12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2)
mm2
Elevator
10
D3PAL11 1
mm2
A
A
3
Nominal Voltage
(Max. for Sockets)
600
300
5
12
DIN rail/panel
None
300/600
15/5
DIN rail/panel
12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2)
Screw clamping
10
D3PA3
—
—
—
—
—
—
25
PQC-1332
3
Metal spring clip
—
—
—
—
—
—
10
PQC-1351
3
Protection diode
A
6 to 250 Vdc
—
—
—
—
20
MOD-AD250
LED indicator
A
24 Vac/Vdc
—
—
—
—
20
MOD-ALG24
A
120/240 Vac/Vdc
—
—
—
—
20
MOD-ALG240
3
3
3
MOV suppressor
A
120 Vac/Vdc
—
—
—
—
20
MOD-AMV120
A
24 Vac/Vdc
—
—
—
—
20
MOD-AMV24
A
240 Vac/Vdc
—
—
—
—
20
MOD-AMV240
A
6 to 24 Vac/Vdc
—
—
—
—
20
MOD-RC24
A
110 to 240 Vac/Vdc
—
—
—
—
20
MOD-RC240
Write-on plastic labels
—
—
—
—
—
—
10
PWF-D3D5
Coil bus jumpers
—
—
—
—
—
—
10
D3PJ1
Plastic DIN rail end stop
—
—
—
—
—
—
25
PFP-P
R/C suppressor
3
3
3
3
Note
1 Protection category (finger safe), EN 60529: IP20.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-70
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
Technical Data and Specifications
3
D3RR/D3RF Series Relay Specifications
Description
D3RR
D3RF
10 A
10 A
3
3
Contact Characteristics
Contact rating
3
Terminal style
Octal
Octal
Contact materials
Silver alloy
Silver alloy
Maximum switching voltage
300 V
300 V
3
Switching current at voltage—resistive
16 A at 277 Vac
50/60 Hz
16 A at 277 Vac
50/60 Hz
3
16 A at 120 Vac
50/60 Hz
16 A at 120 Vac
50/60 Hz
3
3
16 A at 28 Vdc
16 A at 28 Vdc
Switching current at voltage
1/2 hp at 240 Vac
1/2 hp at 240 Vac
1/3 hp at 120 Vac
1/3 hp at 120 Vac
Pilot duty
B300
B300
Minimum switching requirement
100 mA at 5 Vdc
(0.5 W)
100 mA at 5 Vdc
(0.5 W)
3
3
3
Coil Characteristics
Operating range
3
% of nominal (AC)
85 to 110%
85 to 110%
% of nominal (DC)
80 to 110%
80 to 110%
3 VA
3 VA
1.4 W
1.4 W
15% (AC)
15% (AC)
10% (DC)
10% (DC)
3
Electrical life (UL 508) operations at rated current
100,000 operations
100,000 operations
3
Mechanical life operations unpowered
5,000,000 operations
5,000,000 operations
Response time
20 ms
20 ms
Between coil and contact Vac (rms)
1500 V (rms)
1500 V (rms)
Between poles Vac (rms)
1500 V (rms)
1500 V (rms)
Average consumption
Dropout voltage threshold
3
3
Performance
3
3
Dielectric strength
3
Environment
3
Ambient air temperature around the device
Storage
–40 °F to +185 °F (–40 °C to +85 °C)
–40 °F to +185 °F (–40 °C to +85 °C)
Operation
–40 °F to +131 °F (–40 °C to +55 °C)
–40 °F to +131 °F (–40 °C to +55 °C)
Vibration resistance—operational
3 g-n at 10–55 Hz
3 g-n at 10–55 Hz
Shock resistance
10 g-n
10 g-n
Degree of protection
IP40
IP40
Cover options
Plain cover
Full Featured
Features
Mechanical flag indicator
Bipolar LED/
Locking pushbutton/
Removable ID tag/
Mechanical flag indicator
Product certifications
RoHS/UL/CE/CSA
RoHS/UL/CE/CSA
3
3
3
Features
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-71
3.4
3
3
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
D3RR2/D3RF2
3
3
1.39
(35.3)
3
3
0.24
(6.1)
3
1.37
(34.8)
2.20
(55.2)
3
12
3
14
3
A1
22
5
4
24
3
A2
2
6
7
31
1
IEC
3
1.37
(34.8)
2.10
(50.3)
11
3
3
1.39
(35.3)
8
NEMA
D3RR3/D3RF3
3
1.39
(35.3)
3
1.39
(35.3)
3
3
0.24
(6.1)
3
1.37
(34.8)
2.20
(55.2)
3
21
22
24
14
3
34
A1
A2
11
3
3
31
IEC
6
5
32
12
3
1.37
(34.8)
2.10
(50.3)
7
8
4
9
3
2
10
1
11
NEMA
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-72
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
3.4
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
3
D3PA2
0.97
(24.6)
3
1.60
(40.0)
0.59
(15.0)
3
1.29
(33.0)
3
A1
7
0.16
(4.2)
8
1
2
2.02
(51.0)
INPUT
2.12
(54.0)
3
1.01
(25.6)
5
6
11
2
3
21
1
8
4
5
12
22
A2
2
INPUT
INPUT
8
1
1
INPUT
8
7
2
7
6
3
6
4
3
7
3
3
3
5
4
14
24
4
3
3
6
5
NEMA
IEC
3
3
D3PA3
3
2.32
(59.0)
0.97
(24.6)
3
2.06
(52.0)
3
3
1
1.60 Dia.
(40.0)
14
10
3
4
1.02
(25.0)
2.05
(52.0)
9
8
5
2.16
(54.8)
INPUT 1
11 INPUT
2
10
INPUT 1
2
6
7
32
8
7
6
8
7
22
6
24
21
5
IEC
3
3
7
6
3
3
9
5
4
9
10
4
8
5
11 INPUT
3
9
4
12
3
34
10
3
11
2
A2
A1
11
2
1
31
11
3
NEMA
3
0.97
(24.6)
3
1.60
(40.0)
0.59
(15.0)
1.29
(33.0)
3
3
A1
7
8
1
2
2.02
(51.0)
0.16
(4.2)
INPUT
2.12
(54.0)
1.01
(25.6)
3
4
5
11
21
1
8
A2
2
INPUT
INPUT
1
1
8
8
7
3
INPUT
2
7
2
7
3
3
6
3
6
3
4
5
12
22
4
5
3
6
14
IEC
24
3
4
5
6
3
NEMA
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-73
3.4
3
3
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
D3PA6
1.45
(37.0)
3
1.42
(36.0)
1.10
(27.9)
3
11
22
3
3
2.86
(72.0)
3
11
12
5
1
4
1
12
4
22
5
24
21
14
24
21
14
6
8
3
6
8
3
0.15
(3.8)
3.00
(76.0)
4
5
3
7
3
1.58
(40.0)
3
6
2
7
3
2
1
8
MODULE
INPUT
MODULE
INPUT
IEC:
NEMA:
3
A2
A2 Coil Jumper Buss A1
INPUT
A1
INPUT INPUT
3
7
2
Coil Jumper Buss
INPUT
7
IEC
3
2
NEMA
1.20
(30.0)
3
3
3
1
8
4
5
6
D3PA7
1.45
(37.0)
3
1.50
(38.0)
1.10
(27.9)
3
3
32
24
22
8
7
5
3
31
11
3.18
(81.0)
3
21
11
6
1
14 0.15
(3.8)
3
34
9
3
12
4
3.01
(76.0)
32
22
24
21
31
34
6
7
5
8
11
11
14
9
3
2
10
11
3
8
4
9
3
12
1 MODULE
4
5
7
6
1
6
7
3
5
8
4
9
3
2
10
11
1 MODULE
INPUT
INPUT
1.58
(40.0)
3
A2 Coil Jumper Buss A1
IEC:
NEMA:
3
A2
A1
INPUT
3
INPUT
IEC
NEMA
INPUT
2
10
3
10 Coil Jumper Buss
INPUT
1.35
(34.2)
3
3
3
V7-T3-74
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
2
3.4
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
3
D3PAL8
3
0.86
(22.0)
22
24
12
3
14
22
24
6
5
4
14
12
6
5
4
3
3
3
3
2.95
(75.0)
0.12
(3.10)
5
INPUT A2
3
6
3
3
7
2
7
2
3
21
11
1
2
A2
21
A1
11
INPUT
INPUT
0.12
(30.0)
1.06
(27.0)
3
MODULE
INPUT
3
A1
A2
8
7
7
1
MODULE
INPUT
2
IEC:
NEMA:
A2
8
1
INPUT A1
7
A2
3
4
6
8
1.45
(37.0)
5
4
7
8
7
1
3
2
INPUT
INPUT
IEC
3
NEMA
3
1.49
(38.0)
3
D3PAL11
3
0.86
(22.0)
24
34 32
22
14
3
12
32
34
9
5
7
8
3
22
24
12
14
7
8
9
4
3
5
3
4
3
0.12
(3.1)
6
7
8
2.95
(75.0)
9
INPUT A2
1.06
(27.0)
10
3
1
21
11
MODULE
INPUT
2
IEC:
NEMA:
11
0.12
(30.0)
6
3
MODULE
INPUT
3
A1
A2
10
11
1
3
2
INPUT A1
10
A2 A2 31
3
10
2
3
4
9
3
11
1.45
(37.0)
3
5
8
4
10
6
7
5
1
A2
31
21
11
A1
10
10
11
6
1
2
2
INPUT
INPUT
IEC
3
INPUT
INPUT
NEMA
3
1.49
(38.0)
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-75
3.4
3
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
Contents
D4 Series Relay
Description
3
Page
D1RR/D1RF Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D2RR/D2RF Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D3RR/D3RF Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D4 Series
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D5RR/D5RF Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D7PR/D7PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D8 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D9 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-53
V7-T3-57
V7-T3-67
V7-T3-78
V7-T3-79
V7-T3-80
V7-T3-89
V7-T3-103
V7-T3-108
V7-T3-112
3
3
3
3
D4 Series
3
Product Description
3
3
3
3
The D4 Series is a slim-form
relay designed to fit into tight
spaces. The retaining clip is
built in to the socket to
provide easy and secure
assembly.
File # E1491, E65657
Catalog Number Selection
D4 Series 1
D4PR 1 1 A
File # LR701519
Family Type
D4PR
Features
●
●
3
●
3
Standards and Certifications
Slim-styled power relay
Socket has built-in holddown clip
Panel or DIN rail mounting
Contact Configuration
1 = SPDT
2 = DPDT
Options
Blank = Plain cover
1 = Indicating light
3
Coil Voltage
A = 120 Vac
A1 = 110 Vdc
B = 240 Vac
P = 6 Vac
P1 = 6 Vdc
R = 12 Vac
R1 = 12 Vdc
T = 24 Vac
T1 = 24 Vdc
W = 48 Vac
W1 = 48 Vdc
3
Product Selection
3
D4 Relay/Socket Quick Reference
3
3
3
Relay Type
Socket
Hold-Down Clip
D4PR1
D4PA1
2
D4PR2
D4PA2
2
Notes
1 For deciphering catalog numbers. Do not use for ordering as not all combinations are
readily available.
2 Socket has built-in hold-down spring.
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-76
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
3.4
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
D4 Series Relay
D4 Series
Voltage/Poles
Standard
Pack
Catalog
Number
DIN Rail Sockets
Voltage/Poles
Standard
Pack
3
Catalog
Number
3
DPDT with Indicating Light
Single-pole
10
D4PA1
120 Vac
1
D4PR21A
Two-pole
10
D4PA2
110 Vdc
1
D4PR21A1
SPDT with Indicating Light
3
3
240 Vac
1
D4PR21B
1
D4PR11A
6 Vac
50
D4PR21P
110 Vdc
1
D4PR11A1
6 Vdc
1
D4PR21P1
240 Vac
1
D4PR11B
12 Vac
50
D4PR21R
6 Vac
50
D4PR11P
12 Vdc
1
D4PR21R1
6 Vdc
50
D4PR11P1
24 Vac
1
D4PR21T
12 Vac
50
D4PR11R
24 Vdc
1
D4PR21T1
12 Vdc
1
D4PR11R1
48 Vdc
50
D4PR21W1
3
24 Vac
1
D4PR11T
Standard DPDT
24 Vdc
1
D4PR11T1
120 Vac
1
D4PR2A
3
48 Vdc
50
D4PR11W1
110 Vdc
50
D4PR2A1
240 Vac
50
D4PR2B
120 Vac
Standard SPDT
120 Vac
1
D4PR1A
6 Vac
50
D4PR2P
110 Vdc
50
D4PR1A1
6 Vdc
1
D4PR2P1
240 Vac
50
D4PR1P
12 Vac
50
D4PR2R
6 Vac
1
D4PR1P1
12 Vdc
1
D4PR2R1
6 Vdc
50
D4PR1R
24 Vac
1
D4PR2T
12 Vac
1
D4PR1R1
24 Vdc
1
D4PR2T1
12 Vdc
1
D4PR1R1-A2
48 Vdc
1
D4PR2W1
24 Vac
1
D4PR1T
24 Vdc
1
D4PR1T1
48 Vdc
1
D4PR1W1
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-77
3.4
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3
Technical Data and Specifications
3
D4 Series
3
Description
3
Rated load
30 Vdc 10 A
30 Vdc 5 A
3
Carry current
10 A
10 A
Max. operating voltage
380 Vac/125 Vdc
380 Vac/125 Vdc
Max. operating current
10 A
10 A
Contact material
AgCdO
AgCdO
Max. switching capacity
2500 VA
1875 VA
300 W
150 W
Min. permissible load
100 mA, 5 Vdc
100 mA, 5 Vdc
80% AC/70% DC
3
3
Inductive Load
(p.f. = 0.4, L/R = 7 ms)
250 Vac 10 A
250 Vac 7.5 A
D4PR1
3
3
Resistive Load
(p.f. = 1)
Pickup voltage (max.)
80% AC/70% DC
3
Dropout voltage (min.)
30% AC/15% DC
30% AC/15% DC
Voltage (max.)
110%
110%
3
Mechanical life (min.)
10,000,000 AC/20,000,000 DC
10,000,000 AC/20,000,000 DC
Electrical life at all contact ratings (min.)
100,000
100,000
Maximum hp ratings
1/3 hp (125 Vac)
1/3 hp (125 Vac)
1/2 hp (250 Vac)
1/2 hp (250 Vac)
1/2 hp (277 Vac)
1/2 hp (277 Vac)
240 Vac 5 A
250 Vac 2 A
3
3
3
D4PR2
Rated load
3
30 Vdc 5 A
30 Vdc 3 A
Carry current
5A
5A
Max. operating voltage
380 Vac/125 Vdc
380 Vac/125 Vdc
Max. operating current
5A
5A
Contact material
AgCdO
AgCdO
3
Max. switching capacity
1250 VA
500 VA
150 W
90 W
3
Min. permissible load
10 mA, 5 Vdc
10 mA, 5 Vdc
Pickup voltage (max.)
80% AC/70% DC
80% AC/70% DC
3
3
3
3
3
Dropout voltage (min.)
30% AC/15% DC
30% AC/15% DC
Voltage (max.)
110%
110%
Mechanical life (min.)
10,000,000 AC/20,000,000 DC
10,000,000 AC/20,000,000 DC
Electrical life at all contact ratings (min.)
100,000
100,000
Maximum hp ratings
1/6 hp (120 Vac)
1/6 hp (120 Vac)
1/3 hp (240 Vac)
1/3 hp (240 Vac)
1/3 hp (265 Vac)
1/3 hp (265 Vac)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-78
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
Dimensions
3
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
D4PR1
3
D4PR2
0.51
(13.0)
Max.
1.14
(29.0)
Max.
0.10
(2.5)
0.39
(10.0)
0.08
(2.0)
1.14
(29.0)
Max.
0.79
(20.0)
0.51
(13.0)
Max.
1.14
(29.0)
Max.
0.01
(2.5)
3
0.39
(10.0)
3
1.10
(28.0)
Max. 0.79
(20.0) 0.08
(2.0)
3
0.02
(0.5)
0.19
(4.8)
0.24
(6.0)
0.16
(4.0)
0.02
(0.5)
5 – 0.035 x 0.12
(0.9 x 3)
Elliptic Holes
0.35
(8.9)
0.30
(7.5)
0.20
(5.2)
0.20
(5.2)
2 4 3
0.02
(0.5)
3
0.16
(4.0)
3
0.30
(7.5)
0.02
(0.5)
0.76
(19.4)
1
5
0.69
(17.5)
0.10
(2.6)
0.02
(0.5)
1
2
3
4
8
7
6
5
3
3
Terminal Arrangement/
Internal Connections
(Bottom View)
Terminal Arrangement/
Internal Connections
(Bottom View)
3
3
D4PA1
0.28
(7.1)
2.82
(71.6)
Max.
0.08
(2.0)
0.16
(4.1)
Dia. Holes
3
0.17 (4.2)
Dia. Holes
Five
3.5 x 0.32
(88.9 x 8.0)
1.40
(35.6)
5
3
1.180 0.002
(29.97 0.05)
2
0.77 (19.6)
1.18 (30.0)
2.13 (54.1) Max.
0.16 0.77
(4.1) (19.6)
Max.
3
4
3
1
Terminal Arrangement
3
M3 or
3.30 (0.13)
Dia. Holes
3
Mounting Holes
3
D4PA2
3
0.28
(7.1)
2.82
(71.6)
Max.
0.16 0.77
(4.1) (19.6)
Max.
0.08
(2.0)
0.16
(4.1)
Dia. Holes
3
0.17 (4.2)
Dia. Holes
Eight
3.5 x 0.32
(88.9 x 8.0)
1.40
(35.6)
0.77 (19.6)
1.18 (30.0)
2.13 (54.1) Max.
6 3
5 4
7
2
8
1
Terminal Arrangement
3
1.180 0.002
(29.97 0.05)
3
3
M3 or
0.13 (3.30)
Dia. Holes
3
Mounting Holes
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-79
3.4
3
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
Contents
D5 Series Relay
Description
3
Page
D1RR/D1RF Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D2RR/D2RF Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D3RR/D3RF Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D4 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D5RR/D5RF Series
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D7PR/D7PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D8 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D9 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-53
V7-T3-57
V7-T3-67
V7-T3-76
V7-T3-81
V7-T3-81
V7-T3-83
V7-T3-84
V7-T3-85
V7-T3-86
V7-T3-89
V7-T3-103
V7-T3-108
V7-T3-112
3
3
D5RR/D5RF Series
3
Product Description
Features
3
The D5 Series is rated at
10 A and is available in fullfeatured and plain cover
styles.
D5RR
●
Industrial rated 300 V, 10 A
relay in two-pole and threepole configurations
●
Compact design can be
panel or DIN rail mounted
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Standards and Certifications
D5RF
Flag indicator shows relay
status in manual or
powered condition
●
LED status lamp shows
coil ON or OFF status—
ideal for use in low light
applications
●
Push-to-Test button allows
for manual operation of
relay without the need for
coil power
●
Lock-down door holds
pushbutton and contacts in
the operate position when
activated
●
Finger-grip cover allows
operator to remove relays
from sockets easily
●
ID tag/write label to
identify relays in multiplerelay circuits
●
Bipolar LED allows for
reverse polarity
applications
●
UL Listed
When used with
accompanying Eaton
screw terminal socket
(D5RF only)
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-80
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
Catalog Number Selection
3
D5 Series
3
D5RR 3 1
3
Family Type
D5RR = Standard relay
D5RF = Full featured relay
Coil Voltage
A = 120 Vac
A1 = 110 Vdc
B = 240 Vac
R1 = 12 Vdc
T = 24 Vac
T1 = 24 Vdc
W1 = 48 Vdc
Contact Configuration
2 = DPDT
3 = 3PDT
3
3
3
3
3
Product Selection
3
D5 Relay/Socket Quick Reference
Relay
Type
D5RR2, D5RF2,
D5RR3, D5RF3
Socket
Clip
Module
Type
D5PAL
PQC-1351
A
ID
Tag
Jumper
PWF-D3D5
D3PJ1
D5PA2
PQC-1351
None
—
—
D5PA3L
PQC-1351
None
—
—
D5PA3S
PQC-1351
None
—
—
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-81
3.4
3
D5 Series Relay
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
D5 Series
Coil
Voltage
Contact
Configuration
Coil Resistance
(Ohms)
Catalog
Number
120 Vac
DPDT
1700
D5RF2A
110/125 Vdc
DPDT
10,000
D5RF2A1
220/240 Vac
DPDT
7200
D5RF2B
12 Vdc
DPDT
120
D5RF2R1
24 Vac
DPDT
72
D5RF2T
3
24 Vdc
DPDT
470
D5RF2T1
120 Vac
3PDT
1700
D5RF3A
3
110/125 Vdc
3PDT
10,000
D5RF3A1
220/240 Vac
3PDT
7200
D5RF3B
12 Vdc
3PDT
120
D5RF3R1
24 Vac
3PDT
72
D5RF3T
24 Vdc
3PDT
470
D5RF3T1
3
Full Featured
3
3
3
3
3
3
Side Flange Cover
220/240 Vac
DPDT
7200
D5RB2B
3
12 Vdc
DPDT
120
D5RB2R1
3
24 Vac
DPDT
72
D5RB2T
24 Vdc
DPDT
470
D5RB2T1
3
Plain Cover
120 Vac
DPDT
1700
D5RR2A
3
110/125 Vdc
DPDT
10,000
D5RR2A1
220/240 Vac
DPDT
7200
D5RR2B
3
24 Vac
DPDT
72
D5RR2T
24 Vdc
DPDT
470
D5RR2T1
120 Vac
3PDT
1700
D5RR3A
3
110/125 Vdc
3PDT
10,000
D5RR3A1
220/240 Vac
3PDT
7200
D5RR3B
3
12 Vdc
3PDT
120
D5RR3R1
24 Vac
3PDT
72
D5RR3T
24 Vdc
3PDT
470
D5RR3T1
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-82
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
Accessories
3
D5 Sockets and Accessories
Type
Module
Size
Nominal Voltage
(Max. for Sockets)
Nominal
Current
Mounting Style
Wire Size
Socket
A
300
25
DIN rail
10 /14 (2) AWG, 6/2.5 (2) mm2
Metal spring clip
mm2
Wire
Connection
Standard
Pack
Catalog
Number
Elevator
10
D5PAL 1
Screw clamping
10
D5PA2
D5PA3L
None
300
15
DIN rail/panel
12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2)
None
300
15
Chassis
(Output): 16 AWG, 1 mm2
Solder
10
mm2
None
300
15
Chassis
(Output): 16 AWG, 1
Solder
10
D5PA3S
—
—
—
—
—
—
10
PQC-1351
3
3
3
3
Protection diode
A
6 to 250 Vdc
—
—
—
—
20
MOD-AD250
LED indicator
A
24 Vac/Vdc
—
—
—
—
20
MOD-ALG24
A
120/240 Vac/Vdc
—
—
—
—
20
MOD-ALG240
MOV suppressor
R/C suppressor
Write-on plastic labels
A
120 Vac/Vdc
—
—
—
—
20
MOD-AMV120
A
24 Vac/Vdc
—
—
—
—
20
MOD-AMV24
A
240 Vac/Vdc
—
—
—
—
20
MOD-AMV240
A
6 to 24 Vac/Vdc
—
—
—
—
20
MOD-RC24
A
110 to 240 Vac/Vdc
—
—
—
—
20
MOD-RC240
—
—
—
—
—
—
10
PWF-D3D5
Coil bus jumpers
—
—
—
—
—
—
10
D3PJ1
Plastic DIN rail end stop
—
—
—
—
—
—
25
PFP-P
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Note
1 Protection category (finger safe), EN 60529: IP20.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-83
3.4
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3
Technical Data and Specifications
3
D5 Series
3
Contact Characteristics
3
Description
Contact rating
D5RR
D5RF
10 A
10 A
Terminal style
Plug-in
Plug-in
3
Contact materials
Silver alloy
Silver alloy
Maximum switching voltage
300 V
300 V
3
Switching current at voltage—resistive
16 A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz
16 A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz
16 A at 120 Vac 50/60 Hz
16 A at 120 Vac 50/60 Hz
16 A at 28 Vdc
16 A at 28 Vdc
Switching current at voltage
1/2 hp at 240 Vac
1/2 hp at 240 Vac
1/3 hp at 120 Vac
1/3 hp at 120 Vac
Pilot duty
B300
B300
Minimum switching requirement
100 mA at 5 Vdc (0.5 W)
100 mA at 5 Vdc (0.5 W)
% of nominal (AC)
85 to 110%
85 to 110%
% of nominal (DC)
80 to 110%
80 to 110%
3
Average consumption
3 VA
1.4 W
3 VA
1.4 W
3
Drop-out voltage threshold
10%/15% (AC)
10% (DC)
10%/15% (AC)
10% (DC)
3
Performance
Electrical life (UL 508) operations at rated current
100,000 operations
100,000 operations
3
Mechanical life operations unpowered
5,000,000 operations
5,000,000 operations
Response time
20 ms
20 ms
Between coil and contact Vac (rms)
1500 V (rms)
1500 V (rms)
Between poles Vac (rms)
1500 V (rms)
1500 V (rms)
Storage
–40 °F to +185 °F (–40 °C to +85 °C)
–40 °F to +185 °F (–40 °C to +85 °C)
Operation
–40 °F to +131 °F (–40 °C to +55 °C)
–40 °F to +131 °F (–40 °C to +55 °C)
3
3
3
3
Coil Characteristics
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Operating range
Dielectric strength
Environment
Ambient air temperature around the device
Vibration resistance—operational
3 g-n at 10–55 Hz
3 g-n at 10–55 Hz
Shock resistance
10 g-n
10 g-n
Degree of protection
IP40
IP40
3
Features
Cover options
Flange/plain cover with LED
Full featured
3
Features
Mechanical flag indicator
(LED optional)
Bipolar LED/
Mechanical flag indicator/
Locking pushbutton/
Removable ID tag
Product certifications
RoHS/UL/CE/CSA
RoHS/UL/CE/CSA
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-84
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
Wiring Diagrams
3
D5PA3L and D5PA3S
22
32
12
N.C.
34
14
24
N.O.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
3
N.C.
3
3
N.O.
3
31
11
21
A1
COM
A2
3
3
B
A
INPUT
COM
INPUT
IEC
3
NEMA
3
D5RR2/D5RF2 DPDT
22
12
1
3
3
3
24
14
4
3
6
3
11
21
7
9
A1
A2
A
B
3
3
3
3
NEMA
IEC
3
D5RR3/D5RF3 3PDT
12
32
22
1
2
3
3
3
14
34
24
4
5
3
6
3
11
31
21
7
8
3
9
3
A1
A2
IEC
B
A
3
3
NEMA
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-85
3.4
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3
Dimensions
3
D5RR and D5RF
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
3
3
1.40
(35.4)
1.40
(35.4)
3
3
0.20
(6.1)
3
1.37
(34.9)
D5PA2
3
1.69
(43.0)
1.53
(39.0)
1.03
(26.0)
1.37
(35.0)
6
3
24
34
14
6
5
4
2
3
1
0.40
(10.0)
3
5
3
4
3
1.97
(50.0)
1.37
(34.9)
2.10
(53.1)
22
32
12
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
6
5
4
6
5
4
8
7
8
7
3
0.15
(3.8)
3
3.00
(76.0)
3
9
3.14
(80.0)
3
B
3
1.50
(38.0)
3
B
N.C.
N.O.
COM
9
A INPUT
B
A1
B
INPUT
3
9
3
8
7
21
31
IEC
A
INPUT
11
9
8
NEMA
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-86
N.O.
COM
A INPUT
A
A2
N.C.
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
7
3.4
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
3
D5PA3L and D5PA3S
0.30
(7.5)
3
0.87
(22.2)
1.50
(38.1)
3
3
0.02
(0.5)
1.25
(31.7)
2
1
2.03
(51.0)
1.37
(34.7)
4
5
7
3
3
3
6
8
9
3
1.68
(42.8)
A
3
B
3
0.29
(7.5)
0.50
(2.5)
0.16 Dia.
(4.2)
2 Holes
3
Recommended
Chassis Cutout
0.28
(5.3)
0.87
(22.2)
3
0.16 (3.9)
Dia. Holes
3
3
0.63
(16.2)
0.24
(6.1)
1.37
(34.7)
Solder Type Terminals
1.68
(42.6)
0.13
(3.3)
3
3
1.27
(32.3)
3
0.29
(7.5)
3
0.63
(16.2)
0.24
(6.1)
1.37
(34.7)
0.18
(4.7)
Typ.
3
1.39
(35.4)
3
3
3/16 Q.C. Type Terminals 0.19 (4.7)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-87
3.4
3
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
D5PAL
3
2.48
(63.0)
3
3
3
3
3.70
(96.0)
3
21
9
31
8
11
7
21
31
11
9
8
7
24
6
34
5
14
4
24
34
14
6
5
4
22
3
32
2
12
1
22
32
12
3
2
1
3
3.62
(92.0)
6
8
9
N.C.
4 N.O.
5 1
2
3
6
8
9
7
N.C.
4 N.O.
5 1
2
7
COM
3
B
COM
B
A
A
INPUT
3
INPUT
MODULE
INPUT
MODULE
INPUT
3
A2
3
7
IEC:
NEMA:
INPUT
3
A1
2
A2
Coil Jumper
Buss
A1
INPUT
1.40
(36.0)
3
INPUT
IEC
B
Coil Jumper
Buss
A
INPUT
INPUT
NEMA
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-88
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
Contents
D7 Series Relay
Description
Page
D1RR/D1RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D2RR/D2RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D3RR/D3RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D4 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D5RR/D5RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D7PR/D7PF Series
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D8 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D9 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V7-T3-53
V7-T3-57
V7-T3-67
V7-T3-76
V7-T3-80
V7-T3-90
V7-T3-90
V7-T3-92
V7-T3-93
V7-T3-95
V7-T3-96
V7-T3-103
V7-T3-108
V7-T3-112
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
D7PR/D7PF Series
Product Description
The D7 Series is a costeffective control relay with
high dielectric strength and
high current-carrying capacity.
Features
D7PR
●
Arc barrier equipped relay
with high dielectric
strength
●
Panel and DIN rail
mounting
Standards and Certifications
D7PF
Flag indicator shows relay
status in manual or
powered condition
●
Bipolar LED status lamp
allows for reverse polarity
applications
●
Shows coil ON or OFF
status
●
Ideal in low light
conditions
●
Color-coded pushbutton
identifies AC coils with red
or DC coils with blue
pushbuttons
●
Allows for manual
operation of relay
without the need for
coil power
●
Ideal for field service
personnel to test
control circuits
●
Lock-down door, when
activated, holds
pushbutton and contacts in
the operate position
●
Excellent for analyzing
circuit problems
●
Finger-grip cover allows
operator to remove relays
from sockets more easily
than conventional relays
●
White plastic ID tag/write
label used for identification
of relays in multi-relay
circuits
●
File # E37317, E65657
File # LR217017,
LR217069
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-89
3.4
3
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
Catalog Number Selection
D7 Series
3
3
3
3
3
D7PR 1 1 A
Family Type
D7PR = Standard relay
D7PF = Full featured relay
Coil Voltage
A = 120 Vac
A1 = 110 Vdc
B = 240 Vac
R1 = 12 Vdc
T = 24 Vac
T1 = 24 Vdc
W1 = 48 Vdc
Contact Configuration
2 = DPDT
4 = 4PDT
3 = 3PDT
3
Options
Blank = Plain cover (D7PR only)
A = LED test button, flag indicator,
lock-down door, finger-grip cover,
ID tag (D7PF only)
3
3
3
Product Selection
3
D7 Relay/Socket Quick Reference
3
Relay
Type
Socket/Adapter
Clip
Module
Type
ID Tag
3
D7PR2, D7PF2
D7PAA
PQC-1342
B
—
—
PQC-1349
B
—
—
D7PA9
PQC-1342
None
—
—
PFC-D2D72
—
None
—
—
3
3
D7PR3, D7PF3
3
3
D7PR4, D7PF4
3
D7PAB
Jumper
PQC-1783
A
—
—
PMC-1783
A
—
—
PFC-D73
—
None
—
—
D7PAD
PQC-1784
A
—
—
PMC-1784
A
—
—
—
None
—
—
PFC-D74
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-90
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
D7 Series Relay
3.4
D7 Series
Coil
Voltage
Contact
Configuration
Coil Resistance
(Ohms)
Catalog
Number
120 Vac
DPDT
4430
D7PF2AA
110/125 Vdc
DPDT
11,000
D7PF2AA1
3
3
Full Featured
220/240 Vac
DPDT
15,720
D7PF2AB
12 Vdc
DPDT
160
D7PF2AR1
24 Vac
DPDT
180
D7PF2AT
24 Vdc
DPDT
650
D7PF2AT1
24 Vac
3PDT
103
D7PF3AT
24 Vdc
3PDT
400
D7PF3AT1
120 Vac
4PDT
2220
D7PF4AA
3
3
3
3
3
3
110/125 Vdc
4PDT
7340
D7PF4AA1
240 Vac
4PDT
9120
D7PF4AB
12 Vdc
4PDT
96
D7PF4AR1
24 Vac
4PDT
84.5
D7PF4AT
24 Vdc
4PDT
388
D7PF4AT1
48 Vac
4PDT
410
D7PF4AW1
3
DPDT
4430
D7PR2A
3
3
3
Plain Cover
120 Vac
110/125 Vdc
DPDT
11,000
D7PR2A1
12 Vdc
DPDT
160
D7PR2R1
24 Vac
DPDT
180
D7PR2T
24 Vdc
DPDT
650
D7PR2T1
120 Vac
3PDT
2770
D7PR3A
240 Vac
3PDT
12,100
D7PR3B
12 Vdc
3PDT
100
D7PR3R1
24 Vac
3PDT
103
D7PR3T
24 Vdc
3PDT
400
D7PR3T1
120 Vac
4PDT
2220
D7PR4A
110/125 Vdc
4PDT
7340
D7PR4A1
240 Vac
4PDT
9120
D7PR4B
24 Vac
4PDT
84.5
D7PR4T
24 Vdc
4PDT
388
D7PR4T1
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-91
3.4
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3
Accessories
3
D7 Sockets and Accessories
3
Type
Socket
3
3
3
3
3
Module
Size
Nominal Voltage
(Max. for Sockets)
Nominal
Current
Mounting Style
Wire Size
Wire
Connection
Standard
Pack
Catalog
Number
B
300
16
DIN rail/panel
12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) mm2
Screw clamping
—
D7PAA 1
None
300
10
DIN rail/panel
12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) mm2
Screw clamping
1
D7PA9
A
300
16
DIN rail/panel
12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) mm2
Screw clamping
—
D7PAD 1
mm2
Screw clamping
—
D7PAB 1
A
300
16
DIN rail/panel
—
—
—
Flange
—
—
25
PFC-D2D72
—
—
—
Flange
—
—
25
PFC-D73
—
—
—
Flange
—
—
25
PFC-D74
Metal spring clip
—
—
—
—
—
—
25
PQC-1342
PQC-1349
Flange mount adapter
12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2)
Plastic ID clip
—
—
—
—
—
—
10
Metal spring clip
—
—
—
—
—
—
25
PQC-1784
Plastic ID clip
—
—
—
—
—
—
10
PMC-1784
3
Hold-down spring
—
—
—
—
—
—
25
PYC-B2
Metal spring clip
—
—
—
—
—
—
10
PQC-1783
3
Plastic ID clip
—
—
—
—
—
—
10
PMC-1783
3
3
3
Protection diode
A
6 to 250 Vdc
—
—
—
—
20
MOD-AD250
LED indicator
A
24 Vac/Vdc
—
—
—
—
20
MOD-ALG24
A
120/240 Vac/Vdc
—
—
—
—
20
MOD-ALG240
A
120 Vac/Vdc
—
—
—
—
20
MOD-AMV120
A
24 Vac/Vdc
—
—
—
—
20
MOD-AMV24
A
240 Vac/Vdc
—
—
—
—
20
MOD-AMV240
A
6 to 24 Vac/Vdc
—
—
—
—
20
MOD-RC24
A
110 to 240 Vac/Vdc
—
—
—
—
20
MOD-RC240
B
6 to 250 Vdc
—
—
—
—
20
MOD-BD250
MOD-BLG24
MOV suppressor
3
3
R/C suppressor
3
Protection diode
3
3
LED indicator
MOV suppressor
3
Plastic DIN rail end stop
3
3
B
24 Vac/Vdc
—
—
—
—
20
B
120/240 Vac/Vdc
—
—
—
—
20
MOD-BLG240
B
120 Vac/Vdc
—
—
—
—
20
MOD-BMV120
B
24 Vac/Vdc
—
—
—
—
20
MOD-BMV24
B
240 Vac/Vdc
—
—
—
—
20
MOD-BMV240
—
—
—
—
—
—
25
PFP-P
Note
1 Protection category (finger safe), EN 60529: IP20.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-92
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
Technical Data and Specifications
3
D7PR Relay
Description
D7PR (DPDT)
D7PR (3PDT)
D7PR (4PDT)
Contact rating
15 A
15 A
15 A
Terminal style
Plug-in
Plug-in
Plug-in
Contact materials
Silver alloy
Silver alloy
Silver alloy
Maximum switching voltage
300 V
300 V
300 V
3
3
Contact Characteristics
Switching current at voltage—resistive
Switching current at voltage
15 A at 120 Vac 50/60 Hz
15 A at 120 Vac 50/60 Hz
15 A at 120 Vac 50/60 Hz
12 A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz
12 A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz
12 A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz
10 A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz
—
—
12 A at 28 Vdc
12 A at 28 Vdc
12 A at 28 Vdc
1/2 hp at 120 Vac
1/2 hp at 120 Vac
1/2 hp at 120 Vac
1 hp at 250 Vac
3/4 hp at 250 Vac
3/4 hp at 250 Vac
Pilot duty
B300
B300
B300
Minimum switching requirement
100 mA at 5 Vdc (0.5 W)
100 mA at 5 Vdc (0.5 W)
100 mA at 5 Vdc (0.5 W)
% of nominal (AC)
85 to 110%
85 to 110%
85 to 110%
% of nominal (DC)
80 to 110%
80 to 110%
80 to 110%
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Coil Characteristics
3
Operating range
Average consumption
3
1.2 VA
1.5 VA
1.5 VA
0.9 W
1.4 W
1.5 W
15% (AC)
15% (AC)
15% (AC)
10% (DC)
10% (DC)
10% (DC)
Electrical life (UL 508) operations at rated current
100,000 operations
200,000 operations
200,000 operations
Mechanical life operations unpowered
10,000,000 operations
10,000,000 operations
10,000,000 operations
Response time
20 ms
20 ms
20 ms
3
Between coil and contact Vac (rms)
2500 V (rms)
2500 V (rms)
2500 V (rms)
3
Between poles Vac (rms)
1500 V (rms)
2500 V (rms)
2500 V (rms)
Operation
–40 °F to +131 °F
(–40 °C to +55 °C)
–40 °F to +131 °F
(–40 °C to +55 °C)
–40 °F to +131 °F
(–40 °C to +55 °C)
Storage
–40 °F to +185 °F
(–40 °C to +85 °C)
–40 °F to +185 °F
(–40 °C to +85 °C)
–40 °F to +185 °F
(–40 °C to +85 °C)
3 g-n at 10–55 Hz
3 g-n at 10–55 Hz
3 g-n at 10–55 Hz
Dropout voltage threshold
3
3
3
Performance
3
Dielectric strength
3
Environment
Ambient air temperature around the device
Vibration resistance—operational
Shock resistance
10 g-n
10 g-n
10 g-n
Degree of protection
IP40
IP40
IP40
Cover options
Plain cover
Plain cover
Plain cover
Features
Mechanical flag indicator
(optional LED)
Mechanical flag indicator
(optional LED)
Mechanical flag indicator
(optional LED)
Product certifications
RoHS/UL/CE/CSA
RoHS/UL/CE/CSA
RoHS/UL/CE/CSA
3
3
3
3
3
Features
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-93
3.4
3
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
D7PF Relay
Description
D7PF (DPDT)
D7PF (3PDT)
D7PF (4PDT)
15 A
3
Contact Characteristics
Contact rating
15 A
15 A
3
Terminal style
Plug-in
Plug-in
Plug-in
Contact materials
Silver alloy
Silver alloy
Silver alloy
Maximum switching voltage
300 V
300 V
300 V
15 A at 120 Vac 50/60 Hz
15 A at 120 Vac 50/60 Hz
15 A at 120 Vac 50/60 Hz
12 A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz
12 A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz
12 A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz
10 A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz
—
—
12 A at 28 VDC
12 A at 28 Vdc
12 A at 28 Vdc
3
3
Switching current at voltage—resistive
3
3
3
Switching current at voltage
1/2 hp at 120 Vac
3/4 hp at 250 Vac
1/2 hp at 120 Vac
1 hp at 250 Vac
1/2 hp at 120 Vac
3/4 hp at 250 Vac
3
Pilot duty
B300
B300
B300
Minimum switching requirement
100 mA at 5 Vdc (0.5 W)
100 mA at 5 Vdc (0.5 W)
3
Coil Characteristics
100 mA at 5 Vdc (0.5 W)
% of nominal (AC)
85 to 110%
85 to 110%
85 to 110%
% of nominal (DC)
80 to 110%
80 to 110%
80 to 110%
1.2 VA
1.5 VA
1.5 VA
0.9 W
1.4 W
1.5 W
15% (AC)
15% (AC)
15% (AC)
10% (DC)
10% (DC)
10% (DC)
Electrical life (UL 508) operations at rated current
100,000 operations
200,000 operations
200,000 operations
3
Mechanical life operations unpowered
10,000,000 operations
10,000,000 operations
10,000,000 operations
Response time
20 ms
20 ms
20 ms
3
Dielectric strength
Between coil and contact Vac (rms)
2500 V (rms)
2500 V (rms)
2500 V (rms)
Between poles Vac (rms)
1500 V (rms)
2500 V (rms)
2500 V (rms)
3
3
Operating range
Average consumption
3
Dropout voltage threshold
3
3
3
3
Performance
Environment
Ambient air temperature around the device
3
Operation
–40 °F to +131 °F
(–40 ° to 55 °C)
–40 °F to +131 °F
(–40 ° to 55 °C)
–40 °F to +131 °F
(–40 ° to 55 °C)
3
Storage
–40 °F to +185 °F
(–40 ° to 85 °C)
–40 °F to +185 °F
(–40 ° to 85 °C)
–40 °F to +185 °F
(–40 ° to 85 °C)
3
Vibration resistance—operational
3 g-n at 10–55 Hz
3 g-n at 10–55 Hz
3 g-n at 10–55 Hz
Shock resistance
10 g-n
10 g-n
10 g-n
3
Degree of protection
IP40
IP40
IP40
Features
3
3
3
Cover options
Full featured
Full featured
Full featured
Features
Locking pushbutton/
Bipolar LED/
Removable ID tag/
Mechanical flag indicator
Locking pushbutton/
Bipolar LED/
Removable ID tag/
Mechanical flag indicator
Locking pushbutton/
Bipolar LED/
Removable ID tag/
Mechanical flag indicator
Product certifications
RoHS/UL/CE/CSA
RoHS/UL/CE/CSA
RoHS/UL/CE/CSA
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-94
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
Wiring Diagrams
3
D7PR2/D7PF2
12
42
1
4
3
14
44
5
8
3
3
11
41
9
12
A1
A2
13
14
IEC
3
3
3
NEMA
3
D7PR3/D7PF3
12
22
42
1
2
4
3
14
24
44
5
6
8
3
11
21
41
9
10
12
A2
13
3
A1
3
3
14
IEC
3
NEMA
3
D7PR4/D7PF4
12
22
32
42
1
2
3
4
14
24
34
44
5
6
7
8
3
3
3
11
21
31
A1
IEC
41
9
A2
13
10
11
12
3
3
14
3
NEMA
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-95
3.4
3
Dimensions
3
D7PR1/D7PF1
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
0.27
(7.0)
3
0.83
(21.0)
0.29
(7.4)
0.02
(0.5)
3
0.83
(21.0)
0.29
(7.4)
0.02
(0.5)
1.10
(27.9)
3
3
0.19
(4.8)
1.54
(39.1)
3
1.10
(27.9)
0.19
(4.8)
1.40
(35.5)
0.16
(4.7)
0.38
(9.9)
3
0.23
(5.9)
3
0.30
(7.5)
3
3
0.08
(2.1)2X
3
0.55
(14.1)
3
3
D7PR2/D7PF2
0.27
(7.0)
3
0.83
(21.0)
0.29
(7.4)
0.02
(0.5)
3
0.83
(21.0)
0.29
(7.4)
0.02
(0.5)
1.10
(27.9)
3
3
1.54
(39.1)
3
0.19
(4.8)
1.10
(27.9)
0.19
(4.8)
1.40
(35.5)
0.38
(9.9)
3
0.16
(4.7)
0.23
(5.9)
3
0.30
(7.5)
3
3
0.08
(2.1)2X
3
0.55
(14.1)
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-96
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
3.4
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
3
D7PR3/D7PF3
1.20
(30.8)
0.26
(6.6)
0.27
(7.0)
0.02
(0.5)
3
0.02
(0.5)
1.10
(27.9)
1.60
(40.0)
3
1.20
(30.8)
0.29
(7.4)
1.10
(27.9)
0.19
(4.8)
3
3
0.19
(4.8)
1.40
(35.5)
3
3
0.39
(9.9)
3
0.19
(4.7)
0.23
(5.9)
0.26
(6.7)
0.39
(9.9)
3
3
3
0.39
(9.9)2X
3
0.79
(20.0)
3
3
D7PR4/D7PF4
1.60
(40.6)
0.26
(6.6)
0.27
(7.0)
0.29
(7.4)
0.02
(0.5)
1.60
(40.6)
3
1.10
(27.9)
1.54
(39.1)
1.10
(27.9)
1.40
(35.5)
0.19
(4.8)
3
0.02
(0.5)
0.38
0.38 (9.9)
0.38 (9.9)
(9.9)
3
3
0.19
(4.8)
3
3
0.16
(4.7)
0.23
(5.9)
3
0.26
(6.7)
3
3
3
0.38
(9.9)2X
3
1.18
(29.9)
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-97
3.4
3
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
D7PA3
D7PA4
3
1
1
10
4
3
5
8
6
9
7
2
6
3
3
11
Wiring Diagram (Top View)
3
11
3
12
4
14
Wiring Diagram (Top View)
2.74 (69.8)
2.58 (67.5) Max.
1.09
(27.8)
Max.
0.65
(16.6)
3
1.09
(27.8)
Max.
0.65
(16.6)
Combination Slotted/Phillips
Head Screws 6-32 x 5/16"
3
3
10
8
3
3
9
2.74 (69.8)
2.58 (67.5) Max.
3
3
13
2
5
3
3
7
1.44
(36.6)
1.27
(32.5)
4
1
5
2
3
8
11
Combination Slotted/Phillips
Head Screws 6-32 x 5/16"
7
3
6
3
10
9
1.59
(40.5)
Max.
1.83
(46.5)
1.63
(41.4)
5
1
6
2
13
10
1.98
(50.5)
Max.
7
3
8
4
11
14
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-98
9
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
12
3.4
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
3
D7PA9 Standard Mount
3
0.71
(18.0)
3
5
44
14
8
5
1
42
12
4
1
8
4
2.52
(64.0)
2.73
(69.0)
8
5
12
9
14
1.26
(32.0)
N.C.
N.O.
COM
4
1
8
5
12
9
3
N.C.
N.O.
3
COM
3
13
A2
A1
41
11
INPUT
INPUT
14
13
14
13
12
9
INPUT
3
3
INPUT
13
9
12
1.02
(26.0)
1
3
3
0.16
(4.0)
14
4
3
IEC
3
3
NEMA
3
1.03
(26.0)
3
1.17
(29.0)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-99
3.4
3
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
D7PAA
3
1.18
(30.0)
3
0.74
(19.0)
3
3
44
14
8
5
42
12
4
1
3
3
3
3.14
(80.0)
0.16
(4.0)
3
3.33
(84.0)
3
2.67
(68.0)
44
14
8
5
42
12
4
1
4
1
8
5
12
9
14
13
3
N.C.
N.O.
COM
INPUT
4
1
8
5
12
9
14
13
1.57
(40.0)
3
3
3
INPUT
A2
IEC:
NEMA:
INPUT
A1
14
13
41
11
12
9
0.24
(6.0)
A2
A1 INPUT
14
41
11
12
IEC
9
NEMA
1.06
(26.0)
1.18
(30.0)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-100
INPUT
13 INPUT
3
3
N.O.
COM
MODULE
INPUT
MODULE
INPUT
3
N.C.
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
3.4
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
3
D7PAB
3
1.18
(30.0)
0.74
(19.0)
1.10
(28.0)
44
3
24
3
14
8
6
5
42
22
12
4
2
1
44
24
14
8
6
5
42
22
12
4
2
1
3
3.14
(80.0)
0.16
(4.0)
4
2
1
8
6
5
12
10
9
14
13
2.67
(68.0)
3.33
(84.0)
N.C.
N.O.
COM
INPUT
4
2
1
8
6
5
12
10
9
14
N.O.
COM
A2
INPUT
INPUT
A2
A1
14
13
41
21
11
12
10
9
A1
14
INPUT
0.24
(6.0)
41
21
IEC
12
10
3
3
13
3
9
3
INPUT
11
3
3
MODULE
INPUT
IEC:
NEMA:
1.57
(40.0)
3
INPUT
13
MODULE
INPUT
N.C.
3
NEMA
3
3
1.45
(37.0)
1.57
(40.0)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-101
3.4
3
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
D7PAD
3
1.18
(30.0)
0.74
(19.0)
3
3
44
1.41
(36.0)
3
3
34
42
44
34
24
14
8
7
6
5
42
32
22
12
4
3
2
1
3
24
32
14
22
12
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
12
11
10
9
N.C.
N.O.
COM
INPUT
MODULE
INPUT
3
0.16
(4.0)
A2
3.33
(84.0)
3
A1
INPUT
2.67
(68.0)
3
11
IEC
3.14
(80.0)
3
21
31
41
8
5
6
7
IEC:
NEMA:
1.57
(40.0)
3
INPUT
A2
INPUT
A1
13
14
3
3
3
41
31
21
11
12
11
10
9
1.81
(46.0)
3
3
4
2
1
8
7
6
5
12
11
10
9
N.C.
N.O.
COM
INPUT
MODULE
INPUT
13
14
INPUT
12
3
3
0.24
(6.0)
1.96
(50.0)
1
2
3
4
11
10
9
NEMA
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-102
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
Contents
D8 Series Relay
Description
D1RR/D1RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D2RR/D2RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D3RR/D3RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D4 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D5RR/D5RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D7PR/D7PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D8 Series
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D9 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
3
V7-T3-53
V7-T3-57
V7-T3-67
V7-T3-76
V7-T3-80
V7-T3-89
3
V7-T3-104
V7-T3-104
V7-T3-105
V7-T3-105
V7-T3-108
V7-T3-112
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
D8 Series
Product Description
Features
The D8 Series power relays
are perfect for loads up to 30
A, with versions for flange
mounting and e-clip mounting
available.
●
●
●
●
●
●
Allows switching of 25 A
and 30 A loads
A high-capacity, highwithstand voltage relay
compatible with
momentary voltage drops
No contact chattering for
momentary voltage drops
up to 50% of rated voltage
UL Class B construction
standard
Wide-range AC-activated
coil that handles 100 to 120
Vac at either 50
or 60 Hz
Panel, DIN rail and flange
mounting
3
Standards and Certifications
File # E1491
3
File # LR701520
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-103
3.4
3
3
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
Catalog Number Selection
D8 Series 1
3
3
Control Relays and Timers
D8PR 6 TE A
Family Type
D8PR
3
Coil Voltage
A = 120 Vac
B = 240 Vac
R1 = 12 Vdc
T = 24 Vac
T1 = 24 Vdc
Contact Configuration
6 = SPST-NO
7 = DPST-NO
3
Options
TE = E-bracket
TF = Flange mount
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Product Selection
D8 Relay/Socket Quick Reference
Relay
Type
Mounting
Bracket
Adapter Track/
Panel Mount
Front Connecting
Sockets Track/
Panel Mount
D8PR6TE
D8PA5
D8PA1
D8PA2
D8PR7TE
D8PA5
D8PA1
D8PA2
3
D8 Series Relay
3
D8 Series 2
Standard
Pack
Catalog
Number
24 Vac
1
D8PR6TET
24 Vdc
1
D8PR6TET1
Type
3
SPST E-Bracket
Coil voltage
3
3
SPST Flange Mount
3
120 Vac
1
D8PR6TFA
24 Vdc
1
D8PR6TFT1
3
DPST E-Bracket
1
D8PR7TEA
120 Vac
1
D8PR7TFA
3
24 Vdc
1
D8PR7TFT1
3
DIN rail adapter
10
D8PA1
Screw terminal adapter
10
D8PA2
3
Bracket adapter
10
D8PA5
100
PFP-M
Coil voltage
3
120 Vac
DPST Flange Mount
3
Sockets
Accessory
3
DIN rail end stop
3
Notes
1 For deciphering catalog numbers. Do not use for ordering as not all combinations are readily available.
2 Additional coil voltages available—consult Sales Office or Customer Support Center.
3
3
3
V7-T3-104
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
Technical Data and Specifications
3
Coil Resistance
3
Coil Voltage
Ohms
mA
24 Vac
303
71
110/120 Vac
5260
20.4
220/240 Vac
21,000
10.2
12 Vdc
75
158
24 Vdc
303
79
Description
D8PR6
D8PR7
Rated load
220 Vac 30 A
220 Vac 25 A
3
3
3
3
D8 Relays
Carry current
30 A
25 A
Max. operating voltage
250 Vac
250 Vac
3
3
3
Max. switching current
30 A
25 A
Contact material
AgCdO
AgCdO
Max. switching capacity
6600 VA
5500 VA
Min. permissible load
100 mA at 5 Vdc
100 mA at 5 Vdc
Mechanical life (min.)
5,000,000 operations
5,000,000 operations
3
Electrical life at all contact ratings (min.)
100,000 operations
100,000 operations
Maximum hp ratings
1-1/2 hp (120 Vac)
3 hp (240/265/277 Vac)
1-1/2 hp (120 Vac)
3 hp (240/265/277 Vac)
3
3
3
Coil Data
Coil Voltage
Must Operate
Must Release
Maximum Voltage
24 Vdc/Vac, 12 Vdc
75% maximum
15% minimum
110%
120 Vac
75 V
18 V
132 V
240 Vac
150 V
36 V
264 V
3
3
3
3
3
Dimensions
3
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
3
D8PR6TF
3
2.70 (68.5) Max.
2.36 (60.0)
1.99 (50.5)
Max.
0.25 (6.4)
0.43
(11.0)
1.32 (33.5)
Max.
0.03
(0.8)
3
Two 0.18 (4.5) Dia. Holes
or M4 Tapped Holes
0.08 (2.0)
0
1.85
(47.0)
Max.
3
1
4
3
6
3
2.362 0.007
(60.0 0.2)
0.12 (3.0)
0.18
(4.5)
Terminal Arrangement/
Internal Connections
(Top View)
3
Mounting Holes
(Bottom View)
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-105
3.4
3
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
D8PR7TF
3
2.70 (68.5) Max.
2.36 (60.0)
3
1.99 (50.5)
Max.
0.25 (6.4)
3
3
Control Relays and Timers
0.43
(11.0)
1.32 (33.5)
Max.
0.03
(0.8)
3
3
1.85
(47.0)
Max.
0.12
(3.0)
6
8
2.07 (52.5) Max.
Mounting Holes
(Bottom View)
Two 0.18 (4.5) Dia. Holes
or M4 Tapped Holes
1.99
(50.5) Max.
0.25 (6.4)
0.43
(11.0)
1.32 (33.5)
Max.
0.03
(0.8)
0.08 (2.0)
0
1
4
6
2.09
(53.0)
Max.
Terminal Arrangement/
Internal Connections
(Top View)
3
1.574 0.003
(40.0 0.1)
Mounting Holes
(Bottom View)
D8PR7TE with D8PA5 Bracket Attached
2.07 (52.5) Max.
3
Two 0.18 (4.5) Dia. Holes
or M4 Tapped Holes
1.99
(50.5) Max.
3
0.25 (6.4)
0.43
(11.0)
1.32 (33.5)
Max
0.03
(0.8)
0.08 (2.0)
0
2.09
(53.0)
Max.
3
2
1
4 6
8
Terminal Arrangement/
Internal Connections
(Top View)
3
3
4
Terminal Arrangement/
Internal Connections
(Top View)
0.18
(4.5)
3
3
2
D8PR6TE with D8PA5 Bracket Attached
3
3
1
2.362 0.007
(60.0 0.2)
3
3
0.08 (2.0)
0
3
3
Two 0.18 (4.5) Dia. Holes
or M4 Tapped Holes
1.574 0.003
(40.0 0.1)
Mounting Holes
(Bottom View)
D8PA1
3
Two M4 or
0.18 (4.5) Dia. Holes
3
2.03
(51.5)
Max.
3
3
1.574 0.003
(40.0 0.1)
1.574 0.003
(40.0 0.1)
3
0.20
(5.0)
2.19 (55.5)
Max.
3
0.57
(14.5)
Mounting Holes
(Bottom View)
1.39 (35.2)
Max.
3
3
3
Note: Minimum spacing around relay = 0.20 inches (5 mm).
V7-T3-106
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
3.4
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
3
D8PA2
3
Two M3.5 Screws
for Coil
0.31 (8.0)
3
Two M4 or
0.18 (4.5) Dia. Holes
3
2.03
(51.5)
Max.
Four M4 Screws
for Contact
0.36 (9.2)
1.574 0.003
(40.0 0.1)
0.98
(25.0)
1.81 (46.0)
Max.
2.19 (55.5)
Max.
3
1.574 0.003
(40.0 0.1)
0.20
(5.0)
3
3
Mounting Holes
(Bottom View)
3
3
3
3
D8PA5
PFP-M DIN Rail End Stop
Two
0.18 (4.5)
Dia. Holes
1.57
(40.0)
M4 Spring Washer
0.94
0.70 (24.0)
0.45
(11.5)
1.02
(26.0)
Two M4 or 0.18 (4.5)
Dia. Holes
0.39
(10.0)
1.81
(46.0)
1.574 0.003
(40.0 0.1)
0.39
(10.0)
3
0.07 1.39
(1.8) (35.3)
0.19
(4.8)
1.97
(50.0)
3
0.39
(10.0)
0.05
(1.3)
3
1.47
(37.3)
3
3
3
Mounting
Holes
(Bottom View)
0.20
(5.0)
0.12
(3.0)
0.17
(4.4)
0.27
0.94 (7.0)
(24.0)
0.24
(6.2)
0.07
(1.8)
M4 x 8 Pan
Head Screw
(17.8)
3
1.18
(30.0)
0.20
(5.0)
0.78
(19.7)
3
3
1.20 (50.0)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-107
3.4
3
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
Contents
D9 Series Relay
Description
3
Page
D1RR/D1RF Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D2RR/D2RF Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D3RR/D3RF Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D4 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D5RR/D5RF Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D7PR/D7PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D8 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D9 Series
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
D9 Series
3
Product Description
Features
The four-pole D9 Series is
ideal for three-phase motor
applications. Various contact
configurations are available.
●
3
3
3
●
●
3
●
3
3
Ideal for three-phase motor
control applications
No contact chattering for
momentary voltage drops
up to 50% of rated voltage
Push-to-Test button is a
standard feature to check
contact operation
Mounting bracket is
supplied with relay
Catalog Number Selection
D9PR 8B A
Family Type
D9PR
Contact Configuration
8B = 4PST-NO
9B = 3PST-NO/SPST-NC
10B = DPST-NO/DPST-NC
Coil Voltage
A = 120 Vac
B = 240 Vac
R1 = 12 Vdc
T = 24 Vac
T1 = 24 Vdc
Standards and Certifications
File # E1491
3
File # LR701520
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-108
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-53
V7-T3-57
V7-T3-67
V7-T3-76
V7-T3-80
V7-T3-89
V7-T3-103
V7-T3-109
V7-T3-109
V7-T3-110
V7-T3-112
3.4
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
Product Selection
3
D9 Series
Catalog
Number
4PST-NO Power Relay
DPST-NO/DPST-NC Power Relay
Coil voltage
Coil voltage
24 Vac
D9PR8BT
3
Catalog
Number
3
24 Vac
D9PR10BT
3
120 Vac
D9PR8BA
120 Vac
D9PR10BA
240 Vac
D9PR8BB
24 Vac
D9PR10BT1
24 Vdc
D9PR8BT1
3
D9PR9BA
3
3PST-NO/SPST-NC Power Relay
120 Vac
3
3
Technical Data and Specifications
3
Coil Resistance
Coil Voltage
Ohms
mA
Coil Voltage
Ohms
mA
24 Vac
—
75
12 Vdc
72
167
120 Vac
—
21.6
24 Vdc
288
83
240 Vac
—
10.8
110 Vdc
6050
18
3
3
3
3
D9PR Specifications
NO Contacts
Resistive Load (p.f. = 1)
NC Contacts
Resistive Load (p.f. = 1)
3
Rated load
220 Vac 25 A
30 Vdc 25 A
220 Vac 8 A
30 Vdc 8 A
3
Carry current
25 A
8A
Max. operating voltage
250 Vac/125 Vdc
250 Vac/125 Vdc
3
Max. switching current
25 A
8A
Max. switching capacity
5500 VA
750 W
1760 VA
240 W
Min. permissible load
100 mA at 24 Vdc
100 mA at 24 Vdc
Mechanical life (min.)
1,000,000 operations
1,000,000 operations
Electrical life at all contact ratings (min.)
100,000 operations
100,000 operations
Maximum hp ratings
1-1/2 hp (120 Vac)
3 hp (240/265/277 Vac)
Three-phase 3 hp (240/265/277 Vac) 30,000 cycles
Three-phase 5 hp (240/265/277 Vac) 30,000 cycles
1-1/2 hp (120 Vac)
3 hp (240/265/277 Vac)
Three-phase 3 hp (240/265/277 Vac) 30,000 cycles
Three-phase 5 hp (240/265/277 Vac) 30,000 cycles
Description
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-109
3.4
3
3
3
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
Coil Data
Coil Voltage
Must Operate
Must Release
Maximum Voltage
24 Vdc/Vac, 12 Vdc, 110 Vdc
75% maximum
10% minimum
110%
120 Vac
75 V
18 V
132 V
240 Vac
150 V
36 V
264 V
3
3
Terminal Arrangements
3
14
13
14
13
14
13
3
24
23
24
23
24
23
3
34
33
34
33
34
33
3
44
43
42
41
42
41
A2
A1
A2
A1
A2
A1
3
D9PR8
3
3
3
D9PR9
D9PR10
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
D9PR
3
3
3
Screw Terminal Brackets
Ten M3.5
1.36
(34.5)
Max.
0.30
(7.6)
3
3
3
2.17
(55.2)
Two M4 or
0.18 (4.5) Dia.
0.17
(4.3)
1.70
(43.2)
3
2.52
(64.0)
Max.
1.378 0.004
(35.0 0.1)
3
2.03
(51.5)
Max.
3
0.08
(2.0)
Mounting Holes
(Bottom View)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-110
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
3
Mounting Bracket
1.37
(35.0)
3
Two M4 or
0.18 (4.5) Dia.
Mounting Holes
3
Two M4
3
0.95
(24.0)
3
1.378 0.004
(35.0 1.0)
1.18
(30.0)
3
0.35
(9.0)
1.10
(28.0)
1.14
(29.0)
3
0.28
(7.0)
3
3
1.73
(44.0)
0.17
(4.4)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-111
3.4
3
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
Contents
Accessories
Description
3
D1RR/D1RF Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D2RR/D2RF Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D3RR/D3RF Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D4 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D5RR/D5RF Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D7PR/D7PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D8 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D9 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories
MOD Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Relay Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coil Bus Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Write-On Plastic Labels/ID Tags . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flange Mount Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Accessories
3
Accessories Selection Guide
The MOD Module System
Eaton offers a variety of
simple-to-install relay
accessories that allow you to
customize the features of a
relay system to meet your
exact needs.
Eaton’s plug-in modules are a
simple way to add
functionality to your relay
without the hassle of messy
wiring and additional
mounting of external
electronics. They are available
in a variety of configurations
to meet the needs of almost
any application.
3
3
3
3
3
3
System Diagrams
Circuit Diagrams
The MOD Module System
LED Circuit
Diode Circuit
3
3
3
3
3
A1
A2
A1
The diode module protects
external drive circuitry from
inductive voltages generated
when removing coil voltages.
The LED status lamp verifies
that power is being supplied
to the coil. Ideal for both AC
and DC applications. Polarity
sensitive for DC applications.
RC Circuit
Metal Oxide Varistor (MOV)
Circuit
3
3
+
+
A2
3
3
3
A2
A1
Snubs back EMF of relay coil.
3
3
V7-T3-112
A2
A1
The MOV circuit protects
by shunting potentially
damaging electrical spikes
away from the relay coil. Ideal
for AC and DC applications.
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
Page
V7-T3-53
V7-T3-57
V7-T3-67
V7-T3-76
V7-T3-80
V7-T3-89
V7-T3-103
V7-T3-108
V7-T3-113
V7-T3-114
V7-T3-116
V7-T3-116
V7-T3-117
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
MOD Modules
3
Eaton’s relay accessories
provide a complete solution
for add-on modules and
identification tags.
MOD Modules
MOD-AD250
Module
Size
Description
Nominal Voltage
Catalog
Number
Mating
Sockets
A
Protection diode
6–250 Vdc
MOD-AD250
D3PA6, D3PAL8,
D3PA7, D3PAL11,
D5PAL, D7PAB,
D7PAD
3
3
3
3
MOD-RC_
R/C suppressor
6–24 Vac
MOD-RC24
110–240 Vac
MOD-RC240
3
3
3
MOD-ALG_
LED indicator
24 Vac
MOD-ALG24
120/240 Vac
MOD-ALG240
3
3
3
MOD-AMV_
MOV suppressor
24 Vac
MOD-AMV24
120 Vac
MOD-AMV120
240 Vac
MOD-AMV240
3
3
3
3
MOD-BD250
B
Protection diode
6–250 Vdc
MOD-BD250
D1RAA, D2PAL,
D2PAP, D2PA7,
D7PAA
3
3
MOD-BLG_
LED indicator
24 Vac
MOD-BLG24
120/240 Vac
MOD-BLG240
3
3
3
MOD-BMV_
MOV suppressor
24 Vac
MOD-BMV24
120 Vac
MOD-BMV120
240 Vac
MOD-BMV240
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-113
3.4
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
Relay Clips
Eaton offers a variety of relay
clips designed to improve the
performance and
functionality within an
electrical panel.
Metal Hold-Down Clips
Metal hold-down clips, or
spring clips, are ideal for use
where high heat or humid
conditions are a factor. These
clips hold their shape and
tension and are designed
to withstand harsh
environments. All clips
are made of corrosionresistant stainless steel.
Metal Hold-Down Clips
Catalog
Number
Mating Sockets
Mating Relays
PMC-1781
PMC-1781
D1RAA
D1RR, D1RF
PQC-1782
PQC-1782
D2PAL, D2PAP, D2PA7
D2RR2, D2RF2, D2RR3, D2RF4
PQC-1342
PQC-1342
D2PA6, D7PAA, D7PA9
D2RR4, D2RF4
PQC-1332
PQC-1332
D3PA6, D3PA7
D3RR2, D3RF2, D3RR3, D3RF3
PQC-1351
PQC-1351
D3PAL8, D3PA2, D3PAL11, D3PA3,
D5PAL, D5PA2, D5PA3L, D5PA3S
D3RR2, D3RF2, D3RR3, D3RF4, D5RR, D5RF
PQC-1783
PQC-1783
D7PAB
D7PR1, D7PF1, D7PR2, D7PF3
PQC-1784
PQC-1784
D7PAD
D7PR4, D7PF4
PYC- _
PYC-B2
D7PA3, D7PA4
D7PR1, D7PR2, D7PR4
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-114
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
Plastic Ejector/
Hold-Down Clips
These clips are great for
applications where sockets
are located in dense or tight
areas. They allow for quick,
safe and firm securing of
relays in the sockets with the
added benefit that the relay
can be ejected with one
finger. Plastic clips also aid in
keeping operators’ fingers
away from live circuits. The
optional snap-in identification
tag allows for custom
marking of sockets when
used in multi-socket
applications.
Plastic ID Clips
Plastic ID clips allow for easy
circuit identification in multirelay applications. They are
designed for labeling and
are not ideal for securing
the relay in the socket.
3.4
3
PWC-D24
Plastic Ejector/Hold-Down Clips
3
Catalog
Number
Mating Sockets
Mating Relays
PWC-D24
D2PAL, D2PAP, D2PA7
D2RF2, D2RF4
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Plastic ID Clips
PQC-1349
Catalog
Number
Mating Sockets
Mating Relays
PQC-1349
D7PAA
D7PF1, D7PF2
3
3
3
3
3
PMC-1783
PMC-1783
D7PAB
D7PF1, D7PF2
3
3
3
PMC-1784
PMC-1784
D7PAD
3
D7PF4
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-115
3.4
3
3
3
3
3
3
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
Coil Bus Jumpers
Eaton’s coil bus jumpers
allow inputs to be bridged
to adjacent sockets without
additional wiring, making
multi-relay connections quick
and easy. The easy-to-install
design requires no tools and
can be complete in a matter
of seconds.
System Diagrams
Coil Bus Jumpers 1
3
3
3
3
3
Write-On Plastic Labels/ID Tags
These convenient plastic
labels snap easily onto
the relay socket for clear
identification in multi-relay
panels. The hinged design
makes wiring simple and
allows for angular adjustment
of the tag to improve
readability in the panel.
Marking with a standard
permanent marker creates
a smudge-free surface.
Coil Bus Jumpers
Catalog
Number
Mating Sockets
D2PJ1
D2PJ1
D2PAL, D2PAP
D3PJ1
D3PJ1
D3PA6, D3PA7, D5PAL
3
3
3
3
3
Write-On Plastic Labels/ID Tags
Catalog
Number
Mating Sockets
PWF-D2P
PWF-D2P
D2PAL, D2PAP
PWF-D3D5
PWF-D3D5
D3PAL8, D3PAL11, D5PAL
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Note
1 Jumpers in photo are colored green to improve visibility,
actual jumpers are black.
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-116
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
Flange Mount Adapters
Eaton’s relay flange mount
adapters create a modular
approach to flexible
mounting options. Each lowcost adapter allows for panel
mounting of a standard
control relay and can
eliminate the need for
a socket.
PFC-D11
Unit with Flange Mount
Adapter
PFC-D2D72
3.4
Flange Mount Adapters
3
Catalog
Number
Mating Relay
3
PFC-D11
D1RF1, D1RR1
3
3
3
PFC-D2D72
3
D2P, D7PF2, D7PR2
3
3
3
PFC-D73
PFC-D73
D7PF3, D7PR3
3
3
3
PFC-D74
PFC-D74
D7PF4, D7PR4
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-117
3.5
3
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Open Style Relays
Contents
9575H Series 3000 Relay
Description
3
9575H Series 3000—Type AA, AC and DC
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
9575H Series 3000—Type AA, AC and DC
3
Product Description
Application Description
Standards and Certifications
Type AA panel-mounted
relays are rated (each pole)
40 A up to 300 Vac, 50/60 Hz;
5 A at 480/600 Vac, 50/60 Hz
and 40 A at 28 Vdc.
9575H Series 3000 relays are
ideal for applications when
controlling smaller loads,
such as single-phase motors.
●
3
3
●
●
UL listed, E1491
CSA 41729
CE: EN60947-4-1,
EN60947-5-1
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-118
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
Page
V7-T3-119
V7-T3-119
V7-T3-120
V7-T3-121
3.5
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Open Style Relays
Product Selection
3
When Ordering, Specify
Catalog number and magnet
coil code letter. Example: for
DPDT relay with auxiliary
switch and a 120 V 50/60 Hz
coil, order Catalog Number
9575H3A010.
3
Coil Voltage Selection
Coil Voltage
Hz
Suffix Code
3
120
50/60
A
3
240
50/60
B
480/440
60/50
C
600/550
60/50
D
208
50/60
E
277
50/60
H
6
50/60
J
12
50/60
K
24
50/60
L
48
50/60
M
3
110
—
P
3
220
—
Q
6
—
R
12
—
S
24
—
T
48
—
W
Volts AC
9575H Series 3000
Relay
Type AA Relays 1
Relay Style
Catalog
Number 2
Relay (DPDT)
9575H3_000
Relay with auxiliary switch
9575H3_010
Relay with blowout magnets
9575H3_100
Relay with auxiliary switch and
blowout magnets
9575H3_110
3
3
3
3
Volts DC
3
3
3
3
3
Accessories
3
Enclosure 3
Description
Catalog
Number
3
NEMA 1 Enclosure
9575H2449
3
Notes
1 There are no “repair parts” available for these relays.
2 Underscore indicates missing code suffix for magnet coil—see Selection table above.
3 Only 9575H3 relays without an auxiliary switch should be mounted in the 9575H2449
enclosure.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-119
3.5
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Open Style Relays
Technical Data and Specifications
Relay Specifications
Dielectric Withstanding Voltage
Between open contacts:
1500 Vrms
●
All other mutually insulated
conductive elements:
2200 Vrms
●
Coil
●
Pull-in voltage: 80%
DC coils, 85% AC coils
of nominal voltage
or less at 25ºC
●
Dropout voltage: 10%
of nominal voltage
or more at 25ºC
●
Coil resistance: ±10%
measured at 25ºC
●
Max. DC coil dissipation
capability: 4 watts DC
continuous at 25ºC
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Contacts
Contact combination:
DPDT
●
Contact rating each pole
(main contacts): Each pole
rated 40 amps up to 300
Vac, 50/60 Hz, 5 amps at
480/600 Vac 50/60 Hz,
0.75 PF load. 1-1/2 hp
motor load (each pole) at
120–600 Vac, 50/60 Hz.
2 hp motor load at
200–600 Vac, 50/60 Hz
only when using both
poles to switch both sides
of load, 40 amps at 28 Vdc
resistive load each pole.
NEMA A 600 pilot duty
50/60 Hz
●
Additional contact ratings
for relays with blowout
magnets: 10 A at 110 Vdc
resistive, 4 A at 225 Vdc
resistive, 2 A at 325 Vdc
resistive. For inductive
loads, contacts must be
derated accordingly.
●
Contact material: Silver
cadmium oxide, gold
flashed. 5/16 in
(7.9 mm) diameter standard
●
Miscellaneous
●
Coil terminals: 6–32
screws
●
Contact terminals: 8-–32
screws
●
Main base material:
Molded phenolic, UL
recognized (QMFZ2)
●
Weight (DPDT Relay):
11 oz (311 grams)
approximately
●
Weight (DPDT Relay with
auxiliary switch) 14.5 oz
(411 grams) approximately
Auxiliary Switch Specifications
Contact combination:
SPDT
●
Contact rating: Auxiliary
switch rated 10 amps at
125 or 250 Vac, resistive
load; 1/4 hp at 125 or 250
Vac, motor load; 0.4 amps
at 125 Vdc or 0.20 amps at
250 Vdc, resistive load; 3
amps at 125 Vac lamp load.
All AC ratings are 50/60 Hz
●
Dielectric withstanding
voltage: 500 Vac rms
between open contacts,
1500 Vac rms between all
other mutually insulated
conductive elements
●
Terminals: 4–40 round
head screws for auxiliary
contacts standard
●
Average Operating Times (Milliseconds)
3
Operation
DPDT Relay
DPDT Relay with Auxiliary Switch
Pickup
40
50
3
Dropout
35
35
3
Temperature Ranges
3
3
Temperature
AC
DC
Operating range
–30 °C to +55 °C
–30 °C to +55 °C
Non-operating range
–30 °C to +100 °C
–30 °C to +100 °C
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-120
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
3.5
Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Open Style Relays
Dimensions
3
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
9575H3 DPDT Relay
3
9575H2449
3.31
(84.2)
Mounting Holes 0.187 (4.75) Dia. (2 Places)
3
1.88
(47.6)
8-32 Machine Screw on
Contact Terminals (6 Places)
0.218
(5.5)
Dia.
0.56
(4.3)
3
0.230 (5.8)
Square Hole
3
2.25
(58.7)
Max.
3
3.55
(90.1)
1.87 (47.5)
0.38
(9.5)
2.50 (63.5)
1.62
(41.1)
3
0.159 (4) Dia.
10-32 Tap
Typ. 4 Places
3
4.50
(114.3)
3.12 (79.2) Max.
6-32
Machine Screw
on Coil
Terminals
(2 Places)
3
5.63
(142.9)
0.136 (3.4) Dia.
8-32 Tap
Typ. 2 Places
0.50
(2.7)
3
3
9575H3 DPDT Relay with Auxiliary SPDT Switch
Mounting Holes 0.187 (4.75) Dia. (2 Places)
2.00
(50.8)
0.218 (5.5) Dia.
Typ. 2 Places
3.00
(76.2)
3
0.36 (9.1)
Typ. 2 Places
3
3
8-32 Machine Screw on
Contact Terminals (6 Places)
3
2.25
(58.7)
Max.
3
0.20
(5.1)
3
1.87 (47.5)
0.38
(9.5)
2.50 (63.5)
3
1.62
(41.1)
3.12 (79.2) Max.
3
6-32
Machine Screw
on Coil
Terminals
(2 Places)
3
3
NC
10A 1/4 hp 125 OR 250 Vac
0.4A at 125 Vdc, 0.2A at 250 Vdc
3A 125 Vac “LAMP”
278 VA 125/250 Vac P.D.
NO
COM
3
3
Mounting Holes (2)
AUX. SWITCH
MARKING SURFACE
3
Insulators
(2 Sides)
3
3
4.44 (112.7) Max.
Screw Terminals
(4-40) RHMS
with External
Tooth Lockwashers
(3 Places)
3
3
RELAY TOP VIEW
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-121
3.6
3
Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays
Contents
Solid-State Relays
Description
3
Page
Solid-State Relays
D93 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D96 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D99 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Product Overview
Catalog Number Selection
Solid-State Relays—D93, D96 and D99 Series
3
D93
3 25 A
M
D 2
3
3
Description
D93 = Hockey puck
D96 = Compact
D99 = DIN rail
3
3
Input Voltage
1 = 90–280 Vac
2 = 3–32 Vdc
3 = 3.5–32 Vdc
4 = 4–15 Vdc
5 = 20–50 Vdc
Output Voltage
1 = 2–60 Vdc
2 = 24–280 Vac 1
3 = 3–200 Vdc
4 = 48–480 Vac
6 = 48–600 Vac
3
3
Turn On Type
Z = Zero cross
R = Random
D = DC switch
3
Current
Output current in amps
3
3
Output Type
C = SCR
T = Triac
M = MOSFET
Contact Configuration
A = SPST-NO
B = SPST-NC
C = DPST-NO
D = DPST-NC
3
3
3
3
Note
1 For D96208ACZ3, output voltage is 3–150 Vdc.
3
3
3
V7-T3-122
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-123
V7-T3-130
V7-T3-135
Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays
3.6
Contents
D93 Series—Solid-State Relays
Description
Page
3
3
D93 Series
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D96 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D99 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V7-T3-124
V7-T3-124
V7-T3-125
V7-T3-129
V7-T3-130
V7-T3-135
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
D93 Series
Product Description
Application Description
Features and Benefits
Eaton’s D93 series of solidstate relays is a line of heavyduty industrial relays in the
common “hockey puck”
package. The removable,
finger-safe cover and optional
accessories make the D93
safe and easy to install in a
variety of applications.
A solid-state relay (SSR) can
perform many applications
that an electromechanical
relay can perform. The SSR
differs in that it has no
moving mechanical parts
within it and has some
distinct advantages over an
electromechanical relay.
●
Models are available in a
variety of input voltages and
switch types up to 75 A.
When used correctly in the
intended application, the SSR
provides a high degree of
reliability, a long service life,
significantly reduced
electromagnetic interference,
fast response and high
vibration resistance.
●
●
●
All solid-state circuitry with
no moving parts to wear
Compact, panel mounting
for flexible installation
Isolated input and output
terminals to protect the
system from electrical
noise
Internal snubber circuitry
to protect the SSR from
transients
Standards and Certifications
●
●
●
●
UL/cUL recognized—
UL 508
CSA certified
CE marked
RoHS compliant
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Applications for the SSR
typically include equipment
that requires high cycling
rates, low acoustical or
electrical noise, or high
vibration resistance. Some
examples are medical
equipment, heating/cooling
equipment, lighting control
and pumps/compressors,
among others.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-123
3.6
3
3
Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays
Product Selection
D93210ACZ1
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
D93 Series
Input Voltage
Output Voltage
Contact
Configuration
Switching Type
Rated Current
Load (Amps)
90–280 Vac
24–280 Vac
SPST-NO
Zero cross
10
D93210ACZ1
3–32 Vdc
24–280 Vac
SPST-NO
Zero cross
10
D93210ACZ2
3–32 Vdc
24–280 Vac
SPST-NO
Triac
10
D93210ATZ2
90–280 Vac
24–280 Vac
SPST-NO
Zero cross
25
D93225ACZ1
3–32 Vdc
24–280 Vac
SPST-NO
Zero cross
25
D93225ACZ2
D93225ATZ2
Catalog Number
3–32 Vdc
24–280 Vac
SPST-NO
Triac
25
90–280 Vac
24–280 Vac
SPST-NO
Zero cross
40
D93240ACZ1
3–32 Vdc
24–280 Vac
SPST-NO
Zero cross
40
D93240ACZ2
D93240ATZ2
3–32 Vdc
24–280 Vac
SPST-NO
Triac
40
90–280 Vac
24–280 Vac
SPST-NO
Zero cross
50
D93250ACZ1
3–32 Vdc
24–280 Vac
SPST-NO
Zero cross
50
D93250ACZ2
90–280 Vac
24–280 Vac
SPST-NO
Zero cross
75
D93275ACZ1
3–32 Vdc
24–280 Vac
SPST-NO
Zero cross
75
D93275ACZ2
3–32 Vdc
3–200 Vdc
SPST-NO
MOSFET
12
D93312AMD2
3–32 Vdc
3–200 Vdc
SPST-NO
MOSFET
25
D93325AMD2
3–32 Vdc
3–200 Vdc
SPST-NO
MOSFET
40
D93340AMD2
3
3
3
Accessories
D93HS1
3
3
3
D93 Series—Heat Sink
Eaton’s D93HS1 heat sink is
specifically designed to be
used with D93 solid-state
relays. It is pre-drilled and
tapped, and matches the heat
dissipation requirements for
relays up to 50 A.
Heat Sink Accessory
3
3
Description
Catalog
Number
Heat sink
D93HS1
D93TP1
D93 Series—Thermal
Transfer Pad
The D93TP1 is a selfadhesive transfer pad
designed for use with
Eaton’s D93 solid-state
relays. When used properly,
it will adequately conduct the
heat to a heat sink without
the use of grease.
Note: Always ensure that all
details of the application are
considered when determining
heat dissipation requirements,
including ambient temperature.
The D93 relays must be firmly
mounted to the heat sink using a
suitable thermally conductive
grease or thermal transfer pad.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-124
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
3.6
Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays
Technical Data and Specifications
3
3
D93 Series
Description
Units
D93210ACZ1
D93210ACZ2
D93210ATZ2
D93225ACZ1
D93225ACZ2
D93225ATZ2
3
Contact configuration
SPST-NO
SPST-NO
SPST-NO
SPST-NO
SPST-NO
SPST-NO
3
Switching device
SCR
SCR
Triac
SCR
SCR
Triac
10
10
10
25
25
25
Zero cross
Zero cross
Zero cross
Zero cross
Zero cross
Zero cross
200
250
700
500
500
250
Output Characteristics
Current rating
A
Switching type
Maximum rate of rise off state voltage (DV/DT)
V/us
Incandescent lamp ampere rating (rms)
A
8
16
16
16
16
16
Motor load rating (rms)
A
4.5
8
8
8
8
8
Min. load current to maintain on
mA
50
120
250
120
120
120
Non-repetitive surge current (1 cycle)
A
83
250
1000
250
250
250
Max. rms overload current (1 second)
A
24
80
50
40
40
80
3
3
3
3
3
Max. off state leakage current (rms)
mA
8
10
10
8
10
10
Peak blocking voltage
Vpk
600
300
—
600
600
—
Typical on state voltage drop (rms)
Vac
1.6
1.6
1.35
1.6
1.6
1.6
Max. on state voltage drop (rms)
Vac
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
72
300
1700
312
250
300
3
3
Max. I2t for fusing (A2)
3
3
Input Characteristics
Must release voltage
V
10 AC
1 DC
10 AC
10 AC
1 DC
1 DC
Typical input impedance
ohms
13k
Current regulator
16–25k
13k
Current regulator
1.5k
Nominal input current at 5 Vdc or 240 Vac
mA
20
2
12
20
16
2
NA
Yes
NA
NA
Yes
Yes
Reverse polarity protection
3
3
Performance Characteristics
3
Operating time (response time)
ON
ms
8.3
8.3
8.3
8.3
8.3
8.3
OFF
ms
8.3
8.3
8.3
8.3
8.3
8.3
Rated insulation voltage—input to input
Vac
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
Dielectric strength—terminal to chassis
Vac
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
UR, CSA, CE
UR, CSA, CE
UR, CSA, CE
UR, CSA, CE
UR, CSA, CE
UR, CSA, CE
3
3
3
Environment
Product certifications
Ambient air temperature
3
Storage
°C
–40 to 100
–40 to 100
–40 to 100
–40 to 100
–40 to 100
–40 to 100
Operating
°C
–40 to 80
–40 to 80
–40 to 80
–40 to 80
–40 to 80
–40 to 80
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
3
3
Degree of protection
3
Miscellaneous Characteristics
Thermal resistance (junction to case)
°C/W
3.5
3.5
1.45
1.02
1.02
1.45
Weight
g (oz)
100 (3.5)
100 (3.5)
100 (3.5)
100 (3.5)
100 (3.5)
100 (3.5)
Green
Green
Green
Green
Green
Green
LED—input
Input terminals
M3.5
M3.5
M3.5
M3.5
M3.5
M3.5
Output terminals
M4
M4
M4
M4
M4
M4
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
Terminal torque (max.)
Nm
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-125
3.6
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays
D93 Series, continued
Description
Units
D93240ACZ1
D93240ACZ2
D93240ATZ2
D93250ACZ1
D93250ACZ2
Output Characteristics
Contact configuration
SPST-NO
SPST-NO
SPST-NO
SPST-NO
SPST-NO
Switching device
SCR
SCR
Triac
SCR
SCR
Current rating
A
Switching type
40
40
40
50
50
Zero cross
Zero cross
Zero cross
Zero cross
Zero cross
Maximum rate of rise off state voltage (DV/DT)
V/us
500
500
250
500
500
Incandescent lamp ampere rating (rms)
A
30
30
20
39
39
Motor load rating (rms)
A
14
14
14
14
14
Min. load current to maintain on
mA
250
250
50
250
250
Non-repetitive surge current (1 cycle)
A
625
625
250
520
520
Max. rms overload current (1 second)
A
80
80
80
100
100
Max. off state leakage current (rms)
mA
10
10
10
10
8
Peak blocking voltage
Vpk
600
600
600
600
600
Typical on state voltage drop (rms)
Vac
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.1
1.8
Max. on state voltage drop (rms)
Vac
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.8
1.8
1250
1250
438
1250
1250
1 DC
Max. I2t for fusing (A2)
Input Characteristics
3
Must release voltage
V
10 AC
1 DC
1 DC
10 AC
Typical input impedance
ohms
13k
ACL
1.5k
13k
Current regulator
3
Nominal input current at 5 Vdc or 240 Vac
mA
20
16
2
20
16
N/A
Yes
Yes
NA
Yes
Reverse polarity protection
3
3
3
3
Performance Characteristics
Operating time (response time)
ON
ms
8.3
8.3
8.3
8.3
8.3
OFF
ms
8.3
8.3
8.3
8.3
8.3
Rated insulation voltage—input to input
Vac
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
Dielectric strength—terminal to chassis
Vac
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
UR, CSA, CE
UR, CSA, CE
UR, CSA, CE
UR, CSA, CE
UR, CSA, CE
Environment
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Product certifications
Ambient air temperature
Storage
°C
–40 to 100
–40 to 100
–40 to 100
–40 to 100
–40 to 100
Operating
°C
–40 to 80
–40 to 80
–40 to 80
–40 to 80
–40 to 80
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
Degree of protection
Miscellaneous Characteristics
Thermal resistance (junction to case)
°C/W
0.9
0.9
0.95
0.63
0.63
Weight
g (oz)
100
100
100
135 (4.8)
135 (4.8)
LED—input
Green
Green
Green
Green
Green
Input terminals
M3.5
M3.5
M3.5
M3.5
M3.5
M6
M6
M6
M6
M6
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
Output terminals
Terminal torque (max.)
Nm
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-126
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
3.6
Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays
D93 Series, continued
Description
Units
D93275ACZ1
D93275ACZ2
D93312AMD2
D93325AMD2
D93340AMD2
SPST-NO
SPST-NO
SPST-NO
SPST-NO
SPST-NO
3
Output Characteristics
Contact configuration
Switching device
Current rating
3
A
Switching type
SCR
SCR
MOSFET
MOSFET
MOSFET
75
75
12
25
40
Zero cross
Zero cross
DC switching
DC switching
DC switching
Maximum rate of rise off state voltage (DV/DT)
V/us
500
500
NA
NA
NA
Incandescent lamp ampere rating (rms)
A
39
39
NA
NA
NA
Motor load rating (rms)
A
25
25
NA
NA
NA
Min. load current to maintain on
mA
250
250
20
20
20
Non-repetitive surge current (1 cycle)
A
1150
1150
27
50
90
Max. rms overload current (1 second)
A
150
150
NA
NA
NA
Max. off state leakage current (rms)
mA
10
10
8
8
8
Peak blocking voltage
Vpk
600
600
—
—
—
Typical on state voltage drop (rms)
Vac
1.8
1.8
1.6
1.6
1.6
Max. on state voltage drop (rms)
Vac
Max. I2t for fusing (A2)
1.8
1.8
2.83
2.83
2.83
5000
5000
NA
NA
NA
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Input Characteristics
Must release voltage
V
10 AC
1 DC
1 DC
1 DC
1 DC
Typical input impedance
ohms
13k
Current regulator
1k
1k
1k
Nominal input current at 5 Vdc or 240 Vac
mA
Reverse polarity protection
20
16
10
10
10
NA
Yes
No
No
No
3
3
3
Performance Characteristics
Operating time (response time)
3
ON
ms
8.3
8.3
300 μs
600 μs
600 μs
OFF
ms
8.3
8.3
1
2.6
2.6
Rated insulation voltage—input to input
Vac
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
Dielectric strength—terminal to chassis
Vac
4000
4000
2500
2500
2500
3
UR, CSA, CE
UR, CSA, CE
UR, CSA, CE
UR, CSA, CE
UR, CSA, CE
3
–40 to 100
–40 to 100
–40 to 100
–40 to 100
–40 to 100
3
3
Environment
Product certifications
Ambient air temperature
Storage
°C
Operating
°C
Degree of protection
–40 to 80
–40 to 80
–40 to 80
–40 to 80
–40 to 80
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
3
3
Miscellaneous Characteristics
Thermal resistance (junction to case)
°C/W
0.6
0.63
1.06
1.06
0.63
Weight
g (oz)
200
135 (4.8)
110 (3.9)
110 (3.9)
135 (4.8)
LED—input
Green
Green
Green
Green
Green
Input terminals
M3.5
M3.5
M3.5
M3.5
M3.5
M6
M6
M4
M4
M6
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
Output terminals
Terminal torque (max.)
Nm
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-127
3.6
Temperature Derating Curves
10 Amp Styles
3
3
3
90
6" x 6" x 1/8" aluminum plate
14
Load Current (amps rms)
3
40 and 50 Amp Styles
16
3
3
Solid-State Relays
12
Heat sink
with 1°C/W
thermal
resistance
10
8
6
4
Free air mounting
0.14°C/W (50A)
50
5" x 6" x 1/8"
aluminum plate
40
30
20
0
0
20°
3
70
10
2
3
Mounted on heat sink with
1°C/W thermal resistance
80
Load Current (amps rms)
3
Control Relays and Timers
40°
60°
80°
20°
100°
40°
60°
80°
100°
Max. Ambient Temperature (°C)
Max. Ambient Temperature (°C)
3
25 Amp Styles
40
3
3
3
3
35
Load Current (amps rms)
3
75
Mounted on heat sink with
1°C/W thermal resistance
(sink to ambient)
90
30
25
20
15
5" x 6" x 1/8"
aluminum
plate
10
1.5°C/W
60
5" x 6" x 1/8"
aluminum plate
45
95
100
0.14°C/W
40
105
30
20
110
10
5
0
20°
40°
60°
80°
Max. Ambient Temperature (°C)
3
100°
0°
50° 60° 70° 80°
Max. Ambient Temperature (°C)
10° 20° 30° 40°
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-128
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
Max. Allowable Temperature
3
3
75 Amp Styles
Load Current (amps rms)
3
Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays
3.6
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
3
D93 Series
3
2.28
(57.9)
3
Screw Terminals
0.66
(16.8)
3
0.18
(4.4)
0.6
(15.1)
3
1.74
(44.1)
3
3
1.87
(47.5)
1.4
(35.9)
3
3
3
2.28
(57.9)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-129
3.6
3
Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays
Contents
D96 Series—Solid-State Relays
Description
3
3
Page
D93 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D96 Series
V7-T3-123
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V7-T3-131
V7-T3-132
V7-T3-134
V7-T3-135
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D99 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
D96 Series
3
Product Description
Application Description
Features and Benefits
Eaton’s D96 series of
solid-state relays is a
technologically advanced set
of electronic relays for tough
applications and harsh
environments. The compact
17.5 mm wide package
with an integrated heat sink
provides easy mounting
in tight spaces.
A solid-state relay (SSR) can
perform many applications
that an electromechanical
relay can perform. The SSR
differs in that it has no
moving mechanical parts
within it and has some
distinct advantages over an
electromechanical relay.
●
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
When used correctly in the
intended application, the SSR
provides a high degree of
reliability, a long service life,
significantly reduced
electromagnetic interference,
fast response and high
vibration resistance.
●
●
●
●
All solid-state circuitry has
no moving parts to wear
Integral heat sink
eliminates the need for
added accessories and
installation
Flexible mounting allows
DIN rail or panel mounting
without additional
hardware or tools
Isolated input and output
terminals protect the
system from electrical
noise
Internal snubber circuitry
protects the SSR from
transients
Standards and Certifications
●
●
●
●
UL/cUL listed—UL 508
CSA certified
CE marked
RoHS compliant
Applications for the SSR
typically include equipment
that requires high cycling
rates, low acoustical or
electrical noise, or high
vibration resistance. Some
examples are medical
equipment, heating/cooling
equipment, lighting control
and pumps/compressors,
among others.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-130
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays
3.6
Product Selection
D96115ACZ3
3
D96 Series
3
Input Voltage
Output Voltage
Contact
Configuration
Switching Type
Rated Current
Load (Amps)
3.5–32 Vdc
3–50 Vdc
SPST-NO
DC switch
15
D96115ACZ3
3.5–32 Vdc
3–150 Vdc
SPST-NO
DC switch
8
D96208ACZ3
90–280 Vac
24–280 Vac
SPST-NO
Random
10
D96210ACR1
3–32 Vdc
24–280 Vac
SPST-NO
Random
10
D96210ACR2
90–280 Vac
24–280 Vac
SPST-NO
Zero cross
10
D96210ACZ1
3–32 Vdc
24–280 Vac
SPST-NO
Zero cross
10
D96210ACZ2
Catalog Number
3–32 Vdc
24–280 Vac
SPST-NC
Random
10
D96210BCR2
90–280 Vac
48–480 Vac
SPST-NO
Random
10
D96410ACR1
3–32 Vdc
48–480 Vac
SPST-NO
Random
10
D96410ACR2
90–280 Vac
48–480 Vac
SPST-NO
Zero cross
10
D96410ACZ1
3–32 Vdc
48–480 Vac
SPST-NO
Zero cross
10
D96410ACZ2
90–280 Vac
48–600 Vac
SPST-NO
Random
10
D96610ACR1
90–280 Vac
48–600 Vac
SPST-NO
Zero cross
10
D96610ACZ1
3–32 Vdc
48–600 Vac
SPST-NO
Zero cross
10
D96610ACZ2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-131
3.6
3
3
Solid-State Relays
Technical Data and Specifications
D96 Series
3
Description
3
Contact configuration
Switching device
3
Control Relays and Timers
Units
D96210ACZ1
D96210ACZ2
D96210ACR1
D96210ACR2
D96115ACZ3
D96208ACZ3
D96210BCR2
SPST-NO
SPST-NO
SPST-NO
SPST-NO
SPST-NO
SPST-NO
SPST-NC
SCR
SCR
SCR
SCR
MOSFET
MOSFET
SCR
10
10
10
10
15
8
10
Zero cross
Zero cross
Random turn on
Random turn on
DC switching
DC switching
Random turn on
Output Characteristics
Current rating
A
3
Switching type
Maximum zero turn-on voltage (Vpk)
V
35
35
35
35
NA
NA
35
3
Maximum rate of rise off state voltage (DV/DT)
V/us
500
500
500
500
NA
NA
500
3
3
3
3
3
3
Incandescent lamp ampere rating (rms)
A
8
8
8
8
NA
NA
8
Motor load rating (rms)
A
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
NA
NA
4.5
Min. load current to maintain on
mA
50
50
50
50
20
20
50
Non-repetitive surge current (1 cycle)
A
500
500
500
500
50
35
500
Max. rms overload current (1 second)
A
24
24
24
24
24
17
24
Max. off state leakage current (rms)
mA
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Typical on state voltage drop (rms)
V
1.25 AC
1.25 AC
1.25 AC
1.25 AC
1.25 DC
1.25 DC
1.25 AC
Max. on state voltage drop (rms)
V
1.6 AC
1.6 AC
1.6 AC
1.6 AC
1.6 DC
1.6 DC
1.6 AC
1250
1250
1250
1250
NA
NA
1250
10 AC
1 DC
1 DC
Max. I2t for fusing (A2)
Input Characteristics
Must release voltage
V
10 AC
1 DC
1 DC
1 DC
3
Typical input impedance
ohms
16–25k
Current regulator 16–25k
ACL
Current regulator Current regulator ACL
Nominal input current at 5 Vdc or 240 Vac
mA
12
16
12
16
12
12
12
3
Reverse polarity protection
NA
Yes
NA
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Performance Characteristics
Operating time (response time)
ON
ms
40
8.3
8.3
8.3
5
5
8.3
OFF
ms
80
8.3
8.3
8.3
5
5
8.3
Rated insulation voltage—input to input
Vac
2500
2500
4000
4000
2500
2500
4000
Dielectric strength—terminal to chassis
Vac
2500
2500
2500
2500
2500
2500
2500
UL, CSA, CE
UL, CSA, CE
UL, CSA, CE
UL, CSA, CE
UL, CSA, CE
UL, CSA, CE
UL, CSA, CE
–40 to 100
–40 to 100
–40 to 100
–40 to 100
–40 to 100
–40 to 100
–40 to 100
Environment
Product certifications
Ambient air temperature
Storage
°C
Operating
°C
Degree of protection
–30 to 80
–30 to 80
–30 to 80
–30 to 80
–30 to 80
–30 to 80
–30 to 80
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
Miscellaneous Characteristics
3
3
Thermal resistance (junction to case)
°C/W
0.66
0.66
0.66
0.66
0.66
0.66
0.66
Integral heat sink
°C/W
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
Weight
g (oz)
127 (4.1)
127 (4.1)
127 (4.1)
127 (4.1)
127 (4.1)
127 (4.1)
127 (4.1)
Green
Green
Green
Green
Green
Green
Green
3
LED—input
Terminal wire capacity
AWG (mm2) 14 (2.1)
14 (2.1)
14 (2.1)
14 (2.1)
14 (2.1)
14 (2.1)
14 (2.1)
3
Terminal torque (max.)
in-lb (Nm)
7.1 (0.8)
7.1 (0.8)
7.1 (0.8)
7.1 (0.8)
7.1 (0.8)
7.1 (0.8)
7.1 (0.8)
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-132
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
3.6
Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays
Temperature Derating Curves
3
15 Amp Style
35
24
3
30
18
3
15
3
12
3
Current (amps DC)
Load Current (amps rms)
8 Amp Style
25
20
15
9
10
8
6
5
3
1.5
0
0°
10°
20°
30°
40°
50°
60°
70°
85°
80° 90°
Max. Ambient Temperature (°C)
3
3
3
0
0°
10°
20°
30°
40°
50°
60°
70°
80°
90°
3
Ambient Temperature (°C)
3
3
Load Current (amps rms)
10 Amp Style
14
3
12
3
10
3
8
3
6
3
4
3
1.8 2
3
0
0°
10°
20°
30°
40°
50°
60°
70°
80°
90°
3
Max. Ambient Temperature (°C)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-133
3.6
3
Dimensions
3
D96 Series
3
0.69
(17.6)
3
0.20
(5.0)
Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
0.20
(5.0)
0.07
(1.7)
3
3
0.56
(14.2)
3
3.54
(90.0)
1.78
(45.3)
3
1.40
(35.6)
3.64
(92.4)
2.63
(66.8)
3
1.39
(35.2)
3
3
3
0.27
(6.9)
3
0.63
(16.0)
1.36
(34.6)
0.13
(3.4)
0.56
(14.3)
2.56 Max.
(65.0)
3
0.24
(6.0)
3
3
0.62
(15.8)
0.55
(14.9)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-134
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays
3.6
Contents
D99 Series—Solid-State Relays
Description
Page
D93 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D96 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D99 Series
V7-T3-123
V7-T3-130
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V7-T3-136
V7-T3-137
V7-T3-140
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
D99 Series
Product Description
Application Description
Features and Benefits
Eaton’s D99 series of solidstate relays is a line of
heavy-duty industrial relays
with an integrated heat sink.
The attached metal hardware
can be used for DIN rail or
panel mounting.
A solid-state relay (SSR) can
perform many applications
that an electromechanical
relay can perform. The SSR
differs in that it has no
moving mechanical parts
within it and has some
distinct advantages over an
electromechanical relay.
●
Models are available in a
variety of input voltages in
10 A, 25 A and 40 A sizes.
When used correctly in the
intended application, the SSR
provides a high degree of
reliability, a long service life,
significantly reduced
electromagnetic interference,
fast response and high
vibration resistance.
●
●
●
●
All solid-state circuitry has
no moving parts to wear
Integral heat sink
eliminates the need for
added accessories and
installation
Flexible mounting allows
DIN rail or panel mounting
without additional
hardware or tools
Isolated input and output
terminals protect the
system from electrical
noise
Internal snubber circuitry
protects the SSR from
transients
Standards and Certifications
●
●
●
●
UL/cUL listed—UL 508
CSA certified
CE marked
RoHS compliant
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Applications for the SSR
typically include equipment
that requires high cycling
rates, low acoustical or
electrical noise, or high
vibration resistance. Some
examples are medical
equipment, heating/cooling
equipment, lighting control
and pumps/compressors,
among others.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-135
3.6
3
3
Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays
Product Selection
D99210ACZ1
3
3
3
D99 Series
Input Voltage
Output Voltage
Contact
Configuration
Switching Type
Rated Current
Load (Amps)
Catalog Number
90–280 Vac
24–280 Vac
SPST-NO
Zero cross
10
D99210ACZ1
3–32 Vdc
24–280 Vac
SPST-NO
Zero cross
10
D99210ACZ2
90–280 Vac
24–280 Vac
SPST-NO
Zero cross
25
D99225ACZ1
3–32 Vdc
24–280 Vac
SPST-NO
Zero cross
25
D99225ACZ2
90–280 Vac
24–280 Vac
SPST-NO
Zero cross
40
D99240ACZ1
3–32 Vdc
24–280 Vac
SPST-NO
Zero cross
40
D99240ACZ2
3
90–280 Vac
48–600 Vac
SPST-NO
Zero cross
10
D99610ACZ1
3–32 Vdc
48–600 Vac
SPST-NO
Zero cross
10
D99610ACZ2
3
90–280 Vac
48–600 Vac
SPST-NO
Zero cross
25
D99625ACZ1
3–32 Vdc
48–600 Vac
SPST-NO
Zero cross
25
D99625ACZ2
90–280 Vac
48–600 Vac
SPST-NO
Zero cross
40
D99640ACZ1
3–32 Vdc
48–600 Vac
SPST-NO
Zero cross
40
D99640ACZ2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-136
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
3.6
Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays
Technical Data and Specifications
3
3
D99 Series
Description
Units
D99210ACZ1
D99210ACZ2
D99225ACZ1
D99225ACZ2
D99240ACZ1
D99240ACZ2
3
Contact configuration
SPST-NO
Switching device
SCR
SPST-NO
SPST-NO
SPST-NO
SPST-NO
SPST-NO
3
SCR
SCR
SCR
SCR
SCR
10
10
25
25
40
40
Zero cross
Zero cross
Zero cross
Zero cross
Zero cross
Zero cross
35
35
35
35
35
35
Output Characteristics
Current rating
A
Switching type
Maximum zero turn-on voltage (Vpk)
V
Maximum rate of rise off state voltage (DV/DT)
V/us
500
200
500
500
500
500
Incandescent lamp ampere rating (rms)
A
8
8
16
16
20
20
Motor load rating (rms)
A
4.5
4.5
8
8
14
14
Min. load current to maintain on
mA
50
50
120
120
250
250
Non-repetitive surge current (1 cycle)
A
83
83
800
800
800
800
3
3
3
3
3
Max. rms overload current (1 second)
A
24
24
40
40
100
100
Max. off state leakage current (rms)
mA
10
10
10
10
10
10
Typical on state voltage drop (rms)
Vac
1.25
1.25
1.35
1.35
1.6
1.6
Max. on state voltage drop (rms)
Vac
1.6
1.6
1.8
1.8
1.6
1.6
83
83
3700
3700
3700
83
3
3
Max. I2t for fusing (A2)
3
3
Input Characteristics
Must release voltage
V
10 AC
1 DC
10 AC
1 DC
10 AC
1 DC
Typical input impedance
ohms
16–25k
Current regulator
16–25k
Current regulator
13k
Current regulator
Nominal input current at 5 Vdc or 240 Vac
mA
12
12
12
12
16
16
NA
Yes
NA
Yes
NA
Yes
Reverse polarity protection
3
3
Performance Characteristics
3
Operating time (response time)
ON
ms
8.3
8.3
8.3
8.3
8.3
10
OFF
ms
8.3
8.3
8.3
8.3
8.3
10
Rated insulation voltage—input to input
Vac
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
Dielectric strength—terminal to chassis
Vac
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
UL, CSA, CE
UL, CSA, CE
UL, CSA, CE
UL, CSA, CE
UL, CSA, CE
UL, CSA, CE
3
3
3
Environment
Product certifications
Ambient air temperature
3
Storage
°C
–40 to 100
–40 to 100
–40 to 100
–40 to 100
–40 to 100
–40 to 100
Operating
°C
–30 to 80
–30 to 80
–30 to 80
–30 to 80
–30 to 80
–30 to 80
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
3
3
Degree of protection
3
Miscellaneous Characteristics
Thermal resistance (junction to case)
°C/W
1.5
1.5
1.5
0.43
1.5
0.43
Integral heat sink
°C/W
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2
Weight
g (oz)
320 (11.3)
320 (11.3)
320 (11.3)
326 (11.5)
320 (11.3)
332 (11.7)
LED—input
Green
Green
Green
Green
Green
Green
Terminal wire capacity
AWG (mm2) 8 (10)
8 (10)
8 (10)
8 (10)
8 (10)
8 (10)
Terminal torque (max.)
in-lb (Nm)
12.5 (1.4)
12.5 (1.4)
12.5 (1.4)
12.5 (1.4)
12.5 (1.4)
12.5 (1.4)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-137
3.6
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays
D99 Series, continued
Description
Units
D99610ACZ1
D99610ACZ2
D99625ACZ1
D99625ACZ2
D99640ACZ1
D99640ACZ2
Contact configuration
SPST-NO
Switching device
SCR
SPST-NO
SPST-NO
SPST-NO
SPST-NO
SPST-NO
SCR
SCR
SCR
SCR
SCR
10
10
25
10
40
40
Zero cross
Zero cross
Zero cross
Zero cross
Zero cross
Zero cross
Output Characteristics
Current rating
A
Switching type
Maximum zero turn-on voltage (Vpk)
V
35
35
35
35
35
35
Maximum rate of rise off state voltage (DV/DT)
V/us
200
200
700
700
500
500
Incandescent lamp ampere rating (rms)
A
8
8
16
16
20
20
Motor load rating (rms)
A
4.5
4.5
8
8
14
14
Min. load current to maintain on
mA
80
80
250
250
250
250
Non-repetitive surge current (1 cycle)
A
83
83
1000
1000
800
800
Max. rms overload current (1 second)
A
24
24
50
50
100
100
3
Max. off state leakage current (rms)
mA
10
10
10
10
10
10
Typical on state voltage drop (rms)
Vac
1.25
1.25
1.35
1.35
1.6
1.6
3
Max. on state voltage drop (rms)
Vac
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
83
83
1700
1700
3700
3700
3
Max. I2t for fusing (A2)
Input Characteristics
3
Must release voltage
V
10 AC
1 DC
10 AC
1 DC
10 AC
1 DC
Typical input impedance
ohms
16–25k
Current regulator
16–25k
Current regulator
13k
Current regulator
3
Nominal input current at 5 Vdc or 240 Vac
mA
12
16
12
16
16
16
NA
Yes
NA
Yes
NA
Yes
Reverse polarity protection
3
3
3
3
Performance Characteristics
Operating time (response time)
ON
ms
8.33
8.3
8.33
8.3
10
10
OFF
ms
8.33
8.3
8.33
8.3
10
10
Rated insulation voltage—input to input
Vac
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
Dielectric strength—terminal to chassis
Vac
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
UL, CSA, CE
UL, CSA, CE
UL, CSA, CE
UL, CSA, CE
UL, CSA, CE
UL, CSA, CE
Environment
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Product certifications
Ambient air temperature
Storage
°C
–40 to 100
–40 to 100
–40 to 100
–40 to 100
–40 to 100
–40 to 100
Operating
°C
–30 to 80
–30 to 80
–30 to 80
–30 to 80
–30 to 80
–30 to 80
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
Degree of protection
Miscellaneous Characteristics
Thermal resistance (junction to case)
°C/W
1.8
1.8
0.43
0.43
0.43
0.43
Integral heat sink
°C/W
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2
Weight
g (oz)
320 (11.3)
321 (11.3)
326 (11.5)
326 (11.5)
332 (11.7)
332 (11.7)
Green
Green
Green
Green
Green
Green
Terminal wire capacity
AWG (mm2) 8 (10)
9 (10)
8 (10)
8 (10)
8 (10)
8 (10)
Terminal torque (max.)
in-lb (Nm)
12.5 (1.4)
12.5 (1.4)
12.5 (1.4)
12.5 (1.4)
12.5 (1.4)
LED—input
12.5 (1.4)
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-138
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
3.6
Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays
Temperature Derating Curves
3
40 Amp Styles
12
40
3
10
30
3
25
3
20
3
Current in amps
Current in amps
10 Amp Styles
8
6
4
15
2
10
0
0
0°
10°
20°
30°
40°
50°
60°
70°
80°
90°
Ambient Temperature (°C)
3
3
0°
10°
20°
30°
40°
50°
60°
70°
80°
3
90°
Ambient Temperature (°C)
3
3
25 Amp Styles
Current in amps
3
25
3
20
3
15
3
10
3
5
3
0
0°
10°
20°
30°
40°
50°
60°
70°
80°
3
90°
Ambient Temperature (°C)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-139
3.6
3
Dimensions
3
D99 Series
Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays
Output
–
3
2
Input
3
+
1
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
3
3.20
(80.0)
3
1.20
(30.0)
3
1.20
(30.0)
3
3
3
0.05
(1.20)
4.20
(107.0)
3
3
3
3
3.10
(77.5)
0.20 (5.0)
Radius
3
3
0.20 (5.0)
Radius
0.50 (11.9)
3
3
3.70
(92.9)
3
4.00
(102.0)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-140
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays
3.7
Contents
Machine Tool Relays
Description
Machine Tool Relays
D15 Series—Freedom 600 V Multipole . . . . . .
BF/BFD Series—Fixed Contact
Industrial Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AR/ARD Series—Convertible Contact
Industrial Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D26 Series—Type M, 600 Vac Multipole
with Convertible Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D26 Series—Type M, DC Multipole
with Convertible Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
3
3
V7-T3-142
3
V7-T3-147
3
V7-T3-153
V7-T3-158
V7-T3-163
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Product Overview
Eaton’s machine tool relay
offering includes a variety of
NEMA type relays. Included
in this are open style relays
and relays with convertible
or side-mount contacts. Also
included in this family are a
variety of accessories to
match the application,
including suppressors, timing
contacts and enclosures. The
relay coils are available in a
variety of line and control
level voltages.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-141
3.7
3
Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays
Contents
D15 Series—Freedom 600 V Multipole
Description
3
Page
D15 Series—Freedom 600 V Multipole
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BF/BFD Series—Fixed Contact
Industrial Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AR/ARD Series—Convertible Contact
Industrial Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D26 Series—Type M, 600 Vac Multipole
with Convertible Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D26 Series—Type M, DC Multipole
with Convertible Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-143
V7-T3-144
V7-T3-145
V7-T3-146
V7-T3-147
V7-T3-153
V7-T3-158
V7-T3-163
3
3
3
D15 Series—Freedom 600 V Multipole
3
Product Description
Application Description
Features and Benefits
Contact poles on the D15
relay are of the fixed design
and are not convertible. The
basic four-pole relay will
accept a front-mounted
contact pole deck and/or sidemounted contact blocks (one
per side). In addition, a sidemounted solid-state timer or
a front-mounted pneumatic
timer can be added to the
relay. Only one frontmounted attachment can be
added to the basic relay.
Side-mounted contact
blocks can be used to
provide additional poles
in applications where a
pneumatic timer is installed
on the front of the relay.
They can also be used where
panel depth is restricted.
●
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
The maximum number of
contacts recommended per
relay is eight, six of which can
be NC. When a pneumatic
timer is used, the maximum
recommended number of
NC contacts is three.
Relays with DC coils are
supplied with a coil clearing
NC contact mounted on the
side of the relay.
3
3
●
●
●
●
600 V, 10 A continuous
thermal current
State indicator visually
shows relay ON or OFF
status
Relay base has mounting
holes on 35 x 60 mm
centers, permitting direct
replacement of
competitive relays
Relay also mounts on
35 mm DIN rail as standard
Magnet coil has three
terminals, permitting either
top or diagonal wiring—
easy to replace European
or U.S. relays without
changing wiring layout
●
●
Contact pole terminals
have captive, backed-out,
self-lifting pressure plates
with ± screws—reduced
wiring time
All terminals are shrouded
or “finger-proofed” to
reduce possibility of
electrical shock
Standards and Certifications
●
●
UL
CSA certified
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-142
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays
3.7
Product Selection
3
When Ordering, Specify
Catalog number and magnet coil code letter. Example: For a four-pole relay having
4NO contacts with a 120 V 60 Hz coil, order Catalog Number D15CR40AB.
3
3
Factory-Assembled Multipole Relays
D15CR40_B
Number of
Poles
Type of Contacts
Open Type
NO
NC
Catalog Number 1
4
4
0
D15CR40_B
3
1
D15CR31_B
2
2
D15CR22_B
1
3
D15CR13_B
0
4
D15CR04_B
3
3
3
3
3
D15CR60_B
D15CR80_B
6
(four-pole relay with two-pole
front-mounted deck)
8
(four-pole relay with four-pole
front-mounted deck)
6
0
D15CR60_B
5
1
D15CR51_B
4
2
D15CR42_B
3
3
D15CR33_B
2
4
D15CR24_B
1
5
D15CR15_B 2
0
6
D15CR06_B 2
8
0
D15CR80_B
7
1
D15CR71_B
6
2
D15CR62_B
5
3
D15CR53_B
4
4
D15CR44_B
3
5
D15CR35_B 2
2
6
D15CR26_B 2
Additional Contact Poles
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Magnet Coil Selection
Catalog
Number
Description
3
Front Contact Pole Deck
AC Coils
Volts and Hertz
Code
Suffix
DC Coils
Volts
Code
Suffix
120/60 or 110/50
A
12
R1
3
3
1NO-1NC
C320KGT3
240/60 or 220/50
B
24
T1
2NO
C320KGT4
480/60 or 440/50
C
48
W1
2NC
C320KGT5
600/60 or 550/50
D
120
A1
1NO (early closing)–1NC (late opening)
C320KGT7
208/60
E
4NO
C320KGT13
277/60
H
3NO-1NC
C320KGT14
208–240/60
J
2NO-2NC
C320KGT15
24/60
T
1NO-3NC
C320KGT16
4NC
C320KGT17
3
1NO-1NC
C320KGS3
3
2NO
C320KGS4
2NC
C320KGS5
1NO (early closing)–1NC (late opening)
C320KGS7
3
3
3
3
Side-Mounted Contact Blocks
3
3
Notes
1 Underscore indicates missing code suffix for magnet coil—see Magnet Coil Selection table above.
2 Not all suffix codes available: consult Customer Support Center.
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-143
3.7
3
3
Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays
Accessories
C320 Pneumatic
Timer Attachment
3
3
Pneumatic Timer Attachment
C32MP1
Metal Mounting Plate
Timing Range
Catalog
Number
Description
Catalog
Number
0.1 to 30 seconds
C320TP1
Metal mounting plate
C321MP1
10 to 180 seconds
C320TP2
Maximum Ampere Ratings
3
Volts AC
3
3
3
3
3
240
480
600
30
15
7.5
6
Break
3
1.5
0.75
0.6
Application
Catalog
Number
D15
C320LS1
Snap-on shields for both
contactors and starters
provide IEC Type IP20
Finger Protection. Prevents
accidental contact with line/
load terminals.
3
Adhesive Dust Cover
3
Description
Catalog
Number
25 to a package
C320DSTCVR
3
3
3
3
These adhesive stickers
come 25 to a package and
provide extra protection from
contaminants when applied
to the sides of Freedom D15.
Adhesive covers are easily
Solid-State Timer
applied to side opening
where auxiliaries are not
installed and provide extra
protection from metal filings
and other debris.
Solid-State ON DELAY Timer 1
Timing Range
Catalog
Number 234
3
0.1 to 1.0 seconds
C320TDN1_
1 to 30 seconds
C320TDN30_
3
30 to 300 seconds
C320TDN300_
5 to 30 minutes
C320TDN3000_
3
3
3
3
3
3
This timer is designed to be
wired in series with the
load (typically a coil). When
the START button is pushed
(power applied to timer), the
ON delay timing function
starts. At the completion of
the set timing period, timer
and series wired load will
both be energized.
Fits all D15 multipole relays.
DIN Rail
timed contacts—circuits in
each pole must be the same
polarity. Units are convertible
from OFF to ON delay or
vice-versa.
Finger Protection Shields
3
3
120
Make
Attachment mounts on top of
any Freedom Series relay
(top-mounted auxiliary
contacts can not be installed
on device when timer is
used). Timer unit has DPST
3
3
Description
Mounting Channel (DIN Rail)
Description
Catalog
Number
1 meter length
XBANS3575P
Designed for DIN rail
mounting of Freedom
Series relays.
C320TS2
Transient Suppressor Kits
Coil Voltage
50/60 Hz 5
Catalog
Number
Transient
24/120 V
C320TS1
Suppressor
208/240 V
C320TS2
277/480 V
C320TS3
Description
These kits limit high voltage
transients produced in the
control circuit when power is
removed from the contactor
or starter coil. There are three
separate suppressors for use
on 24–120 V, 208–240 V or
27–480 V coils respectively.
These devices mount directly
to the coil terminals.
Notes
1 Side mounted on Freedom Series NEMA 00–2, D15, IECA-K and C25D, C25E and C25F frame.
2 Add operating voltage suffix to catalog number; A = 120 V, B = 240 V, E = 208 V.
3 Rated 0.5 ampere pilot duty—not to be used on larger contactors.
4 Terminal connections are quick connects only. Two per side.
5 Suppressor is compatible with coil voltages/ranges as shown, both 50 and 60 Hz.
3
3
V7-T3-144
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays
AC/DC Interface Module—
Controller Coil Voltage Ranges
C320DC
Controller Catalog
Number Prefix
Controller
Size or Rating
Coil Range
Volts AC
AE16, AE17, AE56,
AE57, CE15, CE55
A–F
24–240
G–K
48–240
AN16, AN56,
CN15, CN55
CN35
L–N
110–240
00–0
24–240
1–2
48–240
3
110–240
10–30 A
24–240
60 A
48–240
100 A
110–240
The Catalog Number C320DC
Interface Module is an
optically isolated solid-state
switch that provides a means
of operating AC coils with a
24 Vdc control signal. It acts
as a space-saving interposing
relay that can switch a
specified 50/60 Hz AC source
to the contactor or starter coil.
3.7
provisions for DIN rail
mounting.
3
The module will operate coils
within the voltage ranges
shown in the table to the left.
3
Design Characteristics
●
●
The module may be directly
attached to the coil terminals
of any Freedom Series
contactor or starter—NEMA
Sizes 00–3, D15, IEC Sizes
A–N and lighting contactors
10–100 A. It also has
●
DC input: 24 V ±10% at
mA nominal
AC operating voltage:
24–240 Vac ±10%
50/60 Hz
AC current rating:
10 A make (inrush),
1 A break (sealed)
3
3
3
3
3
Typical Application—Solid-State Switch
3
Contactor Coil
24 Vdc
Input
Observe
Polarity on
Module
3
3
24–240 Vac
50/60 Hz
3
3
3
Technical Data and Specifications
3
Example of Terminal Marking with 2NO and 2NC Contacts
Contact Ratings—NEMA A600
Continuous Thermal Rating: 10 A
3
Location
AC Volts
Make
Break
120
60
6.0
240
30
3.0
480
15
1.5
600
12
1.2
13
125
1.1
250
0.55
31
3
43
3
14
Continuous Thermal Rating: 5 A
Make/Break Amperes
21
3
Contact Ratings—NEMA P300
DC Volts
Status
(NO or NC)
Magnet Coil Data
AC
Voltage
Pickup
Sealed
VA
Watts
VA
Watts
12–600 V
80
49
7.5
2.4
DC
Voltage
Pickup
Amps
Watts
VA
Watts
12
6.4
76.8
0.28
3.36
24
3.2
76.8
0.14
3.36
48
1.6
76.8
0.07
3.36
120
0.64
76.8
0.028
3.36
22
32
44
Relay terminals are identified
by a two-digit number in
accordance with International
Standards approved by
CENELEC (European
Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization).
The number is marked on
the relay and is used to
identify location and status
of the contacts.
3
The first digit indicates the
location of the contact on the
relay. The numbering begins
with 1 and continues without
a break from left to right.
The second digit indicates
the status of the contacts
(NO or NC). Terminal marking
1 and 2 mean NC and 3 and
4 mean NO.
3
3
3
3
3
3
Sealed
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
V7-T3-145
3.7
Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays
3
Dimensions
3
D15 Four-Pole Relay
3
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
0.54
(13.7)
0.54
(13.7)
1.8
(45.7)
3
C
3
3
2.36
(59.9)
Frt.
Mtd.
Acc.
Side
Mtd.
Blk.
2.96
(75.2)
3
3
3
3
3
3
1.36
(34.5)
Optional Additional
Contact Poles
or Accessories
Mtg. Holes for
M4 or #8 Screws
D15 Six- and Eight-Pole Relays
0.54
(13.7)
0.54
(13.7)
1.8
(45.7)
3
4.66
(118.4)
3
3
2.36
(59.9)
Frt.
Mtd.
Acc.
Side
Mtd.
Blk.
2.96
(75.2)
3
3
3
1.36
(34.5)
Mtg. Holes for
M4 or #8 Screws
Optional Additional
Contact Poles
or Accessories
3
3
Dimensions and Shipping Weights
3
Description
Dimension C
Shipping Weights
Lbs (kg)
3
Relay only
3.30 (83.8)
1.3 (0.6)
Relay with timer attachment
5.55 (141.0)
1.5 (0.7)
3
Relay with front contact pole deck
4.66 (118.4)
1.7 (0.8)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
V7-T3-146
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays
BF/BFD Series—Fixed Contact Industrial Control
3.7
Contents
Description
D15 Series—Freedom 600 V Multipole . . . . . . . . .
BF/BFD Series—Fixed Contact Industrial
Control
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AR/ARD Series—Convertible Contact
Industrial Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D26 Series—Type M, 600 Vac Multipole
with Convertible Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D26 Series—Type M, DC Multipole
with Convertible Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
V7-T3-142
3
3
3
V7-T3-148
V7-T3-150
V7-T3-151
V7-T3-152
3
3
V7-T3-153
3
V7-T3-158
3
V7-T3-163
3
3
3
3
BF/BFD Series—Fixed Contact Industrial Control
Product Description
Type BF is AC operated,
300 V maximum, and the
BFD is DC operated, 250 V.
Fixed contact relays are
available in any combination
of NO and NC from two to 12
poles. BF and BFD relays
have captive clamp terminals
fully accessible from the
front, a molded coil